01.essentials of Russian Reading Conversation Grammar

ESSENTIALS of
Russian
READING^ CONVERSATION- GRAMMAR
THIRD EDITION
A. v. GRONICKA
Columbia University
H. BATES-YAKOBSON
George Washington University
PRENTICE-HALL, INC., Englewood Cliffs, N. J.

© 19-18, 1950, 1958, by
PRENTICE HALL, INC.
Englewood Cliffs, N. J.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS BOOK MAY

BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FORM, BY MIMEOGRAPH
OR ANY OTHER MEANS, WITHOUT PERMISSION
IN WRITING FROM THE PUBLISHERS.
Library of Congress
Catalog Card No.: 58-9831
First printing.June, 1958

Second printing.October, 1959
Third printing.March, 1959
Fourth printing.January, 1960
PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
28792-C
PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION
The third edition of Essentials of Russian has developed from
intensive use of the earlier editions for a whole decade by colleges
and universities throughout the United States and abroad, as well
as by the United States Armed Forces and by private study groups.
The basic organization and approach of this book have proved their
effectiveness and have been retained. Revisions have been limited
to the clarification of certain rules of grammar; a considerable
shortening of the Common Expressions and Idioms units, especially
those in the more advanced lessons; and the rewriting of four of
the less successful reading selections.
The new reading units offer a survey of Russia’s geography, a
biography of Anton Chekhov, an introduction to the development of
the Russian language, and a brief essay on the Russian Academy
of Sciences. These units, it is felt, are more timely and functional,
as well as better attuned to an “essentials” level, than were the
units they replace.
Further innovations in this edition are the expansion of the
introductory lessons on pronunciation; amplification of the Aspect
lesson, to provide a more gradual presentation of the basic features
of this central phase of the Russian verb system and to introduce
advanced materials that have proved essential for a well rounded
presentation of the conjugation of the Russian verb; addition of
numerous Review Reading and Vocabulary Building units; addition
of a second section to the Translation into Russian units, to afford
a more comprehensive review of vocabulary and a more intensive
drill on grammatical features; inclusion of a completely new Ap¬
pendix, which offers a selection of Russian poems, songs, proverbs,
and riddles; incorporation of numerous new key tables in the
original Grammar Appendix; and thorough revision and expansion
of the Index and the Russian-English and English-Russian Vocabu¬
laries at the end of the book.
The revisions, and especially the additions and expansions,
should hold the old and gain new friends for Essentials of Russian.
The authors wish to take this occasion to thank their many col¬
leagues for constructive contributions to the preparation of this new
edition. They are especially grateful to Professors Rufus W. Mathew-
son, Jr. of Columbia University and Edmund Zawacki, of the Univer¬
sity of Wisconsin and his fine staff for numerous suggestions which
have helped greatly to make Essentials of Russian a better book.
Finally, the authors wish to take this opportunity to express their
thanks to Hilde von Gronicka for her capable and patient assistance
in guiding three editions of the Essentials of Russian through the
press.
A. v. G.
H. B. Y.
v
PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION
This text is designed for classroom and individual instruction

but can also be used for self-teaching. It has grown out of the
authors’ experience gained in the Army Intensive Language Courses
and in subsequent experimental classes at colleges and universities.
Emphasis is placed throughout on conversation and reading. At the
same time a concise and systematic analysis of the Essentials of
Russian Grammar has been provided, in order to solidify and to
lend permanence to the results achieved by the direct approach.
The text is divided into thirty lessons preceded by two intro¬
ductory units which set forth the Russian printed and cursive letters
and give their approximate phonetic values. Each lesson is subdivided
into seven closely interrelated parts:
I: Common Expressions and Idioms

II.- Reading Exercise
III: Vocabulary
IV: Grammar
V: Questions
VI: Grammar Exercise
VII: Translation into Russian
The Reading Exercises (II) are the core around which each
lesson is organized. They contain all the new grammar and vocab¬
ulary introduced in each lesson. A basic principle of the text is to
introduce the student to all new material first in the context of the
Reading Exercise and only then have him turn to the explanation
and systematic treatment of the material given in the Grammar
section and the Vocabulary. Common Expressions, idioms, and
grammatical features introduced in the Reading Exercise for the
first time are given in bold type beginning with Lesson 2.
The Reading Exercises are carefully graded and lead the student
from the simple dialogue of the first lesson to selections from the
works of N. Nekrassov, L. Tolstoi, A. Pushkin, M. Gorki!, and N. Si¬
monov. They present living, idiomatic Russian speech of inherent
interest and functional value and develop in the student that feeling
for the language which is indispensable for freedom in conversation
and for reading enjoyment.
PREFACE vii
The Questions (V) are especially designed to develop and test

the student’s detailed knowledge of the Reading Exercises. The
student should strive to answer all questions in complete sentences,
freely referring to the Reading on which the questions are based.
The Common Expressions and Idioms (I) contribute that essent¬
ial quality of the Russian language which cannot be caught up and
studied in grammatical rules. They should be memorized and applied
in short conversations developed by the student with the help of the
teacher.
The Vocabulary (III) of the first fifteen lessons is limited to
between 20 and 30 words per lesson and in the subsequent lessons to
between 30 and 40. Thus the text is built up on a total vocabulary
not exceeding 1200 words.1 In spite of its rigid limitation in quantity,
this basic vocabulary is representative of the literary Russian
language, as well as of the everyday conversation idiom. The vocab¬
ulary of any one lesson is repeated in subsequent ones. Attention
is also called to the special treatment of the verb. Instead of
burdening the student with classifications, the authors give those
verbs which do not follow exactly the basic pattern of the first or
second conjugation (uHTaTb or roBOpHTb) in four “key” forms.
Thus the student is at once equipped with functionally useful verb-
forms and is enabled to derive other conjugational forms as the need
for them arises.2
The Grammar Sections (IV) introduce in concise, tabular form
essential grammatical elements. Their discussion should develop out of
the analysis of the Reading Exercise. They should never be treated
as an unrelated, theoretical unit.
The student’s active command of grammar is to be further
developed and tested with the help of the Grammar Exercises (VI).
These are keyed to the grammar units and utilize the newest peda¬
gogical devices to provide the student with the maximum of effective
practice.
The Translation Sentences (VII) serve as a final, overall review
of the entire lesson. They are constructed to include all the features
of the lesson from common expressions to grammatical detail. At the
same time they aim to develop the student’s ability to render in
Russian an organically connected compositional unit.
The Vocabulary-Building sections are placed at convenient
intervals to help the student acquire an adequate vocabulary. They
1 Verb aspects are counted as one vocabulary unit.

2 The aspects of the Russian verb are presented in accordance
with the method used by Ooshakov in his authoritative^ work. A. n.
YmaKOB, TojiKOBbift CaoBapb PyccKoro H3biKa, OrM3, Mockbel, 1940.
viii PREFACE
indicate to the student some convenient means of attaining this

important goal. They must not be confused with so-called •word¬
building. ’ ’
The two introductory lessons contain a brief analysis of the
Russian sound system. Experience has shown that the beginner
profits little and is often discouraged by a lengthy theoretical descrip¬
tion and classification of Russian sounds. Competent guidance by an
experienced teacher throughout the course, intelligent imitation of
native speakers, frequent listening to recorded speech, in brief,
concrete example rather than abstract analysis have proved to be
the effective means of establishing good pronunciation habits. For
this reason the authors have decided to encumber their text as little
as possible with technical explanations of Russian sounds even at the
risk of being criticized for inaccuracy and incompleteness. One basic
departure from the formal method of exposition, dictated by peda¬
gogical and functional considerations, must be pointed out. The
authors have decided not to classify consonants into “hard” and
“soft.” The “hardness” or “softness” of a consonant is made to
depend on the absence or presence of a “soft” vowel directly after
the consonant. Inadequate as this manner of presentation certainly
is from the linguist’s point of view, it has proved altogether adequate
to impart satisfactory pronunciation habits. Moreover, it has the
great advantage of being concise and far less confusing and discour¬
aging to the beginner. It was therefore adopted in keeping with the
author’s central aim: to provide student and teacher with the
simplest and most concise exposition of Russian sounds. Those
interested in a thoroughgoing analysis of the Russian sound system
are referred to the following texts:
S. C. Boyanus, A Manual of Russian Pronunciation, London,
1935,
S. C. Boyanus and N. B. Jopson, Spoken Russian, London, 1939.
In conclusion the authors wish to express their gratitude to
Professors Ernest J. Simmons and Roman Jakobson and Mr. Leon
Stilman of Columbia University, as well as to Professor Francis J.
Whitfield of the University of Chicago, for their encouragement and
many valuable suggestions.
A. v. G.
II. R. Y.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION I . 1
The Russian alphabet—System of handwriting—Capitaliza¬
tion—Punctuation—Syllabification—Stress
INTRODUCTION II . 11
Principal rules of pronunciation—Principal forms of address
—Ham nepBbiH pa3r0B0p “Our first conversation”
FIRST LESSON . 20
Present tense af “to be”—Question form—Negative sen¬
tence—Adverb—Conjunctions a and h
SECOND LESSON . 24
Gender of nouns—Nominative case; subject and predicate
noun—Article—Pronouns and pronoun-adj ectives oh, stot,
tot, MOH
REFERENCE TABLE I: Gases . 30
REFERENCE TABLE II: Vowel Mutation Rules. 31
THIRD LESSON . 32
Accusative singular of masculines and neuters—Indeclinable
neuters—Present tense of the first conjugation—Double nega¬
tive—Use of hto
FOURTH LESSON . 38
Prepositional singular of masculines and neuters—Preposi¬
tions b, Ha, o—Verbs KyrnaTb, ecrn> “to eat”—Use of rê
and KOiTta—EcTb “there is,” “there are”
FIFTH LESSON . 44
Prepositions b, Ha—Present tense of the “irregular” verbs
KJiaCTb, JKHTb, HATH, exaTb
SIXTH LESSON . 51
Genitive singular of masculines and neuters—Negative ex¬
pression with the genitive—ckojihko, Majio, mhgto with the
genitive—Prepositions 6e3, nocjie, y— Translation of “to
have”—Verbs MOHb, yivreTb “to be able”
SEVENTH LESSON . 59
Dative singular of masculines and neuters; preposition K
(ko)—Nominative and accusative singular of adjectives—
LtaBaTb “to give”
ix
CONTENTS
EIGHTH LESSON . 66
Instrumental singular of masculines and neuters—Preposi¬
tions, Me*Ay, HaA, nepeA, c (co)—Present tense of the
second conjugation—The verbs xoAHTb and e3AHTb—
Review of the singular declension of masculines and neuters
NINTH LESSON . 74
Dative and prepositional of feminine nouns and adjectives—
XoTeTb “to want to”—Omission of personal pronouns
TENTH LESSON . 80
Genitive singular of feminine nouns and adjectives—Xoreib
“to want to,” *AaTb “to wait (for)”—Prepositions AJIH,
H3, qkojio, ot—Cardinal numerals 1-4
ELEVENTH LESSON . 87
Accusative singular of feminine nouns and adjectives—Pre¬
positions uepe3, 3a, nOA—Past tense; translation of “to
have” (past)
TWELFTH LESSON . 94
Instrumental singular of feminine nouns and adjectives—Pre¬
positions 3a, nOA, c (co)—Review of feminine singular noun
and adjective declensions and of prepositions
THIRTEENTH LESSON . 104
“Hard” adjective singular declension—Imperative mood—
Time expressions
FOURTEENTH LESSON . 113
“Soft” adjective singular declension—Possessive pronoun-
adjective singular declension—Future tense; translation of
“to have’’ (future; abstract)
FIFTEENTH LESSON .
Singular declension of masculines in -ok and -eij—Short
form of the adjective—Declension of the interrogative pro¬
noun—Reflexive verb
SIXTEENTH LESSON .
Part A: Basic characteristics of the aspects—Sample sen¬
tences—Aspect-Tense Table—Perfectives with the
prefix no
Part B: Further functions of the perfective aspect—Forma¬
tion of the perfective aspect—The verbs xoahtb and
e3AHTb—The verbs roBopHTb and CKa3aTb—Imper-
feetive in the negative command
SEVENTEENTH LESSON .
Peculiarities in the singular masculine and neuter declensions;
prepositional in -y; neuters in -mh—Declension of personal
pronouns—Impersonal expressions (with dative)
CONTENTS
EIGHTEENTH LESSON . 158

Plural declension of the masculine, neuter, and feminine
nouns—Declensional peculiarities of the masculine noun: plural
in -a; irregular genitive plural—Impersonal expressions
(cont.)—Cardinals 5-12 and expressions of quantity (mhofo,
MaJIO, CKOJIbKO)
NINETEENTH LESSON . 169
Irregularities in the plural declension of masculine nouns
(-aHHH, -hhhh ; irregular plural)—Plural declension of ad¬
jectives, hard and soft—Numerals (ordinals 1-12, fractions)
and time expressions (clock)
TWENTIETH LESSON . 181
Declensional peculiarities of the neuter noun in the plural:
plurals in -a; in -H; genitive infix; plural of O3epo—Plural
of the possessive pronoun-adjective; pronoun-adjectives Ta-
koh, KaKOH, KOTOpbifi, ueft—Date expressions
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON . 191
Plural of 6paT, CTyji, nepo, AepeBO, jihct, Apyr, cmh, My^c;
njieuo, AGHbrn; neuters in -mh—Pronoun-adjectives 3T0T,
tot—Verbs SbiTb, SbiBaTb, cTaHOBHTbca, CTaTb (with
instrumental)—Declension of oahh; adjectives with cardinal
numerals
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON . 203
Masculine nouns ending in -a or -h—The reflexive pronoun
ce6a and the emphatic caM—Translation of “let me, us, him,
• them’'; use of the infinitive in the imperative mood; infinitive
with the dative rendering “have to,” “am to”—Declension
of the feminine noun in the plural (Review)
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON . 213
Genitive plural infix o or e in feminine nouns; declensions of
MaTb and AOUb—Adjectives used as nouns—Comparison of
adjectives and adverbs: comparative
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON . 223
Comparison of adjectives and adverbs: superlative—Pronoun-
adjective Becb—Cardinals and ordinals 13-40; summary of
case requirements after cardinals
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON . 236
Double imperfective verbs (indeterminate, determinate)—Re¬
ciprocal pronoun, Apyr Apyra—Expressions of age—Cardinals
and ordinals 50-100
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON . 249
Declension of 66a, “both”—Cardinals and ordinals 100-1 mil¬
lion; declension of cardinals; approximation; addition, sub-
xii CONTENTS
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON (Cent.)

traction, multiplication, division; collective numerals—Pre¬
positions: review and supplement
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON . 260
Suffixes -to, -HHdyAb; prefix hh-Subjunctive: unreal con¬
dition ; tense sequense—Date expressions
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON . 271
Subjunctive: purpose, wish, obligation, generalization—
Adverbial participle—Conjunctions
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON . 281
Relative pronouns—Present and past active participle
THIRTIETH LESSON . 293
Present and past passive participles—Passive voice
APPENDIX I . 306
APPENDIX II . 320
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY . 355
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY . 374
INDEX . 393
TABLE OF READING EXERCISES xiii
INTRODUCTION HAW HEPBblH PA3rOBOP .... 18

LESSON I rPA>K£AHHH CEMfiHOB ROMA? . 20
LESSON II PA3rOBOP.24
LESSON III HH>KEHEP BPAYH.32
LESSON IV POCnOAHH I1ETPOB.38
LESSON V EXATb TAK EXATb!.44
LESSON VI CETORm nPA3HHHK ...... 51
LESSON VII B K0J1X03E ..59
LESSON VIII H ERY B CTAJIHHFPAR ..... 66
LESSON IX HOBAH CKATEPTb.74
LESSON X BOT % H ROMA!.80
LESSON XI y BAByWKH.87
LESSON XII C7XAETCB KOMHATA.94
LESSON XIII >KHTb HO PACPIHCAHHK) . ... 104
LESSON XIV >KHTb HA RAHE.113
LESSON XV nEPBAB BOJlE3Hb OTUA . . . . 121
LESSON XVI A BHKTOP HBAHOBHH — I103T . . . 130
LESSON XVI B HA PJIABHOH yjlHUE.136
LESSON XVII nPHHBTb HPHPJIAWEHHE . ... 147
LESSON XVIII TEJIEFPAMMA H3 MOCKBbl , . . 158
LESSON XIX B MOCKBE.169
LESSON XX HOBbIPI yHHBEPCHTET.181
LESSON XXI TOCTb H3 MOCKBbl.191
LESSON XXII yPOK PEOPPAOHH.203
LESSON XXIII B REHb HPA3HHHKA.213
LESSON XXIV BOJ1PA.-.223
LESSON XXV J1EB HHKOJIAEBHU TOJ1CTOH . . 236
LESSON XXVI AKyjIA.249
LESSON XXVII CTAJTHHPPAZICKOE CPA>KEHHE . . 260
LESSON XXVIII O MEXOBE.271
LESSON XXIX O PyCCKOM #3bIKE.281
LESSON XXX OCHOBAHHE AKAÊMHH HAyK . . 293
xiv TABLE OF ADDITIONAL READING UNITS
rOCnOAHH COKOJIOB.50
MOH JXPYT AOKTOP MEXOB.65
% EJXY B MHKArO.86
rPA>KZIAHHH flblMOB.102
y BAByniKH b xiepebhe.129
nwcbMo OTuy.i46
TEJIEOOH.156
M. n. AHUPEEB.180
M05I >KH3Hb no PACnMCAHHK).20!
moh JiyuuiAH nojwrA, maphh eietpobha ... 233
nMCbMO BOPHCy. 247
BBEAEHME
i INTRODUCTION I
The Russian alphabet—System of handwriting—Capitalization

Punctuation—Syllabification—Stress
The Russian alphabet as we know it now was established

under Peter the Great. It is based on the Church Slavonic
alphabet, the so-called “Cyrillic” (KHpHJijmqa). This alphabet
was introduced into Bulgaria in the tenth century and dis¬
placed the first Slavonic alphabet, the “Glagolitic,” which was
devised in the middle of the ninth century by the monk St,
Cyril, who brought Christianity to the Slavs (first to the Slavs
of Greater Moravia).
The alphabet set up under Peter the Great was somewhat
simplified by the elimination of certain letters in the decree
on the new orthography enacted on October 10, 1918.1
The Russian alphabet as currently used in the Soviet Union
consists of 32 symbols.2 Each symbol stands for one basic sound,
with few and relatively minor exceptions. Thus the Russian
alphabet must be considered one of the more “phonetic” al¬
phabets.
This phonetic quality and the fact that Russian sounds
have their approximate equivalents in the English language
greatly simplify the task of mastering the Russian phonetic
system. Moreover, changes in the sound value of any one sym¬
bol that occur under certain conditions can be summarized
and explained in a relatively short set of simple rules (see In¬
troduction II). Thus, once the student has memorized the basic
sound for which each symbol stands and has acquainted him¬
self with the few phonetic rules, he will find himself able to
pronounce and spell Russian words with considerable accuracy.
Of course, finesse in Russian pronunciation can be acquired
only under the guidance of the trained teacher or by intelli¬
gent imitation of a native speaker. Russian language records
are also a valuable help.
1 This decree was based on a far more radical reform proposed

by the Russian Academy in 1917.
2 The symbol £ is not counted.
1
problem
X3
(zadacha)
3a,na*ia
5 (9
TABLE OF RUSSIAN LETTERS
O . H M
6 5 =5
in zero
X3 -C3 Xj X<
<D <D 0) OD
X* >- ba -TJ
^ S ^ ^ JN ^ ^
**■ a» ><u 0 s
<WtfSt-.CCww^COS
2
s
Short ee i “y” in boy TpaMean (tramval) streetcar
(ee kratkoe) (only after vowels)
as
<P
3
CD
c
x
O
5
o
4 1 0
3
■8
E
ft
fc
S'
ft
«
.5
-3
.3
^c-^KOCP-OHê
Russian Letten
H $r
a
a
J
4
a
3
§ gr^
fi
(0
3
=1
Ji
-o
soft sign indicates softness of MaTb (maty) mother
(myakhkil preceding consonant najibTo (pah'to) overcoat
znak) transcription T
CD
> 2 °
O
I § 2 £ w
2 §
fc PS
CD
SS
V)
rs «
& .2 »
43 <D
(eto)
o >
CD M
1/3 CD
«3
CD
5 8
‘2
PS .2 -3
<©
sto
2
PS os
3
a a •2 S
CD
i 2 *
w PS
B
ss
§ fe
in let
£
o 2 ^
o CJ 5 i*
5*
e
3 IrC
(e oborotnoe)
O
reversed “e”
£ ^
§
<n 2 os
0 5
f.2
m 2 «
£ £
5
© BBEÊHHE 1
n. THE SYSTEM OP HANDWRITING
The system of Russian script as set forth in the “Table of

Russian Letters” contains a considerable number of familiar
Latin symbols. This makes its mastery relatively simple. Never¬
theless, there are some characteristic peculiarities which have
to be carefully observed and practiced.
a. Note that, although many of the symbols are identical
in form with Latin symbols, they stand for different sounds:
Russian Symbol English Sound Pronunciation
l V V in voice.
n P P in pet.
ft r r in trill.
£ s s in less.
00 00 in look.
f
V
X kh kh in loch (Scotch).
b. It is very important to set off the letters *Ms, Jt/

from the preceding letters by a clearly marked arch or hook,
thus:
c. In rapid writing, the up and down strokes of M/. 'tTb,

AMs.'tV are likely to run into each other. To prevent con¬
fusion ,ji line is often placed below theJAA/ (sh) and above
the STb (t), thus: SiUytjXiXlMMMb
'f7UyVU£MAiUUy
d. Notice how the letters <A*. cAAs, SV are joined to a
preceding -Or
JOU/: noue, KXAAyCp.
xxu: JCOMMama, -fWMCUV.
XX&: umsi, fiCrdub.
INTRODUCTION I 7
e. Notice the difference between % and 'IXXAAyCp

and ^LCMA\ The “head” of ^ is a smooth curve;
that of is angular, with a slight downward dip.
III. CAPITALIZATION
In Russian only the first word of a sentence, a proper name

(MBaH, AiwepHKa), and the first letter in a line of verse are
capitalized.
NOT capitalized in Russian are:
a. Words derived from proper names: IlyuiKHH but

nyiUKHHCKHft.
b. Words designating nationality: pyccKHft, aiwepHKaueu.

c. Titles and modes of address: aoktop, TOBapum.
IV. PUNCTUATION
The period, colon, comma, semicolon, question mark, ex¬

clamation mark, dash, hyphen, parentheses, and brackets are
used much as in English. Note, however, the following special
uses:
a. A comma must separate every subordinate clause from

the rest of the sentence.
b. The dash often replaces .quotation marks, especially

when dialogue is reported without introductory phrases:
•— Oh aoiwa? (on doma?) “Is he at home?”

The dash can also stand in place of present tense forms of
the verb “to be” (see Lesson 1).
V. SYLLABIFICATION
It is sufficient to remember that:
a. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the

following vowel:
Ka-uia (ka-sha) gruel we-Ha (zhe-na) wife

b.
Of two (or more) consonants the last one usually goes
with the following vowel:
KOM-Ha-Ta (kom-na-ta) room

g BBEflEHHE I
c. ft is never separated from the preceding vowel:

qaii-HHK (chai-nik) tea pot
VI. STRESS
There is no simple set of workable rules on the position of

stress in Russian. Throughout the text, the position of the
stress on the Russian word will always be indicated, and the
student is urged to observe it carefully. A change in the posi¬
tion of the stress will often cause a change in the meaning of
a word, thus:
yiKe (oozhe) “narrower” as against y>Ke (oozh6) “already”
Myna (mooka) “torment, suffering” as against Myna (mookd)
“meal, flour”
VII. EXERCISES1
a. Read all Russian words given in the “Table of Russian

Letters. ’ ’
b. Read the following words:
6paT (brat) brother noHTa (pochta) mail

BOp (vor) thief padoTa (rabota) work
Ho6pbi# (dobrii) kind Tyr (toot) here
Eepona (Yevropa) Europe ypoK (oorok) lesson
ee (yeyo) hers (J)yHT (foont) pound
iKypHaji(zhoornal) journal XpHCTOC (khristos) Christ
3HMa (zima) winter uena (tsena) price
MX (ikh) theirs HHCJIO (chislo) number,
KOMHaia (komnata) room date
jiaMna (lampa) lamp manna (shapka) cap
MOCT (most) bridge HJpHCT (yoorist) lawyer
HOBbift (novii) new H3blK (yazik) tongue,
opran (organ) organ language
i it is advisable that the teacher read and repeat the exercises

aloud, having the students repeat by ear. Only after such aural
practice should the students be asked to read the exercises. In self¬
teaching it is very important to refer constantly to the Table on pages
2-5 and never to read or practice the exercises of this or the following
lessons without being certain of the proper pronunciation of every
letter.
INTRODUCTION I
9
e„ Read and write (do not print);
KTO (kto) who

OH (°n) he oft
oh pa6oTaeT (on rabotayet) he works OH, fUlJimXiem,

OH HHTaeT (°n chitayet) he reads OH, nuMO£M>
rpancaaHKa (grazhdanka) citizen ^
ceHHac (seichas) now XXXvtOC,

AOMa (doma) at home
Tpa>Kjl3HHH (grazhdanin) citizen
yvvwxkuuiH,
TOHCe (tozhe) also MAome
TaM (tam) there JTiCUU,
VIII. ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN

READING AND WRITING
In carrying out these exercises the advice given in the -footnote on
page 8 should he carefully observed. When copying the Russian words
the written characters as given in the “Table of Russian Letters”
should be studied and the suggestions on how to link letters (p. 6)
should be followed.
English Meaning
1. Practice of the sounds JX and T

Aa AOM AyJI yes, house, (he) blew
TaM tom ryx there, volume, here
2. Practice of the sounds 3 and C
3aJia cajio hall, fat
30Ha coh 3HMa CHJia zone, dream, winter, force
3. Practice of the sounds B and 
Ba3a (J)a3a saxa cjjax vase, phase, cotton, fop
3Byi< cfjyHT Bepa (f)eTp tone, pound, faith, felt
4. Practice of the sounds B and n

6a6a nana 6o6 non woman, father, bean, priest
Sima nwBQ 6yxxa battle, beer, bay
10 BBEjlEHHE I
5. Practice of the sounds F, K, and X

ropa KOpa ryji Kypc xop mountain, bark, rumble,
course, chorus
6. Practice of the sounds >K, Ill, and 111,
lap map HtyK myKa heat, ball, beetle, pike
iuh h Kama, rwina Hama cabbage soup and porridge
are our food
7. Practice of the sounds H and U

Hac Hya.0 hhcjio hour, miracle, number,
Uanjisi uteHTp uera heron, center, price
8. Practice of the sounds Y, R 10, and 51
yew 3y6bi MyabiKa cwh moustache, teeth, music, son
lOMOp 51 MOIO 51 itaio yK)T lmmor, I wash, I give,
comfort/cosiness
The characteristic features of “unvoicing” and “palatali¬

zation” will be explained and practiced in the next introduc¬
tory lesson.
BBEAEHME II
I INTRODUCTION II
Principal Rules of Pronunciation—Principal Forms of Address
I. PRINCIPAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION1
A. Russian vowels may be conveniently classified as soft

or hard
Soft Vowels Hard Vowels
ft (as in yard) a (as in father)
e (as in yet)1 3 (as in let)
e (as in yawn)1 0 (as in law)
IO (as in yule) y (as in moon)
H (as in feel)1 bi (as in till)
A (i kratkoye, short i);
never initial; always
the second element in
a diphthong like the
y in say
A soft vowel has the following characteristics:

a. In initial position or after a vowel it has a strong initial
“y” glide, very much like the y in yes. eiw (Ya yem) “I eat.”
t>. When following a consonant, except >k, in, and u, it
“palatalizes” that consonant. A “palatalized” or “softened”
consonant “is produced by flattening the mouth resonator (i. e.
by bringing the tongue up against the roof of the mouth) and
is subsequently marked by a raised timbre.”2
A hard vowel has no such initial “y” glide and does not
palatalize a preceding consonant.
1 For a fuller treatment see L. Stilman, Russian Alphabet and

Phonetics, Columbia University Press, New York, 1949; also, S. C.
Boy anus, A Manual of Russian Pronunciation, London, 1935.
_ 2 After ik Czh). ui (sh), and u, (ts), these three soft vowels, though
written e, e, ii, are pronounced like their hard equivalents:
e is pronounced like a (let) in wecTb (zhest’) “tin”;
e is pronounced like o (shaioZ) in HtejiTbift (zholtii) “yellow”;
h is pronounced like u (till) in >KH3Hb (zhizny) “life.”
11
12 BBEjfEHHE U
B. Russian consonants may be conveniently classified

as voiced or voiceless
Voiced Consonants Voiceless Consonants li csonants
6 (as in boy) n (as in speak) ji (as in Zamp)

b (as in wice) (as in fun) m (as in map)
r (as in go) k (as in scot) h (as in now)
a (as in day) x (Scotch: loch) p (as in trill)
3 (as in sero) t (as in fop)
m (as in asure) c (as in less)
in (as in she)
u (as in ca£s)
4 (as in chair)
m (as in rash
choice)
C. Typical changes in the sound value of consonants
1. Unvoicing:
Voiced consonants before voiceless consonants or in final
position are pronounced as voiceless, though retaining their
original spelling:
Before Voiceless Consonants In Final Position
6 as n: rpySna (troopka) pipe rpo6 (grop) coffin

b as (fn BTOpHHK (/tornik) Tuesday totob (gatof) ready
r as x: m strum (myakhkii) soft Bor (bokh) God
r as k: .ior (yook) south
A as t: noAHHCb (po£pisy) signature foa (got) year
iK as in: jioiKKa (loshka) spoon hom (nosh) knife
3 as c: 6AH3KHii (bliskii) near raa3 (glas) eye
Briefly, the difference between the voiced and the voiceless

consonants is that in producing the former, the vocal chords
in the throat (larynx, glottis) are used (i. e. are made to vi¬
brate) , making a buzzing sound, while in producing the latter,
the chords are out of action1.
1 An effective way of determining the type of consonant involved

is to close the ears with one’s fingers and pronounce the consonant.
If a local hum is heard, the consonant is voiced; if not, it is voiceless.
(Examples in English: “d” as against “t,” “b” as against “p.”)
INTRODUCTION II 13
2. ‘Palatalization” or “Softening”:
Consonants, when followed by a soft vowel or by b (soft
sign), become “palatalized” or “softened”; that is, they are
produced by flattening the mouth resonator (pressing the
tongue up against the roof or palate of the mouth) and are sub¬
sequently marked by a raised timbre.1 This process of palatali¬
zation or softening is particularly strong with the consonants
A, n, h, and t.2 Palatalization will be indicated in our transcrip¬
tion system by a small, raised * This symbol must never be
pronounced as a distinct, separate letter, but rather as a kind
of “y” glide such as is heard, for instance, in the words “few”
or “pew” directly after the “f” or “p”, though it is not quite
as strong in Russian. (This “y” glide is also called “jotation”
by some phoneticians.)
Examples
11 n
as in “duke,” not as as in “failure,” not as
in “do” in “Jamp”
AeHb (dyeny) day noJie (polye) field

AKUKHHa (dyoozhina) dozen JIK)6HTb (lyoobity) to love
AHAH (dyadya) uncle HeAeJiH (nyedyelya) week
roJib(J) (golyf) golf
H T
as in “new,” not as in “nose” as in “tune,” not as in “top”
HeT (nyet) no xenjio (tyeplo) warm

HHêro (nichyevo) nothing thxhh (tikhi!) quiet
HioxaTb (nyookhaty) smell TIOK (tyook) bale
KyXHH (kookhnya) kitchen THieHbKa (tyatyenyka)i daddy
AeHb (dyeny) day padoTaTb (rabotaty) to work
3. Pronunciation of F:
r in the Genitive endings -oro and -ero is pronounced like
“v” in “voice”: Hnuero (nichyevo) “nothing” {Lit.: “of no¬
thing”) . Yet in the stem of a word, as for example in mhofo
(mnogo) “much,” the symbol has its normal value.
1 Compare with statement on “soft” vowels given on p. 11.
2 Only the consonants >k, in, u. are never palatalized. Soft vowels
following these consonants are hard (cf. p. 11, fn. 1).
14 BBEJfEHME 11
4. Consonant clusters:
In consonant clusters one consonant is often dropped in

pronunciation, though not in spelling. Thus in the word
3jxpaBCTByHTe (zdra[v]stvooItye) “How are you?; good day,”
the first b is not pronounced, and in CHacxjjHBbifi (sehas[t]livil)
“happy, fortunate, lucky,” the T is virtually inaudible. More¬
over, the cm in CHacuiMBbiii is pronounced like mi (shch). In
cojiHiie (so[l]ntse) “sun,” the ji is not audible.
D. Effect of the stress on vowels
Only stressed vowels receive their full value as indicated in

the Table (pp. 2-5).1 Unstressed vowels tend to neutralize into
comparatively muted sounds, as do the unstressed vowels in
many English words, as for instance the “e” in “belong” or the
“a” in “arise.” Xhis distinction between the stressed and un¬
stressed vowels is particularly striking in the case of o. Stressed,
it has its full value comparable to the “aw” in “law.” Unstressed
o in a syllable immediately preceding the stressed syllable,
has the same sound as a. In all other positions, unstressed o
has a sound value comparable to the sound of “a” in “arise,”
This sound will henceforth be designated by the symbol a in
our transcription.
Example
MOJIOKO molako milk

MOJronoii moladoi young
30JI0T0 zolato gold
1 The differentiation of all the minute nuances in the sound of

the various unstressed vowels would bring a confusing complexity
to our system of transcription. Therefore we retain the symbols of
the stressed vowels, except in the case of unstressed o. When reading
the Exercises of this lesson and the Russian material of the fol¬
lowing ones, the student is urged to observe the position of the stress
and to keep the suggested pronunciation of unstressed vowels (mu¬
ted) in mind. It may be noticed, for instance, that unstressed a
(e. g. in jiaBKa) has the same sound value as the unstressed o (e. g.
in jiobko) , that is, a, though our transcription fails to indicate this
for the reason given.
INTRODUCTION II 15
II. PRINCIPAL FORMS OF ADDRESS
In greeting or otherwise addressing a person, the Russian

generally uses the person’s first name along with his patrony¬
mic (his father’s name), with the ending -obhh or -eau1! if the
person addressed is a man, or the ending -OBHa or -euHa1 if the
person addressed is a woman:
AjieKcaHAp MeaHOBHq2 * * * Alexander Ivanovich

(Alexander, son of Ivan)
AjieKcett AaeKceeBHH* Alexei Alexeevich
(Alexis, son of Alexis)
AjiexcaHApa MsaHOBHa8 Alexandra Ivanovna
(Alexandra, daughter of Ivan)
Hnna AJieKceeBHa* Nina Alexeevna

(Nina, daughter of Alexis)
The terms rpawnaHHH (grazhdanin) “citizen,”1 rpammma

(grazhd&nka) “citizeness,” and TOBapHiu (tavarishch) “com¬
rade,” “party member” (referring to both man and woman)
are also used, usually along with the family name:
rpa>KAaHMH CeMCHOB Citizen Semyonof
fpa>KAaHKa CeMeHoea Citizeness Semyonova
These terms are commonly used in Soviet Russia when

addressing Soviet citizens. The terms rocno^HH (gospadin)
“Sir,” “Mr.” and rocnoixa (gospazha) “Mrs.” “Lady,” are used
when referring to non-Soviets or foreigners.
1 -obhh, -OBHa are used after consonants or hard vowels;

-esHH, -eana are used after soft vowels.
2 HBaHOBHH is usually pronounced Mb&hmh (Iv&nich)
AjieKceeBHH is usually pronounced AjieKceHH (Aheksy&Lch)
Hb£hobh& is usually pronounced HBamia (Ivanna)
AaeKceesHa is usually pronounced AAeKceBHa (Alyeksy&raa)
16 BBEJXEHHE II
EXERCISES
a. Read and write (do not print):
Eawy (Bakoo) Baku
JleHHHrpaA (I/eningrat) mmMMAfma Leningrad
MocKBa (Maskva) cMxxutAii Moscow
CraJiHHrpaA (Stalingrat) Stalingrad

C|)pOHT (front) cpfixmm front
HHiKeHep (inzhen7'er) xume£Mefi engineer
wypeaji (zhoorn&l) journal
CTyAeriT (stoodyent) student
rojibcJ) (goM) 'hOOMp golf
naA (chal) naH tea
MexaHHK (mekhanik) ute&Ajuuc mechanic
no§T (paet) iuriffi poet
sor (yook) 4<yb south
ueHTp (tsentr) MfAUnfl center
TOBapHIU (tavarishch) mxyiuftau^ comrade
b. Read until fluent (for English meaning see General Vocab-

ulary).
TpyflKa (troopka) npobKa (propka) rpo6 (grop)
Bcer.ua (fsyegda) 3aBTpa (zaftra) 3AOpOB (zdarbf)
jierKHM (ly'okhkii) mhtkhA (my,akhkii) can or (sapok)
BOAKa (votka) peAKo (ry'etko) HapoA (narot)
HO>KKa (noshka) ApOJKKH (droshki) Myw (moosh)
HA3KHA (niskii) pe3KlHft (ryeskii) pa3 (ras)
jiobko (lofko) JiaBKa (lafka) K©}«a (kozha) Kama (kasha)

6HTb (bity) GbiTb (bity) mhjio (mlb) mwjio (mib) eaJi (val)
boji (vol) sejs (vyol) Kpyr (krook) KpioK (kryook) KpHK (krik)
Mea (myot) Me^b (myety) moahmA (modnii) ahbzih (div&n)
^K»KHHa (dyoozhina) rê (gdye) Bee (fsyo) b khho (f kino)
6e3 caoBa (byes slova)
INTRODUCTION II 17
HecTb (chyesty) uiecxb (shesty) mecxb (zhesty)

uapb (tsary) map (shar) map (zhar)
TpanKa (try'apka) xpaeKa (trafka) c«Ab (syaty) caA (sat)
Aana (dacha) AOMb (dochy) 6pax (brat) dpaxb (braty)
Moaoxob (Mobtaf) JIomohocob (Lamanosaf) 3boh6k (zva-

n6k) hcho (yasna) 06'bsiCHHXb (ab’yasnyaty) yqeHHua (oochye-
nitsa) yHHxejibHHpa (oochityelynitsa) mexna (shchyotka) eme
(yeshclTo) menna (shchyepka) HHnero (nichyevo) MHororo
(mnogava) CMacxbe (shchastye) cnoKOHHofi h6hh (spakoinai no¬
chi) 3ApaBcxByfixe (zdra[v]stvooitye) ao cbmashmsi (da svi-
danfa)
Mbi (mi) xw (ti) Bbi (vi) awm (dim) chh (sin)
c. Read and write;

ABCpb (dvyery) door
3ACCb (zdyesy) here
mexKa (shchyotka) brush
H3B03HHK (izvoshchik) cabman
fAe (gdye) where
eme (yeshchyo) still, yet
AeA (hot) ice
reHHft (gy'enii) genius
HyBCXBO (cho'o[v]stva) feeling
yHHxejibHHua (oochityelynitsa) woman teacher
MflrKO (nb'akhka) soft
Kopodna (karopka) box
OKU 6 (akno) window
xopouio (kharasho) good, well
6bicxpo (bistra) ' quickly
MHoro (mnogg) much
lOMOp (y o'omar) humor
Tsimejio (tyazhelo) heavy
H3bIK (yazi'k) tongue, language
HHMero (nichyevo) nothing
Aodpbifi AeHb (dobrii dyeny) good day
KaK nomHBaexe? (kak pozhivayetye) how are you?
rocnoma (gaspazha) lady, Mrs.
rocnoAHH (gaspadin) sir, Mr.
TyT (toot) here
TAe 8X0? (gdye eto) where is this?
HTO 3X0? (chto eto) what is this?
KXO 3X0? (kto eto) who is this?
HAW nEPBblH PA3rOBOP OUR FIRST CONVERSATION
This exercise can be expanded at the discretion of the teacher by introducing a greater number of parts
of, and objects in, the classroom and by adding the names of those actually present to the fictitious ones.
£
x
2
vO
H
03
Cd
(T)
o
^
u
•
§
”
w
o
CT)
0)
E
sa
-Q
X
ra
0
cd
(H>
o
<=(
w W M
o,
‘0*
u
H
e;
H
H
H
cd
E
h
CJ
O
cd
>>
«=T
w O 2 ^
* 2^ 573a) 5 £5*
« o ■
1
<=i
X
*■0)
H
■«d
1
o X
2
U PS
C*-. 2
H Ml)
1
1 1 I
CS
cd *3
«
1 o^
>>
&l
18
^
, OH :
^
SX ^ ?►> p,
£* "w q W Pn h-H
P" J-( ■ .
O -t-a
C3 M. &
o3“SSji
js
Ha, bot oh! — Da, vot on! Yes, here he is!

CTy/ieHTKa Cmht TyT? — Stood-'entka Smit toot? Is Miss Smith present?
Lit.: Is the girl student
Smith here?
Ha, bot OHa! — Da, vot ana! Yes, here she is!
INTRODUCTION II
nEPBbfM ypoK
1 FIRST LESSON
Present tense of “to be”—Question form—Negative sentence—

Adverb—Conjunctions a and h
I. COMMON EXPRESSIONS
J3,oMa At home Ha 3asoAe At the plant

(factory)
J3o-CBMAaHMSl! Good bye Ha pa66xe At work
3ApaBCXByfixe! How are you! Cnacwdo! Thank you!
How do you do!
Hello!
II. READING: rPA>K£AHHH CEMEHOB UOMA?
3bohok.
Bepa AjieKceeBHa oxKpbmaex ABepb.
— 3ApaBCTByflie! HoMa rpaiKAaHHH CeMeHOB?
_Cewqac... Oh Ajih AOMa hah Ha pa6oxe... HeT, ceroAHJi
oh He AOMa, a Ha pa66xe.
— Fae pa66xaex Flexp WBaHOBHH?
— Oh pa66xaex Ha 3aBOAe. Oh MexaHHK,
— CnacHbo, xoBapum. Jô-cbmashhh.
331. VOCABULARY
a and, but iiex no

Gbicxpo quickly OH, he
ObIXb to be oHa she
rae where (oh) oxBeiaex (he) answers
rpa>KAaHHH citizen (OHa) oxKpbiBaex (she) opens
rpa>«AaHKa citizeness pa6oxa work
Aa yes (oh) paboxaex (he) works
3aBOA plant, factory ceroAHH1 today
3BOHOK bell cefiuac in a minute, now
HJIH or xaM there
MeAaeHHo slowly XOBapHIU comrade, friend
MexaHHK mechanic (oh) HHxaex he reads
He not
1 pronounced “srevodnya ”
20
FIRST LESSON 21
IV. GRAMMAR
A. The verb
1. The present tense of the verb “to be” (6hti>) is gener¬

ally not expressed:
Oh ceroAHH wa saBOjie. He [is] at the factory today.
When a noun is linked to another noun, the form of “to be”

is replaced by a dash:
MocKea — ropoA. Moscow [is] a city.
Mb4h — cryAeHT. Ivan [is] a student.
2. Russian does not have an exact equivalent of the pro¬

gressive or of the emphatic forms of the verb:
Oh paboxaeT. He works, is working, does work.
3. A question is expressed by:
a. The introduction of an interrogative:
Kto oh? Who [is] he?

rê oh? Where [is] he?
b. The inflection of the voice:
Oh pa6oTaeT? Is he working?
Oh MHTaeT? Does he read?
c. Placing the verb before the subject:
OTBenaer oHa? Does she answer?

Paboraer oh ceroAHH? Is he working today?
ija this form of the question, the particle jih may be intro¬
duced, usually immediately after the verb:
PaboTaeT jih oh? Is he working?
4. In the negative sentence, He is placed before the verb or

directly before the word which is to be negated:
22 iiEPBbin ypoi<
Oh He padoTaeT romsl. He does not work at home.

Oh padoTaex He aoms, a He does not work at home, but
Ha sasoAe. at the plant.
5. It Is very important not to confuse He meaning “not”

with hct meaning “no”: Her, oh He HHiaeT. No, he does not
read.
B. The adverb
The Russian adverb, like the English, does not change in

form (it is not declined). Its position in the sentence is not
rigidly fixed.
It often stands between the subject and the verb:
Oh HHTaeT bbicrpo. He reads quickly.
Oh MejyieHHQ OTBenaeT. He answers slowly.
Or can introduce the sentence:
CeroAHH oHa paboiaeT. Today she is working.
C. Conjunctions a and h
a and h are both translated by “and.”

a, however, is a separating conjunction, used to bring out
contrast:
Oh padoTaeT, a OHa HHTaeT. He works and (but) she reads.
When used after a negative, it must be translated by “but”:
Oh He HHTaeT, a paboTaen He is not reading, but working.
h is a joining conjunction, the exact equivalent of our

“and,” “also”:
Oh padoTaeT h OHa paboTaeT. He works and she works.
V. QUESTIONS
(Based on the Reading Exercise)
1. Kto OTKpHBaeT Asepb? 2. JXomsl jih IleTp HBaHOBHH?

3. Hue nexp MBanoBHH? 4. IleTp MBaHOBHH MexaHHK? 5. Hue oh
paboxaeT?
FIRST LESSON 23
VI. GRAMMAR EXERCISES
a. Read in Russian and translate into English:
1. Oh. 2. Ona. 3. Ona UHTaer. 4. Oh HHTaeT dbiCTpo. 5. Ona

HHTaeT MeAJieHHO. 6. Oh padoTaeT. 7. neTp MBaHOBHU padoTaeT.
8. Ona padoTaeT AOMa. 9. neTp HBaHOBHu ceroAHH He padoiaer.
10. Oh ceroAHH AOMa. 11. Ona oTKpbisaeT Afiepb. 12. Die TosapHiu
MeaHOB? 13. Oh Ha aaBOAe. 14. Cnacndo, TQBapHiu! 15. Ao
cbhahhhh!
b. Change the following sentences into the various possible

question forms,:
1. OHa OTBeuaeT dbiCTpo. 2. Oh padoTaeT MeA-neHHo. 3. To-

BapHin HBaHOB padoTaeT ceroAHH Ha 3aB0Ae. 4. PpasKAaHKa
Bepa AAeKceeBHa AOMa. 5. Ona HHTaex aoms.
c. Replace the dash by the proper conjunction, a or H:
1. HBaH — IleTp AOMa. 2. Oh He AOMa, — Ha 3aBOAe» 3. Off

HHTaeT He dbiCTpo, — MeA<neHHO. 4. Bepa — AAenceft na 3aBOAe.
5. neTp padoTaeT Ha aasoAe, — Bepa AOMa.
VII. TRANSLATION INTO RUSSIAN1
1. He. 2. She. 3. He works. 4. She reads. 5. She reads at

home. 6. He works today. 7. He works at the factory. 8. Vera
Alexeevna opens the door (ABepb). 9. Where [does] citizen
Peter Ivanov work? 10. Today he does not work; today he [is]
at home. 11. [Is] he a mechanic? 12. Yes, Peter Ivanov is a
mechanic. 13. Where [is] Vera Alexeevna? 14. Vera Alexeevna
[is] at home. 15. Thank you, comrade. Good bye!
1 Words in [ ] are to be omitted;

Words in ( ) are to be included, or they are explanatory.
BTOPOi yPOK
SECOND LESSON
Gender of nouns—Nominative case—Article—Pronouns and

pronoun-adjectives: oh, §tot, tot, mom
I. COMMON EXPRESSIONS
JloSpbift neHb Good day

^66poe yTpo Good morning
KaK noiKHsaeTe? How are you?
KaK Bbi no>KHBaeTe? How are you?
Xopouio, cnacufto Fine, thank you
Hauero, cnacuOo Quite well, thank you
A Bbi? And you?
OneHb xopouio! Very well!
Kax >Kena? How is your wife?
Kan paOoTa? How is the work?
BOT HOBOCTb! That is news!
KaK cfjaMHJiMSi? What is the last name?
KaK eawa cpaMHJiHH? What is your last name?
Hto 3T0? What is this?
II. READING1: PA3rOBOP

— 3;ipaBCTByHTe, HBaH CepreeBHu!
— rieTp HBaHOBHn! ôGpoe yrpo!
— KaK no>KHBaeTe?
— HwMero, oiacuSo.
— KaK >Kena?
— Xopouio, cnacudo. Bot (|)OTorpa(|5HH: moh xceHa, moA
aom . . .
— ZloM? Bot HOBOCTb!
— jDU, §to mom aom. TyT can, a TaM nojie. 3ro okho —
KyxHH, a to okho — moh KOMHaTa.
— A 3to 3AaHne — rocriHTaJib?
— HeT, 3to 3AaHHe He rocnHTajib, a My3e$.
- A 3TO KTO?
1 For words and phrases in bold type in this and the following
Reading Exercises, look under Common Expressions or in the Grammar
section of the lesson, not in the Vocabulary.
24
SECOND LESSON 25
— 3T0 MOft TOBapHIU.

•— KaK (jmMHJIHH?
■— êxoB.
— Oh He HHJKeeep?
- JXa, OH H HEOKeHep, H AOKTOp, H HOST . . ,
— Ila, oh reHHft!
— IJa, OHepraH, Mofi Apyr! Oh paSoTaex &tnb h hohi».
— Hy, AO-CBHAaHHH.
- ^0‘CBHAaHHH.
III. VOCABULARY
BOT here is, are1 Myseft museum

reHHft genius HOHb night
rocnwTajib (m.)2 hospital none field
AeHb (m.) day HOST poet
AOlKAb (m.) rain caA garden
AOKTOp (m.) doctor Tyr here
AOM house yTpo morning
Apyr friend xopowo good, well
>Keea wife 4)aMHAHH last (family)
3A3HHe building name
HHweuep engineer 4>OTorpac})Hsi photograph,
KaK how snapshot
KOMHaTa room SHepTHH energy
KyXHJI kitchen
IV. GRAMMAR
A. The noun
1. The Russian noun has three genders: masculine, femi¬
nine, and neuter.
2. The ending of a noun indicates'!ts gender:3
Masculine are:
Hard 1. Nouns ending in a consonant aoktop doctor
j2. Nouns ending in ft My3efl museum
(3. Nouns ending in b4 AcmAb rain
i Box is used when pointing to a place, person, or thing. Tyr

simply designates location, usually without exclamatory force.
- Masculines ending in -b (soft sign) will be marked (m.) in
vocabularies. The change of initial “h” to Russian “r”: Heine becomes
FeiiHe; Hegel becomes Ferejib; Hitler: Fiirjiep, etc.
3 For exceptions see Lesson 22.
4 Since the ending -b is common to both the masculine and the
feminine genders, masculines ending in -b will be marked (m.):
no>K.ab (m.) “rain.”
26 BTGPQR yPOK
Feminine are:
Hard 1. Nouns ending in a1 KOMHara room
(2. Nouns ending in a KyXHH kitchen
^0|3. Nouns ending in b2 ABepfo2 door
Neuter are:
Hard 1. Nouns ending in o MeCTO place

Soft 2. Nouns ending in e nojie field
Soft 3. Nouns ending in e py>Kbe8 rifle
3. Notice that all of the above nouns are given in the

nominative case. This is the basic form in which nouns will
appear in the vocabularies. It is the case of the subject of the
sentence. It answers the question “who?” “what?”:
My friend is at home. Who is at home?: My friend (sub¬
ject of sentence, nominative case!)
The nominative case can also be the case of the predicate

noun:
This is my house. What is this?: My house (predicate
noun, nominative case!)
4. There is no article in Russian:
{the doctor
a doctor
doctor
B. Pronouns; pronoun-adjectives
1. The following table presents the nominative case of

pronouns and pronoun-adjectives (demonstrative and posses¬
sive). Note that the Russian possessive pronoun renders both
the English possessive pronoun and the English possessive
adjective; e. g. moh renders both “mine” (pron.) and
"my” (adj.).
1 See footnote 3 on preceding page.

2 See footnote 4 on preceding page.
3 This ending is always stressed.
SECOND LESSON 27
Masculine Feminine Neuter

(Noun) (AOM) (KOMHaTa) (okho)
Personal
Pronoun OH he, it OHa she, it OHO it
Demonstrative
3T0T this 3Ta this 3TO this
Pronoun-
TOT that Ta that TO that
Adjective
Possessive
my my my
Pronoun- MOft MOM Moe
mine mine mine
Adj ective
2. Oh, OHa, oho, refer to animate beings and inanimate

objects in accordance with their grammatical gender:
yHHTejib — oh, AaMa — ona, ctoji — oh, aeepb — OHa,
py>Kbe — oho.
3. The pronoun-adjective §tot, §Ta, §xo “this” (pi.: §th
“these”) when used as an adjective agrees, like all adjectives,
in gender, number and case with the noun to which it refers.
But the form §io is also an impersonal verbal expression —
uninflected and indeclinable — and means “this (that) is,”
“these (those) are”:
3tot aom This house
Bt& KOMHaTa This room
3to okho This window
(3th KOMHaTH These rooms)1
BUT
3lO — J3.0M. This is a house.
3to — KOMHaTa. This is a room.
9X0 — OKHO. This is a window.
(3tO - KOMHaXbl. These are [the] rooms.)
V. QUESTIONS
{Based on the Reading Exercise)
1. Kax nojKHBaeTe? 2. Kax xceHa? 3. Kax padoTa? 4. Hro

Ha $OTorpacj)HH? (What is in the photograph? Answer: Ha $o-
i The plural is taken up systematically in later lessons.

28 BTGPOH yPOK
Torpacf)HH moh aom. Ha c|)OTorpa(f)HH moh JKena, etc.) 5. 3to

3AaHne — rocnHTajib hah My3eii? 6. Kto stot rocnoAHH? 7. KaK
c|)aMHJiHH? 8. Oh MexaHHK? 9. PaOoTaeT oh Ha 3aBOAe?
a. Write out all nouns given in the Reading Exercise. Give their
gender and English meaning, thus: aom — masculine — “house.”
b. Read the following sentences. Substitute the proper pronouns

(oh, OHa, oho) for the forms in bold type. Translate into English.
1. 9tot aom — moh; §Ta KOMHaTa — moh. 2. 9to 3AaHHe

He rocnHTajib, a My3efi. 3. Mom Apyr paSoraeT ceroAHH Ha 3a-
BOAe, a mom Htewa AOMa. 4. Fpa>KAaHHH CeMeHOB ceroAHH Ha pa-
6oTe, a rpa>KAaHKa CeMenoea AOMa. 5. HHKOJiafl MeaHoBHq He
HHTaeT. 6. Moft TOBapnm paOoTaeT Ha 3aBOAe AeHb h hohb.
7. Help MsaHOBMq — HmiceHep hjih aoktop? 8. Mow Apyr
SbiCTpo OTBeuaeT «Oh h m-UKenep h aoktop h nosT. Oh'
reHHH!»
c. Give the Russian equivalents of the words in parentheses:
L Bot moh (doctor). 2. 3to moh (friend). 3. 3to Moft

(house). 4. TyT moh (room). 5. JXo6poe (morning). 6. OHa moh
(wife). 7. Oh — (engineer). 8. TyT moh (house), a TaM (hospital).
9. Oh (poet), a He (doctor). 10. Cepren AHApeeBHU moh (friend).
11. Bot (news)! 12. 3to moh (photograph).
d. . Replace the words in parentheses by the proper forms of the

pronoun-adjectives moh, moh, Moe:
1. Bot (my) caA. 2. 3to (my) AOKTOp. 3. Oh (my) Apyr.

4. OHa (my) JKeHa. 5. TyT (my) TOBapHUj;. 6. TaM (my) aom.
7. 3to (my) rapanc. 8. Bot (my) (J)OTorpa(|)HH. 9. Kan (my)
cJdhmhahh? 10. TaM (my) rocnHTaAb.
e. Replace the words in parentheses by the proper forms of the

pronoun-adjectives stot, sth, 3to, tot, Ta, to:
1. Eto 9to? (This) — ABepb. 2. A hto sto? (This) — okho.

3. (This) ABepb TyT, a (that) okho thm. 4. Eto sto? (This) —
AOM. 5. (This) AOM — My3eH, a (that) — rocnHTaAb. 6: (This)
okho — KyxHH, a (that) — moh KOMHaTa. 7. Ebro sto? (This)
— none, a (that) — caA. 8. A hto sto? (This) — moh KOMHaTa.
9. A kto sto? (This) — moh Apyr. 10. A kto sto? (This) —
moh nceHa.
SECOND LESSON 29
VII. TRANSLATION INTO RUSSIAN

A
1. This is my house. 2. Here is the kitchen and there is
my room. 3. Is this building a hospital? 4. No, it is a museum.
5. My friend, Peter Ivanovich, works there. 6. Is he a poet or
a doctor? 7. He is an engineer, a genius! 8. He works day and
night. 9. He works at a factory. 10. Today he does not work;
he is not at the factory, but at home.
B
1. How are you? 2. What is your last name? 3. This is my
wife, Alexandra Ivanovna. 4. She is not working today; she is
reading. 5. That is news! 6. Where is citizeness Alekseeva?
7. My wife answers:—She is at the factory.—8. How does she
work? 9. She works very well and very fast. 10. The bell. My
wife opens the door. 11. Who is it? 12. This is citizen Semyonov.
13. My friend Ivan Ivanovich Semyonov answers slowly. 14. He
is not a genius.
30 REFERENCE TABLES
REFERENCE TABLE I
Cases
(This table is for reference only and need not be memorized.)
There are six cases in Russian. They are the nominative,

genitive, dative, accusative, instrumental, and prepositional
(or locative).
For further
explana-
Coses and main uses: tion see:
Nominative: used as the case of the subject . Lesson 2

used as the ease of the predicate noun, always answers
the questions “who?” “what?” . Lesson 2
Genitive: used to denote possession, answers the questions

“whosef” “of what?” . Lesson 6
also used in negative expressions . Lesson 6
also used with certain prepositions. Appendix
Dative: used as the case of the indirect object, denoting

the recipient of something, answers the questions “to
whom?” “to what?”. Lesson 7
Accusative: used as the case of the direct object, denoting

the person or object directly affected by an action, an¬
swers the questions “whom?” “what?” . Lesson 3
also used with certain prepositions. Appendix •
Instrumental: used to denote the instrument or agent by

which an action is performed, answers the questions “by
whom?” “by what?” “with what?” . Lesson 8
also used as the case of the predicate noun with certain
verbs . Lesson 21
Prepositional: always preceded by certain prepositions .. Lesson 4

often indicates locality, answers the questions “where?” Appendix
(never “where to?”), “about whom,f” “about
what?”. Lesson 4
REFERENCE TABLES 31
REFERENCE TABLE II
Vowel Mutation Rules A, B, C
There are in Russian three rules of special importance.

They explain many of the “irregularities” in the declension
of the Russian noun, pronoun, and adjective, as well as in the
conjugation of the Russian verb. They will be referred to fre¬
quently.
Rule A: After the consonants r, k, x, >k, q, m, m, u, the
soft vowel si changes to its hard equivalent a,
and the soft vowel 10 changes to its hard equiv¬
alent y.
Rule B: After the consonants r, k, x, w, h, ui, in, (not
u!) the hard vowel m changes to its soft equiv¬
alent H.1
Rule C: After the consonants ik, h, ui, m, u the hard
vowel o, if unstressed, changes to the soft
vowel e.
l Notice, however, that after w and hi the vowel h, though always

written h, is pronounced hard (i. e. like bi): WHTb (zhity) “to live”;
nHiiiH (pishi)! “write”!
TPETHfl yPOK
I THIRD LESSON
Accusative singular of masculines and neuters — Indeclinable

neuters — Present tense of the first conjugation —
Double negative — Use of hto
I. COMMON EXPRESSIONS AND IDIOMS
np-pyccKH In Russian, Russian

B Poccmm In Russia
Bot kto MHoro pa6oTaeT! Here is someone who works
a lot!
Tan MHoro, Kan ... As much as
UeJibifl or aecb jieHb The whole (entire) day
II. READING: HH>KEHEP BPAYH
CeroaHH HHêHep BpayH1 moh rocrb. Oh aMepmcaHeu, a h

pyccKHH. Oh xoporno noHHMaeT no-pyccKH. H cnpauiHBaio
rocTfl:
— Btr He cKyqaeTe b Pocchh?
— HeT, h He CKynaio. f{ paSoTaio Ha 3aBO.a;e. Kor/ta a koh-
uaso padOTaTb, a HHTaK) xtypHaji hjih cjiymaio paano.
— Ah ceHHac Tan MHoro padoTaso, hto h HH'iero2 He HHTaio
h HHHorjxa He cjiymaio paAHO.
— JXa, b Pocchh Bee MHoro pa6oTaiOT. Bbi 3Haexe .noKTopa
UexoBa3?
— Ha, KOHeHHO. HoKTOpa UexoBa Bee 3HaiOT!
— Bot kto MHoro pa66raeT! Hhkto He padoTaeT Tan mho-
ro, KaK jôKTOp UexoB! —
III. VOCABULARY4
aMepHKaneu an American HcypHaji periodical, magazine

ace all, everybody Kor.na when
rocTb (m.) guest kohchho of course
1 BpayH “Brown” (proper name).

2 Hunerd pronounce “niclueuo.”
3 Note that proper names are declined in Russian.
4 The student is reminded to look for the boldfaced words of the
Reading Exercise in the Common Expressions and Grammar sections,
not in the Vocabulary.
32
THIRD LESSON 33
no-pycciffi in Russian, pyccKHfl a Russian, Rus¬

Russian sian (adj.)
paAHo radio HTO what, that1
POCCHfl Russia
Personal Pronouns
Person Singular Plural

First I Mb! we
Second TbI thou, you Bbi, Bbi2 you
Third OH, -a, -6 he, she, it OHH they
Verbs
3HaTb (I)3 to know CKynaTb (I) to be bored

KOHMaTb (I) to end, finish cjiyiuaTb (I) to listen (to)
OOHHMaTb (I) to understand cnpauiMBaib (I) to ask (a ques¬
paOoTaTb (I) to work tion)
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Accusative case
1. Its use. One of the principal uses of the accusative

case is to express the direct object; that is, the person or thing
immediately affected by the action expressed in -the verb.
It answers the question “whom? ” “what? ”
Oh HHTaeT xcypHaji. He is reading the periodical.
Oh 3HaeT sto MecTO He knows this place.
2. Its form. The accusative singular of masculine nouns
1 Consult note on p. 35 for the use of tto.

2 The personal pronoun tm is used when addressing relatives,
close friends, children, and animals. Otherwise the polite personal
pronoun bm should be used. The capitalized form of Bbi is used mainly
when addressing one person in writing. It is always followed by the
plural form of the verb. See p. 35.
For an explanation of the use of this device of indicating the
conjugation of a verb see p. 35.
34 TPETMH yPOK
that indicate inanimate things, and of all neuter nouns, is

exactly like their nominative:
Hard1 Soft Soft1
.. iNommative CTOJI My36H AO>KAb

Masculine ,
Accusative CTOJI My3efi AOHvAb
,T , Nominative M0CTO nojie pyxcbe
Neuter , ,.
Accusative MeCTO nojie pym-e
The accusative of masculine nouns that indicate animate

beings (persons, animals, but not plants) has the ending -a
when “hard” and -h when “soft”:
Hard Soft
Nominative AOKTOp rocTb

Accusative AOKTOpa rocTfli
Oh xoporno 3HaeT noKTopa. He knows the doctor well.

Oh cnpamHBaeT toctsi. He asks the guest.
When a soft neuter noun has the stress on the ending,
the e of the ending appears as e in the nominative and accu¬
sative cases: Nom. pyxcbe; Acc. pyxcbe “the rifle.77
Neuter nouns of foreign origin such as pa/uto “radio,77

Meipo “subway,” najibTo “overcoat,” and khho “movie” never
change in form (are not declined). Adjectives modifying them,
however, are declined.
B. Verb
Russian verbs fall into two basic groups according to the

type of endings which they take in their conjugation. We shall
call these two basic groups the first and second conjugations,
respectively. In this lesson is introduced the present tense of
the regular first conjugation.2 The regular verb HHTaxb “to
read” is used as an example.
1. To conjugate this type of verb in the present tense, drop
from the infinitive form unTaTb the ending -Tb.3
1 See Introduction II for an explanation of the terms “hard” and
“soft.”
2 For the second conjugation, see Lesson 8.
3 The infinitive of Russian verbs usually ends in -Tb; sometimes
in -th or -Hb.
THIRD LESSON 35
2. To the resulting stem nma - add the personal endings

-k>, -euibs -et, -eM? -ere, -iot,
thus:
Person Singular
First H HHTa-K) I am reading; I read
Second familiar tli HHTa-eiub you are reading; you read
Third OH, OHa OHO he, she, it is reading; reads
HHTa-eT
Person Plural
First Mbi HHTa-ewi we are reading; we read
Second familiar Bbl HHTa-eTe you are reading; you read
and polite
Third OHH HHTa-lOT they are reading; they read
Note: Beginning with this lesson, verbs are given in a spe¬

cial section of the Lesson-Vocabulary. Verbs of the first conju¬
gation, unless irregular, will be given in the vocabulary fol¬
lowed by the Roman numeral I, thus: HHTaTb(I) to read.
C. The double negative

The double negative, avoided in English, is used in Russian.
The negative particle He is never omitted no matter how many
other negative words are used and it always immediately
precedes the word it negates:
Oh HHHero He HHTaeT. He does not read anything.

Lit.: He nothing not reads.
Hhkto He HHTaeT. Nobody reads.
Lit.: Nobody not reads.
Oh HHKorna He HHTaeT. He never reads.
Note that the He usually follows the other negative parts

of the sentence: hhkto He HHTaeT; HHHero He 3Haer.
Use of hto
Mto is used both as an interrogative pronoun:
4to oh HHTaeT? What is he reading?
and as a conjunction:
51 TaK MHoro padoTaio, hto h HHHero He HHTaio.
I work so much that I read nothing.
The conjunction hto is always preceded by a comma.
4to, the interrogative pronoun is always stressed;
4to, the conjunction is never stressed.
36 TPETMFt yPOK
V. QUESTIONS
1. Kto — HHHceHep Epayn? 2. FIoHKMaeT ah oh no-pyccKH?

3. F/*epaSoTaer nroiceHep BpayH? 4. KorAa oh HHTaeT xcypHaA?
5. KorAa oh cAymaeT paAHO? 6. Mhoto ah My ceHuac paSoTaen?
7. MHTaeM ah mli ceftuac? 8. CjiymaeM ah mbi cennac paAHO?
9. Kan Bee paSoraioT b Pocchh? 10. Kto 3Haer AOKTOpa Ue-
xoBa?
Exercise with Grammar A
Read and supply endings wherever necessary:
1. Hue Moft (aom) ? 2. H cjiymaio (paAHO). 3. Tbi HHTaeuib

(}KypHaji). 4. MroKeHep BpayH — moh (toctb). 5. Tbi cnpawH-
saeuib (rocTb). 6. $1 3Haio sto (3AaHne). 7. 3Haeuib ah tm
(aoktop) UexoBa? 8. H He paSoiaio Tax mhoto KaK stot (aok-
TOp). 9. 3to 3AaHne — (3aBOA), a to — (rocnirrajib). 10. ToBa-
pam BpayH — (nmKeHep), a TOBapHui, MexoB — (aoktop).
11. Oh cnpauiHBaeT (aoktop). 12. Oh He noHHMaeT (Apyr).
Exercises with Grammar B
a. Conjugate in the present tense.
1. H paSoTaio Ha 3aBOAe. 2. H uHTaio acypHaA.
b. Supply the correct present tense forms of the verbs in

parentheses:
1. PAe tbi (paOoTaTb)? 2. Uto oh (uHTarb)? 3. OHa (cAy-

rnaTb) paAHO. 4. Mbi (3HaTb) sto 3AaHHe? 5. Ohh (cnpauiHBaTb)
AOKTopa. 6. Bh ceroAHH He (paOoTaTb)? 7. Tbi (cKyuaTb) b
Pocchh? 8. Jfa, h He (noHHMaTb) no-pyccKH. 9. Ohh (paOoTaTb)
ueAbift ACHb. 10. Moh rocTb xopowo (noHHMaTb) no-pyccKH.
Exercise with Grammar C
Change the following sentences into the negative, using the

words in parentheses:
1. Oh4 HHTaeT (HHHero). 2. Cefluac paOoTaeT (hhkto).

3. Oh cAymaeT paAHO (HHKOFAa) 4. Tbi cKynaewb (khkotah).
THIRD LESSON 37
VH. TRANSLATION INTO RUSSIAN

A
1. My guest is an engineer. 2. He is an American. 3. He
understands Russian well. 4. He is not bored in Russia. 5. He
is working at a plant. 6. When he finishes working, he listens
[to] the radio or reads a periodical. 7. Everybody (all) works
a lot in Russia. 8. I work so much now that I do not read
anything. 9. My guest knows Doctor Chekhov. 10. Here is one
who works a lot! 11. Nobody works as much as Doctor
Chekhov.
B
1. What is Doctor Petrov reading? 2. He is reading a
periodical. 3. He reads slowly. 4. He does not understand
Russian very well. 5. Do you understand Russian? 6. Yes, I
understand Russian well and read Russian very quickly. 7. Do
you (pi.) listen to the radio? 8. Yes, we listen to the radio, and
when we listen, we are never bored. 9. I ask Mr. Pavlov: Do
you know the mechanic, Mr. Chekhov? 10. Yes, he answers,
I know Mr. Chekhov very well. 11. How does he work? 12. He
works well and very quickly, day and night. 13. Fine, thank
you, Mr. Pavlov! 14. You are my friend. 15. I ask and you
answer quickly. 16. Thank you! Good bye.
HETBEPTbIR YPOK
FOURTH LESSON
Prepositional singular of masculines and neuters—Prepositions

b, ea, o — Verbs Kyrnaxb, ecxb “to eat” — Use of rjxe and
KorM — ecTb “there is,” “there are”
yxpoM In the morning

Jlmu In the daytime, during the day
Benepoiw In the evening
Ha odejot For dinner
«PyccKHft Hapon> “The Russian People”
O H6M? About what?
II. READING: FOCnOAHH flETPOB
Moh (JjaMHJiHH — riexpoB. Moft Apyr Hb&h h h padoTaeM b

ropoê. Moh #pyr — ÔKTop. Oh padoTaeT b rociiHTajie. ft pa-
doTaio b damce.
B 3âHHH, rue h padoxaio, ecxb pecropaH. Moh £pyr h h
nacTo TaM odercaeM.
Ha ode# b pecTopaHe Mbi HHorâ e^HM cyn. HBaH Bcerâ
ecx mhco, a a Haoro ew TOJibno cbip, xjied h Macjio.
ft padoTaio pejibin êHb, a eeqepOM a Bcerâ ôMa. JJoMa
h MyMaio 06 ox^bixe. HoMa Moe Meero Ha AHBane! ft cjiymaio
paiXHO HJIH HHTaiO. ft
HaCTO HHTaiO >KypHajI «PyCCKHH HapOA».
Ceftnac b Hcypeajie a qHraio o noaxe Ilyin khhc1.
YxpoM h onnTb b ropoê h onnxb padoTaio yeJibiH jxeHb b
baHKe.
in. VOCABULARY
danK bank ropon city

Beqep evening AHBaH divan, sofa
Bcerna always
1 Aleksandr Sergeevich Pushkin (1799-1837) is generally consi¬

dered the father of modem Russian literature and its greatest repre¬
sentative.
38
FOURTH LESSON 39
MHOFAS sometimes pecTopaH restaurant

Macjso blitter cyn soup
MeCTO place, room cwp cheese
MSI CO meat TOJIbKO only
napoA people, nation xjie6 bread
onsn'b again Macro frequently, oL'Ien
OTAbIX rest
Verbs
AeAaib (I) to do oOeAaib (I) to dine

AyMaxb (I) to think (Cf. “Grammar” B and D.
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Prepositional case
1. Its use. As the name implies, the prepositional case

can be used only after certain prepositions.
With the preposition o (06, 660)1 it renders the English

preposition “about,” “concerning”:
Tbi AyMaeiiib o Apyre. You think about [your]

friend.
Oh AyMaeT 06 oTAbixe. He thinks about rest.
With the prepositions b (bo)2 “in” and na “on,” this case

serves to express the position of an object or person. It an¬
swers the question “where?”:3
H padoTaio b ropQA®. I am working in the city.

Ha CTOAe xjie6 h m4cao. On the table are bread and
butter.
2. Its form. The prepositional singular of masculine and

neuter nouns ends in -e.
1 06 is used before vowels: 06 oumixe, 660 before certain double

consonants: 060 mhg “about me.”
2 Bo is used before certain double consonants: bo mh& “in me.”
3 For the use of b and Ha with the accusative see Grammar
Section A of Lesson 5.
40 HETBEPTblH YPOK
An important exception are neuter nouns in -tie (3AaHHe),

which end in -h:
Hard Soft Soft
Nominative CTGJI My sen AO>KAb

Masculine AO At AC
Prepositional CTOJie My3ee
Nominative MeCTO nojie 3A2HHe

Neuter MecTe nojie 3AaHHH.
Prepositional
B. Verb. The verbs KyiuaTb and ecib “to eat”
1. Both ecTb and Kyinaxb mean “to eat” Ecib is by far the
more widely used term.
H cm cyn. I eat soup.

Mw e/uiM AOMa. We eat at home.
KyiuaTb is found only in polite forms and is usually used

in the second person:
Bbi Kyuiaere raM? Do you eat there?
2. Conjugation in the present tense of the “irregular”

verb ecTb “to eat”:
First H eiw ml>i gamm

Second th euib Bbi eAHTe
Third oh, ona, oho ecT ohh caht
C. Tae and KorAa as interrogative adverbs and

as conjunctions
TAe “where” and KorAa “when” are used in Russian as
they are in English:
a. as interrogative adverbs:
FAe bli odeAaeTe? Where do you dine?
KorAa Bbi obeAaeTe? When do you dine?
FOURTH LESSON 41
b. as conjunctions, joining two clauses:

yi 31-iaio, rue bl>i odeâeTe. I know where you dine.
>1 3i-iaio, Konia bli ode/iaere. I know when you dine.
Remember that in Russian dependent clauses are always
set off by commas.
D. Edb “there is,” “there are”
Ecib must be used whenever the fact of the existence of
a person or a thing is to be established:
1. Ecib xjied? Is there bread?
JXa, ecib or simply: Ecib! Yes, there is!
On the other hand whenever the existence is not in
question, ecib is not used:
2. rê xjied? Where is the bread?
Xjied Ha CTOjie. The bread is on the table.
Notice that in these sentences the existence of bread is not
questioned, the query refering to its location only. (For the
negative “there is, there are not,” see Lesson 6, Grammar
Section C.)
V. QUESTIONS
I.Kto padoTaeT b ropo,ae? 2. rê padoTaeT aoktop PiBaHOB?
3. Uae padoTaeT IleTpoB? 4. EcTb jih pecTopaH b 3a,aHHH, me
IleTpoB padoTaeT? 5. Macrro jih FleTpOB h MBaH TaM odeaaiOT?
6. Mto ohh HHorM ejx&T Ha o6&a b pecTOpaHe? 7. Bcema jih
MeaH ecT mhco? 8. Mto IleTpoB uacTO ecT Ha ode#? 9. Fê
IleTpoB BenepoM? 10. Mto êjiaeT IleTpoB BenepoM? 11. Mto oh
nacTo HHTaeT? 12. O neM oh uHTaeT ceftnac b xcypHajie «PyccKHH
HapoA»?
Exercises with Grammar A

a. From the Reading Exercise write out all nouns,1 giving their
gender, case, and English meaning, for example:
(JjaMHjiHH feminine nominative “last name”
i Leave out those in “idiomatic” expressions.

42 HETBEPTblH YPOK
b. Supply the correct case forms of the nouns in parentheses :
1. Ohh pa6oTaiOT b (ropoA). 2. B (3AaHHe), rê h pa66-

Taio, ecTb (pecTopaH). 3. Tbi ceroAHfl oSeAaeuib b (pecTopaH).
4. Korâ h paboTaio, h He AyMaro 06 (otamx). 5. Ohh hhtuiot
b (txypHaji) o (ÔKTOp) UexoBe. 6. OHa ceroAHH tie paSoTaeT
Ha (3aBQA). 7. Ha (ctoji) xjied, chip h Macao. 8. JXOMa Moe Me-
cto Ha (^HBaH). 9. Mom ôm b (ropoA). 10. Moii Apyr padoTaer
b (rocnHTajib), a h b (daHK).
Exercise with Grammar B

In the following phrases supply present tense forms of ecib or
uyuuaTb “to eat,” according to context:
1. J/TpoM h.cbip, a BenepOM a.mjico. 2. Qua.
■cyn. 3.oh xjie6? 4. /fa, oh.h xjied, h Macao h cup.
5.bh cyn? 6. Ha, mm hhotM . cyn. 7. Ti,i . b
pecTopaHe turn AOMa? 8. YipoM h.AOMa, a ahcm h BeaepOM
h.b pecTOpane. 9. Ohh nacro.TyT. 10. A rAe tbi.?
11. Bh TyT HHKOiTta He.? 12. JX&, mm nacTO TyT.
Exercises with Grammar C and D
Supply nte or KOiAa according to context (state whcHicr they
are used as interrogative adverbs or as conjunctions) and place ecib
“there is, are” wherever necessary:
1.pecropaH b 3ashhh? 2. £a, b 3Ahhhh,.h pa6o-

Taio.pecTopaH. 3.h HHTaio, a hhkotah tie CKynaio.
4. Oh ne 3HaeT,.aoktop Hcxob. 5. Oh cripauiHBaeT Apyra,
.>KypHaji. 6.bm KymaeTe? — B pecTopaHe. 7.Ty?
paAHO? 8. JXa,.! 9.bm cJiyinaeTe paAHo? — B KOMHare.
10.bhi CJiyinaeTe paAHo? — BenepOM. 11.oh aomb,
OH HHKOFAa He paOoTaeT. 12.oh padoTaeT? — Ha 3aBOAe?
13. He 3Haio,.oh padoraeT. 14.xjie6 h Macao? —
Ha CToae. 15.xjied Ha CToae? JX a,.!

A
1. My name is Petrov. 2. I am a doctor. 3. I work in a

hospital in the city. 4. In the building where I work [there]
is a restaurant. 5. I often eat there. 6. For dinner I eat soup
and meat. 7. Sometimes I eat only bread, butter, and cheese.
8. My friend Ivan always eats bread, butter, soup, and meat.
9. When you work all day, in the evening you think of rest.
FOURTH LESSON 43
10. In the evening my friend Ivan and I are frequently at

home. 11. We listen to the radio or read. 12. Now I am reading
about the poet Pushkin in the periodical “Russian People.”
13. In the morning we are again in the city and work all day.
B
1. Where do you (sing, fam.) eat? 2. I often eat at home
and sometimes at the restaurant. 3. What do you (pi.) eat?
4. When do you (sing, pol.) eat? 5. We always eat soup and
meat for dinner and sometimes bread and butter. 6. Where do
you work? 7. In the morning and during the day, I work in the
bank. 8. In the evening I work at the hospital. 9. Where is the
periodical? 10. There on the table! 11. What does Mr. Chekhov
read in the periodical “The Russian People”? 12. I don’t know
what he is reading about. 13. Of course, he is again reading
about the engineer, Mr. Pavlov. 14. Mrs. Semyonova always
thinks about rest—in the morning, in the daytime, in the
evening. 15. At home her (ee) place is on the sofa. 16. In the
evening she is always at the movies. 17. She never works, never
reads, and never listens to the radio. 13. She is bored all day long.
mibm ypoK
I FIFTH LESSON
Prepositions b, Ha — Present tense of the “irregular” verbs

KJiaCTb, 5KHTb, HATH, exaTb
HaSt CHer It is snowing

MAex AoiKAb It is raining
Hy! Well!
Hy h AeHb! What a day!
Hnnero! It does not matter!
Bot Kan! Is that so!
Kslk noiKHEaere? \
- How are yon?
Kan iKHBeuib? /
Hah ... hah Either ... or
HtO HAeT B KHHO? What is playing at the
movies?
ExaTb Tan exaTb! If we want to go, we had
better go!
May! I am coming!
EAeM? Are we going (leaving) ?
Ha aBT0M06HAe By car, in the car
Ha MeTpo On the subway
CeroAHH BenepOM This evening
II. READING: EXATb TAK EXATb!
— Hy, IlaBeji HnKOAaeBHn, eAeM?

— Zla, Aa cennac. A Bbi 3iiaeTe HAer cner! Hah sto
AO*Ab?.Hy h Aenb!
— HHHero! Mbi eAeM ea aBTOMo6HAe. A Koah xoace eA«T b
ropoA?
— HeT, Koah xenepb iKHBex b ropoAe.
— Bot nan!.3ApaBCTByH, Mania1 nan >KHBenib? A tw
eAeuib b ropoA?
— Hex, h ceftnac HAy Ha ypoK, a hotom «a coSpaHHe. A Bbi
ceroAHH He padoTaere, TOBapmn rieTpoB?
1 Mama is an endearing diminutive form of Mapita “Mary."
44
FIFTH LESSON 45
— KoHe^Ho, h paboTaio. 51 cenuac e/iy npaMo Ha 3aBOA-

A KyAa bh HAexe cero/msi BenepoM, FIaBe;i HmcojiaeBMu?
— 5? eme He 3Haio. Mjih b Teaxp hjih Ha Konaepr hjih b
KHHO. A HTO CerOAHH HACT B KHHO?
— 51 He 3Haro.Hy, IlaBeji HHKOJiaesHq, exaTb Tan exari>!
— Xoporno, xopomo.May! Ao-cBHAaHHH Mama!
III. VOCABULARY
aBTOMObHJIb (m.) auto, car npflMo straight, directly

rapam garage cHer snow
eme yet, still, co6paHHe meeting, gathering,
more collection
KOHUepT concert dyAeHT student
nyM where, whereto TeaTp theater
HO hut Tenepb now, nowadays
noe3A train Tome also, too
nOTOM afterwards, then TpaMBait streetcar
ypoK lesson
(Verbs are in Grammar B.)
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Prepositions b (bo) and Ha (continued)
1. In Lesson 4 it was explained that b and ea with the

prepositional case express position (location). Now we must
remember that these same prepositions when used with the
accusative case express direction (motion) into or on a place,
respectively. They answer the question “where to?”
H exy b ropoA. I am going (driving) into the

city (down town).
Oh KJiaAer mypHaJi Ha ctoji. He puts (places) the periodical
on the table.
2, Special uses of the preposition Ha:
a. Ha with the prepositional case often renders the

English preposition “at”:
Oh Ha KOHuepTe. He is at the concert.
Oh4 Ha ypoxe. She is at [her] lesson.
46 IMTbin yPOK
b. Ha with the accusative often renders “to,” “into”:

Mbi haSm Ha KOHUepT. We are going'to the concert.
Qhh HAyT Ha ypoK. They are going to [their] les¬
son.
The preposition Ha instead of b is ordinarily used when

attendance at a function is expressed:
Ha KOHuepTe, Ha ypoKe, Ha o6cac. At the concert, lesson, dinner.
B. “Irregular” first conjugation verbs

Many first conjugation verbs have endings that differ
slightly from those we studied in Lesson 3. Instead of ending in
-K>, -euib, and so on, these verbs have the present tense endings
-y, -euib, -ei, -eiw, eie, -yx when stressed, and -y, -euib, -eT, -eM,
-eTe, -yx when unstressed. At the same time their stem con¬
sonants usually change, as we can see in the sample verbs
KjiacTb “to put” and >KHTb “to live”:
Present tense of KJiacTb “to put, place”:

First H KJia/iy mh KJiaAew
Second Tbi KjraAeuib bh KJiaAexe
Third OH, OHa, OHO KJiaAST ohh KJiaAyr
Present tense of jkhtb “to live”:

First H JKHBy Mbi ACHBeM
Second Tbi X(HBeUIb bh jKHBere
Third OH, OHa, OHO >KHBer OHH ACHByr
C. The “‘irregular” verbs hath and exaTb
Present tense of hath3 “to go”:

First h HAy MH HAeM
Second TH HAeuib bh HAere
Third Oil, OHa, OHO HACT ohh HAyr
1 See also Lesson 8.

FIFTH LESSON 47
means “to go on foot.” There are, however, some

Mathi
important idiomatic expressions using hath, such as:
Mact cner. It is snowing.
HAST AO>KAb. It is raining.
Hto hast b khho? What is being shown in the
movies?
floeSA HACT. The train is going, running.
TpaMBaft hact. The streetcar is going,
running.
In order to express the English “to go” in the meaning of

“to go by vehicle,” “to ride,” the verb exaTb must be used in
Russian.
Present tense of exaTb1 “to go by vehicle,” “to ride”:

First e eAy Mbi eAeM

Second th eAeuib bm eAeTe
Third oh, oHa, oho eAer ohh eAyT
Note that exaTb has the stress on the first syllable through¬
out its conjugation, in contrast to hath, which has it on the
last. Also notice the a in the conjugational forms instead of
the x of the infinitive.
“Irregular” verbs such as the above that do not follow

exactly the conjugational pattern of the regular first con¬
jugation (see Lesson 3: HHTaTb) will be given in four “key”
forms:
First Pers. Second Pers. Third Pers.

Infinitive Singular Singular Plural
KJiaCTb a KAaAy tm KJiaAenib OHH KjsaAyT
Of these forms, the second person singular is the key to

all forms not explicitly given, and fixes the position of the
stress for all persons, except the first person singular:
Tbi KJiaAeiiib: oh, -a, -6 KjiaAeT; mm kji3acm; bm KJiaAeTe

TbI IKHBeUIbl oh, -a, -6 HCHBeT; mm h^bbSm; Bbl HCHBeTe
Tbi HAeuib: oh, -a, -6 HAeTJ MM HAeMJ Bbl HAeTe
Tbi eAeuib: oh, -a, -6 eAer; mm eAeMj bm eAere
1 See also Lesson 8.

48 iiHTbin ypoK
When a verb is completely irregular, its full present tense

conjugation and all other irregular forms will be given either
in the grammar section or in the Lesson-Vocabularies.
V. QUESTIONS
1. KyAa mh hacm ceroAHH? 2. KaK mh eAew? 3, Hast ah

AO>KAb? 4. Hact ah chct? 5. Eact ah Koah b ropoA? 6. Fag
>KHBeT Tenepb Koah? 7. Eact ah Mama b ropoA? 8* KyAa. eAOT
Mama? 9. PadoTaeT ceroAim TOBapmu IlcTpOB? 10. KyAa cast
TOBapHiu FleTpOB? 11. Eact oh Ha MCTpo hah na asroMoGHAe?
12. KyAa hact ElaBeA HnKOAacBmi? 13. 3iiacT ah oh, hto hagt
CerOAHH B KHHO?
VI. GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all nouns, giving their
gender, case, and English meaning. (For pattern see Lesson 4.)
b. Supply endings wherever necessary:
1. Moil aBTOModHAb b rapa>K—2. J/rpOM, h gay b ropOA—•

3. BeuepoM mh hagm b VeaTp—. 4. Bm eAere na bbtomoGha—.
5. H paGoraio b 6aHK—. 6. Oh AyMaeT o Apyr—. 7. Mto hact
ceroAHH b khh—t 8. Ceitaac 0Ha Ha ypoK—. 9. Cgfoaha senepoM
mh HAeM Ha codpaHH—. 10. Ha codpaHH— hhkto He cnyuaeT.
11. Haere bh Ha KOHgepT—? 12. HeT, h eAy b ropoA h hay b
My3e—t a noTOM Ha ypoK—.
c. Supply the prepositions b or Ha according to context:
1. Oh eAGT.ropoA- 2. hay.ypoK. 3. Oh4 KAaAer

atypHaA.ctoa. 4. Xag6.cTOAe. 5. Tbi ACHBemb.
ropOAe? 6. Mbi hagm ceroAHH BenepoM. KOHuepT. 7. ,D(6Ma
Moe MecTO.AHBane. 8. Eagihb th.Teaip hah.
khho? 9. AbtomoGhab. rapa>Ke. 10. Ohh Tenepb .
KOHuepTe hah.ypoKe? Ohh . codpaHHH.
Exercises with Grammar B and C

a. Conjugate in the present tense:
1. % ACHBy b ropoAe. 2. H KAaAy mypHaA Ha ctoa. 3. fl hay

Ha coGpaHHe. 4. H eAy b ropoA.
FIFTH LESSON 49
b. Supply the correct present tense forms of the verbs in

parentheses:
1. Kto (hath) b My3en? 2. Tbi (exaTb) Ha aBTOModHJie?

3. Ohh (exaTb) Ha codpaHHe. 4. Mbi (hath) Ha ypoK. 5. Ohs
(hath) b rocnHTajib. 6. PAe (xcHTb) HHmeHep HeTpoB? 7. Oh
(x<HTb) TyT. 8. H (}KHTb) b ropoAe. 9. R (cnpaniHBaTb) Apyra:
10. Mto (hath) ceroAHH b khho? 11. (Hath) CHer hjih ao>kab?
12. (Hath) noe3A? 13. Hex, noe3A cennac He (hath). 14. Hto
Bbl (KJiaCTb) Ha CTOA?

A
1. Pavel Nikolayevich, are we going downtown (into the

city) today? 2. No, it is raining and snowing. 3. What a day!
4. It doesn’t matter! 5. We are going by car. 6. Is KoPa also
going? 7. No, KoPa lives in the city now. 8. M&sha, are you
going downtown? 9. Yes, now I am going to the museum and
in the evening to a meeting. 10. Aren’t you going to the
theater? 11. No, not today. 12. Comrade Petrov, are you
working today? 13. Yes, I am driving straight to the plant.
14. Well, Pavel, well Masha, if we want to go, we had
better go!
B
1. Where does Comrade Petrov live? 2. Citizen Petrov lives
In the city. 3. Where do you live? 4. We also live in the city.
5. Do they live in this (stom) house? 6. No they live and
work in a hospital. 7. Are you going to the museum today?
8. No, today I am going to the theater. 9. What is playing at
the movies? 10. I never know what is playing at the movies.
11. Are you (pol.) driving down town by car today? 12. No,
today I am going on the subway. 13. My car is again in the
garage. 14. But my friend Pavlov is going by car. 15. Do they
always put the magazine on the table? 16. No, they sometimes
put this magazine on the sofa or on a chair. 17. He puts the
bread and the meat on the table. 18. Where do you (sing, fam.)
put the butter? 19. Always on the table, of course! 20. Fine!
Thank you!
50 riHTHR ypoK
ADDITIONAL READING MATERIAL

Based on the vocabulary and grammar of preceding lessons
rocno/jHH COKOJIOB
Moh — Cokojiob. H — AOKTop. Moh 6pQT Mbhh-
HH}K£Hep. Mbi pa66xaeM b ropoAe. yTpoM Mean eêT b ropoA Ha
aBTOMofenê. KorAa oh b ropoAe, oh hagt npHMQ na 3aBOA, rAe
oh pa66Taex.
yTpoM h TO>Ke eAy b ropoA, ho na Merpo. H padoxaio b roc-
nHTajie. Moh Apyr FlaBeA paSoraeT b 6aHKe. B sahhhh, rAe
pa66xaeT FlaBeA ecTb pecTopan. FlaBeA, a h Hb4h nacTO o6eAaeM
raivr. FlaBeA HHorAa ecT hah cyn hah x;ie6 h Macjio. H BcerAa eM
TOAbKO MHCO.
Ha 3aBOAe HBan pa6oraer 6bicrpo h xopowo ueAbin AeHb.
B rocnHTaAe hhkto He paSoxaeT mhoto h h neAbifi AeHb AyMaio
o6 oTAtixe. KorAa HbAh KOHHaeT paSoraTb, oh haSt Ha co6pa-
HHe. Oh CKynaeT AOMa BenepOM!
BenepoM a h&cto aomb. ÔMa a CAymaio paAHO hah hhtak).
HHorAa BenepOM h eAy oriHTb b ropoA- B ropoAe a HAy hah b
TeaTp HAH Ha KOHH,epT HAH B KHHO. Ho KOrAa HAeT CHer HAH
AO>KAb a BcerAa AOMa.
KorAa moh Apyr FlaBeA KonnaeT pa6oTaib, oh b ropoAe h
haSt HHorAa Ha ypox, a HHorAa Ha coSpaHne.
UJECTOi yPOK
1 SIXTH LESSON
Genitive singular of masculines and neuters—Negative expres¬

sions with the genitive — Ck6ju>ko, Majio, mhofo with the
genitive—Prepositions 6es, nocjie, y — Translation of “to
have”—Verbs Monb, yMeib “to be able”
MHTaTb no-pyccKH To read (in) Russian

MHTaTb no-aHrjiMHCKH To read (in) English
H coBceM He yMeio MHTaTb. I cannot read at all.
Mee Bee paBHO, hto tm It's all the same to me (I don’t
AyMaeuib. care) what you think.
Mne h AOMa xopouio. I am just as happy at home.
HH .. . HH Neither . . . nor
II. READING: CErO£Hfl F1PA3/IHHK
Cero^HH hhkto He padoxaeT. CeroAHH npa.3AHHK. Moh 6paT

h h AQMa. BpaT HHxaex y 0KHa, a h cjrymaio p&aho.
— ^to xh ceftnac HHxaemb? — cnpaiHHBaio n 6pkra.
— /iHKKeHca.
— IIo-pyccKH hjih no-anrjiHftcKH?
— KoHeHHO, no-pyccKH; a oneHb imoxo wraio no-aH-
rjIMlftCKH.
— A h coeceM He yMeio MHTaTb no-aHniHftcKH!
— Th Tax Majio HHxaenib, hto h He 3Haio, yMeeuib jih th
MHTaTb no-pyccKH!
— Mne Bee paBHO, mto th ayMaeiub! Th HAeuib ceroAHH
BenepOM Ha codpaHHe b KJiyde?
— HeT, ceroAHa y mchh b KJiy6e hct codpaHHH.
— A hto th Aejiaenib yTpoM?
— H He 3hhk). yTpoM h HHHero He AeJiaio.
— A Kyâ th HAenib nocjie odeAa?
— HHKyAa! MHe h AOMa xopouio!
H xoporno 3Haio 6paxa. Oh HHKorAa He cxynaeT. Oh mohcct
MHTaTb 6e3 OTAblXa, HtJlhlPl A^Hb.
51
HI ECTOR yPOK
52
III VOCABULARY
brother noTOiwy mto because

6paT
here noteiwy why
3ACCb
club npa3^HHK holiday
KJiyO
nowhere npocjxeccop professor
HHKyAa completely,
dinner cobccm
o6en
pen, feather entirely
nepo
letter raw so, thus
nWCbMO
badly yqHTejib (m.) teacher
hjioxo
no-anrjiHficKH English,
in English
Verbs
nacaTb; nmuy, nHiueuib, naniyx to write
(See also Grammar D.)
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Genitive case
1. Its use:
a. One of the principal uses of the genitive case is to

indicate possession. It answers the questions “whose?” “of
what?”:
Rom noKTopa The doctor’s house

)KypHajr y^HTejiH Ha cxojie. The teacher’s magazine is on
the table.
b. In negative expressions the genitive is used instead of

the accusative to express the direct object:
Positive H 3Haio ropo^- I know the city.

Negative H He 3Haio ropojra. I do not know the city.
Lit.: I know not of the city.
c. HeT (He-fecTb) “there is (are) no” is always used with

the genitive case:
Bêcb HeT cTOJia. There is no table here.
Her MecTa. There is no room (space).
SIXTH LESSON 53
d. CKOJibKO “how much, how many,” msjio “little,” “few,”

MHoro “much,” “many,” “a lot” are always followed by the
Genitive case:
CnojibKO xjieba? How much (of) bread?

Mhofo xjie6a Much (of) bread
Majio MHca Little (of) meat
2. Its form:
The genitive singular of masculine and neuter nouns has
the ending -a when hard and -h1 when soft.
Hard Soft Soft

Nominative CTOJI My3 eft AOyKAb
Masculine
Genitive cTOJia My3ea AOHtAfl
Nominative MeCTO nojie

Neuter
Genitive MecTa nOAH
Compare these endings with the accusative endings of the

animate masculine nouns in Lesson 3.
B. Prepositions with the genitive case
The prepositions y at, near

6ea without
nocjie after
are always followed by the genitive case:
H HHTaio y oKHa. I read at the window.
Oh ecT xjieb 6e3 Macjia. He eats bread without butter.
Howie TeaTpa mli eAeM aomoh. After the theater we go home.
Note that the preposition y means “at,” “next to” when

followed by an inanimate noun; it means “at,” “at one’s
home,” “in one’s possession” (See Section C) when followed
by an animate noun.
Oh y CTOjia. He is (stands) at the table.
Oh4 ceimac y AOKropa. She is now at the doctor’s.
CeroAHH mli obeâeM y Apyra. Today we are having dinner
at [our] friend’s home.
For VOwel Mutation Rule, see p. 31.

.14 LLIECTOn yPOK
C. Translation of “to have”
Another very important use of y with the genitive is in

the translation of “to have”:
y 5paTa }KvpHaJi. The brother has a magazine.
Lit.: At the brother’s [is a]
magazine.
Note that the direct object (“magazine”) of the English
sentence becomes the subject in the Russian sentence, thus
appearing in the nominative.
To express “I have, you have, he has,” and so on, y with
the genitive of the personal pronouns h, tm, oh, etc., must
be used:
y MCHH I have y Hac we have

y re6a (fam.) y eac you have
you have
y Bac (pol.)
y Hero he, it has y HHX they have
y Hee she, it has y koto? who has?
EcTb “there is” is used when the fact of possession is in

question:
EcTb y bpaxa >KypHaji? Has the brother a magazine?
Lit.: Is there at the
brother’s a magazine?
Ha, y 6paxa ecTbrnypHa-tf. Yes, the brother has a maga¬
zine.
Negative context is rendered by means of Her (He + eCTb):

y gpaTa Hex xcypHajia. The brother does not have a
magazine.
Notice that Mcypnaji is in the genitive because HeT must

always be used with genitive (see above Ale). The Russian
literally says: “At the brother’s there is not of magazine”.
y MeHfl h y Hero HeT xjieda. I and he do not have bread.
y xe6fl h y Hee hct Maca. You and she do not have
meat.
Hex y eac &pyra? Don’t you have a friend?
y Hac HeT ftpyra. We do not have a friend.
y Koro HeT Apyra? Who does not have a friend?
y hhx HeT Apyra. They do not have a friend.
SIXTH LESSON 55
D, Verb. The “irregular” verb MOHb and the verb yMeTb
Present tense of MOHb “to be able to,” “to be in a position to”:

First h Mory MbI MOHCeM
Second (fam.) TbI MOMClUb Bbi MOHcexe
Third OH, OHa OHO MOlKeT ohh Moryx
Present tense of yMeTb “to be able to,” ‘ ‘to know how to”:

First a yMeio Mbr yMeeM
Second (fam.) Tbi yMeeuib Bbi yMeexe
Third oh, OHa, oho yMeeT ohh yMeiox
It is important to distinguish between the verbs MOHb and

yMeTb:
MoMb is generally used to render physical ability:
Bbi He Mowexe exaTb b ropoA; noe3A He haSt.

You cannot go downtown; the train is not running.
ft He Mory nncaTb! Her nepa! I cannot write! There is no
pen!
YMeTb is generally used to render “to know how,” I. e. to

show mental and/or physical skill:
OHa Tenepb yMeeT HHTaxb no- She knows now how to read
pyccKH. Russian.
ft He yMeK) nacaTb no-pyccKH. I cannot (do not know
how to) write Russian.
V. QUESTIONS
1. Kto ceroAHH padoTaeT? 2. rioneMy 6paT ceroAHH He pa-

doxaeT? 3. Mto AeAaeT 6paT? 4. Hto oh wraer? 5. rioneMy oh
HHTaex /(HKKeHca no-pyccKH? 6. YMeexe ah bli HHTaTb no-aH-
tahhckh? 7. Mhoto ah Bbi HHxaeTe? 8. HAex ah 6paT BenepoM
b KAyS? 9. IloqeMy oh He HAex b KAy6? 10. Hxo AeAaeT oh
yxpoM? 11. KyAa oh hact nocAe odeAa? 12. CKynaeT ah oh
AOMa? 13. Hto oh MOHcex AeAaTb ueAbiii AeHb 6e3 oTAHxa?
56 uiectoh ypoK
a. Supply endings r
1. 3to KOMHara npoc|)eccop—. 2. Hpyr 6par— ceroAHH

AOMa. 3. Rom HHAteHep— b ropoA—. 4. Kan dfiaMHJiHH aoktop—?
5. CKOJibKO xjre6— Ha ctoji—'? 6. Ha CTOJie MHoro XJie6—, ho
Ma.no mhc—. 7. Ha o6£a oh ecT Majio cyn—. 8. % HHTaio b Atyp-
najie TOBapHm— o noaTe FlyuiKHHe. 9. TyT Majio MecT—. 10. 3to
>KypHaji aoktop— Hexosa.
h. Change the following sentences to the negative:
1. Ohh cAymaiOT paAHO. 2. Ha CTOJie hhcbmo. 3. Oh UHTaer

riHCbMo Apyra. 4. B 3AaHHH ecTb TeaTp. 5. H nniuy nncbMO.
6. EcTb xyT nepo? 7. OHa rjibact Acypnaji na ctoji. 8. Ytpom
ohh caht cyn. 9. ABTOMoOHJib b rapajKe. 10. B KJiy6e ceroAHH
coSpaHHe.
Exercises with Grammar A and B
a. Give the correct ease forms of the nouns in parentheses :
1. ABTOMOdHJib y (rapajK). 2. Ytpom h paOoTaio Ha (33-

boa) 6e3 (MexaHHK). 3. nocjre (ypon) mh ha£m odeAaTb. 4.
ceftnac y (aoktop). 5. Oh ceroAHH y (ymErejib) ? 6. riocjie (nan)
ohh eAyT b Kay6. 7. OneHb roioxo achtb 6e3 (Apyr). 8. Hto sto
TaM y (3AaHHe)?
b. Translate the prepositions in parentheses and supply endings :
1. Bpar HHTaeT (at) okh—2. (After) o6eA-~ mh ha£m b

TeaTp. 3. Moh Apyr moacct HHTaTb (without) otahx— pejibift abhb.
4. H He Mory nncaTb (without) nep—5. Ona ceroAHH (at) aok¬
top—. 6. CeroAHH mh oOeAaeM (at) TOBapnm— HsaHOBa. 7. Ohh
He MoryT exaTb b ropoA (without) hbtomoOha—. 8. 3Ta KOMHaTa
(without) okh—\
Exercises with Grammar C
a. Supply the correct case forms of the nouns in parentheses:
1. >KypHaA y (HHraeHep)? 2. Her, y Hero HeT (ncypHaA).

SIXTH LESSON 57
3. EcTb y Bac (aom) b ropoAe? 4. Hex, y Hac TaM HeT (aom).

5. Hex jih y (Apyr) (aBxoMoSHJib) ? 6. Hex, y (xoBapHm) HBa-
HOBa Hex (aBxoMo6HAb). 7. CeroAHH yxpoM y nac Hex hh (xjie6),
hh (MacAo), hh (cbip). 8. Y (6pax) ceroAHH rocxb.
b. Translate the phrases in parentheses:
1. (I have) KHnra, a (you have) mypn&ji. 2. (They have)

BcerAa uan, xjie6 u cbip. 3. (We have) ceroAHH rocxb. 4. (She
has) xoAbKo AHBaH h ctoji. 5. (He has) ceHuac ypox. 6. (Who has)
xtypHaA «PyccKHH HapoA?» 7. (I have) ceroAHH npa3AHHK.
8. (Thou hast not) paAHO? 9. Hex, (I have) paAHO. 10. (They have
not) aBXOMOdHJia. 11. (The guest has) cjooxorpac|)HH. 12. (The
brother does not have) cxojia. 13. (Who does not have) xjie6a?
14. (The engineer has) rapaxt h aBXOMoSHAb.
Exercises with Grammar D
I. H Mory hath b Teaxp. 2. H yMeio HHTaxb no-pyccKH.
b. Give the correct present tense forms of the verbs in paren¬

theses :
1. Moh Apyr (cKyqaxb) 6e3 TeaTpa. 2. Tbi (nncaTb) nncbMO
ceHHac? 3. Mbi (Moub) exaTb b ropoA Ha bbtomoShag. 4. Bbi
(yMeTb) nncaxb no-pyccKH? 5. Bbi (Moub) Tenepb hath Ha ypox.
6. OHa (yMeTb) HHxaTb no-aHFAHHCKH. 7. Oh4 He (MOUb) nncaTb
6e3 nepa. 8. H He (Monb) ecxb xax mhoto cyna. 9. (YMexb) tbi
HHTaTb no-pyccKH? 10. JXa; h (uHTaTb) no-pyccKH, ho eme ne
(yMeTb) nncaTb.

A
1. My brother and I are at home. 2. We do not work
today. 3. Today is a holiday and nobody works. 4. I am lis¬
tening to the radio, and my brother is reading Dickens. 5. He
reads [it] in Russian. 6. He cannot read English. 7. I read
English very well but I cannot read Russian. 8. I read very
little. 9. [My] brother thinks that I cannot read at all. 10. But
I don’t care what he thinks. 11. I am now going downtown.
12. I ask [my] brother: “Where are you going today?”
13. “Nowhere! I am just as happy at home.” 14. “Well, good
bye!” 15. My friend and I are having dinner at the club.
16. After dinner we are going to the theater.
58 LUECTOEl yPOK
B
1. How are you? 2. Quite well, thank you! 3. Why can you
not go after the theater to the meeting at the club? 4. Because
I cannot finish [my] lesson during the day. 5. I cannot work
fast. 6. I don’t know how to write Russian. 7. My wife does
not write English. 8. Do you (pol.) know how to read and write
English? 9. Yes, I am now writing a letter in English. 10. I
always work at [my] brother’s home. 11. Why do you not work
in the house of [your] teacher? 12. Because [my] teacher
does not own (have) a house. 13. He lives in the house of [my]
brother. 14. Do you (sing, fam.) own a car? 15. No, I can live
very well without a car in the city. 16. I can go on the subway.
17. And a streetcar also goes directly downtown. 18. Who does
have a car? 19. The engineer Pavlov owns a car. 20. Where does
he live? 21. He lives with us and is (just) now driving down¬
town. 22. Thank you! Good bye!
CEflbMOR yPOK
I SEVENTH LESSON
Dative singular of masculines and neuters; preposition k (ko)

— Nominative (and accusative) singular of adjectives —
âeaxb “to give”

PaHO yTpoM Early in the morning
Ha ABOpe Out of doors, outside
Lit.: On the courtyard
Ha He6e hh oojiaha [There is] not a cloud in the sky
Ha sasTpan For breakfast
K 3aBTpaKy For breakfast, by breakfast time
K o6e^y For dinner, by dinner time
K y>KMHy For supper, by supper time
iXaiOT They give, one is given
II. READING: B KOJIXQ3E
PaHO yrpoM xoBapnm Bojikob oxKpbiBaex okho. Ilocjie

AOkah Ha ABOpe xoporno! Bo3Ayx cb(ukhh,. He6o ciiHee: Ha ne6e
hh odjraKa!
ToBapHm, Bojikob nomex h paboxaex b KOJixo3e.
B KOJixo3e Bee 3a.BxpaKaiox pano. K aaBTpaKy xoBapniu
Bojikob HAex b dojibiuoe, HOBoe 3,a;aHHe. 3xo KyxHH. Ha 3aBTpaK
TOBapHmy BojiKOBy âw)T nepHbift hjih 6ejibiH xjie6, Macjio h Chip.
Oh nbeT ropaHHfi nail hjih mojioko.
Flocjie 3aBTpaKa xoBapHiu Bojikob e&ex b nojie. ZteHb :acap-
khA: na He6e hh odJiana!
K o6e^y oh eêr odpaxHo b kojixo3, a iioxom onaxb
padoxaex b nojie 6e3 oxjubixa.
BenepoM Bojikob Hjiex k xoBapmuy. Ohh HAyx b KJiyd. B
KJiy6e xopomee pa^Ho. TaM hhkxo He CKynaex.
59
CEJIbMOH yPOK
60
HI. VOCABULARY
white HOBbifi, -'an, -'oe new

6eJiwfi,-'an, -'oe
big, large oOjiaKO cloud
OojibUiOM, -an, -oe
air o6paiHO back
B03AYX
ropflHHH, -'an, -'ee hot1 njioxofi, -an, -oe bad
court, yard nocjieAHHfi, -'hh, -'ee last
ABOp
>KapKnfl, -'aa, -'oe hot2 paHO oa rly
3aBTpaK breakfast cBe>KHfi, -'an, -'ee fresh
KaKoft, -aa, -6e which, what chhhh, -'ah, -'ee blue
kind of CJIOBO word
KOJIXQ3 collective y«HH supper
farm xopouiHH, -'an, -'ee good
MOJIOKO milk qaii tea
sky qepHwfi, -'an, -'oe black
He6o
Verbs
3aBTpaKaTb (I) to breakfast, have breakfast

3aKpbIBaTb (I) to close
o6T>JICHHTb (I) to explain
OTKpbIBaTb (I) to open
nHTb; nbio, nbeuib, nbidT to drink
yiKHHaTb (I) to sup, have supper
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Dative case
1. Its use:
a. The dative case is used to indicate the recipient. It is

the case of the indirect object. It answers the questions “to
whom?” “to what?”:
Oh nHiueT Apyry rracbMO. He writes [his] friend a letter.
b. The preposition u (ko) is always followed by the dative

case. When used with reference to persons, k (ko) generally
means “to”; when used of things, k (ko) generally means
“toward”:
i “Hot” to the touch: ropHHHfi nafl “hot tea.”
a “Hot” as to temperature: HdipKHfi fleHb “hot day.”
SEVENTH LESSON 61
51 HAy k Apyry. I am going to [my] friend.

Eêre bh k 6paTy? Are you going (riding) to
[your] brother?
51 HAy k oKHy. I am going to (toward) the
window.
c. With other verbs1 the English preposition “to” is
usually rendered in Russian simply by the dative case without
any 'preposition'.
H Aaio 6paTy acypHaJi. I am giving the periodical to
[my] brother.
51 obTbHCHHK) Apyry ypoK. I am explaining the lesson
to [my] friend.
Note that the verb OTBeuaTb is used with the dative and
the verb cnpauiHBaTb with the accusative:
51 cnpauiHBaio yqHTejisi. I ask the teacher.
51 oTBenaK) yqHTeAK). I answer (to) the teacher.
CnpauiHBaTb can also be used with y and the genitive:
51 cnpauiHBaio y ym-rrejia. I ask the teacher.
2. Its form. The dative singular of masculine and neuter
nouns ends in -y when hard and in -so when soft:
Hard Soft Soft
,, i. Nominative CTO A My3en AO>KAb

Masculine _ ,.
Dative CTOAy My3eio AOACAH)
,, , Nominative MeCTO nojie 3AaHHe

Neuter n 3AaHHIO
Dative Mecty noAio
B. Adjective
1. Basic types of nominative singular endings:
Masculine Neuter Feminine
a. HOBblH | HOBOe 1 HOBaa 1

b2. dOJIblUOH l AQM 6ojibiu6e V 3AanHe 6oAbman • KOMHaTa
c3. nocAeAHHfi J nocjieAnee J nocAeAHflH J
1 Transitive verbs (verbs taking the direct object).
2 Type (b) adjectives always have the stress on their endings.
3 Type (c) adjectives are called “soft” because their endings always
begin with a “soft” vowel; most of them designate place and/or time.
G2 CEJIbMOR yPOK
2. Note that the accusative of adjectives modifying

inanimate masculine nouns and all neuter nouns is exactly
like their nominative:
Nominative hobhh ctoji; nocjie^Hee cjiobo; dojibiiioe 3&aHHe
Accusative hobwh ctoji; nocJieAHee cjiobo; dojibiuoe 3âHne
3. Changes in endings in accordance with vowel mutation

rules (p. 28):
a. In accordance with Rule B, the masculine ending -wit
changes to -aft after the gutturals r, k, x and the sibilant
consonants Hi, h, lu, iu: pycooift, ropaqaii, xopouiHH, etc.
b. In accordance with Rule C, the unstressed neuter
ending -oe changes to -ee after the sibilant consonants Hi, h,
in, m, u: ropaqee, xopomee, etc.
Stressed -oe does not change: 6ojibuioe.
4. In the vocabularies the nominative singular forms will
appear as follows: hobum, -'an, -'oe “new”; rioaieAHHii, -'hh
-'ee “last,” “latest.”
C. Verb
Present tense of the verb .naeaTb “to give”;

First h Ram Mbi AaeM
Second (fam.) Tbi Aaeuib bh AaeTe
Third oh, -a, -6 Aaex ohh AaibT
VOCABULARY BUILDING
These units, placed at convenient intervals, suggest ways

to organize vocabulary for easier assimilation.
Adjectives and Adverts
Adj. Adv. Adj. Adv.

ropflHHft ropHHo hot (of HiapKHft HiapKO hot (mainly
things) of weather)
njioxoft iijioxo bad xopoumft xopouio good, well
Antonyms
6ejibift white nepHbift black

XOJIOAHhift cold ropHintt hot
SEVENTH LESSON 63
xopouwfi good njioxoi bad

mhofo much Mano little
OTKpbiBaTb to open 3aKpbisaTb to close
V. QUESTIONS
1. Uto AejiaeT TOBapnm Bojikob paHo yTpOM? 2. Xoponi6

m Ha ABope nocjie ao:>kah? 3. Kanoft B03Ayx? 4. Kanoe HeSo?
5. Fê nomer h paSoTaeT TOBapnm Bojikob? 6. PaHo jih oh 3as-
TpaxaeT? 7. KyM ha$t TOBapnm Bojikob 3aBTpaKaib? 8. Hto
AaioT TOBapniiiy BojiKOBy Ha 3aBTpaK? 9. Ky;;a eAeT TOBapmn,
Bojikob nocjie 3asTpaKa? 10. KaKoft achb? 11. Kyâ oh eAeT
k oOeAy? 12. Hto oh AeAaeT nocjie o6eAa? 13. KyAa oh hacu
BenepOM? 14. Hto ecTb b KjiySe? 15. Kto cKynaeT b Kjiy6e?
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all nouns in the

genitive and dative cases. (For pattern see Lesson 4.)
b. Supply endings:
1. ft OTBeuaro Apyr—. 2. Oh ha£t k aoktop—. 3. Mbi hh-

hieM HHCbMO TOBapnm— BojiKOBy. 4. Bbi HAeTe ceroAHH k
yHHTeji—. 5. K o6£a— oh eAeT b kojixo3. 6. K yxtHH— oh ha£t
AOmoh. 7. Ha 3aBTpaK TOBapHm— AaibT xJie6, Macjio h Chip.
8. Ha o6eA h Aaio 6paT— cyn h mhco. 9. Ha yjKHH mbi AaeM
rocT— cyn, mhco h naii. 10. 3tot cxyzieHT Obicrpo OTBenaeT
npocêccop—. 11. Mbi MeAJieHHO oTBenaeM ynirreji— no-pyccKH.
12. ft iiAy k okh—'. 13. Bbi HAeTe k ynirreji— Ha ypoK? 14. Kto
HAeT k 3auhh—? 15. Mbi cennac eAeM Ha aBTOMoOiLie k noe3A—.
Supply the endings and translate:
1. ropHH— naft. 2. Chh— He6o. 3. Xopom— Apyr. 4. Flo-

CneAH— ypoK. 5. >KapK— achb, 6. Beji—- hjih nepH— xjie6.
7. Bojibhi—' 3AaHHe. 8. Hob— aom. 9. Cb&k— B03Ayx. 10. Xo¬
pom— paAHo. 11. Beji— ABepb. 12. Ben— oOjiaKO. 13. Bojibui—*'
KyxHH. 14. BeA— CHer. 15. Cb&k— mhco.
64 CEJlbMOPl yPGK
Exercises with Grammar B and C
a. Supply the present tense forms of the verbs and the endings
of the adjectives:
1. R OnaBaTb) 6paTy xopora— nepo. 2. $ (ecTt) 6en— h
uepH-- xjie6, cb6k— Macjio h CBem— chip. 3. H (hhtb) ropHH—
qan. 4. Cero/ma Moil 6paT HHaero He (nHTb) h He (ecTb), 5. H
(cnpaiUHBaTb) hpara: FloueMy th He (ecTb) h He (nHTb).
6. BpaT He (oTBenaTb). 7. Aoktop (oTKpbiBaTb) hob— Kypnaa
h (HHTaTb). 8. HtaeHep rieTpoB (MOHb) HHTarb uea— AeHb.
9. Ha o6e^ Mbi (ecTb) cyn h mhco h onHTb (nHTb) nan. 10. Y
Hac b Pocchh Bee (nHTb) nan.
b. Conjugate in the present tense:
1. H Aaio 6paiy Kypnaji. 2. # Aaib Apyry hhcbmo.

A
1. A large photograph. 2. My good friend. 3. A new garage.
4. The last building. 5. Fresh meat. 6. Fresh air. 7. A hot day.
8. Hot soup. 9. The last day. 10. Blue sky. 11. Black bread.
12. A white house. 13. He always reads the last word very
slowly. 14. For breakfast they eat black bread and fresh butter.
15. They drink hot tea or fresh milk. 16.[There is]a large photo¬
graph on the table. 17. My teacher always reads the large
Russian periodical “The Russian People." 18. The good student
explains to [his] friend the new lesson.
B
1. I live and work on (in) a collective farm. 2. Early in
the morning I open [my] window. 3. (It is) a beautiful (good)
day. 4. There isn’t a cloud in the sky. 5. The sky is blue; the
air is fresh. 6. For breakfast I go into a big new building. 7. It
is the kitchen. 8. Here I eat white or black bread, butter, and
cheese. 9. Then I drive to (into) the field[s]. 10.1 work all day
without a rest. 11. For supper I ride back to the kolhoz. 12. I
eat hot soup and fresh, good meat. 13.1 drink hot tea or milk.
14. In the evening I go to [my] friend. 15. He also lives and
works on the collective farm. 16. We read or go to the movies.
17. Early in the morning we drive again to the fields and work
there all day.
SEVENTH LESSON 65

Based on the vocabulary and grammar of preceding lessons
MOm JXPWr ZIOKTOP MEXOB

Cero^HH uejibiH AeHb haSt AomAb. H ceroAHH He paSoTaio,
ceroAHH npa3AHHK. Moh 6paT h h cenqac AOMa. BpaT nHiueT
HHCbMO, a a CKyqaio, CeroAHH BeqepOM h eAy b ropoA, b KJiyS.
eme He 3Haio nan h eAy b KJiy6. Hjih na MeTpo, hjih Ha TpaM-
Bae, hjih Ha noe3Ae. Y mchh Hex bbtomoGhjih, a bbtomoGhjib
6paTa b rapa>Ke'.
CeroAHH BeqepOM y mchh codpaHHe b KJiySe. Ha coSpaHHH
h HHKOFAa He CKyqaio.
Bot >Kypnaji «PyccKHH HapoA». H OTKpbiBaio acypHaji. Hy,
bot HOBOCTb! B mypHajie (JiOTorpa^HH AOKxopa HexoBa. JXok-
TOpa HexoBa h xopouio 3Haio, oh moh Apyr. H AyMaio, hto oh
reHHH. Oh ne TOJibKO aoktop, ho h HHAcenep, h no§T. Oh yMeeT
pa6oTaTb! HHOFAa oh pa6oTaeT h AeHb h Hoqb.
B AcypHajie nnuiyT, qTo KorAa AOKTopa HexoBa cnpamHBaioT:
— Mto bh AeJiaeTe yTpOM? —
— H paSoTaio Bee yTpo, — oh oTBeqaeT.
— A hto bh Aejiaexe nooie oSeAa? —
— KoneqHO, paSoTaio. —
— A KyAa bh HAexe BeqepOM?
— HnKyAa. BeqepOM h padoraio AOMa: qHTaio, iramy... —
— Bbi HHKOFAa He cjiymaexe paAHO? —
— HeT, HHorAa h cjiyoiaio paAHO, ho He Tan qacTo. % cjiy-
rnaK) paAHO, kotaa h eM, ho He ecerAa. JXoMa y Memt HeT pa¬
AHO. —
— Bbi coBceM He AyMaeTe 06 OTAbixe? —
— H He Mory AyMaTb 06 orAbixe. H aoktop, HHAcenep,
noaT! —
JXa, AyMaio h, sto aneprHH! 3to moh Apyr HexoB! Oh hh-
KorAa He cKyqaeT!
BOCbMOft yPOK
EIGHTH LESSON
Instrumental singular of masculines and neuters; prepositions

MeJKAy, HaA, nepeA, c (co) — Present tense of the second
conjugation — Review of the singular declension
of masculines and neuters
HoMoit Home, homeward

Mne rtopa hath aomoiL It is time for me to go home.
OneHb wajib! Too bad! It is a pity!
HaAo 6biTb . . . One must be . . .
Hath neuiKOM To walk, go on foot
COBCeM pHAOM Very near; right next door
JXa 4T0 Bbl rOBOpHTe! You don’t say!
C TpyAOM With difficulty
Ee3 TpyAa Easily; without trouble
CHacTAHBoro nyTii! Happy journey! Bon voyage!
II. READING: H EJXW B CTAJIHHrPA#
— Hy, Ao-CBHAaHHa! Mne nopa hath aomoA.

— KyAa Bbi cneuiHxe? Eme paHo!
— HeT, y>xe no3AH0. Bbi 3a6bmaeTe, uxo 3aBTpa pano yxpOM
h eAy b CTaAHHrpaA.
— Kax Bbi eAexe? I16e3AOM hah napoxoAOM?
— 51 BcerAa e3>Ky TyAa noe3AOM.
— Ohchb >naAb, hto bh cneuiHTe. Ho s noHHMaio, hto nepeA
OT”be3AOM H3AO 6bITb AOMa He CAHHIKOM n03AH0.
— JXsl, h ceftnac eAy aomoA, xpaMBaeM hah Ha MeTpo.
— Bbi, KOHeHHO, MOACeTe HATH neuiKOM. Bbi JKHBeTe COBCeM
pflAOM.
— Hex, h ACHBy xenepb y dpaxa..
— Bot Kax! A rAe achbct Barn 6pax?
— Ero KBapTHpa HaA KAydoM «KpacHan 3Be3Aa». 3xo iwenmy
Aomom HHAceHepa Bpayna h 3AaHHeM daHKa.
— 3to aMepHKancKHH HHAceHep BpayH?
-JXa.
66
EIGHTH LESSON 67
— 51 xopomo 3HaK) HH)K6Hepa BpayHa. Oh HHTepecHwft nejio-

bck, ho h c xpyAOM noHHMato, Konta oh roBOpiiT no-pyccKH. MbI
c HHHceHepoM BpaynoM BcerAa roBopniw no-aerjiMHCKH.
^ — Aa hto Bbi roBopHTe!? A Ha 3aBOAe c HHiKeHepoM
BpayHOM Bee roBOpax tojibko no-pyccKH h 6es Tpyaa noHHMaioT
HHacenepa BpayHa . . . Hy, ô-cbhMhhh!
— Xlo-CBHa,aHHfl! CnacTjiHBoro1 nyxH!
III. VOCABULARY
aiwepHKaHCKHH, American MaJieHbKHH, small

-an, -'oe -an, -oe
Bam, eama, your, yours orbe3A departure
same napoxoA steamship
ero his, its no3AHO late
ee her, liers pHAOIM, alongside,
3aBTpa tomorrow pflÔM C next to
3Be3Aa star CJIHLUKOM too, excessively
HHTepecHbift, interesting cnacTjiMBbifi:, happy, lucky
-an, -'oe -an, -'oe
KBapTHpa apartment xyM there, thither
KpacHbiH, red yme already
-'an, -'oe nejioBeK human being,
mail, person
Verbs
3a0biBaTb (I) to forget

JieH<aTb; Jienty, JiOKHiUb, jieHtaT to lie, recline
cneuiHTb; enemy, cneniHiiib, to hurry, be in a hurry
cnemaT
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Instrumental case
1. Its use:
a. The instrumental case, as its name implies, denotes the

instrument or agent by which an action is performed. It an¬
swers the questions “by means of whom?” “by means of what?”
1 Pronounce “Shchastlrava.1
68 BOCbMOP'l yPOK
Oh e3^HT noe3AOM. He goes by train.

Oh rmuieT nepOM. He writes with, a pen,
Notice that the prepositions “by” and “with” are not

translated here; the instrumental case is used without any
preposition.
b. When the instrumental case is used with the preposi¬
tion c (co), it renders “with” in the meaning of “along with,”
“in the company of”:
Oh kj&t c 6paxoM b Tearp. He goes with [his] brother to the
theater.
c. The prepositions MeHcay between
Ha# above, over
nepeji in front of, before
are always followed by the instrumental case:
Ctoji MeiK/iy okhom h The table is between the win¬

AHBaHOM. dow and the sofa.
Moh KOMHaTa Han rapaacoM. My room is above the garage.
Moil aBTOMObHJit. nepeji My car is in front of the house.
jlOMOM.
2. Its form:
The instrumental singular of masculine as well as of

neuter nouns has the ending -om when “hard” and -ew when
“soft”:
Ilurd Soft Soft
Nominative CTOJI Myaeii AO>KAb

Masculine My3eew AOJKjteiw1
Instrumental CTOJrOM
Nominative MeCTO nojie 3AaHHC

Neuter
Instrumental MeCTOM nojieM 3,naHHeM
B. Verb. The second conjugation

The regular verb roeopHTb “to speak, to say” is used as an
example.
1. To conjugate this type of verb in the present tense, drop
from the infinitive form roBopHib the three last letters HTb.
1
Note that whenever the stress falls on the instrumental “soft”
ending, the e changes to e. (Cp. also pyacbeM “with the rifle.”)
EICIITH LESSON 69
2. To the resulting stem roeop add the endings -ms -vtuib,

■ht, -siM, -fine, -Mis

First H roBOp-ib MbI rOBOp-HM
Second (fam.) TbI rOBOp-IiUIb Bbl rOBOp-HXe
Third oh, -a, -6 roBop-HT OHH rOBOp-MT
Verbs belonging to this class will appear in the vocabu¬

laries followed by the Roman numeral II, thus: roeopMXb (II)
“to speak, to say.” When a verb does not follow exactly the
conjugational pattern of roBOpHXb, it will be given in four
“key” forms, as set forth in Lesson 5. Note that, in accordance
with Vowel Mutation Rule A, the first person singular ending
-k> changes to -y, and the third person plural ending -ht
changes to -ax when preceded by a sibilant consonant
(>k, m, hi, m, u): jie^Kaxb; m Jiewy, xw Jie>KHiiib, ohm Jiewax.
Note that roBOpHXb c (co) plus the instrumental renders

“to speak with, to converse with.” roeopHTb can also be used
to render “to tell,” but in this meaning it must be used with
the dative (without c):
H roBopib c yMHTejreM.
I am speaking (conversing) with the teacher.
But:
H roBopib yHHTejiio, uto m He yMeio HHTaTb no-pyccKH.
I am telling the teacher that I cannot read Russian.
3. The verbs xoahtb and e3AHTb:
a. When the action of going (on foot) is repeated or habitual,

use XOjQiHXb (instead of hath) :
Oh Macro xoaht b TeaTp. He often goes to the theater.
b. When the action of riding, driving (going by a vehicle) is

repeated or habitual, use e3AHTb (instead of exaTb):
Oh Bcerja,a e3AHT b ropoA Ha He always goes downtown on

MeTpo. the subway.
c. Conjugation of
e3AHXb: e3>Ky, e3AHiiib, e3AHx, csahm, e3AHTe, e3Aflx

XOAHXb: XO>Ky, XOAHUIb, XOAHT, XOAHM, XOAHXe, XOAHT
70 BOObMOPl yPOK
C. Review
Table of the full declension of masculine and neuter nouns

in the singular.
Hard Hard tfofl Soft Soft Soft
Nom. ctoji Me CTO My3CH TOCTb no.7ie 3aaHne

Gen. ctoji a MGCTa MV3e« roerfl rio jih 3aaHHH
Dat. crony Mecxy My3eK) TOCTK) nojno 3AaHHH>
A ex'. ctoji MeCTO My3efi toctji nojie 3aaHHe
Instr. CTOJIOM MeCTOM MV3eeM rocxeiM nojieM 3aaHHeiM
Prep. CTOJie MecTe MV3ee rocTe none 3aaHHH
Remember that the accusative of animate masculine nouns

ends in -a when “hard,” and in -h when “soft,” being identical
with the genitive.
V. QUESTIONS
(In answering the questions identify yourself with the persons in

the Beading Exercise.)
1. PaHO jm ceHnac? 2. Kyaa Bbi caere 3aBTpa yipoM? 3. Kan

bw eaeTe? 4. KaK bbi naeTe aomoh? 5. MoxceTe jih bbi hath
neuiKOM? 6. Fae bh Tenepb aoiBeTe? 7. Fae KBapTHpa dpara?
8. HEDKenep Bpayn pyccKHH? 9. Xoporno jih roBopHT no-pyccKH
HHHceHep BpayH? 10. Bpax noHHMaer nmKeHepa B pay Ha, Koraa
BpayH roBopHT no-pyccKH? 11. KaK roBopHT c HHxceHepoM
BpayHOM Ha 3aBoae? 12. Xoporno an TaM noHHMaioT HHHceHepa
BpayHa?
a. Supply endings;
1. H 3aBTpaKaio paHO yTp—. 2. R eM xae6 c Maca— h chip—.

3. 51 eay b ropoa TpaMBa— hah Ha MeTp—4. JXhzm h padoTaio c
npo4)eccop— b My3ee. 5. Beuep— mh xoaHM c roex— b khho mh
b reaTp. 6. Tenepb h uhtsio c 6paT— oneHb HHTepecnbiH, pyccKHH
>KypHaji. 7. H c Tpyii—' uhteho no-pyccKH. 8. fie pea 0Ti»e3A—
EIGHTH LESSON 71
mm roBopHM c yuHTeA— o OanHHrpaAe. 9. EêTe Bbi b Cthahh-

rPÂ napoxoA—? 10. HeT, mbi Bcerâ £3ahm noe3A—.
b. Give the correct case forms of nouns in parentheses :
1- Moh hobbih aom Me>KAy (TeaTp) h (Sbhk) . 2. Hto sto

TaM nepeA (3AaHHe) ? 3. IlepeA (okho) MaxeHbKHH ctoa. 4. y
MeHH HOBaH KBaprapa HaA (KxyS) «KpacHan 3Be3Aa». 5. Moe
nepo Jie>KHT bot TaM, Ha CTone, Mexcuy (>KypHaA) h (xjie6).
6. IlepeA (OT-be3A) oh mlmer nncbMO Apyry. 7. Ha a (rapaxc) y
Hero MajieHbKaa KOMHaTa. 8. HaA (oSxaKo) cHHee He6o.
c. Translate the following sentences and explain in each case the

use or omission of the preposition c:
1. H eAy TpaMBaeM. 2. Mbi eAeM c SpaTOM b ropoA. 3. Oh

roBopHT c npo(J)eccopOM. 4. Tbi emb xxe6 c CbipoM hah c Mac-
aom? 5. Bbi nnineTe nepoM? 6. Ohh eAyT b JleHHHrpaA noe3AOM
HAH napOXOAOM?
d. Translate the prepositions in parentheses and supply endings :
1. H nHiuy nep—2. Oh roBopHT (with) yunxeA—. 3. Ohh

eAyT noe3A—. 4. 3to khho (between) My3e— h 64hk—.
5. (Before) o6£a— H (after) o6eA— Mbi CAyuiaeM paAHO.
6. (Above) ropoA— OoAbinoe 66AaK0. 7. Ero hobbih aBTOModHXb
(in front of) aom—. 8. Bbi rOBopHTe (with) npo(|)eccop—.
a. Give the present tense forms of the verbs in parentheses:
1. FAe (xexcaTb) nepo? 2. HoueMy th (cneniHTb)? 3. Tbi

(3a6biBaTb), hto h 3aBTpa (exaTb) b CTanHHrpaA- 4. Ohh ee
(roBopHTb) c AOKTopoM. 5. Mbi BcerAa (3a6biBaTb), tao (xchtb)
TOBapHuj; rieTpOB. 6. (IloHHMaTb) Bbi, kotaa rocnoAHH BpayH
(roBopHTb) nO-pyCCKH? 7. (POBOpHTb) Bbi nO-aHTAHHCKH?
8. HeT, h c xpyAOM (roBopHTb) h oueHb nxoxo (nommaTb) no-
aHFAHHCKH;
b. Supply the correct form of hath or xoahtb according to

context:
1. CeroAHH oh He . Ha ypox. 2. Ohh nacTo . Ha

KOHAepT. 3. noneMy Bbi HHKorAa He.b My3eft? 4.tbi
72 BOCbMOP’I yPOK
ceroAHH BeqepoM m cobpaHHe? 5. K o6em mh Bcema.B

9T0T peCTOpaH.
C. In the above exercise supply correct forms of exaTb or e3^HTb
according to context.
Exercises with Grammar C (Review)
a. Decline in the singular:
1. qafi. 2. /LO>KAb. 3. noiie. 4. mccto. 5. Hapoji*. 6. coopaHwe.
b. Supply endings and translate the prepositions and Common

Expressions in parentheses:
1. 3HaeTe bbi aoktop— MexoB—? 2. Hhkto He pa6oTaeT

(as much as) oh. 3. H pa6oTaio (in) 6bhk , a moh Apyr (at)
3aBQ£—. 4. (For dinner) uu Bcerâ emu, cyn h mhc—5. Mbi
eêM (to) ropo# (by car). 6. Oh He 3HaeT, hto cero/uin (is
playing in the movies). 7. Moh 6paT MonceT (all day) HHTarb
(without) OT^bix—. 8. Oh rosopHT, hto h (cannot read at all).
9. (After) aoao.—' Ha ABop—' xoporno! Bo3^yx cbcxc—, h66o
chh—, Ha Hed— hh odjiax—. 10. (For breakfast) £arc>T TOBa-
pHii;— uepH— (or) deji— xjied h ropan— Ha—.

A
1. Today my friend, Mr. Brown, and I are going to Stalin¬

grad. 2. “Are we -going to Stalingrad by steamboat or train?”
I ask [my] friend. 3. “By train, of course!” he answers. 4. In
the evening, before [our] departure, we go to a restaurant
right next door and have supper. 5. “It is already very late; it
is time to go!” 6. “You don’t say!” 7. We eat quickly. 8. We eat
only soup with bread and cheese and hurry to the train. 9. We
take (go by) the subway. 10. In Stalingrad we go to a friend
of Mr. Brown. 11. “What is his name?” I ask. 12. “Alexander
Ivanovich Semyonov. He is a Russian, a very good engineer!”
13. “He lives in the building there, between the bank and the
movie.” 14. Alexander Ivanovich is at home. 15. We have
breakfast and then go by car to the plant where Alexander
Ivanovich works. 16. We work all day at the plant without a
rest. 17. Only late in the evening do we go back home.
* Treated as an inanimate noun.

EIGHTH LESSON 73
1.1 live in the city. 2. My new house is small. 3. But I have

a large, new kitchen. 4. The house is between the bank and
the hospital. 5. In front of the house is a large building, a
garage. 6. My new, black, white, and blue car is in the garage.
7. I always drive to [my] friend by car or subway. 8. We never
go (ride) by train or streetcar. 9. My friend is a professor.
10. There is someone who works a lot, day and night! 11. He
never rides. 12. He always walks (goes on foot) to the museum,
where he is now working. 13. But today it is raining. 14. It is a
very hot day. 15. What a day! 16. This evening (today in
the evening) we cannot go to the theater, the concert, or the
meeting at the club. 17. But Pavel says: “It does not matter!
I am just as happy at home. 18. I can speak with [my] friend
Ivan. 19. We have a radio. 20. Do you have a pen?” 21. “Yes, I
have a new pen. 22. It is there on the table between the radio
and the magazine.” 23. “Thank you! Now I can write my
Russian lesson, or a letter to [my] teacher in English or
Russian. 24. Thus (and so) I am never bored.”
AEBflTbIR yPOK
I NINTH LESSON
Dative and prepositional of feminine nouns and adjectives—
XoTeTb “to want to”—Omission of personal pronouns
L COMMON EXPRESSIONS AND IDIOMS
Pa6oTaTb naK Mawtiea To work like a machine; work

very hard
no Aopore On the way
yHHBepcajibHbiH MarasfiH Department store
4to ryx jiyMaTb? What’s there to think? (IPs
obvious.)
9to xopouiaa HAea! That’s a splendid idea!
Hy, npomafi! Well, good bye!
CKoabKO ctoht? How much does it cost?
II. READING: HOBA51 CKATEPTb
% padoTaio Ha dojibiuofi (JiadpHKe. PadoTa xopomaa, ho

cKyHHaa. Padoraeuib pejibift AeHb, nan wauiHHa! 3aTo AOMa
MQJioAaa aceHa, KpacHBaa KBapTHpa, yAodHoe KpecJio . . .
no Aopore aomoh a HHTaio b BeaepHefi ra3eTe od'baBjieHne:
«HoBaH CKaTepTb — paAOCTb aceHe». Hay b yeHBepcajibHbifi
Mara3MH. B QKHe Mara3HHa KpacHBaa CKaTepTb. H cnpaumBaio:
— CKOJIbKO CTOHT 3Ta CKaTepTb?
— 3Ta CKaTepTb oaeHb Aoporaa! — rosopHT npoAaBmnua.
— HHHero! — OTBeaaio h MOJioAOft npoAaBiAHpe. — «HoBaa
CKaTepTb — paAocTb >KeHe», roBOpHT od'bHBJieHHe.
Ha yjiHpe a BCTpeaaio npHHTejra.
— KyAa cneuiHuib? — cnpauiHBaio a.
— H enemy b stot Mara3HH. >KeHa rosopHT, hto TaM ce-
toahh dojibinaa pacnpoAaâ. Ho a He noMHio, hto OHa xoneT.
— Uto TyT AywaTb! — roBopk) a. — Bot b ra3eTe nfirnyT:
«HoBaa CKaTepTb — paAOCTb aceHe».
— A a, §to xopouiaa hack.
— KoHeaHO . . . Hy, npomafi!
— iXo-cBHAaHHa!
74
NINTH LESSON 75
VOCABULARY III
BenepHHH, evening- (adj.) oO'bflBjieHHe advertisement

-'asi, -'ee npHshrejib (m.) friend,
raaexa newspaper npOASBuiAma saleswoman
Aopora road, way paAOCTb joy, happiness
AOporofi, expensive, dear pacnpoAa>Ka sale
-aa, -6e CKaxepTb tablecloth
aaxo on the other CKyHHblH, boring,
hand, but then -'aa, -'oe tiresome
KHwra book COBeTCKHH, Soviet
KpaCHBblH, beautiful -'aa, -'oe
-'aa, -'oe yAoOHbiii, comfortable,
Kpecao armchair -'aa, -'oe convenient
MauiMHa machine, yAHpa street
engine tpaOpHKa factory
MOJIOAOft, young ueHa price
-an, -oe
Verbs
BCTpeTOTb (I) to meet

nOMHHTb (II) to remember
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Dative and prepositional of the feminine In the

singular1
The ending for both cases is -e when the nominative ends

In -a or -a:
Nominative KOMHaTa KyxHH

Dative KOMHaTe KyxHe
Prepositional KOMHaTe KyxHe
-ii when the nominative ends in -hh or -b:

Nominative <J)aMHJiHH ABepb
Dative ABepH
Prepositional fyaufunm ABepH
B. Adjective
The dative and prepositional cases of the feminine adjec¬

tive have the ending -oft when hard and -eii when soft:
1 For a statement on the use of cases, refer henceforth to the

Reference Table of Cases, p. 30,
76 HEBHTblFI yPOK
Hard Accented Soft

Nominative Hosaa dojibwafl nocjieAHHH
Dative HOBOH doJibuioii nocjieAHefl
Prepositional HOBOH dOJIbUIOHI nocjie^Hen
Note that according to Vowel Mutation Rule C the un¬

stressed -oh appears as -efi after the sibilant consonants m, %
Hi, m, u: ropnaefi, xopomefi, etc.
C. Verb
1. The present tense of the irregular verb xoxexb “to wish,

want”':
First H xony MbI XOXHM

Second (fam.) TbI XOHeiUb Bbl XOXHXe
Third oh, -a, -6 xonex OHH XOXHX
Note that xoxexb in the singular has the first conjugation

endings and in the plural the second conjugation endings. Also
notice the change of the t to h in the singular.
2. Omission of the personal pronoun:
a. It is quite common in Russian to omit the personal

pronoun, especially in conversation:
XoHeuib HHTaTb? J\a, xony! Do you want to read? Yes, I

want to.
Mêuib ceroAHH b xeaxp? Are you going to the theater
today?
HeT, He nny. No, I am not going.
b. By omitting the third person plural pronoun, an im¬

personal meaning can be conveyed:
Mro rOBOpHT O HOBOH KHHre? What do they (people) say

about the new book?
POBOpHT, HTO 9T0 OHeHb They say (people are saying)
HHxepecHaa KHHra. that it is a very interesting
book.
^HxaioT 9xot acypHaJi? Do people read this periodical?
Is this periodical read?
NINTH LESSON 77
Her, He nirraiOT. No, people don’t read (no one

reads) this periodical; it is
not being read.
VOCABULARY BUILDING
Time Expressions
BMepa yesterday ceroAHfl today 3aBTpa tomorrow

KorM when HHor.ua sometime (s),
at times
ecerM always HHxor.ua never
yTpOM in the morning BenepOM in the evening

JXHeM in the day (time) ; HOHbK) at night
in tlie afternoon
Bnepa yTpOM yesterday Bnepa BenepOM yesterday
morning evening
ceroAHH yTpOM this morning cero^HH BenepOM this evening
saBTpa yTpOM tomorrow saBTpa eenepOM tomorrow
morning evening
V. QUESTIONS
I. Die Bbi padoTaeTe? 2. Kaxan axo pa6oTa? 3. Kax Bbi
padoTaexe iiejibift ,aeHb? 4. Xopouio jih ÔMa? 5. O neM bbi hh-
Taexe b BenepHefi ra3exe? 6. Kyâ Bbi Huexe? 7. Hxo b oxHe Mara-
3HHa? 8. O neM Bbi cnpaniHBaeTe? 9. Hxo roBopax npoâBiiiHiia?
10. Hxo oxBeqaexe bh mojioôh npoâBinnue? 11. Die bh Bcxpe-
naexe npHHTejin? 12. Kyua oh cneninx? 13. FIomhhx jih oh, uto
xoneT ero xteHa? 14. Hto nnuiyT b ra3exe? 15. Xopomaa jih 5to
Hêa?

a. Prom the Reading Exercise write out all feminine nouns and
give their ease and English meaning. (Few pattern see Lesson 4.)
b. Supply endings:
1. Cxaxepx— dojibmaa pa/toex— HteH—'. 2. OHa HHuero He

oxBeuaex mojioôh npo,n;aBiHHu;—. 3. Ona iiiiKorâ He Ayâer o
u.eH—'. 4. Oh cneninx k >xeH—'. 5. Oh mimex 6paxv o hoboh
MamHH— Ha (JiaSpHK—. 6. 51 iiHiuy 06 MHxepecHoft pa66x—
apyry. 7. Oh xenepb b Pocc—'. 8. Oh xa.vr pa6oxaex Ha dojibiuoM,
hoboh cjoadpHK—. 9. Die clioxorpacjo—? 10. Ohb xyx b khhx—.
11. Ha cJjoxorpacJ)— moA npHHxejib. 12. Box a b KBapxnp—.
78 XlEBHTbIP'1 yPOK
6paTa. 13. B MaJieHbKOft komhht— y 6pa-ra yAoOnoe Kpecjio y

OKHa. 14. 54 AywaK) o nocaeAHeft hoboct—. 15. B ra3cx— h HHTaio
o 6ojibmoft pacnpOAa>K—. 16. $ hay k Asep—. 17. Ha yjmij,—
a BcrpenaK) Apyra. 18. Oh roBOpHT, hto ceroAHH 6o,/ibniaH
pacnpOAam—. 19. fi HHTaio Apyry oS'bHB./ieHHe b ra3eT—.
20. «3to xopoman ha£—», rosopHT oh.
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all feminine adjectives
with the nouns they modify, giving their case and English meaning,
as follows (15 forms in all) :
Ha 6oJibw6ft 4>a6pHKe Prepositional “large, big"

xopomaa paSoTa Nominative “good”
b. Give the dative and 'prepositional case forms of the following

expressions:
1. 6o.7ibirrasi KyxHfl. 2. KpacHBaa cxaTepTb. 3. BeHepHHH ra3eTa.

4. nocjieAHHH (|)OTorpa(f)HH.
c. Supply endings:
1. R HHTaio Apyry oS'bsiBAeHHe b BenepH— ra3eie. 2. «3to

xoporn— HAen», roBOpHT oh. 3. Oh aact CKarepTb moaoa—'
aceHe. 4. Mbi pa6oTaeM Ha 6ojibm—hob— cJiaSpHKe. 5. Y Hero
MaJieHbK—, hob— KBapTfipa. 6. A ninny ncene 06 HirrepecH—
pa6oTe.
1. 51 ne noMHto, tag BenepiHHH ra3eTa. 2. H ne xony AyMaTb

o paSoTe.
b. From the Reading Exercise write out all sentences or phrases

in which the personal pronouns are omitted. Translate them (4 in¬
stances in all).
c. Translate the following:
1. Hto haSt b khho? 2. HAeuib b khho? 3. EUy! 4. Mhoto

rosopHT o HOBofl KHHre? 5. ToBopHT, HHTepecHaa! 6. rioMHHHIb,
rAe ona? 7. HeT, He riOMHio. 8. 3Hieuib AOKTopa HexoBa? 9. JX&,
3Haio h Hacro BCTpenaio! 10. PaSoTaeT AGHb h hohb, nax MauiHHa!
Exercise with Grammar A, B, and C

Give the correct present tense form of the verbs in parentheses
and supply endings:
NINTH LESSON 79
1. (XOTeTb) BBI >KHTb B C0B6TCK- POCC-'? 2. jO[a, H (XO-

TeTb), a ohh He (xoTeTb). 3. Kojih, noneMy Tbi He (xoTeTb) >KHTb
AOMa? 4. FlOTOMy HTO H (xoTeTb) >KHTb B HOB KBapTHp—
Spara. 5. Moil 6par (xoTeTb) paSoTarb TyT Ha hob—, bobbin—'
4)a6pHK—. 6. CeroaHH oh (cneuiHTb) aomoh. 7. Ha yjinu— oh
(BCTpenaTb) apyra. 8. Oh (roBOpHTb) c apyroM o dojibin—'
pacnpoaa>K—. 9. Oh He (noMHHTb), hto >xeH—' (xoteTb). 10. B
BenepH— ra3eT— od'bHBJieHHe 06 oneHb HHTepecH— KHHr—.

A
1. I live in a city. 2. I work at a new factory. 3. The
work is tedious. 4. You work all day like a machine. 5. On the
way home I meet a friend. 6. “Where are you hurrying to?”
I ask [my] friend. 7. “I am hurrying to the new department
store. 8. There is a big sale.” 9. In the window of the store is
a beautiful tablecloth. 10. We go into the store. 11. “How much
does this tablecloth cost?” 12. “It is a very expensive table¬
cloth,” the young saleswoman answers. 13. But we don’t think
of the price. 14. A beautiful tablecloth is a great joy to a wife.
15. “Well, good bye, my friend! I am hurrying home now to
[my] wife. 16. Are you driving downtown to the club?” 17. “Yes,
I want to listen to the new radio in the club.” 18. “And (but)
my wife and I are going to the theater tonight (today evening)
after supper. Good bye! ”
B
1. “What are you reading in the evening paper?” 2. “I
am reading an advertisement. 3. They are writing about an
apartment in the building downtown. 4. They say that it is
a very large and beautiful [one], and not very expensive. 5.
But it is right next to a movie house and above the club ‘The
Red Star’.” 6. “You don’t say! Too bad! Is there an apartment
in a house with a garden? 7. Do you want to read the magazine?”
8. “No, thank you! It is a boring magazine. 9. I am reading
in a Russian book about the poet Pushkin. 10. I read Russian
with difficulty, but then the book is such an (Tanaa) interest¬
ing [one]. 11. Where is the periodical ‘The Russian People’?”
12. “I don’t remember. Oh, it is lying there, on the sofa! 13. Do
you remember the engineer Chekhov? 14. He writes in the
periodical about a very interesting new machine. 15. This
machine can read and write Russian without difficulty and
never forgets anything.” 16. “That is news! How much does it
cost?” 17. “Oh, it is a very expensive [one].” 18. “I don’t care!
(it’s all the same to me!) The new machine is a joy to a stu¬
dent! 19. I am hurrying to the department store.” 20. “That’s
a splendid idea! Happy journey!”
AECflTblR yPOK
TENTH LESSON
Genitive singular of feminine nouns and adjectives—Xorext

“to want to,” >«AaTb “to wait (for)”—Prepositions a jih,
m3, okojio, ot—Cardinal numerals 1-4
Bot h h AOMa! Here I am at home!

Hah ciOAa! Come here!
Ha KyxHe In the kitchen
HaKOHeu-To! Finally! At last!
Ha §to edb npHMHHa. There is a reason for it.
C HerepneHMew Impatiently; with impatience
Mto §to aa naKei? What kind of package is this?
JXjih Koroi For whom?
Ot Koro? From whom?
Bot cnacwOo! Thanks so much!
Kan HHTepecHo! How interesting!
H roAOAen, roAOAHa I am hungry, (m., 1, sing.)
Yikhh eme He totob. Supper is not ready yet.
Bee AaBHo rotoBo. Everything has been ready
for a long time.
II. READING: BOT M /fOMA
Bot h h AOMa!
— TaHH,1 TbI rAe?
— 3to Tbi, Mwina?2 51 »a nyxHe. Hah CfOAa! 3ApaBCTsytt,
Mofl Aoporoft. HaKOHeu-To tbi AOMa! KaK no3AHO!
— 3ApaBCTBy», MH.iaa. Tbi 31-iaenib, mto odbiKHOBeHHO h k
yacHHy He ona3AWBaio, ho cctoahh Ha §to ecTb npHMHHa.
— Bot Kan! 51 c HeiepneHHew iKAy od'bacneHHH.
— 3to AJiHHHaa hctophh! CHanaAa a xony yjKHHaTb...
— Hex, HeT. >1 He xony ACASTb!
— Hy, xoporno. Bee 3HaioT, hto h cepbe3Hbift neAOBeK h
hhtak) TpH hah neTbipe ra3eTbi KAA<AbiH ACHb. B ra3eie HHTaeUUb
H o nocAeAHeft hobocth h o pacnpoAame b Mara3HHe . . .
1 TaHfl is an endearing form of TaibHHa.

2 Mama is an endearing form of MwxaHA.
80
TENTH LESSON 81
— A, Tenepb h noHHMaro! Hxo §to sa naKer Tbi Aepxcmiib

b pyxe, Mnuia? JXnn Koro?
— Kohchho, ajih Aoporoii ateHM.
— CnaTepTb! Bot cnacnfio!
— JXsl, a bot nncbMo ot cecTpbi M3 Mockbh. Ona TaM y^ce
ABe HeêJiH h ^CHBeT b rocTHHHii,e okojio KpacHofi njiomaAH.
— KaK HHTepecHo! A hto em,e oh4 nnuieT?
— 3to y)Ke nocjie y^KHea! Tbi 3a6biBaemb, hto a rojioneH.
Hjih yxorn eme He roxoB?
— KoiieMHO, ece aabho totobo!
— Tan HAeM yACHHaTb ! . . .
HI. VOCABULARY
OyMara paper HeAejia week

boM water OSblKHOBeHHO usually
Bonpoc question o6ijHCHeHHe explanation
rOCTHHHU,a hotel OTBeT answer
AaBHO long ago nastex package
AJIHHHblii, long naomaAb square, area
-'aa, -'oe pyna hand, arm
AJIH for1 cepbe3HbiH, serious
HCTOpHfl story, history -'an, -'oe
Ka>KAbiii, each, every cecxpa sister
cHaqajia at first
©
a
G>
1
Kama porridge nac hour

MHJIblft, dear, nice (one)
-'aa, -"oe
Verbs
AepwaTb; Aepucy, AepiKHiub, to hold

AepMcax
MfAaxb; >KAy, Htaeiub, >KAyT to wait (for)
ona3AbieaTb (i) to he late
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Genitive of the feminine in the singular

The genitive case has the ending -w when hard and -h
when soft:
1 “for” in the meaning of: “for the purpose of,” “for the use
of,” “for the benefit of,” depending on context.
82 jjEaiTbii"! ypoi<
Hard Soft Soft
Nominative KOMHaTa KyXHH ABepb

Genitive KOMHaTbl KyXHH ABepH
In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule B the genitive

ending -bi changes to -h when preceded by a guttural r, k, x
or by a sibilant consonant hk, % hi, m:
Nom. pyKa. Gen. pyKH; KHHra, khhph ; Kama, k&iuh, etc.
B. Verb
1. Xo-reTb is followed by the genitive (instead of the accu¬
sative) when an indefinite quantity is expressed or implied:
XOTHTe Bbl BOAWI? Do you want (some) water?

Hct, h xony MOJioxa. No, I want (some) milk.
51 xoqy uaio. I wish (some) tea.
Ohh xotht caxapy. They want some sugar.
Notice partitive forms uaio, caxapy; also cnipy, cyny, Tadaxy.

2. >KnaTb is generally followed by:
a. genitive of inanimate objects;
b. accusative of animate beings:
ft >KAy noe3Aa. (gen.) I am waiting for the train.
Oh >KAer 6para, (act'.) He is waiting for [his] brother.
C. Adjective. Genitive singular of the feminine

This case has the ending -oft1 when hard and -eft when
soft:
Hard Hard Soft
Nominative HOBaa dojibmaa nocjieAHHH

Genitive HOBOft dojibinoft nocjieAneft
D. Prepositions with the genitive case
The prepositions jxna for

M3 out of, from
okojio
near, about, approximately,
next to
or from
are always followed by the genitive case:
,
1 Note that according to Vowel Mutation Rule C the unstressed
-oft appears as -eft after the sibilant consonants >k, h ui, m, u: ropanett,
xopoweft, etc.
TENTH LESSON
H heAaio 3to aah Apyra. I am doing this for [my]

friend.
llHCbMo H3 PocctiH A letter from Russia (i.e. out
of Russia)
SI HHtaio okojio OKHa. I read near the window.
H HHTaio okojio uaca. I read about an hour.
nncbMO ot SpaTa. A letter from my brother.
Notice the difference in the meaning of ns and ot. Ha is

used to express motion from within a place. Ot is used to ex¬
press motion from the side of some object or person, or to
designate the source of something. Compare, for instance, the
second and last sentences above.
Other prepositions with the Genitive were given on p. 53.
E. Cardinal numerals “one” through “four”
1. Ohhh “one” agrees in gender, case, and number with

the noun it modifies: ctoji “one table”; ojwia KOMHaxa
“one room”; ojxho nepo “one pen.”
2. JIbsl “two,” TpH “three,” neTbipe “four” are followed by
the genitive singular of the noun:
jousa cTOJia; TpH AcypHaaa; qerape romsl
3. The numeral jisa “two” has a special form for the

feminine, abc: jxse KOMHaTbi; Ase KyxHH; a Be khexh, etc.
Note that rule 2 applies only to the nominative and accu¬
sative of the numerals with inanimate objects.
V. QUESTIONS
1. TAe xceHa? 2. O ueM cnpauiHBaeT nceHa? 3. Macro ah bbi

onasAbiBaere k yxmHy? 4. Ectb ah y Bac ceroAHH BeuepoM Ha 9TO
npHHHHa? 5. O neM bh wraeTe b ra3eTe? 6. Mto bbi AepAtHTe b
pyne? 7. Hah koto stot naneT? 8. Mto b naneTe? 9. Ot koto
nncbMo? 10. JX&bho ah cecT.pa b MocKBe? 11. TAe OHa acheSt?
12. O neM 3a6bmaeT sauia AceHa? 13. Totob ah yacHH?
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all feminine nouns,

giving their case and English meaning. (For pattern see Lesson 4.)
84 ZIEOITbIP'l yP0K
b. Give the correct case form of the nouns in parentheses:
1. y Hero irncbMo aah (>KeHa). 2. Ham rocTb Bcer/ta BCTpe-

qae-r AOKTOpa Hexoea y (Aeepb) rocnwrajin. 3. Bi>i M3 (Pocchh)?
4. Moil yuHTejib xcHBeT okoao (njioutaAb). 5. Be3 (>xeHa) h b
ropOA He e3>Ky. 6. TyT Ha ctoac neT (6yMara). 7. FIocAe xcapKOH
(rioub) ceroAHH yTpom hagt AOJKAb. 8. Y Bac Ha -CTO/ie oneHb
HHTepecHoe nncbMO ot (cecTpa). 9. 51 He Mory hath na ypon 6es
(KHnra). 10. 3ia CKatepTb aah (cecrpa).
Give correct forms of the words in parentheses:
1. H ()KAaTb) (rpaMBaft) okojio My3en. 2. Ohh ,(>KAaTb)

(Apyr) H3 Mockbbi. 3. ToBapHin Boakob (xoTeTb) (moaoko), a
He (nan). 4. BeuepOM mbi (xtAaTb) (rocTb). 5. Ha 3aBTpax Mbi
(xoTeTb) (Kama) c moaqkom. 6. ft
3Haio, hto th (xcAaTb)
(nHCbMo) ot cecTpbi. 7. FloqeMy tbi He (xoTeTb) (xAe6) ? 8. Ohh
(jKAaTb) Ooabihoh (pacnpOAaxca) b Mara3HHe. 9. H (xoTeTb)
(BOAa), (moaoko) hah (huh). 10. H He (xoTeTb) hh (xacO) hh
(cyn).
Supply suitable adjectives in correct case forms:
1. Y hhx hct.OyMarn. 2. 51 x<Ay npHHxeAH okoao.

(JiaOpHKH. 3. 3xa.CKaxepxb aah xceiibi. 4. Ohh hchbct okoao
.luiomaAH. 5. 3tot ctoa aah . Kyxi-iH 6paxa. 6. 3xa
KHnra aah.rpa>i<AaHKH. 7. Mbi cnpaiiiHBaeM o peHe y.
IipOAaBLU,HU,bI. 8. 3T0 HHCbMO OT.>KCHbI. 9. 3t0 HHCbMG H3
.Pocchh.
Exercise with Grammar D
Supply suitable prepositions, selecting them from the following:

flAH, H3, OKOAO, OTI
1. 3Ta KpacHBan CKaTeprb. menbi. 2. 3to iracbMO

.Pocchh. 3. A to nncbMO . 6paTa. 4. Mbi Tenepb
HCHBeM b AOMe. (JiaOpHKH. 5. HoBbifi rapanc.AOMa.
6. IdHTepecHan KHnra. yuHTeAH. 7. Cbip h MacAO Ha CTOAe,
TaM.XAeOa. 8. npoAaBmHH,a hagt.Mara3HHa.
TENTH LESSON 85
Exercise with Grammar E
Translate the numerals in parentheses and supply endings of

nouns wherever necessary:
1. y OpaTa (2) KOMHaT—. 2. Ha hqboh, cobgtckoh cf)a6pHKe

paSoTaex (1) aMepHKaHeu,—. 3. TyT TQjibKo (1) cjDOTorpacj)—.
4. B TpaMBae ecTb (2) MecT—. 5. 3,necb b ropoê (3) TeaTp—.
6. B KJiyOe «Cobgtckhh nHcarejib» (4) pknu—. 7. H xcHBy b
MocKBe yjice (2) Heêji—. 8. Ha ue6e TOJibKo (1) SeJioe o6ji£lk—.
9. y AOKTopa b rapaace (2) aBTOModfui—. 10. y Hee b KOMHaTe
(1) AHBatr—, (2) Kpecji—h (1) ctoji—.

A
1. On the way home I read in the evening paper about a

big sale. 2. They say in the advertisement: “A new, beautiful
tablecloth is always a great joy to [your] wife.” 3. That is a
splendid idea! 4. I walk (go) into the department store. 5. On
a table is a large, beautiful, white tablecloth. 6. “How much
does it cost?” I ask. 7. “It is a beautiful cloth,” the saleslady
answers, “and not a very expensive [one].” 8. Here I am,
at home! But it is already very late. 9. I am never late for
supper. 10. But today I have a reason for it—the big package
in [my] hand. 11. Tanya opens the door. 12. “At last you are
at home! 13. How late! 14. And what are you holding there,
in [your] hand? . . . 15. A package! For whom?” 16. “Of course,
for [my] dear wife!” 17. “Oh, a beautiful new tablecloth!
Thank you [so much] ... And from whom is that letter there?”
18. “That is a letter from [your] sister, from Russia. 19. But
that is a long story and I am very hungry. 20. Let’s go (we go)
to supper (to eat supper).”
B
1. Where does the mechanic Petrov live now? 2. I have

here a letter from Petrov. 3. He writes that he is now working
on the collective farm “The Red Star.” 4. He has been working
(is working) there already for three or four weeks. 5. He usually
works two or three hours in the morning and four hours after
dinner. 6. He lives in a town not far (ziaêKo) from the col¬
lective farm. 7. He has a small apartment without a sofa or
a radio. 8. There are only two rooms in the apartment. 9. But
there is a large table, and at the table two chairs, and next
to the window a comfortable armchair. 10. And he has also a
little garden. 11. Sometimes he breakfasts in his small kitchen
and sometimes at the club. 12. For dinner and supper he always
JIFXHTHH yPOK
goes to the club. 13. My friend Pavel often meets Comrade

Petrov in the club. 14. There they talk about the latest (last)
news (sing.) in the evening paper. 15. Today I am the guest
of Comrade Petrov in [his] new apartment. 16. My place is in
the armchair next to the window. 17. Above the table is a large
photograph of Petrov’s friend, the engineer Chekhov. 18. It is
a very hot day, and we drink cold tea or milk, and eat only black
Russian bread with butter and cheese. 19. The bell! Petrov
opens the door. 20. It is his friend Doctor Ivanov. 21. He comes
(goes) from the club and wants to go to the theater. 22. And so
(thus), all of us (we all) drive downtown, go to the theater, and
after the theater, late in the evening, we all go to the club to
listen to the radio.

Based on tfie vocabulary and grammar of preceding lessons
fl EJXY B MHKArO
Cero^HH yTpQM h e#y b HHKaro. y>xe no3AHo h MHe HaAo
(I have to) cneuiHTb. Xopouio, hto h e#y be3 xceHbi, AyMaio h.
Moh MHJian xceHa jrejiaex (does) Bee oueHb MeîeHHo, ho 3aTo
oneHb xopouio. OHa HHKOrrta HHKyrta He cneuiHT m, kohcuho,
Bcerjra ona3AbiBaeT Ha noe3A!
Hy, bot, HaKOHeu-ro Bee totobo k orbe3Ay-
— Ho-cbha&hhh, Ao-CBHAaHHa! — roBopk) h >Kene.
— CuacrjiHBoro nyra! — OTBeuaeT OHa.
Bot h h b noe3Ae. y mchh yAobnoe m£cto okoao okh4.
H jik>6jiio e3AHTb noe3AOM. B noe3Ae a HHKorAa He cxyuaio.
B Hmcaro ikhbct moh xopouiHii TOBapum, HHXceHep LleTpOB.
neTpOB pyCCKHH, HO OH A3BH0 >KHBeT B AMepHKe h oueHb xopouio
roBopHT no-aHrjTHMCKH. H yMeio HeMHoro HuxaTb h nucaTb
no-pyccKH, ho rOBopio h noHHMaio no-pyccKH c TpyAOM.
Bot y mchh nucbMo ot IleTpOBa H3 HHKaro. Oh nnmeT, hto
y Hero boAbiuaa, HOBaa KBapTHpa b ropoAe, okoao KpacuBOH
nAomaAH. Oh paboxaeT ueAbift AeHb Ha cjiabpHKe, 3ar6 BeuepOM
AyMaeT TOAbKo 06 oTAbixe. Oh uaCTo xoaht b Teaxp, b khho, Ha
KOHuepT, e3AHT c npHHTeAeM b pecTOpaH obeAaTb hah ymuHaTb.
riexpOB AlbbHT CBCHKHH B03AVX. HO OH He AlbbHT ryAHTb, — OH
BcerAa e3AHT Ha aBTOMObHAe. JXa, moh Apyr fleTpOB yMeeT >KHTb!
OAMHHAAUATblft yPOK
ELEVENTH LESSON
Accusative singular of feminine nouns and adjectives—

Prepositions nepe3, 3a, ooa—Past tense;
translation of “to have” (past)
XojuikTb b rocTH To go visiting

ESAHTb B rOCTH To go (drive) visiting
B AepeBHio To the village; to the country
B AepeBHe In the village; in the country
Hepe3 AeHb, Aea In a day or two
Ka>KAbiit pas Every time
B nocaejiHHft pas Last time
Ha npa3AHHKH For the holidays
MHTaTb BCJiyx To read aloud
IIoMoraTb no xo3McTBy To help around the house (in
the housekeeping)
XOTb HeJIblMI AeHb Even for a whole day; for an
entire day, if you please
To.TO. Now . . . now . . .
B ropy.ooa ropy Up hill. . . down hill
II. READING: Y BABYUIKM
3aBTpa HuKOJiaft eêr b tocth k dadymice, b nepeBHio.

BaSyuiKa BcerAa >KHJia b AepeBHe- OHa juoduJia npnpoay,
AepeBeHcxyio mH3Hb, cbg>khh B03nyx... Oh4 peAKo npne3>Kajia
b ropoA- HuKOJiafi noMHHji, hto, Korâ 6a6yuiKa npne3xcaaa b
ropOA, OHa ne Morjia hh cnaTb, hh ecTb, hh rrarb h nepe3 AeHb,
ABa ye3xcaAa odparao b AepeBHio! H xanfAbiii pa3 OHa roBOpHJia:
— Hy, 3to yxce b nocjieAHMfl pa3 h cioas npue3>KaK)!
Oreu,1 h MaTb1 HnKOJiaa padoTajin Ha 4)a6pHKe h He motjih
e3AUTb b iocth k 6a6yiiiKe. 3aTO ohh oSemajiM Ha npa.3AHHKH
npHCbiJiaTb BHyxa.
HHKO.Taii jikjSha iuyMHyio, ropoACKyio xcH3Hb, ho h y 6a-
1 For the irregular declension of these nouns see Lesson 15 and

23, respectively.
87
88 OZIMHHA/lUATbIPI YPOK
SyiiiKH b .ziepeBHe oh He CKyuafl. B xopomyio noroAy oh xoamji

nepes moct, b coceAHWio AepeBHio. TaM >khji npHHTejib HHK0.7iaH,
Ky3Heu; CeMeH.
CoceziHHfl êpeBHH 6wjia AajieKo. /fopora to mjia b ropy, to
n oa ropy. Ho HHKOJiaft Mor ryjmTb xoTb uejibift AeHb! A BeuepoM
oh hjih HHTaji ecjiyx 6a6yLUKe HHTepecHyso KHHry, hjih noivioraji
no xosnitcTBy.
III. VOCABULARY
6a6yuiKa grandmother MaTb mother

BHyx grandson MOCT bridge
BHepa yesterday Myn< husband
BbICOKHM, high, tall OTeu. father
6
noroAa weather
#»
JQ
i
ropa mountain npHpoaa nature

ropOACKofl, city, urban peAKO rarely
-a«, -oe pena river
AajieKO far, far away COCeAHHM neighboring
AepeBeHCKHH, country, village -'hh, -'ee
-'an -'oe _ (adj.) CIOAa here, hither
AepeBHH village UiyMHblH, noisy
lKH3Hb life -'an, -'oe
Ky3Heu blacksmith
Verbs
ryjiHTb (I) to walk, take a ■walk

jiio6HTb; jho6jik>, jiioOHUib. to love
jho6ht
oSemarb (I) to promise
noMorarb (1) f -fdat) to help
npne3>KaTb (I) to arrive
npHCbuiaTb (I) to send
cnaTb; cmuo, cnwuib, cnsiT to sleep
yeainaTb (I) to depart, drive away
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Accusative of the feminine in the singular
The accusative case has the ending -y when hard and -w

when soft. The accusative of feminine nouns ending in ~b,
however, is like their nominative, also ending in -b*.
ELEVENTH LESSON
Hard Soft Soft

Nominative KQMHaTa KyXHfl #Bepb
Accusative KOMHaTy KyXHK) #Bepb
B. . Adjective. Accusative of the feminine
The accusative case has the ending -yio when hard and
-Kuo when soft:
Hard Accented Soft
Nominative HOBaa Oojibinaa nocjie#HHH

Accusative HOByK) 6ojibiuyio nocjie#Hioio
C. Prepositions
1. Hepe3 "‘across, over” always takes the accusative case:
Oh H#er nepes yjiHuy. He goes across (crosses) the

street.
Floes# e#eT nepes moct. The train crosses the bridge.
2. 3a1 “behind” and no#1 “under” are followed by the

accusative case when they indicate motion to a place and
answer the question “where to?”:
91 H#y 3a #Bepb. I go (step) behind the door.

H KJia#y ra3eTy no# KHHry. I place the newspaper under
the book.
D. Verb. The past tense
1. To form the past tense of a verb of either conjugation

(I: HHTaTb or II: rosopHTb) drop the ending -Tb of the infini¬
tive. To the resulting stems (huts-; roBopfi-) add the following
endings:
1 For 3a and no# with the instrumental see Lesson 12.

90 O^HHHAJlLlATbin YPOK
Singular
Person Masc. Fem. Neut.
First H UHTa-Jl h MHTa-Jsa not used

Second TbI 4HTa-JI Tbi HHTa-Jia not used
Third OH 4HTa-JI oHa 4HTa-Jia OHO HHTa-JIO
Plural
Person All Genders

First MbI 4HTa-JIH
Second Bbl HHTa-JIH
Third OHH 4HTa-J!U
Note that the same forms serve to express both the simple
past and the perfect tense when they denote a prolonged or
repeated action or condition:
h, tm HHTaji, HHTajia I, you read, have read, have
been reading
2. The past tense of the verb “to be” is formed regularly:

Sbixb: 6bui, 6buia, 6biJio, 6mjim
3. Irregular past tense forms will be given in the Lesson-
Vocabularies along with the other forms of the verb.
4. Following are the irregular past tense forms of verbs

that have already been introduced:
ecTb (to eat): eji, ejia, ejio, ejiH
H^TH (to go) : UieJI, LJUJia, IUJIO, UIJ1H
KJiacTb (to put): KJiaji, KJiajia, Kjiajio, KjiajiH
MOHb (to be able): Mor, Morjia, Morjio, Morjitf
5. Past tense of “to have”:
To form the past tense of “to have,” use the construc¬

tion explained in Lesson 6, introducing the past tense forms
of the verb “to be”:
Masc. y 6parra 6biJi xcypHaji. The brother had a
magazine.
Fem. y MeHH 6buia KHHra. I had a book.
Neut. BbiJio y mchh nepo? Did I have a pen?
Plural all /la, y mchh 6 hah h Yes, I had both pen and
genders KHHra h nepo. book.
ELEVENTH LESSON 91
In the negative sentence, however, the verb is always in

the neuter third person singular (6buio), even when the object
is in the plural:
y MeHH He 6 mao >KypHMa. I did not have a magazine.

y MeHH He 6mjio khhth. I did not have a book.
y MeHH He 6buio nepa. I did not have a pen.
y MeHH He 6bIJIO HH KHHTH I had neither book nor pen.
hh nepa.
VOCABULARY BUILDING
Expressions of Place
FAe where KyAa where (to), whither
xyx here cioAa here, hither
raw there TyAa there, thither
V. QUESTIONS
1. Kyâ eêT 3aBTpa HnKOjiaft? 2. Une Bcerâ HCHJia 6a-
6yuiKa? 3. Hto OHa jnodvuia? 4. KyAa oHa peAKQ npHe3Hcajia?
5. rioneMy 6a6yuiKe 6hao ruioxo >KHTb b ropoê? 6. Cnopo jih
OHa ye3>Kajia oSparao b aepeBHio? 7. Hto OHa roBOpnna KancAbiH
pa3? 8. Fae paSoTaJiH OTeu, h MaTb HHKQAan? 9. FtoneMy ohh He
motjih e3^r.HTb b tocth k 6a6yniKe? 10. KyAa ohh oSemajm
npHCbiJiaTb BHyna Ha npa3AHHKH? 11. JIk>6ha jih Hnnojiaii iuyM-
Hyio, ropoACKyio HCH3Hb? 12. y Koro HHKOJian HHKorAa He
CKynaji? 13. Uto oh AeJiaJi b xopomyio noroAy? 14. KyAa oh
xoahji ryjiHTb? 15. rioueMy oh xqaha b coceAHioio AepeBHio?
16. Kan Huia Aopora? 17. Mor ah HHKOAan ryAHTb iieAHH AeHb?
18. Uto oh AeAaA BenepoM?
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all feminine nouns with
their adjectives and prepositions, giving their case and English
meaning as below:
6a6yiHKa Nominative “grandmother”
K 6a6yuiKe Dative “to the grandmother”
AepeBeHCKyiO >KH3Hb Accusative “country (village) life”
b. Give the correct forms of the nouns and adjectives in

parentheses:
92 OAMHHAAUATblPl yPOK
1. Mofi My>K qHTaer (eeqepHHH FaseTa). 2. BnyK oneHb

ak>6ht (MHJian 6a6yiHKa). 3. H e^y b (coceAHHfl AepeBHH).
4. BaSyuiKa HHTaeT BHyxy (HHTepecHan KHHra). 5. Mbi bahm
(ropanasi Kama) c mojiokom h c MacjioM. 6. iXopora hact nepe3
(dojibrnaa êpesHa). 7. /foKTop 4exoB jtio6ht (ropoACKaa
acHSHb). 8. Mbi ha^m Ha (SoAbuiaH pacnpoAaaca) b Mara3HHe.
9. Ohh e^yT Ha (HOBaa c|)a6pHKa). 10. AbtomoOhah eAeT hqa
(ropa). 11. H nnoxo hqmhio (Kpacnaa njiomaAt). 12. 3tot iiost
nHiner (HOBan KHHra). 13. Mbi xoporno 3iiaeM (coBexcKaa
Pocchh).
Translate the prepositions in parentheses and supply endings

wherever necessary:
1. (Across) yjTHU— 6biJio HOBoe 3AaHHe. 2. Oh meji (over)
MOCT— k AOMy Apyra. 3. Oh kaha^t nepo (under) nncbMO hah
(behind) khhf—. 4. XXopora maa (under) rop— [downhill].
5. rioueMy th BcerAa KAaAemb rnypHaa (under) ctoji—, a He na
CTOA? 6. Oh KA3A6T naKer (behind) Asep—. 7. (In) ABa-rpn ahh
OHa BcerAa ye3>Kana oOparao b AepeeHio.
a. Give the correct past tense forms of the verbs in parentheses;
1. fl (ryAHTb) HeAblH A^Hb B HOAe. 2. Bbl (3HHTb) HHAteHCpa
BpayHa? 3. Oh (KOHuaTb) pa6oTaTb TOAbKO no3AHO seuepOM.
4. O ueM Bbi (cnpamHBaTb) yuHTenn? 5. IbAe ohh (paSoTaTb) b
Pocchh? 6. B Kny6e hhkto He (cKyuaTb). 7. Buepa Mbi (dbiTb)
na KOHuepTe. 8. Mtq th (AOiarb) yTpOM? 9. Oh BcerAa (oOeAaxb)
AOMa. 10. CecTpa (achtb) cobccm phaom.
b. Change the following sentences into the past tense:
1. Kto yMeeT roBOpHTb no-aHrAHHCKH? 2. H He aioCaio

ryAHTb. 3. Oh BcerAa 3a6biBaeT ero cJjaMHAHio. 4. Ohh ofiemaioT
npne3}KaTb cioas uacTO. 5. B acapKyio houh h He Mory cnaTb.
6. 51 eAy noe3AOM b OraAHHrpaA. 7. Ona hact neuiKOM. 8. CecTpa
He Moater ryAHTb cahllikom asacko. 9. Ky3Hep CeMeH nacTO
npHCbuiaeT 6pary cBeacee MacAO H3 acP^bhh. 10. MaTb ye3>KaeT
b MocKBy.
c. Give the complete past tense (all persons and genders) of the
following:
1. 51 HAy aomoh. 2. 51 ne Mory cnaTb. 3. 51 b ropoAe.
d. Change exercise C, a and b, of Lesson 6 into the past tense.

ELEVENTH LESSON 93

A
1. Here I am again, in the country! 2. I never could live
in the city. 3.1 can neither sleep nor eat there. 4.1 have always
loved nature and fresh air. 5. [My] father and mother have
always worked in the city at a factory. 6. They could never go
to the country. 7. But my grandmother lives in the country.
8. And here I am again at [my] grandmother’s. 9. Yesterday I
went (was) with [my] brother to (in) the neighboring village.
10. There lives my good friend, the blacksmith, Semyon. 11. (It
is) far from grandmother’s house to (ao & gen.) the house of
the blacksmith. 12. The road goes now uphill, now downhill and
over a bridge. 13. My brother and I have always loved to walk
and can walk all day. 14. Here in the country I am always hun¬
gry. 15. For breakfast I eat black or white bread and drink
fresh milk or hot tea. 16. For dinner and supper I eat soup and
meat, black bread with butter and cheese, and again drink tea.
17. In the evening after supper my brother and I usually help
grandmother around the house. 18. Grandmother cannot read.
19. Sometimes I read aloud to grandmother. 20. Yes, it is very
nice (good) to live at grandmother’s.
B
1. “Masha, there is a large package from Russia, from
Moscow.” 2. “From whom and for whom is that large, beautiful
package?” 3. “Of course for Masha from [her] sister in Mos¬
cow.” 4. In the package was a large white and blue tablecloth,
a small photograph, and a long letter from [my] sister. 5.
Finally! We had waited four weeks for [that] letter! 6. My
sister wrote on very poor paper, and her pen was also very
poor. 7. We could not read [her] letter rapidly (fast), but only
with difficulty. 8. My sister explained why she did not write.
9. “There is a reason for it,” she wrote. 10. “I was working’ day
and night in a large factory and was also helping around the
house. 11. I had no energy to read or write and could only
sleep when I was not working (did not work). 12. We always
say here: ‘There is much work here in the city, but little rest,
little bread, and little meat!’ 13. Now I live with Grandmother
in the country. 14. I love life in the village — the blue sky,
the fresh air. 15. Not very far from the village is a beautiful
little river and a high mountain. 16. In good weather I walk
on (no) a bridge across the river to (up to) the high mountain.
17. I love to live here, to walk (take walks) at (near) the river,
but in a day or two we go (drive) back to the city and to
work.” 18. “Misha! Your sister writes that this beautiful table¬
cloth is from dear Grandma. 19. And she is sending the photo¬
graph of your brother because she knows that you always loved
that photo. 20. She promises to write again in a week or two.”
ABEHAAUATblH YPOK
TWELFTH LESSON
Instrumental singular of feminine nouns and adjectives —

Prepositions 3a, hga, c (co) — Review of feminine singular
noun and adjective declensions and of prepositions
Paboxaxb naA khhtoh To work on the book

C paHHero yxpa Prom early morning
C yxpa ao Benepa Prom morning to evening
3a 3asxpaKOM At breakfast
3a y>KHHOM At supper
3a oSeôM At dinner
Okqjio HeAeJtH About a week
Okojio roAa About a year
Okojio iwecflua About a month
Mrpaxb Ha cnpHiiKe To play the violin
Mrpaxb Ha poajie To play the piano
Mrpaxb b napxbi To play cards
Pa66xaxb iiqa My3bmy To work while music is playing
Bee KpoMe Mena All except me
Mne He Mecxo No place for me (to be in)
Lit.: To me no place.
CAaexcH KBapxHpa; Kownaxa Apartment, room for rent
npocxHxe 3a GecnoKoftcxBO Sorry to have troubled you
Lit.: Forgive for the dis¬
turbance.
rio>KaAyHcxa! Please! If you please!
II. READING: CAAETCfl KOMHATA
CeroAHH rnioxaa noroAa. J/xpoM mejr cner, a ceftaac hact

AoxcAb. H xoreji bbiTb ceroAHa ueAbiu Aenb aoms h padoxaTb
HaA KHHrofl. Ho paboTaTb a He Mor. 3a TOHKoii CTeaofi coceAKa
c paHHero yxpa HrpaeT Ha cnpHnne. Baepa OHa roxce HrpaJia
ueAbift AeHb 6e3 OTAbixa. JXneM a 6wji Ha cobpaHHH. npHe3acaio
c cobpaHHH — KOHeano HrpaeT! PaboTaTb 6mao hcbosmoacho,
h a uejibift seaep wrpaji b KapTW b KAybe!
94
TWELFTH LESSON 93
>Khji h TyT b rocTHHHue okojio HeêjiH. PocTHHHua npe-

6
KpacHaa, KOMHaTa yno Han h ueHa KOMHaTbi He noporaa. Ho a
HHKorna He jik>6hji My3HKH h HHKorna He mot non MysbiKy
pa66xaxb.
B rocTHHHue, Bee KpoMe Mena, ohcbm^ho, jiioSht My3biKy.
Han KOMHaxoft cocenKH, c yxpa no Beqepa, cnymaioT panno.
B pecTopaHe 3a yatHHOM h sa oSenoM Bcerna HrpaiOT nsa op~
KecTpa. Onna nonpyra cocenKH neBHua. Oh4 ynnT apHK)
3a apHefi, necHio 3a necHefi... â, xyT b rocTHHHpe, MHe
He Mecxo!
H He noMHK), rne a UHTaa oS'baBJieHne: «Cnaexca KOMHaxa
b KBapTHpe HH)KeHepa». Tenepb MHe Bee paBHO, rne ncHTb, TOJibKO
6e3 My3biKH, noaeanyHcxa!
Eny TpaMBaeM k noMy HHiKenepa. 3bohio. 3a neepbio tojioc:
— Kto TaM? — 3to, oneBHnHO, aceHa HHJKenepa.
— TyT cnaexca KOMHaxa? —
— JXa, na, onHa KOMHaTa 6 bin a, ho ceiiqac b KOMHaTe ^kubct
moh nonpyra. OHa — H3BecTHaa neBHpa.
— Cnacndo, — roBopio a. — npocxMxe 3a OecnoKoftcxBo!
jÔ-CBHnaHHH! -
JJa, nyMaiO H, XOpOUJO UTO HeT KOMHaTbi B KBapTHpe HHHCe-
nepa. B KBapTHpe, rne jik>6ht My3biKy, MHe He Mecxo!
III. VOCABULARY
apHH aria necHH song

ron year nonpyra girl friend
tojioc voice npeKpacHbifi, excellent,
meHiuHHa woman -'aa, -'oe beautiful
H3BeCXHblfl, famous paHHHH, early
-'aa, -'oe -'hh, -''ee
MeCHU month CKpHOKa violin
My3biKa music cocen neighbor (masc.)
HeBO3M0>KH0 impossible cocenna neighbor (fern.)
onepa opera cxena wall
opKecxp orchestra XOHKHfl, thin
OHeBHnHO evidently -'aa, -'oe
neseu singer (masc.) xyna there, thither
neBHua singer (fern.)
Verbs
3BOHHXb; 3BOHK), 3B0HHiiib, to ring, call by phone

3B0HHX
CHHMaxb (I) to take off; to rent
yHHXb; yqy, ynwiiib, yqax (Acc.) to learn; to teach
yHHXb npyra (Acc.) My3biwe (Dat.!)
to teach the friend music, instruct ... in music.
JlBEHA/ILIATblH yPOK
96
[he of canes with HrpaTb: (I) “to plan”:

Mrpaib Ha with the prepositional ease means to play an instru¬
ment :
MrpaTh Ha CKpnnKe 1° Pâ>r the viol'm
HrpaTb b with the accusative case means to play a game:
fl Hrpaso b reHHHC, rOJIbcf) I play tennis, goli,
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun. Instrumental of the feminine in the singular
The instrumental case has the ending -oft (-oso) when

hard and the ending -eft (-eio) when soft. Here, however, as in
the accusative, the feminines ending in -b form an exception.
Their instrumental case ends in -bio:
Hard Soft Soft

Nominative KQMHaia KVXHfl ^Bepb
Instrumental KOMHaTOft (OK)) KyxHett (eio) ABepbio
In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule C, unstressed

-oft (ok)) changes to -eft (-eio) when preceded by the sibilant
consonants >k, m, in, m, u:
Nom. Kama, Instr, Kauieft(eio)Nom. neBHua, Instr. ne-

BHueft(eio), etc.
Note that when the stress falls on the instrumental soft

ending, the e of the ending changes to e. (Cp. ceMba “family,”
ceMbeft “with the family.”)
B. Adjective
The instrumental case of the feminine adjective has the

ending -oft (010) when hard and the ending -eft (-eio) when
soft:
Hard Hard Soft
Nominative HOBasi dojibmaa nocê^HHH

Instrumental HOBOft (OK)) dOJIbWOft (OK)) nocaeaHeft (eio)
TWELFTH LESSON 97
In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule C, the unstressed

-oh (oso) changes to -eft (eio) after the sibilant consonants
ik, h, in, m, u: Nom. ropanan, Instr. ropHHeH(eio); Nom. xopowaa,
Instr. xopouieii (eio), etc.
C. Prepositions
1. The 'prepositions sa “behind” and iioa ‘"under”:
These prepositions are followed by the instrumental when

they indicate position and answer the question “where?”:
Kpecao 3a asepbio. An armchair is behind the

door.
Pfl3eTa noji KHHrofi. The newspaper is under the
book.
2. 3a with the instrumental can also have the meaning of

“for, after”:
H Hiiy 3a bqaoh. I go for (after) water (to

fetch water).
Oh Hiie'T 3a ra3<§TOH. He goes for the paper.
3. The preposition c (co):
It has been pointed out (Lesson 8) that the preposition

c (co) is used with the instrumental case when meaning “with,
along with, in the company of.” However, with the mean¬
ing “from,” this preposition always takes the genitive case:
H CHHMaio cKaTepTb co cTOiia. I take the tablecloth from the

table.
Note that c (co) “from” is used as a complementary prepo¬

sition to Ha “to”:
Oh HneT Ha KOHiiepT. He is going to the concert.
Oh ha£t c KOHiiepia. He is coming (going) from the
concert.
H eAy Ha 3aB0A. I am going (riding) to the

factory.
H eAy c 3aBOAa. I am going (riding) from the
factory.
98 ABEHAJlUATbIFl YPOK
D. Review and Summary
Prepositions
Motion towards Nest Motion from
B and acc. ‘ ‘ into ’5 1 B and prep, “in” H3 and gen. “out of”
Ha and acc. “on” ea and prep, “on” c and gen. “from”
K and dat. “to” y and gen. “at” OT and gen. “from.”
Illustrative Sentences:
>i b KJiyde (Prep.; H HAy B K7iy6 (Ace.) # HAy H3 KAy6a (Gen.)

H Ha KOHpepTe H HAy Ha KOHpepT H HAy c KOHuepra
(Prep.) (Acc.) (Gen.)
5\ y 6paTa (Gen.) H HAy k 6pary (Dat.) H HAy ot 6paTa (Gen.)
OHa 3a ABepbio (Instr.) OHa hagt 3a ABepb (Acc.)

Fa3eTa Ha CTOJie (Prep.) Oh KjiaAeT ra3eTy Ha ctoa (Acc.)
fa3eTa noA KHHrofi (Instr. Oh KJiaAet rasery hoa KHHry (Acc.)
Singular Declension of the Feminine Noun1
Hard Soft Soft Soft
Norn. KOMHara KyXHH CjiaMMJIHH ABepb

Gen. KOMHaTbl KyXHH 4)aMHJIHH ABepM
Dat. KOMHaTe KyxHe (J)aMHAHH ABepH
Acc. KOMHary KyXHIO tjjaMHAHIO ABepb
Instr. KOMHaTOfi (OK)) KyxHeii (eio) cjjaMHJiHeft (ero) ABepbio
Prep. KOMHare KyXHC 4>aMHJIHH ABepw
1 For Vowel Mutation Rule see p. 31.

TWELFTH LESSON 99
Singular Declension of the Feminine Adjective
Hard Accented Hard Soft
Nom. HOBan SoJibinaH xopomaH nocjieAHHH

Gen. hobom GOJIbHJOM xopouiew nocJieAHefl
Dat. hobom 6o./ibmofl xopowefi nocneAHefi
Acc. HOByio 6ojibmyio xopomyio nocjieAHKjio
Instr. HOBOfl (ok>) 6ojibmofl (6io)xop6meft (eio) nocJieAHefl (eio)
Prep, hobom Sojibwofi xopowefi nocjieAHefi
V. QUESTIONS
1. Kanan ceroAHH noroAa? 2. PIoueMy bm xotcjih 6biTb ce-

rojuHH a6m&? 3. PloqeMy bh He motjih paSoxaTB? 4. KorAa co-
ceAKa nrpajia Ha cKpnnKe? 5. PAe Bbi 6 bum ah£m? 6. HoneMy bh
HrpaJiH Becb senep b xapTbi b KJiy6e? 7. PAe bh xcHBeTe He-
AeJiio? 8. Kaxan y Bac KOMHaTa? 9. PAe cjiyuiaioT paano c yTpa
AO Benepa? 10. KorAa Hrpatox ABa opxecTpa b pecropane?
11. Kto, oneBHAHo, jiio6ht My3HKy? 12. Kto SbiJia noApyra
coceAKH? 13. Hto oh4 ymuia? 14. PAe CAaeTCH KOMHaTa? 15. KaK
bh eAeTe k AOMy HmKenepa? 16. Hto cnpauiHBaeT rojioc 3a
ABepbio? 17. Kto ceftqac b KOMHaTe?
Exercises with Grammar A and 3
a. From the Reading Exercise write out eight different feminine

nouns modified by adjectives and/or used with prepositions, giving
their case and English meaning, thus:
3a TOHKoft creHofi Instrumental “behind the thin wall”
Ha CKpHnne Prepositional “on'the violin”
b. Supply correct ease forms of the nouns and adjectives in

parentheses:
1. 3a (HHTepecHan paOoTa) a He CKynaio. 2. 3a (TOHKan

CTeHa) Moft coceA HrpaJi uejibiw a^hb Ha cKpHnue. 3. KHHra TaM,
noA (BeqepHHH ra3eTa). 4. Moe nncbMO iioa (chhhh KHHra).
5. PlepeA (MOAOAaa >KeHa) HOBan cuaTepTb. 6. Mo a KOMHaTa HaA
(OojibuiaH KyxHH). 7. >KypHaji Me>KAy (HOBaa KHHra) h (seuep-
HHH ra3eTa). 8. MeacAy (ctojx)' h (ABepb) 6buio Kpecjio. 9. Bh
pa6oTaeTe HaA (pyccxaa KHHra)?
Supply suitable prepositions, choosing them from among the

following: 3a, noA,.c, Ha, b, M3, nepea:
100 mEUAJUXAThm yPOK
1. Kpecjio.juBCpbio. 2. H HAy.ABepb. 3. Oh
hast.ra3eTQH. 4. Tbi cneiHHLUb.pa66Ty, a a HAy
. paGoTbi. 5. OHa maa. ypoK, a mm hi ah .
ypoKa. 6. LI I ah ohm.rearp hah.Tearpa? 7. CeroAHH
mm ye3a<aeM.ropoAa h eA^M.AepeBHio. 8. Ky3Heu
LueA ..... boaoh. 9. >KypHaji jieacaji.ra3eTOH, a ne-
po.raseTe. 10. 51 cnemnji.KOHLiepra aomoh.
Exercises with Grammar D (Review)
a. Decline in the singular.-
1. KpacHaa nAomaAb. 2. pyccKaa KHHra. 3. yAoSnaa KOMHara.
4. nocJieAHaa HeAeaa. 5. coBeTCKaa Pocchh.
b. Translate the prepositions in parentheses and supply endings

wherever necessary :
1. 51 He ak>6ha pa6oT— (at) HiyMH— (JiaSpHK—. 2. (After)

pa6oT— a cneniHJi (from) c£>a6pHK— aomoh (to) HteH—'. 3. Moh
KBapTHpa ObiJia (in) doAbin—', hob—, ho He AOpor—' tocth-
HHU.—. 4. H HaCTO AyM3K) (about) CâCTJIHB— A(H3H (in)
AepeBH—. 5. CeroAHH mm eAeM (with) a<eH—' (to) 6a6yiiiK—
(to) AepeBH—. 6. % eAy Tyaa (without) ateH—7. (In) BeuepH—
ra3eT— 6mao od'bHBAeHHe (about) HHTepecH—, hob— khht—.
8. Tm onHTb HAeuib (to) KOHuepT— CAymaTb CKyuH— My3biK—?
9. 3to riHCbMO (from) 6par— hah (from) cecrp—'? 10. Hex, oho
(from) noApyr— (from) cobctck— Pocc—'. 11. OHa Tenepb
>KHBeT b MocKBe (next to) KpacH— nAoinaA—. 12. Mbi cnpauiH-
BaeM npoAaBLUHH— (about) ueH—' KpacHB—, 66ji— CKzrrepT—.
13. (For) Koro 3TO yAo6H— KpecAO? 14. Oh cennac hast
(across) yAHu— (for) BeuepH— ra3eT—. 15. 3HaeTe bm h3-
BecTH—, moaoa—' neBHH— BapcoBy? 16. KoHeuHo, OHa Tenepb
H3BecTH—- «3Be3Aa» aMepHKSHCK— onep— b Hbto Hopne. 17. Mbi
exaAH (across) pen— (to) coceAH— AepeBH—. 18. B ncapKyio
noroA— mm ak>6hah ryAHTb (at) pen—'. 19. Bot KpacHB—,
6ea— ofiAaKo TaM (over) rop—'. 20. (In) khht— (about)
pyccK— My3biK— HHTepeCHaa cjiOTorpa^HH h3bccthoh neBHH—
BapcoBofi.
c. Arrange alphabetically all prepositions studied up to this
point, giving their ease and English meaning; for example:
6es G enitive ‘ ‘ without ’ *
B (bo) Accusative “into, in”
B (bo) Prepositional “in”
and so on. 23 forms in all, counting the various cases each preposition
can be used with, e. g. B with accusative and with prepositional.
d. Form short Russian sentences with all of the above pre¬
positions.
TWELFTH LESSON 101
A
1. Today I wanted to work on [my] new book. 2. But I
could not work. 3. A neighbor played the violin all day long.
4. I live in a fine (good) hotel. 5. My room is very comfortable.
6. But I do not like music and cannot work while music is
playing. 7. Yesterday I read in the evening paper: 8. “Room
for rent in the home of an engineer.” 9. Now I am going there
by streetcar. 10. I ring. A woman opens the door. 11. “How are
you! Is there a room for rent here?” 12. “Did you read the an¬
nouncement in the paper?” 13. “Yes. In the hotel, where I live
[there is] music all day [long]. 14. I want a room in a house
where there is no music.” 15. “Oh! (Ax!) But my friend (fern.)
is a famous singer.” 16. “Does she live here now?” 17. “Yes!
She studies song after song.” 18. “Thank you! Good bye! Sorry
to have troubled you!”
1. On the way home Nina meets her friend (fern.) Vera.

2. “Hello, Vera, how are you? Where (where to) are you going?”
3. “Oh, hello, Nina! I am quite well, thank you. 4. I am going
to work in the factory there, across the street. 5. Are you
coming (go on foot) from the theater or the concert?” 6. “Oh,
no, I am coming from [my] lesson at Professor Ivanov’s home.
7. You know, he lives now in a small hotel at (next to) the
‘White Square.’ ”8. “Is that so!” 9. “Yes, I go every day to the
lesson; I am learning lesson after lesson but cannot yet speak
Russian. 10. Vera, do you remember Mrs. Semyonova? 11. She
is our (Hama) neighbor (fern.) in the new hotel, where we
live now. 12. She is a very good friend (fern.) of [my] sister.
13. She, my sister, and I are going (driving) to Russia tomor¬
row. 14. I am now hurrying, because before departing (the
departure) one must not [arrive] (be) home too late.”
15. “Nina, that is a splendid idea! 16. My brother Tom
lived in Russia about a year and now speaks Russian without
difficulty. 17. He lived in a large, new hotel, spoke only Russian,
went to the club “The Red Star” during the day, and in the
evening (he) often went visiting. 18. At home he lay on the
sofa and read a Russian book or a Russian magazine. 19. He
can read aloud for an entire day, from early morning until
evening, without rest. 20. Yes, my brother Tom is a person of
(with) great energy! ” 21. “Dear Vera, I am in a great hurry
(I hurry very much)! Good bye!” 22. “Good bye, Nina! Bon
voyage!”
102 UBEHAJUlATm y?OK
ADDITIONAL READING MATERIALS
Review of Prepositions
FPA1KAAHHH AblMOB
IIo yjiHue HAex rpa>KAaHHH Hmmob. Oh HAex c padoxbi H3

6aHKa. AbiMOB asbho pa6oxaex b daHKe, b ropoAe, a xcHBex 3a
ropOAOM y cecxpbi. Kax<AHH AeHb Hhmob e3AHX b ropoA, Ha
pa6oxy) b daHK. Uâhm AeHb oh na pa6oxe, b ropoAe, b daHKe,
a BenepOM oh cneninx c padoxbi, H3 ropoAa, H3 daHKa AQMoft
K cecxpe.
Ho ceroAHH BenepoM y jl,biMOBa codpaHHe b xnyde, b ropo¬
Ae h oh He ye3)Kaex M3 ropoAa, a HAex b pecxopaH yxcHHaxb.
Ceimac ^bimob HAex He b pecxopaH h He Ha codpaHHe b Kny6,
a oh HAex 3a BenepHeft rasexon b Mara3HH HBaHOBa. Oh BcerAa
HHxaex BenepHK)K» ra3exy nocxe yxcHHa. Mara3HH HBanoBa Ha
dOAbiiioH HAomaAH He AaAexo ox danna, wewAy SAanneM My3en
h xeaxpoM.
PecxopaH, KyAa JXmmob ha£x yxcHHaxb, nepe3 yxHpy ox
Mara3HHa HBaHOBa. Tyx b pecxopane BcerAa Hrpaex opKecxp.
XIhmob AiodHx ecxb noA My3biKy. Ulimob HAex k cxony okoao
OKHa, C'OBCeM pHAOM C OpKeexpOM.
— Hxo bh xoxHxe ceroAHH Ha yxcHH?—cnpaniHBaiox JXbi-
MOBa.
— CHanaAa Bam npeKpacHbifi cyn, hoxom Bam 3aMenaxenb-
HbiH dH(J)mxeKC, K yx<HHy h xony HeMHoro BHHa, hoxom KOHenHO
h xony Koc|)e. riepeA codpaHneM a BcerAa nbio Ko(J)e... — oxBe-
naex ^hmob.
Hhmob *Aex y>KHHa c HexepneHHCM. y>Ke no3AHO.
•— PIpocxHxe, — roBopHx Ubimob, — h oneHb enemy. Y
MeHH ceroAHH senepOM codpaHHe b texyde. Mhc h4ao dbixb Ha
codpaHHH... —
— OneHb >KaAb, nxo bh cnemnxe. Yxchh erne He roxoB. Box
BenepHHH ra3exa.
— Cnacndo, ho h hhkotah He HHxaio BenepHeft ra3exbi hh
AO yxcHHa, hh 3a yxmHOM, a xoabko nocxe yxoma, — roBOpnx
Jj(bIMOB.
— Ax, xan... ceflnac h hav Ha kvxhio. Moxtex dbixb Bam
y}KHH yxce roxoB. —
— Xoporno, — roBOpnx ^hmob, — a x<Ay. —
Box HAex qenoBeK (waiter) c xyxHH, ho yxcHHa Hex!
— OneHb xmxb, — onnxb roBopnx oh, — ho... —
— 51 He Mory >KAaxb, — roBopHx JLamob, — ho h He Mory
haxh Ha codpaHHe 6e3 yxcHHa! —
TWELFTH LESSON 103
— FIoqeMy Bbi xoTHTe hath Ha coOpaHHe ceroAHH BenepoM?

Bbi CJIHUIKOM HacTO xoAHTe Ha coOpaHHe! HoneMy Bbi^HHKorAa
He XOAHTe B KHHO? CerOAHH B KHHO HAST npeKpaCHblft $HJIbM.
HrpaeT H3BecTHaa «KHH03Be3Aa» (movie star) OpAOBa! ■
— JX& hto bbi roBopHTe! 3to He nAoxaa hagh! — OTBenaeT
/XbiMOB, — Ha coOpaHHH b KAy6e h BcerAa Tax cKynanx
- Hy, a Ha cf)HAbMe C «KHH0-3Be3A0H» OpJIOBOH HHKTO
HHKorAa He cxyHaeT... A, bot h Bam y>KHn! —
— CnacH6o, SoAbmoe cnacnSo h sa xopouiyio HAeio h 3a
\okhh! —
TPWHAflUATblR YPOK
THIRTEENTH LESSON
Hard adjective singular declension—Imperative mood—

Time expressions
Ha nojiy On the floor

no pacnHcaHHio According to schedule
Ms roAa b roA Year in, year out; from year
to year
Pobho b jibs qaca At two o’clock sharp (exactly)
B neTbipe naca ahh At four P.M.
Ha TpH, neTbipe qaca For three, four hours
B BocKpeceHbe On Sunday
B noHejiejibHHK On Monday
Bo BTOpHHK On Tuesday
B cpeAy On Wednesday
B MeTBepr On Thursday
B nflTHHuy On Friday
B cy666Ty On Saturday
.Haace b BocKpeceHbe Even on Sunday
FOBOpH, rOBOplil Go ahead, talk all you want!
(Talk, talk!)
II. READING: >KHTb no PACnMCAHHK)
PpaxcAaHHH PleTpoB oneHb 3aHHTOM qejioBeK. >KHBer oh b

SojibiuoM, hobom 3AaHHH, b KBaprnpe AOKTOpa MexoBa. Odcxa-
HOBKa b KOMHaTe ileTpoBa npocTan, ho yAodHaa. Okojio dojib-
iuoro oKHa yAodHoe KpecJio. IlepeA yAodHbiM KpecjioM npocTofi
ctoji, a MexcAy KpecjioM h npocTbiM ctoaom, AaMna. Ha nojiy,
ot cTeHbi ao creHLi, Jiea-cmr Koeep.
>Khji IleTpoB no pacnMcanwio. B notteaejibrnm yrpoM, oh

rraeaji nwcbMO ctmy. Pobho qepe3 nac FleTpoB Komaji micaTb
nacbMo h e3AHJi b Konropy. CoodmeHne db'uio yAodHoe. Hepe3
y Jinny ot AQMa, tab oh >khji, dbiJio HOBoe MeTpo.
104
THIRTEENTH LESSON 105
B KOHTope, IleTpoB He cneuiHJi c koboA paSoToft. PaSoTaj!

OH Me^JieHHO, 3aTO XOpOlHO. Bo BTOpHHK, pOBHO B ABA Haca, OH
cjiymajr aHrJiHHCKoe paAHO, a b cpeAy eenepoM BcerAa HHTaA
aHrjiHHCKyso ra3eTy.
B qexBepr, b qexbipe qaca ahh, oh BcerAa 63aha b KJiyS Ha
coSpanHe. B naXHHuy BenepoM oh paSoTaji AOMa: ABa hah TpM
qaca totobha aHrAHHCKHH ypOK.
B cy666xy, riocAe CAyxcSbi, oh BcerAa xoaha Ha ypoK an-

TAHHCKOrO H3bIKa.
B BOCKpeceHbe paHo yrpoM FleTpos Bcerâ xoaha b uepnoBb.

B BOCKpeceHbe hhkto He padoTaeT, ho FleTpoB AaiKe b BOCKpe¬
ceHbe HHorAa e3AHA b KOHTOpy, Ha TpH, qexbipe qaca. H Tax oh
>kha H3 roaa b roA.
— CAymaHTe, PleTpOB, — roBopHAa cexpexapma HeTpoBa,
— ne paSoTaAxe Tax mhoto! XoAHxe HHonAa b Teaxp, CAymaAxe
MysbiKy, Hrpaflxe b tchhuc! Bbi eiue moaoaoA qeAOBex! —
— Xoponio, xoporno! — OTBenaA FleTpoB. — FoeopA, ro-
BOpnl — avmba oh. — Th AyMaemb, a Mory HrpaTb b tchhhc,
hah CAymaTb My3bixy ! . . . HeT, a 3aHHT6A neAOBeK ! .. .
III. VOCABULARY
AO (+ Gen.) till, until CAync6a work, job

3aHHXOft, busy coo6meHwe communication
-a», -oe CblH son
KOBep carpet, rug UepKOBb eluircli
KOHXOpa office qacbi (pi. only) watch, clock
AaMna Jamp H3bIK language,
oScxaHOBKa furniture tongue
noA floor BOCKpeceHbe Sunday
noqxa post office nOHeAeAbHHK Monday
npocxoA, simple, plain BXOpHHK Tuesday
- a a, - oe cpeAa Wednesday
pa3 one, one time, qexBepr Thursday
once nnxHHua Friday
CBOOOAHblA free cy666xa Saturday
-'an, -'oe
ceKpexapwa secretary (fern.;)
Verbs
roxoBHXb; roxoBAio, roxoBHuib, xoxobhx to prepare
nexb; noio, noeuib, norox to sing
106 TPHHA/fLJ, ATblPl YPOK
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Adjective
1. Declension of the hard adjective in the singular1 •
Case Masculine Neuter Feminine (Review)
Nom. HOBblH HOBOe HOBaa

Gen. HOBOrO HOBoro HOBOfl
Dat. HOBOMy HOBOMy HOBOM
( HOBoro
Ace. j HOBblH
HOBOe HOByiO
Instr. HOBbIM HOBbIM HOBOM (OK>)

Prep. HOBOM HOBOM HOBOM
The accusative of the masculine adjective is like the geni¬

tive when it modifies an animate noun, like the nominative
when it modifies an inanimate:
h 3HEK) xopomero AOKTopa; h HHTaio pyccKHft jKypnaji.
Adjectives ending in -oh (mojioaoh “young”) are declined

exactly like hobwA, except that the stress is on the ending
throughout the declension.
2. Peculiarities in the hard declension of the adjective :
a. In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule B, the vowel

bi of the ending changes to h after r, k, x, w, h, uj, m:
HQBblft bat pyCCKHfl, XOpOniHfl; HOBbIM but pyCCKMM, XOpOLUHM.
b. In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule C, the vowel o

of unaccented endings changes to e after >k, h, hi, m, u:
hobhh, HOBoro, HOBOMy etc., but xopoiiiHH, xopomero,

xopomeMy, etc.2
1 For the declension of the soft adjective see the next lesson. For
the plural declension of the adjective of both types (hard and soft!
see Lesson 19.
2 Yet dojiwouofi, dojibiuoro, eojibiuoiwy, in spite of hi preceding o, since
here the ending is stressed.
B. Verb. The imperative mood
1. Verbs with stems ending in a vowel:

To obtain the imperative form of a verb the stem of which
ends in a vowel, drop the second person singular ending and
add h for the singular familiar form, and nxe for the 'polite and
plural forms:
tfflTafi! read! (addressing a single person familiarly)
^HTaiiTe! read! (addressing a single person politely, or a group)
2. Verbs with stems ending in a consonant:
To obtain the imperative form of a verb the stem of which

ends in a consonant, drop the third person plural ending
and add m for the singular familiar form, and me for the polite
and plural forms:
rOBOpHTb: roBOpn! rOBOpHTe! speak!
However, if the infinitive stress is on the stem of the verb,

add -b, -bre:
roTOBHTb: roTOBb! rOTOBbTe! prepare!
If the stem ends on two consonants, add the full endings:

-h, -HTe. npocTHTb: npocTw! npocTHre! excuse!
MHdHTb: ^hcth! HHCTHxe! clean!
The imperative stress is on the same syllable as in the
infinitive. The pronoun is used only for special emphasis: Tbi
HHxau! You read!
3. Irregular imperatives:
Imperatives that do not follow exactly the above pattern

will be given in the vocabularies along with the other forms
of the verb. Following are such imperatives of verbs that have
already occurred:
6blXb: 6yAb! CyAbTe! be!

Aasaxb: AaBafi! AaeaHTe! give!
ecxb: euib! euibTe! eat!
exaxb: noe3ncaii! noe3ncaHTe! ride! drive! leave!
HCAaxb: >kah1 IKAHTe! wait!
hath hah! HAHTe! go!
108 IPMHAhUATJblPl yPOK
KJiacTb: KJiaAHS KJiaAHTe! place! put!

riHcaTb ithlum! HHUIMTe! write!
nHTb: neft! nefiTe! drink!
cnaib: cnnl enure! sleep!
XOAHTb: xoah! xoAHTe! go! (repeatedly)
AeiKaTb: jie>KH! jie>KHTe! lie! recline!
C. Time expressions
1. Definite duration of time:

Definite duration of time is expressed by means of the
accusative case (without the use of prepositions):
Oh HHTaji ABa uaca. He read [for] two hours.

Oh >khjt 3,aecb HeACJiK). He lived here [for] one week.
2. Translation of “for” in time expressions :

When “for” cannot be dropped from the English sentence
without changing its meaning, it is rendered by Ha with the
accusative.
Thus, one can say “He read for two hours,” or “He read
two hours.” Here the “for” must be rendered simply by the
accusative case as shown above under (1). Note that here the
action expressed by the verb lasts “two hours.”
But in the sentence “He is going to Russia for two weeks,”
the “for” cannot be dropped without distorting the meaning
of the sentence. This “for” must be rendered by Ha with the
accusative. Here the action expressed by the verb does not
last “two weeks”:
Oh eêT b Pocchio Ha ABe HeAMH.
3. “In, within, after the lapse of” is rendered by uepe3
with the accusative:
4epe3 roA oh xoporno Within (after) a year he spoke
roBopM no-pyccKH. Russian well.
4epe3 ABa naca mm eAeM In two hours we drive down
b ropoA- town.
4. “Per” or “a” (referring to time) is rendered by b (bo)
with the accusative:
Oh e3AHT b ropoA pa3 b roA. He drives into town once a

year.
Ohh nbK)T Man Tpn pa3a They drink tea three times a
b ACHb. day.
5. “At” and “on” (referring to time) are rendered by b

(bo) with the accusative:
Oh eêx b Mac, He is going (leaving) at one
o’clock.
Mbi eêM bo btophhk. We are going on Tuesday.
VOCABULARY BUILDING
Masculine Feminine Equivalent

rocnoAHH Mr., sir rocnoma Mrs., lady
rpaiKAaHHH citizen rpa>KAanKa citizen
cocen neighbor coceAKa neighbor
Apyr friend noApyra friend
neseu singer neeHua singer
ceKpexapb secretary ceKpeTapma secretary-
CTyACHT student cxyAeHTKa student
yneHHK pupil yneHHua pupil
y^MxeAb teacher yHHxeabHHua teacher
V. QUESTIONS
1. Fê >kha rpa>KAaHHH FleTpoB? 2. Kanaa 6buia odcTaiiOBKa

b KOMHare FleTpoBa? 3. Hxo 6hao okojio SoJibuioro OKHa?
4. Hto Sbuio nepeA ya66hhm icpecjiOM? 5. Hto 6biJio mcjkaY
KpecjiOM h npocTbiM ctojiom? 6. Hto jrejKajio Ha nojiy? 7. KaK
jkhji FfeTpoB? 8. Uto Aejiaji FleTpoB b noHeAeAbHHK yTpoM?
9. KyAa 63aha FlexpoB yTpoM? 10. HoqeMy coobmeHHe 6buio

yAOdnoe? 11. Hto AejiaA HeTpOB bo btophhk? 12. Hto Reji&ji
riexpoB b cpeAV? 13. KyAa c3aha FleTpoB b ueTBepr, b ueTbipe
naca ahh? 14. FAe 6bui FleTpoB b nHTromy BeuepOM?- 15. KyAa
xoaha FleTpoB b cv666tv, nocAe cAyxcObi? 16. KyAa £3aha Flex-
poB b BocKpeceHbe? 17. PadoTaA ah oh b KOHTope n,eAbiH AeHb
b BocKpeceHbe? 18. 4to AeAaA FlexpoB nocne paboTbi? 19. Hto
roBGpHAa rieTpOBy ceKpeTapma? 20. FIoneMy fleTpOB He nrpaA
B TeHHHC H He CAyiHaA MySbIKH?
a. Prom the first three paragraphs of the Reading Exercise
write out all adjectives, giving their gender, case, and English
meaning, thus:
3aHHToft Masculine, nominative “busy”
CoJibWOM Masculine, prepositional “big”
b. Give the singular declension of:

1. HOBblH ypOK. 2. XOpOIHHH BHyK. 3. pyccKHH xtypHaA. 4. ro-
110 TPHHAAUATblH yPOK
pjrqHH nan. 5. nepHMH xac.6. 6. CBo6oAnoe MecTO. 7. anrJiHHCKafl
ra3eTa. 8. 6ojibiuoe 3Aamie.
c. Give the correct form of the adjectives in parentheses:
1. noApyra (MOJiOAan) neBHUBi TO>Ke xoporno noeT. 2.

(mojtoaoh) êjiOBCKa HeT Mecra b rocnirraJie. 3. AneM, OHa
BCTpenajia Myata okojio (ropoACKoii) My3en. 4. Ao (hobhh)
Mara3HHa mbi hi jih Asa uaca. 5. Be3 (HOBoe) naJibTo oh He xonex
exaxb b ropoA. 6. B Mara3HHe Hex (cBeatee) MHca. 7. 3Ta apHH
h3 (pyccKaa) onepbi. 8. Oh jxslji KHHry (mhabih) Apyry. 9. FleBH-
pa neaa (pycCKaa) necmo. 10. 51 UHTan oduHBJieHHe b (pyccKan)
ra3eTe. 11. Mbi roBOpHJtn o (KpacHBaa) >KeHutHHe. 12. Moft Apyr
acHBer b (6ojibw6e, KpacHoe) 3AaHHH. 13. FIoa (OoAbmoft) cto-
jiom 6hji (KpacHBbift) KOBep. 14. Aoktop MexoB hchji b (hobhh,
GeJibift) AOMe, b (yAoOHan) KOMHare. 15. EcTb (cboSoahlih)
MecTO b TeaTpe?
d. Supply the correct endings:
1. AMepHKaHeu CKyuaer 6e3 anrjiHftcK— pa^HO. 2. fl 3Haro,

HTO Bbr 3HHBT—' HejIOBeK. 3. OKOJIO KpaCHB-nojlfl 6bIA MOH
AepeBeHCK— aom. 4. CecTpa noeT 9Ty apHio H3 pyccK— onepbi.
5. Ha nojiy, or yAo6H— Kpecjia ao 6ojibw—' ajihhh— CTOjia
jiexcaji KOBep. 6. liocjie cxynH— onepbi mli eAeM aomoh. 7. Bnepa
moh MaTb dbuia b njiox—' pecTopaHe. 8. 51 enemy na 6ojibui—'
pacnpoAaxey. 9. AneM h Houbio paOoTaioT Ha ropOACK—' dpk6pu-
ne! 10. Hepes }>JiHuy ot nouTbi hob— MeTpo. 11. Hepe3 HeACJiio
6a6yiHKa eAeT b myMH— ropoA- 12. Mepe3 nerape HeASJiH oh
y>xe HHTaji aHrnMcK— ra3eTy h aHrjiHftCK— inypHaJi. 13. Bam
cmh ceroAHH HAer Ha pyccK— ypoK? 14. 51 He xony roBopHTb e
33HHT—' ceKpexapmeH. 15. B noe3Ae He 6mjio cboSoah— MeCTa.

a. From the Reading Exercise write out all imperative forms,
giving their English meaning (5 forms in all).
b. Give all verbs hitherto learned in the singular and plural
imperative forms. Check all irregular imperative forms.
c. Change the singular imperative forms to the plural (or
polite) form and vice versa:
1. He roBopH c ceKperapmen! 2. Cnymait xopomyio My3biKy!

3. OTBenail Bceiyia 6biCTpo! 4. Hah xyAa neniKOM! 5. YxcHHafi
AOMa! 6. OSeAaiiTe b pecTopaHe! 7. Aop^KHTe cxpHnny! 8. Cne-
niHTe Ha nouTy! 9. He 3a6biBafiTe 6a6yniKy! 10. HuTairre BCJiyxI
d. Change to the imperative, familiar, and polite:

1. H Aak) pyccKyio ra3eTy cecrpe. 2. Mbi iiomhhm stot myM-
Hbift ropoA. 3. Houbio h odbiKHOBeHHo 3aKpbiBaio okho. 4. Bbi He
cnpaiiiHBaeTe o nHCbMe. 5. Bbi roTOBHTe xoponiHH o6e^.
Translate the expressions in parentheses:

1. (On Monday) a xox<y b KOHTOpy pOBHO (at two o’clock).
2. (On Tuesday) Mbi e3AHM b AepeBHio ii BCTpeuaeM cecTpy. 3. (On
Wednesday and Thursday) Barna noApyra 6huia Ha (J)a6pHKe
(at three o’clock). 4. (On Friday) a eAy k noApyre (for three
Weeks). 5. (On Saturday) ohh 3aKpbiBaAH Mara3HH. 6. «CAaeTca
KOMHara (for three weeks)». 7. rieBHua yaHAa HOByK) apmo (an
hour a day). 8. y 6paTa ypox aHrjiHHCKoro a3biKa (three times a
week). 9. H oSeAaA b pyccKOM pecTopaHe (once a week). 10. Moil
Apyr cjiymaeT paAHO (three hours a day). 11. (Within) TpH roAa
oh roBopHA no-pyccKH oqeHb xopomo. 12. (In an) uac a
Obi a b 6aHKe. 13. Mbi eAeM k chmy (in) ABe HeAeAH. 14. H eAy b
KAyO .(for three hours). 15. IlocAe 3aBTpaxa ohh BcerAa 3aKpu-
BaiOT pecTopaH (for an hour). 16. Oh exaA TpaMBaeM (for two
hours). 17. Oh acha TaM (for a whole year). 18. Oh hht4a (for a
whole hour).
1. Comrade Petrov lived in a large, beautiful building.

2. Now he is living in the apartment of [his] son. 3. He lives in
a large, comfortable room. 4. Across the street is a new subway.
5. On Monday Petrov hurries downtown to [his] office. 6. The
communication between the office and the house of [his] son
is very convenient. 7. On Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday
Petrov dines at home. 8. On Monday, Wednesday, and Friday
he dines in the city, in a good restaurant, exactly at one o’clock.
9. Breakfast and supper he always has at home with [his] son.
10. At his office comrade Petrov does not hurry with new work.
11. He works very slowly, but (for that) very well. 12. He never
talks with [his] secretary about music or the theater. 13. On
Sunday morning (in the morning) Petrov goes to church.
14. Then he drives to [his] office and works two or three hours.
15. In the daytime he always reads a Russian paper for three or
four hours and then listens to the English radio. 16. And so
Petrov lives, from year to year according to a [set] schedule.
112 TPHHA,lUATbin VPOK
1. Mr. Semyonov was a very famous singer at the opera in

Leningrad. 2. He had a wonderful voice. 3. He sang there for
four years, three and four times a week. 4. He was always very
busy and very serious, and often said impatiently: “You think
I can play golf and tennis or listen to the radio or go visiting
every evening! No, I am not a free man; I am a very busy
person!” 5. For about a month Mr. Semyonov was at the opera
in Moscow and sang there every Monday, Wednesday, and
Friday. 6. They say that he even sang on Sunday! 7. Sometimes
he went (drove) to the country for a week or two. 8. In the
noisy city he lived in a large, new building with a beautiful
garden. 9. In his apartment was a very large room. 10. On the
floor lay a black and white rug from wall to wall. 11. Next to
the door there was a small but very expensive table with an
expensive lamp, and between the door and the large window
there was a splendid piano. 12. Yes, Mr. Semyonov loved
expensive furniture! 13. Mr. Semyonov taught music to his
son Pavel when Pavel was still very young. 14. At first Pavel
did not want to work. 15. Mr. Semyonov always said to [his]
son: “Pavel, work while (noxa) you are still young! 16. Play
[your] violin and [your] piano! Never be late for (to) [your]
lesson! 17. Every week read a Russian and an English book
on music. 18. Go to the opera, go to the concert, but never
listen to bad music! 19. Don’t eat and sleep so much! Work,
my son!” 20. Now Pavel can play the violin and the piano, but
he does not love music. — And there is a reason for that!
HETblPHAflUATbm YPOK
FOURTEENTH LESSON
Soft adjective singular declension—Possessive pronoun-

adjective singular declension—Future tense; translation
of “to have” (future; abstract)
oceHbio In winter; in the fall

BecHow; jieioM In spring; in summer
Becb jaeHb All day
Ha eecb AeHb For the whole day
Ha boo HejaejiK) For the whole week
Ha Becb Mecsiu. For the whole month
Ha secb roA For the whole year
Ha BCK3 3MMy For the whole winter
Ha ece jiexo For the whole summer
npouijiaH 3MMa, eecHa, ocenb Last (past) winter, spring,
fall
npoiiiJioe jiero Last (past) summer
Jlo Jiera eme AajieKo. It’s still a long time till sum¬
mer.
Ha zany To the summer home (house)
Ha aane At the summer home (house)
Ha cJiy>K6y To (one’s) work, job
>KHByT h b ropone. In the city one can also live.
51 nejioBeK pa6oMHft. I am a working man.
HMeXb B03MO>KHOCTb To have the opportunity
WMexb yjiOBOJibCXBHe To have the pleasure
9io XBoe jiejio! That’s your business (your
worry)!
II. READING: )KHTb HA ZfAME
Tenepb <J)eBpa.7ib, nocjiejumfi 3hmhhh Mecau. Cero/uu^ Ha

ABOpe, cOBceM JiexHHft fleHb, a m Jieia eme naaeKo: (peBpajib,
MapT, anpejib, Mail.
B HarneM KJMMaTe BecH'a BcerAa pamism, 3HMa no3AHHH, JieTO
xopowee, a oceHb AOÂJiHBafl.
b Aeicabpe h b HHBape, hhcto uaeT cHer. 51 Bcerna
6y^y nOMHHTb 3HMHiHft BHA H3 OKHa MOefi KOMHaTbl, — CBeiKHH
CHer Ha Hamefl yjiHixe, y ABepH Harnero AOMa . ..
113
114 HETblPHAJlUATLIH YPOK
Mbi }Khbcm b ropoê, ho jieiOM mob >KeHa, Ham cbih h a

6yfleM iKHTb b AepeBHe. %, kohchho, He dyay >KHXb Ha nme see
Jiexo. H 3aHHTOH nejioBeK, Ho HceHa eêT Ha Aany wa Bee jiexo.
npomjioe JieTo mbi hchjih y 6paia Moew hcchh. y ee 6paTa
CBOit jieTHHH aom b oHeHb xopoweM Mecre. H cooSmeHHe Mex<Ay
ero JieTHHM aomom h HauiHM ropoAOM oueHb yAodnoe.
- MOHCeT SbITb Mbi 6yaeM MMeTb BQSMOiKHOCTb iKHTb TaM
onHTb jieroM, — roBopHT xteHa. — Becnofl, hx cmh dyaex
AOMa ... —
— 3xo xeoe Aeao. Oh tbom 6paT, a He moB, — OTBeuaio h.
— Kohchho, oh Moft 6paT, a He tbohl y TBoero dpanra cBoefl
AanH Hex! —
— >KHeyx JiexoM u b ropoAe! —
— Kto 6yaex iKHXb JiexoM b ropoAe! Tbi, ohcbmaho, He
nOMHHUIb, HT0 JieXOM H MOTy iKHTb TQAbKO B AepeBHe, Ha CBe>K6M
B03Ayxe! —
H He 6yay cnopHXb c Moeft iKeHOft. JiexoM OHa He MOiKex
>KHTb b ropoAe 6e3 CBeiKero B03Ayxa, a b AepeBHe 6yAex, ko-
HenHO, cKynaxb 6e3 xopomeH onepbi, xopomero Tearpa, xopo-
mero khho!
III. VOCABULARY
BApyr suddenly KOHeit end

eecHa spring JieXHHft, summer (adj.)
Becb, BCH, Bee all, everything -'jib, -'ee
everyone Jiexo summer
BHA view, type, kind MOH<eX 6blXb perhaps
Aana country house, Hanajio beginning
summer home oceHb fall, autumn
Aejio business, affair njiaxbe dress
AOJKAJIHBblH, rainy no3AHHfi late
-an, -'oe -'jib, -'ee
3HMa winter XpyAHblfl, difficult, hard
winter (adj.) -'an, -'oe
-m, -'ee wintry ycnex success
KJIHMax climate
AenaSpb (m.) December wapx March

HHBapb (m.) January anpejib (m.) April
(JieBpajib (m.) February Mafl May
(For remaining months see next Lesson-Vocabulary.)

FOURTEENTH LESSON 115
Verbs
MMext (I) to have, possess

cnopHTb (II) to contradict, quarrel (followed by c (co) with the
instrumental)
He cnopb! do not contradict! don’t quarrel!
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Soft adjective declension in the singular
Masc. Neut. Fem. (Review)
Nom. nocjie/mHfi nocjieAnee nocjieAHHM

Gen. nocJieAHero nocjieAHero nocjie/tHen
Dat. nocjie/meMy nocjieAHeMy nocjie^HeH
Acc. Nom. or Gen. nocjieAHee nocjieAHWK)
Instr. nocjieAHHM nocjieAHHM nocjieAHeH
Prep. nocjie/meM nocjie^HeM nocjieAHefl
The soft declension always has in its endings the soft
equivalents of the hard vowels of the hard declension: for bi an
m; for o an e; for a a a; for yaw; (-bi : -mm; -oro : -ero; -an :
-hh; -yw : -1010).
For the plural of the soft declension see Lesson 19.
B. Possessive pronoun-adjectives
1. The possessive pronoun-adjectives correspond to the
personal pronouns as follows:
Personal Possessive Personal Possessive
a MOfl MbI earn

TbI TBOH
BH earn
OH
OHO
OHa
! ero
ee OHH MX
2. In their endings the possessive pronoun-adjectives cor¬

respond to the gender, number, and case of the thing possessed:
Bot Mofi ctoji, Mofl KHHra, Moe nepo; okojio Moero CTOJia,
Moefl KHHrH, Moero nepa; h /taw 3to MoeMy Apyry, etc.
3. Thus we have the following declension of the possessive

pronoun-adjective in the singular:
116 HETblPHAjaUATblR YPQK
Masc. Newt. Fem. Masc. Neut. Fem.
Nom. mom Moe moh hsuj name Hama

Gen. Moero Moero Moei Hamero Hamero eameft
Dat. MoeMy MoeMy Moefi HameMy HameMy Hamew
Ace. N. or G. Moe mok) N. or G. name Harny
Instr. mohm mohm Moefi(eK)) HauiHM HamHM Hamefl(eK))
Prep-. MoeM MoeM Moefi HameM nameM Hamew
Like Moft are declined tboh “your, yours” and the reflexive
possessive pronoun-adj ective cboh “my own, your own,” etc.
Like Ham is declined Barn, Barn “your, yours.”
4. Third person possessives ero, ee, hx never change in

form; that is, they are not declined:
ero ctoji; ero nepo; ero KHHra his (its) table, pen, book
ee ctoji; ee nepo; ee KHiara her table, pen, book
hx ctoji; hx nepo; hx KHHra their table, pen, book
hx cTona; hx nepa; hx khhth of their table, pen, book, etc.
5. A form of ceoft must be used when the possessive

reflects to a third person subject:
Oh HHTaeT cbok> KHHry. He reads his own book.
Oh HHTaeT ero KHHry would mean: He reads his (not his own,
but someone else’s) book.
C. Verb
1. The future tense:
a. The future tense of the verb 6biTb “to be”:
1st h 6yay I shall be mh 6yêiw we shall be

2nd (fam.) th Gyueuib you will be bh 6yneie you will be
3rd oh, -a, -6 he, she, it, ohh 6y^yr they will be
SyaeT will be
b. To form the future tense of any verb,1 use the proper

form of 6bixb together with the infinitive of the verb. For ex¬
ample the future of HHTaTb is as follows:
1 Note that this type of future tense formation holds only for the
imperfective aspect verbs. For the future of the perfective aspect see
Lesson 16.

1st h dyAy HHxaxb Mbi dyêM HHxaxb
2nd (fam.) Tbi dyneuib HHxaxb Bbi dyaexe HHxaxb
3rd oh, -a, -6 dyAex qwxaxb ohh dyAyx HHxaxb
2. Translation of “to have” in the future tense:

a. Use the construction explained in Lesson 6, introducing
the future tense forms of the verb “to be”:
y dpaxa dyAex wypHaji. The brother will have a mag¬
azine.
y Hero dyayx h acypHaji He will have both a book and
h KHHra. a magazine.
b. Note, however, that in the negative sentence the verb
is always in the neuter 3rd person singular:
y Hero He dyAex AcypHa.xa. He will not have a magazine,

y Hero He dyAex hh khhth He will have neither a book
hh nepa. nor a pen.
c. To express abstract possession, the verb wwexb “to have”
should be used:
HMew yAOBOJibCTBHe. I have the pleasure.

51 HMeji B03M0>KH0CTb. I had the opportunity.
H dyAy MMerb yAOBOAbCTBne. I shall have the pleasure.
VOCABULARY BUILDING
Noun Adjective
eeqep BeHepHHH evening

eecHa BemiHMM spring
Jiexo AexHHii summer
oceHb oceHHHii fall, autumn
3HMa 3HMHnft winter
AOlKAb AO»AAHBbIH rainy
ceex CBeXJIblfi light
Adverb Adjective
AOporo AOpOrOH dear, expensive

MHJIO MHJIblH dear, nice
HHxepecHO HHXepeCHblfi interesting
n03AH0 no3AHHil late
paHo paHHHfl early
118 METbIPI L\;i,UATl>in ypOK
V. QUESTIONS
1. Ceftnac cjbeBpaAb hah Mapr? 2. Kaicoii noc.u\Aiim"i aniumtii

Mecflu,? 3. Kukoh ccroAHH acaib? 4. 21,0 acta cur1 ;uuck6 ?. 5. Ka-
koh Mecau 6yACT nocjie i|)CBpaAH? 6. KaKoii mocha ovaot h6c,;ic
MapTa? 7. KaKofl mcchu, oyucT iiocac unpiviH? 8. Hainan b iuihicm
KJiHMaTe Beci-ia? 9. Kukuh b iuiuicm kaumatc aiuia? 10. Kak6o b
HaiueM KUHMaTe jicto? 11. KanaH b ik'uirm K/inMaxe ocoiib?
12. rue MbI JKHBCM 3HM0li? 13. 1 AO Bbl OyAOTO >KHTb ACTUM?
14. rê Bbl JKH.7IH npQLLUIOC JICTO? 15. I IOHCMV B 1)1
He MO/KCTC
acHTb Ha Aaue Bee jicto? 16. Kto cact na ;j,aiiv na bcc acto?
17. Pê Aaaa dpaxa acei-ibi ? 18. Kanoe cooCnuenue mc>kav ero
Aaueft h naiUHM ropoAOM? 19. IloaeMy >kciui tie mojkct >Kim> b
ropoê JiexoM? 20. FIoueMy ona oyABT cKyuaxb b ACpeBiie?
a. Prom tile Reading' Exercise write out all soft adjectives with
their nouns, indicating their gender, cast1, ami English meaning, as
follows:
nocJie.fl.HHft Mecflu Masculine, nominative “last month’’
3HMHHft MeCHU Masculine, noniinative “winter month”
b. Supply the endings:
1. H AK)6AK) 3HMII- BOBAyX. 2. CcrOAHH CBC/K 3HMH -

yrpo. 3. Flocjie ncapm-- iiofoah oyaot ao>kab. 4. JXan aamrr.'
uejioBeKa hot actom oxAuxa. 5. H ho Mory exaxb na ;uiuy uc3
jieTH— najibTo. 6. K MOCMy xopoui. Apyry fact muia. 7. B
AOJKAÎHB— AeHb H oSbIKHOBCHIlO aomb. 8. B xuipK.■ IlOrOAV Mb!
xoahm ryjiHTb b nojie. 9. % bccfau (5yAy homhiiti. moio iigcaoau ■
Houb b AepeBHe. 10. Ohb paGoxaex c paim- - yxpa ao hobah
Beuepa. 11. Ohm aioOhah nrpaxb b tchiihc pami— yxpOM. 12. fl
exaji aomoh nocAeAH— noeaAOM. 13. H roBOpHA c hostom o er6
nocAeAH— KHHre. 14. H totobaio cbchc— uaft cecrpe. 15. Mm
TOBOpHM 0 COCeAH— AOM6.

a. Prom the Reading Exercise write out all possessive adjectives
along with the nouns they modify, indicating their gender, case, and
English meaning, as follows (18 forms in all) :
B HaiueM KAftMare Masculine, prepositional “in our climate”
Moefi KOMHaTbi Feminine, genitive “of my room”
b. Supply the Russian equivalent of the English words in

parentheses:
1. Box (their) aom. 2. 3xo (my) Mecxo. 3. (His) cftaMHJiHH —

FlerpoB. 4. K (my) Acene eAex (her) noApyra. 5. % jnoSjnb Hrpaxb
b tchhhc c (my) npHHTeACM. 6. B (thine) KBapxHpe cenuac hchbgt
(his) TOBapHm. 7. npHCHAafixe BeuepHioK) ra3eTy (my) BHyxy!
8. (Her) Myac eAex Ha CAyA<6y. 9. YTpoM OHa cnemHX na (her
own) pa66xy. 10. H 6i>ia b xeaxpe co (my own) akchoh. 11. (Your)
>KH3Hb HuxepecHaH, a (our) ACH3Hb oueHb CKyuHaa. 12. BecHOH
b (our) MarasHHe BcerAa pacnpOAaa<a, a oceHbio b (yours).
13. Okoao (his) AOMa aahhhhh Oejibift mocx. 14. MeACAy (our)
h (your) aomom 6yAex rapa>K. 15. ShmoA (their) chh eAex b
JleHHHrpaA. 16. JleTOM oh BcerAa e3AHx b tocth k (his own) 6a-
6ymKe.
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all verbs in the future
tense and translate, as follows:
51 BcerAa 6yay h6mhhti> I shall always remember.
b. Change into the future tense:

1. H paSoxaio Ha 3aBOAe. 2. Tbi 3Haeuib o hoboh pacnpo-
Aa>Ke? 3. Bpax rinmex nncbMo jkchg. 4. Moh coceAKa nrpaex Ha
CKpHHKe. 5. Shmoh ohh CKyqaiOT h A<AyT Aexa. 6. Mbi c npHHxe-
AeM o6eAaeM aomh. 7. JlexoM bh Acneexe Ha Aaue? 8. Tbi CAyrna-
emb BeuepoM paAHO? 9. Bh noMHHxe AOACAAHByio ocenb. 10. B
cJjeBpaAe ohh BcerAa CHHMaiox KBapxnpy b ropoAe.
Exercises with Grammar C and Review
a. Give the correct forms of the words in parentheses:
1. y (Apyr) CBoft aBXOMoSHAb. 2. y (moh AceHa) cboh Aaua.

3. y (npHsrreAb) pyccKaa KHHra. 4. y (ee MyAc) doAbiuon: aom.
5. y (Barna noApyra) hoboc 3HMHee naAbxo. 6. y (moh xopouiHH
npHsrreAb) SoAbuiaa hobocxh 7. y (ero AteHa) HOBan cKaxepxb.
8. y (MOAOAOft MexaHHK) xopoman paSoxa. 9. Moh aBxoMoSHAb
ceftqac y (ao»ktop). 10. y (ee 6paT) cboh jxkna. 11. y (xboh
coceAKa) Hosan CKpnnKa. 12. Moft anrAHHCKHH AcypnaA xenepb
y (HHAceHep).
b. Put the sentences into the past and future tenses.

c. Change the sentences into question form.
d. Change the sentences into the negative form.

120 MF/rUPHAJlUATbin yPOK

A
1. Now it is February, the last winter month. 2. It is still

very cold, and it is snowing now. 3. In our climate spring starts
late (is a late one) and winter begins early (is an early one).
4. The summer is fine, but fall is always rainy. 5. In winter we
live in the city. 6. We love opera and theater, and often go in
the evening to the movies or to the concert. 7. But in the sum¬
mer my wife cannot live in the city. 8. My wife’s brother has
a big summer home in a beautiful spot in the country. 9. Last
summer we lived there. 10. Our son also has a beautiful country
home. 11. We shall live there this summer (ace.). 12. But I am
a busy man and cannot spend (live) there all summer. 13. My
wife, too, did not wish to live in the country all summer. 14. She
is bored without the fine opera and theater of the big city.
1. “Hello, Peter, where are you hurrying?” 2. “Oh, hello,

Paul, I am hurrying home. 3. Today we are going (driving) to
Leningrad.” 4. “Are you going in your big new car?” 5. “No, we
are going by train.” 6. “Will you live in the old house of your
grandmother?” 7. “No, we shall live in the beautiful big house
of the famous poet Ivanov. 8. He is a very good friend of my
brother. 9. Each one will live his own life, and do what he
wants. 10. You remember, Paul, my sister is a singer; she will,
of course, study aria after aria. 11. She has a very fine (excel¬
lent) voice and has sung with great success at tho club ‘The
Red Star.’ 12. Perhaps she will now have the opportunity of
singing (to sing) at a club or a restaurant or even at the opera
in the big city [of] Leningrad! 13. I shall work at a large new
plant. 14. My work will be interesting and not very hard. 15. I
shall always have early breakfast (breakfast early), and shall
never be late for work. 16. My brother will, of course, write from
early morning until late [in the] evening; he is again writing
a book. 17. But after work we shall have the great pleasure of
going to the theater, the opera, and the concert.” 18. “Well,
Peter, your life in the big, noisy city will never be boring.”
19. “No, Paul, it will be a very interesting one. 20. But I shall
always remember our life here in this little village ] of] Blinsk!”
nHTHAAUATbm yPOK
I FIFTEENTH LESSON
Singular declension of masculines in -ok and -eu, — Short form

of the adjective — Declension of the interrogative
pronoun — Reflexive verb
B Haqajie, b KOHue In the beginning, in the end

qew oh OojieH? ^ What is his sickness?
y Hero wap, xeiwnepaxypa. He has fever, temperature.
Oh npocxymeH. ^ He has a cold.
Oh bbieaji npocTywcH. He sometimes had a cold,
y OTpa bojiHT (Gojiejio) Father has (had) a sore
ropjio, rojjoea. throat, a headache,
y OTpa HacMopn, Kauiejib. Father has a (head) cold,
a cough.
npHHHMaTb jieKapCTBo To take medicine
Bbixb nauweHxoM To be a patient
CiweaxbCH Hag (4- instr.) To laugh at
BecejiHXbca go yxpa To have a good time (make
merry) till morning
qyecxBOBaxb ceba1 njioxo, To feel (oneself) ill, well
xoporno
Xopoiuo cweexca xox, kto He who laughs last laughs
CMeexca nocjiegHHft. best.
II. READING: HEPBAH BO/IE3HE OTUA
Moii oTeu 66jien y>xe nexbipe Mecnga: moHb, Hk>gb, aBrycT h

ceHTHdpb.
Oxeu JiegtHx b rocnHTajie; mh eme He 3HaeM, neM oh 66jieH.
B Hanajie asrycTa oh 6 big ouei-ib bojieH, ho xenepb goKTop gOBO-
JieH 3gopoBbeM oxga. Oh gyvraex, hxo oxeg Sygex goMa b okth6-
pe, a b KOHue nondpa oh dygex cOBceM 3gopoB.
3xa 6ojre3Hb — nepean 6ojie3Hb oxga. HHorga, h iiomhio,
oh ObiBaji npocxymeH. Ho gawe xorga y oxga Oojicjio ropjio hjih
6bui Kauieab hjih HaciviopK, on tie jieâa b riocxegn, me xogfui k
goxxopy, He npMHMMaji JieKapcxea. . . Oh npocbinajica, xax
Bcerga, pano yxpoM, owcrpo mbijich, ogeBagca 11 exaa b yHHBep-
1 N.B. ce6fi does not change with the person.
121
122 IIVIT11.V-lUAThlfl yPOK
cHTet. A BcnepQM, nocjie pa66 Ti>i on hiioivu'i cine BCTpeiiajic« c

npHHTejieM h fotob 6w;i BecejiHTbca ;io yxpa!
Moh OTeu, Beerna 6mji saiWT 11 Beerna Oh.t nojioii siiepn-m.
Oh qacTo CMeancfl Han iiamiiM noicropoM.
— Uto nejiaxb, noKTop? He niory n.vu?n> ynobo.'i hotb h h CibiTb
b a in h m nau,HeHTOM. >1 pan nemVrhCH, ho mto ;t(viaTi»? 51 ecerna
snoposl XopOUIO, WTO HC BCC TaK 3flOp6BbI, Kl\K «! —■
—- CMeHxecb, CMeirrecb, — OTBeuan nam noicxop. «Xopom6
CMeeTCH tot, kto CMeeicsi nocjie;iHHfi!» —
TenepL-TO mh snaeivi, khk npae 6u:i .xoKTOp!
III. VOCABULARY
aiwepHKaHeu (fc) American noJiHbm,

DojieSHb disease, illness -'an, -'oe
riOCTCJIb
rOTOBblfl, ready.
-'am, -'oe npaBwft,
prepared
naine even -'an, ~'oe
noBonbHbifl, satisfied, peoenOK (y o) child

-aa, -'oe pleased pyGjib (m.) ruble
3nopoBbe health CTpOKa line
SnOpOBblfl, healthy, well ynOBOJibCTBiie pleasure, joy

-'aa, -'oe yilHBepCHTCT university
Kamejib (fe) (m.) ycTajibiii, tired

KyCOK (f o)
MtOHb (in.) June ceimiopb (m.’ September

HiOJib (m.) July OKTfl6pb (ill.) (ictober
aerycT August HOfldpb (m.) November
[See also grammar D] ve

6onexb (I)
6oJiexb; 6ojiht; 6ojiat to liurt, pain, u>'he
(used in the 3rd person only)
GoHTbCfl (II) with gen. to be al'raid of, fear
BecejIHTbCH (II) to hi1 merry, to make
BcxaBaxb, BCTa&, Bcraeuib, to get up
BCTaiOT
jieHHTb(cH), Jieuy(cb),
JieHHUJb(cH), Jieqax(cfi) of a doctor, lo tr
MblTb(CH), MOIO(Cb), to wash (oneself)
Moeuib(csi), MOK)T(CH)
nonpaBJiHTbCB (I) to get well, recover
qyBcTBOBaxb, HyscTByio, to feel (oneself)
qyBCTByeuib, qyBCTBytoT (ceOsi)
FIFTEENTH LESSON 123
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun
A large number of masculine nouns the stem of which

ends in -ok or -eii, and some others,1 drop the o or e when a
declensional ending is added:
Nom. KycoK “piece” OTeu “father” ueHb “day”

Gen. KycKa OTua
Dat. KycKy oTuy A HIO
Ace. KyCOK oma AeHb
Instr. KyCKOM OTUOM AHeM
Prep. Kycne OTue AHe
This loss of vowel will be indicated in the vocabularies as

follows: OTeu (fe); &mb (|e); KycoK (jo); 3bohok (fo); KOBep
(fe); uepKOBb (fo)
B. Adjective. Short form of the adjective
1. Many Russian adjectives have a “short” form. It is ob¬

tained by dropping the long adjective endings -mm, -oh, -Hft,
-He, etc., and adding the following short endings:
Long Short
Form Form
No ending for the masculine singular KpaCHBMM KpaCHB

-a for the feminine singular KpaCHBHH KpaCHBa
~o for the neuter singular KpaCHBOe KpaCHBO
-e for the neuter (soft) singular CHHee CHHe
KpaCHBMe KpaCHBM
-m or -H- for the plural of all genders \ XOpOIllHe XOpoiliH
2. The short form of the adjective cannot be declined. It

can be used only in a predicative function:
ripo<$)eccop OHeHb 66jieH. The professor is very sick.

3ra KHHra HexepecHa. This book is interesting.
1 For instance: Koeep, KOBpa “rug”; jioG, Jt6a “forehead.” After ji, h,
and p the lost vowel e is often replaced by b: jieu, JibM “ice”; Jiee, jibB&
“lion.”
- In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule B, after r, k, x, >k, m, in, m.
Also with soft declension adjectives.
124 IIViTHA/lUAThin yPOK
The long form must be used whenever the adjective is used

attributively:
Mbi jKHBeM b KpacHBOM sânHH. We live in a beautiful building.
It is also used when “one” is expressed or understood:
KaKoii on 3/iopoBbift! What a healthy one he is!
3. Consonants in final •position:
The elimination of the long ending in the masculine forms
of the adjective often leaves a group of consonants in final
position. In such case e (e) is usually inserted before the
final ji, m, or a; and o before all other final consonants; e re-
places b1:
dojibHoii, 66a€h sick, ill
VAodHwi’i, yAoben comfort abt
yMHblH, yMCH clever
KOpOTKHli, KOpOTOK short, brief
But notice: rioJiHbiH, noaoH full
4. The following short forms are particularly common:
bojieH, OojibHa, 6ojibHo, SojibHbi sick, ill
AOBOJieH, AOBOJibHa, AOBOJibHO, AOBOJtbHbi (~f-instr.) satisfied
roTOB, roTOBa, fotobo, roxoBbi ready
3^0p0B, 3AOpOBa, SAOpOBO, 3AOpOBbI well, healthy
3SHHT, 3aHHTa, 3aH«XO, 3aHSITbI busy
nojioH, nojiHa, hojiho, nojiHbi full
ripae, npaBa, npaeo, npaBbi- right, correct
CBOdOAeH, CBOSoAHa, CBOGOAHO, CBOOOAHbl free,
yiweH, yiWHa, yMHo, yMHbi clever
5. The following adjective is used only in its short form:

paA, paAa, paAO, pamw glad, happy
C. Pronoun
Full declension of the interrogative pronouns kxo “who”
and 4xo “what”:
Mom. KXO who 4X0 what
Gen. icoro of whom uero of what
Dat. KOMy to whom ueMy to what
Acc. Koro whom 4X0 what
Instr. xeM with whom ueM with what
Prep. KOM about whom 46M about what
1 The various exceptions to this general statement cannot be con¬

sidered in this elementary text.
2 The long form npaBbift, -'aw, -'oe also means “right” in a direc¬
tional sense:
H imuiy npaBoft pyxoft. I write with the right hand.
npaBbift 6eper peKH. The right bank of a river.
D. Verb
1. The Russian reflexive verb is characterized by the un¬

changing endings -ca or -cb.
-ca is added whenever the verb ends in a consonant, in ft,
or in h. It contracts to -cb after vowels.
2. Conjugation of the reflexive verb oêeaTbca “to get
dressed, to dress oneself”:
PRESENT TENSE
Singular
?toaeBaio -t- cb I dress (myself)
tm OAeBaeuib 4- ca you dress (yourself)
on, oh5, oho OAeBaeT + ca he, she, it, dresses
(him-, her-, itself)
Plural
Mbi OAeeacM f-cn we dress (ourselves)
Bbi, Bw oaeBaeTe-f-Cb (fain. & pol.) you dress (yourselves)
ohh oa.eBaK)T+CH they dress (themselves)
PAST TENSE
Singular a, tbi, oh oêBaJica; ona oêBaJiacb; oho OAeBanocb
Plural mm, bm, Bbi, ohh oêBajincb
IMPERATIVE
OACBaHCH! oêBaiiTecb!
Note: -ca, -cb are contractions of the reflexive pronoun

ce6n “oneself, myself, yourself,” etc. When the verb is used
with a direct object other than “oneself,” it does not take the
ending -ch, -cb:
H oêeaiocb. I dress myself.
but: H OAesaK) peOeHKa. I dress the child.
3. Not all verbs in -ch, and -cb are reflexive in their mean¬
ing:
HauMHaTbCH (I) “to begin” KOHnaTbCH (I) “to end”
npocbinaTbCH (I) “to wake up” H npocbinarocb. I wake up.
ca^MTbCH: camycb, canniiibCH, cajifncn “to sit down”

91 cawcycb 3a ctoji. I sit down at the table.
(N.B. no “myself” in English)
CMeHTbca, CMeiocb, cMeeuibcn, cmciotch “to laugh”
126 mrm.vuiATbin .vpok
As their translation indicates these verbs are not “re¬
flexive” in English, that is they do not use “self.”
4. Some verbs in -csi or -ci> express mutual (reciprocal)
action: BCTpeMaxbcsi “to meet" (one another, not oneself!):
H BCTpeMiatocb c npHHxejieiw. I meet a friend.
BcTpeHaTbCH (I) must be used with c (co) and the instru¬
mental, while the nonreflexive Bcrpeuaxb takes its direct ob¬
ject in the accusative case without any preposition:
H BCTpenaio npHHTejisi. I meet a friend.
V. QUESTIONS
1. rue oxen yxce uexbipe Mecnga: Hibur, inojib, aarycT h

ceHTadpb? 2. lloaeMy oxeu b rociiHxajie? 3. Mcm oxen, 66jich?
4. Korâ dbui oxen ouerib dojren? 5. JIobojich jih xon<jpb Bam
AOKTop aôpOBbeM oTua? 6. Koraa OyACx oxen, cobccm 3AopoB?
7. Bojieji Bam oxen uacxo? 8. BbiBa.ii jih oh hhoitui npoexywen?
9. Uxo y oxga HHorAa dojiejio? 10. BbiBa.xn jii-i v oxn,a uacxo
xamejib h nacMopK? 11. Uxo oh jiphhhm&ji, Korâ oh 6i»iji ripo-
cxyimeH? 12. LIxo oh AenaJi yxpOM? 13, Kvah oh 03AH.ii? 14. C kcm
oh Bcxpenajica BenepOM? 15. Bi.iji jih oxen bccivui a an ax? 16. Ha;i
KeM uacxo cMenjicn oxen? 17. Mxo oh roBopfui Aoioropy? 18. Mxo
oTBenaji oxuy AOKxop?
Give correct case forms of the Russian nouns in parentheses:

I. Maxb cKyuaex de3 (pedenoK). 2. y Mocro dpaxa b KBap-
THpe hgt hoboto (xoBcp). 3. Hama coceAKa roxoBHjia odeA
(pedeHOK). 4. CeroAHH moh xcena h n hacm b yuHBepcajibnbift
Mara3HH 3a (kobcp). 5. 51 cnpaninsajia cbok) riQApyry o ee
(pedeHox). 6. ft He Mor Mbixbcn xpn (iienb), xaic kbk ne dbiao
ropHuefi bo abi. 7. Mbi HHKOTAa ne xoamm b xeaxp (achb). 8. Oh
Bcenna Bcxpenajica c (aMepHKaHeu) b Kjiyde. 9. y ero (oxcu)
6hji dojibmoft h oueHb KpaaiBWH aom b ropoAe. 10. Tenepb
AOKTOp OHCHb AOBOJICH 3AOpOBbeM HaUICFO (OXCU,).
a. Prom the Reading Exercise write out all short adjective

forms, giving their gender, number, and English meaning, as follows:
SoJieH Masculine, singular “sick”

b. Replace the adjectives in parentheses by the correct short

forms:
1. CeroAHH moh noApyra dyaeT oneHb (3aHHTan). 2. 3tot

pedeHOK (dojibHon), a tot (sAopoBbift). 3. Bee snajiH, hto Ham
OTeit (yMHbift). 4. Buepa codpamie b KAyde 6hao onenb (cKyq-
Hoe). 5. B BocKpeceHHe h dyny (cBodoAHHH), a moh dpaT dyAeT
(3aHHTOH). 6. B HarneM KAHMaTe oceHb Bcerâ (AO>KAAHBan).
7. Hama coceAKa dbuia (MOAOAan) h AiodHAa BeceAHTbcn.
8. Tboh pedeHOK HHKorAa He dyAeT (dojibHoft). 9. Ytpom h
BcerAa (nojinan) SHeprHH. 10. 3to MecTO dyAeT (yAodHoe) pjm
pedeHKa.
Change the following sentences into questions, replacing the

bold face expressions by proper forms of kto or mo and observing
correct word order, thus: h HHTaio HOByio KHHry: hto h Ht-rraio?
1. H BcerAa dyny noMHHTb Ky3neua. 2. IlaKeT Ha cTOJie. 3. y

6paxa Her CBoero aBTOModHAH. 4. H He xoqy npHHHMaTb jieKap-
cTBa. 5. H nacTO 3aAaBaji stot sonpoc cecTpe. 6. OHa JiiodHT
CBoero pedeHKa. 7. Ohh BcerAa totobh cnopHTb c otuom. 8, Bh
AOBOJibHbi CBoeft iKH3Hbio? 9. Ha Aane mm dyzteM uacTO BCTpe-
qaTbCH c aMepHKaHueM. 10. Mbi doHMca AyMaTb o ero cepbe3H0fi
6oAe3HH. 11. B MapTe mbi eme He AyMaeM o Aane. 12. OTeu
BcerAa totob BeceAHTbcn c BHyKOM. 13. CoceAKa CMeajiacb HaA
noApyrofi. 14. Mbi CMeajiHCb HaA ee MCTopweft.
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all reflexive verbs,

giving their English meaning, as follows:
Oh npocbinaacH. He awoke (woke up).
b. Put the following sentences (1) into the present; (2) into the
past; (3) into the future:
1. Oh (mmtbch) yTpOM, a Tbi (mbitbch) BeuepoM. 2. Bbi

diiiCTpo (oAeBaTbca). 3. Ohh (npocbinaTbcn) TOAbKo k 3aBTpaKy.
4. Mbi (AeHHTbcn) y sarnero AOKTOpa. 5. B JlemirpaAe th uacTO
(BCTpenaTbcn) c tbohm otijom. 6. Ha Aane OHa xopomo (no-
npaBAHTbcn). 7. Otch (cMeHTbcn) naA BenepHeft ra3eToft. 8. OHa
(uyBCTBOBaTb cedn) nAoxo. 9. TosapHiii HsaHOB BcerAa (MbiTbcn)
ropnqeft boaoh. 10. Ha napoxoAe mm (BeceAHTbcn). 11. PedeHOK
(doHTbcn) AOKTOpa. 12. Mbi (uyBCTBOsaTb ceda) oneHb xopomo.
128 IIHTII.VIUATbin yPOK

A
1. Our father was always very healthy. 2. He was always
full of energy and was always ready to have a good time (be
merry). 3. Sometimes he had a (head) cold or a cough. 4. But
he never stayed (lay) in bed. 5. As always, he woke early,
dressed quickly, had breakfast, read his Russian paper, and
went to the university. 6. He never went to the doctor and
never took medicine. 7. He often laughed at our doctor. 8. He
laughed and said: “I can’t have the pleasure of being your
patient, doctor, I would gladly (am glad to) be treated, but
I am always so healthy.” 9. But now he is very sick. 10. He has
been (lies) in the hospital for four months, June, July, August,
and September. 11. We do not know what his sickness is.
12. But our doctor says that our father is very ill. 13. He does
not know when father will be at home again; perhaps (at)
the end of October or (at) the beginning of November. 14. We
shall all be very happy when father is (will be) well again.
1. It is already very late but Sonya is still lying in bed.

2. In her little room it is warm, but outside (out of doors) it
is cold and it is raining. 3. Good weather or bad, when Sonya
is well (healthy) she gets up early, is full of energy, and works
from early morning till late [in the] evening. 4. But today
Sonya feels ill; she has a headache and a sore throat. 5. But
she has no temperature. 6. Perhaps she has only a cold, a
simple cough, or a head cold. 7. It is time to get up! 8. Sonya
always meets her dear friend Nina on the way to work; she
is never late. 9. And so Sonya slowly gets up, washes, and
slowly gets dressed (dresses). 10. She sits down at the table.
11. Usually, she eats a hearty (big) breakfast, but today she
drinks only hot tea and eats a piece of black bread without
butter. 12. Sonya gets up from (H3 3a and gen.) the table
and opens the window. 13. There is not a cloud in the sky now;
it is warm outside now, and the air is fresh. 14. Suddenly
Sonya feels quite well again. 15. “I cannot lie in bed all day,
listen to the radio, and be bored,” thinks Sonya; “I am a busy
person and a healthy one! 16. And my friend Nina is waiting
[for] me (lwenfl) at the office.” 17. Sonya puts on hat and
coat, closes the window and the door, and goes quickly to the
office. 18. She is again the happy, healthy Sonya, and full of
energy!
FiFTEENTII LESSON 129

Based on the vocabulary and grammar of the preceding lessons
y BAByiUKH B aepebhe.
H eme He 3Haio rê h 6yjiy )KHTb jictom. Kohchho, xenepb
TOJibKo HcmSpb h jxo Jieia eme âJieKO.
ripoiUAoe a6to mh c 6paTOM >khah y 6a6yuiKH na Aane. 3h-
moh 6a6viHKa Bcerâ mHAa b cbocm SojibmoM* ropoACKOM AOMe.
B Hanajie hiohh ona Bcerâ roBopHJia: — JleTOM MHe He Mecxo b
uiyMHOM ropo,n,e. Xothtc 6brrb BcerAa SAOpOBbi h ne SojieTb h He
xoAHTb k AOKTopy, ye3>xaHTe jictom H3 ropoAa. npHpoAa achht
neAOBeKa. —
Hhkto c 6a6yiHKOH He cnopHA. Mbi 3HaAH, hto «6a6yuiKa
BcerAa npaBa».
>K«3Hb y 6a6yuiKH b AepeBHe in a a no pacnncaHHio. Ka>KAoe
yTpo Bee b AOMe npocnnaAHCb pai-io, 3aBTpaKaAH, a hotom homo-
rajiH 6a6ymKe no xo3HHCTBy. Y 6a6yuiKH BcerAa 6hao mhoto
pa6oTbi h b AOMe h i-ia Asope.
JlueM h BenepoM mbi 6hah gbo6oahh h motah AeAarb hto
xoTeAH. Ahcm b xopomyio noroAy mh hhotah £3ahah k coreAy
HrpaTb b tchhhc hah xoahah ryAHTb. Mh BcerAa onenb aio6hah
npnpoAy. H BcerAa 6yAy noMHHTb, Kanoe sto yAOBOAbCTBHe ry-
AHTb b noAe hah qkoao peKH. Jlexnee He6o 6hao BcerAa cHHee,
a B03AVX CBCJKHH, 3AOpOBbIH . . .
B riAGxyK) rioroAy mh Tome ne CKynajm: mh HHTaAH BCAyx,
HrpaAH b KapTH, CAyinaAH xaK 6a6yniKa nrpaAa Ha poHAe. H He
yMeio HrpaTb hh i-m poHAe, hh na CKpnnKe, ho moh 6paT xopoiuo
nrpaeT Ha CKpmiKe. Oh h&cto nrpaA c 6a6yniKOH; 6a6ywKa
nrpaAa Ha poHAe, a 6paT Ha CKpnnKe.
BenepOM mh hhotah 63ahah b coccahhh ropoA b khho.
BaSyuiKa b khho HHKorAa He e3AHAa. — 3to ropOACKoe yAOBOAb-
CTBHe, — roBopHAa OHa, — 6yAeTe e3AHTb b khho oceHbio hah
3hm6h. JIctom hhao 6brrb Ha CBejKeM B03Ayxe UeAHH AeHb, a
BenepOM naAo hath paHo cnaTb.
Kto mot cnopHTb c oaoyniKOH? KonenHO, OHa obiJia npaBa!
LUECTHAAUATblH YPOK
SIXTEENTH LESSON
ASPECTS OF THE RUSSIAN VERB
This Lesson has been given rather more than the usual
space and has been divided into two parts, in order to intro¬
duce the student to this very important feature of the Russian
language as gradually as possible and to provide the greatest
possible amount of exercise material. Part A acquaints the
student with the fundamentals, Part B with the more ad¬
vanced characteristics of this typical feature of the Russian
Verb System.
PART A

Mne He naao cneuiHXb I don’t have to, need to hurry
Toro nan ... (on)
Flocjie After ... he had taken a walk
noryjiHji
To, mto ... That which. . .
BbITb BTOpbIM riyUJKHHblM To be a second Pushkin (Note
the instrumental case in
this construction.)
II. READING; BHKTOP HBAHOBHM —- II03T
BHKTOp HBaHOBHM CbCTJIOB - II03T. Oh HI I FAC HC padOTaCT

h KaxcAoe yTpo, Korâ oh npoci.macTCH oh aymhot: — kuk xopo¬
rno, hto s He MexaHHK, He Hiimeiiep, ne aoktop h ne npotjieccop.
MHe He HaAO cneuiHTb na padoxy. yTpOM h Mory ciroKoiino
noJieHtaxb b nocTeuii, noMHxaxb, noAywaTb, nocjiymaxb Myabixy
no paAHO . ..
Bhktop IdBanoBim upocbinajicH no3Ano, mcajichiio mhuich,
dpnjicH h oAeBaucH, a hotom, nocjie xoro ksk oh riOMbuica,
noSpHJica h oaejicH, oh jiioShji noryjiaxb b napxc. Cbc>khm bos-
Ayx, npupoAa..! Kaxoe yAOBOJibCTBHe noryjiHTb Mac, ABa b npe-
KpacHOM napKe. Kax xoporno, hto MHe He HaA° cma&tb i^jibih;
AeHb b KOHxope hjih padoTaTb Ha 3aBOAe. —
130
SIXTEENTH LESSON 131
Ho roBopflT, mo «ktq He padoxaeT — tot He ecx» h, one-

bhaho, ohh npasbi, noTOMy hto nooie xoro uau Bhktop Mesho-
bhh noryjiflji b iiapKG, oh bcctae meA aomoh, caAHJicn 3a cboh
paooHiiii ctoji n HaminaA micaxb.
Bhktop MBaiiOBHH imcaji MeAnenno. Ilocjie Toro KaK oh
Hanwcaji abc, rpii ctpokh, oh BcerAa hht3A Bcayx to, hto oh
HanHcaji, cnymaji, a>tmslji: — xoporno jih oto? Hotom okhtb
HanHHaJi micaTb, oriHTb hhtbji BCJiyx, orate AyMaji: — Hanncaji
mi n to, hto xoxeji HanHcaxb?
Bhktop HBanoBHH eme cobccm mojioaoh neJiQBeK, ho oh
y>Ke H3BecTHbift noaT. Ero nocjieAHfla KHHra HMejia Sojibmoft
ycnex h b AcvpHajie «FIo9T» o BHKTOpe HsaHoaHHe HanncajiH,
HTO OH — «BT0p6ft FIyWKHH»!
Bhktop Hb4hobhh koh6hho 3HaeT, hto oh He «btopoh nyiu-
KHH». Oh MaCTO rOBOpHJi: H 6\rAy ECHO }KH3Hb CBOK) HHCaTb H
imcaTb; MOvKeT dbiTb to, hto h HanMiuy 6yAeT He naoxo, ho
6WTb BTOpbIM riyUIKHHblM HHKTO HC MOHCeT! —
III. VOCABULARY
Verbs and Their Aspects
Imperfective Perfective English
OpHTbcn; 6peiocb, nObpHTbCfl (OpHTbCfl) to shave

SpeeuibCH, OpeKrrca;
ryjisiTb (I) noryjiHTb (I) to take a walk
AyMaTb (I) noAyMaxb (I) to think
jieMfaib (see L. 8) nojie>Kaxb (jie>Kaxb) to lie
MblTbCfl (see L. 15) nOMbITbCfl (MblTbCfl) to wash (oneself)
HaHHHaTb (I) Hanaxb; nanny, Hannesub to begin
HanHyx
OAeBaTbCH (see L. 15) OAexbca; ©Aenycb, to dress (oneself)
oAeHeuibCH, OAenyxcH
oncaTb (see L. 6) HanHCaxb (nHcaxb) to write
paCoTatb (I) nopa6oxaxb (I) to work
CHAeTb; CH>ny, nocHAexb (cHAexb) to sit
CHAHUlb, CHAflT
cjiymaTb (I) nocjiyuiaxb (I) to listen
lIHTaTb (I) nonnxaxb (I) to read
N.B. Verb in parentheses behind the Perfective form in¬

dicates that the Perfective verb is conjugated exactly like the
Imperfective. In subsequent vocabularies the verbs will al¬
ways be given in this manner.
132 UIECTH A/(U ATblf 1 yPOK
IV. GRAMMAR
A.. Basic characteristics of the Imperfective
and Perfective Aspects:
1. Almost all Russian verbs are either of the imperfective
or of the perfective aspect.
2. The imperfective aspect of the verb indicates a continu¬

ous (durative), repeated (iterative), or habitual action:
si nwiny I am writing, keep on writing, am in the
habit of writing.
3. The perfective aspect indicates a completed or to be
completed action:
a Hanncaji I wrote, have written, had written.
fl Hannuiy I shall write, shall complete the action of
writing.
4. The imperfective aspect appears in all three tenses: in
the present, the past, and the future.
5. The perfective aspect appears only in two tenses: in the
past and in the future. It has no present tense/ The form of
the perfective verb that looks like a present tense form has a
future meaning. The perfective verb can never have a future
constructed with the verb 6bixb “to be”.
B. Sample Sentences
The following sentences illustrate the meaning and use of
the aspects in the past and future tenses:
Imperfective Aspect
a. % Ka>KAbiH AeHb nwcaji. I wrote (was writing) every
day.1
%
6y^y KancAbiH I shall write (be writing)
FIMCaTb. every day.
b. Oh rmcaji rmcbMO, Koota a He was writing a letter when
bolucji. I came in.
Oh 6y,aex rracaxb rmcbMO, He will be writing a letter
Konaa th Bohaewb. when you come m.
e. CeroauH a nHca/i TpH aaca. I have been writing (I wrote)
three hours today.
3aBTpa a 6yjxy nucaxb TpH I shall write (be writing)
aaca. three hours tomorrow.
1 “X was writing-” is very often rendered by “I wrote” in English,

even though the progressive idea is being expressed.
Imperfective Aspect Perfective Aspect
C.
SIXTEENTH LESSON
ASPECT-TENSE TABLE
Note carefully that the perfective verb can never have a future constructed with the
133
verb 6falTb “to be.”

134 IlIECTHAHUATbin yPOK
In the sentences under (a) above the action of writing is

repetitive or habitual.
In the sentences under (b) the action of writing is pro¬
gressive.
In the sentences under (c) the action of writing is
continuous (its extension is specifically indicated).
In each instance the imperfective had to be used.
Perfective Aspect
Oh Bnepa Hanncaji nucbaio. Yesterday he wrote (com¬
pleted writing) a letter.
Oh 3aBTpa HanwuieT rracbMo. Tomorrow he will write (com¬
plete writing) a letter.
Note that in these sentences the action of writing is not

repetitive, not habitual, not progressive, nor is its extension
specifically indicated. The use of the perfective aspect of the
verb “to write” makes it clear that we are dealing here with a
completed action or with one that is to be completed.
C. (See page 133)
D. Perfective with the prefix 00
This perfective generally expresses brevity, informality, or

lack of strain or intensity in an action:
Oh nopaboTaji. He worked for a while.

Oh noHHxaji ra3ery. He read the paper (casually,
briefly).
Oh jiioGht xoporno nOKymaibs He likes to have a good bite
to eat.
Oh noroBOpHji c xo3hhhom. He had a chat with the
landlord.
OHa noryjiajia b napne. She took a walk in the park.
V. QUESTIONS
1. r,ne padoTaeT Bhktop MBaHOBHq CBennoB? 2. Oh Hmxe-
Hep hah aoktop? 3. KyAa oh cneumr yrpoM? 4 Mto oh A&iaeT
yxpoM? 5. PaHO ah npocwnaeTCH Bhktop HBanoBHA? 6. fAe oh
3aBTpaKaex? 7. Mto jn.tJia.Ji Bhktop PfBaHOBHq nocjie saBTpaxa?
8. JIk)6hji jih oh npHpoAy? 9. Mto AeJiaji Bhktop MBaHOBHq nocjie
roro KaK oh noryjiHJi b napne? 10. Bilicxpo jih oh nncaJi? 11. Mxo
HanHcaJiH o BnKTOpe IdBaHOBHqe b xcypHaAe «ri03T»? 12. /(yiviaA
jih Bhktop HBanoBHq, hto oh «btopoh riyixiKHH» ?
VI. EXERCISES
1. Write out all 'perfective verbs occuring in the Reading
Exercise.
2. Conjugate all Perfective verbs in the past and future
tenses.
3. In the Reading Exercise change all Perfective verbs into
imperfectives and observe the resultant change in the mean¬
ing of the sentences.
1. I do not like to write. 2. But today I have to write a

letter to my father. 3.1 write for a while and then I listen for a
while to the radio and then I write again for a while. 4. After
X had finally written the letter, I had a bite to eat. 5. I like to
eat well and then to stroll in our beautiful park. 6. Yesterday
I walked for four hours without a rest. 7. But at home I rested
(lay) for an hour or two on the comfortable sofa, sat for a
while in the easy chair at the window, thought a little, and
began to write that letter to my father. 8. I wrote and wrote,
but what (that) I wrote was very bad. 9. I had to start the
letter from the very beginning (completely from the begin¬
ning) . 10. Now I am glad that I have finally written it. 11. It
is already late. 12.1 shall now shave and dress quickly, because
in the evening I always go to the movies or to the club.
136 IIIECTH.VU IATbU'1 yPOK
PART B
C tex nop KaK Since the time that

Oahsukam Once, once upon a time
Sapanee Beforehand, in advance
Ilona So long as, while
3aHHMaTbCH X03flfiCTBOM To keep house
KynnTb 3a pydjib, AOJiJiap To buy for a ruble, a dollar
KynHTb 3a Aea, Tpn pydjm, To buy for two, three rubles,
AOAJiapa dollars
XoAHTb (noHTH, noexaxb) To go (drive) shopping
3a noKynnaMH
3aKycHTb m BMfiHTb naniKy To have a snack (bite) and
nan, KO(J>e (drink) a cup of tea, coffee
CMOTpeib nporpaMMW no To watch (see) television
TejieBH30py programs
Kan TOJibKo As soon as
II. READING: HA I71ABHOH yjIHIJLK
C Tex nop Kan AjieKcen HBanoBHH h ero >Kemi O.'tbra npH~

exajin b CLUA1, ohh hhjih b MajieHBKOM ropOAC, b mraTC Hjth-
HOftC2.
AjieKceft HBaHOBH^: HH^cenep. Oh padoraer b KOHTOpe doub-
moro, hoboto aaBOAa, a O-nbra 33HHMaeTCH x03«ftcTB0M. Ohh
>KHByT b HedojibiuoH, yAodHOH KBapTHpe b neirrpe ropoAa. na
raaBHOft yanue.
Ajiexceft HBaHOBiiH Hannnaji cboh padoMHfi Aeiib pano.
HnorAa oh yes>Kaji Ha cjiywby, xorAa Ojibra cipe eiuuia.
Ojibra npocran h Aodpan iscemijHHa. Ohh JiiodHJia 3aH»-
MaTbCH X03flfiCTB0M H BCe ABJiaJia dbICTpO H BecejIO: C VAOBOJIb-
CTBHeM yOwpaJia KBapTHpy, Mbuia, MHCTHjia, xoAHJia 3a noKynKa-
mh, roTOBHJia odeA - ■.
KaK TOJibKo Ojibra ydpajia KBapTHpy, BWMbuia h BbiHHCTHJia
Bee, CAejiajia noKynKH h npnroTOBHJia odeA, ona jnodwjia nocw-
Aexb b yAodHOM Kpecjie y oiaia h nocMOTpexb H3 okhu na iiivm-
HyiO iKH3Hb TJiaBHOH yJIHUH.
1 CLUA—CoeAHHeiiHbie LUxaTbi Am&phkh—United States of America.

2 MjuiifHoftc—Illinois.
Bobbin6h ah ropOA hah MaaeHbKHH, a rjiaBHan yjiHua Be3A,e

OAiniaKOBa. Tvt Bcerâ yBHAHiub h rocTHHHuy, h khho, h 6aHK,
h noMTy, h VHHBepcajibHWH Mara3HH.
C paHHero yTpa ao no3AHero Benepa Ha rAaBHoft yjiHue

myM, TOJina, ABHaceHHe ...
OAbra 3najia, hto b noeeAejibHHK, b uac ahh m rjraBHoft
y.TiHue BcerAa yBHAHiub AOKTopa tooHca. KaJKAbift noHeAejibHHK
AOKTOp ^>K0HC npHxoAHT b pecxopaH «Tom H Bha», TAe OH
BCTpenaeTCH co cbohm npHareaeM AOKiopOM PHHapACOHOM.
KancAyio cpeAy b h crape Mac a ahh npHeswaji ea thkch npo-
t|)eccop Bpayn. Otot blicqkhm, xyxon hcaobck BcerAa cneuiHA ...
KorAa OAbra BHAeJia hr rnaBHoft yAHLi,e doAbmoft, chhhh
RBTOMOSHAb HCpeA 3ARHHCM 6aHKa, OHa 3HaJia, HTO CerOAHH nHT-
HHua h rocnoxca Cmht npHexaaa b ropoA 3a noKynkaiviH. OAbra
3apaeee Mor.ua CKa3axb, hto 6yAex Aeaaxb rocnoma Cmht. CHana-
jia ona, -KOHeHHo, noftAex b 6aHK, hotom ona noftAex na norny,
noTOM BexpexHx noApyry h ohh nofiAyx b pecTOpaH, aanycHXb
hjih BbinHXb MauiKy KO(f)e. HaKOHeu, ona noftAex c noApyroft b
y h h b e p c a a b h i >i h Mara3HH h uepe3 uac, ABa, Beceaafl h AOBOAbHan,
OHa yeAex aomoh na cbocm chhcm aBxoMoSHAe.
- H BH>Ky, HTO TH CKOpO CMOlKeiHb HaOHCaXb HCTOpHK) nk-
mero ropoAa, — cmchach AAeKceft PfeaHOBHu.
— Hy, ne 3i-iaio Hanmuy ah h KHHry o HameM ropoAe, —
oTBeHaAa OAbra, — no nona mh jkhbcm xyx b KBapxftpe Ha rAas-
hoh yAHue, MHe hc hbao hh cMOxpexb nporpaMMbi no xejieBH30~
py, HH XOAHTb B KHHO. —
III. VOCABULARY
6H0AHOxeKa library CKOpO soon

Be3Ae everywhere CHOKOftHblft, quiet, peaceful
seceabift, merry, jolly -'an, -'oe
-'an, -'oe xaKcft taxi
raaBHbift, main, chief X6AeBH30p television (set)
-'an, -'oe XOAna crowd
ABHHfeHHe movement xyAoft, thin, skinny
AOAAap dollar -'an, -'oe
HaKOHeu finally ueHXp center
OAHHaKOBblft, same, identical, luxax state
-'an, -'oe equal uiyM noise
oTKyaa whence, from
where
BojbiuoH jih ropOA hjih MajieHbKHH, a raaBHaa yjiHua ee3A£

o^HHaKOBa. Tvt BcerAa yBHAuuib h rocraHHuy, h khho, h 6aHK,
h noHTy, h yHHBepca.ibHbift Mara3HH.
C paHHero yTpa ao no3AHero Beuepa Ha raaBHOft yjiHije

uiyM, TOJina, ABHJKemie ...
Oabra 3HaJia, hto b noHejnejibHHK, b uac ahh Ha rJiaBHoft
yAHue Bcerjua yBHAmiib AOKTopa UpKOHca. KzhKAbift noHeêjibHHK
AOKTOp JLkohc npHxoAHT b pecTOpaH «Tom h Eha», rê oh
BCTpeHaercfl co cbohm npHarejieM aoktopom PnuapAcoHOM.
KaacAyio cpeAy b neTbipe naca ahh npHe3«<aji Ha tbkch npo-
(J)eccop Bpaya 3tot bhcokhh, xyAOfi nejiOBeK BcerAa cneniHA .. .
Korâ Ojibra BHAfcAa Ha rjiaBHot y.iHue Sojibinoft, cHHHft
aBTOMo6HJib nepeA 3AaHHeM 6aHKa, OHa 3Hajia, hto ceroAHH iiht-
HHua h rocnojKa Cmht npnexajia b ropoA 3a noKynKaMH. OAbra
3apaHee Morjra CKa3aTb, hto 6yaeT AeJiaTb rocnojKa Cmht. CHaua-
jia OHa, 'KOHeHHO, noflaeT b 6aHK, noTOM ona noftueT Ha noTrv,
noTOM BCTpeTHT noApyry h ohh no ft Ayr b pecTOpaH, 3aKycftTb
hjih BwnHTb nauiKy Kocpe. HaKOHeu OHa noftAeT c noApyroft b
yHHBepcajibHbift Mara3HH h uepe3 uac, Asa, BeceAaa h AOBOAbnan,
OHa yeAd aomoh na CBoeM CHHeM aBT0Mo6HAe.
- H BHHty, HTO TbI CKOpO CMOHteiUb HanHCaTb HCTOpHIO H&-
rnero ropOAa, — cMeHAcn AAeKceft HBaHOBHH.
— Hy, He 3Haio Hanrnuy ah h KHHry o Hamew ropoAe, —
OTBenajia OAbra, — ho nona mm iKHBeM Tyr b KBapTHpe Ha rAaB-
hoh yAHne, MHe He hbao hh CMOTpeTb nporpaMMbi no TeAeBH30-
py, HH XOAHTb B KHHO. -
III. VOCABULARY
GnOjiHOTena library CKOpO soon

Be3Ae everywhere CnOKOHHblH, quiet, peaceful
seceAbift, merry, jolly -'an, -'oe
-'an, -'oe TaKCH taxi
TAaBHblft, main, chief T6AeBH30p television (set)
-'an, -'oe TOAna crowd
ABHIKeHHe movement xyAoft, thin, shinny
Aojuiap dollar -'an, -'oe
HaKoneu finally ueHTp center
OAHHaKOBblft, same, identical, HITaT state
-'an, -'oe equal uiyM noise
OTKyAa whence, from
where
Imperfect ire Perfective English
npwe3>KaTb (I) npHexaxb (exaxb) to arrive (by

vehicle)
npiiXOAHTb (XQAHXb) npHHXH (haxh) to arrive (on foot)

CMOTpeibj CMOXpK), nocMoxpexb I. to look ; P.
CMOXpMUib, CMOXpSIX (like CMOipexb) take a look
cneiuiixb (II) sacneiuHxb (II) to lmrry,
start hurrying
cnpauiHBaxb (I) cnpocMXb; cnpoiuy, to ask (a question)
cnpocHiUb,
enpoeax
ybHpaxb (I) y6paxb; y6epy, to clean, tidy up,
yOepeiiib, ybepyx remove
yeawaxb (I) yexaxb (exaxb) to drive away, off
xoText; xo4y, xoneuib, 3axoxexb (xoxexb) I. to wish, want;

XOXHX P. to get the desire
HHCXHXb; HHmy, Bb'mHCXHXb I. to clean, cleanse;

MHCXHUlb, "JHCTflT (micxHxb) P. to clean, cleanse
thoroughly
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Further functions of the perfective aspect

In Part A several functions of the perfective aspect have
been discussed and illustrated, particularly its use to express
the completion of an action or the termination of a state.
The perfective aspect can also express:
1. the "beginning of an action or a state:
Oh 3aKpHH3Ji He began to shout

OHa 3anejia She began to sing
2. a single, instantaneous action or state, one suddenly
begun and suddenly ended :
Oh KpHKHyji He gave a shout

Oh HHXHyji He sneezed
The verb Kpwqaxb may serve to indicate the variety of
meanings conveyed by the Russian verb-aspect:
140 LUECTH.VU lATbiH VPOK
a. Kpunaxb: PeSenoK KpHuaji The child cried

BeCb ACHb. all day.
b. nOKpH4aTb: Oh nOKpHHaJi. He cried a little.
c. 3aKpHHaTb: Oh aaKpHâji. He began shouting.
d. KpHKHyTb: Oh KpHKHyji He gave a shout
H 3aTHX. and fell silent.
B. Formation of the perfective aspect
From the various examples in Section A it can be seen

that the aspect forms are, generally, rather closely related.
They are usually differentiated by means of 1) Prefixes;
2) Infixes; 3) the change of the root vowel and/or consonant;
4) different stems: 6paxb (imperf.): B3«Tb (perl); roBopHXb
(imperf.): cKaaaxb (perf.). A helpful device for memorizing the
verbs is to group them according to their aspect-formation, for
example:
1. By means of prefixes:
Bbl: BblMbiTb(cH): BbHncTsm>

3A: 3Aneib; 3AKpHHaxb; 3Axoxexb; 3AcneniHTb
HA: HArwcaxb
HO: nOAywaxb; HOryjiwxb; lIOcHAexb
flPH: HPMroxoBHXb, HPHexaxb
C: CAeJiaxb; CMOMb; Cnexb
2. with the typical imperfective infix BA:

OAeBATbca (Imperf.): oAexbcsi (Perl); oxwpbiBAxb (Imperf.):
oxKpbixb (Perf.)
3. with the typical perfective infix HY:
KpHMaxb (Imperf.): KpHKHyib (Perf.); MHxaib (Imperf.):
‘rnxHyxb (Perf.)
4. by means of root vowel and/or consonant change:
oxBeHAxb (Imperf.): oxeeTMxb (Perl); nojiynAxb (Imperf.)
nojiynMxb (Perl)
For a listing of verbs used in this text arranged according

to their aspect-formation, see Table 15 in the Appendix.
C. The verbs xoAMXb and e3AHTb
There are certain verbs of motion, the so-called “double
imperfective verbs” (indeterminate — determinate; see Les¬
son 25), which by their very nature cannot have perfective
forms. They use their second imperfective form, the so-called
“determinate” (or “actual”) plus a prefix as their perfectwe
aspect. Two of the most frequently used verbs of this type
which the student already knows are xojoiHXb and eaAHXb. For
their perfectives they use prefixed forms of mjitu and exaxb,
respectively.
Import. H xowy b niKoJiy. I go (habitually) to school,
attend school.
Perf. H 3aBTpa noftjxy I shall go to school
b niKoJiy. tomorrow.
Import. H e3>Ky b ropo#. I commute to town (habit¬
ually back and forth).
Pert H saBTpa noe^y I shall drive to town
b ropoA. tomorrow.
Note that the future of xojmxb and e3jmxb will always be
formed with a form of 6bixt: H 6yay xoamxb; oh 6yAex esAMXb,
while the future of haxh and exaxb can never be formed with
dbiTb: H nofiay; oh noeaex.
Note also that a double imperfective verb like xojxHXb or
e3AHXb when used with a prefix does change in meaning but
not in aspect, thus nPMea>KaTb (to arrive) remains imperfec¬
tive and must use npuEXATb for its perfective; YxoAHXb (to
go away) remains imperfective and must use yWTH for its
perfective.
D. The verbs roBOpHXb (Imperf.) and CKa3axb (Perf.)
roBOpnxb is used when referring to the process of speaking
or to “speaking in general”: Oh roBOpnx mhofo; ohh roBOpax
no-pyccKH.
CKa3axb is used when making a definite statement or con¬
veying information:
Qua cxaaajia: h hav Tcrieph aomoh.
H cKamy dpaxy, Kyâ n 6 Ay.
Note that cnaaaxfa cannot express the repetitive or habit¬
ual action of “conveying information,” or of “making a de¬
finite statement.” In such a context roBopwxb must be used:
Oh Bcer/na roBOpHJi: a 3aHHxoA hcjiobck.
142 ILIECTHAAUATHfi yp()K
Use roBOpHTb with, c (co) and the instrumental to render

“to speak (talk) with, to have a conversation with”:
thiepa a roBOpHji c mohm Apyrow; roBOpHJW bhi c VMHTCJieM?
E. In a negative command the imperfective is normally used
He roBopHTe, xorAa oh Do not speak when he is
HHTaeT BCjiyx! reading aloud!
He jkahtc yHHTejia! Do not wait for the teacher!
V. QUESTIONS
1. Fê akhah AjieKcei’i Hbhhobhh h ero xcena? 2. Fac pa66-

raeT Aaenceft Hb&hobhh? 3. Padcmier ah Ojisra? 4. Kotah hlihh-
HaeT cboh padoHHH ACHb AAeKceii Hbuhobuh? 5. Mto sa hchobck
6bi;ia OAbra? 6. lItq Aeîajia Ojibra iiocac roro kbk ona ydpajia
K'Baprnpy, CAejiaaa noKynKH h nparoTOBHAa o6ca? 7. B kidkaom
ah ropoAe ecTb rjiaBHaa yjrnua? 8. OAHiuiKOBa jih raaBiiaa yanua
b Ooamuom hah MaaeHbKOM ropoAe? 9. Mto bhi bcctas. yeiiAHTe
Ha raaBHOH yjiHue? 10. KorAa Ha rjiaBHoii wihuc to an a? 11. Kto
npH63>Kaji na rjiaBHyro y;inuy b noneAeAbHHK? 12. Koro (acc. of
kto) BHAejia Oabra na raaBHOH yAHne Kaacayio cpeA.v? 13. Kto
npHe3>KaJi Ha rjiaBHyio yAHuy KaxcAyio iiHTHnuy? 14. Mto acabab
rocnoxta Cmht Ha rAaBHoft wmne? 15. Koro oh a tum BCTpenaAa?
16. KyAa ona JUo6ma xoahti> c noApyron? 17. KyAa rocriwKa
Cmht ye3>KaAa, BeceaaH h AOBOAbnan? 18. Mto roBopi'yr jKene
AACKceft MBaHOBHH? 19. Mto otbcmbab Mymy OAbra? 20. Bbi
nacTO CMOTpHTe nporpaMMbi no TCACBH3opy?
1. From the Reading Exercise of Part B write out all the

perfective verbs, giving their tense and English meaning,
thus:
npHexaaH past “they arrived (by vehicle) ”
2. Group the perfective verbs according to the type of
their aspect-formation, thus:
npHexaib, npwroTOBHTb; yexatb, yBHAeib etc,, using Read¬
ing Exercises of Parts A and B.
3, Insert verbs In the required aspect and tense:

(1) Buepa h aojifo.KBapTHpv HHCTHTb : BblMHCTHTb
H ce xopoiiio.
(2) Moh Apyr Becb ACHb moxvct .. . CAyuiaTb : nocAyuiaib
pa^HO, a fl.Mac, aBa h
IIOH^y AO MO ft
(3) Oxen Mne Bnepa.: «5I ... roBOpftTb : CKa3aTb
C TBOHM VMHTejieM.»
(4) KamxVK) cyodoiv oieu, Miie ... AasaTb : AaTb
pvoub, a ccrojXHH oh Mne.
abb pvCjih.
(5) 51 BCCb ACHb.ypoK h Hano- rOTOBHTb : npHTOTOBHIb
nen xoporno.
(6) riaBeji ne jiio6ht., ho b oto MbITbCH : BblMHTb
BOCKpecenbe oh xo?b (at least)
. pyKH.
(7) no cpejtaM yHHTejib.paHO, npH63>KaTb : npnexaTb
ho b 9Ty cpeAy oh.oneHb
n03AH0.
(8) Bnepa h TpH naca.h. HHcaTb : HanncaTb
Tpn nncbMa.
(9) Cohh, ne.ABepn! OTKpbiBarb : OTKpbiTb
(10) Fac mh ceroAHH.? BCTpenaTbCH : ©CTpeTHTbca
KoHeHHO na raaBHOft yJim*e>
FAC MH BCCTAa.!
4. a. From the following sentences write out all verbs, in¬

dicating their aspect and giving their English meaning, thus:
ft noftAy Perfective “I shall go”
b. Change the following sentences into the past tense:
1. 4epe3 abb naca h noftAy b hobvk) CudjiHOTeKy. 2. JleTOM
mh iioeACM b AepeBHK). 3. 3AOpoBbift He.ioBeK ne 3axoHeT jiexdiTb
b nocTeJiH neabift AeHb. 4. Kofab ohb BCTpeniT noApyry b yHH-
BepcHTere? 5. Tw nocMoipHuib, mto ceroAHH hact b khho? 6.
hAy noxynaTb nepHoe najibTo. 7. YipOM a xony no3aBTpaKaTb
b pecTopaee, 8. BenepoM npHeAer cecTpa H3 Mockbh. 9. PyccKHft
ueAOBeK aioSht noroBOpHTb! 10. Bpax BCTpeTHT CBoero npHHTeAH
Ha rAABHOft yjiuue b ueHTpe ropoAa. 11. Oxeit noeAeT Ha Aany
b HioHe, a mh eA£M tvab yxce b Mae. 12. Ccfoahh Ha yjraite 6oab-
rnoe ABH>KeHHe; AOKtop ne 3axoneT exaTb b ropoA Ha aBTOModft-
Ae. 13. H noftAy b coceAHHft Mara3HH h kvhaio cbcjkhh cbip. 14. H
144 LHECTHAJUlAThin VPGK
cnpauiHBaK) ripoABBiuHny ckojilko ctoht sto Kpacnoe njiaTbe?

15. Cero/iHH ohm noe^yT b ropoA nocMOTpcTb na nam noBbifi
6aHK. 16. Bo btophhk h cnpoiny mnKcucpa, tag oh aaia b Pocchpi.
17. Bbi cKa>KHxe ToeapHupy FleipoBy 3aKpbiib okho nepcA ot'lcb-
AOm! 18. B noHCAeJibHHK yrpOM ye3>KacT npocjteccop /Bkohc.
5. a. In the following sentences replace all boldface im-

perfective verbs by corresponding perfective forms, thus:
Mu 6yAeiw m-fcaib KHtitry no-pyccKit: Mbi HanwiueM Kmiry
no-pyccKH.
b. Put all perfective forms thus obtained into the past
tense, thus:
Mi>i HannmeM Ktmry no-pycCKH: Mbi HanwcajiH Kiniry no-
pyccKH.
1. Ytpom k OTipy 6yad npne3>KaTb aoktop HeanoB. 2. HeT-
poB 6yAe? 3aBTpaKaTb aomb. 3. KorAa ti,i OyAeuib ySiipaxb KRap-
THpy? 4. rioAp)ha cnpauiHBad, xorAa h Kynjiio hobvio iii Jinny.
5. Ohh 6yAyx roBopnxb o nocJiCAneft pyccKoft Kinire. 6. Br»i
OyAde OTKpbieaTb cctoahh Marasihi? 7. Bbi OyAde cwoTperb
nporpaMMy no TeneBH30py. 8. H BcerAa OyAy BCTpenaxb Mocro
bpaia Ha niaBHoii yjiHpe nepeA SAamieM iioBoro Ganna. 9. Mama
h h 6yAeM noKa3biBaxb oxuy Oojibinoii h KpaciiBbiii ropOA, JIciihh-
rpaA. 10. Ohh OyAyT npHroTOBJisiTb CBOii ypox b ymiBCpCHTcxe
HJIH AOMa.
6. Translate the verbs in parentheses:
1. Oh (says), hto lie noeACT b ropoA- 2. Mbi c bpaxoM He

(speak) no-aHmiHHCKH. 3. Ohh (will speak) saeipa o cBoeft
KHHre. 4. npOAaBiUHua y>xe (said), CKOJibxo ax a manna ctoht.
5. Hhkto hc mot (tell), hto hagt ceroAHH b khho. 6. B Toil iiikojic
hhkto He yMen (speak) rio-pyccxH. 7. Ohh (will tell) aaBTpa,
xyAa hath. 8. (Did you speak) c iipocjteccopoM 06 btom? 9. Hex,
Mbi c npocfteccopOM (did not speak). 10. (They say), utq (they
have told) HameMy Gpaxy noexaxb 3a AOxxopoM. 11. (Tell)
BameMy Apyry, hto mli ceroAHH AOMa.

a. Imperfective:
1. Our city is not very large. 2. But in our little town there
is a fine university. 3. On [its] main street there is a large, new
department store. 4. From morning to evening there is always

a crowd on the main street. 5. Early in the morning the work¬
ing people (paOoHHii HapoA) hurry to the plant, office, or shop.
6. In the daytime they hurry to the restaurant and in the eve¬
ning to a movie or club. 7. Now, during the summer, we live in
the country. 8. But in the winter we shall live again in the city.
9. Then we shall have the opportunity to go shopping in the
new department store. 10. Father always asks the saleslady:
“How much does this cost and how much does that?” 11. But I
never think about the price. 12. When the saleslady shows a
beautiful hat or an expensive coat, I always buy [them].
b. Perfective:
1. Today, early in the morning, I shall drive downtown.
2.1 shall have breakfast at the restaurant, and then I shall go
to the department store. 3. There I shall buy a new summer
coat. 4. Yesterday I went to a store to buy a hat. 5.1 said to the
saleswoman: “Please show [me] that hat there.! ” 6. She showed
it [to me] and I bought it (ee). 7. Afterwards I met my friend
Nina (Hhhy) at a restaurant. 8. Today we shall meet there
again and have dinner. 9. I shall tell her (eft) where to buy
good and not very expensive furniture. 10. We shall have a chat
about the latest news. 11. Then we shall go to a movie and in
the evening we shall drive home with [my] father and have
supper at home.
c. Imperfective and Perfective:

1. All day yesterday it was raining. 2. I could not do any¬
thing outdoors. 3. I slept late, washed slowly, dressed, and
cleaned my room thoroughly. 4. I listened to the radio a little
while and then wrote a letter to my girl friend. 5. I wrote how
I had gone shopping and had bought a very beautiful new dress.
6. I was going along on Main Street and caught sight of that
beautiful dress (acc.) in the window of a big store. 7. Suddenly
I wanted to buy it. 8. It was very expensive but I did not think
of the price and bought it. 9. In the letter I also asked my
friend when she would (will) come (arrive by vehicle) to the
city. 10. When she comes, we shall go to the theater, the opera,
and the concert. 11. I know that she will also want to see the
new university. 12. My father is a professor at the university.
13. He will be able to show her everything—the big, new library,
the museum, the beautiful club. 14 She will drive off, happy and
satisfied.
146 LUECTHAHUATblW YPOK

Practice of the imperfective-perfective verbs of Lesson 16
HHCbMO OTUy
KaxcAym HeAejiK) b noHeAeabHHK yxpOM h nnmy nncbMO
OTuy. CeroAHH noneAejibHHK h, KaK BcerAa, h y>Ke 3a cxojiom h
ceftqac 6yAy nwcaTb hhcbmo oxu,y.
KorAa h nHcajia nHCbMO, Mama oxKpbuia ABepb, BOiujia h
cnpocHJia: — Tbi eAeuib b ropOA ceroAHH yxpoM? —
— Ha, KorAa a Hamimy axo hhcbmo, h noeAy b ropOA 3a
noKyriKaMH, — oxBexHJia h Marne.
— OneHb xopomo. # to>kc xoqy exaxb b ropOA- KorAa th
HanHiueuib rincbMo, riOAcajiyftcxa ckshcm MHe. —
— & He y3Haio CBoen mhjioh cecxpbi, — oxseqaio h. — Bee
3HatOT, qxo Mama BcerAa cneuiAx, HHKorAa He Moxcex XKAaxb! —
— CMeftca, cMeftca, — roBopnx Mama, — ceroAHH y Mean
Hex aBT0M06iyia, a y xe6a ecTb. Box noqeMy a ceroAHH HHKyAa
He enemy h roxoBa xcAaxb! —
— Hy, xopomo. H 6yAy roxoBa qepe3 qac. B KaKOH Mara3HH
xbi xoqeuib noftin? Hxo xbi xoqeuib noKynaxb b ropoAe? —
cnpauiHBaio a cecxpy.
— roaopHT, qxo ceroAHH b Mara3HHe Cmhxb 6o.xbmaa pac-
npoAaaca. H xoxeAa nocMOxpexb HOByio oScxanoBKy aah Moefi
Aaqq. —
3xot Mara3HH oxKpbiJin cobc6m HeAaBHo (quite recently), ho
b 3xom Mara3HHe oqeBHAHo Maao noKynaatf.
— FAe xbi qHxaaa o pacnpoAa>Ke? .ZJafi MHe ra3exy h noKa-
ikh ofinbHBAeHHe, — nonpocfijia h Marny.
Mama noKa3biBaex o6x>HBJieHHe h h BHiKy, qxo Mara3HH
CMHxa aTKpbiBaiOT ceroAHH xojibKO nocae o6eAa, b Asa qaea aha.
— Bot BHAnmb, roBOpid h cecxpe, — Tbi BcerAa Bee Tan.
Cbicxpo Aeaaemb, BcerAa xax cneuiHiub, qxo box qnxaaa h He
yBHAeaa, qxo Mara3Hii oxKpMBaiox xoabKo b Asa qaea ahh! Hom-
HHUib Kax Ham oxeu, BcerAa roBopHJi: «nocneuiHmb — jiiOAew
HacMeiiiHiubb1 He xax jih 3xo? —
1 A Russian proverb: He who acts in haste, makes a fool of him¬

self. Lit.: If you hurry, you will make people laugh (at your expense).
CEMHAAUATblR YPOK
I SEVENTEENTH LESSON
Peculiarities in the singular masculine and neuter declensions;

prepositional in -y; neuters in -mh — Declension of personal
pronouns — Impersonal expressions (with dative)
I- COMMON EXPRESSIONS AND IDIOMS
3BOHHTb no Tejie<f)6Hy (-f-dat.) To phone, call up

May! OoftaeMl I am coming! Let’s go!
npHiviauiaTb b rocrn To invite (on a visit, as a
guest)
IIpHHHTb npHrnaiueHHe To accept the invitation
PaspeuiHTe wne saM npe^cxa- Permit me to introduce to
BHTb- you . . .
xoqy sac nosnaKOMHTb... I (should) like to introduce
you.
Oqenb npMHTHo nosHaKo- it’s a pleasure to make your
MHTbCH. ^ acquaintance.
JXa Mbi 3H3KOMbi! But we know each other!
Mmjiocth npocHM! Welcome (in)!
npocxHTe! I beg your pardon; please for¬
give me!
«B rocTHx xopouio, a noma “It’s pleasant enough visit-
jiymne». ing, but at home it’s better.”
“East or West, home is best.”
II. READING: HPHHflTb nPHFJlALUEHHE
yTpOM B KBapTHpe HHJKCHepa MoJIOTOBa TI03BOHHJI TejiecfDOH.

— Ajijio!
— IlonpocHTe, noxcajiyiicTa, k TejiecjDOHy Tarbany Mojio-
TOBy.
— KtO rOBOpHT?
— 3to ee riOApyra, Bepa FIonoBa
— Ceunac . . . Tahh! Tejiecf)6H! C roSoft xoêT rosopHTb
Bepa IIonoBa.
— Ujiyl . . . Ajijio? . . . Bepa?! 3ApaBCTByii, AOporan! Th
AaBHO b JleHHHrpaAe? . . .
147
148 CEMHAJtUATblPl yPOK
— MHina, Tbi cboSoash b cy666iy BenepoM?

— JXa, h CBoSoêH. A wro?
— Bepa npHrjiauiaex nac b focth.
— Kto y nee eme SyAeT?
— y wee Syêx 6oAbmoH npHeM. ByAex oneHb HHiepeoio.
IloftAeM!
— B SojibmoM oSmecTBe MHe Bceraa CKyHHO, ho ecjin xe6e
SyêT aecejio, h c yAOBOJibCTBHeM npHHHMaio ee npHrviameHHe.
B cy66oTy senepoM, Mojiotob c nceHOH eAyx b rocxn.
— Te6e He xoaoahq 6e3 najibTo, Tana?
— HeT, ceroAHfl xenjio. Jimm, Ha cojihuc, 6wjio Aaate
IKapKO.
ri03B0HHJIH. X03HHKa OTKpblJia HM ^Bepb.
— Xlo6pHH Benep, T4hh. 51 xaK paâ xe6a bha^tb!
— Bepa, 9to moh Mym, MnxaHA CepreesuH.
— OneHb npHflxHo no3HaKOMHXbcn. Mhaocth npocHM ...
TaHH, MHxaM CepreeBHH, paspemHxe MHe BaM npe^cxaeHxb
BHKTOpa HBaHOBHqa CBeTAOBa.
— jla Mbi 3HaKOMbi! Kan bh noxoiBaeTe, Bhktop PiBaHO-
bhh? 4to Bbi xenepb ASAaeTe?
— TpyAHo OTBeTHTb... BpeMH ox BpeMeHH h nHiiry a Jin
xxypHajia «CoBeTCKHM riHcaTejib», pa6oTaio Ha# HOBoft Ki-mrOH .. .
— Muxami CepreeBHH, TaHH, npocxHie, — ycji^mraJiH ohh
rojioc X03HHKH. — Bhktop! 51 xoqy sac no3HaKOMHXb c neBHueft
BapcoBOH. Th, TaHH, hah co mhoii, a bbi, Mhxhha CepreeBHH, ne
CHAHTe b yniy, a noroBopHTe c TOBapameM Chaopobbim. Oh
reHHft! Ho, noxcaAyHCTa, He cnopbxe c hum!
Mojiotob nocMOTpeA Ha TOBapnma CHAoposa h noAyMaJi:
«■. B rocTHx xopomo, a AOMa Ay*mie».
III. VOCABULARY
saao hello pox (fo) month

Bemb thin^, caobg word
object xeAetJJOH telephone
ecAH if (not whether) TeAet})OHHCT telephone
oOmecTBO society, operator
company yiOTHbiH, cozy, comfortable
npHrAaiuenwe invitation -'an, -'oe
npweM reception, X03HHKa hostess,
party proprietress
SEVENTEENTH LESSON 149
Verbs
SBOHHTb nOSBOHHTb (like SBOHHXb) to ring, call up

(Lesson 12)
3HaKOMHTbJ n03HaK0MHXb to acquaint
3HaKOMJIK), (3HaKOMHXb)
3HaKOMHUIb,
3HaKOMflT
3HaKOMHTbCfl n03HaKOMHXbCfl to get acquainted

(3HaKOMHTb) (3HaKOMHXb)
OTBeMaTb (I) OTBeTHXb; oxseny, to answer

OXBeXHLUb, oxeexax
npencxaBjiaxh (I) npe/icxaBHib; npeAcxaBjno, to introduce

npe^cxaBHiub, npe^cxasax
npHrjiaiuaib (I) npwrjiacHXb; npHraamy, to invite

npHrjiacMUib, npHraacax
npHHHMaxb (I) npHHHXb; npmwy, to receive, accept

npHMeuib, npHMyi
npocwTb; npoiuy, nonpocHXb (npocnxb) to ask a favor,

npocHiub, npocai beg
paspeuiarb (I) pa3peuiHXb; pa3peiuy, to permit, solve

pa3peuiHUib, pa3peiuax
cjiwuiaxb, CJibiiuy, ycJibiiuaxb I. to hear; P. to

CJlbllUHIUbj (like cjibiuiaxb) catch the sound
cjibiiuax i (of)
CXOHXb (II) 1 None to cost
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Peculiarities in the singular masculine and neuter

declensions
1. Masculine:
a. In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule C, hard mas¬

culine nouns the stem of which is stressed and ends in at, hi, m,
150 CEMHAZWATblK yPOK
% n take the ending -eM in the instrumental instead of -om :
MecHK. “month”: MecHitew; TOBapum: TOBapmueM
b. After the prepositions b and Ha some masculine nouns

take the ending -y (-10) in the prepositional instead of -e:
b, Ha yrjiy1 2 in, on the comer Ha noay on the floor

b cany in the garden b rony in the year
bo pry in the mouth Ha Mocxy on the bridge
2. Neuter:
a. In accordance with Vowel Mutation Rule A, neuter

nouns ending in -«ce, -He, -sue, -me, or in -ue take -a instead of
-h in the genitive: cojmue: “sun”: cojmua; and -y instead of -so
in the dative: cojraue: cojiHuy.
b. The neuter nouns hmh “name” (Christian name) and
BpeMH “time” have the following declension in the singular:
Nom. HMH BpeMH

Gen. HMeHH BpeMeHH
Bat. HMeHH BpeMeHH
Acc. HMH BpeMH
Instr. HMeueM BpeMCHCM
Prep. HMeHH BpeMeHH2
Declension of the personal pronouns
Singular
Second
First Person Person Third Person
All Genders All Gen. Masc. Neut, Fem.
Nom. H I TbI you oh he oho it OHa she
Gen. MeHH of me xe6n ero ee
Bat. MHe to me Te6e ewy esS
Ace. MeHH me Te6n ero ee
Instr. MHOft by me Todofl HM eio
(mhoso) (to6ok>) (Heft)
Prep. 060 MHe about me 0 Tede 0 hSm 0 HeiS
1 Note that yroji, pot lose the o in the oblique cases: ynna, yrjiy, etc.
pTa, pry, etc.
2 For the plural declension and other details, see Lesson 21 .

Plural
All Genders
Nom. MbI we Bbl you ohm they

Gen. Hac of us eac HX
Dat. naM to us bsm HM
Acc. Hac us eac MX
instr. H3MH by us eaMH HMH
Prep. o Hac about us o eac 0 HHX
The third person personal pronouns take prefixed h when

used as the object of prepositions. They do this in contrast to
the third person possessive pronoun-adjectives, which never
take prefixed h:
Personal Pronouns
Oh# nouMH 6e3 Hero b xeaxp. They went without him to the
theater.
H roBopfiji c hhm, a He c Heft. I spoke with him and not with
her.
Oh cnopHJi c hhmh. He argued with them.
Mm roBOpHJiH o hAx. We spoke about them.
Possessive Pronoun-Adjectives
y ero bpara ecTb aBTOModnjib. His brother has a car.

H roBopfiji c ee no^pyroH. I spoke with her girl friend.
H cnopHJi C MX COCe^KOH. I argued with their neighbor.
Mm roBopfi^H 06 hx pa6©Te. We spoke about their work.
C. Impersonal expressions
1. xojioaho It is cold. HHTepeCHO It is interesting,

TenJio It is warm. CKyMHO It is boring,
MtapKO It is hot. y^66HO It is comfortable,
Tpy,HHO It is difficult. Hey^66HO‘ It is uncomfortable,
JierKO It is easy, HpHHTHO It is pleasant,
xopouio It is good. HenpHHTHo It is unpleasant,
lUioxo It is bad. 66jlbHO It is painful.
152 CEMHAMMW! YPQK
2. These impersonal expressions can be used with refer¬

ence to a person. The person appears in the Russian sentence
in the dative case.
Literal Translation
MHe xojioaho I am cold. to me [it is]

cold
Te6e Teruio? Are you warm ? (fam.) to you [it is]
warm?
BaM Teruio? Are you warm? (pol.) to you [it warm 1
is]
my Tpy^HO It is difficult for him. to him [it is]
difficult
eft JierKo It is easy for her. to her [it is]
easy
HaM Becejio We have a good time, to us [it is]
merry
yja.66Ho BaM? Are you comfortable ? to you [it is]
comfortable ?
mm Hey.zi.66Ho They are to them [it is]
uncomfor-
uncomfortable. table
Haw yibTHO We are cozy, to us [it is] cozy, coinfor-
comfortable. table
3. To form the past and future tense, 6mjio and 6y.neT are
used respectively:
MHe 6biJio Tpy^HO roeopHXb It was difficult for me to speak

no-pyccKH. Russian.
BaM byner JierKo rosopHTb It will be easy for you to speak
no-pyccKH. Russian.
4. The verbs xoxexbcsi “to feel like, have a desire” and

Ka3aTbCH “to seem, appear”:
Present MHe XOMeTCH UHTaTb. I feel like reading.

Past Emy xoTejiocb ecTb. He felt like eating (had
the desire to eat).
Future Hm 6ynex xoTeibcsi1 [
or Perf.: HM saXOMexCM j
They will feel like
Present Mhc KaHfeTca, hto h Sojien. It seems to me that I

am sick.
Past HaM Ka3ajiocb, hto oh It seemed to us that he
Sojien. was sick.
Future Hm 6ynex Ka3aTbcn )
or Perl: hm noKaiKeTCH \
It will seem to them.
1 Rarely used.
V. QUESTIONS
1. Koi\na nosBOHHJi xejieÔH b KBapTHpe HroxeHepa Mojio-

Tosa? 2. Koro nonpocHjiH k TejiecjioHy? 3. Kto 3bohhji no xejie-
4)OHy? 4. CBoSoêH Mojiotob b cySSoxy eenepoM? 5. Kto
npnrjiacHJi hx b tocth? 6. Kto eme 6y.neT y BepH? 7. ByneT jih
y nee HHTepecHo? 8. Cxynno jih MojiOTOBy b dojibmoM 66me
CTBe? 9. rioneMy npHHHJi Mojiotob npnrjiameHHe Bepbi? 10. Kyna
enyT Mojiotob c jkchgh b cyOSoxy senepOM? 11. floneMy TaHe
ne 6hjio xojiohho 6e3 najibTo? 12. Tne 6hjio ah£m xcapKO?
15. Kto hm OTKpbiJi HBepb, xorna ohh iio3bohhjih? 14. Hto
CKa3ajia hm xo3Hftxa? 15. 3eajia jih Bepa HHJKeHepa MojiOTOBa?
16. no3HaKOMHJia jih TaHH MojiOTOBa cbow noApyry c MyxteM?
17. Rax Bepa OonoBa nosHaxdMHJia hx c Bhktopom? 18. Bhjih
jih ohh y>xe 3HaKOMH? 19. Mto jejiaeT cennac Bhxtop MBaHOBHH?
20. C xeM xoTejia xosMxa no3HaxoMHTb BnxTopa HBaHOBHna?
21. 0 neM nojiy-Maji Mojiotob, xorjia oh nocMOTpeji Ha TOBapHina
CiWpoBa?
Give the correct case of the nouns in parentheses:
1. y M6HH HeT (BpeMH) HHTaTb. 2. H He 3Haio ero (hmh).

3. 51 xopowo noMHio ero (hmh). 4. C BaniHM (hmh) bh mohcct^
TyT A^JiaTb, hto xothtc. 5. Korâ mh y eac b tocthx, mh He
AyMaeM o (speMH). 6. Mh cnpocHM xosnHxy o ero (hmh). 7. Mh
He MoxceM jKHTb 6e3 (cojiHine). 8. 51 c yAOBOJibCTBHeM BCTpenajiCH
co cbohm (TOBapnm). 9. MencAy (JieBpajieM h MapTOM (Mecnix) h
6yAy JKHTb b Mocxse. 10. Hto y eac bo (pot) ? 11. Oh CHAeJi b
(yroji) h HHTaji ixypnaji «PyccKHii HapoA». 12. 51 nocMOTpeji Ha
(noji); Ha (noji) jie>xajia mqh Hosan xHHra. 13. Ohh yncHHaioT y
Harnero 6paTa Tpn pa3a b (toa). 14. B (caA) cefinac oneHb npH-
htho; noftAHTe b (caA).
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all the personal pro¬
nouns, except those in the nominative case (singular or plural).
Give their person, case, and number, and their English meaning,
thus (14 forms in all):
154 CEMHAJIUAIWI YPOK
c TOOofi 2nd sing, (fam.) Instrumental “with you (thee)’7

Hac 1st plur. Accusative “us”
b. Supply the Russian equivalent of the English words in

parentheses (“Thou” has been used wherever the familiar form of
the second person is to be supplied).
1. Oh CHAeA okojio (me) h hhtsji (to me) HHTepecuyio hct6-

pHio, 2. BpaT noexaji b ropoA des (me). 3. Okojio (thee) §tot
naKeT? 4. H KynHJi CKaTepTb jym (her). 5. rieBHija Bapcoea 6ojib-
Ha; y (her) 6ojiht ropjio. 6. y (us) ceroAHH doAbinoH npneM.
7. H dyny CKyuaTb de3 (you). 8. y (them.) b AOMe mbi BCTpeTHJiH
noara CBeTJioea. 9. CeroAHH mw ha£m (to him), a 3aBTpa oh
npHAeT (to us). 10. H (him) cnpamHBaio no-anrjiHHCKH, a oh
(to me) OTBenaeT no-pyccKH. 11. JlaeT oh (to thee) ypoKH pyc-
CKoro H3HKa? 12. HoBan CKaieprb (to her) doAbmaa paAOCTb.
13. CeroAHH HeB03M0JKH0 hath (to them) b tocth. 14. CKa3aJi
oh (to you), KyAa ohh eAyT? 15. Moh Apyr xonet (me) BHAetb
3aBTpa, a (thee) b noneAeABHHK. 16. fl nonpomy (him) He cno-
pHTb c aoktopom, 17. Xo3flHKa cnpocHT (her), fa6 btot MaraaHH.
18. Ohh npHrjiamaioT (us) k cede ea Aany. 19. FloKaJKHTe (to
me) BeuepHiOHD 3Be3Ay. 20. Mne BcerAa secejio (with thee), a Tede
(with me). 21. Otcu jiio6ht CMenTbca HaA (him). 22. (With her)
BcerAa npHHTHo noroBop&Tb. 23. IlepeA (us) BbicoKaa ropa.
24. Kto HCHBeT b KOMHaTe HaA (you)? 25. Kto eAeT (with them)
b onepy, a kto (with us) b TeaTp. 26. He roBOpnie c hhm (about
me)! 27. (About thee) nncajiH Buepa b ra3eTe. 28. OHa no3BO-
HHJia (us) no TeJie(f>OHy. 29. Mbi uacTo roBopHM (about him) c
coceAOM. 30. (About them) hhkto He iiomhht. 31. (About us) see
3HaiOT. 32. Mbi MHoro CJibimajiH (about you).
a. Translate the words in parentheses:
1. Bnepa HaM dbiJio oqenb (cold). 2. Eh (easy) roBOpHTb

no-pyccKH. 3. EMy BcerAa (interesting) Ha ypone. 4. MHe oneHb
(pleasant) n03HaK0MHTbcn c BaMH. 5. (Is it difficult) rmcaTb H
roBopHTb no-pyccKH? HeT, (it is easy)! 6. BaM dyAeT (uncom¬
fortable) 3Aecb. 7. JlexoM 3Aecb (hot), a oceHbio dyAeT (warm)
H oneHb (pleasant). 8. Bhjio BaM (painful) y AOKTopa? 9. Cua-
CTAHBbifi HCJIQB6K — eMy HHKOTAa He (boring)! 10. (I feel like)
TOTaTb, ho HeT xopowen khhth. 11. (It seems) ceroAHH dyAeT
(hot), Ha Hede hh odjiana. 12. Ohh He ejiH Becb AeHb h Tenepb
(they felt very [much] like) noo6eAaxb. 13. (It is uncomfortable)

3Aeci> cnaTb. 14. Korâ (cold), h oShkhoeghho ntio ropnuee
mojioko. 15. )Kajib, qxo BaM 6biJio (boring) na KOHiiepxe.
b. Give the following expressions in all persons :
1. Sêcb MHe ya66«o. 2. Mne oqeHb 66jibuo. 3. Mne jierKO

uHTSTb h TOBOpHTb no-pyccxH. 4. MHe xoqexca nOHTH B KHHO.
5. Mne Kmexcn, qxo hast aohcai>.
c. Change the following sentences into (1) the past tense; (2) the
future tense:
1. MHe xermo b hobom najibxo. 2. JlexoM HaM BcerAa xcapKO.

3. B rocTdx BaM Becejio. 4. Te6e He xojioaho? 5. EMy cxyuHo b
6oAbmoM 66mecTBe. 6. HaM xoqeTCH noexarb b ropoA. 7. HaM
oqeHb HHTepecHO no3HaKOMHTbCH c npoc|)eccopoM. 8. EMy
KrneTCH, hto oh 3HaeT 3to cjiobo. 9. Eh xoqeTCH Hrpaxb b
xeHHHc. 10. Mne oqenb npHHXHO no3HaKOMHXbca c hhm.

A
I. Sunday morning Vera Popova called us up. 2. She in¬

vited us to (Ha and accusative) a big reception. 3. My husband
does not work Sunday evening. 4. We accepted the invitation
with great pleasure. 5. We knew that it would (i.e. will) be
pleasant, interesting, and gay. 6. In the evening we drove to
her [house] in our car. 7. It was a very warm evening. 8. Even
without a coat I felt warm. 9. We rang and the hostess
opened the door. 10. “Hello! How are you? Come (Welcome)
in!” 11. “I am so happy to see you, Vera! This is my husband,
Mikhail Sergeevich Molotov.” 12. “It is a pleasure! And now I
want to introduce you and your husband to my good friend,
the singer Barsova (BapcoBoft). 13. Nina Alekseevna, permit
me to introduce to you my friend Tatyana Petrovna Molotova
and her husband Mikhail Sergeevich. 14. “Oh, but we are
already acquainted!” 15. “How are you, Nina?” 16. “And how
are you, my dear?” 17. “We were at your last concert. It was
so interesting!” 18. Mikhail Sergeevich looked at the singer
and then at his wife and thought: “It’s all right to go visiting,
but it’s better at home! ”
156 CEMHAffUATblR ypOK
1. It is raining today, and it is very cold outside. 2. I did

not feel well. I had a headache and did not go to the office. 3. All
morning I played cards with my sister, but she does not play
well and I don’t like to play with her. 4. The bell! I go to the
telephone. 5. My friend Paul is calling. 6. He feels like playing
cards tonight (today evening). 7. He has not called me [for]
three weeks, but I don’t mind (it’s all the same to me). 8. I
invite him to play with my brother and me. 9. Paul has not
played cards with us [for] about a month. 10. Now he is very
happy and accepts the invitation with great pleasure. 11. At
two o’clock sharp the telephone rings again; [it is] my brother
calling (calls) to tell me that in two hours he will be at our
home (at us). 12. He always eats supper with my sister and me
in our beautiful new apartment. 13. After supper Paul arrives
in his big black and red car. 14.1 introduce him to my brother.
15. “It is a pleasure to make your acquaintance — again!” says
Paul and laughs. 16. “Dear Peter! You remember that your
brother Sasha and I know each other already for three years.
17. We have met often at the club “White Mountain,” and
I have often played with him tennis and golf! ” 18. That’s
news, good news to me! Go ahead! Laugh, laugh! He who
laughs last, laughs best!” 19. In the kitchen my sister has
already prepared the tea; now she is watching the television
program, while (a) we play cards until late in the evening.
20. We are comfortable and cozy in our large, warm [living]
room, and have a very good time.

Based on the vocabulary and grammar of the preceding lessons
TEJIE$OH
H tsk ÔBoaeH, hto naKOHeij-TO a AOMa. Korâ padoraeuib
ue;ibiH AeHb b KOHTope, BenepoM npHHTHo nocHACTb AOMa, nonn-
TaTb HHTepecHyio KHkry, nocnymarb pa^no ...
Ho TOJibKO a BOineji b KBapTHpy, h ycjibimaji 3Bohok. Hay
k TejiecjmHy h rOBopk):
— Ajijio! —
— KTO TOBOpHT? —
— rOBOpHT Tombc Bap. C KeM bh xoTHie rosopHTb? —
— 3to He KBapTHpa rierpoBa? IlonpocHTe, noHcaayftcra k
xeJiecjmHy...
SB VEXTEENTII LESSON 157
— 3to lie KBapTHpa fleTpoBa. y Tejie(|)OHa rocnoAHH Bap.—

- Ax, npOCTHTC, npOCTHTC 3a SeCnOKOHCTBO ... —
JXa, xopoiuo 6bHb AOMa, AyMaio a h hay k yAodHOiviy Kpecjiy.
Ho BOT OriHTb CJIblLLiy 3a3BOHHJI TejiecjooH!
— Ajijio!
— MopH? riOMeMy y Teda tbroh HenpHarabin ronoc? Tbi
npocTy/Kena? — CAbimy a He3HaKOMbift tqjioc no TejietjiOHy.
— 3to ne Mapn roBopnT. y TeaeÔHa Toivrac Bap. —
— Bauia cfiaMHJiHa Bap! JX& mto bh rOBopAre! % no3HaKOMH-
jiacb c rocnoAHHOM BapoM b npowjiyio cyddoTy Ha npneMe y
AOKTopa HexoBa. H Tax paAa HMeTb B03M0>KH0CTb noroBopHTb
c bsmh. H ?aK MHoro o Bac cjibimaaa... —
— npocTHre, roBOpio a. — Pa3peniHTe mhc BaM cKa3aTb,
HTO a IIC TOT rocnoAHH Bap. H He 31-iaKOM C AOKTOpOM HeXOBbIM
h b npom.7iyio cyddoTy a dbui b tocthx y npocjieccopa fljKOHca.—
— Ax, npocTHTe, noacajiyftcTa. /Xo-CBHAaHHH. —
Bot iiaKoi-ieii, a ceji b cboc Kpecjio, oTKpbiji KHHry h onaTb
ceiiaac-ace ycjn>ima./i sbohok. Hy, h acH3Hb! H noMHio, Kai< moh
MflTb BcerAa roBopHJia: «B tocthx xopomo, a AOMa Jiymue». He
3hhk), upasa jih dbura OHa.
— Ajijio! Koro nonpocHTb k Te-iiecJioHy?
BOCEMHAflUATblfl YPOK
EIGHTEENTH LESSON
Plural Declension of the Masculine, Neuter, and Feminine

Nouns — Declensional Peculiarities of the Masculine
Noun: -plural in -a; irregular genitive plural —
Impersonal expressions (cont.) — Cardinal
numerals 5-12; cKOJibKO, Majio,
MHoro (genitive plural)
Y3HaTb pacrmcaHMe noesAOB To find out the train schedule

(timetable)
KaKHM noe3AOM MHe exaxb? Which train am I to take?
Exaxb cKopbiM noe3AOM To take an express train
OnoaMxb Ha noesA To be late for the train
Korjxa oxxoahx noe3A? When does the train leave?
AaTb 3Haxb To notify
Haxb, nojiynHXb xejierpaMiwy To send, receive a telegram
CAaxb b 6ara>K To check the luggage
Toiwy Ha3ajx Ago
Ceftnac H<e Immediately
II. READING: TEJ1EFPAMMA M3 MOCKBbI

Bqepa h nojiymhi xejierpaMMy ot TOBapHineft H3 Mockbw:
«>KAeM TBoero npHe3Aa».
H c TOBapuinaiviH ne BCTpeqajicn MHoro MecnpeB, Mbi 6biah
AaBHo 3HaKOMbi. Mli BMecTe yqHJiHCb b niKOJie. B npa3AHHKH Mbi
BcerAa BMecTe xoahah b My3en, xeaTpbi, khho, a BeuepaMH1 mbi
ak>6hah qnTaTb xcypHajibi hah CAywaTb paAHO.
riocAe uikoabi nexp h AAexceH noAyuHAH padoxy b MocKBe,
a a b JleHHHrpaAe.
MHe KamexcH, naxb hah uiecxb MecniteB TOMy na3a£ a Harm-
caA hm, hto MHe He HpaBHxcH moh pa6oxa. 3Aecb Ha 3aBOAax
MexaHHKH noAyqaiOT mbao, a padoTaiOT ACBHTb uacoB b achb.
1 BeqepaMH (instr.) or no BenepaM (dat.) indicates the habitual or

repeated nature of an action.
158
EIGHTEENTH LESSON 159
A, -KpoMe Toro, h CKyuaA 6es TOBapHiueft h MHe xoxejiocb xcHTb

C HHMH B MoCKBe.
H 6hji oqeHb AOBOJieH rejierpaMMoii 1 h 3

cefinac »e ito bohha
Ha BOK3aji y3HaTt> pacnwcaHHe noesAOB. KoHeuHo, paHO eme
AyMaTb, k3kmm noeaAOM MHe exaib! JXo orbe3Aa MHe HyjKHo
yjioxdiTb Bee Beuj,H b neMOAaHbi ,h OTnpaBHTb cyHAyKH. Ha
pa66Te h AOJi>KeH norosopHTb c AHpeKTQpOM. KpoMe toto, MHe
HaAO AaTb 3HaTb X 03 3
HHKe, HTO H yC >KaK) H HTO KOMHaTa MHe
pojibuie He Hy}KHa.
B nHTHHpy yrpoM, Bee fotobo k OT*be3Ay. H npomaiocb c

xo3HHKoft, 6epy qeMOAaHbi h eAy Ha B0K3aA.
Ha BOK3a.Ae TOJina, myM ... He sHaernt, kto yesxtaeT, kto

npnehxcaeT. Bee oAHHanoBo cnernaT, cnopHT c HOCHAbm,HKaMH,
6ohtch ono3Aaxb Ha noe3A.
CerOAHH Ha BOK3aJie MJUIO HOCHAblAHKOB. Ho y MeHH XOJIbKO

ABa HeMOAaHa H MHe HOCHJIbLLI,HKH He HyHCHbl. OaHH qeMOAAH H
CAaio b 6ara>K, oahh 6epy b BaroH.
Me}KAy Mockboh h JlenuHrpaAOM xopomee cooSmeHHe, h
noe3Aa HAyx uacTO. H no eAy ckopwm noesAOM, np«MO b MocKBy.
fi noxynaio Ghjicx. Tenepb mo>kho Aaxb xejierpaMMy TOBapumaM!
III. VOCABULARY
6ara>K baggage HQCMJIblUHK porter
6hji6x ticket oxAejieHHe department
BaroH carriage OXT>e3A departure
BMecxe together npHe3A arrival
BOK33A station COAAaX soldier
AHpenxop director cnopx sport
KJiacc class cyHAyn trunk, box, chest
KpoMe xoro besides that, xeaerpaMMa telegram
moreover neMOAaH suitcase
iilKOAa school
Verbs
6paxb; 6epy, B3HTb; B03bMy, to take

Sepenib, 6epyx B03bMeiHb, B03bMyX
HpaBHXbCflJ HpaBAIOCb, noHpaBHXbcn; I. to please, to

HpaBHLUbCH, HpaBHXCH (HpaBHXbCfl) like; P. to
get (begin)
to like
1 Instrumental case with AosoJieH.

160 BOCEMHAJIUATbiri yPOK
oinpaBjiaib (I) oxnpaBHXb; oxnpaBjiio, to send off

oxnpaBHiub, oxnpaeax
nojiyuaTb (I) nojiyHHXb; nojiyqy, to receive, get

nojiyHHUib, nojiynax
npomaTbCH (I) npocxHXbCH; npomycb, to say goodbye,

(Use this verb with npocxHuibca, npocxsixcn farewell (to)
c (co) and the instr.)
câsaTb (naBaib) câxb (naTb) to give up,
cheek, rent
yKJia^bieaxb (I) yjioiKHTb, yjio>Ky, to pack (one’s
yjio>KHiiib, yjioiKax belongings)
ysnaBaxb; y3Haio ysnaxb (I) to recognize
y3Haeuib, ysnaiox
yXOAHXb (XOAHTb) yfixH (hath) to leave, go away
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Regular plural declension of the masculine, neuter, and

feminine nouns
plural endings of the three genders being identical or

closely related, the three declensions are here juxtaposed for
convenient reference and memorization:
MASCULINE1
Hard Soft Soft

Nom. CTO JIM My3eH Aohah
Gen. CTOJIOB My3eee AOKAeft
Dat. CTOJiaM My3eflM AOJKAHM
Aec. CTOJIbI My3ew AO)KAH
Instr. CTOJiaMH My 3 e amh AOHAAMH
Prep. dojiax My3enx AO)KAHX
1 Observe Vowel Mutation Rule and remember that the accusa¬

tive plural of animate masculine nouns is like their genitive.
NEUTER
Hard Soft Soft

Nom. MecTa nojiH SAaHHH
Gen. MeCT nojieii sAaHHi
Dat. MecTaM nOJIHM 3AaHHHM
Ace. MecTa nojia 3AaHHH
Xnstr. MeCTAMH nOJIHMH 3AaHHBMH
Prep. MecTax nojiax 3AaHHBX
FEMININE
Hard Soft Soft Soft
Nom. KOMHaTH HeêjiH ABepM $aMHJIHH

Gen. KOMHaT HeAeJib ABepeii
Dat. KOMHaraM HeAejiHM ABepMM (JiaMHJIHMM
Acc. KOMHaTbl HeAejiH ABepM 4)aMHJIHH
Instr. KOMHaraMM HeAejiHMH ABepHMH 4)aMHJIHHMH
Prep. KOMHarax HeAeîax ABepMX (jDaMHJIHHX
B. Declensional peculiarities of the masculine noun

in the plural
1. Nominative plural:
In the nominative plural (and accusative with inanimate
nouns), several masculine nouns have the ending -a when hard
and -a when soft (instead of -w and -h, respectively), with the
stress on that ending:
Nom. Sing. Nom. and Acc. PI. Nom. Sing Nom. and Acc. PI.
eeqep Benepa evening ropOA ropOAa city
rjia3 rjiasa eye AOM AOMa house
Jiec Jieca forest noe3A noe3Aa train
roAOc roAOca voice
The more important animate nouns of this type are:

ôKTOpa/oe; npoc|)eccopa/-6B; yqHTejifl/-eii. (Nominative plural
ending -a, accusative and genitive plural -ob.)
Note that with this type of noun, in the plural, the stress
is always on the ending: AOMa, aomob, aom&m, etc.
162 BOCEMHAJIUATblH YPOK
2. Genitive plural:
a. Several masculine nouns have for their genitive plural

a form which is exactly like the nominative singular. The more
important of these are: pas “once, one time”; cojsAax “soldier”;
rjias “eye.”
b. Masculine nouns the stem of which ends in -q, -m,

-m have the ending -eft in the genitive plural (instead of ~ob) :
Nom. Sing. Gen. PI.
KapaHâui KapaHAauieft pencil

TOBapHiu TOBapHiueft comrade
c. Masculine nouns the stem of which ends in -u and

which do not have the stress on the ending, take -es in the
genitive plural (instead of -6b) : Mecsm; Mecaues “month.”
3. Plural of AeHb: ahh, AHefi, ahhm, ahh, ahhmh, ahhx.
C. Impersonal expressions with the infinitive

Moikho [It is] permissible, possible
one may, one can.
Hejib3fl [It is] forbidden, impossible,
one may not, one cannot.
Haô or Hyxmo [It is] necessary, it is needed.
When used with the dative, these expressions acquire a

personal force:
MoiKHo MHe arpaTb b tchhhc? May I play tennis?

HeT, eaM Hejib3H HrpaTb b No, you may not play tennis.
TeHHHC.
MHe Hano (nyiKHo) hath I must (have to) go home.

AO'MOH.
Note that mao, HymHo express need or necessity. To

express obligation use aojdkch, AOJDKHa, aojdkhq, aojdkh&.
H aojdkch hath. I must (should, ought to) go.

Ohs AOJi>KHa unraTb. She must read.
Ohh aojdkhm paSoTaTb. They must work.
Note that AOJimee is always and h&ao is usually used with

verbs. With nouns, that is to express the need of something or
someone, use Hymen, HymHa, nymno, HymHbi (naAo cannot be
used in this context.):
Literal translation
Afae Hymen ctoji. I need a table. to me [is] necessary a table

EMy HymHa KHHra. He needs a book. to him. [is] necessary a book
Te6e Hymn© nepo. You need a pen. to you [is] necessary a pen
CryAeHTy HymHbi The student needs to the student [are] neces¬
KapaHAauiH. pencils. sary pencils
Note that here the predicate adjective, Hymen, -a -'o ,-bi,

agrees with the subject of the Russian sentence (ctoji, KHHra,
nepo, KapaHâuiH).
For the past and future of this construction, use proper
forms of GbiTb.
Bnepa MHe Hejib3fl 6biJio Yesterday I was forbidden to

HHTaTb. read.
KorM BaM mojkho 6yAex When will you be permitted
UHTaTb? to read?
Mne Haô (nyiKHo) 6bnio hath I had to go home.
AOMOH.
Mne Hymen 6yAer stot ctoji. I shall need this table.
MHe HymHw SyAyT KapaHAamH. I shall need pencils.
D. Translation of “to like”
“To like” is rendered by the verb HpasuTbcsi and the dative

construction:
Literal translation
Mhc HpasHTCH §Ta KHHra. I like this book. to me is pleasing

this book
3tot ctoji eil HpaBHTCH. She likes this table. to her is pleasing
this table
npotjieccopy HpaBHTCH The professor likes to the professor are
§TM mypHajibi. these journals. pleasing these
journals
164 BOCEMHAHUATWJ yPOK
Note that the English subject (I, she, professor) is placed

in the dative, and the direct object (book, table, journals) be¬
comes the subject of the Russian sentence, thus determining
person and number of the verb: KHHra (ctoji) HpauHTca;
^ypnajibi HpaBflTca.
HpaBHTbcsi should be used whenever the liking has been
established just prior to or at the moment of speaking about it:
O, §xa KapTHHa mhc Hpaemcsi. Oh, I like this picture!
(Seeing the picture for the first time.)
JliodHTb should be used:
a. when the liking is of longer standing:
J\a, §xy KapiMHy u jiio6jiio! Yes, I like this picture!
(A picture which one has known and liked for some time.)
b. generally with verbs:
SI juoSjik) HHxaxb. I like to read.
E. Cardinal numerals 5-12 and expressions of quantity1
1. Cardinals:
5 nHTb 8 eocewb 11 onfiHHanuaTb
6 uiecTb 9 jieBHTb 12 ABeHaAuaTb
7 ceMb 10 iiecsrrb
These numerals are followed by the noun in the genitive
plural: naxb ctojiob, uiecxb y^HTejieft, ceMb coAnaT, BoceMb pa3.
2. MHoro “many,” Majio “few,” cKOJibKO “how much,” “how
many” take the genitive plural: mhoxo cowt “many sol¬
diers”; Majio ctojiob “few tables”; CKOJibKO vHHxejieft “how
many teachers?”
V. QUESTIONS
1, Mto bh noayqn^H Bêpa ot TOBapmueft? 2. CKOJibKO

MecHueB bh He Bcxpeâjincb c TOBapamaMH? JIaBHo jih bm
3HaKOMBi? 4. Fê Bbi BMecTe yHHJiHCb? 5. rê bh dbisaJiH b
npa3AHHKH? 6. Uto bh aio6hah AeAaTb BeqepaMH? 7. FAe nojiy-
qHJiH padoTy rieip h AAeKceft? 8. Fac bh noAyHHAH padoTy?
9. noHCMy BaM He HpaBHJiacb Bama padoia? 10. Fac BaM xoTe-
jiocb acHTb? 11. KyAa bh ito3BOhhah y3HaTb pacnncaHHe no-
e3AOB? 12. O neM em,e paHo AyMaTb? 13. Uto eme hvjkho CAe-
1 For a listing of numerals, see Appendix II, Table VI.

jiaxb ao OTTbe3Aa? 14. C KeM Bbi aojdkhbi noroBopHTb Ha pa6oxe?

16. FOTOBO JIH BCe K OTT3e3Ay B ItHTHHUy? 17. CkOAbKO HOCHAb-
m.HKOB ceroAHH Ha BOK3aJie? 18. rioueMy Baivr ne HynteH HOCHJib-
iuhk? 19. Kyâ Bbi SepeTe oahh qeMOAaH? 20. KyAa Bbi cAaeTe
HeMOAan? 21. Kanoe cooSmeHHe mcLkav Mockboh h JleHHHrpaAOM?
22. FloeACTe ah bh ckophm noesAOM npaivio b MocKBy? 23. Hto
bbi noKynaexe hh BOKaajie?

Give the plural declension of the following nouns:
a. Masculines: aBXOMoSHAb, KOHuepx, xpaMBai, cxyaeHX
b. Neuters: co6paHHe, oOjiaKO, pyme, 06-bsiBjieHHe
c. Feminines -. MauiHHa, CKaxepxb, wcxopHfl, AepeBHH
d. Various genders: roCTb, pena, moct, apHH, gejio
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all plural nouns (with
the prepositions), giving their case and English meaning, as follows.*
OT TOBapumeft Genitive ‘‘from [my] friends"

C TOBapnmaMH Instrumental “with [my] friends"
b. Change bold face words to the plural:

1. Ho yjiHite rneji coAAax. 2. OceHbto qacxo hacx aojkab.
3. 51 xoqy OTnpaBHTb cyHAyK majioh cKopocTbio. 4. Ha BOK3aae
hct HOCHAbiUHKa. 5. H nojiyuHA reJierpaMMy aah yqHxeAH. 6. To-
BapHiu. ye3>KaeT Ha bokbaji 6e3 qeMOAaHa. 7. BeqepoM mh qacTO
xoahm b xeaxp. 8. 51 cefiqac eAy b rapaat 3a aBTOMoSHAew. 9. 3a
Aomom caA. 10. BttAex iioa HtypHSAOM. 11. B xeaxpe oqeHb AcapKO.
12. CeroAHH a roBopHA c MexaHHKOM o ero KAy6e. 13. MHe
cKyuHO AyMaTb 06 ypone. 14. 51 npomaiocb c npHflxeAeM.
c. Supply the correct plural endings:
1. J0[oMa Me>KAy 6aHK— h Mara3HH—. 2. .ZIoktop—' >KHByT

b peHTpe ropoAa. 3. IIoe3A—' AAyT npflMo b MocKBy. 4. Box
noe3A—' aah coAAaT—. 5. Mbi eAeM noe3AOM h bhahm ropoA—'
h Aec—'. 6. yqnxeA—' yqaT nac pyccnoMy H3biKy. 7 FIpoc|)ec-
cop—' h yqHTGA—' paSoTaiox b yHHBepcHTex—, a HHJKeHep—
h MexaHHK— Ha 3aB0A—. 8. Mbi ahdShm eeqep—' b KAy6e.
160 BOCEMHAAUATbiri yPOK
9. ypoK— pyccKOro H3biKa naM HpasHTca; mm oaeHb jiioShm

h3mk—10. rio Beuep—b pecTopaH— nrpaiox opKecxp—. 11. B
SojibLuoM KJiySe b yrjiax AHBaH— h na nojiy kobp—'. 12. B
npa3a;HHK— A«eM mh xoahm b My3e—, a BeuepOM b xeaxp—. 13.
ne 3Haro ero xoeapHm— h npHHieji—. 14. B ueuxpe ropOA—'
Mara3MH—, xeaxp—, Myse— h daHK—•
Use the appropriate Russian expression in the appropriate

tense in place of the English phrases in parentheses:
1. (May I) oOeâTb c BaMH? 2. (We have to) 6biTb Ha bok-

3ajie b ceMb uacoB senepa. 3. TyT, Ha napoxoAe (one cannot)
xopouio noo6ea.aTb. 4. $1 (must) no3BOHHTb saexpa coceAKe. 5.
(You did not have to) 3naxb 3TO cjigbo. 6. BpaT (ought to) Aaxb
TejierpaMMy oxuy. 7. (He may not) ono3Aaxb Ha no63a. 8. 3xh
neMOânbi (one can) CAaxb b 6ara>K. 9. (He had to) hath b uiKOJiy
BHepa. 10. (It is necessary) nnxb h ecxb xopouio. 11. 3Aecb (it is
possible) Kynuxb h in Jinny h nanbxo. 12. (Were you permitted)
nocMoxpexb, uxo ohh AeJiaiox? 13 (He needs) cxoji h Kosep.
14. (They will need) xjie6 h mhco. 15. (You will have to) noKa3aTb
eMy, KSK OXKpbIBaTb 3XOT CyHAyK.
Exercise with Grammar D
Supply the correct form of HpaBHXbCH or jno6im>. Give reasons

for your choice.
.
1 Bbi. My3biKy? 2. ToBapnmy He . moh KOMHara.
3. Zloierop MexoB BcerAa nbeT nail. Oh He.KO<$)e. 4. Oiett
ne ..... ona3AbiBaxb Ha noe3A. 5. JIctom mh . okhtb b ac-
peBHe. 6. Bpaxy ouenb.moh hobhA Koeep. 7. Ohh oueHb
. cboio Maxb. 8. Moefi noApyre . moh noean wjmna.
9. BenepOM nocjre cjiyxtSbi h__ cjiymaxb paAHO. 10. Mne.
ypOKH pyccKoro H3biKa.
Exercise with Grammar B and E
Write out the numbers in Russian and give the correct case
forms of the nouns in parentheses:
1. CKOJIbKO (MeCHu) Bbi 6bIJIK b MocKBe? 2. (7 mocha) TOMy

HasaA mh noJiyHHJiH nncbMo ot 6paxa. 3. Tyx, b BaroHe (9 coji-
Aarr). 4. CeroAHH Ha BOK3ajie msjio (hochjimuhk). 5. y MeHH
6biJio (5 KapaHâm). 6. B uiKOJie y Hero byzrer mhoto (TOBa-

pHiu). 7. KoTopbift qac? (6 qac). 8. CKOJibKO (pa3) 6 bum bh b
TeaTpe hjih b khho? 9. $ 6bui (2 pas) b TeaTpe h (8 pa3) b khho.
10. CKOJibKO y tc6h (rjia3). y mchh (2 rjia3). 11. PaSoTaeie Bbi
jiexoM b ca/iy (2 hjih 3 qac)? 12. Hey a paboTaio (5 qac)
h TOJibKO no BOCKpeceHbHM (2 hjih 3 qac).
1. I do not like my work in Leningrad. 2 [I] work like a

machine and receive very little [money]. 3. My friend works
in Moscow. 4. He wrote me that he works only five, six hours
and in the evening goes to museums, theaters, concerts, and
movies. 5. I also want to live and work in Moscow. 6. Today I
found out about the train schedule and know which train to
take. 7. I can go tomorrow morning by express to Moscow. 8. I
shall pack the things into the suitcases. 9. The trunks I shall
check; the suitcases I shall take into the car. 10. There is
always a crowd at our station and few porters. 11. But I shall
not need porters because I shall have only two suitcases. 12. I
shall take one into the car and one I shall check. 13. I shall
buy a ticket at the station and then send a telegram to my
friend: “Am arriving early this evening.” 14. I have not seen
my friend for many months and shall be very happy to see
him again.
B
1. Today is Saturday and on Saturdays my sister and I

always go to the new department store at the corner of
Uspenskaya Street. 2. We leave home (go away out of the house)
at exactly nine o’clock, have lunch at the restaurant in the
store, afterwards go to a movie, and are at home again at about
six or seven o’clock. 3. In the store we go from department to
department, talk with the saleswomen, and ask*them: “How
much are the radios and the television sets, the armchairs,
and the lamps?” 4. My sister needs rugs and lamps for her new
apartment; I need a new coat, and dresses, hats, and slippers.
5. “Sonya, do you like this blue dress?” I ask my sister. 6. “No,
Masha, I don’t like this dress; I love your old one, remember,
the black and (with) white one?” 7. “But how do you like
this red one?” 8. “Oh yes, this dress is beautiful; I like this
one very much! You must buy it! And it costs only eight
168 BOCEMHAJUIATblW YPOK
rubles! ” 9.1 ask the saleslady: “May I put on this dress? I like
it and want to buy it.” 10. “No,” the saleslady answers, “one
is not allowed (it is not permitted) to put on dresses in this
store; first one must (it is necessary to) buy them; this one
costs twelve rubles.” 11. “But I thought the dresses cost only
eight rubles! 12. Well, it does not matter, I like this dress and
must have it! 13. And so I give the twelve rubles and another
eleven rubles for (3a + acc.) a hat and two pairs of slippers.
14. And, of course, my sister buys a very expensive rug and
six lamps for her large apartment. 15. I do not even ask her
how many rubles she had to give for them. 16. At the restau¬
rant we just (only) quickly drink a cup of black coffee. 17.
It is already very late and we must hurry to the movie. 18. It
was nine o’clock, when we finaly were home again, exhausted
(tired ones) but happy.
AEBflTHAAUATblH YPOK
NINETEENTH LESSON
Irregularities in the plural declension of masculine nouns

(-aHHH, -hhhh; irregular plural) — Plural declension of
adjectives, hard and soft — Numerals (ordinals
1-12, fractions) and time expressions (clock)
I16e3A ono3jxaji Ha TpM nexBep- The train was three quarters

th naca of an hour late.
4acw cneuiaT, oxcxaiOT Ha... The watch is fast, is slow . . .
IlepeBOjxHxb CTpejiny To set the watch
Macbi npoGmm ... The clock has struck . . .
OxnpaBHXb Majiofl cKopocxbio To send by freight
CHHMaxb HOMep B rOCTHHMUe To take a room in a hotel
9L cTaji b onepe^b. I got into line, took my place
in the queue.
BnepeAH, no3aAH m©hm In front of me, behind me
«JlK)jxeHi nocMoxpexb, jxa ce6n To look at the people and to
noKa3axb.» show oneself; “To see and
be seen.”
II. READING: B MOCKBE
H raic pa a, hto h, HaKOHeu, b Mockbc! Mom noesA onoaAaji

Ha Tpw neTBepTH naca, ho Ha B0K3a;ie m«hh hhkto He Agraa.
ToBapHmH 6hah Ha padore h He motjeh mchh BCTpeTHTb.
51 noexaji npHMo b rocTHHHuy h chhji HOMep Ha hhtom
STaace. H3 OKHa Moeft KOMHaTbi 3aMeHaTejibHbift bha. Bot ohh
MOCKOBCKHe dyAbBapbi, napKH, AOMa ...
% ceftnac Ate norneji QCMaTpHBarb ropOA.
Ha yrjiy h cnpocHA MHAHHHOHepa:

— fAe KpacHan nAoinaAb?
— KpacHaa nAomaAb coBceM phaom, — otbctha oh. —
Hahtc npHMO, noTOM noBepHHTe b Tpexbio yAHHy HanpaBO h
Bxopois noBopor HaêBO dyAeT KpacHaa nAoinaAb.
H
nodAaroAapHA MHAHHHOHepa h nepe3 AecaTb MHHyx, h
dbiA yAce Ha KpacHOH njroiHaAH.
169
170 HEBflTHAHUATblFl YPOK
Bojibrnwe nacbi Ha Saiime KpeMJia noKa3biBajiH neTBepTb

qeTsepToro. 51 npOBepHJi BpeMfl Ha cbohx nacax. Ohm to cneuiaT,
to OTcraibT, Ohh noKaabiBa^H nojiOBHHy qexBepToro. 51 nepeeeA
CTpeJiny h norneji no nnomaAH.
Okojio M3B30JieH JleHHHa OBe>KHe, KpacHBbie UBeTbi. riepeA
MaB30jieeM TO.xna JiioAew. 51 cxaji b onepeAb.
B Tonne 6hjih h KpecTbflHe, h paOonne, h TypHCTbi anrAis-
qaHe. no njiomaAH nuia rpynna pe6ax,
BnepeAH Mena rpynna KpecxbHH. — Bbi OTKyAa, TOBapmun?
— CnpOCHJI H.
— H3 CnSnpH. Bot npnexajin «AK)AeH nocMOxpexb, Aa
ce6a noKa3aTb»!
— JXa, TyT Bbi cxynaTb He SyA^xe, TOBapnmH! — ycnbiman a
MonoAbie ronoca no3aAH. — Mbi bot y>Ke socbMofi AeHb ocMa-
TpnBaeM MocKBy. 3aMena.TejibHbin ropoA! Mbi HHKorAa He Ay-
MaJiH, hto b oahom ropoAe MOHceT 6biTb ctojibko KpacHBbix nap-
kob, cxojibKO 3aMenaTenbHbix My3eeB h TeaTpoB.
Hacbi Ha 6auiHe KpeMJiH npoCnAH 6es nexsepTH aeTbipe,
kotaa a Bonien b MaB30Jien JleHHHa.
IH. VOCABULAEY
OauiHH (e) tower HaAeso to the left

OyAbBap boulevard Hanpaeo to the right
BO>KAb (m.) leader nOBOpOT turn
rpOMKO loud(ly) npaBMAbHO correctly
rpynna group paSoHHfi worker
3aMenaxeAbHbiH» remarkable CAyHafi occasion
-aa, -oe CTaHUHH station
KaK TOAbKO as soon as CTOAbKO so much, so
MaB30Aeii mausoleum (+ gen.) many
MHAHUHOHep policeman CTpana country
MOCKOBCKHH Moscow (adj.) TypHCT tourist
-'an, -'oe 9TaiK floor
Verbs
6AaroAapHTb (II) noGAaroAapHTb (II) to thank

saKpbiBaib (I) j 3aKpbITb, 3aKpoio, to close, shut
3aKpoeuib, 3aKpOK)T
KAacTb (Lesson 5) nOAOlKHTb, nOAOlKy, to place, put
1 nOAOlKHUIb, nOAOlKAT
NINETEENTH LESSON 171
OCMaTpHBaTb (I) OCMOTpeib; OCMOTpK), to inspect, exa¬

OCMOTpHUIb, QCMOTpHT mine, sightsee
nepeeoAHTb, nepeBecTH, nepeseAy, to move, trans-
nepesoMty, nepeBeAeuib, nepeeeAyT fer, translate
nepesoAHiiib,
nepesoAHT
noBOpa^HeaTb (I) nosepHyTb; noeepHy, to turn
noBepHeuib, nosepHyx
oonpaBjiHTbcsi (I) nonpaBHTbCH, nonpaBJuocb, to get well
nonpaBHuibCH, nonpaBHTca improve
npOBepflTb (I) nposepHTb; npoBepio, to check
nposepHiub, npOBepHT
CHHMatb (I) CHSITb; CHHMy to take off, to
CHHMeiUb, CHHMyT rent
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Irregularities in the plural of masculine nouns
1. Masculine nouns ending in -aHHH and -hhhh drop the

syllable hh. Thus, aHrjiwqaHHH “Englishman” and KpecrbHHHH
“peasant” have the following plural declension, typical of this
type of nouns:
Norn. amvmnaHe KpecTbHHe
Gen. aHrjiHnaH KpeCTbHH
Dat. aHrjiHnaHaiw KpeCTbHHaM
Acc. aHrvmnaH KpeCTbHH
Instr. aHrjinnaHaMH KpeCTbHHaMH
Prep. aHrjinnaHax KpeCTbHHaX
Note particularly the nominative case ending -e and the
lack of ending in the genitive case.
2. Irregular plurals:
Singular Plural Plural Declension

'N. rocno,na
G. rocnoA
gentlemen,
rocno^HH Mr., Sir ) D. rocnojiaM
rocnona ladies, Mr.
rocno>«a Mrs., Lady) A. rocnoa
and Mrs.
I. rocnoaaMH
P. rocnojiax
AEBHTHAAUATblP! ypOK
Singular Plur al Plural Declension
rpawnaHHH citizen jrpaiKnaHe citizens like aHrjiHMaHe

1
rpa^Knamta citizeness
[N. acth
G. nereil
D. actum
child children ‘ A. Aexeil
I. ACTbMH
P. ACTflX
[like rocnona,
pe6axa
lads, fellows, J except that stress
peSeHOK child youngsters 1 remains on M
[throughout
MejioeeK man JIfOAH 3 people like AeTH

person
UBeTOK (+ O) flower UBeTbi flowers reg. like ctojih
[like ueeTbi, ex-

UBeT color he era colors t cept nom. and
[ace.: UBexa
B. Declension of the adjective in the plural
__ Soft~
All Genders
Nom. HOBbie nocîeAHHe

Gen. HOBbIX nocjieAHHx
Dat. HOBbIM nOCJieAHHM
Aec. Like Nom. or Gen. Like Norn, or Gen .4
Instr. HOBbIMH nocjieAHHMH
Prep. HOBbIX1 * 3 4 nocjieAHBx
1 rpawflaHKa has the plural rpawAamcH.

- The singular declensional forms' are rare. They are: ahth, ahtath,
AHTflTH, AHTfl, AHTHTeiO, flHTMTH.
3 When counting, the singular or plural genitive of HejioBeK is used:
Three, six people were in our room.
ipit nejiOBeKa ]
6&jio b Harnefi komhetc.
Uiectb HCJlOBeK I
4 Like nominative when modifying an inanimate noun; like geni¬
tive when modifying an animate noun.
3 For Vowel Mutation Rules see p. 31.
Adjectives ending in -6ft (mojioaoh) are declined exactly

like HOBbiH, the stress, however, always falling on the ending.
C. Numerals and time expressions

1. Ordinals 1st - 12th:1
1st nepebifi, -'an, -'oe 7th ceAbMofi, - an, - oe
2nd Bxopofi, -an, -6e 8th BOCbMOfi, - an, -oe
3rd TpeTHfl, -'fan, -'be 9th ACBflXblfi,
-'an, -'oe
4th qexsepxbii, -'an, -'oe 10th Aecnxbifi,-'an, -'oe
5th nnxbiii, -'an, -'oe 11th oAHHHaAuaxbifi, - an, _ - oe
6th mecxofl, - an, - oe 12th ABeHaAUaxbiil, -an, -oe
Ordinals, except Tpe™ii, are declined like adjectives in -wit
or -oh, depending on the ending:
nepBbii, nepBoro, nepBOMy, etc.
Bxopofi, Bxoporo, BxopOMy, etc.
2. Declension of xpexHii:
Singular Singular Singular Plural, All

Masc. Neut. Fem. Genders
Nom. Tpexisfl TpeTbe TpeTbn TpeTbK

Gen. xpexbero Tpexbero Tpexbei TpeTbHX
Dat. TpeTbeMy TpexbeMy TpeTbeii TpeTbHM
Ace. Nom. or Gen. TpeTbe TpeTbK) Nom. or Gen.
Instr. xpexibHM TpeTbHM TpeTbefl TpeTbHMH
Prep. TpeTbCM TpeTbCM TpeTbeii TpeTbHX
3. Fractions:2
qexeepxb naca (genitive singular of nac) quarter of an hour
HexeepXb 4>yHxa (genitive singular of 4)yHX) quarter of a pound
noJiHaca (gen. sing.) half an hour
nOJlcj>yHTa (gen. sing.) half a pound
xpH qexsepXH3 qaca three quarters of an hour
TpH qexeepxH (Jjynxa three quarters of a pound
1 Most ordinals are formed by dropping the -h of the cardinal and

adding the endings -wft or -oft. Ordinals agree with their noun in
gender, case, and number.
2 a complete systematic treatment of the complicated topic of
fractions exceeds the scope of this elementary text. Therefore a
strictly functional approach is used.
s HfeTBepTH is the genitive singular of aeTBepTb, which is declined
like ABepb.
174 JlEB^THAÛATHPl YPOK
4. Time Expressions:
KOTOpblfi Mac? What time is it?

no MOHM Macaiw ... By my watch. . . .
qac homh 1:00 A. M.
qeTbipe uaca yxpa. 4:00 A. M.
uiecTb qacoB Benepa 6:00 P. M.
oji.HHHaiiiJ.aTb qacoB yxpa 11:00 A. M.
ojUiHHajmaTb qacoB Beqepa 11 ;00 P. M.
3 ,6
B J .B HajUl.aTb MaCOB J3HH )
>at noon
b noJijieHb )
B ABCHdAliaTb MaCOB HOMH 1 m{dniU
B nOJIHOMb )
Quarter past the hour:
12:15 qeTBepxb nepeoro 2:15 MeTBepTb TpeTbero
1:15 MeTBepTb Bxoporo 3:15 MexsepTb MCTBepxoro
Half past the hour:
4:30 nojioBHHa naxoro 6:30 nojioBHHa cejibMdro
5:30 nojioBHHa mecxoro 7:30 nojioBHHa BoebMoro
Quarter to the hour: 10:45 6ea MexeepTH
8 :45 663 MeXBepTH JieBJTTb OAMHHajmaxb
Note that in Russian one always refers to the coming hour:
whereas we say: “quarter past one,” the Russian literally says:
“quarter of the second hour” (Bxoporo); whereas we say: “half
past two,” the Russian says: “half of the third hour” (TpeTb¬
ero) ; whereas we say “quarter to three” (in this case also look¬
ing to the coming hour), the Russian literally says: “without
a quarter three,” and so forth.
VOCABULARY BUILDING
Perfective Verbs
Perfective with the

Imp erf. Prefix C English
(AejiaTb) cjtejiaTb (I) to do, complete
(ecTb) CbeCTb to eat up, consume
conjugated like ecTb
(yMexb) cyMexb to know how, contrive
conjugated like yMeTb
(MOUb) CMOMb1 to "be able
conjugated like MOMb
1 In the future tense, only cmohi. is used (never Moab with 6hts) :
a cMory, Tbi cMoiKeuib, etc. (never a 6yjry mo^b, etc.).
With the Prefix npo
(qHTaTb) npoqnxaxb (I) to read through

nponecTb; npoqxy, to read through
npoqxeuib, npoqxyx
npoqeA, nponaa, npoMAH read through
V. QUESTIONS
1. PzUbi ah Bbi, htq Bbi HaKoneii b MocKBe? 2. Ha ckojibko

ono3AaJi Barn noe3A? 3. noqeMy TOBapHinH Bac He acasah Ha
BOK3ajie? 4. Kyâ bh noexajiH c BOK3ajia? 5. Kanon bha H3 okhh
Bameft KOMHaTbi? 6. Kyâ bh noiiiAH H3 rocTHHHHbi? 7. Koro
bh cnpocHJiH, i\n;e KpacHan nAOinAAb? 8. KaK BaM Haô 6hao
hath Ha KpacHyio riAomaAb? 9. Fê Bbi 6hah qepe3 Aecaitb
MHHyT? 10. KoTopbiH qac noKa3HBaAH SoAbHiHe qacbi Ha Saurne
KpeMAH? 11. noqeMy bh npOBepHAH BpeMH na cbohx qacax?
12. rioqeMy bh nepeseAH CTpeAKy Ha cbohx qacax? 13. Uto bh
yBHASAH okoao MaB30AeH JleHHHa? 14. Nto bh yBHASAH nepeA
MaB30AeeM JleHHHa? 15. noqeMy bh cthah b oqepeAb? 16. Kto
6ha b TOAne? 17. Kto me a no nAomaAH? 18. Kto 6ha BnepeAH
Bac? 19. Mto bh hx cnpocHAH? 20. JIah qero KpecTbHHe npnexaAH
b MocKBy? 21. O qeM roBOpHAH moaoahc ak>ah n03aAH Bac?
22. Ckoabko BpeMeHH ohh ynce ocMaTpHBaioT MocKBy? 23. /JyMaAH
ah ohh hto b oahom ropOAe MOAceT 6htb CTOAb'KO 3aMeqaxeAb-
hhx My3eeB, TeaxpOB h ctoabko KpacHBbix napKOB? 24. KoTopbift
qac npoSHAH qacbi Ha 6anme KpeMAH, xorAa bh bo hi ah b MaB30-
Aeft JleHHHa?
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all irregular 'plural

nouns (given in Grammar A.), giving their case and English
meaning and the corresponding singular form, as follows (9 forms
in all) :
UBexbi Nominative “flowers” Ubctok

JHOAeft Genitive “people” qejioBeica
b. Translate the English words in parentheses:
1. Ohh CBoSoAHbie (people). 2. Mbi KynnAH aBTOMo6HAb aah

moaoahx (people). 3. Mh roBOpHAH Becb Beqep o pyccKHX
176 JlEBHTHAJlUATbM YPOK
(people). 4. K BeceJibiM (Englishmen) npuexajra npHJrrejm. 5. y

pyccKHx (peasants) Bcerâ mhoto paSoTH. 6. 3th (citizens)
rOBOpHT no-pyccKH. 7. Oh HAeT no ruiomaAH c (youngsters).
8. PyccKHe (citizens) jiioSht Pocchio. 9. B ca/ty 6 hah KpacHBbie
(flowers). 10. (The colors) ijBeTQB SbiJiH oueHb npacHBH. 11. 51
Hanncaji HaineMy HHHceHepy o aomc (of Mr. and Mrs.) OeTpoBbix.
12. CyHAyKH (of the Englishmen) eme Ha B0K3aae. 13. 51 3Hato
ee (children) oueHb xoporno. 14. Oh4 nonuia c (children) b
khho. 15. Ohh cepbe3Hbie (youngsters)! 16. Buepa h roBOpHJi c
pyccKHMH (citizens), c (peasants), c mraceHepaMH, aoktop&mh,
yuHTejiHMH. 17. OueBH/tHO Bee (children) ceroAHH b WKOjie.
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all plural adjectives

giving their case and English meaning, as follows (7 adjectives in
all) :
MOCKOBCKHe Nominative “Moscow’' (adj.)
b. Change all bold face words into the plural:

1. Bot 3aMe*raTejibHfoiM aom. 2. CeroAHH y mchh ecTb xopo-
uiHfi SHjiex b TeaTp. 3. >KHBy okojio Qojibuioro napKa. 4. MHe
cKyHHO xtHTb b MocKBe 6e3 xopomero TOBapHma. 5. HaM He
HymeH mioxoit HHxceHep. 6. 51 Bceiyta e3tKy 3a noKymtaMH b AOpo-
rofl MarasHH. 7. 51 jhoSjiio cbcikhm AeHb. 8. $1 xony
yuHTbCH b hobom yeMeepcHiexe. 9. Mne npHHTHo exaTb Ha
YAoShom aBTOMoSHAe. 10. 51 HAy b napx c MaAeHbKHM peSeHKOM.
11. B TpaMBae mbi chamh Meat Ay aMMinficKHM rypHCTOM h pyc-
ckhm pa66HHM. 12. Saesixoft rocnoAHH HHKorAa He HHxaex mo-
CKOBCKOro xtypHaAa. 13. Te6e 6yAeT cxyuHo Ha Aaue b a©>kajih-
Bbifl AeHb. 14. 51 HanncaA xosapHiny o nocjieAHeM npneMe b AOMe
rocnoAHHa riexposa (rieTpoBbix). 15. Mm MHoro 3HaeM o pyccKOM
BOiKAe. 16. Ido nAomaAH meA MaAeHbKHfi pedeHOK c mqjioawm
yuHTeaeM. 17. KaKofl Kpachebii uBexon! 18. MHe HpaBHxcsi erd
ueex!
e. Give the full declension (singular and plural) of the following
expressions:
1. nocJieAHHH, jieTHHh AeHb. 2. PyccKHH uejioBeK. 3. MaAeHb-

khh peSeHOK. 4. Moaoaoh aHrAnuaHHH. 5. KpacHBHH useTOK.
a. Change the cardinal numerals to ordinals, for example;
OaHH MHJIHHHOHep to FlepBbllt MHJIHHHOHep

1. Oahq Kpecjio. 2. JlBt 3HMLi. 3. Tpn njiaTbH. 4. UeTbipe

CJiynan. 5. IThtb paAHO. 6. UlecTb 3aBOAOB. 7. CeMb dHJieTOB.
8. BoceMb ypoKOB. 9. XleBHTb MecHiies. 10. TfecHTb cojiast,
b. Give the Russian of the ordinals in parentheses:

1. Oh TyT Ha 3aBOAe (1st) MexaHHK. 2. y Mena HeT (2nd)
wjianbi. 3. H ono3AaA Aa>ne k (3rd) noe3Ay! 4. H He BHAty (4th)
6HJieTa. 5. Hahtc npHMO b (5th) Baron. 6. H npnexaA na BOK3aA
nepeA (3rd) sbohkom. 7. BpaT ctsa b ouepeAb b (8th) pas.
8. Mbi chhjih KOMHaTy Ha (9th) STaaee. 9. homhk) bto MecTO
b (5th) ypoKe. 10. JXtKk6pb (12th) Mecnu roaa.
c. Express in Russian:
(1) 2:00 A. M. ; 4 :00 P. M.; 7 :00 P. M. ; 10 :00 A. M.
(2) Quarter past six (6 :15); 5 :15; 2:15 ; 8 :15.

(3) Half past nine (9:30); 8:30; 7:30; 4:30.
(4) Quarter to two (1:45) ; 6:45; 5:45; 2:45; 12:45.
d. In the following sentences give the Russian of the expressions

in parentheses. Write out all numerals in full.
1. H 6yAy y sac (in five minutes). 2. BpaT ono3AaJi Ha (two

hours). 3. Ee nacbi cnernar Ha (ten minutes). 4. Ero uacbi oTCTa-
k>t Ha (quarter of an hour). 5. Mbi oSeAaeM (at 12:30). 6. Bbi
SyzteTe Ha BOK3ajie (at 2:45 P. M.) ? 7. ToBapHiim eayT b ropOA
(in 45 minutes). 8. BeuepOM AOKTOp ejiei b rocnHTaab (for 2 or
3 hours). 9. npneAy AOm6h (in half an hour). 10. Mbi 6yAeM
Ha KpacHOH haom,bah (at 3:45) 11. Bbiao (5:00) KorAa mm
boihah b MaB30Aen JIsHHHa. 12. MHJiHUHOHep Ha yrjiy (checked
the time) y ce6H Ha uacax. 13. (“What time is it?”), cnpaiHHBaeT
MHAHHHOHepa KpecTbHHHH. 14. (“It is a quarter to four”), OTBe-
uaeT oh. 15. OHa Kymlaa (quarter of a pound) Macjia h (half a
pound) MHca. 16. >KAaa He toabko (half an hour), a (three
quarters of an hour).

A
1. We had often seen Moscow, the Red Square, and the

tomb of Lenin (JleHHHa) in the movies. 2. But now we did not
178 UEBHTHAUUAim YPOK
know how to get (go) from our hotel to the square. 3. We had
arrived in Moscow (Mh npnexajm b Mockby) at quarter to eight
this morning. 4. Our train had been a quarter of an hour late.
5. We went immediately to the hotel and took a room there.
6. We had breakfast, and at half past nine we went to see
(sightsee) the city. 7. There, at the corner, was a policeman.
8. “Tell us please: where are the Kremlin and the Red Square?”
9. The policeman looked at us and asked: ‘Where are you
from? Are you English (Englishmen)? How long have you
been here (are you already here)?” 10. Then he told us: “The
Kremlin and Red Square are right close by. Go straight ahead,
then turn left and there will be the square.” 11. We thanked
the policeman and within five minutes we were on the square.
12. In front of Lenin’s tomb was a big crowd. 13. When we got
into line, the big clock on the tower of the Kremlin struck
eleven. 14. I checked [my] watch, because it is always slow; it
showed 10:45; I set it. 15. It was already 12 o’clock when we
entered the mausoleum.
1. Yesterday we drove to the little old station of Blinsk to

find out the train schedule and to buy tickets. 2. We wanted to
take an express train; there was only one from (h3) Blinsk to
Leningrad, at 5:15 in the morning, and we decided to take it.
3. My brother wanted to buy first class tickets (tickets of first
class), but that was impossible because we had only twelve
rubles, and we needed three tickets. 4. We had to buy second
class tickets, but it’s all the same to me how I shall travel
to Leningrad — first, second, or even third class (instr.).
5. Then we sent a telegram to notify our friend in Leningrad
that we would (shall) arrive there on Friday at eleven o’clock
in the morning. 6. Now everything is ready for our departure.
7. We have notified our landlord that we are leaving (driving
away) at five o’clock on Friday morning, and that we do not
need his two rooms any longer. 8. We have packed our last
belongings (things) into very expensive, beautiful, and new
suitcases and trunks. 9. The four suitcases we take with us into
the train (train carriage), but the very large trunks we are
sending by freight. 10. Last night I slept very badly. At mid¬
night I asked my brother, “What time is it?” 11. For a long
time he did not even answer, but finally he said: “Peter, what
[is the matter] with you? It is still very early, by my watch
only quarter past twelve! Sleep and don’t talk!” 12. Finally,
at half past three we all got up, quickly dressed, drank a

cup of coffee, and drove to the station. 13. I was, of course,
afraid of being (to be) late for the train, but we were on time
(bo BpeMfl), since (because) from our house to the sta¬
tion it is not far at all: one drives three minutes straight ahead
along (no & dat.) Blinskaya Street, turns right into the fourth
street, and there is (bot) the station. 14. When we arrived
at the station, the large, old clock on the station building was
just striking five o’clock. 15. At exactly 5:15 our train left Blinsk
and at 11:00 we arrived at Leningrad and suddenly caught
sight of the huge station. 16. At the station there was a large
crowd of people. 17. In front of our car there were children with
flowers in their hands, and groups of [factory] workers and
peasants. 18. They were meeting a group of Englishmen; every¬
body was talking, laughing, and hurrying. 19. At last our friend
Ivanov caught sight of us. He was very happy to see us and
drove off with us in a taxi to his beautiful home. 20. Here we
shall live almost two weeks, from this Friday until Tuesday
of next week. 21. We shall sight-see the entire city, its famous
boulevards and buildings, museums, and theaters, its remark¬
able bridges over the river Neva, its enormous squares and
beautiful parks. 22. Yes, we shall not be bored in this city and
our twelfth day will be as (rafOfce) interesting as the first.
180 AEBflTHAAUATblPl ypQK

Based on the vocabulary and grammar oj the preceding lessons
M. n. AHAPEEB
CeMb MecHiteB TOMy Ha3aA MHxaftji IleTpoBHH AHApeeB

nojiynftji pa6oTy Ha SojibrnoM 3aBOAe HeAajiexo or ropoAa
JIoc-AmKeAeca b KajmcjDopHHH.
AHApeeB HHKorâ He jiio6hji Sojibiuhx ropOAOB, ho JIoc-
Amxejiec eMy oneHb noHpaBHACH: MHoro xpacftBbix aomob, caAOB,
6ojibiiiHx napKOB. Ectb Tax>xe h HHTepecHbie Mysen h xopomne
yHHBepcHTeTbi. KoHeqHO Aa>xe b Hecxoabxo AHeft Hejib3H
ocMOTperb Bcero ropoAa.
AHApeeB npexpacHbift MexaHHX. Oh paSoTaeT 6biCTpo h
xoporno h na 3aBOAe Bee hm AOBOJibHbi. AHApeeB Toxce aobojich
CBoeft paGoxoft. Oh AOBOJieH h HacaMH paSoTbi h cbohmh
HOBbIMH TOBapHipaMH.
AHApeeB chhji aom HeAajieKO or 3aBOAa h HeAaaexo ot cbohx
hobhx TOBapHipeH. 06biKHOBeHHO, Bee paSoHHe SToro 3aBOAa
ACHByx TaM. AoMa paSoHiix npoerbie, ho yAo6Hbie: y Bcex aomob
ecTb rapaxoi, noroMy hto y Bcex paSoHHx ecxb cboh aBTOMOdftjm,
— a nepeA AOMaMH — He6ojibmfte caAM, rAe BcerAa MHoro
KpacHBbix AB0TOB.
AHApeeB, ero atena h hx a£th aMepuxaHcxHe rpaxtAaHe. Aah
AeTen ecTb xopoman mxojia HeAaJiexo ot AOMa; edb Taxxce
ropoACKHe napxn, rAe pe6ftTa MoryT HrpaTb ijejibift AeHb.
>KeHa AHApeeBa paAa 6buia y3HaTb, hto coBceM phaom ecTb
mhoto xopouiHx Mara3HHOB h eft He hjoxho 6yAeT AaJiexo e3AHTb
3a noxynxaMH. KpoMe roro eft oneHb HpaBHTca hx HOBbie coceAH.
Ohh MHHbie H npHHTHbie JIIOAH, - a Tax Ba}KHO HMeTb XOpQIHHX
coceAeft, KorAa HMeenib MaaeHbXHx AeTeft! AHApeeB >xe pa a, hto
BenepaMH c coceAHMH moxcho noHrparb b xapTbx hjih norOBOpftTb.
— Mbi aojukhbi xancAbift AGHb 6jiaroAapHTb Bora 3a to, hto
mh Tax xopomo achbcm! — roBopftT ixeHa AHApeeBa Myacy h
AeTHM. HnxorAa Hejib3H 3a6biBaTb, hto He Bee Tax cnacTAHBbi
xax mbi! —
ABAAUATblfl ypQK
TWENTIETH LESSON
Declensional peculiarities of the neuter noun in the plural:

plurals in -a; in -h; genitive infix; plural of oaepo — Plural
of the possessive pronoun-adjective; pronoun adjectives
TaKoft, KaKoft, KOTopbift, Heft — Date expressions
B nepBbix HHCJiax... In the first days of . . .

Ilpojioji>KaTb oOpaaoBaHwe To continue (one’s) educa¬
tion
IlOCTynHTb B yHHBepCHTeT To enroll at a university
IIocTynHTb Ha OTAeaewHe ... To enroll in the department
of . . .
OKOHHHTb Me^HUHHCKHft To graduate from Medical
4>aKyjibTeT School
IIOJiyHHTb JUUUIOM To receive (earn) a diploma
Ha K)pHjiMHecKOM âKyjibrexe In the Law School (faculty
of Law)
npH yHHBepcHxexe At the university
Ms pasHbix cxpaH From various countries
«yneHHe — caex, a HeyneHHe — xbMa!»
“Knowledge is light; ignorance is darkness!”
II. READING: HOBblH yHHBEPCHTET
6
OceHbK), b nepBbix HHCJiax ceHX« pH, b HarneM roporte ot-
KpBiBaeTca hobhh yHHBepcHTex. JXjik HacejieHHH Harnero ropoâ
3to dojibuioe codbiTHe. C OTKpbiTHeM yHHBepCHTeTa Ham ropo/i;
3 3
aftMeT nojioHceHHe qahofo h KyabTypHbix ueHxpoB crpaHbi!
Bnepa Ha codpamra b mo eft iHKOJie h AOKJian;: «Ham

yHHBepcHTeT». HauiHM pedaraM oneHb noHpaBHjica moh ÔKJiaa.
B 3TOM AOKJiaAe h oS'bhchhji mohm TOBapHiuaM, hto yneHHe
oneHb BaxcHoe 3aHHTHe.
HaM HyxcHbi yneHbie, HHxceHepbi, MexaHHKH h AOKTopa. Be3

3
hx HaHHft HaniH padoHHe He cMoryT padoTaTb Ha HaiiiHX aBO- 3
,nax, a KpecTbftHe — Ha cbohx nojiax.
181
182 £BAHUATbIH ypQK
rioTOM a paccKa3aJi hm o hobom yHHBepcHTeTe, me a h moA

TOBapHmH SyêM npoAOAixaTb name o6pa30BaHne.
B yHHBepcHTeTe SyAeT nHTb hah mecTb 3AaHHH. B hobbix

3AaHHHX 6yjxyr 6oAbiiiHe OKHa, 6yn;eT mhoto B03Ayxa n MecTa
aaa CTyêHTOB. 3aHHMaTbca b t3khx 3AaHHHx SyêT oqenb npn-
btho! npH yHHBepcHTeTe 6yAeT oboh 6H6jiHOTeKa.
B y-HHBepCHTeTe 6yaeT necKOJibKO omejieHHft. KaKHM npeA-

m6tom cTyaeHTbi 3axoTHT 3aHHMaTbc« — Ha to omejieHwe ohm
h nocTynHT. Saxoqeuib H3yuaTb SKOHOMHKy, — nocTynHUib Ha
9KOHOMHHecKoe OTAeAeHHe; SyAymne AOKTopa aoaxchisi okoh-
HHTb MeAHUHHCKHH c})aKyjIbTeT, a lOpHCTbl AOAHCHbl nOJiyHHTb
AHnjioM Ha ropHAHHecKOM 4)aKyjibTeTe.
3aHHTHH b yHHBepcHTeTe 6yayr c nHToro ceHTH6pa ao acch-

Toro hk)hh. ByAeT h acthkh ceMecTp c nHToro hioah ao uiecToro
aerycTa, EyayT, KOHeuHo, h npa3AHHKH. FIocAe 3K3aMeH0B, b
KOHAe KmAoro ceMecTpa, cryASHTaM AaioT HecxoAbKo AHefl ot-
ABixa.
B yHHBepcHTeTe 6yAyT npenoAaBaTb H3BecTHbie yuenbie.

npocjjeccopa npHeAyr k HaM H3 pa3Hbix CTpam H3 Ahtahh, H3
OpaHUHH ...
y^HTeAb noSAaroAapHA mchh 3a tbkoh xoponiHH aokaeU

h nonpocHA Hac Bcema noMHHTb:
«y»ieHbe ■— cbct, a Heynenbe — TbMa».
III. VOCABULARY
OyAymHM, future OTKpbITMe discovery

-a«, -ee noAOHceHHe situation
BaiKHblft, important npeAMeT object, subject
-'aa, -'oe ceMecTp semester, term
AHnAOM diploma coGwTHe event, occurrence
AOKAaA report CTyAeni student
3aAaqa problem, task yqeHHe learning, study
3aHHTMe classes, yqeHbifl savant, scientist,
occupation scholar
3H3HH6 knowledge ueHrp center
KyAbTypHblH, cultural 3K3£lMeH examination
-'aa, -'oe SKOHOMHKa economics
HaceAeHHe population lOpHCT lawyer, jurist
HeCKOAbKO some, several,
a few
TWENTIETH LESSON 183
Verbs
samiMaib (I) 3aHHTb; 3aHMy, to occupy

saliMeiiib, saiMyr
3aHHMaTbCfl (I) 3aHHTbCH (saHMTb) to study, be busy

(with)
3anoMHHaTb (I) 3anOMHHTb (II) to remember,
memorize
H3yqaxb (I) H3y4HTb; H3yqy, I. to study, learn ;
H3yHHuib, H3yqax P. to master
06’bflCHHTb (I) 06lbSICHHTb (II) to explain
OKaHHHBaTb (I) OKOHHHXbJ OKOHMy, to finish
OKOHHHLUb, OKOHqai
nocrynaib (I) nocxynHxb; nocxynjuo to enter, enroll, act

nocxynnuib, nocxynnx
irpenoâBaTb (aaBaxb) npenoâxb (a.axb) to teach, instruct
npOAOJIlKaTb (I) npoAOJixcHXb; to continue
npoAOJDKy,
npOAOJIlKMIlIb;
npOAOJixcax
paccKa3biBatb (I) paccKa3axb (cka3axb) to tell, narrate
Note: It is very important to know the cases which verbs

of learning and studying take:
yqHTbCH “to study, learn” takes the dative case when re¬
ferring to a field of study:
H ynycb pyccKOMy H3biKy. I study the Russian language.
When referring to a specific task, however, the accusative
is used:
51 yqy pyccKHH ypoK. I am studying the Russian
lesson.
Also note:
51 ynycb b yHHBepCHieTe. I am studying at the univer¬
sity.
184 jlBAHUATbltf yPOK
H3yMaTb “to study, learn (thoroughly) ” takes the accusa¬

tive and is never used without a direct object:
3
Ohm H y*iaH)T pyccKHH si3mk. They are studying Russian.
3aHHMaTbcfl “to occupy oneself with, study’* takes the

instrumental. It may be used without an object expressed:
Oh 3aHHMaeTCfl. Oh aaHHMaeTcsi He is studying. He is studying

pyccKHM H3biKOM. the Russian language.
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Declensional peculiarities of the neuter noun in the plural1
1. Neuter nouns ending in ->Ke, -He, -me, -me, -ue change si
of the endings to a:
cojiHue: cojiHiia, cojihu, cojiHuaM, coJiHua, etc. “sun”.
2. Neuter nouns the stem of which ends in two consecutive

consonants usually insert o or e in the genitive plural:
Nom. Bing. Gen. PI.

OKHO OKOH window
IIHCbMO IIHCeM letter
HHCJIQ HHC0JI number
The vowel to be inserted will be indicated in the vocabu¬

laries as follows: okho (o); nHCbMo (e); Kpecjio (e).
3. Neuter plurals in -h:
yxo: yuiH, yrneft, ymaM, yuiH, yiuaMH, ymax “ear”
ruieno: ruienH, njien, rnienaM, ruieHH, njienaMH, njieqax “shoulder”

hOjioko: hOjiokh, h6jiok, adaoKaM, h6ôkm, H6jiOKaMH, ndjioKax
“apple”
4. Plural of 03epo: 03epa, 03ep, 03epaM, 03epa, 03epaMH,

03epax “lake”
6. Pronoun-adjectives
1. Declension of the possessive pronoun-adjective in the

plural (for its declension in the singular see Lesson 14):
1 For a review of the regular declension of the neuter noun see

Lesson 18, p. 161.
All Genders
Nom. MOM TBOH CBOH HauiH BaillH
Gen. MOHX TBOHX CBOHX HaniHX BaniHX
Dat. MOMM TBOHM CBOHM HaillHM BailiHM
Acc. N. or G. N. or G. N. or G. N. or G. N. or G.
Instr. MOHMH TBOHMH CBOHMH HaiUHMH BaiUHMH
Prep. MOHX TBOHX CBOHX HaiUHX BaniHX
Remember that the pronouns ero “his, its,” ee “her, hers,”

hx “their, theirs” used as possessives do not change in form.
2. Demonstrative and interrogative pronoun-adjectives:
a. The demonstrative pronoun-adjective TaKoft, Tanaa,

xanoe “such a, such a one” is declined like an adjective in -oft :
Tanofi, Tanoro etc.
TaKofi, -6e is used in emphatic questions:

Kto §to TaKoft? Who is that?
Hto §to TaKoe? What is that?
b. The interrogative pronoun-adjective Kanoft, nanaa, naKoe

is translated by “which, what kind of, what sort of”:
KaKfte Macbi? What kind of watch?

It is declined like an adjective in -oft.
The interrogative pronoun-adjective KOTopbift, KoTopaa,

KOTOpoe is translated by “what, which, which one.”
KoTOpbift nac? What time? Lit.: Which hour?
KoTopoe ceronHsi hhcjio What date is today?
It is declined like an adjective in -bift.
c. The interrogative possessive pronoun-ad j ective Heft, hbh,

Hbe, Hbw “whose” is declined like xpeTHft: nefi, Hbero, HbeMy, etc.;
HbH, Mbeft etc.
Heft §tot iKypHaji? or 3xo nefl ncypnaji? Whose magazine is

it?
Hbsi 3Ta KHftra? or 3to Hbsi KHftra? Whose book is it?
Hbe §to nepo? or 3to Hbe nepo? Whose pen is it?
186 ABAfiUATblH yPQK
Sometimes the possessives are used instead, of forms

of Heft:
3xo tboh HiypHaji? [Is] this (it) your magazine?

3to Bauia KHHra? [Is] this (it) your book?
3xo hx nncbMO? [Is] this (it) their letter?
C. Date expressions
Koxopoe ceroAHH hhcao? What is the date (today) ?

Cer6a.Hn eropoe anpejia. Today is the second of April
Koxopoe hhcjio 6mjio enepa? What date was yesterday?
Bnepa 6bijio nepBoe1 anpeJifl. Yesterday was the first of
April.
Koxopoe hhcjio 6yAex 3aexpa? What date will tomorrow be?
3aexpa 6ya.er xpexbe anpejia. Tomorrow will be the third of
April.
“On” is expressed by means of the genitive of the ordinal,
thus:
Koxoporo HHCJia? On what date?
flaxoro Man On the fifth of May
HecHToro hiohh On the tenth of June
“From . . . to” is rendered by c . . . ao, both prepositions

being followed by the genitive:
C Tpexbero hiohh ao ceAbMor© From the third of June to the
hiojih seventh of July
C nepBoro ao nHToro Man From the first to the fifth of
May
C yxpa ao Benepa From morning to evening
Ot ... a© is also used to express “from . . . to”:

Ot BToporo ao AecHToro From the second to the tenth
Aenadpa of December
V.. QUESTIONS
1. KorAa OTKpHBaioT kobbih yHHBepcHTeT? 2. IloHeMy
exo TaKoe fiojibmoe coSbrrae aah HacejieHHH Barnero ropoAa?
3. TAe bh CAejiajiH BHepa aokji4a? 4. O h£m bli cAejiaAH aoka4a?
5. noHpaBHJiCH ah pedHTaM Bam aokaela? 6. IloHeMy hsm HyxcHH
1 Notice that the neuter form of the ordinal numeral must be

used, since hhcjio, a neuter noun, is understood. Literally:
CerdAHH BTopoe hhcjio anpejm. Today is the second (date) of
April.
yqeHbie, HHxteHepbi, AOKTOpa h MexaHHKK? 7. Tê bh 6yêTe

npOAOJDKaTb same 06pa3OBaHHe? 8. Ckojibko 3ashhh OyAer
HMeTb yHHBepcHTeT? 9. FIoqeMy 6y&eT Tax npHHTHO 3aHHMaTbcn
b BaineM yHHBepcHTeTe? 10. CxojibKO SyneT oTAejieHHft b yHHBep-
ciiTeTe? 11. Kyâ nocTyrmr CTyneHT H3yqaTb axoHOMHKy? 12. Ka-
koh 4>aKyjibTeT AOJiacHbi oKOHHHTb OyAyWHe jôKTopa? 13. Fê
AOJdkhbi nojiyqHTb ahhaom ropHCTbi? 14. C KOToporo hhcjih

6yAyT saHHTHH b yHHBepcHTeTe? 15. Byêr jih jigthuh cejvrecrp?
16. ilaioT jih CTyp;eHTaM HecnojibKO AHeft OTAbixa nocjie 3K3a-
MeHOB? 17. KaKHe yqeHbie h npocjieccopa SyztyT npenoAaBarb b
yHHBepcHTeTe? 18. OTxyAa ohh npHeAyr? 19. Bbiji jih yqHTejib
AOBOjieH BauiHM AOKjiaAOM? 20. Hto oh nonpocHJi sac 3anoM-
HHTb?

a. Give the plural declension of the following nouns:
cooOmeHHe, BOcxpeceHbe, eaqajio, yHHBepCHTer, CTeHa, nocTejib,
nycoK, pyOJib, ABHHieHiie, njiaTbe.
b. Repeat the above exercise adding appropriate forms of the
possessive, demonstrative, and interrogative adjectives, e.g.: xaxoe
cooOmeHne, sto BOcxpeceHbe, Ham yHHBepcHTeT, etc.
c. From the Reading Exercise write out all plural nouns, along
with their adjectives, and change them into the corresponding singu¬
lar forms, as follows: b nepBbix HMCJiax; b nepBOM HHCJie.
d. Give the correct plural forms of nouns in parentheses:
1. BeuepOM y Hac 6ypyr (co6paHHe) b coc&jmtu KJiyde. 2. B
Hbio FIopKe oqeHb BbicoKHe (3A3-Hue). 3. Okoao tbo6h aep^bhh
KpacHBbie (o3epo). 4. Ha Haumx (Mecxo) cha£ah HauiH 3HaKOMbie.
5. Mbi cjiymaeM (yxo). 6. CojiHite ceftqac 3a (odjiaxo). 7. B
BameH ra3ere HeT (06'bHBJieHHe). 8. Ohh noimm H3 (oTAeJieHHe)
b (oTAejieHHe). 9. Ohh xtHByr b sthx xpacHBbix (3AaHHe). 10. Y
hhx HOBbie (najibTo). 11. H HAy na noxTy 3a (nHCbMo). 12. UBeTbi,
nepeA (okho). 13. Ha CTOJie — naTb (hOjioko). 14. y ero ceerpbi
KpacHBbie (njieqo). 15. CTyACHT ecT sth (h6jioko) c xAeSoM h
CbipOM.
a. Translate the possessive pronoun-adjectives in parentheses:
1. (My) qacbi noKa3biBaK)T qeTBepTb TpeTbero. 2. Kotophh

qac Ha (yours)? 3. B (our) yHHeepcHTeTax 3aHHMaTbCH oqeHb
188 ^BAHUATblPl yPOK
npHHTHO! 4. yqHTeJib jiioOht rosopHTb o (his own) 3H3hhhx.

5 MHe HyHCHO mhoto 3aHHMarbCfl k (my) 3K3aMeHaM. 6. Mbi xo-
poin6 3HaeM (their) AexeH. 7. K (our) CTyAeHTaM npHeamaex
HOBbift npoêccop. 8. Oh 6yAeT *HTb b (our) AOMe. 9. (Their)
npHHTejiHM He noHpaBHJicn (his) hobbih aBTOMo6Hjn>. 10. HaM
oqeHb noHpaBHHCH (their) AOKJiaA- 11- 5? ynoxcHJi Benin b (her)
■qeMOAaiibi. 12. fL 3Haio (his) AeTeii. 13. Tbi paccKaacenib HaM o
(your) 3K3aMeHax, a Mbi paccKaaceM Te6e o (ours).
b. Replace the English words in parentheses by proper forms

of TaKon, KaKOH, KOTOpbiH, ueft:
1. CeroAHH (such a) xopoman noroAa. 2. B (such a) xopo-

myio noroAy utJibSK cnjitTb romq.. 3. 3aHHMaTbCH b (such a) yHH-
BepcHTeTe 6ojibin6e yAOBO/ibCTBHe. 4. JXjih (such a) co6hthh h
Kynjiw HOBoe rmaTbe. 5. (What) Tenepb uac Ha Baiunx uacax?
6. (Whose) 3Ta KHnra H (whose) 3to nepo? 7. (What sort of)
npa.3AHHK 3asTpa? 8. (What kind of) npeAMerOM Bbi ceHuac 3aHH-
Maexecb? 9. (Whose) stot AcypHan? 10. Ha (what sort of) Kpecjie
Ebi CHA&Te? 11. (What kind of) noe3AOM bbi eAeTe? 12. (Which)
nucbMO Bbi nojiymiJiH ot 6paia? 13. O (what sort of) KHHre ohh
roBOpHjin Buepa? 14. (Which) ypox ohh ceroAHH ynar? 15. (What
sort of) MecTa y Hac ceroAHH b TeaTpe?
a. Change the following sentences to the plural:
1. Kaxoe HHiepecHoe odjiaico! 2. fAe Barne nncbMO? 3. H He

Mory xcHTb b KOMHaTe 6e3 oKHa. 4. IlepeA coOpaHHeM Mbi BcerAa
eAHM b pecTopane. 5. H 6bui totob k 6oAbinoMy co6bithio. 6. %
npHHHMaio Barne npHrjiameHHe. 7. BeuepOM h 6yAy b btom 6oAb-
uiom 3AaHHH. 8. C ero 3HaeHeM, kohcuho, oh MOxceT npenoAaBarb
b yHHBepcuTeTe. 9. Mbi mhgto CMenjmcb HaA tbohm nncbMOM.
10. B TeaTpe oh jhoOht chactb Ha xopomeM MecTe. 11. npocpeccop
paccxa3aA hsm o coShthh b Ch6hph. 12. yuHTenb cnpocHA mchh
o MoeM 3aHHTHH. 13. H 3a6bni 06 ero nncbMe. 14. B kotopom
3a4hhh 6yAeT coOpamie? 15. B tskom npexpacHOM nojie, ko-
neuHO, mhoto HBeTOB.
b. Give the full declension (singular and plural) of the following

phrases:
1. Moe yxo. 2. ero HOBoe OTKpHTHe. 3. Tanoe Oojibinoe

03epo. 4. Kaxoe HOBoe 3aHHTHe? 5. KOTOpoe hhcjio?
Translate the English expressions in parentheses, writing out

all numbers in full:
1. (What) uHCjia Bbi 6ya;eTe na Mne? 2. MHe kAkctch, hto b

noHenejibHHK 6hjio (3rd of November). 3. 51 6yjiy oueHb 34hht
(on the 9th of August). 4. (From the 4th of July to the 8th of
October) mbi 6bura b Pocchh, b MocKBe h b JleHHHrpaae. 5. 51 no-
Jiywji nncbMO ot SpaTa (from the 8th of April). 6. (On what
date) Bac upHraacHJiH b tooth k ÔKTOpy Uexosy? 7. 51 6yny
padoTaTb TyT b 6aHKe (from the 4th of July to the 9th of Decem¬
ber). 8. 51 Syzty TtOMa (on the 6th of January). 9. (From the 5th of
April) mbi Sy/teivr xtHTb b êpeBHe. 10. Oh npHe3>KaeT b MocKBy
(on the 10th of June). 11. (On what date) Tbi KOHuaeuib 3aHHTHH
b HiKOJie? 12. (On the 7th of November) a KynHJi no cjiynaio
npenpacHyK) odcTaHOBKy.

A
1. During the first days of October I have to give a report

in my school. 2. I shall speak about New York. 3. In August
and September I had been in New York and had seen (sight-
seen) the city. 4. I had never seen such high buildings, such
beautiful theaters, museums, and parks. 5. I shall also tell in
my report about the great universities in New York. 6. We all
know, how important it is to study. 7. Without good teachers,
doctors, and engineers there can be no universities, no hos¬
pitals, no factories. 8. Next year I want to continue my educa¬
tion at a university in New York. 9. It will be interesting
and pleasant to study with such famous professors, in such
beautiful buildings. 10 I shall enroll in the department of
economics. 11. I shall study a lot, but from the first of June
to the tenth of September I shall always work in our kolhoz.
12. After three, four years I shall graduate from the depart¬
ment of economics and receive a diploma. 13. That will be
a great event in my life.
1. Here is (bot) the first of June, the last day of my

first semester at this university. 2. In the first days of September
I had enrolled in the medical faculty. 3. That was a great day
190 HBAfiUATblPI yPOK
in my life. On the first of September I had left (departed from)

our little city of Blinsk, and on the fifth of that month I was
a student at the famous cultural center of our country. 4. From
the second to the fifth of September I had to take (aepraaTb)
many examinations. I had never seen such difficult questions.
5. I had never been at such a large university and at first I
kept asking (asked): “Whose buildings are these and whose
are those?” 6. My comrades laughed at me: “What a question!”
they said, “of course all these (sth) buildings belong to
(are of) the university! ” 7. I had never seen such beautiful
buildings, such interesting museums, and such huge libraries.
8. And how many professors are teaching, how many students
from various countries are studying here! 9. Each professor
teaches only two or three, sometimes only one, subject; the
students are studying three or four. 10. At first my brother
had enrolled in the faculties of economics and law, but now he
is studying only economics. 11.1 had promised my grandmother
to come straight to her country house as soon as our vacations
begin. 12. And so I am leaving by (with) an early train and
shall be at Grandmother’s tomorrow morning, at five or six
o’clock. 13. I had never in my life worked so hard and now X
am very glad that the vacations have started; every year we
have summer vacations from the first of June to the ninth
of September, three months and a week. 14. On the tenth of
September classes will start again. 15. Tomorrow I shall be
with dear old Grandmother. She had written me ten letters
every month while I did not have time or energy to send her
even one a month. 16. How I love the country life at Grand¬
mother’s! There I am a free person and can do what I please all
day. 17. In good weather I shall often walk to the neighboring
village where my friend, the blacksmith, lives. 18. It is far to
the village; the road (way) there goes now uphill, now down¬
hill, and across a little old bridge. 19.1 love the view from the
bridge: the blue river, the beautiful fields and woods, and far,
far away the high, blue mountains. 20. In bad weather I shall
help Grandmother around the house; I shall tell her about
the noisy city life at the university, and explain my studies to
her. 21. And in the evening I shall read aloud to her; she loves
it and has often told me: “Kolya, when you read I can listen
a whole day (even: xoTb) and am never bored.” 22. Yes, I
do love my life at the university but I also love the summer
days at Grandmother’s.
ABAflUATb HEPBblM YPOK I
I TWENTY-FIRST LESSON
Plural of 6pax, CTyji, nepo, Aepeeo, jihct, Apyr, chh, My>K; njieno,
iteHbrn; neuters in -mh — Pronoun-adjectives §tot, tot —■
Verbs dbiTb, SbiBaTb, CTaHOBHTbcn, craTb {with instrumental)
— Declension of oahh; adjectives with cardinal numerals
Boo rjpowjiyK) Heêjiio All last week
Ha npomjiOH neAejie Last week
3a 3tot rofl In the course of this year
npH 3TOM Besides
JIqjio b tom, hto ... The reason is, the fact is,
that ...
yCTpOHTb nHKHHK To have (arrange) a picnic
Mee CTajio jiynme. I am better, have improved.
4epe3 HecKOJibKo jier In a few years
CneuwajiHCT no 6ojie3H«M Specialist for ailments
riOXOlKHfl Ha Resembling, like
KjiaHHHTecb! (with dative) Remember me kindly to . . .
Bcero xopomero! Good-bye! farewell! Lit.: of
everything good (HfejiaTb +
gen. is understood.)
II. READING: TOCTb H3 MOCKBbI
9-ro moHH
Aoporne gpaTbsi, Muxauji h #kob, —
Mh nojiyHHJiH Barne nucbMo Ha npouuioft Heaejie. rtpocTHTe,
hto He cpa3y BaM otbcthjih, ho Aejio b tom, hto k HaM npnexaji
Ha 3TOii HeAeJie toctl H3 Mockbbi.
Bbi, KOHeHHO, noMHHTe LUypy OerpoBa? Oh 6biJi 6ojibhihm
npHBTejieM mohx cbiHOBen h HacTo dbisaji y nac b nponuiOM roity.
Bbi AOJixcHbi 3Harb ero dpaTbeB. CrapuraH 6paT 6hji yqHTejieM
b Hameft uiKOJie, a MJiaAuiHH HeâBHo CTaji npeAceAaTejieM Ha-
mero KOJixo3a.
B 3tom roAy Lily pa hchji oahh b Mockb6. Oh nocryiiHJi na
MeAHUHHCKHH (JiaKyjibTeT MOCKOBCKoro yHHBepCHTeTa. Mepe3
HecKOJibKo jieT oh 6yAeT cneunajincrOM no 6ojie3H»M yxa, ropjia
h Hoca.
191
192 HBAflUATb flEPBblPI YPOK
3a §tgt foa oh H3MeHHJicH. Oh cxaHOBHTCM oqeHb iiqxommm

Ha CBoero oraA. Hejib3jr He jnoSoBaxbca ero OTKpbixbiM jihhom,
KpaCHBbIMH TJia3aMH, BbICOKHM Jl60M . . .
Oh npnexaji k Han b AepeBHK) «0TAOXHyTb», ho bh 3Haexe,
KaKOH y MOJiOAexcH otahx! C vTpa ao Benepa b AOMe pa3AaioTCH
MOJiOAbie, Becejibie rojioca, — rnyM, KpHK, BH3r ... To MOJiOAe^Kb
ycxpoHx nHKHHK noA AepeBbHMH b HameM caAy, to B3AyMaioT
KynaxbCH h noeAyT Ha 03epa b coceAHioro agp^bhio! A to Sbisaex,
CHAHT HeAblH ASHb AOMa CO CBOHMH Apy3btfMH!
BpeMeHaMH mh yx<e He paAbi, hto npurjiacHAH ero!
npH §tom boo npouijiyw HeACJHO h 6bixa npocTyxceHa: — y
MeHH 6bui HacMOpK, 6ojie;m ronoBa, cnHHa h ruieuH. B npouiJibiH
nOHeAeJibHHK h coBceM He Monia noAHHTbcn c nocTenn! Tenepb
MHe cTa/io Ayqiiie.
Jlim Tedfl, MHxaAji, y Mend eqe ABe dojibuiHX hobocth: —
b SyAymeM Mecsme TOBapum Chaopob yesmaer Ha pa66ry Ha
KaBKa3, a ero acena, Mama, 3aflMeT ero Mecro Ha coceAHeM
3aBOAe!
Box h Bee Ha hi if coShthh. PeSffra saM RJiaHHioxcH.
JOiaHJIMTeCb HaiHHM Apy3bflM!
Bcero xopouiero!
Bepa.
III. VOCABULARY
SeAHbifi, poor HecnacTHbifi, unhappy

-'asi, -'oe -'an, -'oe
SoraTbifi, rich HOC nose
-'an, -"oe OTKpblTblfi, open, honest
BH3r squeal, shriek -'an, -'oe
BpeMeHaMH at times nMcaTejib (m.) w riter, author
BbICOKHfl, high npe3HAeHT president
-'aa, -'oe npeAceAaxejib (m.) presiding officer,
AeHbrn money chairman
ApyroH, other npocTy>KeHHwfl, affected by
-'an, -'oe -as, -oe a cold
KpHK shouting CBCTJIO light, bright
AHUO face CKOpO soon, quickly
Jio6 (f o) forehead cnnHa back
MJiaAUIHH, younger, cpasy at once
-'an, -'ee youngest, CTapWHH, elder, eldest,
junior -'as, -'ee senior
MOJIOAeiKb young people TeMHO dark
HeAaBHo recently
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON 193
Verbs
BSiiyMWBaTb (I) BSAyMaxb (I) to get the idea

HSMCHSTbCSI (I) H3MCHHXbCfl (II) to change
KJiaHHTbCH (I) (-j-Dat.) nOKAOHHXbCfl; to greet, give
nOKAOHKJCb, regards to
nOKAOHHUJbCfl,
nOKAOHflXCfl
KynaTbcsi (I) BbiKynaxbCA (I) to bathe (swim)

juoOoBaTbcn; jnoOytocb, noAioOoBaxbCfl to admire (while
jiioOyeujbcfl, jitoCyiOTcn (AtoOoBaxbca) looking at)
(-)- instrumental
or Ha -f- Aee.)
OTAbixaib (I) oxAOXHyxb; oxAOXHy, to rest
oxAOXHeuib, oxAOXHyx
noAHHMaxbCa (I) noAHflXbcn; noAHHMycb, to arise, get up

nOAHHMeiUbCH,
noAHHMyxca
pa3AaBaxbCH (Aaeaxb) pa3Aaxbca (Aaxb) to resound

cxaHOBwxbcfl; cxaxb; cxaHy, to become, grow,
CXaHOBAlOCb, cxaHeuib, cxaHyx place oneself,
CXaHOBHLUbCfl, begin
CXaHOBflXCH
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Noun
1. Plural declension of 6pax; cryji; nepo; nepeeo; jihct:
Nora. SpaTbfl CTyjibsi

Gen. SpaTbeB CTyjibes
Dat. SpaTbHM CTyJIbflM
Ace. SpaxbeB CTyJtbfl
Instr. 6paTbflMH CTyjIbHMH
Prep. dpaTbiax CTyyibflX
194 JXBAJXUATb IlEPBblP! YPOK
Like cryji “chair” are declined nepo “feather, pen,” AepeBo

“tree,” and jihct “leaf (of a tree).” JIhct in the meaning of
“sheet, piece of paper” has a regular plural declension: jihctw,
jihctoBj jmcTaM, jihctw etc. Note the special plural declension
of MyiK “husband,” Apyr “friend,” and cmh “son”:
Nom. My/KbB Apysbfl CbIHOBbM

Gen. MyiKefl (!) Apysefi (!) CbIHOBeft (!)
Dat. MyJKbHM Apy3bflM CbIHOBbHM
Aec. My)Keft (!) Apy3efl (!) CbIHOBeH (!)
Instr. My^bflMH Apy3bflMH CbIHOBbHMM
Prep. MyJKbflX Apy3b«X CbIHOBbHX
2. Declension of AeHbrn “money”:
Nom. AeHbrw Ace. AeHbrw

Gen. AeHer Instr. AeHbraMH
Dat. AeHbraM Prep. AeHbrax
3. Plural declension of neuter nouns in -mh: hmh; BpeMji1

(for the singular, see Lesson 17.):
Nom. HMena BpeMena
Gen. HMeH BpeMeH
Dat. HMenaM BpeMeeaM
Aec. HMena BpeMeea
Instr. HMeHaMM BpeMeHaMH
Prep. HMenax BpeMenax
B. Declension of the demonstrative pronoun-adjectives §tot

“this,”' tot “that”
Plural
Singular Masc. Neut. Fem. All Genders
Nom. 3TOT 3TO 3Ta 3TH

Gen. 3TOFO 3TOPO 3TOfl 3THX
Dat. 3TOMy 3TOMy 3TOft 3THM
Acc. N. or G. 3TO §Ty N. or G.
Instr. 3THM 3THM 3TOfl (OK)) 3THMH
Prep. 3T0M 3TOM 3TO»l 3THX
1 Other neuters in -mh are given here for reference only: 3h&mh
“flag, standard”; ruiaMH “flame”; iui&mh “tribe”; SpeMH “burden”; c6mh
“seed”; crpeMH “stirrup”; tcmh “crown Cof the head) bmmh “udder."
Plural
Singular Masc. Neut. Fern. All Genders
Nom. TOT TO ra re
Gen. Toro Toro Toil Tex
Dat. TOMy TOMy roil TeM
Acc. N. or G. TO Ty N. or G.
Instr. TCM TCM Toil (tok?) TCMH
Prep. TOM TOM tosI rex
Note that the two declensions are identical except for the
substitution of e for m in the endings of the instrumental singu¬
lar masculine and neuter and of the entire plural of tot. Also
note the difference in stress position.
C. The verbs Owrb, dbisaTb (I), craHOBHTbCH, craTb
1. BbmaTb means “to be occasionally” or “habitually” and
with y and the genitive stands for “to visit”:
Oh nacTO Sbisaer y Hac. He frequently visits us.
It also renders “to happen, to take place”:
3to nacTO SbieaeT. That often happens.
2. CTaHOBHTbCM (imperfective), craTb (perfective) mean:
a. “to place oneself, take up one’s position”:
Oh cTaHOBHTCH b onepejub. He takes his place in line (gets

into line).
b. “to become, get, grow”:

CraHOBHTcsixojioaho, xcapKOy It is becoming cold, hot, dark,
TeMHo, cbctjio. light, etc.
Mae crano oieHb eecejio. I became (grew) very merry.
c. CraTb means “to begin” when used with an infinitive:
Oh cKopo craHeT roBopiiTb He will soon begin to speak
no-pyccKH. Russian.
3. When a noun or adjective is used as a predicate of
ObiTb,1 craHOBHTbCfl, CTaTb, it usually appears in the instru-
fnental case instead of the nominative:
Oh 6bui (6yjier) HHJKeHepOM.1 He was (will be) an engineer.
Oh craji (craHer) cojiastom. He became (will become) a
soldier.
i With 6brrb this rule applies only in the past and future (i. e.
when 6biTb is actually expressed) and only when a change is implied:
Tenepb oh ynmejib, a cKopo CyfteT npo(j)eccopOM.
196 JIBAXUlATb nEPBbM yPOK
D. Numerals
1. Full declension of oahh, ojim, oaho “one”:
Singular Plural
Masc. Neut. Fern. All Genders
Nom. oahh OAHO OAHa oahh

Gen. OAHOrO OAHoro OAHOi oahhx
Dat. OAHOMy OAHOMy OAHOi OAHHM
Ace. like N. or G. OAHO OAHy like N. or G.
Instr. OAHHM OAHHM OAHOfl oah6mh
Prep. OAHOM OAHOM OAHOU OAHHX
Oahh, ©AHa, qaho, oahh is also used in the meaning of

“alone, only”:
Oh oahh. He is alone. Oh oahh §to 3Haei. Only he

knows it.
Mbi oahh. We are alone. Mm oahh §to 3HaeM. Only we
know it.
Oahh is also used in the meaning of “some”: Oahh khhth
Ha crojie, a Apyrne Ha nojiy. Some books are on the table and
others are on the floor.
2. Adjectives after all cardinal numerals (except oahh)
are in the genitive plural.1
ABa SojibuiHX cTOJia two big tables
qeib'ipe HHTepecHbix khhfh ^ four interesting books
V. QUESTIONS
1. KorAa bh nojiynHjiH hhcbmo ot SpaTbes? 2. KeM 6hui

Ulypa IleTpoB? 3. KorAa oh Hacro bbiBaji y sac? 4. KeM 6biji ero
CTapuiHH 6paT? 5. KeM HeAaBHo cTaJi ero mahahikh 6paT? 6. FAe
>khji LLIypa b stom roAy? 7. KyAa oh nocTymbi? 8. KeM oh
CTaHeT nepe3 hcckoabko act? 9. H3mchhach ah LLIypa 3a stot
toa? 10. Ha Koro oh cthhoehtch noxoxc? 11. rioneMy oh npH-
exaA k HaM b AepeBHio? 12. Hto pa3AaeTcn b AOMe c yrpa ao
Benepa? 13. Hto ji&jiatr MOAOAexcb? 14. Chaht ah ohh HHorAa
AOMa co cbohmh Apy3bHMH? 15. KorAa Bbl 6bIAH npocTpKeHH?
16. tfeM bh 6biah SoAbHbi? 17. Ctbao ah BaM xenepb Ayume?
18. JXjik Koro y Bac ABe Sojibiunx hobocth? 19. KorAa ye3xcaeT
1 This rule applies only when the numeral is in the nominative,

genitive, or accusative.
TOBapmu; CMAOpOB? 20. Kyoh ye3>xaeT? 21. Kto 3aHHMaeT ero

m6cto Ha 3aBOAe? 22. Kto KjiaHneTCH MnxanAy h ^Koey? 23. Ko-
My bh KJiaHHeTecb?
Give the correct plural forms of the nouns in parentheses:
1. Mom (CblH) BaM KJiaHHIOTCH. 2. B MoCKBe H XtHJI OAHH H

oneHb CKynaji 6e3 mohx (Apyr). 3. 51 pa#, hto h noHpaBHjicfl
BauiHM MHjibiM (Apyr). 4. B 3tom roiiy y mohx (6paT) MHoro
pad6th. 5. 51 xoqy noexaTb b AepeBHio c tbohmh (6paT). 6. IIo-
qeMy moh KHHra h moh xcypHaji itoa bthmh (cTyji) ? 7. Ha sthx
(cTyji) yôdHO cHAeTb. 8. % HeAaBHO JiiodoBajica sthmh npe-
KpacHbiMH (o3epo). 9. B sthx (o3epo) npHarao KynaTbca. 10. y
Hac CTOJIbKO HOBbIX 3HaKOMbIX, HTO MbI He HOMHHM HX (HMH).
11. Mbi B3AyMajiH ycTpoHTb hhkhhk hoa (AepeBo) Hamero caAa.
12. B HarneM caAy majio (Aepeso). 13. Hama Aaqa okoao Tex
BbICOKHX (AepeBO). 14. TbI He 3HaA (HMH) HaiHHX HOBbIX npo-
(JjeccopoB? 15. Mbi CAymaeM (yxo). 16. Moh noApyra B3AyMaAa
xynMTb uiJiAny c SoAbiuHMH qepHbiMH (nepo). 17. Moh CTapiime
(6paT) npOAOAxcaiOT oeoe odpaaoBamie b Mockobckom yHHBep-
CHTeTe. 18. ReTH HrpaAH b napxe M&KAy (AepeBo). 19. Mu qacTO
BcnoMHHaeM o Tex npeKpacHbix (speMH). 20. (BpeMH) Tenepb
ctaah ApyrHMH. 21. (BpeMH) mh yxce He paah, hto ero npurjia-
chjih. 22. Oh homhht (hmh) Bcex cbqhx yqeHHKOB.
a. Translate the pronoun adjectives in parentheses:
1. (This) cryji 6yAer b tbo6h KOMHaTe, a (that) Kpecxo b

Moeft. 2. y (this) CTyAeHTa HeT nepa. 3. Okoao (that) Aepesa mh
MOHceM OTAoxHyTb. 4. Oh mhoto 3aHHMaACH nepeA (this) 9K3a-
MeHOM. 5. B (this) yHHBepcHTeTe HeT dnSxHOTeKH, a b (that)
ecTb. 6. Mh BcerAa e3AHM 3a nonyiiKaMH b (this) ropOA- 7. Mh
depeM (this) ncypHaji aomoh. 8. B (that) KOJixo3e HOBbifi npeA-
ceAaTeAb. 9. 51 enemy k (this) noe3Ay.
b. In the above exercise place all words which are in parentheses

and all boldface words into the plural.
198 £BA£LiATb flEPBblPl yPOK
e. Give the full declension (sing. & plur.) of the following:
Hama nepBan KHHra, stot OojibuioM ropo/i, KaKOH KpaCHBbift

ronoc, tot CTapbiil aHrjiHnaHHH, KOTopoe qncjio, Tanoe CHHee
03ep0, TO 3HaMeHHT0e HMH, AOpOTOH Apyr, OAHH SeJIBIH JIHCT,
HaiUH AeHBTH.
a. Change the following sentences into the past tense:
1. Moh CTapniHH 6paT nacTO ObisaeT b ropoê. 2. XyT nacTo

6hb4iot Romm. 3. Ha B0K3ajiax Bceryia ObiBaeT TOJina jno,a6ft.
4. B 3tom ropo/te SbreaeT mhoto TypncTOB. 5. B HarneM KJiHMaTC
HHorjta SbmaeT paHHHH BecHa, 6. Bbi hActo SbiBaeTe b khho? 7. Oh
KaMoe BocKpeceHbe ObmaeT y nac. 8. 3to HHQr,na dbreaeT co
MHO#.
b. Change the following into the perfective aspect past and future:
1. OceHbio b AepeBHe CTaHOBHTCH cxyuHo. 2. Mne CTaHOBHTCH

xojtoaho. 3. OHa CTaHOBHTCH b ouepeAb 3a MacjiOM. 4. Ohh tc-
nepb CKOpo CTaHOBHTCH npocJ)eccopaMH. 5. Tbi CTHHOBHuibcH
oueHb noxoHC na CBoero otiul. 6. Oh cthhoehtch yMHee (more clev¬
er). 7. CTaHOBHJiocb TeMHO. 8. CraHOBHJiocb xojioaho.
c. Supply the endings:
1. Oh craji H3BCCTH— yueH—. 2. Oh 6bin npocT—* cojiabi—.
3. BecHOH oh ct4h£t HffiKeHep—. 4. Oh dyzieT npen;ceâTeji— Ha-

mero Kjryda. 5. Ohh Bcepaa 6hjih xopom— npHHTeji—. 6. Oh
CTaJi cneynajiHCT— no 6ojie3HHM yxa, ropjia h Hoca. 7. Oh CTaJt
oueHb 6oraT— qejioBeK—. 8., 3HaeTe k— (kto) OHa CTajia?
3HaMeHHT— neBHu—.
a. Translate the words in parentheses:
1. B KOMHaTe (one) CTyji h (one) Kpecjio. 2. 3,ztecb ecTb

MecTO ajih (one) uejioBeKa. 3. Mbi npHrjiacHjm Ha Aaqy (one)
rocTH. 4. Mbi chjthm 3a (one) ctojiom. 5. K (one) Moeft no,n;pyre
npnexajiH dpaTbn H3 Ch6hph. 6. Tpynna KpecTbHH eêx b (one)
earoHe. 7. 51 3h4k> tojibko (one) onepy. 8. Mbi 6biira (alone) b
KOMHare. 9. 51 B3AywaJi KynaTbcn b 03epe (alone). 10. y Hac (one)
rojioBa, (one) hoc, (one) Jio6, (one) pOT, (one) cmma h (one)
jihuo.
b. Translate the expressions in parentheses:
1. B HameM ropOAe (five big buildings). 2. (nine little

children) nrpajiH b napne. 3. Mos coce^Ka KynHJia (three dresses).
4. 51 ceftnac noJiyHHJi (one interesting periodical). 5. B 3tom mc-
CHixe 6biJio TOJibKO (six rainy days). 6. B Kyxne (five red chairs).
7. Bnepa h nojiymlji (seven important letters). 8. B MoeM caAy
(two high trees). 9. Y nee (twelve new pens). 10. Oh Kyrraji (ten
big apples). 11. Y Moen coceAKH (two beautiful violins). 12. Ce-
roAHH (first summer day). 13. B nponuiOM Mecsme 6hjio tqabko
(three good summer days). 14. EMy TpyAHO HanncaTb am (two
long letters).
General Review of Verbs1
a. Give the past tense and English meaning of the following

verbs:
1. CKa3aTb 2. OTBeTHTb 3. ecTb 4. KJiacTb 5. mohb 6. AaBaTb

7. hath 8. nonpaBJiHTbcH 9. nponecTb 10. OACBaTbCH.
b. Give the imperative forms and English meaning of the
following verbs:
1. roTOBHTb 2. exaTb 3. 6htb 4. ecTb 5. nucaTb 6. CMeaTbcn

7. KAaTb 8. OpaTb 9. saHHMaTbca 10. nHTb.
c. Give the four key forms in the imperfective and the perfective
aspects, as well as the English meaning of the following verbs:
1. A&BaTb 2. BxoAHTb 3. OACBaTbCH 4. npHrjiamaTb 5. npHHH-

MaTb 6. OpaTb 7. OTBeqaTb 8. cmmaTb 9. oO'bHCHHTb 10. CTa-
HOBHTbCH.
VII.
TRANSLATION INTO RUSSIAN
A
1. All last week I was with my friends in the country.
2. They have a large country home in a very beautiful spot.
i This type of Review Exercise should be repeated with the verbs

of every five lessons.
200 RBARIXATb nEPBHPI yPOK
3. I came here to rest. 4. Last week [it] was very cold, and it
rained all the time. 5. But this week there is much sun; it has
turned (become) warm, even hot. 6. On Monday of this week
we had a picnic under the trees in my friend’s beautiful garden.
7. On Wednesday or Thursday, we shall drive for a swim (to
bathe) to the lake at the neighboring village. 8. I have im¬
proved (in the course of) this week. 9. I had been very sick
all last year and at times could not even get up. 10. Besides, I
was all alone in the house. 11. My sons were working in a plant
at Leningrad and my daughter was at the Moscow University.
12. Our doctor, an ear-nose-and-throat specialist, visited me
four or five times last year. 13. He told me that I must go to
the country to rest and improve [my health]. 14. The doctor
was right; I needed rest and fresh air. 15. Here in the country
I have grown healthy again.
B
1. Dear Paul,
I am writing to you from the country home of my
brother’s friend, the writer Ivanov. 2. Do you remember,
I told you that we would (will) go to Paris1 and would live
almost two weeks with Mr. Ivanov? 3. And here I am! All last
wTeek, for seven wonderful days, we saw (sight-saw) the great
city of Paris. I shall always remember those famous buildings
and huge squares, the long streets, and remarkable bridges.
4. After we had seen the entire city, on the eighth day, last
Saturday, we drove with Mr. Ivanov in his beautiful new car to
his country house. 5. He owns not only one, but two, enormous
country homes, one on (at) the River Seine2, and another in
the mountains. 6. And he has not only one car but three big
new ones; one is always in the city, the others, the “country”
cars, are always in the country. 7. Mr. Ivanov is not poor; he
obviously has a great deal of (very much) money! 8. Besides
us (xpoMe Hac) there are at his country place five other
good friends of Mr. Ivanov; they frequently visit him there.
9. I do not remember their names now, but I do know that one
of them is a singer from (of) the Paris3 opera, another is a very
serious and very boring engineer from America; there are also
two skinny, old Englishmen, and a nice, jolly lady teacher
resembling my mother. 10. Mr. Ivanov has a very large family
and had invited his father and mother and his brothers and
sisters for this week to his country house, where they can rest
and have a good time. 11. But two [of his] famous brothers,
1 ITapibK
2 Ha peice Gene
3 nap&iKCKOH
T AYE NT Y-ElkST LESSON 201
also writers, were too busy in the city, and his father and moth¬
er had colds (were affected by a cold). 12. And so only his
youngest brother Sasha and his beautiful elder sister could
come (npnexaTb). 13. Sasha is a student at the Paris University
in the medical faculty, and in a year or two he will become a
nose-throat-and-ear specialist. 14. The young people have, of
course, arranged picnics; they go swimming, and play golf
or tennis. 15. Do you know Paul, how many lakes there are
here? Three beautiful little lakes—and through them there
flows (Tener) a little river. 16. And the mountains are not at
all far from here; yesterday we drove there in one of Ivan¬
ov’s “country” cars. 17. I have never lived such an interesting,
free life; everyone here can do what he wants; some play cards
or read or look at television programs all day long; others walk
in the fields or go swimming in the beautiful lakes or drive
to (into) the mountains. 18. But now it is turning (becoming)
rainy and cold and tomorrow Mr. Ivanov and his friends will
drive to Paris and we shall have to drive back to our little
old town of Domremy.1 19. I shall always think about the
twelve wonderful Paris days. 20. Remember me kindly to our
friends in Domremy and tell them that within three days I
shall be home again.
Good bye!
Your Peter.
Based on vocabulary and grammar of preceding lessons} with special

emphasis on Lessons 13, 14, 19, 20} and 21
MOH >KH3Hb no PACnHCAHHKX
FOBOpHT, MTO y MeHH CKyMHafl HCH3Hb. Ho IiyCTb rOBOpHT,

qro xotht. H 3aHHT0H qeaoBeK h y Mena HeT BpeMeHH AyvraTb
o tom, qro rOBOpHT jiioah.
JlerOM, 3hm6h, BecHOH h oceHbio, c noHeneJibHHKa £o cy6-
66 th h BcerM Ha cayrxbe. KoHeqHO, jieTOM, b aBrycre, b nepBbix
qficjiax aarycTa, mh c menoH Beernk ye3H<aeM H3 ropoâ Ha
ABe-TpH Heê^H b ropbi hjih k Mopio. Ha paboTy MHe Haô exaTb
noe3AOM nojiqaca. 3a sto BpeMH h npoqHTbmaK) ra3eTy, Aynaio
o pabore h He 3aMeqaio Kax npoxo^HT BpeMH. noe3n; npnxoAHT
Ha B0K3aji pobho b qeTBepTb AeBHToro h qepe3 Hecxoabxo mh-
HyT h yace cmxy 3a ctojiom cboch KOHTOpbi.
1 ffoMpeMH
202 JIBAAUATb nEPBbin ypOK
B noJiAeHb H yxomy M3 kohtopli Ha Tpn neTBeprn naca Ha

o6eA- bio noHeAejibHHKaM m cpeâM h eM b i-ieSojibnioM pecTO-
paHe 3a yrjiOM ot kohtoph, a no btophhkhm, neTBepraM h
nHTHHUaM H, oSbIKHOBeHHO, XOAiy B pyCCKHH peCTOpaH, Hepe3
yJlHUy OT KOHTOpbl.
Kan TOjibKO qacbi noKa3biBaK)T 6e3 neiBepTH narb, nopa1
coSnpaTbCH exaTb aomoh. Moeft xceHe HHKorAa He h&ao cnpa-
HiHBaTb: — B kotopom naey tw 6yAeuib ceroAHH AOMa? — K
yjKHHy x HHKOrAa He ona3AbiBaio!
Mepe3 nac x yace AOMa. OSbiKHOBeHHO, y >KeHH y>KHH totob
Bo-BpeMH, ho HHorAa OHa ona3AbiBaex c y>KHHOM h TorAa y mchh
ecTb BpeMH nponecTb BenepHfoio ra3eiy. >KeHa roBopHT, hto h
BcerAa ththk) hjih acypHaji, hjih ra3eiy, huh KHftry. «Myucy Bee
paBHo ecTb jih y Mac o6eA. Ho ecjm HeT ra3eTbi, acypHajia hjih
KHur, TorAa oh HecqactHbiH qeuoBeK», nacro roBopHT oHa.
JXBa pa3a b neAeuio, b noHeAeubHHK h b cpeAy BenepoM h
e3}Ky Ha nac-ABa b Kuy6.
B HHBape npouiuoro roAa h ctha npeAceAaxeuewr oSmecTBa
nHcaTejien h ABa pa3a 3 Mecnu aojukch ycTpaHBaTb coSpaHHH,
a pa3 b toa b MapTe Mecnne, a AOJiHcen caM AeuaTb aoka4a 0
pa6oTe Haiuero 66iuecTBa.
B qeTBepr BenepOM y mchh ypoK pyccKoro H3biKa. H 3hhh-
MaiOCb pyCCKHM H3LIKOM Ka>KAbIH A^Hb, Mac B AeHb, B nHTHHHV
BenepoM k HaM npnxoAHT coceAH Ha ABa-TpH naca HrpaTb
b KapTbi. «KorAa pa6oTaemb bckd HeAeuio, b nnTHHuy nopa
noAyMaTb 06 QTAbixe», roBopHT >xeHa. B cy666ry yTpOM x homo-
raio xeeHe no x03ftftcTBy, e3>Ky c Heft b ropoA 3a noKynxaMH,
pa6oTaio no AOMy huh b cauy. BocnpeceHbe — AeHb oTAbixa.
Mbi 3aBTpaKaeM no3AHo, haSm b uepnoBb, oSeAaeM, a nocue
oSeAa h KOHeqHo 33hht ra3eToft naca ABa. Bot h KOHeu HeAeun!
MHe He HaAO AyMaTb, hto h 6yjiy AeuaTb na SyAymeft HeAeue,
b SyAymeM Mecnue h b SyAymeM toav, — y mchh yme totobo
pacnncaHHe Ha mhoto act!
1 nopa (adverb) “it is time,” but is also used in poetic or archaic

language as a noun in the meaning of “time”: jicthah nopa summer¬
time; BpeMH unit of time, duration; pa3 once, one time, times; number
of occurrences, performances.
ABAMATb BTOPOR YPOK
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON
Masculine nouns ending in -a or -h — The reflexive

pronoun ce6« and the emphatic caM — Translation of
“let me, us, him, them”; Use of the infinitive in the
imperative mood; Infinitive with the dative
rendering “have to,” “am to”
[Review of the feminine noun declension in the plural]
OAHa uiecTaH HacTb One-sixth part

Bch oOHTaeMan cyrna The entire habitable land
yCJIOBHfl >KH3HH Conditions of life
CoOnpaTb ypo>Kafl To bring in the harvest
>KHBOTHblfl H paCTHTejIbHbIM Fauna and flora
MHp
Jleco-cxenb Forest-steppe
RriOAOpoAHaH noHBa Fertile soil
riaaHTau.Hfl caxapnon ceemibi Sugar beet plantation
OpyKTOBbifl cap. Orchard. Lit.: fruit garden
npupo^Hbie OoraTCTBa Natural resources; raw
material wealth
PafloH AOGblHH H 06pa60TKH The region of extraction and
processing
CaxapHblH TpOCTHHK Sugar cane
II. READING: YPOK TEOrPAOMM
UasaftTe nocMorpHM Ha xapTy CoBeTCKoft Pocchh hjih

C.C.C.P. 3Ta CTpaHa 3aHHMaeT OAHy mecTyio nacrb Bcefi oGHTa-
eMOft cymH. Ot 3anaAHbix rpaHnu C.C.C.P. ao boctohhmx ceMb
TbicHH MHJib, a ot ceBepHbix rpaHHU ao KUKHbix noqTH neTbipe
TbICflHH MHAb.
KOHeHHO, Ha TaKOH GOJIbLUOH TeppHTOpHH BCTpenaiOTCH
3 006 3
pa H pa Hbie KJIHMaTBI H yCJIOBHH 1KH3HH. FlpeACTaBbTe ce-
6e, hto b tot xce caMbiii AeHb, KorAa Ha ceeepe Pocchh ha§t
CHer, Ha lore coGnpaiOT ypowcafi!
>KHBOTHbift h pacTHTejibHbift MHp ceBepHbix objiacTew oneHb
6eAeH. K ibry HannHaeTca 30Ha AiecoB, 3a 3ohoh jiecoB 30Ha
jieco-cTenn, a 3aTeM' HaHHHaeTCH BeAHKan pyccKaa paBHHHa.
203
204 HBAAUATb BTQPOPi YPOK
3ohs paBHHH 3aHHMaeT OoAbinyio nAQLuaAb. FlAOAOpoAHaa noHBa

9toh 30Hbi Aaet npeKpacHbie vpoxcaH.
y KUKHblX rpaHHU B6JIHKOH pyCCKOM paBHHHLI HaXOAHTCH
nJiaHTau,HH caxapHOfi CBenjibi h c^pyKTOSwe caAW. Ha lore, 3a
3QHOH paBHHH HAeT 30Ha IiyCTblHb.
3a ropaMH CpeAHeH A3hh h KaBxa3a JieacHT cy6-
BbicoKHMH
TpOHHHeCKaH TyT OHSHb TenJIblH H npHHTHblH KJIHMBT. B

30Ha.
Hexoropbix MecTax stoh 3ohh pacTyx anejibCHHbi, ahmohm, a b
ApyrHX pacxyT xjionoK, caxapHbifl tpocthhk h KayuyKOHOCbi.
B POCCHH MHOTO SOJIbHIHX peK. riOCMOTpHM HS KapTV
a3KaTCKOH HaCTH C.C.C.P. TyT Bbl yBHAHTe MHOTO AJIHHHbIX H
uiHpoKHX peK. B eBponeftCKOH hecth CTpaHbi xaioKe HaxoAflTca
OojibiiiHeh AJiHHHbie peKH: Bojira, J^Henp, JXoh.

npnpoAHbie 6oraTCTBa Pocchh pa3Hoo6pa3Hbi. FjiaBHbiH
paflOH AOObIHH H o6pa60TKH HetjjTH HaXOAHTCH Ha KaBKa3e,
okojio ropoâ Baity. TjiaBHbie paHoHbi A°6biHH h o6pa6oTKH
MeTajiJiOB HaxoAHTCa hs lore, b paHOHe JXon6a.cca, a TaKAce b
boctohhom paHOHe ypajia h Ky36acca.
TeppHTopHK) C.C.C.P. HacejiaeT cto BOceMbAecHT (180) Ha-
pOAOB. OHH npeACTaBJIHlOT C060K) CMACb pa3HbIX HaU,HOHaAbHO-
cxeA. IlycTb noeAex xypHCT H3 eBponeftCKOH uacra CTpaHbi b

a3HaTCKyiO. TyT OH CaM yBHAHT CKOAbKO pa3HbIX HapOAOB HCHBeT
B C.C.C.P. KaiKABIH HapOA HMeeT CBOH HaUHOHaAbHblH H3blK,
CBOK) HaUHOHSAbHyiO HCTOpHK) H CBOIO HaUHOH3JIbHyK) KVAb-
Typy.
III. VOCABULARY
1. General
anejibCHH orange (fruit) HeKOTOpbie some

BCAHKHM, great, mighty HecjjTb oil (crude)
-'aa, -'oe 66jiaCTb region
rpaHHUa border noeSAKa trip
3axeM after that nOHTH almost
3e;ieHbifi, green, nycTbiHA desert
-'an, -'oe verdant paBHHHa plain
30Ha zone pa3H006pa3Hb!H, various,
napTa map -'an, -'oe variegated
KayqyKOHOc rubber tree ciwecb mixture
KyAbTypa culture TeppHTOpHH territory
JIHMOH lemon TbICHHa thousand
MexajiA metal XJIOnOK cotton
MHJTH mile UIHpOKHfi, broad, -wide
HaUHOHaAbHblft, national -'aa, -'oe
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON 205
Verbs
HacejIHTb (I) HacejwTb (II) to populate,

settle
HaXOAHTbCH (XOflHTb) HaMTHCb (hath) to be located,
found
HaHHHaTbCH (I) HanaTbCH; HanHycb, to begin
HaHHeiHbCH, HaHHyTCH
OTiiejIHTb (I) OTAeJIMTb (II) to separate
pacTH y pacry, BblpaCTH (paCTH) to grow,

pacTeuib, pacryr grow up
2. Points of the Compass:
boctok: BOCTOHHbiw, -'aa, -'oe East, eastern

3anaA: 3anaAHbifl, -an, -oe West, western
ceeep: ceBepHbiw, -an, -oe North, northern
jor: FoiKHbiH, -'an, -'oe South, southern
3. Proper Names:
A3hh: asHarCKHft, -'aa, -'oe Asia, Asiatic

CpeAHsm A3HH Central Asia
Espona: eeponeftCKHH, -'aa, -'oe Europe, European
Eany Baku; Bojira Volga; Hwenp Dnepr;
J3oh Don
/lOHSacc: AoeeuKMH yrojibHbift SacceHH The Donets coal¬
field
Ky36acc: Ky3HeuKHH yrojibHbifi OacceflH The Kuznets coal¬
field
KaBKa3 Caucasus; ypaji Ural (Mountains)
CoBeTCKaa Pocchh C.C.C.P. Cok)3 Cobctckhx CounaJiHCTHHe-
ckhx PecnyGjiHK Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (U.S.S.R.)
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Masculine nouns ending in a or a
These nouns are declined like feminine1 nouns, thus:
MyiKHHHa “man” is declined like HfemuHea “woman”:
Sing.: My>KUHHa, My^CUHHbl, MyiKHHHe, MyHCHHHy, MyJKUHHOH,
My^KUHHe
1 For the plural declension of the feminine noun, see Lesson 18.
206 JJBAZUXATb BTOPOW YPOK
Plur.: My^K^HHbl, My>KHHH, MyACHHHaM, MyXCHHH, My^KMHH3MH,
My>K4HHax
Like My^KMHHa are declined AeAywna “grandfather.”1
JXsuiB “uncle” is declined like Heêjm (except in the genitive
and acpusative plural):
Sing. : AH Afl; ah ah, AHAe, AHAK), AHAefi, AHAe
Plur.: ahah, AHAefi, ahahm, AHAefi, ahahmh, ahahx
Adjectives modifying these nouns, as well as pronouns
used for these nouns, are masculine, agreeing with the natural
gender (masculine) of such nouns and not with their feminine
endings:
3to Mofi cTapbifi ahah. This is my old uncle.
Oh earner c h4mh yxce qeTbipe He has been living with us
roAa. four years already.
B. The reflexive pronoun cedn “self” and
the emphatic caM “self”
1. The reflexive pronoun ceda “-self” is used of all persons,
singular and plural. It has no nominative, since it can never
be the subject of a sentence:
Nom. Acc. ce6a
Gen. ce6fi Instr. co6ofi (610)
Dat. ce6e Prep. cede
Ot ce6a He yfiAenib! You cannot escape yourself 1

Oh 3to cede Kynfiji. He bought it for himself.
npHAH b ce6a! Come to your senses! (Come
into yourself!)
H 9to depy c codofi. I am taking this with me.
Ohs MHoro rosopHT o ce6e. She speaks much about her¬
self.
2. The emphatic definite pronoun caM “self3 is used
chiefly for emphasis of identity with nouns or personal pro¬
nouns and agrees with these in number, gender, and case:
MajibHHK caM 3to CAeAaji. The boy has done it himself.
H BHAeji caMoro npe3HAeHTa. I saw the President himself.
It is very often used with the reflexive pronoun ce6n:
rioAapoK caMOMy cede A present to himself
Oh caM c codofi roBopHT. He speaks to himself.
i Taking proper account of Vowel Mutation Rule B and infix e
and o respectively in genitive plural.
Full declension of the emphatic definite pronoun caM:
Masc. Neut. Fem. PI. All Genders

Nom. caM caMO caM a C3.MH
Gen. caMoro caMoro caMOft CaMHX
Dat. caMOMy caMOMy caMoft CaMHM
Ace .1 2 caMoro caMO caMoe CaMHX
Instr. CaMHM CaMHM CSMOft (OIO) CaMHMH
Prep. CaMOM CaMOM caMoft CaMHX
C. Verb
1. Translation of “let me, him, her, it, us, them”:

jwa*. «aftTe» | *HKe°K6H4HTb } Let me finish
This pattern applies to all persons (except second):

Raft, AaftTe oh (ona, oho) kohhht, mm kohhhm, etc.
or’ Aafl, Aafixe eMy, eft, HaM, hm kohmhtb.
(Note: Second type of construction uses the dative of the

pronoun with the infinitive of either aspect of the verb.)
2. Imperative including the speaker, i. e., “let us”:
Let us: Saeafixe3 w^h the imperfective infinitive:
jâeaft ecxb. Let us eat.

J3,aBaftxe HMxaxb. Let us read.
J3,aBaftxe roBopftxb Let us speak Russian.
no-pyccKH.
simply the first person plural (usually of the

or: perfective verb):
IloroBopHM no-pyccKH. Let’s speak Russian.
rioftACMTe.3 Let us go.
flOHACMTe ryJIHTb Let us go for a walk.
1 Note that this pronoun has only an animate form in the accusa¬
tive masculine singular and plural, which, of course, is like the geni¬
tive. It is not used with reference to inanimate objects; with reference
to these a form of caMbifi must be used.
2 When addressing a single person familiarly.
3 when addressing a number of persons, or one person politely.
208 HBAHUATb BTOPOPl YPOK
Often used in combination with AaBafi:

AaBafi nopadoTaeM, AaBafire noroBOpHM, etc.
Let him: OycKafi or nycTb with the third person singular

(Either aspect can be used; the personal pronoun
is sometimes omitted):
nycKai |KynHT 3Ty KHHry. Let him buy this book.
IlycKaH (nycTb) HrpaeT. Let him play.

Let them: riycKafi or Hycxh with the third person plural:
ny-f jKynsrr §Ty KHHry. Let them buy this book.
nycKaw (nycTb) HrpaioT. Let them play,

riycrb, FlycKafi usually have an exhortative force.
3. Use of the infinitive in the imperative mood:
Emphatic command: MojmaTb! Silence! PaGoiaTb! Work!
4. Infinitive with the dative rendering “have to,” “am to”:
ljto Haw AejiaTb? What are we to do?
KoMy hath? Who is to go?
BaM hath! You are to go!
V. QUESTIONS
1. KaKyro naomaAB 3aHHMaer C.C.C.P.? 2. CKOJibKO MHAb

OTAejiaeT 3anaAHbie rpaHHUbi CoBeTCKoro Coib3a ot boctohhhx
h cesepHbie ot kukhbix? 3. rioHeiviy ycAOBHH }KH3HH b C.C.C.P.
TaKHe pa3HOo6pa3Hbie? 4. Kanne 3ohh naxoAHTca b ceBepHbix
odJiacTHX CoBeTCKoro CoK>3a? 5. KaKHe 30Hbi HaxoAHTCH
b kukhbix oduacTHX? 6. B Kaxoft 30He noqBa oneHb miOAOpOAHaa?
7. FAe HaxoAHTca miaHTauHH caxapHoft cBeKJibi h caxapHoro
rpocTHHKa? 8. FAe HamiHaeTCH 3ona nycTbiHb? 9. TAe naxoAHTCH
cydTponHHecKaa 30Ha? 10. Kaxon KAHMaT b cydTpomiHecKofi
30He? 11. Uto TyT pacTer? 12. B kskoh Haem CTpaHbi HaxoAHTCH
dojibuine peKH? 13. KaK bcjihkh npupoAHbie doraTCTBa CoBeT-
ckoto Coio3a? 14. FAe HaxoAHTca rjiasHbift paftoH ao6hhh
Hec|)TH? 15. TAe hexoahtch rjiaBHbie paftoHbi ao6hhh h odpadoT-
kh MeraAUOB? 16. Kanne nap6ah HacenniOT C.C.C.P.? 17. PiMeioT
JIH OHH CBOIO HaAHOHaJIbHyiO KVJIbTypy? 18. EcTb y K£OKAOrO H3
3THX HapOAOB CBOH HaUHOHaCIbHblH H3bIK H CBOH HapHOHaJIbHaH
HCTOpHH?

a. Give the plural declension of the following nouns:
eemb, xo3HHKa, uiKOJia, TejierpaMMa, mhjih, jisepb, MaB30Jiefl,
npHeM, CJIOBO, pOT
b. Repeat above exercise adding forms of 3T0T, tot, KOTOpbiH,
KaKOM, tukoh, and appropriate adjectives.
c. From the Reading Exercise write out all feminine nouns

giving their case, number, and English meaning, thus:
Ha KapTy Acc. Sing. “at the map”
aana^HWX rpaHHU Gen. PL “of the western borders”
d. In the following sentences change the boldface words into
the 'plural:
1. Bot moh KHHra, a TyT tboh ra3era. 2. Ha cmne hobssi
CKarepTb. 3. Be3 KapTw mm He 3HaeM Kax exaTb b AepeBHio. 4. B
3T0M CTapOM AOMe HeT HH OKHa HH ABepH. 5. y MOeft HOApyrH
SoraTbift 6paT. 6. Barn Apyr xopomo 3HaeT §Ty naaHTauHio.
7. Okojio Toft rpaHHUbi HaxoAHTca paBHHHa. 8. K ee coceAKe
npnexaA rocTb c Kasxa3a. 9. B AepeBHe ctpoht HOByro wxojiy.
10. Kto noexaji b 30Hy nycTbiHH? 11. Ha §tom reppHTOpHH HeT
FiAaHTauHH xayuyxa. 12. H He BCTpeTHAcn c §toh rpa>KAaHKOH
AeTOM. 13. % He OyAy cnopHTb o uene c npOAaBmHueft. 14. Mh
He 3HaKOMH C KyAbTypOH 3T0T0 HapOAS. 15. nOCMOTpIO, HeT AH
raaeTM noA Aeepbio.
e. Change the boldface words into the singular:

1. PaOoTa Ha nojinx Beâcb My>KHHHaMH. 2. flera ak>6ht
cbohx AeAymex. 3. B xoAxo3ax MyiKHHHaM asiot thaccavk) paSoTV.
4. CeroAHH mm riOAyuHAH nncbMa ot AeAyuiex. 5. 9th aom4
CTpOflT BaiHH A«AH. 6. CHAbHbIX MyVKHHH 3TO AeTXafl paOoTa.
7. Ohh TOBOpHAH O CBOHX OoraTbIX AHAHX. 8. Bbl He AOAiKHbl
TOBOpHTb C 3THMH My>XHHHaMH.
a. Supply the correct forms of the reflexive pronoun ce6a:

1. y.b AOMe h Mory TOBOpHTb, hto xouy. 2. Buepa h
npHTAacHA aah.hoboto yuHTeAH My3HKH. 3. 3a rpaHHueft
h xynHA.KpacHBoe naAbTO. 4. Mon cecTpa npnrAacHAa k
.rocTeH. 5. % cneuiHA x. b xoHTOpy. 6. Moh HteHa
210 HBAHUATb BTOPGP1 YPOK
HtiKorâ He ^yiviajia o.7. Mne KanceTcn, oh ajo6ht TOJibKO

.8. 51 eay b AepeBHK) h 6epy c.toabko oahh ueMOAaH.
9. Oh caw cmchach HaA.10. Ohs BcerAa AOBOAbHa.
b. Give tlie correct form of the pronouns in parentheses:

1. H (caM) yô>KHAa 4th BeipH b neMOAaHBi. 2. J\jin Hac (caw)
3T0 SblAG SOAbLUOH HOBOCTbK). 3. Y Hero (caM) HeT KBapTHpLI.
4. Bbl (caM) £OAJKHH 3T0 CAeAaTb. 5. 3aBTpa MOfi aBTOMObHAb
MHe (caM) 6yAeT HynceH. 6. J\aihe MHe (caMa) npoqecTb nncbMo.
7. H nponen Bee poMaHbi stoto nncaTeAfl, ho ero (caM) h HHKorAa
He bhaca. 8. Moh AeAyuiKa noAyuHA KHnry ot (caM) ToACToro.
9. H 3h3kom c ero cecTpoft, a c hhm (caM) a He 3HaKOM. 10. O Hac
(caM) Bbi h He cnpaniHBaHTe!

1. (Let me) kohhhtb imcaTb nncbMo Moeft noapyre. 2. (Let

me) noroBODHTb c Heft. 3. (Let ns) ceroAHH KynaTbCH b stom
03epe. 4. (Let us drive) 3aBTpa b AepeBHK). 5. (Let) h norAHAcy
Ha TBoer6 pedeHKa. 6. (Let) h npurAaiiiy TBoero ahaio k HaM b
tocth. 7. (Let me) noOoaroAapHTb xo3HHKy. 8. (Let us go) ceftqac
AOMoft. 9. (Let us rest) non bthmh AepeBbHMH. 10. (Let her)

HrpaeT Ha CKpHiuce. 11. (Let him) chaht AOMa, xorAa oh npocTy-
xceH. 12 (Let them) paccKaacyr xe6e o ach3hh b AepeBHe. 13. (Let
them) BbiHAyT H3 KOMHaTbi. 14. (Learn!) «yueHbe CBer, a He-
yqeHbe TbMa». 15. ToBapniHH, (work!)! Mh aoaachbi KOHHHTb
Hamy pabory ao Benepa! 16. (Who is to know), k2koh oh ueAO-
BeK! 17. (What am I to read) ceroAHH na ypoxe? 18. (What are
we to do) Tenepb? 19. (She is to go) b ropOA 3a noKynKaMH, a
(you are to drive) Ha padoTy. 20. (The secretary is to work) b
KOHTOpe, a (a worker is to work) Ha 3aBOAe.
A
1. Tonight my brother Sasha came to us and had his photo¬
graphs of Russia along (with himself). 2. He had been there,
and had himself seen the Russian cities, the broad rivers, the
mighty plains and forests, the high mountains of the Caucasus,
and the Ural. 3. After supper he said: “Now let us look at my
photos of Russia and let me explain each one.” 4. “Yes,” said
my sister, “let Sasha tell us all about his trip to Russia. I have
seen many parts of that huge country myself, but I always

love to hear Sasha tell about it. Now, good friends, listen!”
5. Sasha began (speaking): “Dear friends, do not think that
I shall speak about myself. You will not be bored. 6. I shall
speak only of Russia, its geography, its fauna and flora, its
national culture.” 7. Sasha took the first photo: “You can see
[for] yourself, what a wide river this is. It is the Volga,
‘Matushka Volga’ herself. 8. I myself have stood here, at this
very spot, and have crossed (neperuibiJi) this very river in
a small steamer.” 9. “Was your sister with you?” asked Peter.
“Let her tell about her trip to Russia.” 10. “Yes, of course, we
were together in Russia,” answered my brother quickly, “but
that isn’t news; you all know that already. 11. It is very late
already; we have very little time, and I want to show you all
these photos and tell you all about my life in Russia.” 12. Yes,
I thought, my brother does love to talk about himself. 13. But
let him talk, it is sometimes interesting and often very funny.
14. Of course, he does not know how funny his stories often
are (dbiBaioT). 15. “Let us look now at this second picture!”
I heard (“caught the sound” plus acc.) the voice of my brother
again. 16. “Do you see this enormous lake? Let me tell you a
remarkable story (hctophio) about it. I myself bathed in
it; I almost swam across (nepemibui) it . . . 17. Keep on
talking, dear brother; you cannot escape yourself! You will
always think and talk only about yourself! 18. But I am a busy
man (person) and must now write my report on the Soviet
Union.
B
1. Yesterday at a meeting in our club my friend John gave
(made) a very interesting report on (about) the geography of
Soviet Russia or the U.S.S.R. 2. He had been there last summer
and had seen the country from west to east and from north
to south. 3. He had taken a map along (with himself) to the
meeting. 4. On it he showed us that Soviet Russia occupies one-
sixth of the entire habitable land. 5. He told us that from the
western to the eastern borders of this great country [it was]
seven thousand miles. 6.1 asked him how many miles [it was]
from the northern to the southern borders of the U.S.S.R. 7. He
did not remember. 8. “I do not remember,” he said, “but cer¬
tainly it must be almost five thousand miles.” 9. And [then]
he quickly said: “Let us look at the map of Soviet Russia. 10. In
the North you see a blue zone. 11. Here the flora is very sparse
(poor). 12. In the center of the map you see a large green
212 HBAHUATb BTOPOH YPOK
zone. 13. Here are the great forests and, to the south, the region
of the forest-steppes and the mighty Russian plains. 14. Here
the soil is very fertile. 15. The Russian peasants can some¬
times bring in two harvests a year. 16. The red part of the
map indicates (shows) the subtropical zone and the desert.
17. To the north of the zone of the desert are very high moun¬
tains. 18. In the subtropical zone there are enormous plantations
of sugar cane and rubber trees and also beautiful orchards of
oranges and lemons.” 19. Yes, my friend’s report was very
interesting! 20. Tomorrow I shall go to the library and shall
read some books about Soviet Russia and look at photographs
of Russian cities, rivers, and mountains. 21. Perhaps I shall also
be able to find pictures of the main regions of the extraction
and processing of Russia’s oil and metals.
ABAAUATb TPETMi YPOK
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON
Genitive plural infix o or e in feminine nouns; declension of

Mart, and Aonb — Adjectives used as nouns — Comparison
of adjectives and adverbs: comparative
Ha Po>KAecTB6 At (for) Christmas
Ha Ilacxy At (for) Easter
rjiaea ceMbH Head of the family
3aMy>KeM 3a (instr.) Married (this form used only
of women)
>KeHaT Ha (prep.) Married (this form used only
of men)
>KeHHTbCH Ha (prep.) To marry (form used of men)
BbIXOJIHTb, BblfiXM 3aMyiK 3a To marry (form used of
(ace.) women)
HaKpbieaTb na ctoji To set the table
Bo rjiase cxojia At the head of the table
3a same 3AopoBbe! To your health! (toast)
CaaBa Eory! Thank God! Lit.: Glory to
God.
CnOKOflHOM hohh! Good night! Lit.: Of a restful
night
«B xecHoxe, Aa He b o6wAe» “Crowded close (together)
but not at variance”
II. READING: B ZIEHb nPA3ZIHMKA

MeM cxapuie h cxaHOBJiiocb, xeM name AyMaio o CBoeM Aex-
cxBe. B AexcTBe, ajih Hac He 6biJio dojiee cqacxjiHBoro BpeMeHH,
qeM npa3&HHKH. Ha PowAecxBo h Ha Ilacxy b HauieM AOMe codn-
pajiacb bch ceMbH.
fjiaBOM Hameii ceMbH dbuia dadyuiKa. 51 HHKorAa He Bcxpe-
naîa HceHmHHbi yMHee h HHxepeCHee ee. Y Hee dbuio nnxb ao-
qepefi h ABa ctraa. 51 dbuia ee BOCbMOH BHyHKOH. Bee AonepH
dbuiH 3aMyiKeM, cbiHOBbH dbuiH iKeHaxbi, Oh4 BbirjiHAejia moaoikc
cbohx Jier h BcerAa dbuia Becejia h nojma aHepruH.
213
214 HBAHUATb TPETHP1 YPOK
B AeHb npa3AHHKa, mm Bcerâ npocHJin pa36yAHTb Hac no-

paHbiue. Mli nocKopee OAesajiHCb h uiah b rocraHyio. A b cto-
aobo&, 6a6yuiKa ya<e eaKpbiBajia Ha ctoji. Oh4 6pajia CKarepTb
noKpacHBee, nocy^y nojiynwe, cepedpHHbie jioikkh, bhjikh, hoik#.
Pa3ABHra;iH nouiHpe ctoa, — h k oSe^y 3a ctojiom coGnpajiacb
bch ceMba!
«B TecHOTe, Aa He b o6HAe» — roBopHAa 6a6yuiKa. A y>K
eAH, CJiaea Gory, SbiJio AOCTaxonHo!
liaHHHajiH c 3aKycoK h boakh. — 3a same 3AOpoBbe, Aopo-
rde AeTH — roBOpHJia 6a6yuiKa. Flocjie 3aKycKH, asbejih cyn,
HHporH, noTOM Hcapnoe, a noTOM cjiaAKoe.
BaSyiiTKa CHAeaa bo rjiaBe cxojia. Oea BcerAa noMHHJia, kto
H3 AeTew aioSht rmpor c mhcom Cojibuie, neM nnpor c KanycToft,
KOMy A3-TB KycoK MHca noTOHbme, a KOMy noxoame, KOMy AaTb
noMenbuie cyna, a KOMy no6oAbiiie cjiaAKoro. Eh He hbao 6 mao
cnpauiHBaTb: — Tbi xoueiiib Haft c jhhmohom hah c moaokom? —
OHa 3HaAa, KOMy hsiao AaTb jkhakhA Haft, a KOMy AaTb Haft no-
Kpenne, kto ak)6ht Haft nocaame, a kto ribef ero cosceM 6ea
caxapa!
IlocAe o6eAa Bee luah b rocxftHyio. TyT kbjkabih Aeaaa, hto
XOTeA. KOMy npHHTHO 6bIA0 HTpaTb B KapTbl, TOT HrpaA B
KapTbi, a kto XOTeA Mrpaxb b uiaxMaxbi, — HrpaA b maxMaTbi.
>KeHin,HeaM ace BcerAa 6biao o h£m noroBOpHTb!
B ceMbe jik>6hah My3biKy. y mosh Maxepn 6ma oueHb xo-
poiimft roAOc. Ee BcerAa npocHAH neTb h OHa ocodeHHO xopomo
neAa pyccKHe necHH.
KorAa 3aKpbiBaAH b nepeAHeft ABepb 3a nocaeAHHM rocTeM,
6hao yxte tcmho. — Chokomhoh hohh! — roBopHAa SadyniKa h
mbi ycTaAbie, ho cnacTAHBbie hiah cnaTb.
III. VOCABULARY
BHAKa (O) fork oc66chho especially
BOAKa (o) vodka narwpoca cigarette
BHyHKa (e) granddaughter nnpor pie, cake
AeTCTBO childhood nocyAa dishes
AOCXaTOHHO enough pJOMKa (o) vine glass
eAa food CeMbH family
atapKoe roast meat cepe6pHHbift, silver
iKeATblft, yellow
©
a
n>
■
-'an, -'oe cnrapa cigar

aanycKa (o) hors d’oeuvre CAaAKoe dessert
3AopoBbe health yMHbift, clever
Kanycxa cabbage -'an, -'oe
AOJKKa (e) spoon nacxbift, frequent
HOIK knife -an, -'oe
oboihh (pi.) vegetables
TWENTY-THIRD LESSON 215
Verbs
GyAHTb; 6y>Ky, pa30yAMXb (CyAHXb) to awaken, rouse

OyAHUib, 6yA»T
BbirjiHAexb; BbirjisuKy, None to appear, seem
BbirJIHAHllIb, BbirJIHAHX
BbIXOAHXb 3aMyiK BbIHXH SaMyiK to marry
(XOAHXb) (haxh) (fem.)
MceHHXbesi; Hcemocb, iKCHHiubCJi, Mfensixcsi to marry
(Imperf. and Perf.) (mase.)1
pasABMraxb (I) pa3ABHHyxb; pa3ABHHy to extend, push
pa3ABHHeuib, apart, open
pa3ABHHyx
codnpaxbCH (I) coSpaxbca; cobepycb, to gather, meet

coSepeuibcfl, co6epyxca
cnaxb; cnjuo, cnmub, nocnaxb (cnaxb) to sleep
cnsiT
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Peculiarities in the feminine noun declension

1. Feminine nouns the stem of which ends in a double
consonant usually insert the vowel “o” or “e” in the genitive
plural: jioutKa, jioikck “spoon”; BMJiKa, bhjiok “fork.” The vowel
to be inserted will be indicated in the lesson vocabularies and
in the index as follows: JioiKKa (e); BHjiKa (o). Feminine nouns
of this type, the singular of which has been introduced in pre¬
ceding lessons, are: rpa>KAaHKa (o); KyxHH (o); cJiyiK6a (e);
necHsi (e); CKpHnna (o); coceAKa (o); obcxaHOBica (o); AepeBHH
(e) Note the -b in the genitive plural of: xyxoHb, AepeBeHb —
but necen, etc.
2. Declension of Maxb “mother” and AOBb “daughter”:
Singular Plural
Nom. Maxb Maxepw

Gen. MaTCpH MaTepeft
Dat. MaTepn MaxepHM
Ace. MaTb MaTepeft
Instr. Maxepbio MaxepaMH
Prep. MaTepH MaxepHx
i This form is also used when referring to a married couple.

216 HBAHUATb TPETHK YPOK
Like MaTb is declined mnb “daughter,” except in the in¬

strumental plural, where aoqb has the form noêpbMM.
B. Adjectives used as nouns

nepejiHM “entrance hall, lobby, vestibule,” crojioBasi “din¬
ing room,” rocTHHaa “living room, drawing room, parlor,”
yqeHbifl “scholar,” pa66nuu “worker”; are adjectives used as
nouns. They are declined like adjectives: nepeAHsm, nepermeft,
nepeAHK>io, nepe^HeM, nepejmeft etc.
C. Comparison of adjectives and adverbs
In Russian, as in English, there are three degrees of com¬
parison: the positive, the comparative, and the superlative.
The comparative and the superlative degrees each have two
forms: the compound and the simple.
1. Compound comparative:
a. To form the compound comparative of adjectives,1
predicate adjectives, or adverbs, place the unchanging form
Meaee “less,” Sojiee “more” before them, thus:
3to Menee (6ojiee) H3BecTHbift This is a less (more) famous
ropo/i,. city.
3necb MeHee (66jiee) Teruio, It is less (more) warm here
qeM TaM. than there.
Oh HHTaeT Menee (6ojiee) He reads less (more) quickly
SbiCTpo, qeM h. than I.
b. To form the comparative of nouns and verbs, MeHbuie
and dojibme are usually used, thus:
y MeHH MeHbuie (dojibme) jener (Gen.!), qeM y Hero.
I have less (more) money than he.
H MeHbuie (6ojibiue) UHTaio, qeM oh.
I read less (more) than he.
With the compound form of the comparative the conjunc¬
tion “than” is always translated by qeM:
3to 6ojiee bwcokhA rom, This is a higher house than
qeM Ham. ours.
1
When the comparative form of the adjective stands before the
noun and is declined, i.e., when it is used attributively, this compound
form must be used:
H xoqy XfHTb b dojiee I want to live in a more beautiful
KpaCHBOM AOMe. house.
2. Simple comparative in -ee (-efi):

To obtain the simple form of the comparative degree,
change the endings of the positive degree of the adjective (-wit,
-oh, -Hfi) or of the adverb (-o) to -ee (or -eit ):1
Positive Comparative English
HOBblfi HOBee or HOBeit newer

nb3AHHfl no3^nee or no3AHeft later
GbICTpO dbiCTpee or bbiCTpefl more quickly
3. Simple comparative in -e.:

Following is a list of such adjectives learned up to now.
Positive Comparative English
6JIH3KHH bJiHine nearer

6oraxwft Oorane richer
OOJIblHOH 6oJibuie bigger, more
BbICOKHH Bbime higher
jreiueBbiH jreuieBjie cheaper
Aoporoft AQpoHfe dearer, more expensive
>KapKHH mapHe hotter
>khakhh IKHIKe thinner, more diluted
jierKHH Jierne lighter, easier
MajieHbKHft MeHbrne smaller, less
MOJIOAOH MOjioHte, MJiaAiue younger
njioxoii xyme worse
paHHHH paHbuie earlier
CTapblH CTapuie older, elder
CJiajKHH cjiame sweeter
THXHH THUie quieter
TOJICTblH TOJime thicker
TOHKHH TOHbine thinner
y3KHH, yme narrower
XOpOlIIHM jiynuie better
nacTHH name more frequent (ly)
IHMpOKHfl uiHpe broader
AOJiro HOJibuie, AOJiee longer (of time)
Majio MeHbiue, Menee less
MHoro 66jibine, Qojiee more
1 Position of stress: Forms in -ee of not more than three syllables

carry the stress on the first e of the ending: HOBee, dbicxpee. Those of
more than three have the stress usually on the same syllable as in the
positive degree: mrrepecHbift, HHxepecHee; MejweHHbift, MejuieHHee.
218 ^BAMATb TPETMW YPOK
Simple comparative forms are indeclinable and never

change:
3tot hom HOBee; era cnaTepTb nosee; §th khhfh HOBee.
With the simple comparative, “than” can be rendered by
placing the noun or pronoun into the Genitive and omitting
neM, thus: Oh crapme Moero dpara; oh ciapme Mera.
But ueM must be used in a comparison of adverbs or
verbs: Tyx xojioAHee, neivi tsm. Oh Jiyquie nuuier, neM roBOpHT.
And with the pronouns ero, ee, hx to avoid ambiguity:
Moh padoTa Jiynme neM hx. My work is better than theirs.
«Moh pa66ra jryHiiie hx» would mean “My work is better than,
they are.”
4. Placing the prefix no before a simple comparative lends

it the meaning “somewhat more”:
nocKOpee somewhat more quickly noropmee somewhat hotter
nojiyuuie somewhat better nodoJiBuie somewhat more
5. The emphatic comparative is rendered by ropa3jro with

the simple comparative form;
Oh ropa3/io yMHee mchh. He is much cleverer than I am.
6. “The . . . the” is rendered by ieM . . . , tcm:

HeM dojibiue th roBOpHuib, reM Menbine- h cjiymaio.
The more you speak, the less I listen.
“As . . . as” is rendered ran xce...., ksk (h):
Oh xax )Ke jik»6ht roBopHTb no-pyccKH, KaK (h) si.
He likes to speak Russian as much as I do.
In the negative the me and h are never used:
Oh He Tan chjich, KaK a. He is not as strong as I am.
Note that Tame written in one word means “too, also,

likewise”:
H TaiOKe 3Haio am I too know this.
V. QUESTIONS
1. ricmeMy Bbi Tenepb name AyMaeTe o cbogm êTCTBe? 2. Ko¬

rAa coOnpajiacn bch ceMBH b BarneM AOMe? 3. Kto 6hji rjiaBoft
BaxueH ceMbH? 4. BcrpeuajiH jih bbi xceHinHHy yMHee h hhtc-
pecHee, ueM 6a6yiuKa? 5. Ckojibko y Hee 6bijiq Aouepeft h
CbiHOBen? 6. Bhjih jih Aouepn 3aMyxceM? 7. Bbijih jih CHHOBbH
>KeHaTbi? 8. Bbirjiazzejia jih oh4 CTaprne cbohx JieT? 9. KorAa bh
npocHjiH Bac pa36yAHTb b a^hb npa3AHHKa? 10. Htq AeJiajia
6a6yuiKa b ctojioboh? 11. KaKyw OHa 6pajia CKarepTb? 12. Ka-
Kyio OHa 6pajia nocyziy? 13. Kanne bhjikh, jiohckh h hozkh Opana
OHa? 14. rioneMy pa3ABHrajra ctoji nouinpe? 15. Hto roBopnjia
6a6yiuKa? 16. /XocTaTouHO jih Obijio eAH? 17. C Hero Bbi HauH-
h4jih o6eA? 18. Mto roBopnjia SaSyuiKa, Korâ see iihjih?
19. Hto AasajiH nocjie 3aKycKH? 20. Fê cHAeJia 6a6yniKa?
21. Hto OHa BcerAa riQMHHjia? 22. Kyâ see hi jih nocjie o6eAa?
23. Hto Bee AejiajiH b tocthhoh? 24. JIioShjih jih b ceMbe My*
3biKy? 25. BbiJi jih y MaTepH xopoumft rojioc? 26. Hto OHa
oco6eHHo xopomo nejia? 27. KorAa 3aKpbiBajiH ABepb b nepeA-
Heft 3a nocjieAHHM rocTeM? 28. Hto roBopnjia OaSymxa, KorAa
BH HI JIH cnaTb?
Give the correct ease form of the nouns in parentheses:

1. y mohx (coceAKH) 3aBTpa Oojibinoft npneM. 2. B ctojioboh,
Ha crojie, Her (jioikkh) ajih cyna. 3. Bbi 3HaeTe sthx (rpaiKAaH-
Ka). 4. ft BcerAa KjiaAy hohch okojio (BHJixa). 5. Moh MaTb hom-
hht mhoto pyccKHX (necHH). 6. CeroAHH b HarneM KJiySe SyAeT
AOKJiaA ajih (MaTb). 7. ft cHAy TyT, okojio Barneft (Aoub). 8. Y
3toh MOAOAoft (MaTb) 3aMeqaTejibHbie a^th. 9. K ee (AOHb)
npnexaji Myxc. 10. y re6A hct Apyra jiyuiue (MaTb). 11. Mbi jik>
6hm HaniHX (MaTb). 12. C (MaTb) HeAb3H cnopHTb. 13. OHa yxte
ABa MecHiia HHuero He 3HaeT o cbohx (aohb). 14. Oh nacTO tobo-
Pht o CBOeft (MaTb).
Give the correct case form of the nouns in parentheses:

1. B hx KBapTHpe HeT (nepeAHHH). 2. M3 (cTOjiQBaa) mbi
nomjiH b 3. ft oueHb aobojich Harneft (rocTHHaa).
(rocTHHan).
4. Moh KOMHara MeacAy (ctoaobsh) h (rocTHHaa). 5. Mbi KyimjiH
220 XUBAAUATb TPETHW YPOK
HOByio oficTanoBKy juia csoeft (rocTHHan). 6. Fae bm odeAaeTe,

b (cTOJioBan)? 7. B sthx KBapTHpax ajih (pa66uHe) b (nepeA-
hhh) HeT qkoh. 8. B AeTCTse, a noMHK), a He aioOha nameH (ro-
cTHHaa). 9. B AOMe (yueHLiii) 6buik 6ojibmka (rocTHHaa). 10. B
AeHb npa3AHHKa bch ceMba coSnpajiacb b (CTOJiOBaa), a hotom
b (rocTHHaa). 11. Bbi He 3naeTe 3Toro 3HaMeHHToro (yqeHbra)?
12. y STOro (paSoaHH) Sojibrnan ceMBH. 13. (Pa6oHHH) HHorâ
paSoTawT BQceMb hjih jeBHTb qacoB b AeHb. 14. SnaMeHHTbie
(yqenbiH) 6yAyr npenoAaBaTb b HarneM yHHBepcHTeTe.
a. From the Reading Exercise write out all comparative forms

and give their English meaning (18 forms in all).
b. Give the compound comparative form of the adjectives in

parentheses:
1. Oh xcHBeT b (KpacHBbift) AOMe, ueM a. 2. Tbi HHTaeiiib

(HHTepecHan) KHHry. 3. Oh4 (yMHafl) acemuHHa, ueM h AyMaji.
4. Mbi Bceryta nteM (cjiaAKHn) uaft. 5. B Mockobckom yHHBepcH-
Teie (H3BecTHbiH) npocjieccopa, ueM b HarneM yHHBepcHTeTe.
6. H He nOMHK) (cqacTJIHBBlft) AHH. 7. JlOKTOp IleTpOB OHeHb
CKyuHbiH uejiOBeK; 3Haji jih th (cKyuHbm) qejiOBeKa? 8. 51 HHKoiyia
He BCTpeqaji (yMHaa) h (HHTepecHaa) xceHiAHHM. 9. Hx aom ctoht
Ha (ninpoKan) yAHpe, ueM Ham. 10. Ectb jih (AerKaa) 3aAana,
qeM 9Ta? 11. Ta (SeJiaa) SyMara, ueM 9Ta. 12. Bhacjih bm (qep-
naa) cHrapy, hcm ary?
c. In the above sentences, whenever the context permits, use
MeHee to form the comparative.
d. Supply the correct endings of the comparative:
1. MHe npHATH— exaTb TpavmaeM, ueM MeTpo. 2. 51 He BCTpe-

qaji uceHLUHHbi HHTepecH— Moen MarepH. 3. 3tot nejioBeK HHTaer
6mct—' MeHH. 4. BaM BeceJi—7 b rocTax, neM AOMa? 5. HeT 66-
Jiee cuyuH— 3aHHTHH, ueM Hrparb b napTbi. 6. B ropax B03Ayx
CBenc—neM 3Aecb b AepeBHe. 7. BeuepOM xoaoah—' ueM ah£m.
8. Kto chjibh—tboh 6paT hjih tbi? 9. 4to bsjkh—: yqHTbcn hjih
paSoTaTb b K0AX03e? 10. 3to Kpecjio yno6H— Bamero AHBaHa.
e. Give the simple comparative forms of the adjectives and

adverbs in parentheses:
1. Teriepb h achby (6jih3ko) k niKOJie. 2. 51 Kypio (mhoto) na-
nHpoc, neM moh TOBapHmH. 3. Moh MaTb 6buia (MOJiOAan) Moero
OTu,a.4.'LleM (bmcoko) mm noAHHMajmcb b ropbi, tcm KpaciiBee 6ma
bha- 5. CeroAHH a xoay (patio) yexarh aomoh. 6. TlaftTe MHe,
noacajiyHCTa, (MaAo) MHca. 7. Baina cxaTepTb (6ejiaa) Moeft.
8. 3tot pa6ouHH (SoraTbiia) toto yuHTejm. 9. 3xa KHnra (toh-
Kan), neM stot >xypHaji. 10. KpecibHHaM He (jierKo) xmTb.

11. HeM (bbicoko) haSt 3Ta Aopora, TeM OHa (iimpoKan). 12. HeM
(crapaH) OHa craHOBHTCH, TeM (MHoro) oh4 noxonca Ha cboio
MaTb. 13. Mow 6par ynftjiCH (nnoxo) mchh. 14. B ero caAy
AepeBbH (MOJioAtie) h (tohkhc) HeM b narneM. 15. Oh roBopHT
no-pyccKH (xoporno), hcm h. 16. Baum neMOAaHH (MajieHbKHe)
h b hhx (jierKo) yjro^cHTb Beum. 17. HeM (nacTo) h dbisaio
Ha KOHueprax, TeM (MHoro) hjhoSjik) pyccxyio My3biKy. 18. Ee
AeTK (TOJiCTbie), neM Baum. 19. Bnepa a nuji Haft eipe (cjiaAKHft),
neM ceroAHH. 20. Ona 6buia npoeryxceHa TpH ah a, ho Tenepb eft
(xoporno).
f. Translate the expressions in parentheses -.

1. Hahtc (somewhat faster) AOMoft. 2. Pa3ABHHbTe ctoji
(somewhat wider). 3. H Jiiodjik) uaft (somewhat sweeter). 4. nnuift-
Te MHe (a bit more frequently). 5. Tbi ayHine (somewhat less)
roBOpft, a (somewhat more) CJiymaft! 6. (The) dojibiue oh HHTaJi,
(the) dojibuie oh 3Haji. 7. Oh 3Haji (as) MHoro (as) OHa. 8. Oh
3Haji Sojibine (than I). 9. Oh roBOpftji MeHbrne, (than) AyMaA.
10. Oh yMHee h CHJibnee (than you). 11. Oh4 He HHTajia (as)
mhoto (as) ee OTep. 12. Oh 6bui cuacTJiHBee (than his brother).
13. BbiBajiH Bbi b TeaTpe (as) nacTo (as) oh? 14. B ropoAe JieTOM
Hcapne, (than) b AepeBHe. 15. (The) Bbirne b ropy, (the) MeAJieH-
Hee meji noe3A.
Vn. TRANSLATION INTO RUSSIAN

A
1. Our Russian friends always invited us for Easter. 2. It
was a large family, larger than ours. 3. The sons and daugh¬
ters were married and had children. 4. At Christmas and Easter
they all gathered in the house of their grandfather. 5. I have
never met a more interesting and clever man. 6. He was the
head of the family. 7. At dinner and supper he always sat at
the head of the table. 8. The dining room was small. 9. There
was not enough room at the table for the large family and the
guests. 10. But grandfather laughed and said: “Crowded to¬
gether but not at variance.” 11. “God be thanked, there is food
enough! Eat, drink and be merry, children! Here’s to your
health.” 12. We started with hors d’oeuvres and (with) fine
Russian vodka. 13. Then they gave us soup and pies., the meat
course, and the dessert. 14. After dinner we all went into
the living room. 15. I always played cards with the older chil¬
dren. 16. One of the older daughters had a beautiful voice and
sang Russian songs or arias from Russian operas. 17. Easter at
our Russian friends was always a great event in our life.
18. The older I grow the more frequently I think of those happy
days.
222 fiBAffilATb TPETHPI YPOK
1. Two weeks ago my younger sister Vera married our good

friend Semyonov. 2. Semyonov is much older than my sister.
3. He had been married and is the head of a very large family.
4. He has five daughters and three sons. 5. But his first wife
died (yMepjia) three years ago and all his sons and daughters
are now married. 6. Semyonov is very wealthy, much richer
than our father; he even has more money than our rich Uncle
Vanya. 7. He lived in a larger and more beautiful house than
ours. 8. But now he and Vera live in the country; their country
house is much smaller but more comfortable and cozier than
their city house. 9. Everything in the new house is smaller: the
entrance hall is narrower, and the living room is not so long
and wide; there is no dining room; one eats in the comfortable
kitchen. 10. A few days ago Vera wrote us that she likes her
life in the country much better than life in the city. 11. She
has much more energy, gets up earlier, works more, takes more
frequent walks (walks more frequently), eats less and feels
much better. 12. “Country life is less noisy and much health-
ier,” she writes. “In the summer it is not so hot and the air
here is always much fresher. 13. And the sky seems (appears)
bluer, the trees taller and greener; nature seems so much more
beautiful here than in our city parks. 14. And life is also
cheaper: meat, milk, and vegetables are all cheaper; only
dresses, hats, shoes, and such things are a little more expensive.
15. The longer I live here, the better (more) I like it (here).
This little old village, our little house, everything grows (be¬
comes) more dear to me with every day. 16. Here I do not need
to hurry, for everything is so much nearer: it is nearer from
our house to the department store; from the store to the bank
and the post office; from the post office to the movie house and
the very fine restaurant. 17. We also live nearer to the church
than we lived in the city. Yes, life here is much simpler, easier,
cheaper, more comfortable! 18. In the evening (of evenings) I
am not tired at all and can read and think and write much
more than I could in the city; in the mornings—when I want
to (get the desire) — I can sleep much longer and get up later,
for it is not so noisy here.” 19. We are all very happy that Vera
is so satisfied with her new life in the country. 20. Our father
often says: “Thank God, Vera lives in the country. There she
will be (become) happier, healthier, wealthier. Tame eênib,
Aamuie 6y,neiiib!’ ”—and our father is always right!
flBAAUATb HETBEPTblH YPOK
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON
Comparison of adjectives and adverbs: superlative — Pronoun-

adjective Becb — Cardinals and ordinals 13 - 40; summary
of case requirements after cardinals
Mrpaxb pojib To play a role

XoproBbiH nyxb Trade route
Beepx no Bojire Up the Volga; towards its
source
Hn>Ke no xeneHHK) Lower down the stream,
downstream
Bbime no xeneHmo Higher up the stream,
upstream
Co Bcex kohuob ... From all corners (parts)
EjiaroaapH (-}-dat.) Thanks to (because of)
MCXOHHHK SJieKXpHHeCKOfl The source of electric power
anepmn
ii. reading: BOJirA
Bojira — OAHa H3 caMbix KpacwBbix pen b Mupe. Oh4 jiJiHHHee

scex pex Eeponbi. Oh4, KOHeqHo, cawasi H3BecxHau pexa b Pocchh.
B HCxopu'H Pocchh oHa Hrpajia BaiKHeSinyio pojib. O Bo/ire name
Bcero nok)T necHH.
B caMOM panneM nepnoAe pyccKOH hctophh BoAra dbiAa
caMbiM rjiaBHbiM xoproBbiM nyxeM c 3anaAa Ha boctok. Yxce b
bocbmom Bene Ha 6eperax Bojira, y KacnMcKoro Mopn,1 BCTpe-
qajiHCb HapoAbi m3 pa3Hbix cxpaH.
no3AHee Hh>khhh HoBropoA,2 — Bbime no xeneHHFO Bojira —
cxau rjiaBHbiM ueuxpoM xoproBAH. KaxcAbift roA Ha BoAry b Hhhc-
hhh HoBropoA npHe3xcaAH npoAaBpbi co Bcex kohuob Pocchh h
K3 Apyrnx cxpaH.
1 KacnAftcKoe Mope “Caspian Sea.”

2 HmKHHft HoBropoA “Nizhni! Novgorod” {Lit,: the lower new city,
now Gorki! in honor of the Soviet writer Maxim Gorki!).
223
224 ^BAJWATb METBEPTblEf YPOK
3£ecb mo>kho 6hao yBHfleTb Mexa c cesepa, nan h inejiK c

BOCTOKa, rnepcTb h noAOTHO c 3anaAa, H3 EBponbi, BHHa, kobph
— c ibra, c KaBKa3a.
B Cobgtckoh Pocchh Bonra saHHMaeT eme SoAee BaoKHoe
Mecto b HapoAHOM xo3BH'CTBe cTpaHbi. 3a nocjieAHHe qeTbipnaAA
uaxb jieT pexa oneHb H3MeHHJiacb. PaHbiue Boara 6biJia yace h
MeHee rny6oKa Ha ceBepe h tojibko hhikc no TeqeHWK) oh a ctaho-
BHJiacb ixiHpoKOH peKon. Tenepb xce, SjiaroAapn 3aMe4aTejibHett-
uiefl CHCTeMe KananoB h nAOTiiH, Bonra CTajia rjiyOnce h MiHpe
Bcex ApyrAx pen EBponbi.
H3 KacnHHCKoro Mopa, BBepx no Bojire, nawByT napoxoAbi
h jiojikr ao ropOAa Mockbm! PaHbiue Mockba 6biaa nopTOM
xpex Mopen (BanraHCKoro, Benoro, KacnMcKoro)/ a Tenepb,
kotaA okohhhah cTpoHTb xaHan BoAra-/XoH, OHa CTana nopTOM
nHTH Mopen.1 2
Bonra He MeHee Bamia, Rax hctohhhk sneKTpifaecKoft seep-
oih. 3tot bha sHepran AeineBAe Bcex ApyrHx. Ha Seperax Bonra
CTOAT OrpOMHbie 3AeKTpOCTaHpHH H THApOCTaHAHH. COBeTCKOe
npaBHTeAbCTBO xoneT cnenaTb Bonry conexTpnqecxHM cepAUeM»
3Toro xpan.
III. VOCABULARY
6eper shore, bank HH3KHft, low

OOAbHHUa hospital -'aa, -'oe
Bex century, age nepHOA period
BHHO wine nAOTHHa dam
rHApOCTaHUHA water power nOAOTHO linen
station nopT port, harbor
rny6>xe deeper npaBHTeAbCTBO government
TAyCoKHH, deep npOAaeeu (fe) salesman,
-aa, -'oe tradesman
Kanaji canal, channel cepAue (e) heart
Kpaft border, country, cwcTeMa system
region TOprOBAH trade
AOAKa (o) boat LUeAK silk
Mex fur, pelt 3AeKTpHHeCKHH, electric
Mope sea -a«, -oe
HHIKe lower SAeKTpOCTaHUHH power station
1 EajiTHftcKoro “of the Baltic Sea”; Eejioro “of the White Sea,”
KacnHflcKoro “of the Caspian Sea.”
2 HepHoro, A30BCKoro in addition to the above three. Hepnoro
“of the Black Sea”; A36bckofo “of the Azov Sea.”
TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON 225
Verbs
.HOrOHHTb (I) HorHaxb, jioroHio, to catch up with

AOrOHHUIb, AOrOHHT
nabiTb; njibiey nonjibiTb (njibiTb) to set sail, swim,
njibieeuib, njibiByx float
CTOHTb; CTOK) nocTOaxb (cxonxb) to stand
CXOHlUb, CTOHT
CTpOHTb (II) nocxpowxb (II) to build
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Comparison of adjectives and adverbs (continued)
1. The compound superlative with caMbifi:
To obtain this form of the superlative degree, use the posi¬
tive degree of the adjective together with caMbii, -'aa, -'oe, “the
most”:
3xo caMbiit aoporoii nail. This is the most expensive tea.

3to caiwasi yMHaa H:eHmHHa. This is the cleverest woman.
3to cpMoe 6ojibiu6e 3AaHHe. This is the biggest building.
Mbi b caMoii Gojibiuoft We are in the biggest room.
KOMHaTe.
Ohh ^HTaioT caMbie They read the most interesting
HHTepecHbie khm™. books.
a. CaMbift is declined like an adjective in -bift and must

agree in number, gender, and case with the adjective it modi¬
fies.
b. This form can be used only attributively or predi-

catively, never adverbially:
Attributively 3to caMasi yumaa This is the cleverest
xtemiiHHa. woman.
Predicatively 3ra HceHiitHHa caiwafl This woman is the
yMHaa. cleverest (one)
2. The simple superlative ending in -etimHw or in -afiuiHft:1

To obtain this form, drop the endings (-wft, -6fi, -ail, etc.)
1
The superlative can also be formed with certain adjectives by
prefixing the syllables npe- and Haa-: npedojibuioE “very big”; HaHjrymuHfl
“very best”; Hanxymmift “the very worst.” These forms heed be known
only for recognition.
226 jlBAZlUATb HETBEPTblP! YPOK
of the adjective and add to the stem the ending -efiuiHii, -efiuiaa,
-efiuiee:
yMi® (bifi): yMH -f e&uiHii = yMHeiliiiHfi most clever
If the stem of an adjective ends in a sibilant sound^ (hk, %
in m, u) or in a guttural (r, k, x), add the ending -ail in Hi
etc., and change the stem consonant (usual changes: 3K to >k; k
to h):
6jih3k(hh): 6jih>k + Muimu = SjmjKailuiHfl nearest
BejiHK(Hii): BejiHH -f- aftinnil = BejmviafimHH greatest
a. This superlative form must agree in number, gender,
and case with the noun it modifies. Its declension is that of an
adjective the stem of which ends in a sibilant sound (e.g.
xopoumft):
yMnefiniHii CTy/teHT; yMHeftmero CTyêHTa; yMHeHineMy CTy-
AeHry etc.
yMHeHinaa }KeHiu,HHa; yMHeMiiieii xceHiu,HHbi; yMHeHineH >KeH-

mHHe etc..
This simple or “absolute” superlative is used most fre¬
quently when no object of comparison is mentioned; it is ex¬
pressive of a high degree of some quality. It is less common
than the superlative in caMbiM.
b. The forms BbicuiHfi “highest,” jiymimfi “best,” xyAoieft
“worst,” MeHbuiHfi “smallest,” MJiaauiHH “youngest,” cxap-
iiiHM “eldest,” “senior” have a comparative as well as a super¬
lative meaning.
3. The superlative degree may also be expressed by a
phrase consisting of a comparative (e. g. 6ojibuie) and scero
(than anything) or scex (than anyone):
51 GoJibiue Bcero jnobîib Best of all I like to play tennis.

HrpaTb B TeHHHC.
51 6ojibuie Bcex jik>6jik) I like to play tennis more than
nrparb b TeHHHc. any one else (likes to).
q jiyqme Bcero I play chess better than any

HrpaK) b uiaxMaTbi. other game.
51 jiyHine Bcex I play chess better than any-
nrpaio b uiaxMaTbi. one else (plays it).
Generally, Bcero should be used when referring to actions

and Bcex when referring to persons and objects. This form of
the superlative can only be used adverbially or predicatively,
never attributively:
Oh Jiymue Bcex Hrpaex b tchhhc; oh yMHee Bcex.
B. Declension of the pronoun-adjective Becb, ece, bch “all,

whole, entire”
PL All
Masc. Neui. Fem. Genders
Nom. Becb Bee BCH ece
Gen. Bcero ecero Bceft Bcex
Dat. BceMy BceMy Bcei BceM
Ace. N. or G. Bee BCK) N. or G.
Instr. BC6M BceM Bceft (eio) BceMH
Prep. BceM BceM Bcefl Bcex
c. Numerals
Cardinals Ordinals
kT TpHHa;maTb TpHHaûaTbift, -an, - oe 13th

14 nexbipHajmaxb nex bipHatmaxw it, - an, - oe 14th
15 nHTHaimaxb nHXHajuaxbifi, -an, -oe 15th
16 uiecTHaûaTb tuecxHajuaxbift, - an, - oe 16th
17 ceMHaûarb ceMHaûaxbifl, - an, - oe 17th
18 BoceMHaûaib BoceMHaûaxbift, -an, -oe 18th
19 êBHTHaûaib êBflXHajmaxbifi, -an, -oe 19th
20 ^BajmaTb ^Bajmaxwft, -'an, -'oe 20th
21 ^BaAUaTb oahh AeaAuaxb nepBbifi, -'an, -'oe 21th
22 ABaAUaTb êa ^BaAuaxL Bxopofl, - an, - oe 22th
23 ^sazmaTb rpw ABaûaxb xpexHft, -'bn, -'be 23rd
30 TpHjmaTb xpHûaxbifl, -'an, -'oe 30th
40 COpOK COpOKOBOfi, -an, - oe 40th
1. Remarks on ordinals:
a. Ordinals 9th to 20th, and 30th, are formed by dropping

the ending -b of the respective cardinal and adding the endings
-Mfi, -an, -oe, the position of stress remaining the same as on
the cardinal, except with 20.
b. In compound ordinals only the last component part has

the ordinal form, the others being cardinals: ABaauaxb nepBbift,
TpHflUaXb BTopofi, etc.1
1 For declension of ordinals see Lesson 19.

228 HBAXJUATb HETBEPTbIPl YPOK
2. Summary of case requirements after cardinal numer¬

als:1
a. After one (1) and all its compounds (except 11) both
the noun and the adjective are in the nominative singular:
ABaÛ,aTb OJJ.HH XOpOLLlMlt yueHHK
21 good students
b. After all compounds of 2, 3, 4 (except 12, 13, 14) the
noun is in the genitive singular and the adjective in the geni¬
tive plural:
TpuzmaTb ABa (TpH, qeibipe) xopomux yueHHxa
32 (33, 34) good students
c. After the numerals 5-20, 25-30, 35-40, etc., both the noun
and the adjective are in the genitive plural:
copoK nflTb (uiecTb, ceMb etc.) xopomux yuemiKOB
45 (46, 47, etc.) good students
VOCABULARY BUILDING — TABLE OF ADJECTIVES

Review and Supplement
Antonyms
60JlbIU0H : MajieHbKHfi big small

lUHpOKH# : y3KHH broad narrow
BWCOKHft : HH3KHfi high low
JUJIHHHbltt : KOpOTKHfl long short
TOJICTblfi : TOHKHH thick thin
TJDKeJIblft : JierKHH heavy light
6JIH3KHH : naaeKHft near far
KpenKHfl : JKHAKHfi strong weak (tea)
ropflHHH
: XOJIOUHblfi hot cold
IKapKHft
CKyHHblfl : Beceawft boring merry
npOCTOH : CJIOHiHblfl simple complex
nOXOHiHft : pa3JiHHHbiii like : different
GenHbift poor
: SoraTbift
HHmuif beggarly 1 rich
UiyMHblH : THXHii noisy : quiet
1 These rules hold only when the numerals are in the nominative
case or a case like the nominative, i.e.,the accusative. For a final
summary of rules, see Grammar C, 2 of Lesson 26.
OTKpbITbIM : 3aKpbiTbifl open closed

Aoporoft : aeuieBbiH expensive cheap
3aHHTOfl : CB060AHbIH busy free
GOJlbHOH : 3AOpOBblft sick healthy
MepiBblH : >khboh dead (a) live
HOBbli n ew
: cxapbifl old
MOJlOAOi young
MJiaAIUHH : cxapuiHH youngest oldest
byAymHH : npounibift future past
nepBbift : nocjieAHHii first last
qacTbifl : peAKHH frequent rare
paHHHH : 003AHHH early late
OCeHHHH : BeceHHMfi fall spring
3MMHHM : JiexHHfi winter summer
Colors: bejibist white; cmhhh blue; nepHbift black; KpacHbift red;

ucejiTbiH yellow; aejieHMfl green
Synonyms
(Related but not identical in meaning)
xopoiiiHH — npeKpacHbift fine —• excellent
H3BeCTHblft — 3HaMeHHTblfl well-known — famous
f MHJIbli dear — beloved
AOpOrOH |
CUaCTJIHBblH ] happy — joyous — content

V JIOBOJIbHblM
paÔCTHblfl J A
. ,„ f BejIHKHft great — mighty — huge

SOJIbUIO# | orpoMHblii
3aMeHaTejibHbifi — HexepecHbm remarkable — interesting
V. QUESTIONS
1. KaKaa pexa oah£ h3 c&mhx KpacHBbix b MHpe? 2. Kanaa

pexa A-nuHHee Bcex pex EBponr.1? 3. Kaxaa pexa caMan H BecTHaa 3
b Pocchh? 4. Kaxyio pojib nrpajia BoJira b hctophh Pocchh?
5. IloueMy 6buia BaxcHa BoJira b caMOM paHHeM nepuoAe pyccKOH
230 jlBAÛATb HETBEPTbIPl YPOK
HCTOpHH? rê B BOCbMOM BeKe BCTpeqaAHCb HapOAbI H3 pasHbix

cxpaH ? 7. IIo3AHee xaxoH ropoA CTaA niaBHbiM ueHTpoM TOp-
tobah? 8. Kto npHe3x<aji Kane ah ft roA Ha Bojiry b Hhjkhhh
HoBropOA? 9. Hto mohcho 6hao yBHAeTb b to BpeMH b HfDKHeM
HoBropoAe? 10. Kaxoe MecTO 3aHHMaer Bojira b HapoAHOM xo-
3HHCTBe CoBeTCKOH Pocchh? 11. BAarOAapft neMy Bojira CTajra
mftpe Bcex Apyrnx pex EBponbi? 12. KyAa ruibiByr napoxoAH h
aoakh H3 Kacnftftcxoro Mopn? 13. IlopTOM ckoabkhx Mopeft 6hijik
paHbine MocKBa? 14. IlopTOM Kaxftx Mopeft panbiue 6 ha btot
ropoA? 15. KorAa MocKBa -cTaAa nopTOM iihth Mopeft? 16. Kaxiix
iihth Mopeft? 17. MeM eipe BaACHa pexa BoAra? 18. Kaxoft caMbift
AemeBbiH bha SHeprnn? 19. Hto ctoht Ha Seperax Boath? 20. MeM
xoneT CoBeTCKoe npaBHTeAbCTBO cAeAaTb BoAry?
a. Give the comparative forms of the adjectives in parentheses

and fill in the space with the compound superlative form of the same
adjective:
1. B btom yHHBepcaAbHOM Mara3HHe bbi Moxcere KynnTB
paAHO (AeuieBbift), qeM b tom yHHBepcaAbHOM Mara3HHe, ho
.paAHO h xynHA b MocxBe. 2. Pexa MocKBa Tenepb
(iHHpoKHH), qeM paHbiue, ho .pena b eBponeftcxofi:
Pocchh, sto BoAra. 3. Hama Aaqa ctoht Ha 6oAee HH3KOM Mecre,
qeM Bama; aom Moero 6paTa ctoht eme (hh3khh), qeM Ham, ho
.mocto 3Aecb okoao 03epa. 4. Hamn SyAbBapbi (y3KHft)
mockobckhx, ho . 6yAbBapbi h bhaea b Hhachom
HoBropoAe. 5. MnxaftA, KOHeqHO, (yMHbift) cBoero 6paTa, ho
.y HHX B ceMbe 3T0 PiBaH. 6. 3T0 AeTO (aojkaahbbih),
qeM npomAoe, ho.AeTO 6hao TpH toah TOMy Ha3aA.
7. B sameM ropOAe opxecTp (xopouiHft), qeM b HameM, ho.
.OpKeCTpbl B MOC'KBe. 8. % TyT BHAeA KpaCHBbie KOBpbl,
(KpacHBbie), qeM y Hac b Ch6hph, a bot.KOBpbi Ha
KaBKa3e. 9. Ona HHTepecHaa AceHiAHHa, (HHTepecHan) CBoeft
MaTepH, ho, KOHeqHO,.xieHiuHHa 3Aecb bto neBHi;a
BapcoBa. 10. Mne (yAoSHbift) CHAeTb Ha AHB£me, qeM Ha dyne,
HO.MeCTO B TOCTHHOH 9TO TO KpeCAO y OKHa.
b. Give the simple superlative form of the adjectives in paren¬
theses :
1. B AOTCTBe oh 6ha (mhahh) peSeHKOM. 2. Bbi SyAeTe

okoao (6AH3Kan) noHTbi qepe3 agchtb mhhyt. 3. H3 okh4 Moefi
KOMHaTH (npeKpacHbiH) bha. 4. Oh (yMHbrn) qejioBex. 5. Bot

(hobhh) SoJibHHixa. 6. 3to (AAHHHaa) hctophh. 7. B Ham ymi-
sepcHTeT npHrJiacHJin (HSBecTHbift) yqeHbix. 8. 51 cnacy b ro-
cthhoh b (yAodHoe) Kpecjie. 9. B hctophh Pocchh BoAra nrpajia
(Baamaa) pOAb. 10. CjiymaTb pa/mo rjia MeHa (npHaraoe) 3a-
HHTH6. 11. Bqepa BeqepoM meji (cftAbHbift) ROMRh. 12. Ha Bojire
(saMeqaTejibHbie) rHApocraHitHH. 13. CeroAHa a (cqacTAHBbift)
qejiOBeK. 14. Moa dadyniKa 6 bia a mohm (6ah3khh) ApyroM.
Give the correct case forms of the pronouns in parentheses:
1. IlpHe3A MHXaHJia 6bIA HOBOCTbK) AM (BCa) CeMbH.

2. OTKpHTHe yHHBepcHTera 6biao SojibmHM codbiraeM am
(secb) ropoAa. 3. Mbi ocMoTpejiH (bch) OojibHHuy. 4. % cnpa-
niHBaji o uene stoh ihahiih y (Bee) npoAaBmftu. 5. MaTb asm
hOaokh (Bee) AeraM. 6. 51 BbiyqnA (Becb) ypoK. 7. 51 npomaAca
co (Bee) yqnreAaMH. S. B MocKBe a 6bia bo (Bee) TeaTpax. 9. O
(bch) 3toh hctophh (affair) a y3HaA toabko sqepa BeqepoM.
10. 51 no3HaKOMHAca co (bcb) ero ceMbeft Ha Aaqe.
Exercise with Grammar 4 and B
1. Moft 6paT qHTaeT (better than anyone else). 2. y Moeft

AoqepH npexpacHbiH toaoc, (best of all) 0Ha noer pyccKHe
necHH. 3. BoAra (wider than any) pen EBponH. 4. FIpOAOAacaTb
o6pa30BaHHe am Teda ceftqac (most important of all). 5. B
ceMbe a 6ha (older than anyone else). 6. Rjm KaacAoft Marepn ee
AeTH eft (dearer than anyone else) b MHpe. 7. IIIeAK h noAOTHO
mo>kho KynftTb (cheapest of all) Ha pacnpOAaace. 8. 51 iiqmhio,
hto 9to bhho 6hao (strongest of all). 9. 51 3naio pyccKHH H3HK
(least [worst] of all). 10. 3to 03epo (deeper than any) Apyrftx
03ep b CTpaHe.
Write out the numerals in Russian and supply the adjective and
noun endings:
1. Ha depery peicft (12) hob— 3AaH—. 2. B MoeM BaroHe

(18) yAodH— MecT—. 3. Y Hac b doAbHHije (14) pyccK— aok-
232 JlBAJlLIATb HETBEPTbIPI yPOK
TOP—. 4. Ha 3aBOAe (35) pyccK— pad oh—, 5. K naM npnexajiH

(19) aMepHKaHCK— yneH—. 6. B KQHxope (11) MajieubK—
naKeT—. 7. B yHHBepCHTeTe (47) nJiox—' cxyêHT . 8. Bot yxce
(15th) Aenb, KaK Hêx aotkak 9. HcxopHH Pocchh Moft (2nd)
3K3aMeH. 10. H xomy Ha (19th) axa)K—
A
1. On the thirteenth of June a new school was opened
(they opened) in our city. 2. It is one of the largest and most
beautiful schools in the whole city. 3. It is also the highest;
the building has eight floors (aTa*), and on each floor are 25
large classrooms. 4. My class is the largest; in it there are 41
students—28 boys and 13 girls. 5. My older brother is first in
his class; he is one of the very best students in the whole
school. 6. I am only 15th, but my teacher told me that I read
better than anyone else in the class. 7. I like reading (to read)
best of all, better than playing tennis or even chess. 8. There
are 35 teachers in the school—18 men teachers and 17 lady
teachers. My teacher is the youngest of them all. 9. The school
has an excellent library. I do not know how many books
there are in it, but I do know that there are 34 different period¬
icals—14 American, 10 English, 7 French, and 3 Russian.
10. The only library bigger than ours is in the center of the
city. It is the biggest library not only in our city but in the
whole state. 11. That library plays a most important role
in my life. 12. Four years ago my older brother showed it to
me, and now we drive there once or even twice a week, more
frequently than all other students in our school. 13. I am
very interested in the geography of Russia and like best of
all to read books about Russia’s most famous rivers, moun¬
tains, mighty plains, and about its oldest as well as its most
modern (newest) cities. 14. Yesterday I read in a most inter¬
esting book that Soviet Russia now occupies one-sixth of the
entire habitable landmass. 15. It has the most varied climates,
living conditions (conditions of life), and natural resources.
16. I think it is the largest country in the whole world, even
larger than the United States. 17. From its western to its
eastern borders it is 7,000 miles, and from its southern to its
northern borders it is almost 4,000 miles. 18. Within a week
I have to give a report in our school about the Volga river and
about her role in the economic and cultural life of Soviet
Russia. 19. Now I only know that the Volga is the longest and
broadest river in European Russia. 20. But in a whole week
I can read many books about this most famous river, and
shall know much more about it on the day of my report.
1. The Volga is the longest river in Europe. 2. It is one of

the longest and most famous rivers in the world. 3. The Russian
people love this river more than any other river in the world.
4. They sing very beautiful songs about it. 5. One of the most
beautiful songs about the Volga is the song “Bonra, Bojira.”1
6. In Soviet Russia this very beautiful river occupies a most
important place. 7. It was one of the chief trade routes in the
country. 8. Along the Volga, thanks to the splendid system
of canals, ships can now sail directly from the Caspian Sea to
Moscow and even further to the north. 9. The river is also the
“electric heart” of Russia, an important source of electrical
energy. 10. The Soviet government has built on the Volga huge
electric power stations. 11. The Volga river has also played a
very great role in Russian history. 12. As early as (already in)
the eighth century this river was the most important trade
route in the country. 13. On its banks, in the city (of) Nizhnii
Novgorod, tradesmen gathered from all corners of Russia, from
north and south, east and west. 14. Here it was possible to buy
furs, rugs, silk, linen, wool, and wine. 15. Even from the
countries of the West tradesmen came to this famous Russian
trade center. 16. One can truly say (i.e., it is possible to say)
that here on the banks of this river met the peoples from all
the countries in the world (i.e., of the whole world).

Review of the declension and comparison of adjectives, also of
short forms. Some adjectives are taken from following lessons
and should be looked up in the Russian-English Vocabulary
at the end of the text.
moh JiyuiuA# nozipyrA, maph# hetpobha

CeroAHfl BeaepoM, Korâ a yKJiaABmaaa cboh crapbie khhth
h byMara b cytmyK, a saMeTHJia Meayay byMaraMH CTapyto, HieJiTyio
cjDOTorpacjDHK). 3to 6bijia (jDOTorpa(J)Ha Mapaa FleTpoBHbi FlaB-
jioboh.
i it is from the old folk song “CTeHhKa Pa3iiH” and runs: Bo.ira,
Bojira, MaTb pOAHaa, Boara pyccnaH pena.
234 /JBA&UATb 4ETBEPTHR YPOK
MHoro Jier TOMy Ha3aA OHa SbiAa mo eft caMOH CahskoS

noApyrofi. 3to Smao, KaK roBOpHT, «b Aobpoe, cxapoe BpeMH».
Mbi 6biah Torâ mojioam, Becejibi, AOBOAbHbi c4m,h co6oh h CBoeft
>KH3HbK) h M&hjm, hto b byAymeM see SyAex eipe Aynuie, eme
npHHTHee .
Mapfta flerpoBHa 6buik oneHb KpacHBa, yMHa, AepncaAacb
npocTO h cbo66aho. Oh4 mhoto 3aHHMaJiacb cnopTOM. Bojibuie
Bcero OHa Jiio6HJia HrpaTb b tshhhc. IlpHflTHO 6mao CMOTpeTb Ha
ee jierKHe, SwcTpbie abhjkchhh. >KnBoe, oiKpHToe ahuo, Beceawe,
êpHbie rjia3a, npeKpacHbift ubct ahha, — Bee b Heft HpaBHAoeb
JHOAHM.
0 MapHH IleTpoBHe roBopHAH, hto OHa OAeBaexcn jiynuie
Bcex >KeHmHH b ropoAe. M, kohchho, ohh Smah npaew! KorAa
Mapftn riexpoBHa OASBana cHHee nnaTbe, to y Hee Shiah, kohchho,
h chhhh uiAHna h cMHHe Tyc|)AH, a KorAa riAaTbe 6mao KpacHbiM
hah nepHbiM hah 6eAbiM, y nee 6biao h KpacHoe naAbro, h Seaoe,
h nepHoe, h HiAflnbi h xycjDAH TaKoro >xe UBeia!
Mapfta rieipoBHa Sbuia 3aMy>KeM 3a H3BecTHbiM, mockob-
CKHM lOpHCTOM. 3X0 6bIA yMHeftlllHH, MHAeHUIHft H AOOpeftlHHH
neAOBeK!
riaBAOBbl HCHAH B 60AbIH0M, CTapOM AOMe, B CSMOM SoAbWOM
h caMOM KpacftBOM AOMe b Aynmefi nacTH ropOAa. 3to Sha
HeoCbiKHOeeHHbift no BHAy (in appearance) aom c bmcokhmh,
y3KHMH OKHHMH, OrpOMHbIMH KOMHaraMH. OScTaHOBKa B 3THX
KOMHarax 6ha4 npocra, yAobHa h KpaciiBa: hh3khc, AAHHHbie
AHBaHbi, XAySoKne KpecAa, Ha cieHax MHoro crapHHHbix KapTHH.
MapHH riexpoBHa h ee Mync aioShah oSipecTBo h He 6biao
66jiee HHxepecHbix, boAee Becejiwx npneMOB, neM npneMbi b AOMe
riaBAOBbix. Ha boAbiiiHX npneMax y hhx coSnpaAHCb caMbie
pa3Hbie Aioah; tocth npne3Atajrn k hhm co Bcex kohhob Pocchh,
H3 pa3HbIX CTpaH MHpa. TyT MOHCHO SblAO BCTpeTHTbCH H HOrOBO-
pHTb CO CTapbIMH ApV3bHMH, H n03HaK0MHTbCH C 3HaMeHHTbIM
yneHblM H3 AHrAHH, C B£l>KHbIM CneiXHaAHCTOM B obAaCTH MeAHUH-
HH H3 4>paHHHH; Tyr mohcho 6mao ycAbiuiarb caMbie nocAeAHHe
noAHTHnecKHe hobocth, nocnopHTb o cepbe3Hbix, $haoco4)ckhx
Bonpocax, nocMenxbCH HaA paccxasaMH Aobporo, toactoxo
AOKTOpa HexoBa o-ero SoAbHbix h 3AopoBbix nauneHTax. Tyr
TaKHce name Bcero mojkho 6mao BCTpeiHTb H3BecTHefiiJJHX iiostob,
nocAymaxb nenne AyHiiiHx neBpoB h neBHU.
— Mne Bee paBHo, — roBopHAa MapHH nerpoBHa, — kto
Koro yMHee, kto 6orane, a kto beAHee. ToAbKo CKyHHbix alOAeft
h k ce6e HHKorAa He npHrAamaio. —
A KaKHe 3aMeqaTeAbHbie oSeAbi yCTpaHBaAa OHa! Kanoe
noAaBajra k o6eAV pa3Hoo6pa3He xojioahhx h ropHHHX 3aKycoK!

H KOHeqHO, TOJibKo caMbie Jiymune, caMbie ôporne BHHa!
Bee 3to 6bmo b âjieKOM nponuiOM. Mto crajio c Mapnefi
FleTpOBHOH? rê OHa Tenepb? >KHBa jih? B nocjie^HHH pa3 a
BHAe-aa ee Ha mockobckomB0K3ajie, Koiyâ mli ye3}KajiH H3 Pocchh.
ABAAUATb naTbm ypoK
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON
Double imperfective verbs: indeterminate, determinate —

Reciprocal pronoun Apyr Apyra — Expressions of
age — Cardinals and ordinals 50-100

nocTyriMTb Ha BoeHHyio cJiyjKSy To join the army, enlist
Bwji npHHHT KaK paBHbifi Was received as an equal
E3^HTb 3a rpaHHuy To go (travel) abroad
3a rpaHHuefl Abroad
H3 3a rpaHHUbi From abroad
no npH€3iie Upon arrival
BecTH 6ece^,bi c and instr. To converse with, carry on
conversations
Bee 66jibiue h 66jibiue More and more
Mhcto JiHTepaTypHaH Aearejib- Purely literary activity comes
HOCTb npeKpamaeTCH. to an end.
PyOwTb Aposa To chop, prepare firewood
II. READING: JIEB HHKOJIAEBHH TOJICTO0
Mmh JIbBa HnKOJiaeBHna TojicToro H3BecTHo BceMy Mupy.

PyccKHe amah ero pOMaHOB 6jih3kh h Aoporu BceMy qejioBene-
CTBy. TOACTOH 3H3MeHHT H KaK BeAHHaHLLIHH nncaTeJIb H KaK
(j)HA6C0(f).
TOACTOH pOZUUICH B «HcHOH riOJIHHe» - CTapHHHOM HMeHHH

okojio ropoâ Tyjibi1. «#CHaa naAHHa» Tan xte H3BecTHa Mupy, KaK
n hmh caMoro TojicToro. CioAa npHxoAHAH Bee, Koro 3aHHMajiH
Bonpocbi pejiHrHH, MOpajiH h HapoAHoro o6pa30BaHHH h kto
ncKaji OTBeTa Ha 3th Bonpocbi y ToacToro. Tenepb «5IcHaa
llojiHHa» — My3eH, KyAa nonpe)KHeMy npHesacaiOT aioah co Bcex
KOHUOB PO'CCHH, H3 BCeX CTpaH MHpa.
MaTb Toactoto yMepjia, KorAa MaAbHHKy 6biAO tojibko ABa
roAa, a oreu — Koraa eMy 6 mao BoceMb jieT. JJern yHHAHCb AOMa,
1 Tyjia, a city due south of Moscow.
236
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON 237
a KOiTia Tojictomy 6wjio uiecxHaAUaxb jieT, oh nocxynHA b

KasaHCKHH1 yHHBepCHxeT.
Tojictoh He kohhhji yHHBepcHTera, h nocrynHJi Ha BoeHHyio
cjiy>KOy. Oh noexaji Ha KaBKa3 h Tyr Hauajiacb ero AHxepaxypHasi
AearejibHocTb.
Korâ TojicTOMy 6wjio ABaAUaxb ceMb Jiex, oh npHexaa
b IleTepdypr2 h 6wji npHHHX nan paBHbifi xhkhmh H3BecTHbiMH
pyccKHMH nHcaTejiHMH nan TypreHeB3 h HeKpacos.4
Tojicxoh asa pa3a c3aha 3a rpaHHuy. Ilo npHesjxe b Pocchio
OH 3aHHJICH X03HHCTB0M y Ce6a B HMeHHK. TOJICTOH HOHHMaJI,
KaK ranee a 6 6hao b to BpeMfl nojioxceHHe KpecTbHH. Oh bbSa
HOBbie MeTOAbi nojreBbix paSoT, oTKpbia uiKOjry a a a AeTeft, BeA
AJiHHHbie 6eceAbi c KpecTbaHaiwn H3 coceAHHX AepeBeHb. KorAa
ToACTOMy 6bmo TpHAuaxb nexbipe roAa, oh hcchhach.
Bo BTOpofi: noAOBHHe CBoeft }kh3hh Tojictoh Bee 6oAbIIie
HaHHHaeT HHTepecoBaxbca BonpocaMH pcahthh h MOpaAH. Ero
hhcto AHTepaTypHaa AeareAbHocTb itouth npekpamaeTca. Toa-
ctoh OTAaex see SoAbioe h 6oAbine BpeMeHH h aHeprHH padoTe
BMecxe c KpecTbHHaMH. Oh bhxoaha Ha noAeBbie padoTH, caM
B03HJI CeHO, HOCHJI BO Ay, py6HA ApOBa . . .
B KOHue cBoeft >kh3hh oh ymeA H3 «Hchoh FIoahhh» h yMep
b AOMe HanaAbHHKa cthhahh AcranoBo ceAbMoro Hoadpa 1910
(Tbicnna AeBHTbcoT AecHToro) roAa.
III. VOCABULARY
Ms6a hut nOHXH almost

HiweHHe estate peAHTHH religion
AOUiaAb horse pOMaH novel
MSAbHHK boy ceHO hay
MexoA method exaHUHH station
MMp world, peace exapHHHbift, ancient, old
MOpaAb morals, ethics -'aa, -'oe
My>KHK peasant X5DKeAbIH, heavy,
HapOAHblft, folk, national -'an, -'oe burdensome
-'ah, -'oe c})Ha6co(J) philosopher
HanaAbHHK chief, head X03HHCXBO household,
o6pa30BaHHe education economy
nonpeiKHeMy as before. qeAOBenecxBO humanity
formerly
1 Ka3ancKHft, -'an, -'oe “of Kazan,” a city on the left bank of the
upper Volga.
2 IleTepdypr, ITeiporpafl St. Petersburg, now Leningrad.
3 HsaH CepreeBHH TypreHes (1818 - 1883) one of the greatest Russian
novelists. „ , . ,
4 HHKOJiatt HeapacoB (1821 - 1878) a well-known lyric poet.
238
ABA^mATb mTbrn ypoic
Verbs
BBOAHTb (BOAHTb) BBeCTM (BeCTH) to introduce
BHOCHXb (HOCHTb) BHeCTM (HeCTH) to bring in,

BHecf BHecna, bhccjih carry in
BbIBG3HXb (B03HTb) BMBe3TH (Be3TH) to export
HHTepecoBaTbcn; noHHTepecoBaTbcsi to interest

HHTepecyiocb, (HHTepecoBaTbca) oneself in
HHTepecyeuibCfl,
HHTepecywTca
HCKaTb; winy, nOHcnaib (ncKaxb) to search for,
timeuib, nmyr look for
KOHI&Tb (I) K0H4HTb (II) to finish, end
oxâBaib (jiaeaTb) OTâib (jxaTb) to give away

noHHMarb (I) nOHHTb, nOHMy, to understand
noftiweLiib, riofiMyx
nonajxaTb (I) nonacxb; nonaay to get to, catch
nonaaeuib, nona/iyx
npHXO/lHTb, (xOAHTb) ripHHXH (haxh) to arrive
poiKiiaTbca (I) pOAMTbes; pO>KyCb, to be born

pOAHIUbCH, po/iaxca
yMHpaTb (I) yMepexb; yMpy, to die

yMpeuib, yMpyx
yiviep, yMepjia, yiwepJiH died
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Indeterminate and determinate aspect verbs

1. Certain Russian verbs signifying locomotion have
two forms of the imperfective aspect: indeterminate and
determinate. The determinate aspect verb denotes unity,
integrality, indivisibility of an action, whereas the indeter-
minate verb does not imply any such quality of the action;
the determinate verb denotes an action carried out at one
time and in one direction1; the indeterminate verb does not
imply any such quality of the action. Two of these verbs we
already know: the indeterminate verbs xoahtb and eaAHTb
with their respective determinate forms hath and exaTb.
Other important verbs of this type are:
Indeterminate Determinate English
6eraxb (I) 6e>«aTb; 6ery, 6e>KHiiib, to run

6eryr
BOUHTbJ BO>Ky, BOAHLUb, Becrw; Bejry, seAeiub, to lead

boaht eeAyr
eeji, Beaa, bcjih lead
B03HTbJ BOHCy, BOSMlilb, Ee3Tw; eesy, Be3euib, to transport
B03HT Be3yT
Be3, Be3Jia, eesjiM conveyed
jieraTb (I) jiereTb; jieny, jieTHiub, to fly
JieTHT
HOC^Tb; HOUiy, HOCHLUb, HecTH; Hecy, Heceuib, to carry
HOCHT HecyT
nee, necjia, Hecjin carried
njiaeaTb (I) nabiTb; njibisy, ruibiBeuib, to swim

njibieyT
2. Use of this type of verb
a. When expressing the general action indicated by the

verb, use the indeterminate form:
PeSenoK xoaht. The child walks.
MajibHHK xoaht b uiKOJiy. The boy goes to (attends)
school.
MajibHHK OeraeT. The boy runs.
b. When expressing an action carried out in a specific
direction and at one specific time (i. e. non-repetitive, non-
habitual action), use the determinate form:
CeroAHH oh aeTHT b JleHHHrpaA Today he is flying to

(Ha caMOJieTe) Leningrad (by plane).
H Hecy 3Ty KHHry b dadmioTeKy. I am carrying (bringing)
this book to the library.
i Cp. Ooshakov, Tojikobwh CaoBapb, vol. I, p. 99, col. 1 «b oa^h npHCM

h b oaho HanpaBJi§Hae.»
240 ABAAUATb mTbm ypO'K
c. If, however, the action, though in one specific direc¬

tion is repeated or habitual, use the indeterminate form:
Mh Bceraa 63ahm b Cthjihh- We always go (travel) to

rpaA napoxoôM. Stalingrad by steamer.
B BOCKpeceHte mli BcerAa Sundays we always go to
xoahm b uepKOBb. church.
d. Note that some idiomatic expressions have only the

determinate form:
3£ecb nacTo maSt AOÂb. It frequently rains here.

TaM HHKorAa He hact CHer. It never snows there.
3a. It is important to note that the perfective aspect to

both these forms is formed by prefixing no- to the determinate
form:
hath -j- no -» noiiTM (perfective of xoahtb and hath)
(Compare Lesson 16, Part B, Sect. C.)
b. When the prefix no- is added to the indeterminate form
of “going” verbs (xoahtb, njiaeaTb, BOAHTb, etc.) the sense of
brevity, informality, lack of strain or intensity is imparted to
the action:
noxoAHTb to walk a little; take a stroll
nonjiaBaTb to swim a little; take a dip
(Compare Lesson 16, Part A, Sect. D.)
4. When these forms are compounded with any other
prefix, the same prefix is added to both forms: the inde¬
terminate form remains imperfective, whereas the determinate
form becomes perfective. The distinction between indeter¬
minate and determinate does not exist in these new pairs:
xoAHTb + npH -» npHxoAHTb (imperfective) to come, arrive
hath -f npH -» npHTTH (perfective) to come, arrive
(Compare Lesson 16, Part B, Sect. C.)
For further examples see Appendix pp. 352 and 353.
5. The verb hochtb has no determinate form when used
in the meaning of “to wear”:
Shmoh h Horny Teruioe najibTo. In winter I wear a warm coat.
To “wear” can also be rendered as follows:
Ha Hew HOBan injinna. Lit.: On her is a new hat.
Ha HeM GbiJio cTapoe najibTo. Lit.: On him was an old coat.
B. The reciprocal pronoun: Apyr Apyra “one another’’
Gen. and Acc. Apyr Apyra of one another, one another

Apyr Apyry
Dat. to one another
Apyr k Apyry
Instr. Apyr c ApyroM with one another
Prep. Apyr o Apyre about one another
C. Expressions of age
In expressing age use the dative case:
Mhc ABaAUaTb oahh roA. I am twenty one. Lit.: To me
is twenty-one year.
CxoAbKo eft jier? How old is she? Lit.: How
many to her of summers?
Eft ABaAUaTb Asa (TpH, She is 22 (23, 24) years old.

nerbipe) roAa.
EMy.6buio ABaAaaTb narb He was 25 (26, 27) years old
(uiecTb, ceMb) AeT.
Note that foa is used with oahh (1) and its compounds
(except 11); roAa with 2, 3, 4 and their compounds (except
12, 13, 14); AeT with 5-20, 25-30, etc., and with ckojilko “how
many.”
D. Numerals 50-100
Cardinals Ordinals
50 nHTbAeCHT . nHTHAeCHTblft, -'an, -'oe 50th
60 uiecTbAecHT mecTHAecHTbift, -'aa, -'oe 60th
70 ceMbAecflT CeMHAeCHTblft, -'aa, -'oe 70th
80 BOCeMbAeCHT BOCbMHAeCHTblft, -'aa, -'oe 80th
90 AeBHHOCTO AeBHHOCTblft, -'aa, -'oe 90th
100 CTO COTblft, -'aa, -'oe 100th
Note the position of the b at the end of the first com¬

ponent part of the cardinal numbers 50-80 (inclusive). Note
also the -h ending on the first component part of the ordinals
50-80 inclusive.
V. QUESTIONS
1. H3bi§ctho ah hmh JIbBa HnKonaeBHna ToncToro BceMy

Mftpy? 2. KoMy 6ah3kh h AOporn pyccKHe ak>ah ero pomshob?
3. PAe pOAHACH TOACTOft? 4. H3BeCTHa AH «#CHaH riOAHHa» Bee-
242 ^BAAUATb mTHPl ypQK
My MHpy? 5. 4to Tenepb b «5Ichoh FIoAHHe»? 6. OTKyAa npnes-

AtaioT jiioah b «5IcHyio nojiBHV»? 7. KorAa yMepjia MaTb Toji-
CToro? 8. KorAa yMep ero oTen? 9. KorAa Toactoh nocTymUi
b Ka3aHCKHH yHHBepcHTeT? 10. rioaeMy Toactoh He kohhha
yHHBepCHTeTa? 11. Fae nanajiacb AHTepaTypHan AenrejibHocTb
TojicToro? 12. KorAa npHexaA Toactoh b FleTepOypr? 13. Kan
OH 6bIJI npHHHT 3HaMeHHTbIMH pyCCKHMH nHCaTejIHMH? 14. E3AHJI
ah Tojictoh 3a rpaHHiiy? 15. HeM 3aHHACH Tojictoh no npne3Ae
b Pocchk)? 16. Mto oh caejiaji Ann KpecTbHH? 17. KorAa Toji¬
ctoh H<eHHJiCH? 18. MeM HaqHHaeT HHTepecOBaTbcn Toactoh bo
BTopofl noAOBHHe CBoen JKH3HH? 19. HeMy oTAaeT Tojictoh see
SoAbine BpeMeHH h aneprHH? 20. Karcyio paOoTy oh AeAaji?
21. Kota a ymeA Toactoh H3 «51choh riOAHHbi»? 22. fAe yMep
Tojictoii?

a. Give the correct forms of the verbs in parentheses and indicate
their type (i. e. whether they are indeterminate or determinate),
for example:
H ceroAHH (exaTb) b ropoA: eAy Determinate

1. B AepeBHe Mbi nacTO (xoAHTb) KynaTbcn Ha o3epo. 2. Moft
TOBapnm (exarb) Ha bok3ba co cbohmh neMOAaHaMH h cyHAy-
KaMH. 3. Ha npa3AHHKH oh BcerAa (jieTaTb) b JleHHHrpaA. 4.
MajibHHK (SeraTb) keokahh AeHb b coccahhh koaxo3. 5. 51 caM
(HeCTH) 3T0T TSDKeAblH HeMOAHH. 6. HoCHAbLUHK TOACC (HeCTH)
ABa neMOAaHa. 7. Oh BcerAa caM (HOCHTb) cboh neMOAaHbi.
8. Mbi nacTO (iwiaBaTb) b btom 03epe. 9. Myxmx (BecTn) snepa
cboio AornaAb b noAe. 10. MaTb (boahtb) cbohx AeTeft b napn.
11. KpecTbflne (B03HTb) ceHo c noAH. 12. Ha Aany mh BcerAa
(e3AHTb) Ha aBTOModHAe.
b. Underline the verb which correctly completes the sentence,

for example:
CeroAHH yTpoM oh. ha£t/xoaht b niKOAy b BOceMb nacoB.
1. Moh chh HanaA nAa.BaT.b/nnbiTb, KorAa eMy 6hao tph
roAa. 2. 3HMoft naCTo xoAHA/meA cHer. 3. 3aBTpa MHe hvacho
exaTb/e3AHTb b ropoA 3a noxynKaMH. 4. JleTeTb/AeraTb GoAbinoe
yAOBOAbCTBHe. 5. CeroAHH yTpoM Kama aohb hagt/xoaht
nepBbift pa3 b iHKOAy. 6. KorAa Mbi hx bctpcthah ohh xoahah/
luah b khho. 7. OHa HocHT/HeceT 5to KpacHoe nAaTbe ksokahh
Aenb. 8. H Homy/Hecy H3 6h6ahot6Kh oneHb HHTepecHyio KHHry.
9. Oh B03HT/Be3eT bcio ceMbto 3a-rpaHHiiy. 10. 51 6yAy exaTb/
e3AHTb cK>Aa KSDKAoe JieTO. 11. Ha PoxeaecTBO k HaM Bcerâ

npH^yT/npHXO^XHT tocth. 12. 51 B0>Ky/Be3y c co6oh TOJihKO
o^ho najiBTo. 13. ripocjoeccop 3aBTpa npHAeT/npnxoAHT b
yHHBGpcHTCT pobho b ABa uaca. 14. Oh Bceraa npHeêT/npHeaxcaeT
paHO yrpoM. 15. B OyaymeM Mecnpe k HaM npHe3X{aer/npHe,zj;eT
3HaMeHHTbift rmcarejib. 16. YuHTejib BBeji/BBO^HJi mchh b KOMHary
h noKa3aJi MHe pyccKne khhth.
c. From the Reading Exercise write out all “indeterminate”
and “determinate” verbs as well as their derivatives, indicating the
type and English meaning of the basic infinitive, for example;
npHXOJXHJlH, derived from xo^HTb Indeterminate “go, walk”

BBejl, derived from BecTH Determinate “lead”
Supply the correct forms of the reciprocal pronoun Apyr /ipyra:
1. Ohh npexpacHo noHHMajiH... 2. Ohm Bee roTO-

Bbi cjiejixrb.RJin.3. Mbi coSnpajmcb b focth.k
.4. Ha BOK3ajie mh aojito HCKajm.5. MajibMHKH
oueBHAHO noHpaBHJiHCb.6. 3th 3HaMeHHTbie cjoHJio-
cocJ)bi Bcerâ cnopHT.c.7. nocjie/s.HHe ^Ba Mecapa mh
HHuero He 3HaeM.o.8. «,ZUth, jnoSHTe.,»
Tax yuHJia Hac MaTb b AeTCTBe. 9. Mbi uacTO ObiBajih.y.
10. Ohh He 6 bum 3HaKOMbi, ho mhoto cjibimajin. o .
ot AOKTOpa HexoBa.
Exercises with Grammar C and D
a. Read and/or write in Russian the following numerals:

3, 8, 13, 21, 37, 46, 52, 60, 69, 71, 84, 93, 59, 19, 90, 100, 17,
70, 33, 53, 66, 44, 51, 14, 94, 40, 15, 50, 85, 99, 27, 11, 12, 18, 80, 10,
29, 34, 20, 98.
b. Change the above cardinal numerals into their respective

ordinals.
c. Translate the expressions in parentheses:
1. Ha pomêCTBO (my father will be 70 years old). 2. Cxojib-
ko, bh AyMaere, eMy jieT, (55 or 60 [year])? 3. H npnexaji b
«51cHyio riojiHHy», Korâ (I was 31 years old). 4. 3Hae?e Bbi (how
old he is)? 5. (He was 45 years old), Kory*a oh xceHHJicH. 6. OHa
He cKa3ajia, hto (she is 25 years old). 7. Hepe3 MecHH (I will
be 45). 8. Moh 6a6yuiKa yMepjia, Kor\a;a (she was 92 years old).
9. Tojictoh noCTyriHJi b yHHBepcHTeT, Koiyta (he was 16 years old).
10. B OyAyweM roAy (my daughter will be 23 years old).
244 flBAHUATb mTHPl yP0K

A
1. Leo Nikolayevich Tolstoi was born at “Yasnaya Pol¬
yana.55 2. “Yasnaya Polyana55 is a very old estate near the city
of Toola. 3. It is now a famous museum. 4. To it (hither) come
people from all the corners of Russia to see the home of one of
[out of] the greatest Russian writers. 5. Tolstoi has written
many very famous books. 6. His most famous novels are “War
and Peace55 («BoftHa h Mnp») and “Anna Karenina.55 7. Tol¬
stois childhood was not a very happy one. 8. When he was
only two years old, his mother died, and when he was eight,
his father. 9. Tolstoi entered the University of Kazan when he
was sixteen. 10. But he soon joined the army and never finished
the university. 11. When Tolstoi was twenty-seven, he took a
trip (drove) to St. Petersburg, where he was received as an
equal by Turgyenyev and Nyekrasov. 12. Twice Tolstoi went
abroad. 13. At home on his estate, he introduced new methods
of working the fields. 14. He opened a school and himself taught
the children of his and neighboring villages. 15. He knew his
peasants well and liked to carry on long conversations with
them. 16. He went with them into the fields and himself carted
off hay, chopped and carried wood. 17. Finally he left his
estate and died in the house of the station-master of Astapovo
station.
B
Every Easter my friends and I meet (each other) in the
largest and most famous restaurant of our city, the “Zhar
Ptitsa” (Firebird). 2. Some (HeKoropbie) of my friends do not
live in our city and have to come (arrive by vehicle) 50, 100,
or even more miles, and some even fly in (arrive by plane).
3. Last year I, too, had to fly in and almost came too late to
our meeting at the restaurant. 4. The restaurant “Zhar Ptitsa55
is not only very famous but also very old; it is 85 years old.
5. Everybody knows it and everybody tells one another about
its wonderful hors d’oeuvres, roast meats and wines. 6. I was
thirteen when my father first took me to that restaurant.
7. Now I always go there when I want to eat especially well.
8. Of course, it is very expensive to eat there. 9. On Sundays
a dinner costs 50 rubles and on holidays it may even cost 60 or
70 rubles. 10. On holidays, and at Easter, the rooms of the
restaurant are especially splendid. 11. Red, yellow, blue, and
white flowers are on the tables; silver spoons, forks, and knives,
and a whole forest of wine glasses! Even the tablecloths seem

whiter than usual. 12. The ladies wear their most beautiful
gowns (dresses) and everyone is especially happy and talks
gayly with one another. 13. The proprietor knows us well; he
meets us at the door. “Welcome (in)! ” he says and leads us
to our table. 14. Our table is huge, but there are 30 of us today
and we do not have too much room. 15. The proprietor sees it,
smiles (yjibi6aexcsi), and says: “ Crowded close, but congenial
(not at variance)! ” 16. And he is so right! Today we are
(make) merry together and love one another like brothers.
17. We begin our dinner with the wonderful hors d’oeuvres
and many glasses (pkjmok) of vodka, and with each glass we
say to one another: “To your health, dear friends!” 18. After
the hors d’oeuvres one brings [us] soup, meat pies, roast
meats, and finally, the dessert. 19. After the dinner we smoke
splendid cigars or Russian cigarettes and tell funny stories
about one another or interesting events in our lives. 20. And
there is so much to tell and time flies so fast! It is two o’clock
in the morning when we finally say goodbye, wish one another
a “Happy journey!” and promise each other to write often.
VOCABULARY BUILDING
Verbs of motion with their characteristic prefixes. Remember
that the distinction between indeterminate and determinate
verbs is lost through prefixion. See Grammar A, 3 and 4 of
the preceding lesson.
B = movement in; into:

BXOJlHTb BOflTH to go, come in
BT>e3>KaTb B'bexaTb to ride, drive in
BjieTaTb BJieteTb to fly in
Bbl = movement out of:

BblXOJXHTb BbIHTH to go, come out
Bbie3>KaTb BbiexaTb to ride, drive out
BbUieTaTb BbuieieTb to fly out
246 fiBAfiLfATb n^!TbI« yPOK
£0 = movement up to;
Aoxomih AOfllH to go, come up to, reach

AoeatKaxb Aoexaib to ride, drive up to, reach
Aojiexaxb AOJiexexb to fly up to, reach
OB; OBO == movement around, encircling:

OfiXOAHXb o6ohth to go around, avoid, circle
oCrbesmib oG'bexarb to ride, drive around, avoid
objieiaTb oOjiexeib to fly around, avoid
OT = movement away from:

OXXOAHXb OXOfiXH to go, step away from
OT'be3>KaTb oxx>exaxb to drive off, ride away, leave
©xjiexaxb oxjiexexb to fly away (depart by plane)
IIEPE = movement over, across:

nepexojiHTb nepefixH to go, come over, across
nepee3M<aTb nepeexaxb to drive, ride over, across
nepejiexaxb nepejiexexb to fly over, across
HPM = movement to, toward (arrival):

npHe3>«aTb npwexaxb to come, arrive (by vehicle)
npHJieiaxb npHJiexexb to come, arrive (by plane)
npHXOAHTb npHXXH to come, arrive
nPO = movement through, past:

npOXO^HTb npoiixH to go through, pass
npoesiKaib npoexaxb to ride, drive through
npojieiaTb npojiexexb to fly through
PAS = movement apart (scatter):

pa3X0AHTbCfl pa30fiXHCb to separate, come apart, undone
pa3T>e3>KaTbCfl[ pa3T>exaxbca to drive in all direction, oflen
pa3aeTaibCH pa3jiexexbCH to fly apart, explode
y = movement away from (departure, removal):

yXOAHTb yftxA to go, come away, leave
ye3>«aTb yexaxb to drive, ride away, depart
yjiexaxb yjiexexb to fly away (depart by plane)
Prefixing is, of course, not limited to verbs of motion, as

can be observed in the following additional reading unit.

With emphasis on verb-PREFIXES. The change in the basic
meaning of the verb produced by such prefixion is indicated
by means of the parenthesized literal translations. Notice the
use of prepositions in addition to the prefix whenever the
literal, rather than the derived meaning of an action is con¬
veyed. Notice also that the prefix and the preposition used are
often identical (AonncaTb . . . ao) but even when different in
form they emphasize and supplement the meaning of the
prefix (BbIHTH ... M3).
IlHCbMO BOPHCy
CeroAHH BenepoM a HaKOHeu, 3aKOHHHJi (finished completely)
rmcbMo Bopficy. IlHCbMO BbiuiJio (came out) ajihhhhm. Hcnncaji
(■wrote out, i. e. used up writing) inecTb jihctob SyMaru.
KaK SbiCTpo npojieTejio (flew through, away) bp<§mh! Bopfic
h h yuHJiHCb BMecxe b yHHBepcHTSTe. Mbi cpa3y-}Ke comjificb
(came together) xapaKTepaMH h crajm Apy3bfiMH. KorM mbi
okohhhhh (finished completely) yHHBepcHTGT, Bee HauiH TOBapHiUH
pa3i.exajiHCb (drove apart) no pa3HbiM ropoAaM; n caM nepeexaji
(drove over) M3 Hmcaro b Hbio-PlopK, a Bopfic yexaji (drove
away) 3a rpaHfipy.
HeKOTOpoe fipeMH mh c hhm nepenficbmajmcb (wrote back
and forth), a noToM, caM He 3Haio KaK sto nponsonuio (went
through/out: happened), nepenficna Hama KOHUHJiacb. 3to
KOHeuno moxcho 6biJio npeACKa3aTb (tell before; predict): mojio-
Aextb BcerAa SbicTpo cxoahtch (comes together), ho TaKHte
SbiCTpo h pacxoAHTCH (goes apart).
npoiHJio (went through: passed) MHoro Jier. Ho bot, Ha
npouMoft HeAeJie a npocMaTpHBaji (looked through) xtypnaji
«AMepHKaHCKHH HmKeHep» h yBfiêji TaM <£>OTorpac[)HK) Bopfica.
MHe saxoTejiocb (began to want: got the urge) HanucaTb
(completion stressed) eMy h HanoMHHTb (call to/on [Ha] his
memory) Becejibie ahh Hameft mojioaocth. H nncaji 4to nHCbMo
noHTfi ueJiyio HeêjiK); HecKOJibKo pa3 ero nepenficbmaji (wTote
over), AOJiro He mot AonncaTb (write to/up to) a© KOHua h
TOJibKo ceroAHH, HaKOHeu, a npHrmcaJi (wrote in addition) em,e
HecKOJibKo cjiob, noifnHcaji (wrote under: signed) h cefiuac totob
6hji nofiTfi Ha noHTy OTnpaBHTb (direct awray: send off) nncbMO.
riouTa He oueHb AajieKo ot Moero AOMa. Korâ BbiHAeiiib
(go out) H3 AOMa, HaAO cpa3y JKe nepefiifi (go across) nepes moct,
npofiTfi (go through) HecKOJibKo yjiHu, noBepHyTb HanpaBO, aohth
(go up to) ao HeSoAbiHoft nAOHtaAH, oftoiiTfi (go around, circle it)
248 flBAAUATb mTHPl yPOK
ee, bwhth (go out) Ha dyjibBap, npOHTH (go through) no dyjibBapy

iio hoboto ropo^cKoro rocriHTaHH, saftTH (go behind) sa yroji
BToro 3âHHa h uepes HecKojibKo MHHyr bbi y>Ke itoaxoahjih
(walk under!/up to) K 3AaHHK) nouTbi!
KoHeuHo Tenepb Majio kto jik)6ht xoAHTb neuiKOM. JXjik
MeHH 3to do^biuoe yAOBojibCTBHe, a Bee CMei'oxca Ha;to mho ft,
hto a uejioBeK 18-oro Bexa h He Aopoc (grow [up] to) eme ao
20-oro Bexa! — CMeHTecb, cMeftTecb, — oTBeuaio h hm BcerAa.
— «Xopomo oieeTCH tot, kto CMeeTCH nocAeAHHft!» FIocmotphm
kto H3 Hac AO>KHBeT (lives up to) ao 21-oro Bexa, bh hjih h! —
ABAMATb UlECTOi YPOK
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON
Declension and use of 06a, 66e “both” — Cardinals and ordi¬

nals, 100-1 million; declension of cardinals; approximation;
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division; collective
numerals — Prepositions: review and supplement
Ha HKope At anchor
B3jiyMajiH njiaeaTb Ha Took it into their heads to
neperoHKH swim a race
He Bbwaeaft! Don’t give up!
IIOHaTyiKbCH! Pull yourself together; try
hard!
BaeAHbiH Kan nojioTHo As white as a sheet {Lit.: pale
as linen cloth)
CopeaTbCH c Mecxa To dash off {Lit.: to tear one¬
self from the spot)
nOHeCJIHCb, MTO 5bIJIO CHJIbl Raced off at top speed
OflHH H3 HHX OrJIHHyJICH. One of them looked back.
Kan fiyuTO As if
CnojibKo Hac hh 6wjio As many as there were of us,
i. e. all of us
SaMepJiH ot cTpaxa. We were stunned with fear.
Pa3jjajicH BbiCTpeji. A shot resounded, was heard.
Hto cjotejiajiocb c... What happened to...
ii. reading: akyjia
Adapted from Tolstoi’s short story “The Shark”
Ham Kopadjib ctohji Ha HKOpe y depera A^PHkh. dtui

npeKpacHhiH; c MopH jiyji cbcjkhh BeTep, ho k senepy nororca
H3MeHHJiacb (changed), crajio Aynmo.
IlepeA 3axaTOM cojihus KannTaH BHineji Ha najiydy, KpHK-
249
250 ^BAZlUATb HIECTGH YPOK
Hyji: «KynaTbcn!», h b OAHy MHHyxy MaTpocbi nonpbirajiH b

Bojiy, cnycTHJiH b BOAy napyc h b napyce ycTpoHjra KynajibHio.
Ha KopaOjie c eaMH 6 hah ABa MaAbHHKa. MajiMHKH nepBbie
nonpbirajiH b BOAy, ho hm TecHo 6 mao b napyce, h ohm BSAyMaJsis
njiaeaTb Ha neperoHKH b otkphtom Mope.
Oahh MaJimHK ceanajia neperaaJi TOBapuma, ho iiqtqm CTaJi
OTcraBaTb. Oieu, MaAbHHKa, cTapbift apTHAAepftcx, ctohji Ha
najiy6e h jiioSoBajica Ha cBoero cbiHa. Korâ chh ciajr OTCTaeaTb,
OTeu, KpHKnyji eMy: «He BWAaBafl! Il0HaTy>KbCn!»
B^pyr c najiy6bi KpHKHyjm: «AKyjia!» — h Bee mh yBHAeAH
b BOAe cnHHy MopcKoro nyAOBHma1.
Anyjia njibuia npHMo Ha MajibHHKOB2.
«Ha3aA! Ha3aA! AKyjia!» — 3aKpHnaA apTHAAepftcr. Ho pe-
6flTa He cjibimajiH ero, njibuiH Aanbine, CMeshracb h KpnuaAH
eme Becejiee h rpoMnc npe>KHero.
ApTHJIJiepHCT, 6jieAHWM KaK nOJIOTHO, CMOTpeA Ha AGTefl.
MaTpocbi cnycTHJiH jioAKy, SpocHJiHCb b nee h noHecjincb,
hto 6mao cHJibi, k MajibHHKaM; ho ohh 6 hah eme AaJieKO ox hhx,
KorAa anyjia 6 ha a He AaAbme ABaûaxw uiaroB.
Ma^bHHKH CHanaJia He cjibimajiH Toro, hto hm KpnqajiH, h
He BHAejiH anyiibi; ho hotom oahh ms hhx orjisiHyjicn, h mh Bee
ycjibimajiH npoH3HTejibHbiH BH3r, h MajibHHKH nonJibMH b paa-
Hbie CXOpOHbl.
BH3r 3tot KaK 6yAXO pa36yAHji apTHJiJiepHCTa. Oh copeajicsi
c Mecxa h nodencaji k nyuinaM.
Mbi Bee, CKOjibKO Hac Hii 6biJio Ha KopaOjie, 3aMepjiH ot
cxpaxa h HCAajiH, hto 6yAeT.
Pa3AaacH Bbicxpea h mh yBHAeAH, hto apTHJiJiepHCT ynaJi
noAjie nyuiKH h 3aKpbm jihho pyKaMH. Mto CAejiaaocb c anyAoft
H C MaJIbHHK3MH, Mbi He BHjXeJIH, nOTOMy HTO Ha MHHyxy AbIM
3acTjraji HaM rna3a.3 Ho KorAa ahm pa3omejrcfl HaA boaoh, co
Bcex cxopoH pa3AaJicH rpOMKuft, paAOCTHbift KpHK. CTapbift ap-
THJUiepHCT OTKpHJI AHHO, HOAHHJICH H IIOCMOTpeA Ha MOpe.
no BOAHaM KGJIBIXaJIOCb JKeATOe SpiOXO4 MepTBOft aKyjIH.
B HeCKOAbKO MHHyT AOAKa nOAIIAHAa5 K MaAbHHKaM H npHBe3Aa
hx Ha KopaSAb.
1 MopcKoro qyAOBHma genitive singular of Mopacoe qyAdBHme “sea

monster.”
2 IIpbmo na MdjibHHKOB. “Straiglit toward the boys.”
3 ZUbiM 3acTAaji HaM raa3a. “The smoke obstructed our vision.”
4 “The yellow belly (of the dead shark) was floating (bobbing)
(on the waves) KoJiwxaJiocb “was floating, bobbing”; 6pioxo “belly.”
5 noAiuibuia. “Swam up to, reached.”
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON 251
in. VOCABULARY
auyjia shark Hasan back

apTHjuiepMCT artillery man najiyCa deck
seTep (fe) wind napyc sail
BOJIHa wave npOH3HTejIbHblfi, piercing
rpOMKHM, loud -ah, -oe
-'an, -'oe nyuiKa (e) gun, cannon
rpoMne louder paÔCTHblft, happy, joyous
AyniHo (adv.) stifling -aa, -oe
AyiUHblH stifling CTOpOHa side
-'aa, -'oe CyTKH (o) (pi.) 24 hours,
3anaT (coJiHpa) sunset night and day
KanHTaH captain confining, close,
KOpaOjib (m.) ship crowded
KynaJibHH (e) swimming pool step, pace
MaTpoc sailor
Verbs
SpocaTbca (I) SpocMTbca; Cpouiycb, to dash, rush,

OpOCHIUbCH, SpOCHTCfl throw oneself
JiyTb; Ayfo, Ayemb, nojiyib (jiyTb) to blow

iiyiOT
KpHHaTb; KpHHy, SaKpHMETb (KpHHaTb) I. to shout

KpHHHLUb, KpHMar or KpHKHyTb (I) P. to cry out
OTCTaeaTb; oTCTaio, OTCTaTb; OTCTaHy, to fall (lag)

OTCTaeuib, oxcTaiOT oTCTaHeuib, OTCTaHyx behind
naaaTb (I) ynacTb; ynaay, to fall (down)

ynaaeuib, ynanyT
ynaji, ynajia, ynajw
nO^XO^HTb (XOflHTb) nOflOHTH (hath) to approach,

come up
npeKpamatbCH (I) npexpaTHTbca; to stop, end

npenpamycb,
npeKpaTHUibCH,
npenpaTHTCH
252 JXBARUA Tb UIECTOPI yPOK
Imperfeciive Perfective English
npHBOSMTb (BOSMTb) npHBe3TH (bsstm) to bring (by

vehicle), import
npwraib (I) nonpbiraTb (I) to jump, dive

npwrnyTb (I)
paCXO^HTbCH paaoHTHCb (hath) to part, go apart,

(XOAHTb) scatter
cnycnaTb cnycTHTb; cnymy, to lower, let down

cnycTHUib, cnycTsiT
ycipaHBaib (I) yCTpOHTb (II) to make, construct
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Full declension and use of 66a, 66e “both”
Masc. and Nent. Fem.
Nom. 66a ode

Gen. o6ohx odenx
Dat. o66hm odewM
Ace. N. or G. N. or G.
Instr. o6ohmh OdeHMH
Prep. o6ohx o6enx
06a is used with masculine and neuter nouns; o6e with

■feminine nouns.
06a and 66e are followed by the genitive singular of the
noun and by the nominative (or genitive) plural of the
adjective:
06a HOBbie (or hobmx) cTOJia Both new tables

06e MOJiOAbie (mojioamx) }KeHiiuiHbi Both young women
In oblique cases (i.e. cases other than the nominative)
both the noun and adjective agree in case with 66a and ©6e:
06ohx hobmx ctojiob; o6eiix mojiqamx acemuHn; etc.
B. Numerals
1. Declension of cardinal numerals:1
a. Declension of ABa, ABe; xpn; qeTbipe:
Nom. ABa, ABC TpH ueTKipe

Gen. Asyx Tpex ueTbipex
Dat. AByM TpeM ueTbipetw
Acc. N. or G. N. or G. N. or G.
Instr. AByMSI TpeMH HeTBIpbMH
Prep. Asyx Tpex ueTbipex
b. Declension of the numerals 5-19, 20 and 30:
Nom. nHTb BOCeMb

Gen. nHTHl BOCbMH
Dat. IIHT& BOCbMH
Acc. HHTb Bocewb
Instr. HHTblb BQCbMbK)
Prep. nHTM BOCbMH
Like nHTb (5) are declined 6 -19, 20 and 30. However, in

the declension of numerals 11 -19 inclusive, the stress remains
on the same syllable as in the nominative, while with the other
numbers (6 -10, 20, 30) the stress moves to the endings. Note
that nsiTb is declined exactly like ABepb.
c. In all compound cardinal numerals (21, 22, 33, 34, etc.)
each of the numerals is declined:
Nom. ABazmaTb Tpn TpHAUaTb rnecTb
Gen. ABaauaTH Tpex TpHAUaTH mecTH
Dat. AsaAuaTH Tpeiw TpHAUaTH mecTH
Acc. ABaAuaTb TpH TpHAuaTb rnecTb
Instr. ABaAuaTbJO TpeMH TpHAUaTbJO mecTbio
Prep. ABaAUaTM Tpex TpHAuaTH mecTH
d. Declension of the numerals 50, 60, 70, 80:

Nom. riHTbAeCHT
Gen. naxMAecHTH 60, 70, 80 are declined
Dat. nflTHAecflTH
exactly like 50
Acc. nflTbAecHT
Instr. naTbiOAecHTbto
Prep. nHTHAeCHTH2
1 For a complete listing of cardinal and ordinal numerals see Ap¬

pendix H, Table 6.
2 Note that both component parts of the number (wm and flecHTb)
are declined like n*rn>, with the accent shifting to the inflectional
endings of the first component.
254 HBAAUATb LUECTOFI YPOK
e. Declension of 40, 90, 100:

Nom. COpOK ACB5THOCTO CTO
Gen. copoxa AeBHHOCTa cTa
Dat. copona AeBHHOCTa cTa
Acc. COpOK ACBHHOCTO CTO
Instr. copoKa AeBHHOCTa CTa

Prep. copoica AeBHHOCTa CTa
f. Declension of multiples of a hundred (200, 300, etc.):1

ABeCTH, AByXCOT, AByMCTaM, ABeCTH, ^ByMHCTaMH, AByXCTaX
IIHTbCOT, nHTHCOT, HHTHCTaM, IIHTbCOT, ITHTblOCTaMH, riHTHCTaX
g. Tbicsma (1000) and mhjijihoh (1,000,000) are declined

like regular nouns, Tbicana like KOMHara,2 and mhjijihoh like
CTOJI.
2. Rule of case requirement after the cardinal numerals

when declined:3
When a cardinal numeral appears in any but the nomina¬
tive case (or the accusative when that case is like the nomina¬
tive) , then the following adjectives and nouns appear in the
same case as the numeral, but always in the plural.
H3 OAHHHaAUaTH HHTepeCHbIX KHHT, SI KynHJl oAHy.

Out of eleven interesting books, I bought one.
H ABA 9TH KHHrn MOHM AByM 6eAHbIM Apy3bHM.
I gave these books to my two poor friends.
3. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division:4
5 + 6=11 IlsiTb njuoc uiecTb paBHHeTCH (pasHo) OAHHHaAUaTH

(dative)!
10-8= 2 AecHTb MHHyc BoceMb paBHfleTCH (pasHo) Asyivi.
7x3=21 CeMb noMHo>KeHHoe na Tpn paBHaeTCH ABaAuaTM
OAHOMy.
10^-2= 5 ZfecHTb pa3AejieHHoe na ABa paBHHeTCH ithth.
1 In the declension of multiples of a hundred, the nominative and

accusative are alike; in the other cases the two component parts are
declined according to their respective declensions, cto being declined
in the plural.
2 Taking proper account of vowel-mutation rules.
3 For a summary of these rules, see Appendix II, Table 7.
4 Approximation is expressed:
a. By placing the number after the noun:
Ejwy JieT AuaauaTb. He is about 20 years old.
b. By the preposition okojio (+ Gen.):
Okojio BocfeMH tjacoB. It is about 8 o’clock.
4. Collective numerals'.1
2 twosome) ABoe 4 Hexeepo 6 uuecxepo
3 {Lit.: threesome) xpoe 5 naxepo 100 coxhh
J3,Boe, xpoe follow the plural declension of the soft adjec¬

tive; nexBepo, nnxepo, uuecxepo, the plural of the hard adjective;
coxhh, the singular and plural of feminine nouns in -si.
C. Prepositions (review and supplement)

1. Ho with the dative expresses:
Motion “on” Oh uieji no yjiHue. He went along
“along” the street.
Time of recurrent Oh padoxaji no He worked evenings.
action BenepaM.
Distribution Oh asji Ka>KAOMy He gave each one
no KHnre. a book.
2. IloAJie with the genitive expresses “near, alongside”:
ApxHJiJiepHcx ynajr noAJie The gunner fell alongside the
nyuiKH. gun.
3. npn with the prepositional expresses “in the presence
of, at”: Oh npn mhc axo CAejiaji. He did it in my presence.
4. Ha with the genitive expresses origin:
JIoxtKa M3 cepedpa, H3 A spoon (made) of silver, of
AepeBa wood
Oh M3 KpecxbHH. He has peasant ancestry.
5. K (ko) with the dative renders “toward” in time expres¬
sions : K yxpy “toward morning,” k Beuepy “toward evening.”
6. Ox with the genitive expresses:
Place: Mbi Aajiexo ox Mockbw. We are far from Moscow.
Time: Ox hiohh ao hk>jih From June to July.
Cause: Oh cxpaAaJi ox rojiOBHofl He suffered from headache.
66jih.
1 These collective numerals are used mainly in reference to ani¬

mate nouns and nouns that have only a plural form (‘rncb'i “clock,”
cyTKH “24 hours”) :
HBoe jieieft Two children Tpoe MacoB Three clocks
Hae 6buio MeTBepo. There were four of us.
Hx 6buio cothh. There were a hundred of them.
Note that these numbers call for the genitive plural of the noun
or pronoun.
256 RBARUATb UJECTOPI YPOK
V. QUESTIONS
1. rpe ctohji narn KopaSpb? 2. KaKOH 6bip pern*? 3. H3Me-

HHJiacb ph noropa k Beuepy? 4. Hto KpHKHyp KarmraH, Korpa. oh
Bbimeji Ha napy6y? 5. Hto cnycTHJiH Maxpocbi b Bopy? 6. 4tq
ohh ycTpoHHH b napyce? 7. Kto 6bip c hbmh Ha Kopaojie? 8. Ilo-
qeMy- MajibHHKaM He noHpaBHPOCb njiasaTb b KynajibHe? 9. 4to
ohh B3pyMajm peaaTb? 10. Kto 6uji OTep opHoro H3 Majibnu-
kob? 11. 4to KpHKHyji eMy OTep, Korpa MajibHHK CTap oTcxa-
BaTb? 12. 4to KpHKHyjiH c najiyObi? 13. 4to mm Bee yBHpepH b
BOAe? 14. 4X0 3aKpHH3JI MaPbHHKaM CTapblH apTHPJiepHCT?
15. CjibimaJiH jih ero pebnTa? 16, 4to ohh pejiapn? 17. 4to cpe-
papp MaTpocbi? 18. Kto 6 hji 6pifoKe k MaJibHHKaM, any pa hph
MaTpocbi? 19. Kan papexo 6bipa axypa ot MapmHKOB? 20. Bnpe-
ph ph MapbHHKH axypy? 21. Kto orpfmypca? 22. Mto cpepapn
MapbHHKH? 23. Pa36ypHP stot bh3t aprappepHCTa? 24. Kypa
oh noOencap? 25. 4to mbi yBHpePH, Korpa pa3papca BHCTpep?
26. noaeMy mm He BHpepn, hto cpepapocb c anypoH, ... c Mapb-
HHKaMH? 27. Korpa pa3papca co Bcex cTOpOH rpoMKHft, papocT-
HbiH KpHK? 28. rioaeMy pa3papca papocTHbift KpHK? 29. BbicTpo
ph nopnpbipa popna k MapimHKaM? 30. Kypa OHa hx npHBe3pa?

Supply correct forms of the pronouns 66a, o6e:
1. % 3HaiO.H3bIKa: aHFPHHCKHH H pyCCKHH. 2. FpOMKHH
kphk pa36ypHP hx . 3. KanHTaH KpHKHyp hm .f «He
OTcraBaHTeb 4. Maxb 6bipa poBOPbHa . ponepbMH. 5. H
6ypy yxcHHaTb 3-aBTpa c.6paTbHMH. 6. B.KBapTHpax
neT xopomen oScxaHOBKH. 7. hobhix xtypHapa y mchh.
8. Mae HpaBHTcn.pcePTbie CKarepra. 9. Mbi 3HaeM 06.
CTapHHHbix My3enx b BameM ropope. 10. K.HaniHM cocep-
KaM npnexapH tocth.
a. Read and/or write the following numerals:
1,356; 1,401; 2,578; 3,784; 4,963; 5,555; 6,765; 10,000; 125,000;
500,000; 1,200,345; 3,094,912; 5,750,420; 8,900,002.
b. Supply the correct case forms of the numerals in parentheses:
Mbi ycTpoHPH (2) KynaPbHH Ha HarneM 03epe. 2. EMy eipe

Hex (4) pex. 3. H 6ypy poMa k (8) paean. 4. Ha KpacHofi ripo-
ipapH h BcxpeTHP (2) aHrpHPaH. 5 H yBHxey Bac 3aBTpa yTpoM
ne>Kpy (7) h (8) uacaMH. 6. Eiepep (15) ycTaPbiMH MaxpocaMH
ctohp KanHTaH. 7. Opocjieccop 3aHHMaeTca c (20) cTypeHTaMH.
8. B 3toh /nepeBHe qkojio (23) H36. 9. Tyr Ha 3aBOAe ot (200)

Ao (300) paGonwx. 10. H3 (100) KpecTbHH tojibko (60) hmcjih
cbohx aoiuaêH. 11. Moa KOMHaxa b rocTHHHue Ha (19) sraxie.
12. B pecTopaHe, rê h Bcer.na oGeAaio, GbmaeT (200) nejiOBeK
b AeHb. 13. B HauieM yHHBepcHTeTe ecTb Memo a-hh (1,000)
CTyAeHTOB. 14. B GnOjiHOTeKe Gojibiue (1,000,000) CTapbix khht.
c. Supply the correct collective numerals:
1. y Hero (3) AeTeft. 2. ft npurjiacHji (4) TOBapumeft.

3. Oh4 Kynruia (100) hGjiok. 4. Hac Giiuio (5) b KOMHaTe. 5. Y
MeHH (2) HOBbix nacoB h see ohh OTCTaioT.
d. Read and/or write the following in Russian:

1. 92 + 33 = 125 3. 168— 50 = 118 5. 150 + 2 = 75
2. 144 + 1,220 = 1,364 4. 10,000 — 600 = 9,400 6. 5 x5 = 25

a. From the Reading Exercise write out all prepositional phrases,
giving their case and English meaning (41 forms in all).
b. Supply the prepositions H3, ot, nOAJie, C, y according to the

meaning of the sentence, and supply endings wherever necessary:
1. Ham AKpeKTop npHBe3 npeKpacHbin KOBep.KaBKa3—.

2. YTpOM Ayjl CBeJKHH BeTep.BOCTOK-. 3. PeSeHOK 3aKpH-
naji h SpocHJiCH GexiaTb . MHJiHUHOHep—. 4. Bqepa mbi
npHBe3jiH CBexme pBeTbi .AepeBH—. 5. Oh4 CHsuia Gejiyio
cKaTepTb .ctoji—6. Ha npomjioft BejitJie mh nojiyuMJin
nHCbMo.aha—• 7, ft BCTpeny Bac 3aBTpa.Hamero
Apyr—. 8. ApTHJiJiepHCT ynaJT.nyiiiKH. 9. Oh 3aKpHua;i.
6ojih. 10. Mbi Bee 3aMepjm .... crpaxa.
c. Translate the prepositions or phrases in parentheses:
1. JXoMRb HauajiCH TOJibKO (toward) Benepy. 2. (Two hours
before) ero OTB>e3Aa oh yjionaiji Benin h noexaji (to) BOK3aJi.
3. Ham aom ctqhji (on) 6epery peKH. 4. Oh npocToft nejioBeic,
(from among) KpecTbHH. 5. KanHTaH xoahji (along) najiyGe.
6. Mbi GbiBaeM b GnGjinoTeKe (on) noHeAeJibHHxaM. 7. Mbi
xoahm ryAa (for) KHnraMH. 8. (In his presence) oh BcerAa chh-
MaeT mJinny. 9. Bo3bMHTe KHnry (from) dOJia! 10. 3to Aatfce
(for) nac HOBOCTb. 11. (Besides) mchh Ha KOpadJie Ghji eme
oahh MajibHHK mohx JieT. 12. (Within) rOA bbi xopoiiio 6yn;eTe
roBOpHTb no-pyccKH. 13. ft chacji (near) 3toto OKHa. 14. (Behind)
Harneii iukgjioh KpacnBoe Aepeeo, a (under) AepeBOM ctoji h
yAoGHbie cryjibH.
258 JXBAJMATb UIECTOM YPOK
Vn. TRANSLATION INTO RUSSIAN

A
Adapted from Tolstoi’s short story “The Shark”
1. It was a stifling evening. 2. The sailors on our ship had

lowered a sail into the water and had constructed a swimming
pool. 3. We jumped into the water and swam in this pool.
4. But two boys took it into their heads to swim in the open
sea. 5. For both it was confining in the sail. 6. Suddenly they
shouted from the deck, “A shark! Turn back! Come back!”
7. But the boys did not hear the shouting. 8. The shark swam
straight for the boys. 9. The father of one of the boys, an old
artillery officer, was watching them. 10. He was stunned with
fear and white as a sheet. 11. The shark was no further than
fifty paces from the boys. 12. It was twenty-five paces from
them when they finally saw it. 13. We heard a piercing shriek.
14. The shriek seemed to awaken the artillery officer. 15. He
dashed to the cannon. 16. A shot resounded. 17. When the
smoke over the water had scattered, we saw the dead shark on
the waves. 18. From all sides resounded loud, happy shouts.
19. In a few minutes a boat had brought the boys to the ship.
B
1. The name of the author of the little story about the
shark is known in America just as well as it is in Russia; in
both countries everyone reads his famous novels, especially
Anna Karenina and War and Peace. 2. Leo Nikolaevich Tolstoi
was born in Russia at the ancient estate of Yasnaya Polyana
near the famous city [of] Toola. 3. His family was wealthy, but
Tolstoi’s life was not an easy one. 4. His father and mother
both died when the boy was still very young-—his mother in his
second, his father in his eighth year. 5. At 16 (in his 16th
year) Tolstoi enrolled in the Kazan University and then en¬
listed in the army. 6. Soon the social and economic questions
began to interest him more and more. 7. He saw the difficult
situation of the peasants so clearly that it could seem [that]
he himself was of peasant stock (had peasant ancestry). 8. He
loved his peasants, often met with them under a big tree in
his garden, and there carried on long conversations with them.
9. In his presence the peasants were not afraid to tell all about
their difficult life. 10. Tolstoi introduced new methods of tilling
the soil (of field-work) and himself went with the peasants
into the forests and fields. 11. He helped his peasants bring in
(collect) the [grain] harvest, to cart in the hay, and to chop the
wood. 12. He opened a school not only for the children of his own
peasants but also for the children from neighboring villages.
13. He taught them himself, told them such little stories as the
one (that] about the shark. 14. Sometimes he asked (put:
3aAaeaji) such an easy question as: “How far is it from Yasnaya
Polyana to the city [of] Toola?” or even such a simple one as:
“Is this table of gold, silver or wood?” 15. But sometimes he also
asked more difficult questions: “How much is four plus seven?”
or “How much is thirteen minus five?” or even “How much is
fifteen multiplied by eight?” and “eighteen divided by six?”
16. The cleverest of the boys were very happy when they could
answer: “Fifteen multiplied by eight equals 120” and “eight¬
een divided by six equals three”. 17. But Tolstoi did not only
teach the boys in his little school. 18. From [all] the four cor¬
ners (ends) of the world, from east and west, from north and
south, people came to talk with Tolstoi about problems of re¬
ligion, ethics, and education. 19. Because Tolstoi was not only
one of the greatest writers, but also a great philosopher and a
deeply religious (pejiHrH03Hbifi) man.
ABAMATb CEftbiOM YPOK
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON
Suffixes -to, -Hn6y^b; prefix hh — Subjunctive: unreal

condition; tense sequence — Date expressions
riOBHCJlH Ha# FOpOJlOM Hovered (Lit.: hung) over

the city
Ha caMOM nene Really, as a matter of fact
MMeHHO... Just, the very
Bee TaKH Nevertheless, yet
Bee oGctoht Ojiaronojiymio All is well
CTOHT TOJIbKO BbinOJIHHTb It’s merely a matter of carry¬
ing out, fulfilling
Ycnex HecoMHeHHO oOecneneH Success is unquestionably
assured.
MT66bI nOHHTb In order to understand
TblJIOBbie HaCTH Rear units
BpeMJi 3to HenocHJibHO. That (is) an excessive
burden, assignment.
II. READING: CTAJIHHFPA/fCKOE CPA>KEHHE

Adapted from K. Simonov’s Days and Nights
B ^ynjHHft aBrycTOBCKHft iieHb, goMdapnHpoBiiiHKH B03-
AyuiHoft acxanpbi PuxTrocêHa1 c yTpa noBHCJin Han roponOM.
Hhkto He 3Haji, cxojibKo hx 6buro Ha caMOM nene, ho 3a neHb
HadjuonaTejiH HacuHTann Han roponoM nBe tmchhe caMOJieTOB.
Fopon ropeji. Oh ropeji HOHb, Becb cjlenyk)hihh neHb h bcio
cuenyfOLiiyK) HOHb. B nepBbiH neHb noxcapa 6oh iujih em,e okojio
mecTHnecHTH KHJiOMeTpOB ot ropona, ho hmchho c stoto noxcapa
Havajiocb 6ojibui6e CTajiHHrpancKoe cpaxceHne.
Ha TpeTHii neHb, noxcap b CTajrarpane Hauaji CTHxaTb, ho
ropon 6biJi Tax orpoivreH, hto rne-HH^ynb Bee paBHo scerna
hto-to ropejio.
1 Richthofen’s flying squadron. Richthofen, a flying ace (German)

of the first World War.
260
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON 261
Ha AecHTbie cyTKH, nocae Hanajia no>Kapa HeMUbi noAOiujiH

TaK 6jih3ko, hto hx cuap/iAM h mhhh ctmh Bee name pa3pbi-
BaTbCH He TOJibKo Ha OKpaHnax, ho h b ueHTpe ropoAa.
Ha AsaAUaTb nepBbie cyTKH KaHOHaAa Hanajiacb b ceMb yTpa
h He npeKpamajiacb ao saKaxa.
Ecjih KTO-HH6yAb nonaji 6w b mxa6 apMHH b bth ahh, to
eMy 6h noKa3aJiocb, hto see o6ctoht GjiaronojiyHHO. Ecjih oh
nocMQTpeji 6bi Ha LUTa6Hyio KapTy ropoAa, to oh yeHêJi 6bi Ha
Heft SoJibmoe KOjiHHecTBO ahbh3hh h 6pHraA. Oh MOT 6bl
ycjrb'miaTb npHKa3aHHH, Koxopbie oxâBajiH no xeJiecfjQHy KOMaH-
AHpbl 3THX AHBH3HH H 6pUT3.A- EMy MOTJIO 6bl nOKa3aTbCH, HTO
CTOHT TOJIbKO BbinOJIHHTb 3TH IipHKa3aHHH H yOieX HeCOMHeHHO
oSecneneH.
Ho HTOSbl AeHCTBHTejIbHO HOHHTb, HTO npOHCXQAHJTO, Hy>K~
HO SblJTO 6bl AOSpaTbCH AO CaMbIX AHBH3HH.
B nocjieAHHe ahh b mxadax apMHH n TbijioBbix nacTHX

B3HJIH Bcex, KTO He 6bIJI TaM AeHCTBHTeJIbHO Heo6xOAHM.
TeaecjDOHHCTbi, noBapa, xhmhkh CTann nexoxoft. Kota a na-
naJibHHK niTa6a apMHH cMOTpea Ha iHxaSHyio KapTy, oh kohchho
3Haji, hto HeKOTOpbie ero ahbh3HH yace He ahbh3hh. Ho oh no-
npencHeMy TpeSoBaji, ht66h Ha hx njieHH naAana hmchho Ta
BoeHHaa 3aAana, KOTopaa AOJDKHa naAaTb Ha njienn ahbh3hh.
Bee HanajibHHKH ox caMbix dojibmftx ao caMbix Majibix1
3HaJIH, HTO 6peMH §TO HenOCHJIbHO, H BCe-TaKH OHH KJiajIH 3T0
HenocHJibHoe 6peMH Ha naenn cbohx noAHHHeHHbix. /Jpyroro
BbixoAa He 6i>ijio, a BoesaTb nonpeacHeMy 6bmo Heo6xoAHMO,
III. VOCABULARY
aBryCTOBCKHH, August (adj.) KHJIOMCTp kilometer
-an, -oe KOJIHHeCTBQ quantity,
apMHH army number
6oh battle KOMaHAHp commander
j gunner MHHa mine,
60M6apAHpOBIlI.HK mortar shell
[bombing plane
GpHraaa brigade Ha6jooAaTeAb(m.) observer
BOeHHblft, military HeMeu, (fe) German
-'an, -'oe HeoOxoAHMbift, necessary,
BbIXOA way out, -'an, -'oe; -o indispens¬
exit able
AeftCTBHTeJIbHO really OKpaHHa outskirts
AHBH3HH division nexoTa infantry
KaHOHaAa cannonading nosap cook
1 Majibix genitive plural of Mart: MaJieHtKHfi “small.’' Here “of

low rank.”
262 HBA/fUATb CEUbMQR YPOK
ITOJXHHHeHHbljly subordinate cjieAyiomHH, following

-'aji, -'oe -an, -ee
nomp conflagration, cnapm shell
fire cpanceHHe battle
nonpe>KHeMy as before XHMHK chemist
npMKasaHHe order, HiTaG 'staff, head¬
command uiTaGHbifi, quarters
caMOJieT airplane -'an, -'oe (adj.)
Verbs
BoesaTb; bokho, noBoeeatb (BoeeaTb) to fight, wage
BOioeuib, boioiot war
BbinOJIHHTb (I) BbinOJIHHTbJ BbinOJIHlOy to fulfill, carry¬
BbinOJIHHUIb; BbinOJIHHT out
ropeTb; ropso cropeTb (ropeTb) I. to burn;
ropHiiib, ropHT P. burn up
AoGHpaTbCH (I) AoGpaTbca; .aoGepycb, to reach, get to
AoOepeuibCH, AoGepyTCH
HaCHHTblBaTb (I) Hac^HTaTb (I) to count

npOHCXOJIHTb (xOAHTb) npOHSOftTH (yflTH) to happen, take
place
pa3pbiBaTbca (I) pa30pBaTbca; to burst, tear,
pa30peycb, explode
pa3opBeinbc«[,
pa30pByTca
CTHXaTb (1) 1 CTHXHyTbJ CTHXHy, to abate, quiet

CTHXHeiUb, CTHXHyT down, subside
TpeGosaTb; Tpeflyio, noTpeGoBaTb to demand
TpeGyeuib, TpeGyioT (TpeGoBaTb)
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Pronouns
1. The indefinite pronoun is obtained by attaching the

endings -to or -HHdyab to kto and mo (and to their declen¬
sional forms):1
, . * Têre are other methods, but their discussion would exceed a

basic course such as this.
KTO-to someone KTO-HH6yjib anyone

4TO-TO something HTO-HH6yAb anything
Koro-To of someone Kor6-HH6y^b of anyone

Mero-TO of something Hero-HH&y^b of anything, etc.
Of the two endings, -to conveys a greater degree of cer¬

tainty and definitiveness and is therefore best rendered by
someone, something. -HH6ya,b, conveying complete indefinite¬
ness and generality is usually rendered by anyone, anything.
Notice however that in Russian HHbyjib is often used where in
English we use “someone” or “something.” It is used most
frequently in the future and question form:
KT©-Hjf6yztb 6yAeT TaM. Someone will be there.
BblJI KTO-HHbyflb TaM? Was anyone (someone) there?
JX?L, KTO-TO 6bIJI, HO He 3HaKD Yes, someone was there, but I
KTO. do not know (exactly) who.
3aHHMa;iCH oh MeM-HH6yAb? Was he busy with anything
(something) ?
Oh neM-TO 6hji 34hht. He was busy (occupied) with
something.
These suffixes can also be attached to certain pronoun-
adjectives and adverbs:
KaKOH-TO some kind of KaKoft-HHbyflb any kind of
rae-To somewhere, some nie-HH6y,ab anywhere, any
place place
Kyaa-To to somewhere, Kyna-mffiyub to anywhere,
some place any place
Korâ-To once upon a time, Korfla-HHSyflb any time at all,
some time any time
2. Negative pronouns are formed by prefixing hh-:
Hhkto MeHH He 3HaeT. Nobody knows me.

Hhhto He noMorjio. Nothing did any good. (Lit:
Nothing helped.)
H HHKoro hc 3Haio. I don’t know anyone.
Oh HHKOMy HHHero He Aaji. He did not give anyone
anything.
Oh4 hh c KeM He 3HaKQMa. She knows no one.
Oh hh o kom He roeopHT. He speaks of no one.
Note the double negative: hhkto .He; hhhto .He;

HHKoro.He, etc.
264 fiBAfiUATb CEfibMOH YPOK
Hh- can also be prefixed to certain pronoun-adjectives and

adverbs:
Oh He HHTaeT HHKaKHX ra3er He reads no newspapers
whatever
Hh Kor.a,a h He noftny k hhm I shall never go to them
H HHFjie He 6Bui cero^HH I have not been anywhere
today
B. The subjunctive1
1. Formation of the subjunctive:

The subjunctive is formed by combining the past tense of
the verb (of either aspect) with the particle 6bi (or its con¬
tracted form 6) :
9iHHTaji 6bi. I should read.
OHa 6bi nHcajia. She would write, etc.
2. Use of the subjunctive in unreal condition:

There are in Russian, as in English, two types of condi¬
tional sentences, those expressing a real condition and those
expressing an unreal or contrary to fact condition. Both types
consist of a “conditional” or “if” clause and a “result” clause.
a. The real condition expresses a situation (or “condition”)

which is actual or at least possible in the present, past, or
future. In this type of conditional sentence the verb will always
be in the indicative, no matter what the tense. The conjunc¬
tion “if” is generally rendered by earn:2
Present Ecjih ôxczcb naeT, to oh .homs.

If it is raining, he is at home.
Past Ero He dbuio tsm, ecJiH bbi ero He BiUejiH.
He was not there if you did not see him.
Future Mbi 6yneM oueHb earn bbi npHêie.
We shall be very happy if you come.
1 In Russian the subjunctive mood is identical in form with the

conditional.
2 The conjunctions pa3 and Ktvrjia are sometimes used. There are
still other ways of introducing a conditional clause (imperative, infini¬
tive) but their discussion would exceed the limits of a basic course
such as this.
b. The unreal condition implies that a result would take

place if a certain condition could or would be fulfilled, but that
the condition could not be or was not fulfilled. Such a sentence
may also express the wish that something would occur in the
future. This type of sentence is always rendered by the use of
the subjunctive in both clauses, that is, by the use of the past
verb with 6m (6), which is generally introduced directly after
the verb in the result clause and after “earn” in the conditional
clause:
Oh 6mji 6h aOMa, ecjiw 6m ineji aoxotb.

(He would be at home if it were raining.
^He would have been at home if it had rained.1
Mbi 6mjih 6bi oqeHb paAbi, ecjin6 bh npuuuiti.

$We would be very happy if you would come.
(We would have been very happy if you had come.1
The sequence of clauses can be reversed. In this case the

conjunction to may be used to introduce the result clause:
Bcjih 6bi ineji AO>KAb, to oh 6 ha 6bi aoms.

Ecjih6 bm npmujiK, mh 6 bum 6bi oneHb paAbi.
Note: It is very important to distinguish between the true
conditional “would” and the “would” used in an indirect state¬
ment after a principal (or introductory) verb in the past tense:
(a) He would read if he could, (b) She said that she would read.
In sentence (a) we have a true conditional “would”:
Oh HHTaji 6m, ecjiH 6bi Mor.

In sentence (b) “would” stands for “shall” of the corres¬
ponding direct statement (She said: “I shall read.”), in ac¬
cordance with the rules of tense sequence which apply in Eng¬
lish. In Russian, however, there is no tense sequence and the
“would” of the English sentence is therefore rendered by the
future tense:
Ohs cKa3ajia, hto (oHa) 6yACT mhtatm

C. Date expressions (review and supplement)
1. Tbicsma AeBHTbcoT co- 1947 (Lit.: the 1947th year)
pox ceAbMofl roA
i Notice that in Russian the present and past unreal conditions
can be differentiated only within a larger context.
266 .HBAMATb CEZlbMOl/J YPOK
2. To express “in the year” use b with the prepositional:

B Tbicflqa A^BHTbcoT In (the year) 1947
copoK ceAbMOM roAy
B npomjiOM roAy In the past year; last year
B 6yAymeM roAy In the coming year; next
year
3. Day, month, and year are expressed as follows:

ZlBAimaTb nflToe Man The 25th of May, 1935
Tbicnqa AeBATbcox’ TpHA-
uaTb nnToro roAa
JlBaAnaTb nnToro hiohh On the 25th of June, 1929

TbicaHa AeBHTbcoT ab4a-
AaTb AeBflToro roAa
4. Dates are written as follows:

20-oe 4>eBpaAH 1947 r. February 20, 1947
5-oro Maa 1947 r. On the 5th of May, 1947
Bo BTopHHK, 7-oro On Tuesday, June 7, 1947
hiohh, 1947 r.
Note that rr. stands for foam “years” and must be read
in the proper case, depending on context:
1947 (-oro) h 1949 Of the years 1947 and 1949

(-oro) rr. i. e. roAOB
B 1947 (-om) h 1949 In the years 1947 and 1949,
(-om) rr. i. e. roAax etc.
V. QUESTIONS
1. Kto noBHC HaA ropOAOM b AyniHbift aBrycTOBCKHft Aem>?

2. CKOjibKO caMOAeTOB HacqHraAH HaSjiKWTejra 3a a^hb?
3. CKOjibKO BpeMeHH ropeA ropoA? 4. C Hero HanaAocb 6oab-
moe CiaAHHrpaACKoe cpaxceHHe? 5. KorAa HanaA cTHxaTb no-
Acap b ^ CraAHHrpaAe? 6. floneMy noxcap He npexpamaACH?
7.^ Kotas noAoniAH hcmuh coBceM 6ah3ko k ropoAy? 8. Fas Bee
name CTaAH pa3pbiBaTbcn hx cHapHAbi h mhhm? 9. B kotopom
nacy yrpa HanaAacb KanoHaAa Ha AsaAuaTb nepBbie cyTKH?
10. Kota a OHa npeKpaTHJiacb? 11. Ecjih 6bi KTO-HH6yAbrionaJi

6bi b 3th ahh b niTa6 apMHH, khkhm eMy 6bl noKa3ajiocbnOJIO-
xcemie pyccKHX nacTeft b CTajmHrpaê? 12. Mto oh yBHêji 6u,
ecjiH 6bi oh nocMOTpeji Ha HiTaOHyio Kapry? 13. Mto mot 6bi
oh ycjibimaTb? 14. Fê mot 6bi oh y3HaTb, hto AeHCTBHTejibHO
XipOHCXOAHJIO? 15. Koro B3HJIH H3 IHTadoB apMHH H TbIJIOBbIX
nacTeft? 16. Mto 3Haji HauajibHHK niTa6a apMHH, KorAa oh cmot-
peji Ha mxaSHyio KapTy. 17. Hero oh nonpextHeMy TpeOoBaji?
18. Mto 3h4jih Bee HauajibHHKH ot caMbix OojibuiHx no caMbix
MaJieHbKHX?

In Exercises a and b translate the pronouns1 in parentheses:
a. 1. Tyr (someone) TpeSyeT KOMaHnnpa k TejiecfioHV. 2. JlyiH
(someone) ceroAHfl npHB63JiH orpoMHbin cyHAyK. 3. H BHxcy
(someone) Ha 6epery peKH. 4. MHe Sojibiue He HyxceH stot
xcypHan, h ero ota4m (anyone). 5. Ha KOHpepTe h, KOHeuno,
(anyone) BCTpeuy. 6. Oh Bcerna (something) 34hht. 7. 3to MHe
b xo3HMCTBe RJift (anything) 6yneT HyxcHo. 8. Tbi 6bi 3aHXJiCH
(anything). 9. Oh ajih (something) noexaji b ropOA. 10. Pac-
c-Ka>KH MHe, 6a6yiHKa, o (anything)! 11. (Some kind of) MaTpoc
OpocHJicH b Bony. 12. MHe KaxmTcx, (somewhere) noxcap. 13. Jle-
tom Mbi, KOHeuHo, (anywhere) noeneM. 14. He 3Haexe jih bbi
(anywhere) (any kind of) KBapTHpbi? 15. (Ever) h AoSepycb ao
Moefl ahbh3hh? 16. Homhk), (sometime) h 6biJi noBapOM Ha stom
KopaSxe. 17. HauaJibHHK mxaSa apMHH (somewhere) yuiex.
18. Mbi cxbimaxH, xaK (somewhere) ynax cHapHA. 19. HpeKpa-
thtch jih (ever) 3xa KaHOHap;a? 20. KynHTe MHe (jiyHT (any kind
of) Mhca.
b. 1. (Nobody) He 3Hajr, uen sto hobhh aom Ha oKpaHHe
ropoAa. 2. Bbi, noxcajiyficTa, btoto (nobody) He roBopmre. 3. 51
Tax ycTaxa, hto He Mory (about nothing) cenuac roBOpHTb. 4. $
TyT (with nobody) He 3HaKOM. 5. KaxceTcn, Ham komhhahp
(nothing) SoJibme He TpeOoBaji. 6. Ham noBap He HHTepeco-
BaJicH (nothing), KpoMe eAbi. 7. Moh ripHBTeJib, H3BecTHbift xh-
mhk, (never) (nowhere) He SbiBaeT. 8. 3toh BecHoft Mbi AeMCTBH-
TeJibHO (nowhere) He noeAeM. 9. Ham TexecjiOHHCT (never) eme
He 6ha b CTaxHHrpaAe. 10. (Any sort of) npHKa3aHHH Ao6paTb-
ch ao HeMiteB h ot Hero He cjibimax.
1 The pronouns are chosen in keeping with the Russian, not the
English text, thus underscoring the difference in usage of “some” and
“any” in the two languages.
^BAilUATb CE^bMOW YPOK
a. In the following sentences supply the conjunction ecJiH; give

the English translation.
1.mh 6yêM xopoino saHHMaTbcn, to mh CKopo 6y-

AeM roBopHTb no-pyccKH. 2. PedenoK 3aKpHUHT.oh yria-
a£t. 3.6yxeT xoxtAb, mh He noeêM b êpeBHio. 4. $ npo-
MTy KHHry,.oh ee npHHeceT. 5.stot MajibUHK 3HaeT
aHTJIMHCKHH 5T3bIK, TO OH 6yAGT HHTaTb J^HKHCHCa nO-aerJIHHCKH.
6.HeoSxo^HMO BoeBaTb, to mh CyneM BoeBaTb. 7.
KanHTaH noTpeSyeT cnycTHTb ry JiojiKy, to mh ee cnycTHM.
8. Ycnex o6ecneneH,.y Haqa/rbHHKa aoct4tohho ahbh3hh.
9.mh Bee SyaeM xoporno pa6oTaTb, to Ham kojixo3
6yêT JiymiiHM b CTpaHe. 10. Mbi nomaeM b napK,.He OyêT
Tax xojioaho.
b. In the above sentences reverse the sequence of clauses, making

all the other necessary changes.
c. Change the real condition sentences given above into contrary

to fact conditions and then translate into English, for example:
Real condition: PeSeHOK 33KpHHHT, ecjiH oh ynaêT.

Contrary to fact: PeSeHOK sanpHnaJi 6bi, ecjiwd oh ynaji.
English translation: The child would have cried if it had fallen.
d. Translate all phrases in parentheses:
1. (If you wish to rest), npHe3}KaH k HaM b AepeBHio! 2. Oh

CKa3aA, hto oh (would go) Ha KOHuepT. 3. Ecjih 6hi h He 6b\ji
npocTyxeeH, h (would have gone) Ha KOHu,epT. 4. (He would go)
Ha KOHuepT, ecjiH 6h He 6bui fipocTyaceH. 5. Ecjih h He 6yay
npocTynceH, h (shall go) Ha KOHpepT. 6. Ecjih 6bi MajibHHKH He
saxpHuaJiH, CTapbift apTHJiJiepncT (would not have seen) axyjibi.
7. (If) Ha6jnoAaTejib He orjiHHyjicn, to oh He BCTpeTHji 6bi cbo-
ero KOMaHAHpa. 8. Ecjih6 Bbi He 6o4jiHCb xaHOHaABi, to bh
(would have reached) ao OKpanHbi ropQAa. 9. (If) riOAHHHeHHbie
EbinOJIHHJIH npHKa3a.HHH CBOHX HauaJIbHHKOB, HeMpeB ASBHO
(would not have been) b ropoAe. 10. (If) th mchh He pa36yAHA,
h (would not have gotten) Ha coSpaHne. 11. Oh cKa3aji, hto oh
(would not he late) Ha stot noe3A. 12. (If) h He ono3A4io Ha
3T0T noe3A, TO h (shall be) 3aBTpa b Mockbe. 13. (If) h He
ono3AaJi Ha 4tot noe3A, to h (would have been) yace b MocKBe.
14. Ecjih 6a6yuiKa He Haxpbijia Ha ctoji b ctojioboh, to aoth

(must eat) Ha KyxHe. 15. (If) 6a6yuiKa He HaxpbiJia 6bi Ha ctoji
b ctojioboh, to AeTH (would have eaten) Ha KyxHe. 16. (It would
have been) oueHb npHHTHo no3HaKOMHTbCH c BauiHM annex,
(if we had not been) Tan 3aHHTbi.
Read in Russian, translating the English phrases in parentheses:

L Tenepb 1947; uepe3 jib a roâ 6yêT 1949; ABa roâ
TOMy Ha3aA 6biji 1945. 2. IlapfbK, 28-oe cjjeBpajiH 1932. 3. Bep-
jihh, 5-oe hiojih 1944 r. 4. Mocxsa, 15-oe Aexadpn 1918 r.
5. OrajiHHrpaACKoe cpaxceHHe 6hjio b 1942 h 1943 rr.; oho Ha-
uajiocb (in September 1942) h kohhhjiocb (February 2, 1943).
6. Mbi 6bijih b JIoHAOHe (in 1933). 7. Oh 6biJi b Pocchh (from
the 5th of March, 1920 to April 10, 1935). 8. B Mocxee (in 1939)
SbiJio (4,137,000) xcHTejieH (inhabitants), a b JleHHHrpaê
(1,191,000). 9. AjiexcaH^p CepreeBHH IlyuiKHH poahjich (in the
year 1799) h yMep (in the year 1837). 10. Jles HHKOJiaeBHU Toji-
ctoh poahjich (August 28, 1828) h yMep (November 7, 1910).

A
Adapted from K. Simonov’s Days and Nights
1. When the Germans were still sixty kilometers from
Stalingrad, the city began to burn. 2. Airplanes were over the
city day and night. 3. One day the observers counted 2,000
planes. 4. The huge city burned for a day and two nights. 5. On
the third day the conflagration began to quiet down. 6. Never¬
theless, somewhere there was always a fire, because the city
was so huge. 7. Ten days after the start of the conflagration,
German bombs and mines began to burst in the center of the
city. 8. On the morning of the 21st day of the battle of Stalin¬
grad, cannonading began at seven in the morning and did not
end until eight in the evening. 9. Battles were raging (going)
on the outskirts of the huge city. 10. And yet, if someone had
come to army headquarters, he would have thought that all
was well. 11. He would have seen on the map a great number
of divisions and brigades. 12. He would have heard how the
commanders were giving orders to these divisions and brigades.
13. Success would have seemed to him unquestionably assured.
14. Yet in order to understand what was really happening, he
would have had to get to the divisions themselves. 15. Here he
would have seen that those divisions no longer were divisions.
270 riBAXlUATb CE^bMOH YPOK
16. No one knew how many soldiers were in these divisions.

17. Nevertheless, it was necessary to fight as before. 18. Tele¬
phone operators, cooks, and chemists had to become infantry¬
men. 19. There was no other way out.
1. Yesterday, on the 23rd of January, 1957,1 gave a report

on Simonofs novel Days and Nights. 2. Before I began (nepea
xeM Kan + infinitive) my report, I asked the students: “Has
anyone of you read this novel of Simonof? ” 3. Someone did know
the name of the author, but no one had read the book. 4.1 had
read about this novel for the first time in the August issue
(number) of the magazine New World. 5. It seems to me that
it was in the first or second week of September, 1956. 6. At
once I wanted to read the book, but I could not find it any¬
where, neither at home nor in our school nor in the library
of our little town. 7. Finally, I wrote to my brother, and he
really did have it and immediately sent it to me. 8. He had
been to (in) Russia twice, in the summer months of the years
1953 and 1954, 9. He no longer remembered where or why he
had bought it, in some Russian city, perhaps even in Stalin¬
grad itself. 10. If he had not bought the book then, I would
never have read it and, of course, could not have given my
report. 11. When I had finished the report, someone asked
me: “When was the battle of Stalingrad?” 12. Really, had
I forgotten to tell them the date of this important event
of the war? 13. “Dear friends,” I said, “please forgive me, if
I forgot to tell you these important dates. 14. If I remember
correctly, the battle began on the third of September, 1942,
and ended on the second of February, 1943.” 15. Another
student asked: “Have you ever met and spoken to (with) a
Stalingrad hero or anyone from the city of Stalingrad?”
16. “No, never!” I answered, “But if I had been in Russia,
I surely would have met a Stalingrad soldier or a citizen of
Stalingrad and would have heard from him something about
that famous battle.” 17. And, of course, someone wanted to
know what would have happened if the Russian divisions
could not have carried out the orders and could not have
carried the excessive burden. 18. “Dear friend,” I answered,
“nobody can tell you that, for no one knows that!”
flBAAHATb BOCbMOft YPOK
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON
Subjunctive: purpose, wish, obligation, generalization —

Adverbial participle — Conjunctions
Bo 4TO 6bl TO HH CTaJIO At all cost, by all means

PaSoTaTb He noKjiaAaa pyK To work constantly. Lit.:
without laying down one’s
hands
Kan 6m thvkcjio hh paSoTaji... No matter how hard (he)
worked . . .
FOMOpHCTHMeCKHH HtypHaJI Humorous magazine, a
periodical of wit and
entertainment
Fji&bhmm 66pa30M Mainly, chiefly
BMecre c TeM At the same time, in addition
to, along with
MMerb Oojibuioe bjihahhc Ha To have a great influence on
-h (Ace.)
ii. reading: o hexobe (I860-1904)
A. II. HexoB ponxhiCH 17-ro HHBapa 1860 roAa b TaraHpore,

HedojibiuoM ropoê Ha lore Pocchh. Oxen, HexoBa 6mji H3 Kpe-
CTbHH, HO OH XOTeJI JiyHHieH >KH3HH CaMOrO ceda H AJIfl CBOHX
AeTeii. He HMesi kh cpeACTB, hh o6pa30BaHHH, oh eme MajibHHKOM
Hanaji padoTaxb b KOHTOpe OAHoro H3 ropoACKHX KyimoB.
PeiUHBUIH BO HTO-6bI TO HH CTaJIO AOdliTbCH He3aBHCHMOCTH,
0Tep Hexosa padoTaji He noMaaafl pyn. J\jin Toro, hto6m AodHTb-
ch cBoeft pexH oh ompbui CBoe Hedojibmoe, xoproBoe AeJio b Ta¬
raHpore b 1857 roAy.
OAHaKO, nan 6bi THHcejio hh paSoTaji OTen. HexoBa, oh He
xcajieji AeHer Ha to, hto6h cAejiaTb cbohx agtch o6pa30BaHHbiMH
JIIOAbMH. JXcTVL He TOJIbKO XOAHJIH B HIKOJiy, HO TaKXCe 3aHHMa-
JIHCb H H3bIKaMH H My3bIK0H.
Okohhhb uiKOJiy b TaraHpore, cbihobsh MexoBa npOAOJDKajra
CBoe odpa30BaHHe b Mockbc. CTapniHH cbih, AjieKcaHAp, okohhhji
271
272 flBAflUATb BOCbMOH YPOK
MareMaTHHecKHH (£>aKy,7ibTeT Mockobckofo yramepCHTeTa, MjiaA-

niHH, MHxaiiJi, y^HJiCH Ha lopHAnnecKOM (JjaKyjibTeTe, a Ahtoh
nocTynHji Ha MeAHUHBCKHft (JjaKyjibTeT.
Ynacb b yHHBepcHTeTe Uexos 3aHHMajicn He TOJibKo Me^HUH-
hoh, ho h JiHTepaTypoH. Eme CyAynn cryaeHTOM UexoB Hanaji
nHcaTb paccKa3bi ajih KiMOpHCTHHecKHx H<ypiiajioB. 3to 6hjih
MaJieHbKne coBceM KopoTKHe paccKa3bi, npexpacHbie no $opMe
h oneHb CMeniHbie. UexoB nepBHM BBeji Taxyio (JjopMy KOpoTKoro
paccKa3a b pyccxyio jiHTeparypy: «# yneio kopotko roBopHTb o
ajiHHHbix Bemax», nncaji caM UexoB o CBoeM TBopnecTBe. H
êflcTBHTejibHO, b HecKOJibKHx cjioBax Uexos yMeeT nepeâTb He
TOJibKO xapaKTep, ho h bcio >KH3Hb cbohx repoeB.
Bo BTOpOH HOJIOBHHe CBOeii >KH3HH UeXOB nncajl, rjiaBHbIM
66pa30M, Rjia TeaTpa. Ilbecbi UexoBa fl,ajm pyccKOMy TeaTpy
coBceM HOBoe HanpaBjieHHe. «IlycTb Ha cneHe Bee 6yAeT rai< ace
cji6}kho h BMecre c TeM Tan nee npocro, Kan b jkh3hh», roBopnji
dexoB.
OAHano, Tax >xe xax h b «MajieHbKKx» paccxa3ax UexoBa
3 ero nbecax, HecMOTpn Ha hx npocTory, orpoMHoe SoraTCTBo
4Aeft h Mbicjien, rjiySoKoe (fmAOco^CKoe coAepxcaHHe.

MexoB HMeji 6ojibuioe bjihhhhc He tojibko Ha pyccnyio, ho
* Ha MHposyio jiHTeparypy, a ero ribecbi Tenepb moxcho BHAerb
3 reaTpax Bcex crpaH MHpa, Ha Bcex H3biKax.
III. VOCABULARY
ioraTCTBO wealth, riches CMeuiHofl, funny, comical,
epoft hero -an, -6e amusing
[OpOTKHH, short, brief cOAep>KaHHe contents
-'an, -'oe CpeACTBO means
:6pOTKO short, cuena stage, scene
(adv.) brief TBOpHeCTBO creation, works,
yneu merchant creative power
lanpaBjieHHe direction TOprOBblft, trade (adj.)
e3aBHCHMOCTb independence -'an, -'oe
pOCTOTa simplicity 4)HJlOCOBCKHft, philosophical
beca drama, play -an, -'oe
accKa3 story, tale, 4>opiwa form, shape,
narrative genre
JIOIKHO complicated xapaKTep character
itejib aim, goal
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON 273
Verbs
AOdHBaTbCH (I) AOdHTbcn; Ao6biocb, to strive for

AodbewbCH, ôSbiorcH (successfully),
gain, achieve
eapaSaTbmaxb (I) sapadoTaib (I) to earn
nepeâeaTb (aaearb) nepeârb (âib) to transmit,
pass on
IV. GRAMMAR
A. Use of the subjunctive (continued)
1. To express purpose:
Oh roBOpHT mcajichho, ht66m bm mofjih ero tiohhtb.
He speaks slowly so that you may understand him.
H noway b dndjiHOTeKy, HTodbi B3«Tb KHHry.
I shall go to the library to take (out) a book.
Note: When the subject of the dependent clause is the same as

that of the introductory clause, the verb is in the infinitive.
The conjunction ht66m “in order to, to, so that, that” is
also used in the compound form ;msi Toro, mobbi {Lit.: for
that, that . . .).
JXJ1S5 Toro, HTObbI CTaTb HBBCCTHblM yueHHM, Haao MHOrO

padoraTb.
To become a famous scientist, one must work much.

2. To express a wish (especially one that cannot or would
not be fulfilled):
EcjihG tojibko He 6bmo dojibwe bohhbi!
If only there would be no more war! {Lit.: If only it would
not be any more war [gen.].)
Xoporno 6biJio 6h noecTb!
It would be nice to have a little bite to eat!
Tbi 6bi ceji m Harwcaji 6bi eMy!
Why don’t you sit down and write to him! {Lit.: [I wish
that] you would sit down and write to him.)
274 fiBAfiUATb BOCbMOH VPOK
H He xoqy, ht66m bh Tax MHoro paSoxaJiH.

I don’t want you to work so much. (Lit.: I do not want
that you work so much.)
3. To express obligation (with the implication that the
obligation is, at the moment at least, not being fulfilled).
MHe cJie/ioBajio 6m Sojibwe padoTaTb. ) I should be working
ft jxojivtceu 6mji 6m Sojibine padoTaTb, j more.
4. To express generalization:
Kto 6m MeHH hh cnpocHJi, a He CKaxcy hh cjiosa.
No matter who asks me, I shall not say a word.
c[to 6m oh hhcKasaJi, see 6hjio npaBHJibHO.
Whatever he said, everything was correct.
KyM 6m hh nocMOTpeTb, B&3jie Boaa.
No matter where you look, there is water everywhere.
Bo hto6m to hh crajio! By all means!
In this type of construction the 6m is used with a pro¬

noun or adverb and is used together with the particle hh.
B. The adverbial participle
The adverbial participle is frequently met with in conversa¬

tional and, especially, in literary Russian. It is a part of speech
formed from the verb and used as an adverb to indicate in what
manner (or under what circumstances) an action is performed.
Thus, in the sentences “I speak standing” or “I write sitting”,
the adverbial participles “standing” and “sitting” indicate the
manner in which the actions of “speaking” and “writing” are
performed. The adverbial participle has two tense forms: 'pres¬
ent and past. The present is used when the action expressed by
the verb and by the participle are simultaneous (as in the
examples above); the past is used when the action expressed
by the participle precedes the one expressed by the verb (e. g.:
Having written the letter, he mailed it).
1. The present tense adverbial participle1 is formed by tak¬

ing the third person plural present tense form of the verb,
dropping -iot (-yx) of the first-conjugation verb and -at (-aT)

of the second-conjugation verb, and adding h (or a after sibi¬
lant sounds) :
1 There are many verbs that do not have a present tense adverbial
participle, for instance iwcarb and most monosyllabic verbs: nen», hhti»,
JKH&Tb, etc.
HHTa(K)T) : HHTa -f- a == MHTafl reading

HMe(iOT) : HMe 4 h = HMea having
>KHB(yr) : xchb -fa — ^chbh living
KpH^(aT) : KpHU 4 a = Kpnua shouting
roBop(ht) : rOBop -f- a = roBopfl speaking
Reflexive verbs always add the ending -neb: oAeeasiCb.
2. The past tense adverbial participle is formed by taking

the past tense of the verb, dropping the ending -ji, and adding
b or bum to the resulting form :
cnpocH(ji): cnpocH + b = cnpocHB

having asked
4 BIUH = CnpOCHBUlM
Reflexive verbs always add the ending -Biimcb: ozteBaBuiHCb.
In forming the past adverbial participle, the perfective

aspect of the verb is usually used. Verbs with irregular past
tense formation usually add the ending -sum (instead of b or
bum).1
3. The participial forms of 6bitb “to be” are:
Present: by/tyuH “being, while being”
Past: bblBUIH “having been”
C. Conjunctions and particles

The English translations of the following conjunctions and
particles are approximate and will vary with different contexts.
Emphatic:
me but Oh noihueT, h me He will go, but I
ocTaHycb. shall remain.
Bbi me He xotcjm Tyzta But (I thought)
hohth! you did not want
to go there.
Hie then rioueMy me th Why then are you
ocTaeuibCH? staying?
me, m- H m Tede roBOpHji! 1 told you so!
flame even Aame oh He 3Haji. Even he did not
know.
neftcTBHTejibHo Oh neftcTBMxejibHo He is truly,
truly, really, rjiyn. really stupid,
indeed, in fact
i For instance, npHwec: npiiHecurw “having brought”

npHBbiK: npHBHKUiH “having grown accustomed”
npHiueji: npHujenum “having come”
276 ABAHUATb BOCbMOW YPOK
Concessive:
XOTH Xoifl oh h rAyn, Though stupid, lie
(even) though HO MHA. is nice.
HeCMOTpH Ha HecMOxpH Ha hx In spite of their
in spite of, notwith¬ npocxoxy simplicity
standing
Adversative:
OAHaKO OAHaKO, oh ne However, lie did
however, yet xoxe a. not want.
HanpoxMB HanpoTHB, 6biao On the contrary,
on the contrary oneHb AerKO. it was (even)
very easy.
Distributive:
Si... M M AeHb H HOHb Both day and
both . . . and night
HAH. . . MAH MAM H MAH OH Either I or lie
either ... or
HH . . . HM HH OH HH H Neither he nor I
neither . . . nor
Conclusive:
HT3K and so MxaK oh ymeA. And so he left.

noaxoMy because IXosTOMy (noTOMy) Because of that
(noTOMy) of that, h He nouieA. (that’s why)
therefore I did not go.
V. QUESTIONS
1. KorAa h rAe poahach A. FI. UexoB? 2. H3 KHKOH CeMbH

6uji 4exOB? 3. Hmcji ah oxeu cpeACXBa h o6pa30BaHHe? 4. Hero
xoTeji aoShxbch oxen; Mexosa? 5. KaK oh aoShach cBoen uejiH?
6. Ha uxo oxeu, UexoBa ne xcaAeA A^ner? 7. HeM 3aHHMa,7iHct> a£xh?
8. Okohhhb AiKOJiy, Ha kakoh cfiaKyAbxex nocxyriHA cxapmHH chh,
AjiencaHAp? 9. TAe h qeMy yuHAcn MAaAiuHH chh? 10. Ha KaKoft
(fiaKyAbxex rrocxynHA caM Ahxoh Hexos? 11. KorAa HanaAacb
jiHxepaxypHan AenxeAbHOcxb UexoBa? 12. Kanne paccKa3bi rrncaA
MexOB SyAyHH eê cxyAeHxoM? 13. Uxo roBopHA caM MexoB o
cBoeM TBopqecxBe? 14. Mxo Ucxob rrncaA bo Bxopon noAOBHHe
CBoeft A(H3HH? 15. Hxo aaah pyccKOMy xeaxpy ero nbecbi?
16. Hmca ah MexoB BAHHHHe xoAbKO Ha pyccKHH xeaxp? 17. UeM
3H3MeHHXbi h «MaA6HbKHe» paccKa3bi LIexoba h ero nbecbi?
18. KaKHe paccKa3bi UexoBa bbi yx<e nnxaAH? 19. 3HaKOMH ah
bu c nbecaMH UexoBa? 20. KaKyio nnecy UexoBa bh bhagah?
a. Combine the following sentences so as to express purpose, for

example:
Oh roBOpHT Me;yieHHo; mm MO>KeM ero noHHXb.

Oh roBOpHT MeA-treHHo, qxodbi mm motjih ero hohhtb.
1. HaAO mhofo yqftxbca; 6bixb o6pa30BaHHbiM qejioBeKOM.

2. Hy>KHO HioSHTb My3biKy; xoporno nrpaxh Ha CKpHirxe. 3. Mm
cnycTHHH napyc b Mope; Maxpocbi Moryx ycxpoHXb KynajibHio.
4. H KynHJi eft HOBoe ruiaxbe; ona Moxcex npHHHXb axo npurjia-
rneHHe. 5. Oh 3aHHMaexcn pyccKHM h3hk6m; oh HHxaex pyccKHe
khhfh. 6. OHa noexajia b ropoA; oHa BcxpexHx ero. 7. OHa qacxo
6biBajra 3a rpaHHueft; ona H3yqajia h3hkh. 8. MHe nano Sojibwe
3aHHMaxbcn; h nojiyqy ahiuiom b koha<§ hiohh. 9. Mm KynftjiH
axy xpacHByio Aaqy; naiuH a£xh Moryx >KHxb jiexoM b AepeBHe.
10. H n03B0HK) xe6e 3aBxpa; h paccKa)Ky xe6e noaxeAHHe hobocxh.
b. Change the following sentences so as to express a wish, as

follows:
«Oh pa6oxaex». to «Ecjih 6h oh xojibKO pa6oxaji»!
1. H yMeio roBopftxb no-pyccKH. 2. Oh eêx he ypox. 3. CecTpa

Hanncajia nwcbMO oxuy. 4. Bbi mchh SyAexe yqftxb c|)paHuy3CK0My
H3bIKy. 5. Oh KOHqHJI CBOft AJIHHHblft AOKJiaA.
Change the boldface phrases into adverbial participles, con¬

sidering the tense and making all other necessary changes.
Examples:
Ohh deiKajiH h neperoHHjiH Apyr Apyra.
Ohh dexcajiH neperoHna Apyr Apyra.
Koma oh nonpaenjica, oh noexaA Ha KaBKa3.

IIoiipaBHBLUHCb, oh noexan Ha KaBKa3.
1. 51 He noMHHA, ta£ xcHBex KarmxaH, h He Mor eMy Hann-

caxb. 2. KorAa oh jkhji b CxanHHrpaAe, oh no3HaKOMHJiCH c
ceMbeio H3BecxHoro yneHoro. 3. H Bcxpexnn Moero xoBapnma,
KorAa h ryjiHA b JlexHeM caAy- 4. Koraa HanajibHUK OTAaji Bee
Heo6xoAHMbie npHKa3aHHH, oh yexan H3 inxa6a apMHH TyAa, rAe
278 JXBAJimATb BQCbMOH yPOK
ihjih 6oh. 5. KorAa a 6bui Ha bochhoh cjiymGe, h nonaji na

KaBKa3. 6. H cjiymaji ee nrpy Ha CKpftnKe h Ayiwaji, KorAa >Ke
HaKOHeu 0Ha kohhht nrpaTb. 7. Oh CKa3aji: cdlpocTHTe 3a
6ecn0KOHCTBO», h 3aKpbni Asepb. 8. KorAa oh iKeHHjicsf, oh CTaji
HHTepecoBaTbCH X03HHCTB0M. 9. KorAa h nojiyMHJi Bauie rracbMo,
h BaM cefiuac >Ke otbcthh. 10. KorAa ohm paccnasajiH naM 9Ty
HOBOCTb, OHH y IHJIH. 11. Oh KpMKHyJi: «ToBapHLHH, He BblAa-
Baftre!», H ynaji. 12. KorAa Tojictoh ycTponji inKOJiy aah AeTeft,
oh CTaji ca.M npenoAaBBTb b Heft. 13. Bnepa a nocrynHJi b yHHBep-
CHTeT h, Hanncaji 06 stom OTuy. 14. KorAa CHAHuib b napxe
HejIb3H He JHOSOBaTbCH 9THMH KpaCHbIMH H >KeJITbIMH UBeTaMH.
15. KorAa e coOwpajicsi k BaM b tocth, h 3a6bui no3BOHHTb
AOKTopy NexoBy.
Exercise with Grammar A and C
Translate the expressions in parentheses;
1. (I should) boCHHTHBaTL mohx A^Teft jiymue. 2. (In order

to) KynHTb MHCO, OHH ROJIVO CTOHJIH b ouepeAH. 3. H Bee 6yAy
ecTb, (no matter what they give me for dinner). 4. (One should)
jiyume 3HaTb pOAHyio JiHTepaTypy. 5. (Wherever I go), Be3Ae h
BCTpenaio npHHTeAeft. 6. (Whomever I asked), hhkto He 3Haji, rAe
npocfieccop. 7. Oh (emphatic part.) myTHAl 8. (Even) moh rxpo-
c|)eccop He 3E3.JI OTBeia Ha stot Bonpoc. 9. noryjiflft b caAy
(and) npHxoAH aomoh! 10. (Really,) oh xopomo 3HaeT CBoft
npeAMeT. 11. (Even though) oh BcerAa HHTepecoBajica pyccKoft
AHTeparypoft, oh He 3Haa pyccKoro H3biKa. 12. Tbi xopomo
TaHpyemb, (however) xynce ero. 13. H He TOJibKO He OTAOXHyji,
(on the contrary) h eme OoAbiiie yciaA. 14. Mbi eAeM b ropOA
ceroAHH (despite) aoacab. 15. Ha coOpaHHH b KJiybe 6buio oueHb
mhofo HapoAy, (yet) MHe 6btao TaM CKyHHO. 16. (Neither) moh
6paT (nor) moh ahah He nonajiH Ha KOHuepT. 17. Oh He 3HaeT
rpaMMaxHKH, (and because of that) eMy TpyAHO rOBOpHTb no-
(J)paHuy3CKH. 18. Ctbao TaK Teimo, (as if) ceftuac jieTO. 19. (And
so) mbi 3a.Bxpa ye3AcaeM! 20. Mne HaAO (either) OTAOxHyTb 3Aecb
y Bac (or) noexaib b AepeBHio.

A
1. Yesterday I read a play by (of) a Russian writer, Anton
Chekhov. 2. I liked very much the simplicity of its language.
3. In spite of this simplicity there was a great wealth of ideas
TAVENTY-E f(IIITU LESSON 279
in this little play. 4. Reading it, I wanted to know more about

the life of this Russian genius. 5. Living right next to the
library, I went there (thither) and there met my old Russian
friend Ivan. 6. He gave me a little Russian book, “O Hexoae.”
7. I read Russian with great difficulty; however, the contents
of this book were so interesting that I read it from beginning
to end with great pleasure. 8. The author tells us that Chekhov’s
father, himself not having had an education, worked con¬
stantly, day and night, in order to make possible (gain) a
good education for his children. 9. In the year 1857, he opened
a small business in the city [of] Taganrog. 10. If only the
work had not been so hard! 11. If only there had been more
money! 12. But in spite of the limited (small) means, Chekhov’s
three sons could go to the university. 13. Anton Chekov en¬
rolled in the medical faculty of Moscow University. 14. While
still (being) a student (there), Chekhov already began to
write stories for the humor (humorous) magazine. 15. How¬
ever, in the second part of his brief life, he wrote chiefly for the
theater. 16. Whatever Chekhov wrote, everything had that
Chekhovean simplicity and, at the same time, that wealth of
ideas. 17. It seems to me that he once said to his friends: Let
the people in your stories and plays be as simple and, at the
same time, as complex as they are in life [itself]. 18. And so
Chekhov’s creative power gave to Russian literature a very new
direction. 19. Now his short stories are read in every tongue, in
every country of the East and the West. 20. His plays can be
seen in the theaters of every cultural center of America and
Europe.
B
1. Being a poor man, our father always wanted us to
(that we) become rich and famous. 2. How many times did
he say to us, to my two brothers and to me: “Dear sons, you
know that I have worked constantly. 3. However, no matter
how hard I work, I still remain a poor man. 4. In our days, in
order to become rich and to achieve independence, you must
study a great deal while you are still young. 5. I know that
you have to work all day in the factory. 6. But, in spite of
that, by all means find the time to study languages! 7. Know¬
ing languages you can read the great works (TpyAti) of
famous writers of all nationalities (countries)8. But no
matter how often father would tell us this, my brother Alek
would always laugh at him and say: 9. “Yes, yes, dear father,
of course we all know that we should read and write and
280 UBAHUATb BOCbMGW yPOK
study a great deal. 10. And, indeed, I would be glad to read

much more than I can now, if only I had more time and
energy [for that]. 11. It would be so nice to go to the library
every day or to sit at home and read interesting books.
12. However, dear father, you know that we must work in the
factory and have neither the time nor the energy to study
philosophy or medicine. 13. Having been on [my] feet all day,
in the evening I can think only of rest.” 14. And so my brother
Alek never did go to the library, never did read, and never
studied. 15. However, he did find (have) the energy to go to
the movies and had the time to lie on the couch and to look
at television all evening. 16. He is now 53 years old and is still
working in the very same factory where he worked 30 years
ago. 17. My other brother, Anton, did not laugh at our father.
18. On the contrary, he finished school and [while] still
working at the factory, he did study languages and soon was
able to read not only English authors but French and German
as well. 19. When he had earned some (a little) money, he
continued his education, enrolled at a university, and [while]
studying in law school, began to write his first novel. 20. This
was ten years ago; now everybody reads his excellent short
stories and novels; he earns a great deal of money, is rich
and famous.
flBAflUAIb flEBflTblR YPOK
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON
Relative -pronouns — Present and past active participle

BecTH CBoe Hanajio or... To trace one’s origin from . . .
SaHHMaxb Sojibwoe nojioweBHe To occupy (hold) an import-
npH ABOpe ant position at the court
Ho nopyMeHWfo ... Commissioned by . . . Lit.: on
commission
CjiejiyK>mHM odpasoM In the following manner
PasAeJiHTbcsi no nojiojKeHHio To divide (distribute) ac-
Ha ... cording to position (loca¬
tion) into . . .
Bo MHoroM OTJiHMaTbcii ot .. . To differ (be different) in
many respects from . . .
J3,ejiOBbie dyMarw Official (business) papers
B AajibHeftineM Subsequently; with the pass¬
age of time; in the course
of time
Opouecc o6i>e^HHeHHH The process of unification
HanpHMep For example
II. READING: O PYCCKOM 5BMKE

CoBpeMeHHbiH pyccKHft ajiâBHT eeAe? CBoe Hanajio ot
CTapocjiaBHHCKOH a3byKH AeBHToro Bena, KOTopyfo pa3pa6oxajiH
rpenecKHe yneHbie KoHCTaHTHH h MeôAHft.
BpatbH Kohctshthh h MecfioAHH 6 bum H3 doraTOH bochhoh
CeMbH. POAHBUIHCb H BblpOCUIH B ropOAe COJiyHe, OHH C êTCTBa
3HaJIH CJiaBHHCKHH H3bIK, Ha KOTOpOM rOBOpHAO HacejieHHe 3T0H
odJiacTH.
06a dpaia nojiynajiH npexpacHoe odpa30BaHHe h 6ujm
bhcoko KyjibTypHbiMH jiioasmh. KpoMe rpenecKoro h cJiaBHHCKoro
OHH xoporno 3-HaJIH eme HeCKOJIbKO ApyrHX H3bIKOB. 06a
3aHHMajiH 6ojibiii6e nojioiKeHHe npH ABOpe BH3aHTHftcKoro
HMnepaTopa.
B 863 roAy CJiaBHHCKoe KHaaseCTBO MopaBHH nonpoeHJio
BH3aHTHHCK0ro HMnepaTopa npncJiaTb yqHTejieft, KOTOpbie motjih
6h HaynHTb HacejieHHe xpHCTnaHCKOH Bepe Ha hx poahom H3biKe.
Oo nopyneHHio HMnepaTopa, KoHCTaHTHH h Mccôahh 3aHHJTHCb
co3AaHHeM cjiaBHHCKOH a3dyKH h nepeBOAOM rpenecKHx khhi\
OTy a3dyxy ohh pa3pa6oTajiH cjieAytomMM 66pa30M: b3hbuih
rpenecKHH aJicâBHT aah Bcex Tex 3ByK0B, Koxopbie 6 bum noxoxcH
Ha rpenecKHe h co3AaB HOBwe byKBbi aah 3ByK0B He HMeiouxHXCH
b rpenecKOM H3HKe,
281
282 JlBAJlUATb flEBJITblFI ypoi<
yqeHHKH KoHcxaHTHHa h Mcôahh, npojiojiwaBiiiiie hx Aejio,

AOSHJIHCb TOTO, HTO CTapOCAaBHHCKHH H3HK CTaji o6iuhm AHTepa-
TypHbiM H3biKOM pa3Hbix cjiaBHHCKHx njieMeH. 3th njieMeHa, koto-
pwe xchah Ha TeppHTopHH ueHTpaJibHOH h BOCTOHHoft Eeponbi B
nepsbie Bena Harnett apbi, co BpeMeneM pasAwmjiHCb no ceoewy
reorpatJiHHecKOMy nojiwKeHMro Ha OTAeAbHbie rpynnbi: nmnyio,
BOCTOHHyio h 3anaAHyio.
BocTOHHbie cjiaBHHe, yxce c ceAbMoro Bexa Ha3HBaBiunecsi
«PycbK)» h >KHBuine no rjiaBHbiM boahhm nyTHM, no ^Henpy, no
Bojire, c caMoro paHHero BpeMeHH HaxoAHAHCb b nocTOHHHbix
TOprOBbIX H KyJIbTypHbIX CHOLLI6HHHX C BH3aHTHeft.
KyjibTypHoe bahhhhc Bn3aHTHH eme 66nee ycHjiHJiocb, kot-
Aa BOCTOHHbie CJiaBHHe ITpHHHAH OT rpeKOB XpHCTHaHCTBO B
989-om roAy. BMede c xpHCTHaHCTBOM npHinna k boctohhhm
CAaBHHaM H nHCbMeHHOCTb. CTapOCJiaBHHCKHft H3bIK 6blA 6AH30K
BOCTOHHO-CJiaBHHCKOMy, HO, KOHCHHO, BO MHOTOM OTAHHaACH OT
pa3roBopHoro HapoAHoro H3biKa.
PyccKHe nepeBOAHHKH, nepeBOAHBUiHe rpenecKHe khhth na
CTapOCJiaBHHCKHH H3bIK, BBOAHAH HaCTO B CBOH nepeBOAbl CAOBa
pyccKoro HapoAHoro H3biKa, a xorAa rmcaAHCb AeJiOBbie 6yMarn,
to Toxce CAOBa pa3roBopHoro H3biKa 3aMeHHAH CAOBa crapocAa-
BHHCKHe. B AaAbHenuieM stot nponecc 06'beAHHeHHH crapocAa-
bhhckoto AHTepaTypHoro h pyccxoro HapoAHoro H3bikob Bee
6oAee ycHAHBaeTcn h bcast k co3AaHHio H3biKa, Ha kotopom
Tenepb tobopht Bee pyccnoe HaceAeHne C.C.C.P.
III. VOCABULARY
Sa6yKa alphabet naeMH (decl. tribe
a/HpaBHT alphabet like hmh)
6yKsa letter (of the nOCTOHHHblfi, continuous,
alphabet) -'an, -"oe constant
Bepa faith, religion pa3rOBOpHblft, colloquial,
BAHHHHe influence -'an, -"oe conversational
3ByK sound CBHTOft, holy, Saint
HMnepaTOp emperor -an, - oe
KHflHfeCTBO principality CHOuieHHe relation, dealings
Hayna science COBpCMeHHblfl contemporary
oGmufi, common, -'an, -"oe
-"aa, -'ee general C03AaHHe creation
OTAeAbHblft separate ToproBeu (fo) tradesman
-'an, -'oe napb Tsar, emperor
nepesoA translation HeHTpaAbHblfl, central
nepeaoAHHK translator -'aa, -"oe
nHCbMeHHOCTb written anoxa epoch
language, §pa era
literature
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON 283
Verbs
Jmperfective Perfective English

SaMCHATb (I) SaMCHHXb (II) to substitute, replace
npH3HaBaxb; npH3Haio, npH3Haxb to acknowledge,
npH3Haeuib, npH3HaidT, (3HaXb) recognize, admit
pa3pa6axbiBaxb (I) pa3pa66xaxb (I) to work out, develop
yCHJIHBaXbCH (I) yCHJIHXbCfl (II) to increase, grow stronger
Proper Names:
BHSaHXMHCKMft,* Byzantine cjiaBHHHH; pi. Slav

-'an, -'oe cjiaBHHe
BM3anxMJ3 Byzantium cjiaBHHCKHft, Slavic
BOCxOHHOCjiaBHHCKHfl, East Slavic -'an, -'oe
-'an, -'oe CXapOCJiaBHHCKHH, Old Slavonic
rpeK Greek -'aa, -'oe
rpenecKufi, -'aw, -'oe Greek (adj.) CojiyH Thessalonica
KoHexaHXHH Constantine xpHCXHaHCKHfi, Christian
(St. Cyril) -'an, -'oe
Me4)6jiHH* St. Methodius xpHCXHaHCTBO Christianity
MopaBHH Moravia
IV. GRAMMAR
A. The relative pronoun
1. The relative pronoun Koxopbifi “who, which” is used to

introduce a relative clause:
The engineer who works at our plant
MmKeHep, Koxopbifl pa6oxaex Ha nauieM aaeoAe.
(Since relative clauses are dependent clauses they must be set

off by a comma in Russian.)
* Typical sound changes in Russian. We have seen the change from

“h” to “g”: Hegel to Terejib; hospital to rocinrraJib (m.), and now we see
the change from “b” to “v”: byzantine to BH3aHTHiicKHfl; Benjamin to
BeHnaMHH, and from “th” to “f”: Methodius to Thomas to
4>oMa.
284 ^BAÛATb HEBHTblH YPOK
2. The relative pronoun may not be omitted in Russian.

In English one can say: “The book I read is interesting,”
In Russian one must say:

The book which I read is very interesting,
KHHra, KOTopyio a Muraio, oneHb HHTepecHa.
3. The relative pronoun KOTOpbift is declined exactly like

the pronoun-adjective Koropbifi, that is, like any adjective in
-WM.
4. The relative pronoun must agree in gender and number

with its antecedent, that is, with the noun to which it refers.
Its case, however, is determined by its use in the clause:
HroKeHep, KOTOpbift (masc., nom., sing.) pa66Taer 3Aecb.
HroKeHep, KOTopOMy (masc., dat., sing.) h Aan KHiiry.
HtDKeHep, C KOTOpbIM (masc., instr., sing.) MbI rOBOpHJIH
HHxceHep, o kotopom (masc., prep., sing.) MbI rOBOpHJIH
CeKpeTapma, KOTopaa (fern., nom., sing.) HariHcajia nucbMO,
^KeHIUHHa, o KOTOpofl (fern., prep., sing.) h AyMan.
Okho, KOTOpOe (neut., nom., sing.) oh 3aKpb'ui.
HiDKeHepn, KOTOpbie (masc., nom., pi.) pabOTajiH 3Aecb.
5. Special attention must be paid to word order when the

relative pronoun is in the genitive case. It then follows the part
of speech it modifies within the clause:
HmKeHep, AOKjiaA KOTOporo 6hji oneHb mrrepeceH
Lit.: The engineer, the report whose was very interesting
Note that in English this is the characteristic word order

used with “which”: “The table, the color of which was brown.”
6. Instead of the relative pronoun KOTopbifi, the pronouns
kto, hto must be used to introduce a relative clause when the
antecedent is a pronoun:
Tot, kto mhoto HHTaeT, mhoto 3HaeT.
He who reads much knows much.
Bee, hto oh paccKa3aji, mh ynce 3Ha;iH.
All that he told we knew already.
Note that kto is used with animate antecedents, hto with
inanimate.
Rules 2 and 4 above apply equally to kto and hto.

Kto and hto when used as relative pronouns have the same
declension as the interrogative pronouns kto and mto (no

plural!).
B. The participles
Participial forms are very common in Russian. In newspa¬

pers, periodicals, and other literary context participles are
often used to replace the relative pronoun.
Instead of: MmKenep, Koiopwfl padoTaeT 3jxecb
The engineer who works here
we find: HroxeHep, pa66TaiomHH 3,necb
The engineer working here
Moreover, participles are used as attributive adjectives:
WrpaiomHH iwajibqiHK The playing boy
^HiaiomaH êBoqKa The reading girl
Finally, participles are used with the noun understood, or
even as nouns, often in somewhat modified form:
qHTaiomHft the reading one; qmaiomHe the reading

ones (readers)
pa6o4Hft the worker {Lit.: the working one)
cyMacuieAuuHft the madman {Lit.: who has gone out of
his mind)
npoxo>KHft the passer-by {Lit.: the going-through one)
HHlUHft the beggar {Lit.: He HMeiomHft one not
having anything)
caeayiomHii the following one
It is therefore important to have a good recognitional

knowledge of the Russian participles. There are four types of
participles in Russian: the active participle, present and past,
and the passive participle, present and past.
1. The present active participle is characterized by the

ending -mnii:
MHTaiomHft cTyêHT The reading student (attributive use)
CryAeHT, nmkvmwfo The student [who is] (in place of the re-
KHHry reading a book lative pronoun)
MuTaiomHii The reading one, one (used as a noun)
who is reading
286 KBAÛATb JXEBHThlPl yPOK
The participle, being a verbal adjective, must agree in

number, gender, and case with the noun it modifies (or stands
for):
MHTaromHft MajiMHK; wraiomasi AeBoqica; qHxaiomMe acth
The declension of a participle is that of an adjective the

stem of which ends in a sibilant, e. g. xopouiHH, ropaqHH,
etc. (see Lesson 13):
^HTaiomwii MajibqHK; qHTaiomero MajitqnKa; qHTaioiueMy
MaJibqHKy etc.
The basic method of forming the active present participle1

is to take the third person plural, present tense of the verb2
(hhtzuot), drop the t, and add the participle ending mwfl:
pa66xaiomMft,e qHTaiomHft; roBopfliUMfi
2. The past active participle is characterized by the ending
-bllihh, or, with irregular past tense forms, -mini:
HirraBiiiHft MajibqHK The boy who has read; who
has been reading
yineAiuHft ^pyr The friend who has gone away
All that has been said with reference to the active present
participle with respect to its use, agreement, and type of de¬
clension applies also to the active past participle. It should be
noted, moreover, that the past participle may be rendered by
the present tense in English:
yqeHbift, pa3pa6oTaBuinft hobuh ajicjDaBHT.
The scholar who had worked out {Lit.: having worked out)
the new alphabet.
Ero yqenHK, npoAOJDKaBiiiHft ero amo
His student, continuing {Lit.: having continued) his work.
The basic method of forming the active past participle is
to take the past tense form of the verb (6bui), drop the ji, and
add the regular active past participle ending bujhH: 6biBumft
“former, past.” Some important irregular active past parti¬
ciples:
1 Irregularities and exceptions are not given systematic treatment

in this basic text.
2 Only imperfective verbs can have a present active participle,
since the perfective verbs do not have a present tense.
JKHBLUHft one who has lived

npHHeciuii# one who has brought
npHiueAUiHft one who has come
npoiueAWHft or npouuibift one who has passed, bygone,
past
Table of 20 Frequent Active Participles
Infinitive Present Part. Past Part.
ObITb be None ObIBIUHft

TOBOpHTb speak rOBOpHIUHft rOBOpHBlHHft
AasaTb give AaibiuHft AaBUlH^f
Aejiaib do AejiaiomHft A&iaBLUHft
AyMaTb think AyMaiomHft AyMaBuiHA,
exaTb, 1 eAymnft exaBuiHfi
drive
e3AHTb J e3AfliUHii e3AHBIUHli
H<AaTb wait HCAyWHft HiAaBLUHft
HfHTb live iKHBymnft hchbiuhA
3B0HHTb ring 3BOHflmHil 3BOHHBLUHA
3HaTb know 3HHI01UHH 3HaBHIHft
HATH, 1 HAymHft UieAIHHfi
go, walk
XOAHTb J XOAHIUMH XOAHBIJUHii
MMeTb have HMeiomHfl HMeBlUHft
KOHMaTb finish KomaiomHft KOHMaBUIHft
JIK)6HTb love JUdOnmHft JlK)6HBlUHft
HaHHHaTb begin HanfHHajomHii HaHfHHaBUlHA
nHTb drink nbioiuHii
CMeHTbCH laugh cMeiomHflcsi CMeHBIUHiiCfl
cnatb sleep cnnmHii cnaBiuHft
CTOHTb stand CTOHLUHft CTOHBIUHft
yMHpaTb die yMHpajouuHii yMHpaBuiHit
V. QUESTIONS
1. OTKyâ BeêT cBoe Hanano pyccKHH ajicâBHT? 2. Kto
pa3pa6oTaji CTapocnaBsmcKyio a36yKy? 3. poahjihcl h
BblpOCJIH OpELTbH, KOHCTaHTHH H MecJjOAHH? 4. KaKOe nOJiyHHJIH
ohh o6pa30BaHHe? 5. O ueM npodLio cjiaBHHCKoe khhxccctbo
BH3aHTHHCKoro HMnepaTopa? 6. HeM 3aHHJiHCb Kohctshthh h

Me(|)6AHH no nopyneHHio HMnepaTopa? 7. Kan ohh pa3pa6oTajm
cjiaBHHCKyio a36yKy? 8. Hero AoOHjmcb yneHHKH KoHCTaHTHHa
h MecJjoAHB, npoAOJimaBuiKe hx padoTy? 9. Die achjih cjibbhh-
cKHe nneMeHa b Hauajie Hamen spbi? 10. Ha KaKHe rpynnbi
288 ABAXLUATb flEBflTMPI YPOK
pa3AejiHJiHCb cjiaBHHCKHe luiesteHa? 11. Tê mum BocroHHbie

cjiaBHHe? 12. C k3koh crpaHoft HaxoAHJiHCb ohh b jioctohhhhx
ToproBbix h KyjibTypHbix CHOiiieHHHx? 13. KorM eipe Oojibuie
yCHJIHJIOCb BJIHHHHe BH3HHTHH? 14. KaK npHHIJia^ K BOCTOMHbIM
cjiaBHHaM nncbMeHHOCTb? 15. Kto yqnJi boctouhhx cjiaBHH
a36yxe h iracbMy? 16. 4to êjiajin pyccKHe nepeBO/WHKH, nepe-
BOAHBiiiHe rpeuecKHe khhfh Ha cxapo'CJiaBHHCKHH hshk? 17. Kan
npoHCxoAHJio pa3BHTHe HauHoHajibHoro pyocKoro hshkA? 18.
Kaxne cjiosa uacTO 3aMeHHJiH cTapocjraBHHCKHe b êjiOBbix
SyMarax? 19. Kaxoft nponecc ycHJiHBaeTCH b c/ieAyiomHx roAax?
20. K neMy Beêt HaKOHeu stot npouecc?

a. Supply the correct forms of the relative pronoun KOTOpblfi:
1. flSHK, Ha.OHH rOBOpHJIH, H X Op OHIO 3HaJI. 2. YHHBep-
CHTCT, B.H nOJiyUHJI CBOH AHIIJIOM, 3aKpbIJIH B IIpOIlIJIOM TOJXy.
3. TjU }KHBer neBHua, . h Buepa BCTpema Ha coOpaHHH?
4. KHnra,.oh ripouex, oueHb HHrepecHa. 5. YueHbift, pa6oTa
.Hac HHTepecoBajia, yexajt. 6. FlepeBOA’tHK,.h Ran stot
HcypHaî, npouHTaJi ero b noji uaca. 7. SAanne, okojio^.mh
ctohjih, 6biJio caMHM CTapbiM b ropoAe. 8. BbicTpora, c .
jiexejiH 6oM6apAHpOBLHHKH, He no3BOJiajia HaS^noAaxeJiHM co-
CUHTaTb CKOJIbKO HX 6bIJIO. 9. MHJIHHHOHep, O.MbI TOJIbKO
hto roBopHJin, rneji k HarneMy AOMy. 10. Tloporn, no.naM
HyncHO 6hao exaTb, 6bum coBceM njioxne.
b. Put the above sentences in the plural, making all necessary

changes.
c. Supply the correct forms of the relative pronouns kto or HTO:
1. Bee,.mh BCTpeuajiH Ha yjiHite, iiijih b KJiyO Ha co6pa-

HHe. 2. Tot,.a xcâjia, He npHineji. 3. C.6bi 3 hh roBOpHA,
hhkto He xoTejr hath co mhoh b khho. 4. Bee,.« ero yUHJI,
oh yxce 3a6biA. 5. O.6li oh hh roBOpHJi, Bee HaM 6hao
HHTepecHO. 6. To, o . paOoune roBopHAH, Ohjio xopomo
H3BecTHo AHpeKTopy. 7. % m&jio o.Mor ero cnpocHTb.
8. BceM,.BHAeA ary KapTHHy, oh a HpaBHAacb. 9.6bi
MbI HH CnpOCHAH, HHKTO He 3HaJI OTBCTE. 10. MbI BCerAS ITOHHMBAH
BCe,.OH Haw Od'bHCHHA.

a. From the Reading Exercise write out all participles and
adverbial participles (review), grouping them according to their
tense and giving their English meaning.
b. Use the active participles, present and past, of the list on

page 287 in short but complete Russian sentences.
c. Change the relative clauses into participial phrases, using

present tense participles. Remember that the participle must agree
in case, number and gender with the noun it modifies, thus:
He roBOpHTe co cxyAeHxoiw, Koxopbift pa66xaex HaA ypoKOM:
He roBopHTe co cxyAeHxoiw, paboxaioiUHM HaA ypoKOM.
1. PadouHH, KOTOpbift padoxaex Ha stoh cfmOpHKe, achbct b

ueHTpe ropoAa. 2. XleBOUKa, Koxopaa ryjisiex b caAy, moh cecxpa.
3. HaM Hymen HHmeHep, KOTOpbift nOHHiwaex h roeopHx no-
aHrAHHCKH. 4. CaMOJieT, Koxopbifi ropHT, ynaAex b Mope. 5. H6jio-
ko, KOTopoe aokhx Ha CTOJie, H3 caAa Moeft 6a6yuiKH. 6. Mbi
nonpOCHJIH yHHTeJIH, KOXOpblH paCCKa3bIBaeT HaM O BH3aHTHH-
CKOM rOCyAapCTBe, oO'bHCHHTb HaM KOTAa H KaK HauaJIHCb
TOprOBbie CHOUieHHH BH3aHTHH C CJiaBHHCKHMH IUieMeHaMH
b ueHTpajibHOH Eepone. 7. JXjih. qejiOBexa, Koxopbift H3yqaex
aKOHOMHKy, 3TOT mypHaji 6yAGT oueHb HHTepeceH. 8. # He
3Han) rocTHHHitbi, Koxopasi MMejia 6bi dojiee yAoSHbie kom-
naTbi. 9. K noBapy, KoxopbiH rnimex phaom c h4mh, npHexaji
ero 6paT. 10: qacTO BHmy CTyAeHTa, Koxopbift 3aHHMaexcn b
9TOM yHHBepCHTeTe.
d. Put the above sentences in the plural, making all necessary

changes.
e. Carry out the same changes as in (c) in the following sen¬

tences, using, however, the past tense participles:
1. B 9TOM ropoAe A&me Moil Apyr, KOTopbift 3Haji HecKOJibxo

H3biKOB, He mot noAyuHTb cAymSbi. 2. PpamAaHHHa CeMeHosa,
KOTOpwft roBOpHA Bnepa peub b xjiyOe, h xopouio 3Haio. 3. H He
nOMHHA (paMHJIHH ACeHIUHHbl, KOTOpafl CHACAA 3a CTOJIOM. 4. K
TypticTy, KOTopbifl ocMaTpHBaA My3eM, noAOuieji npocfmccop
IleTpoB. 5. H no3HaKOMHACH c yneHbiM, xoxopbifi pa3pa6oxaji
HOByio a36yxy. 6. KanHTan cMOTpeji Ha JioAxy, xoxopaa noAHJibiJia
k KopaOjik). 7. B KHdre 9Toro rmcaTejin, noxopbifi Hanwcaji MHoro
H3BecTHbix pOMaHOB, h Haineji c})OTorpa(|iHK) Moero oma. 8. Bbi
290 fiBAfiUATb fiEBflTblW YPOIC
i-iHêro He 3HaeTe o MajibHHKe, KoropwH 6emji H3 AOMa?

9. HaM neo6xoAHMO npurjiacHTt, yueHOro, KOTOpbifi 3HaJi nojiOHte-
HHe h 6bui npH ABope nocjieAHero HMnepaTopa. 10. Moh Apyr,
KOTOpbiH CAejiaJi Tax mhoto aah Harnero ropoAa, Tenepb xtHBeT
b UiiKaro.
f. Put the above sentences in the plural, making all necessary

changes.
A
1. Having read many books on Russian history and
life in the U.S.S.R., I wanted (got the desire) to know more
about the history of the Russian language. 2. And so I bought
a little book, About the Russian Language, in which I found
all I wanted to know. 3 Reading this book I found out that
the written language came to the Eastern Slavs along with
Christianity. 4. The Moravian principality was the first to ask
(asked as the first) the Byzantine Emperor to send someone
who could teach the new faith to the (native) population in
their own vernacular (native tongue); this was in the year
863. 5. At that time two brothers from a wealthy and important
family, Constantine and Methodius, were holding (occupied)
a very high position at the Byzantine court. 6. They had been
born and had grown up in Thessalonica, a city in which the
[native] population spoke the Slavic language. 7. Thus (in this
manner) both brothers knew the Slavic language from their
childhood [days]. 8. At the same time, they had received an
excellent education and, being highly educated people, they
not only spoke Greek but read the most difficult texts (books)
with great ease (completely freely). 9. Commissioned by the
Byzantine Emperor these two scholars began to translate the
Greek religious books into the Old Slavonic tongue. 10. But in
order to write these translations down, they had to develop
(work out) a new alphabet. 11. They worked out the Cyrillic
alphabet (Kaptanua). 12. The name takes its origin
from Saint Cyril (Cbhtoto KnpHJia), who is, of course, the
Greek scholar Constantine himself. 13. Having created (worked
out) the alphabet and having written books in the Old Slavonic
language using (by means of) the new alphabet, they went
(ornpaBHAHCb) to the Slavic tribes and living among them
taught them the new faith and the new written language. 14. Of
course, this new written language in these new books was in
many respects different from the colloquial speech of the East
Slavic people. 15. But in the course of time, the students of Con-
stantine and Methodius, translating other Greek texts or

drawing up (writing) official papers, introduced many words
of the Russian native language into the Old Slavonic language
of the books and documents. 16. Thus began the process of the
unification of the Old Slavonic and the popular tongues.
17. This process finally led to the creation of the contemporary
Russian which every educated Russian now speaks, reads,
and writes.
B
1. My friend Nikolai, who is making a serious study of
Russian history, knows also a great deal about that country’s
geography and literature. 2. Last week he gave us an interest¬
ing report on the Russian language; next week he will speak
about the role of the Volga river in the economic and social
history of Russia. 3. Speaking of the Old Slavonic language,
Nikolai wanted us to remember two very important names,
the names of two Greek scholars, Constantine and Methodius.
4. He told us how these two scholars had created the new
alphabet from which the present Russian alphabet traces its
origin. 5. Having worked out the “Cyrillica,” they could then
write down their translations of the Greek religious books in
the Old Slavonic language and teach the Slavs the Christian
religion in their own tongue. 6. Nikolai’s reports are never
dull and all the students, especially those interested in the
history of Russian culture, are awaiting his next one with
great impatience. 7. Of all the students, only I know what
Nikolai is going to (will) speak about next Thursday. 8. Last
Sunday, walking with me in the park and, evidently, having
completely forgotten about me, Nikolai was thinking out loud
about his next report. 9. “Of course,” he was saying, “of course,
everybody sings those ‘Volga’ songs and thinks that he knows
all about that most beautiful, that longest and deepest river
in all [of] Europe! 10. But who knows what an important
role that river has played in the history of Russia? 11. Who
knows, for example, that beginning with (from) the eighth
century tradesmen living in all parts of Russia and even in
foreign (other) countries gathered on the banks of that river,
that ancient trade route of Russia? 12. Meeting once a year
at Nizhni! Novgorod, these merchants brought furs from the
North, tea and silk from the East, wool and linen from the
West, wines and rugs from the South, the Caucasus and the
shores of the Caspian Sea.” 13. “Sasha,” Nikolai suddenly
29° JfBAhUATb HEBHTblH YPOK
asked, me, “do you know, that even large steamers can now
move (swim) from the Caspian Sea to Moscow, thanks to a
remarkable system of canals? 14. In my report which I shall
give next Thursday, I shall tell you all about these canals.
15. I shall also speak about the huge power stations that
stand on the banks of the Volga and about which you surely
know nothing at all. 16. Or have you, perhaps, heard about
the plans (nuiaHw) which the Soviet government is working
out to make the Volga river the ‘electrical heart’ of the whole
country?” 17. I had to admit to my friend that I knew noth¬
ing at all about this. 18. But, saying goodbye to him that
Sunday, I did know what he would tell us in his talk next
Thursday.
TPMMATblH yPOK
I THIRTIETH LESSON
Present and past passive participles — Passive voice
npH nexpe BejiHKOM In the reign of Peter the

Great
OcHoeaHa flerpoM Bcjihkhm Founded, established, by
Peter the Great
Ho npHMepy... Following the example of . .
no njiany... According to the plan of . . .
Hapsijiy c ... Side by side, of equal import¬
ance with . . .
3a rpaHHpeH abroad (place where)
3a rpaHHuy abroad (place whereto)
Cpe/tH HJieHOB ... Among the members of . . .
rocynapCTBeHHoe ycxpoficxBo Organization of the state
npoBeAeHHafl OexpoM pet|>6pMa The reform carried out by
Peter the Great
npeAcxaBJiHTb co6oh Represent
4hcxo Hayqnan h Purely scientific and peda¬
neAarorHHecKan AeaxejibHocxb gogical activity
TeXHHHeCKHe UIKOAbl Technical schools
II. READING*, ochobahhe AKAAEMMM have
AKaAeMHH Hayx1 b Pocchh 6buia ocHOBana Hexpoivi Bejiw-

khm2 b HHBape 1724 roAa. Onoxa FleTpa BejiHKoro H3BecTHa b
pyCCKOH HCTOpHH KaK SITOXa SOJIbUIHX H Ba>KHbIX pe(J)OpM B
BKOHOMHêCKOH, nOAHXHHeCKOH H KyJIbTypHOH XCH3HH CTpaHbl.
rieTp BeJIHKHH XOpOUIO 3HaBUIHH EBpOny H nOHHMaBLHHH,
uto Pocchh bo MHoroM OTCTana ot cbohx eBponencKHx coceAeft,
1 AKaafeMHH HayK — Academy of Sciences.

2 fleTp BejiHKHft — Peter the Great (1672-1725).
293
TPHflJUATblfl yPOK
294
xoxeA H3M£HHTb cbok) cxpaHy no npHMepy sana^HO-eBponencKHx

rocyAapCTB,
PyCCKHH HCTOpHK KjIIOMeBCKHH1 nHIiiei, HTO OAHHItf H3 CaMbIX
CHJIbHbIX Bn6LiaXJI6HHH, BbSHeCCHHblX FlexpOM H3 EBponbI 6bIJIO
MyBCXBO yAHBJieHHH: KHK XaM MHOFO yLiaXCH H KaK SbICTpO H
xopowo paSoxawx, a pa6oxatox xaK Sucxpo h xopouio, noxOMy
qT0 xaK MHOrO yqaxca. nOSXOMy riOHHXHO, MXO HapHAy c 9KOHO-
MHqecKHMH h noJiHTH4GCKHMH pec|)6pMaMH, pacnpocxpaHeHHe
o6pa30BaHHH h noAHHXHe KyjibxypHoro yposHH nacejieHHH CTaAO
oahoh H3 rJiaBHbix 3aAan Ilexpa BeAHKoro.
npH neTpe BejiHKOM npwrjiaiiiaioxcsi b Pocchio HHoexpaH-
Hbie y46HbI6 H TeXHHKH. PyCCKaH MOAOACXCb XAKyKC nOCbIAa£TCH
3a rpaHHuy y^HXbca. OocAaHHbie b Ahfahk), bo OpaHUHio, b
HxaAHK),2 3 B roAAaHAHicP MOAOAbie aioah H3ynaAH xaM h MaxeMa-
THKy, h Kopa6;iecxpoeHHe, h (^haococ^hio, h apxnxexxypy h
rocyAapcxBeHHoe ycxpoHCXBO pa.3Hbix cxpaH.
B 1703 roAy b CaHKx Ilexep6ypre,4 hoboh cxoAHue,
nocrpoeHHoft flexpoM Ha pexe HeBe,5 bhxoahx nepBaa pyccxan
ra3eTa, nenaTaioTCfl yneSmiKH no pa3HbiM npeAMexaM, H3 koxo-
pbix MHorne 6bwn paapaSoxanw cavmM IlexpoM. Ha pyccKHft
H3bIK nepeBOAHTCH HHOCXpaHHbie KHHFH, OTKpbIBaeTCfl HeCKOAbKO
TexHnnecRHX lukoa. npOBeAeHHan flexpoM peôpMa pyccKOH
a36yKH AeAaex nncbMo doAee npocxbiM h noHHTHbiM.
B 1717 roAy riexp Bcahkhh 6wa MaSpan hachom IlapimcKOH
AxaAeMHH Hayx. MbiCAb'o co3AaHHH AxaAeMHK Hayx b Pocchh
AaBHo 3aHHMaAa Ilexpa. rio mhcah Ilexpa, pyccxan AxaAeMHH
Hayx AOA)KHa 6bUia npeACTaBAflTb co6ofi coSpaHne Aynninx
yneHbix, Koxopbie 33HHMaAHCb 6bi h mhcto HayHHOfl h neAarorH-
necKOfi AeflTeAbHOCTbK). Hx yneHHKH b AaAbHeftmeM, caMH
cTaHOBHAHCb 6bi yqHxeAHMH TexHHMecKHx iukoa h pacnpocxpa-
haah 6h o6pa30BaHHe b HapoAe.
AKaAeMHH Hayx 6biAa ocHOBaHa no nAany Ilexpa BeAHKoro
b 1724 roAy, ho HanaAa cboio A^HTeAbHoexh xoAbKO vtepe3 toa,
yxce nocAe cMepxn IleTpa. IlepBbie hachh AxaAeMHH 6hah
HHOcrpaHUbi, npHrAameHHbie IlexpoM H3 pa3Hbix eBponencKHX
cTpaH. OAHaxo, nepe3 HecxoAbKo acx cpeAM mashob AxaAeMHH
6hao yxce nnxnaAUaxb pyccKHx yneHbix. CpeAH hhx 6ha bcah-
1 BacrijiHfi OcfinoBHM KjnoMeBCKwft — Vasilii Osipovich Kluchevski

(1841-1911).
2 Htejiha — Italy.
3 rojijiaHAHjr — Holland; Netherlands.
4 CaHKT neTepCypr — St. Petersburg, now JleHHHrpaa — Leningrad.
5 Heea — the river Neva.
THIRTIETH LESSON 295
qaHIUHH pyCCKHH yueHblH, MHXaHJI JIoMOHOCOB,1 KOTOpbIM 6bIJI0

CAeJiaHO MHOTO Ba)KHLIX OTKpblTH# B 66jiaCTH XHMHH H
Mm xce Obijia HanwcaHa nepBan pyccKan rpaMMaTHKa b 1755 roAy.
npn AKaêMKH HaxoAHJiacb h cboh 6H6jiH0TeKa h Myseft, a b
1728 roAy newaxaexc« xcypHaJi AxaAeMHH, nojiyqHBiiiHH dojibinoe
pacnpocTpaHeHHe 3a rpaHHpeH.
AKaAeMHa HayK cpa3y xce 6wjia npH3HaHa HayuHHM MHpOM
h Esponbi h AMepHKH. B 1779 roAy oahh H3 ee qjieHOB 6mji
HsCpaH B HJieHbi AMepHKaHCKoro OHJiococfmKoro OSiuecxBa b
OHJiaAeJibcJjMH, a nepBbiM aMepHKaecKHM yueHbiM, cTaBinHM qjie-
hom AnaAeMHH Hayx b Pocchh 6biJi BeHHaMHH 4>paHKJiHH.2
III. VOCABULARY
apxHxeuxypa architecture nOJIHXHWeCKHfi, political

BnenaxjieHHe impression -aw, -oe
rocyAapcxeo state, empire pacnpocxpaHeHHe dissemination
rpaMMaxHKa grammar CMepxb death
AenxeAbHoexb activity- CXOAHlia capital
HHoexpaHeu (fe) foreigner yAHBAeHwe surprise,
HHOCXpaHHblft, foreign astonishment
-'aw, -'oe ypoBeHb (m.) (fe) level
HCXOpHK historian yMeOHHK textbook
KopaOwecxpoeHMe shipbuilding 4>H3HKa physics
MMCJIb thought XHMHH chemistry
noAHwxHe raising
Verbs
H36HpaXb (I) H36paxb (6paxb) to select, elect

H3MeHHXb (I) H3MeHHXb, HSMeHK) to change
HSMeHHUib, H3M&HHX alter
nenaxaxb (I) HaneHaxaxb (I) to print
nocbuiaxb (I) nocjiaxb; nouunb to send
nomjieuib, nomjnox
pacnpocxpaHHXb (I) pacnpocxpaHHXb (II) to spread,
disseminate
1 MHxawji JIomoh6cob — Mikhail V. Lomonosov (1711-1765).

2 BeHHaMHH 4>p&hkjihh — Benjamin Franklin (1706-1790).
296 TPRUUATblR yPGK
IV. GRAMMAR
A. The participles (cont.)
1. The passive participle present tense is characterized by

the ending -mmif:
JhoSHMbifi MajibMHK Dear (beloved, loved) (attr. use)
boy.
MaJIMIHK, jiioShmm# The boy [who is] loved (in place of the
BCeMH by all relative pro¬
noun)
JIk)6hmm0 The loved one, one who (used as a
is loved noun)
The participle (being a verbal adjective) must agree in

number, gender, and case with the noun it modifies (or stands
for) :
,7iro6HMbift MaJibMHK; JitobHMaH êBO^Ka; aioSHMbie
AeTK; etc.
The declension of the participle is that of an adjective in

-Mil (HOBbift etc. see Lesson 13):
jnoSHMbiit MaJibqHK; jnodHMoro MajibUHKa; JiiodHMOMy
MMbHHKy; etc.
The present passive participle has also short forms ending

in: -m (masculine singular); -Ma (feminine singular); -mo
(neuter singular); -mm (plural all genders).
These forms are used predicatively; they are indeclinable

and show only number and gender, not case: jho6hm; jirodnMa;
jik)6hmo; jnodHMbi “loved, one (ones) who are loved.”
(Compare with the short adjective forms, Lesson 15; see

Section B of this lesson for the principal use of these short
participial forms.)
The basic method of forming the present passive participle1

is to take the first person plural, present tense of the verb2
(jiioShm) and add the endings -bifl, -aa, -oe etc.: juo6hmmh, etc.
1 Irregularities and exceptions are not given systematic treatment

in this basic text.
2 Only imperfective verbs can have a present passive participle,
since perfective verbs do not have a present tense.
Note that the position of the stress is like that in the infini¬
tive: JIK)6MTb, JnodHMbIH.
2. The past passive participle is characterized by two types

of endings: -tmh and -HHbift (Hbift):
{The taken one

The one which has been
taken
f The written one

HanncaHHbifi J One which has been
[ written
B3HTWH ropoA The taken (occupied) city

HanucaHHoe nncbMO The written letter
FopoA, B3HTbifl HauiHMH The city [which] was taken
coJiAaraMH by our soldiers
FlHCbMO HanncaHHoe no A letter [which] was written

aHrjiHftcKH in English
All that has been said with reference to the present passive
participle, i.e., its use, agreement, and type of declension, ap¬
plies also to the past passive participle.
The past passive participle has also short (indeclinable)

forms which are used predicatively:
Mbix (masc. sing.); Mtrra (fem. sing.); mhto (neut. sing.);
MHTbi (plural all genders); nanHcan (masc. sing.); HarracaHa
(fem. sing.); HanncaHO (neut. sing.); HanncaHw (plural all
genders).
Note that the short form of the -hhbiS ending has only
one h.
The basic method of forming the past passive participle is

to take the infinitive form of the verb, drop Tb, and add the past
participial endings
-Tbiii, -Tan, -roe: MMTbift; -HHbiii, -mmsi, -HHoei HanficaHHwfl.
When a verb ends in -HTb, the h is changed into e or e

(when stressed) before -HHbifi : CTpoHTb, cTpoeHHbift; peinrirb,
pemeHHbiH.
298 TPHOTATbIR yPOK
There are many irregularities in the formation of the past

passive participle that cannot be summarized in any simple,
functional set of rules (e.g., use of -tmm or -HHbifi, consonant
mutation, position of stress). These irregularities do not receive
systematic treatment in this basic course. Following are some
of the more important past passive participles of verbs given
in the text:
Infinitive Past Passive Participle English Meaning
6pOCHTb 6pouieHHbiH, -aa, -oe thrown away, discarded

B3HTb B3HTbifl, -'aa, -'oe taken, occupied
aaTb âHHHH, -'aa, -'oe given
H3ynftTb n3yqeHHbiii, -an, -oe learned, mastered
KynHTb KyruieHHbift, -aa, -oe bought
npHrjiacHTb npHrjiauieHHbiii, -'aa, -'oe invited
npHHHTb npHHflTbifi, -aa, -oe accepted, customary
peiUHTb peineHHbiH, -'aa, -'oe solved, settled
cobpaTb cobpaHHbifi, -aa, -oe gathered, collected
COKpaTMTb coKpameHHbiii, -'aa, -'oe shortened, abbreviated
3. Use of passive participles. In choosing between the

present and the past forms, observe that:
a. The present participle is used when the action ex¬
pressed by the participle and by the verb are simultaneous:
JKypHajiH, HHTaeMbie h4mh, neuaTaioTCH b Hbio MopKe.
The periodicals, which we are reading, are (being) printed in
New York.
b. The past participle is used when the action expressed
by the participle precedes the action expressed by the verb:
KHara, npotmraHHbie hsmh, Tenepb hhkto He HmaeT.
The books, which we have read, nobody reads now.
B. The passive voice
The passive voice in Russian is expressed:
1. By using the short forms of the passive participles,

present or past, together with the proper tense of the
verb 6brrb. (In the present tense the auxiliary verb 6bixb is,
of course, not expressed.):
Present:
3TOT MaJIbHHK BCeMH jiioShm. This boy [is] loved by all.

3xa KHHra naMH HanHcana. This book [is] written by us.
Past:
3tot MajibqHK Shji bcsmh This boy was loved by all.

aio6hm.
3xa KHHra 6bma HaMH HanncaHa. This book was written by us.
Future:
3tot MajibHHK 6yACT bccmh This boy will be loved by all.

jiioShm.
3Ta KHHra 6yAeT hsmm This book will be written by us.
HanncaHa.
Note that the agent “by all,” “by us” is rendered by the
instrumental case without a preposition.1
2. In general, this construction is avoided in Russian

and the passive is expressed more frequently
a. By means of the reflexive verb:
Present:
Tenepb ApMa CTpoflTCfl dbiCTpo. Now houses are built quickly.
Past:
JXoMk CTpOHJIHCb MeAJieHHO. Houses were built slowly.
Future:
Cxopo AOMa 6yAyT cTpoHTbca Soon houses will be built in
B OAHH AeHb! one day!
This construction is generally used when customary action

or a general state of affairs without mention of a specific agent
is being expressed.
1 Which of the two passive participles to use, the present or the

past, cannot be determined by any simple set of rules. Some verbs, to
be sure, form both. The majority, however, lacks one or the other of
the two. Thus, iwcan*, for instance, is used only in the past participial
form (passive), while jnofifiTb has only the present passive participial
form. For this (and other) reasons it is advisable for the beginner to
concentrate on acquiring a recognitional knowledge of the passive voice
and to rely on the active voice for active use.
300 TPHUUATblPI ypoi<
b. The English passive is also frequently rendered in Rus¬

sian by means of the third person plural of the active voice,
subject not expressed.
Present: BbicoKne AOMa (Dir. Obj. I) xenepb cTposiT dbicTpo.

Past: BncoKHe ^0Ma crpoHJM mc^jishho.
Future: Bhcokhc AOMa 6y/iyT crpoHib b oahh AeHb.
3. The English passive impersonal expressions such as: “it

is being said; it is known, etc.” are best rendered in Russian
by using the third person plural of the active voice:
FoBopaT, ato He dyA^T dojibme It is said there’ll be no more

BOHHbl. war.
B POCCHH MaJIO HFpaiOT B One does not play much
TeHHHC. tennis in Russia.
VOCABULARY BUILDING — TYPICAL RUSSIAN

WORD-FAMILIES1
HaMHHaTb Hanajio CHanajia HanaAbHHK

to begin beginning at, from the chief (first
beginning one, leader)
KOHHaTb KOHeU KOHeMHO
to end the end of course
npOAABaxb npOAaeeu npOAaeinHua pacnpOAawa
to sell seller (msc.) sales lady bargain-sale
MtHTb >KH3Hb IKHTeJIb (m.) JKHBOli
to live life inhabitant, alive, living
dweller one
OojieTb 60AC3Hb GOJIbHOfi 60AbHHLia
to ache, illness, the sick, hospital
be ill, sick sickness ill one
rwcaTb FIliCbMO nwcaTeAb (m.) nepeniiCKa
to write letter writer correspondence
neTb neeeu. necHH neHHe
to sing singer (masc.) song the singing
e3AHTb noesA OTT»e3A npwe3A
to drive train departure arrival
1 The student should try to add to these groups and to form new
word-families.
IKeHHTbCSS iKena iKeHmHHa HteHHX

to marry wife woman bridegroom
paOoTaTb paGoxa pa66HHft (Notice the English

to work work worker “ robot. ”)
JKapHTb HcapKoe neap noHcap

to fry, roast the roast fever conflagration,
fire
yHHTb yHHTejib (m.) yneOHHK yqeHHe
to teach. teacher school text study, learning
HapOAHbIM pOAHOft pOAHHa

HapoA
people, nation national, native, native country
popular kindred
06l>HCHflTb HCHO HCHblfi o6T>acHeHHe
explain clear (Adv.) clear explanation
Maa MaAeHbKHH MaJIbHHK M3AK)TKa (m.)

small, young small, little boy baby, tiny one
(short, popular
form)
V. QUESTIONS
1. KeM h Korâ 6huik ocHOBaHa AKaAeMHH HayK b Pocchh?

2. KaKHe Ba>KHbie pec|)6pMbi 6 hah npoBeAeHbi rieipoM BeAHKHM?
3. Kan crapajiCH Flerp BejiHKMft H3MeHHTb Pocchio? 4. Kanoe
BneqaTJieHHe 6hao qahkm H3 ca.vrbix CHAbHbix BneuaTAeHHH, Bbi-
HeceHHbix FleTpoM H3 noe3AKH 3a rpaHHiiy? 5. Kaxan 3aAaua
cTajia oahom h3 rjiaBHbix 3aAan nerpa? 6. Koro npnrAamaA FleTp
B Pocchio? 7. Koro nocbuiaji FleTp Bcjihkhh 3a rpaHHiiy? 8. UeMy
yHHAacb pyccKaa MOAOAeiKb 3a rpaHHueft? 9. KorAa bhxoaht
nepean pyccxan ra3eTa? 10. KaKHe khhfh nenaTaioTCH h nepeBO-
AHtch? 11. Kanne HiKOAbi oTKpbmaiOTCH? 12. KorAa 6bia H36paH
FleTp Be^HKHH hjichom napH>KCKOH AKaASMHH HayK? 13. KaKoft,
no MbicjiH IleTpa, AOAHtHa 6 ha a ObiTb pyccKaa AKaAeMHH HayK?
14. KorAa AKaAeMHH HayK Hanajia cboio AeHTeAbHocrb? 15. Kto
6hah nepBbie HJienbi AKaAeMHH HayK? 16. Kaxon BeAHuaHiiiHH
pyccKHH yHeHbift 6ha hachom AKaAeMHH b nepBbiH nepHOA ee
AeHTeAbHOCTH? 17. HeM OH H3BeCTeH B pyCCKOH H MHpOBOH
HayKe? 18. Bbb/ia ah AKaAeMHH HayK npH3HaHa HayuHbiM MHpOM
EBponbi h AMepHKH? 19. KorAa H36paAH OAHoro H3 ee hachob
HAeHOM aMepHKancKoro <F>HAQc6cf)CKoro OOmecTBa? 20. KaKofi
aMepHKaHCKHH yneHbiH 6hji H36paH hachom pyccKOH AKaAeMHH
HayK?
302 TPHJlUATbin yPOK
a. From the Reading Exercise write out passive participles and

adverbial participles (review), grouping them according to tense and
giving their English meaning.
h. Form regular present passive participles from the following
verbs and translate them:
1. jnodHTb; 2. y3HaBaxb; 3. 3EHHMaTbj 4. npHHHMaTb; 5. 3ano-
MHHaib; 6. oTKpbmaTb; 7. nojiyqaTb; 8. CHHMaTb; 9. ocMaTpHBaTb;
10. H3yuaTb.
c. Form the regular past passive participles from the following

verbs, using the ending given in parentheses, then translate them, for
example: MbiTb (-Tbift), MbiTbift, -'aa, -'oe, “washed.”
1. nocjiaTb (-HHbift); 2. H36paTb (-HHbift); 3. 3aKpbiTb (-'tlih);

4. OAeTb (-'thh); 5. OTKpbiTb (-'Tbift); 6. nocTp6n*Tb (-HHbift);
7. H3yna*Tb (-HHbift); 8. pa3ABHHyTb (-Tbift); 9. CAe-iiaTb (-HHbift);
10. yCTpOH*Tb (-HHbift).
d. Use the past passive participles formed by you in the above

exercise as adjectives in simple but complete Russian sentences, thus;
riocJiaHHwe AejiOBbie 6yMarn jiemjrn Ha cTOJie.
e. Give the infinitive and English meaning of the following

past passive participles, as follows: coBepweHHbift: coeepuiHTb,
“complete, perfect.”
1. paccKa3aHHbift; 2. HanenaTaHHbift; 3. B3HTbift; 4. HHTaHHbift;

5. AaHHbift; 6. KynjieHHbift; 7. noKa3aHHbift; 8. pa3pa6oTaHHbift;
9. nepeBeAeHHbift; 10. HanftcaHHbift.
1 Decline in the singular and plural:
1. MHoroyBaiKaeMbift; 2. 6yj\yu\&n HeAeJin; 3. npomeAUJHft

MecHit; 4. Jno6ftMoe MecTo; 5. HanftcaHHoe nHCbMo; 6. nepeBeAeH-
hsh KHftra; 7. npnrjiameHHbift rocTb; 8. npoqftTaHHbift rokjlslr;
9. pa3ABHHyTbift ctoji; 10. MbiTaa najiy6a.
g. Use the past passive participles given in the table on page 298
as adjectives in simple, complete Russian sentences.
* These vowels change to “e.” Notice also that where the stress
is not indicated over the dash it is to be placed preceding it, thus:
H36patb, ft36pa.HHUfL

a. Change the long participial forms in parentheses to the corre¬
sponding short forms and translate the sentences:
1. yêOHHK OyAeT (pa3pa6oTaHHbift) no npHMepy HHocipaH-

hbix yneSHHKOB. 2. FIpHKa3aHHe (oTAaHHoe) KOMaHAHpoM no
TeAecjDony. 3. CTyACHT 6ha (nocjiaHHbiH) 3a rpaHHuy yuHTbca.
4. 3to rocyAapcTBO (npH3HaHHoe) CoeAHHSHHHMH IlIxaTaMH
AMepHKH1 HapHAy c ApyrHMH rocyAapCTBaMH. 5. FIpeKpacHan
KynajibHH Sbuia (ycTpoeHnaa) na 6epery peKH. 6. YHHBepcaAb-
Hbin Mara3HH (3aKpbiTbin) no npa3AHHKaM. 7. 3ra HceHipHHa
6biJia (H36paHHaa) qjieHOM AnaAeMnn HayK. 8. JXok.jib.ji, o )kh3hh
KpecTbHH b Pocchh ASBHTHaApaToro Bena 6yAeT (npoqHraHHbift)
H3BecTHbiM yqeHbiM.
b. Form passive sentences by giving the proper form of the

parenthesized passive participles and by placing the parenthesized
nouns and pronouns into the instrumental case, then give a literal
translation of the resulting sentences, thus:
KMry (HarmcaHHbift; oh), see qHTaiOT.

Kenry, HanncanHyio2 mm, Bee uhtbiot.
The book, written lay him, everyone is reading.
1. TKypHaA (KynjreHHbiH; Mbi), bcsm HpaBHTCH. 2. /Jom

(nocxpoeHHbift; moh oreu), 6bin Ha oiepaHHe ropoAa. 3. Me>KAy
KOMHaTOH (CHHMaeMblHJ OH) H MOeft, HaXOAHTCH KyXHH. 4. 3>a6-
pnKa, (ocMOTpeHHHH; TypHCTbi) 6biAa orpOMHa. 5. H oqeHb
HHTepecoBaACM npeAMeroM (npenoAaBaeMbift; yuhrejib). 6. Pe-
6eHKy (npHCAaHHHH; 6a6yiHKa) H3 acpgbhh, TpyAHO jkhtb b
CTOAHpe. 7. FIpo(|)eccop, rayOoKo (yBaxcaeMbin; mbi), BApyr yMep.
8. Knnra, (b3htbih; cTyAeHT) H3 ShOahotckh, 6buia oqeHb HHTe-
pecHa. 9. 06 stom yqeOHHKe (pa3pa66raHHbm; ohh) mbi MHoro
cjibimajiH. 10. Co hikojioh, (nocrpoeHHbm; moh 6par), y MeHH
oqeHb MHoro pa6oTbi. 11. rocyAapcTBeHHoe ycTponcTBO Pocchh,
(H3MeneHHbifl; IleTp), 6biao pe3yABTaroM OojibmoH pa6oTbi.
12. Okojio CTOJia, (pa3ABHHyTbin; AeAyiHKa) b ctojioboh, co6pa-
jiacb ceMBH.
1 United States of America; abbreviated in Russian: C.H1.A.

2 Note the agreement of HanficaHHyio with KHHry in gender, case
and number.
104 TPHJlUATbin yPQK
c. From the Reading* Exercise write out all reflexive verbs used
to express the passive, together with their subjects, and give their
English meaning, thus:
npHit/iaiuaiOTCfl . . . yueHbie h tcxhukh

scholars and technicians are invited
d. Change the following sentences into passive sentences expres¬
sed by means of reflexive verbs and translate them, thus:
3to cjiobo (acc.) nHinyT ran to: 3to cjiobo (nom.) nniueTCfli
Tax.
This wTord is written (lit.: wrrites itself) thus.
Note that the verb agrees in number and person with the new
subject, cjiobo.
1. Ha deperax Bojirn crpoHT orpoMHbie ru/tpo-CTaHitHH.

2. Ero cMHTajiH oueHb yMHbiM xejioBexoM. 3. B nauieM xjiyde
Ha^HHafOT codpaHHH pobho b BOceMb nacoB Beuepa. 4. Bo BpeMH
6ojie3HH npHHHMaiOT pa3Hbie JiexapCTBa. 5. CioAa npucbuiaiOT
nhcbMa co Bcex kohuob Pocchh. 6. 06pa30Bamie pacnpocrpaHfl-
K)T cpe^H HaceJieHHa. 7. HHOCTpaHHbie KHurn neuaTajm npw TIeTpe
BejiHKOM. 8. ApxHTeKiypy To^xe Syttyr M3MeHHTb noA bjiHahhcm
KyjibTypHbix pecJ)6pM. 9. KaK h3bcctho, TpeGoBajiH noAHHTHe
KyjibiypHoro ypoBHH b padore xjiyda. 10. B 19-om Bexe npeKpa-
maiOT neAaroruuecKyK) AeflxejibHocTb AxaAeMHH Hayx.
e. Use the past passive participles given in the table on page 298
in passive Russian sentences.

1. Peter the Great, one of the most learned and energetic
Russian Tsars, died before the Russian Academy of Sciences,
founded by him in 1724, had begun its activity. 2. If only he
had lived a few more years, how great would have been his
influence on his creation, the Academy! 3. With what interest
would he have read the first Russian grammar written by
one of the greatest Russian scholars, Mikhail Lomonosov!
4. With what pleasure would he have heard about that scholar’s
many discoveries in the field of chemistry and physics! 5. Under
his influence the Russian Academy of Sciences might have
grown even faster. 6. He would have invited more foreign
scholars, more journals would have been printed, more foreign
books would have been translated into Russian. 7. Peter had
frequently gone to Europe and had studied abroad. 8. He knew
that his country had fallen behind its European neighbors in

many respects (in much). 9. Much had to be done, in order
to change Russia, following the example of European countries.
10. According to Peter’s plan, Russian youths (sing.) were
sent abroad, to England, to France, to Italy, and to Holland,
there to study economics, philosophy, architecture, and even
shipbuilding. 11. The spread of education to (into) all the
parts of his enormous empire was one of the main problems
of Peter the Great. 12. The economic, political, and cultural
reforms carried out by the Russian Tsar were recognized by
the great scholars of Europe in all the fields of learning. 13. In
the year 1717 Peter the Great was elected (chosen) a member
of the Paris Academy of Sciences, members of which had been
invited by Peter to occupy important positions (sing.) at his
court. 14. The beautiful city of St. Petersburg was built by
Peter on [the banks of] the river Neva. 15. In his new capital
of Russia were built many beautiful theaters, museums, and
libraries. 16. Here were opened many technical schools. 17. Here,
in the year 1703, was printed the first Russian newspaper.
18. Scholars in the new schools, libraries, and museums wrote
important scholarly books. 19. Textbooks in all the fields of
learning were also written and some of them were even worked
out by Peter himself. 20. Peter wanted his scholars to occupy
themselves not only with pure research activity but also with
pedagogical problems. 21. Their students should, in the course
of time, themselves become teachers in technical schools and
universities. 22. Yes, Peter the Great knew very well that
“Knowledge is light and ignorance is darkness” and did all
he could to spread education in his country.
VIII. CONCLUDING EXERCISE

Write a brief composition on the ‘‘Accomplishments of Peter
the Great,” or on a topic of your own choosing, drawing freely
upon your knowledge of Russian grammar and vocabulary gained
in this course.
I1PHJICHKEHHE I 1
I APPENDIX I
POETRY
It is in the poetry of a nation that the quality of its

language its color, its rhythm, its idiomatic and colloquial
turn, are’most vividly felt. Here, in its poetry, the student of
language will recognize most quickly the uniqueness of a
national idiom, and will develop most readily that indefinable
“feel” for its finest and subtlest nuances.
This is nowhere more true than in the poetry of Russia,
which ranges from the most refined, esoteric lyrical statement
to the most direct, vivid and vigorous, pithy and earthy utter¬
ance in folk song and proverb.
There is in Russian, especially in folk poetry, a very
characteristic feature which the student will notice at once
and which will perhaps puzzle him somewhat. This feature is
the frequent and effective use of forms of endearment, dis¬
paragement, and contempt, and of diminutive forms and forms
of magnification. All of these forms are denoted by a variety
of suffixes; the most important of them are listed below, to
ease the student’s way to his first sampling of Russian poetry.
A. Suffixes imparting to the noun a diminutive meaning and/

or expressing endearment:
-hk : (AOM) AOMHK “little (dear) house”
-ok (en) : (CHH) CbIHOK “dear little son”
-eu : (6paT) 6paTeu “dear little brother”
-Ka : (pyxa) pyqKa “dear little hand”
-HUa : (cecTpa) cecrpMua “dear little sister”
B. Suffixes expressing tenderness, endearment:
-yuiKa : êAyuiKa “grandfather”

6a6yuiKa “grandmother”
-fOIUKa : 6aTiouiKa “daddy, little father’
AHAIOlUKa “dear (little) uncle”
-em»Ka : naneHbKa “dear father”
MaMeHbKa “dear mother”
C. Suffixes expressing contempt:

-ihiiKa : MaJib^fiuiKa “urchin, brat”
-HUIKO : ômhuiko “miserable little house, a shack”
-eHKa : H36eHKa “miserable little but”
306
appendix I 307
D. Suffixes expressive of magnitude, hugeness;

-Ame : napHMme “big fellow”; aomhihc “huge house”
Adjectives can also be given a diminutive and/or endear¬

ing meaning by attaching the ending -eHbKHft in place of -hifi:
mmjimh “dear” MHJieHbKHii “dear, little (one) ”
xopouiHH “good” xopomeHbKHfl “pretty”
Notice the frequent occurence of these suffixes, especially
in the first two poems that follow. The “visible” vocabulary is
provided to eliminate the boredom of mechanical thumbing
of dictionaries but not the satisfaction that is sure to come
with the realisation that the knowledge of Russian gained
in this course proves quite ample to deal with the poems here
offered. (The new words or phrases are asterisked and trans¬
lated , unless they are easily derivable from known words.)
I. KA3AMb5I KOJIbIBEJIbHAfl riECHfl

(COSSACK CRADLE SONG)
Text Vocabulary
Crm, MjiaAeHeu* moh npexpacHbift, infant, child

BaiouiKH-daib.
ThXO CBeTHT MeCHD,* HCHblH moon
B KOJIbldeJIb* TBOK). cradle
CTaHy cKa3bieaTb h cKa3KH,* fairytale
fleceHKy cnoio.
Tbi m ApeMjiH*, 3aKpbiBiiiH rjia3KH, to dream, sleep
BaiOLOKH-daio. peacefully
11. A. d>eT: 3HMA
Text Vocabulary
hlyAHan* KapTHHa,* beautiful (wondrous) picture

Kslk th MHe po;j;Ha!
Bejiaa paBHHHa,
FIojiHaH JiyHa.* synonym for Mecnu
CseT Hedec* bmc°6khx plural of He do

H dJiecTHinHH* CHer,* glistening snow
H caHeft* AajieKHX, sled (gen. pi.)
Oahhokhh der!* run, course
308 nPHJ10>KEHJHE I
HI. A. Bjiok: BEPBOMKM*
Text Vocabulary
Majib^HKH, Aa AeBOUKH
CBeueuKH*, Aa BepSouKH* little candles and willow branches
rioHecjiH aomoh. (diminutive/endearing forms!)
OroncuKH* renjiHTca* endearing demunitivc of oroHb (m.
FIpOXOiKHe KpeCTflTCH* cross themselves
H naxHCT BecnoH and there is a smell of spring
(spring is in the air)
BerepoK yAaJieHbKHH,* brave, boisterous (diminutive/
endearing form!)
ÔJKAHK*, AOX<AHK MaJlSHbKHH (diminutive/endearing!)
He 3aAyft* othh*. blow out the fire
B BocicpeceHbe BepSnoe
3aBTpa BCTaHy nepBaa
JXjih.
CBHToro AHH * for the holy day
IV. A. riyiUKHH: 3MMHEE YTPO
Text Vocabulary
Mopo3* h cojiFme; AeHb ayAecHHH* frost; wondrous

Em;e Tbi ApeMJienib,* Apyr doze, dream
npeêcTHbiH.
Flopa, KpacaBHija, npocHHCb:* wake up
Benop,* tbi noMHHUib, Bbiora* last evening; snow storm
3JiHJiacb,* was raging
Ha MyraOM* He6e Mrjia* HOCHJiaeb;* cloudy; haze was hovering
JlyHa, KaK 6jieAHoe naTHo*, spot
CKB03b*TyuH* MpanHbie* aêJiTeJia,* was yellow through the
darkling clouds
A tbi nenajibHaa* cHAeJia. sad one
A HbiHne*... norjiHAH b okho: now
Hoa rojry6biMH* HeSecaMH synonym for chhhh
BejiHKOJienHbiMH* KOBpaMH magnificent
Bjiccth Ha coJiHpe, CHer jichcht;
npo3paHHbiH* Jiec oahh nepHeeT transparent
H ejib* cKB03b HHeft* 3ejieHeeT, fir tree; hoar frost
H peHKa noao* jibAOM* 6jiecTHT. iioao—noA; ice
1 The Sunday before Easter Sunday is called BepSuoe BocKpecemie.

It is the equivalent of our Palm Sunday. The poem describes how, on
the eve of that festive day, boys and girls are carrying home the
blessed candles and willow branches, blessed at an evening service.
appendix I 309
V. M. JlepMOHTOB: rOPHblE BEPIlIHHbl
Text Vocabulary
FopHbie BepuiHHbi* crmr bo TbMe mountain top, peak

HOHHOH
TnxHe AOjMHbi* valleys
nojiHbi CBeacefi Mrjioft;
He ribiJiHT* AOpora, send up dust
He ApOJKaT* AHCTbl*... leaves do not tremble
no/toiKAH neMHoro,
OTAOXHeillb H TbI.
VS. A. MafiKOB: XPHCTOC BOCKPEC!
Text Vocabulary
OoBcibAy* SjiarOBecT* ryAHT* Everywhere the ringing of bells

resounds {lit.: drones)
H3 Bcex pepKBeH HapOA sajiHT,* throng
3apn* tahaht yxte c He6ec... the dawn, sunrise
XpHCTOC* BOCKpec!* XpHCTOC Christ has risen!
BocKpec!
Bot npocbinaeTCH 3eMAH,

H OAeBaiOTCH iioah...
BecHa HAer, noAHa uyAec* wonders (gen.)
XpHCTOC BocKpec! XpHCTOC
BocKpec!
VII. M. JlepMOHTOB: MOJIHTBA
Text Vocabulary
B MHHyTy }kh3hh xpyAHyio,

TecHHTca Ab* b cepAue rpycTb,* crowds; sadness (if, whenever
sadness crowds in the heart)
O^Hy MOjiHTBy* qyAHyio* prayer: wonderful
TBepacy* h HaH3ycTb.* repeat by heart
C AyuiH* naK 6peMH cnaTHTCfl,* soul; rolls, falls off (disappears)
CoMHeHbe* AaêKO — doubt (“is” understood)
H BepHTca* h njiaêTCfl,* and one believes; and one -weeps
M TaK JierKo, JierKo. (tears of joy and relief)
310 FIPH/IOIKEHHE I
VIII. M. JlepMOHTOB: flAPYC
Text Vocabulary
BeaeeT* napyc* oahhokhm* shines white; sail ; lonely

B TyMaHe* Mope rojiydoM. mist (fog)
Hto Hmer oh b CTpane AaneKOH?
MtO KHHyJI* OH B KpaK) pO^HOM? left (behind)
MrpatOT bojihh, Berep cBHmeT*... wh istles

H Mama* raercH* h ckphitht*... the mast bends and creaks
Ybbi!* Oh cnacTHH He nmeT Alas!
Id He OT CHaCTHH 6eHCHT!
noA hhm CTpyn* CBeTjreft Jia3ypH,* flash (lit.: stream); azure

HaA hhm jivh* cojiHita 30jiotoh, ray
A oh, MHTexcHbiH,* npocnr 6ypn, rebellious, mutinous
Kax 6yAT0 b dypnx ecTb noKoft!* rest, peace
IX. A. MaflKOB: TMXO MOPE EOJIYBOE!
Text Vocabulary
Thxo Mope rojiyfioe!

Echh 6 BHxpb* He HaneTaA,* whirlwind; swoop down, rush in
He myMejio 6, He khabho* 6 would not throw
B 6epera 3a sajiOM Ban!* wave, surge
Thxo 6 rpyAb* moh Atmiajia,* breast; would breathe

Echh 6 BApyr, b Aynie Moeft
06pa3* tboh He npOHOCHAca* picture, image; rush through
Bnxpn SyftHoro* 6bicTpeft! tempestuous, raging
X. M. Kojibuoe: HAPO&HAfl I1ECH9
Text Vocabulary
JXyiOT BeTpH
BeTpbi SyftHbie,* storms (lit.: wild winds)
XOAHT TyHH,* clouds
TyuH TeMHbie
He BHâTb B HHX
CseTa* 6eJioro,* the wide world (lit.white world)
He BHAaTb B HHX
CojiHua KpacHoro, for: KpaCHBoro (archaic)
APPENDIX I 311
Bo cbipoM* Mnie,* damp mist, haze

3a TyMaHHMH,
TOJIbKQ HOHKa* night (lit.-, little night)
JlHiiib* qepneexcH*... only darkles
B sxy nopy* time
HenoroHcyto* foul, had weather (adj.)
O^HOMy >KHXb
CepAUy xqjioaho...
XI. A. riyuLiKMH: 3llMrPAMMM
Text Vocabulary
JXpy3bH, npocxftxe! 3aBemato* bequeath

BaM Bee, neM paA h qeM 6orax:
06ftA£»b* necHH — see npomaio,* insults, affronts; forgive
A MHe nycKaft Aonrit* npocxnx. debts
#*
*
BcerAa xaK 6yAex h 6biBajio,

TaKOB* H3ApeBJie* 6ejibift* CBex.* such from yore (is) the
yqeHbix MHoro, yMHbix Majio, wide (white) world
SnaxoMbix xbMa,* a Apyra Hex. great number, mass of
(lit.: darkness)
PIojiyMHJiopA, nojiyxyneu,* half-merchant

nojiyMyApen,* nonyHeBextAa,* half-wise man, half-boor
riojiynOAJieu,* ho ecxb HaAentAa,* half-rascal; hope
Hxo 6yAex nojiHWM HaKOHep.
**
*
riycxoe «Bbi» cepAenHbiM* «xbi» heartfelt, cordial

Oh4, OdMOJIBHCb,* 3aMeHHJia,* by slip of tongue she had
replaced
H Bee cqacxjiHBbie Meqxbi* dreams, reveries,
wishful thoughts
B Aytue BjnoSjieHHOH* B036yAHJia.* infatuated; she aroused,
awakened
ripe a Heft 3aAyMHHBO* cxoio; thoughtfully
H roBoph) eft, KaK «bli» mhjibi
Id MbicjiK):* Kax «xe6fl» jiioSjiio! think
312 nPHJIO>KEHHE I
XII. A. Ejiok: ÊBYIHKA ITEJIA...
Text Vocabulary
J[eBymKa nejia b uepKOBHOM xope* choir

0 Bcex ycrajibix b uyxtQM* Kpaib, foreign, strange
0 Bcex KopaSjihx, ymeAUinx b Mope,
0 Bcex 3a(5biBiiiHx paAOdb cboio.
Tax riea ee rojioc, jicthiahh b xynoJi,* flying up to (into)

the cupola
H Jiyn* chba* na 6enoM njiene, the ray was bright
(shone)
H Ka>KAbin H3 Mpaxa* CMOTpeji n cjiyinaji, out of the darkness
Karo 6e,zroe nâTbe* nejio b Jiyue. stands in poetic con¬
text for: AGBynixa
M BceM Kasajiocb, hto paAOCTb 6yneT,
lIto b thxoh 3asoah* Bee xopadjin, sheltered cove (lit.:
backwater)
Mto Ha nyn(6nHe* ycTanbie jiioah in the foreign land
CBeuiyio ACH3HB cede oSpejin-* have gained
(obtained) for
themselves 1
TEXT OF RUSSIAN SONGS
(Recorded by the Don Cossack Choir on. Record No. CHS 1230)
i. noJitoiiiKo—noJiE
Text Vocabulary
FIoji to ihko-nojie,
nojnouiKO ninpoKO nojie
Ea.vt no nojuo repon,
3x-Aa KpacHoft ApMnn repon.
/leByinKn: njiauyr,* they cry

JêByniKaM ceroAHH rpycTHo* sad
Mnjibm HaAOJiro yexan,
3x-Aa MHJibin b apMHK) yexan
1 The last verse is omitted.

appendix I 313
êsyniKH, rjiflHbTe,* look, take a look

PjiHHbTe na Aopory Haiuy,
BbeTCH* AaJibHHfl* AOpora. stretches (lit.: curls); distant
3x-Aa pa3Becejiaa* Aopora. a most merry, happy
Eacm mm, eAeM,

Eacm, a KpyroM* KOJix63bi. round about, around
Haiim, AesyuiKH, koaxo3h,
3x-Aa MOAOAbie HaniH cejia.* villages
IS. METEJIHUA
Text Vocabulary
BAOJib* no yjiHite Merejraua* Meier,* along; the snow

3a MeTeAHAefi moh MHJieHbKHii HAer. storm is sweeping
Tbi nocTOH,* nocTOH KpacaBHua moh, stop a while, tarry

Aan MHe HarjiHAeTbcn,* paAOCTb to have one’s fill of
Ha re6fl. looking
Ha tbok) jih* na npHHTHy1 KpacoTy, not expressive of
a question here
Ha TBoe jih* Aa Ha 6eJioe jihuo. but implies “as well
as...”
Tbi nocTOH, nocTOH, KpacaBHua moh, ]
Raft MHe HarAHAeTbcn, paAOCTb, refrain—npunes
Ha Te6n J
KpacOTa tbqh c yMa Mena cBejia,* has driven me insane
(lit.: lias led me
off my mind.)
FlorySpiJia* Ao6pa2 MOJiOAUa* MeHH. has undone, destroyed;
right- fine young
fellow
Tbi nocroft, nocToft, KpacaBHua moh,
Raft MHe HarAHAeibCH, paAOCTb
Ha Te6n.
1 Short ending in keeping with folk-tone.

2 An archaic form of the adjective particularly common in folk-
speech.
314 hpm;i0>kehme i
in. KTO EF0 3HAET
Text Vocabulary
Ha 3axaTe* xoaht napeHb* at sunset; fellow, lad

Bo3Jie* AOMa Moero. in front of
FlOMOpraeT* MHe nia3aMH winks
H He CKkeT Hnnero.
H kto ero 3HaeT, 3aneM oh MOpraer, ) » . ,
0 , ’ , a c refrain—npHnes
3aueM oh MopraeT, 3aueM oh MopraeT... j K
Kan npHAV h Ha ryjiHHbe* festive dance

Oh TaHAyeT h noeT.
A npOCTHMCH y KajIHTKH,* gate
OTBepneTCH* H B3AOXHer.* turns away; sighs
H kto ero 3HaeT, Hero* oh B3AbixaeT, why
Hero oh B3AbixaeT, Hero oh B3Abixaer...
H cnpocHJia, hto* He Beceji why

H He paAyeTCH.* is not happy
riOTepHJi* h, OTBenaeT, I have lost
CepAUe 6eAH0e CBoe.
H kto ero 3HaeT, 3aneM oh TepneT,
3aueM oh TepneT, 3aueM oh TepneT...
A Bqepa npHCAaji no noHTe

JXbsl 3araAOHHbix* nncbMa. mysterious
B Ka>KAOH CTpOHKe
TOJIbKO TOHKH.* dots, periods
ZI.oraAaHCfl,* moji,* caMa. guess; emphatic
particle
H kto ero 3Haer, Ha hto HaMeKaeT,* hints
Ha hto HaMeKaeT, Ha hto HaMeKaeT.
51 pa3raAbmaTb He crana,
He HaAeHCH* h He )kah! don’t hope
TojibKo cepAhe noneMy-To
CnaAKO Taajio* b rpyAH.* melted in breast
H kto ero 3HaeT, nero oho TaeT,

Hero oho TaeT, nero oho TaeT.
APPENDIX I 315
IV. UbiraHCKaa neom: MOW KOCTEP
Text Vocabulary
Moh Kocrep* b TyMaHe cbctht, campfire

HcKpbi* racHyT* Ha AeTy;* the sparks are extinguished,
HOHbK) Hac HHKTO He BCTpeTHT, die away in flight
MbI npOCTHMCH Ha MOCTy.
Houb npoHACT h cno3apaHOK* very early

B CTenb AaAexo, mhabih moh,
H yftAy c TOAnoft HbiraHOK* gipsies
3a khShtkoh* KOueBon-* covered nomadic cart
(a nomad’s cart)
Ha npomanbe rnaAb* c KaHMoio* shawl with a hem
Tbi y3AOM* Ha MHe cthhh:* into a knot; tie (pull
Kan KOHHbi ee, c to6ok> together)
MbI CXOAHAHCb* B 9TH AHH. we met (came together)
Kto-to MHe cyAbdv npeACKaxceT?

Kto-to 3aBTpa, cokoa* moh, falcon
Ha rpyAH Moeft pa3BH>KeT* will untie
y3eA, CTHHyTblH TOdOH?
BcnoMHH xce,* KorAa Apyraa, do remember

Jlpyra mhaoto ak>6h,
ByAeT neCHH neTb Hrpaa
Ha KOAeHHx* y re6M on (your) knees (your lap)
Moh KOCTep b TyMaHe cbotht,

HcKpbi racHyT Ha Jiery,
Houbio Hac HHKTO He BCTpeTHT,
MbI npOCTHMCH Ha MOCTy.
V. M. Ko3aob: BEMEPHHW 3BOH
Text Vocabulary
BenepHHH 3boh,* BeuepHHft 3boh! (lit.: peal, ringing of

evening bells)
KaK MHOrO AyM* HaBOAHT* oh tlioughts it calls up
O lOHblX* AHHX* B KpaiO pOAHOM, of youthful days
fAe h aio6ha, rAe othhh aom,* parental (father’s) house
H KaK H C HHM Ha BeK npOCTHCb,
TaM cjiymaji 3boh b nocAeAHHH pa3.
316 nPHJlOKEHHE I
y>Ke He 3peTb* MHe CBeTjibix ,n;Heft to see, behold (archaic)

BeCHbl OSMaHHHBOH* Moeft illusive, deceptive
H CKOJIbKHX HeT Tenepb B HCHBbIX
Toryta Becejibix, mojio^hx
H KpenoK hx MorHjibHbift* coh:* sleep of death, sepulchral
He cjibimeH hm BeuepHHft 3boh. sleep
JlencaTb h MHe b 3eMJie Cbipoft!

HaneB* yHMJibift* Ha#o mhoh a sad tune, melody, refrain
B AOjiHHe* BeTep pa3Hecer;* valley (vale); will scatter
JXpyrofi neBeu no Heft npoft/feT —
H ync He h, a 6y,n;eT oh
B pa3,n;yMbH* neTb BeuepHHft 3boh. in thought, pensively
PROVERBS — IIOCJIOBHUW
Text Vocabulary
Be3 nocjioBHgbi He npoaoiBemb-1 Without the proverb, you won’t

make your way through life.1
1. Learning
Ben* khbh, Bex yuftcb! century, age
rioBTopeHbe* — MaTb yueHbH. repetition
yHHCb cmojioav,* He yMpeuib c rojio^y.* from early youth;
from hunger
yueHbe CBeT, a HeyueHbe TbMa!
2. Work
Pa6oTa He MeABeAb,* b Jiec He ydemftT.* the bear; won’t run
away
JXeno MacTepa 6ohtch.
Kohhhji amo, ryjihft CMejio!* boldly

KoHei; Aejiy Benei*. All’s well that ends
well.
1 Notice that some of the more difficult and idiomatic proverbs

are rendered in full. The majority of items, however, the student
should have little difficulty in handling aided bv the “visible” vocab¬
ulary
APPENDIX I 317
Tame* eêiiib, AaJibiue 6y^,emb. more quietly, calmer,

slower
Kyfi Kejie3o noKa ropnuo! Strike while the iron
is hot!
Tepneroie h TpyA Bee nepexpyr. Patience and. work
will overcome
everything.
3. Love and Friendship

HacMbHO MHJI He dynernb. One cannot endear
oneself by force.
OapbiH Apyr Jiyurne hobhx Aeyx.
He HMeft cto py6jieH, a HMeft cto Apy3efi!
JJeBHUbe «HeT» He otkb3. A maiden’s “no”
is not a refusal.
€ rjia3 aojioh, H3 cepAUa boh. Out of sight, out of
the heart (mind).
4. Way of the World

>KH3Hb npo^KHTb, He nojie nepeftTH.* to cross
HeT xyAa 6e3 AO^pa. In every evil there
is [some] good.
IIpaBAa CBeTjieft cojmija-

Be3 Bora hh ao nopora.* threshold
Yxpo Beuepa MyApeHee.* wiser
Her AtiMa 6es othh.* fire
He Bee to 3ojioto, hto 6jiecTHT* glistens
Jlyume ho3aho, ueM HHKorAa.
3a TpH BeiAH He pyuaftcH:* don’t vouch for

3a uacbi, 3a jiomaAb, Aa 3a >xeHy!
PyccKHH uejiOBeK jiio6ht:* «rOBOpHTb» is

understood
«aBocb», «He6ocb», Aa «KaK-HH6yAt>.»* “perhaps,” “proba¬
bly,” “somehow”
318 HPHJIOiKEHME I
aAFA^KH — RIDDLES
Text Vocabulary
1 1
TaeT chokok,
0)KHJI JiyJKOK,* the meadow has come alive
fleHb npH6biBaeT * is growing longer
Korâ 9to SbisaeT?
2 2
CojiHue ne-qeT,* burns hot, bakes
Jliina UBeTex,* the linden stands in bloom
PoiKb nocneBaeT.* the corn is ripening
KorM a to 6biBaeT?
3 3
IlycTbi* nojiH empty

3
MOKHeT* eMJTH, is wet, soaked
/lo^b no.iHBaeT.* pours
KorAa 9to dbmaeT?
4 4
CHer Ha nojiax,
JleA* Ha penax, ice
Bbiora* ryjiaeT.* the snow storm is blowing
KorAa 9to SbiBaeT?
5 5
IIIyMHT* oh b noae h b caAy it makes noise

A b aom He nonaAeT* will not get in
H HHKyAa h He HAy
noKyAa* oh HAeT as long as (colloquial)
6 6
rtOA* Hobhh Foa npHLiieJi oh b aom on the eve of (New Year)
TaKHM pyMHHHM* tojicthkom * rosy-cheeked fat one
Ho c keukahm ah£m Tepaji* OH B6C* he lost weight
H HaKOHeu coBceM ncue !* 3 disappeared
APPENDIX I 319
7 7
Kto hq* 6ery * napbi* KJiySa* on the run; blowing off
steam
IlycKaH AbiM rpySoii* through the smokestack
HeeeT BnepeA
H caM ce6fl
JX& h MeHH c to6oh?
8 8
Bceiyta rnaraeM* mli BABoeM,* walk (march) in pairs
noxo>KHe Kan SpaTba.
Mbi 3a oSeAOM iioa ctojiom,
A HOUbK) nOA KpOBaTbK).* synonym for nocTeJib
9
Mbi XOAHM HOHbK),
XOAHM AHeM,
Ho HHKyAa
Mbi He yflAeM.
Mbi 6beM* HcnpaBHo* we strike punctually

Kax<AbiH uac
HO Bbl, APy3bH,
He Genre Hac!
PA3FAJIKA SOLUTION
1. BeCHOH in the spring
2. JieTQM in the summer
3. oceHbio in the fall
4. 3HM0H in the winter
5. AOX<Ab rain
6. KaaeHAapb calendar
7. nap0B03 locomotive
8. Gothhkh, TycfjjiH, canorn shoes, slippers, boots
9. qacbi watch, clock
FIPMJIOIKEHME II |
I APPENDIX II
I. DECLENSION OF NOUNS
Masculine and Neuter Genders
Singular
Masculine Neuter
Hard Soft Soft Hard Soft Soft
Nom. CTOJI My3ei £03KAb MeCTO nojie 3Aa.Hne
Gen. CTOJia My3ea tfOJKAH MecTa nojisr 3,n;aHHH
Dat. CTOJiy My3eio JtOJKAIO MecTy nojrio 3AaHHK)
Acc. CTOJI1 Mysefl1 AOMAb1 MeCTO nojie 3,n;aHHe
Instr. CTOJIOM 2 My3eew3 MeCTOM nojieM3 3jiaHHeM3
Prep. cTojie My3ee Aomjie MecTe nojie 3AaHHH
Plural
Nom. CTOJI bl4 My3eu AOM.AH MecTa nojia 3A3.mm
Gen. CTOJIGB3 My3ees aoma^R MeCT nojiefl 3#aHHft
Dat. CTOJIOM My3esiM AOMAUM MecTaiw nOJIHM
Aec. CTOJI bl4 My36H AOMAU MecTa nojiH 3AAHHSI
Instr. CTOJiaMH My3eflMH aomaumm MecTaiwH nOJIHMH 3AaHHHMH
Prep. cTOJiax My3esix AOM-AUX i Mecrax nojiHX 3MHH5IX
1 Animate masculines have Identical accusative and qenitive

endings. y
2 unaccented instrumental ending -om of masculines becomes -eM
when preceded by m, % m, m, u: toB&pmuem.
s When stressed, the masculine and neuter instrumental ending
-eM changes to -eM; AoaaeM, py>KbeM. The same change from e to I
takes place m the neuter nominative and accusative singular: nyjKbe
Masculine plural nominative and accusative (inanimate) ending
PhiuCh anSeS ~H n preceded by r’ * x’ * w, m (not u.) TtoS?
e Ttie masculine genitive plural ends in -eft after hc, urt m- tobh-
pmneft; and m -eB after u: Mecaues. ’ ’ m Bd
*rm *Fia mrtoi61 Peciiliai7ties in the declension of masculines, see Les-
20 2® fUrthCr pecallaritl“ declension of neuters.
320
appendix II 321
DECLENSION OF NOUNS (continued)
Feminine Gender
Singular
Bard Soft Soft Soft
Nom. KOMHaTa Heêjifl ABepb (âMHJIHH
Gen. KOMHaTbl 1 ABepH
Dat. KOMHaTe HeAejre ABepH fyaurnm
Aec. KOMHary Heêjiio ABepb (f)aMHAHI©
Instr. KOMHaTOft (OIO 3 )2 HeAeJieft(eio) ABeptio 4>aMHJiHefi(eio)
Prep. KOMHaTe eeAejie ABepH (JjaMHJIHH
Plural
Nom. KOMHaTbl 1 HeêjiH ABepH (J)aMHJIHH
Gen. KOMHaT Heêjib Afiepeft (|)aMHJIHfi
Dat KOMHaTSM HeAeJisiM ABepHM (jjaMHAHHM
Acc. KOMHaTbl1*3 HeAejiH 3 ABepH 3 (J)aMHJIHH3
Instr. KOMHaTaMH HeAejiHMH ABepHMH (j)aMHJIHHMH
Prep. KOMHaTaX HeAeîsrx ABepax (J)aMHJIHHX
1 Genitive singular and nominative and accusative plural ending

-H changes to -h after r, k, x„ >k, h, iu, m (not a): Knura.
2 Unstressed instrumental singular ending -oft (-oro) changes to
-ell (-eio) after >k, m, ui, iu* u: npoflauiiulueft.
3 Animate feminine nouns have identical accusative and genitive
endings in the plural.
Note that, in the plural, feminine noun endings differ from those
of the masculine only in the genitive (and in the accusative of animate
feminines).
For further peculiarities in the declension of feminine nouns, see
Lesson 23-
The Three Regular Declensional Patterns Arranged for Easy Comparison
The sign > stands for “changes to.”

flPHJIOKEHHE II
324 nPMJlOKEHHE II
III. PLURAL ENDINGS OF RUSSIAN NOUNS
Plural
Types of Nouns
Endings
Masc. ending in Hard Consonants: CTOJI, saBOJi, etc.

-hi
Fem. ending in the Hard Vowel «A»: »eHa, padOTa, etc.
Masc. ending in «0»: reHHft, My3efi, etc.

Fem. ending in «H»: AepeBHH, KyxHH, etc.
Masc. & Fem. ending in «b»: zceHb. HOUb, etc.
-H
Masc. & Fem. the stem of which ends in «E, K, X» and
in «>K, III, IU»: KHHra, ho>k, TOBapnin, etc.
Neuters: HJieMO, flSjlOKO.
Most Neuters ending in «0»: okho, MeCTO, etc.

Certain Masc. with stress on the plural ending: rjia3a,
-A ropoâ, AOKTopa, noMa, noe3â-
Neuters ending in «>KE, IIIE, LUE, ME, UE»: coJiHue,
cep/tue, etc.
Neuters ending in «E» or «E»: nojie, pyacbe, etc.

-fl Masc. ending in «b» and having the stress on the plural
ending: yuHTejifl, etc.
-AHE Masc. ending in «AHHH» and «MHMH»: aHrjiHU^HHH,

-JIHE rpaaiAaHHH, KpeCTbHHHH, XpHCTHaHHH.
Masculines: 6paT, JiHCT, MyiK, cxyji.

-m
Neuters: AepeBO, JiepO.
Neuters ending in «MM»: SpeMfl, BpeMH, bhmh, 3HaMSi,

-EHA hmsi, njiaMH, naeMfl, ceMfl, CTpeMH, TeMsi.
Singular Plural Singular Plural

rocnoaHH rocnoaa MaTb MarepH
Irregular AHth aeTH peOeHOK pe6HTa
Formations AOHb aonepH CblH CbIHOBbH
npyr iipysba yxo yuiH
ueaoBeK jiioaH UBetoK ueeriis
APPENDIX II 325
IV. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES
Hard: -'wfi (-'wfi); -oft
Plural
Masculine Neuter Feminine All Genders
Nom. HOBbli HOBOe HOBaSI HOBbie
Gen. HOBOrO HOBOrO HOBOlft HOBbIX
Bat. HOBOMy HOBOMy HOBOil HOBbIM
Acc. HOBbii!(oro) HOBOe HOByiO HOBbie (bIX)
Instr. HOBbIM HOBbIM HOBOil (OK)) HOBMMH
Prep. HOBOM HOBOM HOBOlf HOBbIX
Soft: -'Hi!
Plural
Nom. CHHHH cHHee CHHHH CHHHe
Gen. CHnero cHHero cHHeit CHHHX
Dat. CHHeMy CHHeMy CHHeft CHHHM
Acc. cHHHfi(ero) CHHee CHHKMK) CHHHe(HX)
Instr. CHHHM CHHHM CHHeit (eio) CHHHMH
Prep. CHHeM CHHeM CHHei! CHHHX
1. Adjectives in -oft (MOjiOJ3,6ii) are declined exactly like HOBblft,

the stress being on the ending throughout the declension.
2. After r, K, x, hc, % ui, m the vowel M of all endings in the hard

declension changes to H.
3. After >K, 4, in, m, n, the unstressed o of all endings in the hard

declension changes to e.
4. When an adjective modifies an animate masculine noun in the
singular or animate masculine and feminine nouns in the plural its
accusative ending is like its genitive.
326 nPMJ10>KEHHE II
V. DECLENSION OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN-ADJECTIVES
Plural
Nom. mom Moe mom mom

Gen. Moero Moero Moefi moAx
Dat. MoeMy MoeMy Moefi mohm
Ace. MOH(ero) Moe mow moh(Ax)
Instr. MOHM MOHM Moeft(ew) MOHMH
Prep. MoeM MoeM Moeft mohx
Like mo A are declined tboh “your, yours” and the reflexive

possessive pronoun-adjective CBOft “my own, your own, his own, etc.”
Plural
Nom. Ham Hame Hama Haum

Gen. Hamero Hamero Hauiefi Harnux
Dat. HameMy HameMy Harneft HamHM
Ace. Ham(ero) Hame Hamy HamH(nx)
Instr. HamHM HamHM Harneft (ew) HamuMH
Prep. HameM HameM Hamefi Hamnx
Like Haul is declined Barn “your, yours’’ (plural and polite).
The third person possessive pronoun-adjectives ero “his, its,”

ee “her, hers,” MX “their, theirs,” are not declined.
For the declension of other pronoun-adjectives sees
Personal pronoun: H, TM, oh etc. Lesson 17

Demonstrative pronoun-adjective: §tot, tot .. Lesson 21
Interrogative pronoun: KTO, hto. Lesson 15
Relative pronoun: KOTOpbift, kto, hto. Lesson 29
Reflexive pronoun: ceOfi; emphatic: caM .... Lesson 22
Reciprocal pronoun: flpyr zipyra . Lesson 25
Indefinite pronoun: kto-to, KTO-HHSy/ib _ Lesson 27
Negative pronoun; hhkto, hhhto . Lesson 27
Pronoun-adjectives: KaKOfi, Taxofi, KOTOpbifi,
. Lesson 20
Pronoun-adjective: BeCb . Lesson 24
APPENDIX II 327
VI. NUMBERS1
Cardinals Ordinals
1 0£HH, OAua, oaho nepBbift, -'an, -'oe first
2 ABa, ABe . BTopoft, -aa, -oe second
3 TpH . TpeTHH, -'bH, -'be third
4 ueTbipe . ueTBepTbiH, -'aa, -'oe fourth
5 IIHTb. naTbift, -'aa, -'oe fifth
6 HieCTb . uiecTOH, -an, -oe sixth
7 ceMb . ceABMOH, -an, -oe seventh
8 BOCeMb . BocbMoft, -an, -oe eighth
9 AeBHTb . AeBHTbiu, -'an, -'oe ninth
10 AeCHTb . aecHTbiH, -'aa, -'oe tenth
11 OAHHHaAAaTb OAHHHaAUaTbiH, -aa, -oe Uth
12 ABeHaAAaTb ABeHaAuaTbm, -an, -oe 12th
13 TpHHaAuaTb ... TpHHaAUaTbra, -aa, -oe 13th
14 ueTbipHaAdaTb HeTbipHaAuaTbiH, -an, -oe 14th
15 naTHaAUaTb . . . naTHaAuaTbiH, -aa, -oe 15th
16 mecTHaAuaTb mecTHaAuaTbiH, -aa, -oe 16th
17 ceMHaAUaTb ... ceMHaAuaTbiH, -aa, -oe 17th
18 BOceMHa.AU.aTb . BoceMHaAuaTbiH, -aa, -oe 18th
19 AeBHTHaAUaTb . AeBHTHaAuaTbiH, -aa, -oe 19th
20 ABaAuaTb . ABaAuaTbm, -'aa, -'oe 20th
21 ABaAuaTb oahh ABaAuaTb nepBbiH, -'aa, -'oe 21st
22 ABaAuaTb ABa . ABaAuaTb BTOpou, -aa, -oe 22nd
30 TpHAUaTb . TpHAuaTbiH, -'aa, -'oe 30th
40 COpOK . copoKOBofl, -aa, -oe 40th
50 ITHTbAeCHT .... naTHAecaTbift, -'aa, -'oe 50th
60 LUeCTbAeCHT . . . niecTHAecaTbiH, -'aa, -'oe 60th
70 ceMbAecHT .... ceMHAecHTbiH, -'aa, -'oe 70th
80 BOCeMbAeCHT .. BOCbMHAecHTbiH, -'aa, -'oe 80th
90 A£bhhocto .... AeBaHOCTbiu, -'aa, -'oe 90th
100 CTO . coTbiH, -'aa, -'oe 100th
200 ABeCTH . AByxcoTbm, -'aa, -'oe 200th
300 TpHCTa . TpexcoTbifl, -'aa, -'oe 300th
400 ueTbipecTa .... aeTbipexcoTbia, -'aa, -'oe 400th
500 nHTbCOT . naracoTbiH, -'aa, -'oe 500th
600 HieCTbCOT . mecTHCOTbiu, -'aa, -'oe 600th
700 ceMbcoT . ceMHCOTbiu, -'aa, -'oe 700th
800 BOCeMbCOT .... BOCbMHcoTbifi, -'aa, -'oe 800th
900 AeBHTbCOT .... AeBHTHcoTbiH, -'aa, -'oe 900th
1,000 TbICHHa . TbICHHHblH, -aa, -oe 1000th
2,000 ABe TbICHHH . . . AByxTbicauHbiH, -aa, -oe 2,000th
10,000 AeCHTb TbICHU . AecaTHTbicaaHbiH, -aa, -oe 10,000th
1,000,000 OAHH mhajihoh MHJiJiHOHHbifi, -'aa, -'oe millionth
i For the declension of numerals, see: oahh, Lesson 21; all other
cardinals. Lesson 26; ordinals. Lesson 19.
328 nPHJ10>KEHME II
VII. A SUMMARY OF RULES OF CASE REQUIREMENTS

AFTER CARDINAL NUMERALS
The Noun with Cardinal Numerals
RULE I: When following OJJ.HH and all its compounds

(except 11), the noun agrees with the numeral in
gender and ease, and is always in the Singular.
Examples: oahh ctoji, o^Horo CTO-na, oAHOMy CTOJiy, etc.

ABa.HU.aTb OAHH CTOA, ABSAUHTH OAHOro CTOAB,
ABaAuaTH oahomy CTO.Jiy, etc.
oaho okho, OAHoro OKHa, oahomy OKHy; abaa~

uaib oaho okho, etc.
oAHa KOMHaTa, oahoA KOMHaTbi, etc.; ABaAuarb

OAHa KOMHaTa, etc.
RULE II: When following other cardinal numerals there is

agreement in the oblique eases, i.e., in the Genitive
Dative, Instrumental, Prepositional, and the
Accusative when that case differs from the
Nominative.
Examples: 3
AByX CTOJIOB, C TpeMfl Apy bflMH, o copona Aa- 3
HHflX, etc.
When following these cardinal numerals in the

Nominative and the Accusative (when the accusa¬
tive is like the nominative) there is no agreement,
the following sub-rules apply:
SUB-RULE I: When following 2, 3, 4, and all their compounds

the noun is in the Genitive Singular.
Examples: ABa CTOJia, TpH khhfh, ABaAUaxb nexbipe OKHa,

ete.
SUB-RULE II: When following 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and all their com¬

pounds as well as 10 and 11 the noun is in the
Genitive Plural. Also when following 100 and its
multiples.
Examples: naxb ctojiob, ABaAUaxb weexb khhp, Aecsixb

OKOH, OAHHHaAUaXb CTyJIbeB, CXO COAABT, ABe-
cxhAOJLiapOB, ete.
appendix II 329
A SUMMARY OF RULES OF CASE REQUIREMENTS

AFTER CARDINAL NUMERALS
(Continued)
The Adjective with Cardinal Numerals
RULE I: When following one and its compounds (except

11), the adjective agrees with the numerals in
gender and case and is always in the Singular:
ABajmaib ojsHoro dojibuioro CTOJia, etc.
RULE II: When following other numbers there is agreement

in the oblique cases: c AByMfl CTapbiMH Apy3bH-
MH, CTa CTapbix KHur, etc.
RULE III: When following other numbers in the Nominative

and Accusative (when it is like nominative) the
adjective is always in the Genitive Plural, though
after 2, 3, 4’* it can also be in the Nominative
Plural: ABe CTapbix/CTapbie khhxh, neTbipe
xoponiHx/xopouiHe Apyra, nsrrb H3B6CTHMX
yqeHbix, etc.
and their compounds except 12, 13, 14.

330 nPHJIO/KEHHE II
O
VIII. PREPOSITIONS
.o
S'
£
APPENDIX II 331
IX. PREPOSITIONS USED WITH MORE THAN ONE CASE
Prepositions Cases Meaning and sample sentences
Motion toward, against:

H b ropOA Ha KOHqepT.
Bojihli 6hjih 0 6eper.
Accusative
Time:
H npoqejr 3to b qac.
fl e^y b ropOA Ha HeêJiio.
b, Ha
o, 06
660 Location:
H b ropoê Ha KOHpepTe.
Time:
Prepositional
Oh eêT b MapTe, Ha 3T0ft HeêJie.
"About,” "concerning”:
Mbi HHTaeM 0 noaTe nyixiKHHe.
Motion "behind,” "under”:

Oh KJiaêr ra3ery 3a JiaMny,
Accusative noil KHHry.
Time:
fl npoqeji KHHry 3a qac.
3a
no ji
Location "behind,” "under”:
Fa3exa 3a JiaMnoft, no/i KHHrofi.
Instrumental
"3A” in the meaning of "for,” "after”:
51 Hiiy 3a ra3eToii.
"C” in the meaning of "from (off)”:

Genitive yi B35L/I KHHry CO CTOJia.
Oh HjiCT c ypona.
c
CO "C” in the meaning of "with,” "in the
company of”:
Instrumental
Ohh roBOpAr c yqHrejieM. ^
H/ieiUb TbI C HHM Ha KOHIiepT?
XI. PREPOSITIONAL PREFIXES
334
335
Optional.
336 nPM/ICMEHHE II
XII. THE VERB
First Conjugation
Imperfective Perfective
I. Infinitive:
HHTaxb npOHHTarb to have read

to read, be reading
II. Indicative:
Present Tense
I read, am reading
H HHTaifO
th HHTaeuib
oh, OHa, oho HHTaeT None
Mbl HHTaeM
bli HHTaeTe
OHH HHTalOT
Past Tense
I read, was reading I have, had read

a HHTaJi, Jia, jo h npoHHTaji, Jia, jio
TH HHTaJI, Jia, JIO th npoHHTaJi, Jia, jio
OH HHTaJI OH npOHHTaJI
OHa HHTajia OHa npoHHTaJia
OHO HHTaJIO OHO npOHHTaJIO
Mbl, Bbl OHH HHTaJIH Mbl, Bbl, OHH npOHHTaJIH
Future Tense
I shall read, he reading I shall have read

h 6yjy HHTaTb h npoHHTaio
th 6yjeuib HHTaTb th npOHHTaeuib
oh, OHa, oho 6yjeT HHTaTb oh, ona, oho npoqHTaeT
Mbi 6yjeM HHTaTb Mbi npoqHTaeM
Bbi 6yjeTe HHTaTb Bbi npoHHTaeTe
orin 6yjyr HHTaTb OHH npOHHTaiOT
APPENDIX II 337
III. Subjunctive (conditional):
Conjugated exactly like the past tense of the indicative mood

with the addition of particles 6m or 6:
h HHTaji, jia, jio 6m (6) etc. h npOHHTaJi, jia, jio 6m (6) etc.
I should read, be reading, I should have read

should have been reading
IV. Imperative:
qHTafl! f npowrai! read! read (it)

HHTafiTe! • npo^HTaflie! through, com¬
pletely
V. Adverbial participles:
Present Tense
HHTaH reading, while

reading None
Past Tense
UHTaBUUH while (I, etc.) npowraBiUH

UHTaB was reading npowraB havmg read
VI. Participles:
a. Active:
Present Tense
HHTaioiUHft one who is

reading None
Past Tense
wraBUiHft one who was npouHTaBUXHii one who has,

reading had read
338 nPHJICMEHHE II
b. Passive-.
Present Tense
Long form: mrraeMbifi ^

Short form: wraeM 32
which is being read
Past Tense
Long form: HHTaHHbifl npo^HTaHHbift which has, had

Short form: HHTaH npo^HTaH been read
which was read
(Other past passive participle endings are: long -TbiH, short -T.)
VII. Passive:
The passive is constructed by means of the short passive parti¬
ciple forms, present or past (see directly above); also by means
of the reflexive form.
APPENDIX II 339
Second Conjugation
I. Infinitive:
KypHTb BHKypHTJb to have smoked
to smoke, be smoking
II. Indicative:
Present Tense
I smoke, am smoking None
H KypK)
TH KypHuib
OH, OHa, OHO KypHT
MbI KypHM
bli KypHie
OHH KypSiT
Past Tense
I smoked, was smoking I have, had smoked
a KypHJi, jia, jio h BbiKypHJi, jia, jio
Tbi Kypnji, Jia, jio th BbiKypHJi, Jia, jio
oh KypHJi OH BbiKypHJi
OHa KypHJi a OHa BbiKypnjia
OHO KypHJIO OHO BbIKypHJIO
MH, Bbl, OHH KypHJIM MbI, Bbl, OHH BbIKypHJIH
Future Tense
I shall smoke, be smoking I shall have smoked
h 6yay KypHTb H BbIKypIO
Tbi 6yneuib KypHTb Tbi BblKypHUUb
oh, OHa, oho byjier KypHTb OH, OHa, OHO BbIKypHT
Mbi 6yneM KypHTb Mbi BbIKypMM
Bbi 6yêTe KypHTb Bbi BbiKypHTe
ohh 6ynyT KypHTb OHH BbIKypHT
III. Subjunctive (conditional):

Conjugated exactly like the past tense of the indicative mood
with the addition of particles 6bi (6):
h KypHJi, jia, jio 6bi (6) etc. h BbiKypHJi, jia, jio 6m (6) etc,
I should smoke, be smoking, I should have smoked
should have been smoking
340 nPHJICDKEHHE II
IV. Imperative:
Kypw! BbixypH! smoke! finish
Kypnie! smoê‘ BbiKypHTe! smoking!
V. Adverbial participles:
Present Tense
Kypfl smoking, while None
smoking
Past Tense
KypHBiUH while (I, etc.) BbiKypHBW,n , .
KypHB was smoking BbiKypHB having smo ted
VI. Participles:
a. Active:
Present Tense
KypaiUMH one who is

None
smoking
Past Tense
KypHBiUHfl one who was BbiKypuBiimfi one who has,
smoking had smoked
b. Passive:
Present Tense
Long form: KypHMbifi
Short form: KypfiM None
which is being smoked
Past Tense
Long form: KypeHHbiii BbiKypeHHbiH which has, had
Short form: Kypen BbiKypen been smoked
which was smoked
(Other past passive participle endings are long -Tbift, short -T.)
VII. Passive:
The passive is constructed by means of the short passive parti¬
ciple forms, present or past (see directly above); also by means
of the reflexive form.
APPENDIX II 341
XIII. VERBS FROM THE TEXT ARRANGED ACCORDING

TO THEIR TYPICAL CONJTJGATIONAL PATTERNS
{Regular first and second conjugation verbs are not included.)
I. CONSONANT PERMUTATION
1. JX > M: (In the first person singular only)
Sy^HTb: 6y>Ky, SyAHiiib, to awaken, rouse
6ymT
BHfleTb: BHHfy, bhahiub, to see
BHA^T
BOAHTb: BOmy, BO AHnib, to lead, guide
boaht
3aB0AHTb: 3aBomy, 3aBo- to wind
AHUIb, 3aBOAHT
BbirjmAeTb: BbirjiHwy, Bbirjin- to appear, look
AHHIb, BbirAHAHT
e3AHTb: e3>«y, e3AHinb, to drive
e3AHT
pOAHTbCH: pomycb, to be born
pOAHIHbCH, pOAHTCfl
CHAeTb: CH>Ky, CHAHuib, to sit
CHAHT
XOAHTb: XOHtyj XOAHHIb, to go, walk
xoaht
2. 3 > >K: (Throughout)

Ka3aTbca: xawycb, Ka>Keiiib- to appear, seem
CH, KamyTCH
noKa3aTb: noxaHiy, noxa- to show
meiiib, noxamyx
cxa3axb: cxaixy, cKaweiiib, to say, tell
cxaiKyx
paccxa3axb: paccKawy, pac- to tell, narrate
CKa>Keuib, paccxaixyx
(In the first person sing.
only)
B03HXb: BOJKy, B03HUIb, to transport, cart
B03HT
3. >K > P: (In the first person singular and the third plural)
6e>xaxb: 6ery, 6excHiiib, to run
deryx
342 I1PHJ10>KEHME II
VERBS ARRANGED ACCORDING TO THEIR

CONJUGATIONAL PATTERN {continued)
4. C > H: (Throughout)
KJiacTb: Kjiajiy, KJia/iemb, to put, place
KJiajiyT
nonacTb: nonary, nonaênib, to get to, catch
nonaryt
ynacTb: ynajiy, ynajieiiib, to fall
yna^yT
cecTb: CHiiy, cn/ieiiib, CHiiyr to sit down
(Note the change from e
to si)
5. C > III: (In the first person singular only)
dpocHTb: 6p6wy, bpocHiub, to throw
6pOCHT
HocHTb: ho my, HocHuib, to carry, bear
HOCHT
npocHTb: npowy, npocniub, to ask, beg (a favor)
npocHT
cnpocHTb: cnpoiuy, cnpo- to ask (a question)
CHUIb, enpOCHT
npurjiacHTb: npurjiamy, to invite
nparjiacHiiib, npHrjiacHT
(Troughout)
nucaTb: nurny, numeuib, to write
nhiuyT,
nocjiaib: noumio, nouuieuib, to send (away)
nOLUJIIOT
npucjiaTb: npHiujiio, to send (to receiver)
npHiujienib, npHiujiiOT
6. CK, CT, T > Ilf: (Throughout)
HCKaTb: Hiny, umeiub, hmyr to search, look for
(In the first person singular
only)
npocTHTbca: npomycb, to say good bye
npOCTHIUbCH, npOCTHTCH
cnycTHTb: cnymy, cnycrauib, to lower, let down
cnycTHT
npeKpaTHTb: npenpamy, to stop, end, cease
npeKpaTHiub, rrpeKparHT
APPENDIX II 343

CONJUGATIONAL PATTERN (continued)
7. T > 4: (In the first person singular only)
BcrpeTHTb: BCTpeny, to meet
BCTpeTHIUb, BCTpeTHT
jiereTb: jieny, JieTHWb, jictht to fly
OTBeiHTb: oTBeny, OTseTHinb, to answer
OTBGTHT
(Throughout the singular)
xoxexb: xony, xoneuib, xoneT
but not in the plural:
XOXHM, XOXHTe, XOTHT to want, wish
8. 4b > T: (For 1st pers. sing. & 3rd pi.) > >K (for all other
persons):
MOHb: Mory, MoiKenib, mo- to be able
MceT, MomeM, Momexe, mo-
ryT
Jienb: jiary, jiniKenrb, jihikct, to lie down
jiHmeM, jmniexe, Jinryx
(Note the change from e
to a)
9. ABA, EBA, OBA > Y/K):
BoesaTb: bokho, Boioemb, to wage war
BOKJIOT
HHxepecoBaTbcfl: HHTepecy- to be interested
iocb, HHTepecyeurbcH,
HHTepecyioTCH
jiioboBaTbcn: jnoSyiocb, to admire
jnoSyeuibcH, JiiodyioTCH
TpeSoBaTb: TpeSyio, to demand
TpeSyeuib, TpebyiOT
qyBCTBOBaxb: qyBCTyio, to feel
MyBCTByeuib, ByBCTByioT
II. CONSONANT INFIXES

1. After 6, b, <f), m, n certain verbs insert JI in the first person
sing. :
jnoC»HTb: jik)6.iik>, jnodmiib, to love
jnbdsrr
roTOBHTb: roTOBJiio, to prepare
rOTOBHIIlb, rOTOBBT
344 nPHJICMEHHE II

HpaBHTbcfl: HpaBjiiocb, to like, please
HpaBHIUhCH, HpaBHTCH
OTnpaBHTb: OTnpasjiio, to send off, away
OTnpaBHiiib, OTnpaBHT
nonpaBHTB: nonpaejiio, to repair
nonpaBHiiib, nonpaBHT
CTaBHTb: cTaBjno, cTaBHiiib, to place, put
CTBBHT
npeACTaBHTb: npeAcraBjiio, to introduce, represent
npe^cTaBHin'b, npe^cTaBHT
CTaHOBHTbcn: CTaHOBJiiocb, to become, grow to be
CraHOBHUIbCH, CTaHOBHTCH
3HaKOMHTb: 3HaKOMJiK), to introduce, make
3HaKOMHiiJb, 3HaKOMHT acquainted
KynHTb: Kynjuo, Kynmiib, to buy
Kymrr
nocTyriHTb: nocTymno, to enter, enroll, enlist
nocTynauib, nocTynnr
cnaTb: cruno, crmuib, ctiht to sleep
2. Infix - B - :
XCHTb: >KHBy, XCHBeillb, XCHByT to live
njibiTb: nîbiBy, njibieemb, to swim
njibiByT
3. Infix - H - :
BCTaTb: BcraHy, BCTawemb, to get up, rise
BcraHyT
CTaTb: craHy, CTanemb, to become, grow to be
craHyr
HanaTb: Ha^Hy, na^Heuib, to begin
Ha^Hyr
(Note the loss of the “a”)
o#eTb: oêHy, oêHeuib, to dress
oêHyT
OTCTaTb: oTciaHy, otctb- to fall behind, lag
Heurb, oxcTaHyT
III. VOWEL INFIXES

1. Infix - b - :
riHTb: nbio, ribeiiib, nbiOT to drink
6htb; 6bk>, 6beuib, 6biot to strike, hit
APPENDIX II 345

2. Infix - O - :
AoraaTb: Aoromb, Aoro- to catch up with
HHIHb, AOrOHHT
saKpbiTb: 3aKpoio, 3aKpo- to close
euib, 3aKp6lOT
MbiTb: mok), Moenib, moiot to wash
nerb: now, noeiub, notOT to sing
3. Infix - E - :
dpaTb: 6epy, depeiiib, 6epyx to take
AodpaTbca: AoSepycb, to reach
AoSepenibCH, AobepyTcn
IV. VERBS IN -TH

hath: HAy, HAenib, HAyx to go
E$e3TH: Be3y, Be3euib, Be3yT to carry (by vehicle),
transport
BedH: Be Ay, BeAeuib, BeAyT to lead
(Note the change from c
to a)
HecTH: Hecy, necemb, Hecyx to carry, bear
pacTH: pacxy, pacxeuib, to grow
pacxyx
V. VERBS OF VARYING CONJUGATIONAL PATTERNS

6biTb: 6yAy, 6yAeuib, 6yAyx to be
B3HTb: B03bMy, B03bMeuib, to take
B03bMyT
AasaTb: Aaio, Aaeuib, Aaibx to give
Aaib: AaM, Aauib, Aacr, to give
AaAHM, AaAHTe, AaAyx
ecTb: eM, euub, ed, eAHM, to eat
eAHTe, eAHT
exaib: eAy, eAeuib, eayx to drive
3aH«Tb: aafiMy, 3afiMewb, to borrow
3aflMyx
nOHHTb: noiiMy, noflMeuib, to understand
nofiiwyT
nponecTb: npomy, to read through, to the end
npOHTeuib, npOHiyx
yMepexb: yiwpy, yiwpeuib, to die
yMpyx
346 nPHJIO>KEHHE II
XIV. LIST OF VERBS FROM THE TEXT WITH VARYING

PAST TENSE CONJUGATIONS
I. PERMUTATION OF M > T
1. MOHb: mot, Morjia, modio, to be able to
MOM
2. Jienb: Jier, jierjia, Jiemo, to lie down
jierjiH
II. LOSS OF C
1 ecTb: eji, ejia, ejio, ejw to eat
2. KjiacTb: KJiajr, Kjiajia, KJiaao, to place, put
KJiaJii
3. ynacTb: ynaJi, ynajia, ynajio, to fall
ynajiH
III. STEM CONSONANT (without JI) IN THE MASCULINE

1. yM'epeTb: yMep, yMepjia, to die
yMepjio, yMepJiH
IV. VERBS IN -TH

1. HiiTH (htth): ineji, rnjia, to go (on foot)
IUJIO, HUM
BblHTHI BblHieJI, BblUlJia, to go out
BblUIJIO, BblUIJIH
noAOHra: noaoinea, to go, come up to
noiiounia, noiiouuio,
nojxouniH
npHHTH: npwuieji, npmnjia, to arrive (on foot)
npHiiuio, npHuuiH
npoH30HTH: npOH3ouueji, to happen
npoH30uiJia, npOH3omj!of
np0H30UJJIH
pa3oftTHCb: pa30uiejicsi, to part
pa30iiiJiacb, pa30uni6cb,
pa30IIIJIHCb
yHTH: yineji, yunia, yuuio, to go away
yuniH
APPENDIX II 347
VERBS WITH VARYING PAST TENSE CONJUGATIONS

{continued)
2. b€3th: bc3s Be3Jia, bG3ji6? to cart, transport
Be3JIH
BbiaesTH: BbiBe3, to export, cart out
BbIBe3J10, BbIBe3JIH
npHBe3TH: npHsea* to bring (by vehicle)
npHBeajia, npHBesjiOj
npHBesjiH
3. bcctm: eeJi, Bejia, bcjio, bcjih to lead

BBecTH: BBeji, BBejia, BBejio, to lead in, introduce
BBejIH
nepesecTH: nepeBeji, nepese- to lead over, across,
jia, nepeBejio, nepeeeJiH translate
4. HecTH: Hec, Hecjia, necjio, to carry, bear
HeCJIH
BHecTu: BHec, saecjia, bhccjio, to carry in, introduce
BHeCJIH
5. padH: poc, pocjia, pocjio, to grow, develop
pOCJIH
BBipacTH: Bbipoc, Bbipocjia, to grow up, mature
BblpOCJIO, BblpOCJIH
348 riPHJIO>KEHHE II
XV. LIST OF VERBS FROM THE TEXT ARRANGED

ACCORDING TO THEIR PERFECTIVE ASPECT
FORMATION
(This list does not include all possible perfective forms.)
I. By Way of Prefixes
1. Bbl
KynaTLca: BbixynaTbCH (21)* to bathe, swim
MblTLCH: BbiMbITbCH (16) to wash
pacTH: BbipacTH (22) to grow, grow up
HHCTHTb: BblHHCTHTb (16) to clean, to make neat, tidy
2. 3A
KpanaTb: saKpHqaTb (26) to shout; P. to start shouting,
cry out
cnemHTb: sacneuiHTb (16) to hurry; P. to begin hurrying
xoTeib: saxoTeTb (16) to want to; P. to get the desire
3. HA
nncarb: HaimcaTb (16) to write
nenaraTb: Haneâiaib (30) to print
4. no
(Perfectives of this type used in the text are too numerous
to receive complete listing here)
AyTb: no^yTb (26) to blow
HCKaTb: noHCKaTb (25) to search, look for
juodoBaTbca: nojuoSoBaTbcH to admire
(21)
HpaBHTbCHI OOHpaBHTbCH to like; P. to come to like
(18)
njibiTb: nonabiTb (24) to swim
npbiraTb: nonpbiraTb (26) to jump
CTpOHTbi nOCTpOHTb (24) to build
TpedOBaTb: norpeboBaTb to demand
(27)
KynHTb: noKynaTb (16) to buy — has no in the im-
perfective and drops it in
the perfective
5. oph
rOTOBHTbI npHrOTOBHTb to prepare
(16)
6. PA3
6yjiHtb: pa36ya;HTb (23) to awaken, rouse
* Numbers in parentheses refer to lessons in which the verbs are
to be found with their key forms.
APPENDIX II 349
VERBS ARRANGED ACCORDING TO THEIR PERFECTIVE

ASPECT FORMATION (continued)
7. C
ropeib: cropeTb (27) to bum
Aejiarb: cAejiarb (16) to do
MOHbl CM04b (16) to be able to
nexb: cneTb (13) to sing
y
BHAeTb: yBHAerb (16) to see; P. catch sight of
nanaTb: ynacrb (26) to fall
cjibimaTb: ycjibiinaTb (17) to hear; P. to catch
the sound of
II. By Dropping the Vowels H or M

Ao6HparbCH: AoSpaTbcn to reach, get to
(27)
H36npaTb: H3dpaTb (30) to select, choose
yduparb: ydparb (16) to pick up, tidy up
nocbuiaTb: nocjiaTb (30) to send
III. By Droppin.g the Syllables

BA
AoOHBaTbca: aoShtbch (28) to strive for, gain, achieve
3aKpbieaTb: 3aKpbiTb (19) to close
OTAaBaTb: OTAaTb (25) to give away
OTCTaeaTb: OTeraTb (26) to fall behind
nepeAaeaTb: nepeAaxb (28) to transmit, pass on
npenoAaBaib: npenoAaTb to teach, instruct
(20)
pa3AaeaTbCH: pa3AaTbcn (21) to resound
CAasaTb: CAaxb (18) to give up
ycHAHBaTbca: ycHAHTbca to increase, grow stronger
(29)
BIB
HacHHTbiBaTb: HacuHxaTb to count
(27)
pa3pa6aTbmaTb: pa3pa6o- to work out, develop
TaTb (29)
paccKa3bmaTb: paccKa3aTb to tell, narrate
(20)
HH
HaqnHaTb: HanaTb (16) to begin
IV. By Change of Ending
1. ATb > MTb: (N.B. This involves a change from 1st to 2nd
conjugation)
Opocaxb: dpocHXb (26) to throw
H3yqaTb: n3yqMTb (20) to study; P. to master
nojiyqaxb: nojiyqHTb (18) to receive
nocxynaxb: nocTynAxb (20) to enter, enroll, act
npoAOjutcaxb: npOAOJDKwxb to continue
(20)
paspewaxb: pa3peuiHXb (17) to permit, solve
2. ATb > MTb: (Change from 1st to 2nd conjugation)
BbinojiHHXb: BbinojiHHXb (27) to fulfill, carry out
3aMeHaxb: 3SMeHHXb (29) to replace, substitute
H3MeH«Xb: H3MeHHXb (21) to change
Hacejiaxb: Hacejinxb (22) to populate, settle
06'bflCHflXb: 06’bHCHHXb (20) to explain
OTAejiaxb: OTAejiHXb (22) to separate
nposepHXb: npoBepHXb (19) to check
pacnpocTpaHHXb: pacnpo- to spread, disseminate
cTpaHHXb (30)
V. By Change of Stem and Ending

1. MATb > THTb:
BCTpeqaxb: BcrpexHXb (16) to meet
OTBeqaxb: oTBexwxb (17) to answer
2. IMATb > THTb:
npeKpam,axbCH: npeKpa- to stop, end
THXbCH (26)
npomaxbcfi: npocxHibcn (18) to say goodbye
3. JlflTb > MTb:
OTnpaBJiaxb: oxnpaBMXb (18) to send off
nonpaBJiaxb: nonpaBHXb (19) to correct
npeACTaBjiHTb: npe^cxaBHXb to introduce
(17)
4. UJATb > CHTb:
npHrjiauiaxb: npnrjiacHxb (17) to invite
5. MM ATb > ATb:
3aHHMaxb: 3aH«xb (20) to occupy
noAHHMaxbCH: noflHHXbca(21) to rise, get up
noHHMaxb: noHHXb (25) to understand
npHHHwaTb: npuHaxb (17) to accept
CHHMaTb: CHHxb (19) to take off, rent
350
6. ATb > HMTb/Hyib:

3anoMHHaTb: 3anoMHHXb to remember
(20)
KpHHaTb: KpHKHyTb (26) to shout; P. to cry out
OTAbIXaXb: OTAOXHyTb (21) to rest
noBopa^HsaTb: noBepnyxb to turn
(19)
cTHxaxb: CTHXEyxb (27) to subside, quiet down
pa3^BHraxb: pa3ABHByxb to extend, draw out
(23)
VI. By Radical Change in Stem or Use of Different Verb
1. Verbs Belonging to the Indeterminate—Determinate Group

BOAHXb: eecxH (25) to lead
BBOAHTb: BBeCTH (25) to lead in
nepeBOAHTb: nepesecTH (19) to lead across, translate
BOSHXb: BeaxH (25) to carry (by vehicle),
transport
BbIB03HTb: BbIBe3TH (25) to export
IIpHB03HTb: IIpHBe3TH (26) to bring (by vehicle), import
HOCMTb: HeCTM (25) to carry, bear
BHOCHTb: BHeCTH (25) to carry in
-e3Hcaxb: exaTb (8) to drive
npne3>KaTb: npHexaxb (16) to arrive (driving)
ye3xcaTb: yexaTb (16) to depart (driving)
XOAHTb: (o)*HXH (hath) (8) to walk, go
HaXOAHTtoCH: HaHTHCb(22) to be located
hoaxoahtb: nOAoftTH (26) to approach, come up
npHXOAHTb: npHflTH (25) to arrive (on foot)
pa3X0AHTbCfl: pa30HTHCb to go apart, part
(26)
yxoAHTb: yflTH (25) to go away
2. Special Formations
KJiacxb: nojiOHCMXb (19) to place, put
yKjiaAbmaTb: yjioxcHXb (18) to pack (one’s belongings)
cnycKaxb: cnycxHTb (26) to lower, let down
cxaHOBHXbcfl: cxaxb (21) to become
6paxb: B3HXb (18) to take
roBopHTb: CKa3axb (16) to speak; P. tell
* The “o” is inserted after consonants.
351
O
■a 3
CD
-< a > >
.00 o
.a a
$
Si o
XVI. TABLE OF DOUBLE INFINITIVE VERBS AND THEIR COMPOUNDS
fel bJO »Q
M CD E? ! *£S
c3 a
TS c3 o
£ ‘fl O o I?
o o O
5
4J
w w .a
‘S « .c3
h
05
h
O
a
P?
A
3 33 3 »C«. 3 M a *
:0» :
tj
'>»
05 n
* a> v© M -
a> S> o '■qj a3
a s as a n g S *r
3 3
JS :CD
«
HO ‘S H
H U
‘S H « £ V« « £ S. H 09
H ‘>5 a s
U
CD 0) 0)
en 05 & &
0) OJ
a s
4> » 5
tg f* v p=c
$S .© *45
1-5 is o a
ca .. w IS * s
a
h a
3 ' ^3 J £H i
g M
f-
«
V
a
CJ a a .e«
O ‘O ‘§5
© .© 2
.
a
bn
aa
b£>
s s s s
as
£ JQ rQ
a a a a
tL
o
a*
O
•a .S .3 .3 § I
£5
S
a»
Ctj
>i
sa
a)
03
®
5^
353
S
<d
>» b ^ £ £
« S: ca
ea
>>
03
es
>>
CQ
a) -4)
fas be o u o tl ^
-*5
t» Q
5 o
o
o £ cpj <£
62
P5 0)
w
H
*5
£
o
Remember that the verb followed by a verb in parenthesis is to be conjugated like the verb in parenthesis;
e.g., nofiTH (hatA): noftj^, nofifleuib, etc., like: way, HAenib, etc.
XVII. FORMATION OF PARTICIPLES: ACTIVE AND PASSIVE
354
VOCABULARIES
Arabic numerals following certain items in the vocabularies

refer to the pages where the grammatical forms (declensions, conjuga¬
tions, etc.) and explanations of these items can be found.
Verbs followed by (I) belong to the first regular conjugation;

by (II) to the second regular conjugation; irregular verbs are
followed by the keyforms or by the page where keyforms or full
conjugation are given.
Aspects are given in the Bussian-English vocabulary in pairs
except when they follow alphabetically in consecutive lines; Per-
fectives are marked P.; “no-” indicates a Perfective formed by
prefixing “no” to the Imperfective verb: Kymaxb (I): no- stands
for Kymaxb (I): nsOKyuiaxb P (I); Perfectives in “no” are not
followed by the Imperfective: riOKymaxb P (I) stands for nOKy-
liiaib P (I) : Kymaxb (I).
In the English-Bussian vocabulary the Imperfective verb is
always given first, immediately followed by the Perfective: riHcaxb,
Hanncaxb. If only one verb is given, it must be understood that only
the one in common usage is given in the text.
Nouns followed by: (m.) are masculine; (fo) or (fe) drop
these vowels in oblique cases (see Lesson 15); (o) or (e) insert these
vowels in the genitive plural (see Lesson 23) ; (pi.) have only plural
declensional forms; (dim.) are diminutive forms.
The use of parentheses around (-ch) serves to remind the student
that the verb may be used without the reflexive suffix (see Lesson 15).
Adverbs derivable from adjectives by replacing the adjectival

ending.with the adverbial ending o (without any further change!)
are not separately listed.
Other abbreviations used:
acc. = accusative gen. = genitive

adj. = adjective instr. = instrumental
adv. — adverb m. = masculine
conj. = conjunction n. = neuter
dat. — dative pi. — plural
dim. — diminutive pol. = polite
f. = feminine prep. = prepositional (locative)
fam. = familiar pron. = pronoun
> b) : final e changes to b in oblique cases of the noun (see

Lesson 15).
[Numerals are not given in the General Vocabularies. See Ap¬
pendix II, page 327.]
355
Russian-Eng-Iish Vocabulary
A 6jih3KhA, near
Bor, God
a 22, and, but, while dor&xcTBO, wealth, riches
SarycT, August GoraxcxBa, npnpoAHbie, natural
asrycTOBCKHfi, August (adj.) resources, raw materials
asroMoSfijit. (m.), car, auto dor&Tbifi, rich
aaxop, author fjor&ne, richer
S30yKa, alphabet 6ofl, battle
a3HaTCKHfl, Asiatic Sojiee 216, more
A3hb, Asia 6oAe3Hb (e), sickness, illness
aK^Jia, shark SojieH 124, sick, ill
ajiJio, hello Sojierb (I): 3a6ojiexb P (I), to be ill,
aJi(J)aBfiT, alphabet ache: to fall ill, sick
AiwepHKa, America SoAbHfiua, hospital
aMepHKaHeu (fe), American SoAbHO, painful (ly), it is painful
aMepHKaHKa (o), American ({.) 6ojibHoft, ill, sick
aMepHKHHCKHH, American (adj.) SoJibiue 216, more, bigger
aHXJififtcKHft, English (adj.) QoJibinofi, big, large
aHrJiHM&HHH 171, Englishman SoMdapAHpOBiUHK, bombing plane,
anrJiHM&HKa (o), Englishwoman gunner
AHrJiHM, England Sonxbcn (II), to be afraid of
aneJibcftH, orange 6pax 193, brother
anpejib (m.), April 6paxb: B3HXb P 359, to take
&pa«, aria 6peM« 194, burden
apMHH, army 6pnraAa, brigade
apTHJiJiepHCT, artilleryman SpHXbcn 131: no-, to shave
apxHTeKTypa, architecture 6poc4xb(cn) (I), to rush, dash
6pocnxb(cfl) P 251, to rush, dash
E 6yAHXb: pa36yAHXb P 215, to awaken,
6a6a, woman rouse
646yinKa, grandmother 6Âym.nft, future, coming, next
SaraiK, baggage 6#KBa, letter (of the alphabet)
6aHK, bank 6ynbBap, boulevard
6kmm (e), tower 6yM&ra, paper
Ceraxb (I) 239, to run 6, 6bi, see 264 f.
6§AHbift, deAeH, 6cah4, 6eAHbi, poor obiBaxb 195, to happen, visit, be
SewaTb 239, to run 6bui, SbiJia, 6blno 90, was
6e3 (gen.) 53, without 6blcxpo, quickly
6eJibift, white 6biXb 21, 116, 195, to be
6£per, shore
B
deceAa, conversation
SecnoKoficTBO, worry B (bo) 39, 45, 266 (prep, or acc.), in;
6n6JiHOTeKa, library into
dHJieT, ticket BaroH, car (railroad)
SjiaroAapAtb (II): no-, to thank Ba>KHO, important
SnaroflapH, thanks to BawHbift, important
SjiaronoA^MHO, all right, successfully Baa, bulwark
djieAHbift, pale BaM, to you
6Ji(i>Ke, nearer BaMH, with you, by you
356
RUSSUN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 357
eac, of you, you (ace.) BoeHHbift, military
Bam, Bauia, B&rne, b&uih 116, 185, BO>Kji,b (m.), leader
your, yours B03flyx, air
BBCpx up, upward B03iftTb 239, to convey, transport, cart
BBecTH P 238, 239, to introduce, lead B03M0>KH0CTb, possibility
in BoflHa, war
BBOflHTb 238, 239, to introduce, lead BoftTH (like HflTfi): BXoflHTb (like xo-
in flHTb), to enter
BJlpyr, suddenly bok3§ji, station
B63 239, conveyed, transported bojih&, wave
Be3fl6, everywhere Bonpoc, question
B63TH 239, to convey, transport, cart Bop, thief
sen, century, age BocupeceHbc, Sunday
BeJi 239, lead, conducted boctok, east
BeJiHKHfi, great, mighty BocTOMHocJiaBflHCKHft, East Slavic
eepa, faith, belief, religion BOCTOHHbifl, eastern
BeceJiHTb(cJi) (II): no-, to be merry, bot, here is (emphatic)
to make merry Bnepesn (gen.), in front, ahead
Bfccejio, gaily, merrily, joyfully BneHauieHHe, impression
BeceJibifl, gay, merry, joyful BnpoMeM, by the way, incidentally,
BecfeHHHft, spring (adj.) however, after all
bcchA spring BpeweHaMH, at times
BecHofl, in the spring BpeMR 150, 194, time
bccth 239, to conduct, lead see (pi.) 227, all, everybody
secb (m.), bch (}.), Bee (n.)} see (pi.) see (n.) 227, all, everything
226, 227, all, everyone, everybody, Bcera&, always
everything, entire, whole Bee xaKH, nevertheless, yet
Bexep (fe), wind BCJiyx, aloud
Bfenep 161, evening BCTaBBTb 122, to get up, rise
BenepHHft, evening (adj.) BCTaTb (BCT&Hy, BcxaHeuib, BcxanyT) P,
BenepoM, in the evening to get up, rise
Beinjb, thing, object BCxpexHXb(cn) P 138, to meet
B3flyMaib (I), to get the idea Bcxpeu&xb(cn) (I) 126, to meet
B3HTb P: Cpaxb 159, to take Bcio^y, everywhere
bhjx, view, appearance, form bcb (}.) 227, whole, entire, all
BHgeTb: ysHAeTb P, 138, to see: catch
bxophhk, Tuesday
sight of
BHep&, yesterday
BH3aHTftftcKHfl, Byzantine
BT>e3>K&Xb (I), to drive in, ride in
BH3aHTHfl, Byzantium
BTbfexaxb (like exaxb) P, to drive in,
BH3r, scream, shriek
ride in
BtijiKa (o), fork
Bbi 151, you
bhho, wine
BJiHflHHe, influence BbiB63XM P 238, 239, to export
BMecTe, together BbiB03^Xb 238, 239, to export
BHecifi P 238, 239, to bring in, carry BbirMflexb 215, to appear, seem
in Bbie3>KSxb (I), to drive out, ride out
BHocfiTb 238, 239, to bring in, carry Bbiexaxb* (like 6xaxb), to drive out,
in ride out
BHyn, grandson Bbiflxn (like Hgxn): Bbixoflfixb (like
(e), granddaughter xoflAxb), to go out, come out
BOgS, water BbiKynaxbcH P: Kynaxbcn (I), to bathe
BOflfixb 239, to lead, conduct thoroughly: to bathe
BOgna (o), vodka BbiMbixbcji P: MbixbCH 138, to wash
Boesaib: no- 262, to fight, wage war (thoroughly): wash (oneself)
358 RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
BbinojiHHTb P 262, to carry out, ful¬ rocTb (m.), guest

fill rocyAapcTBeHHbift, governmental,
BbinojiHtiTb (I), to carry out, fulfill state (adj.)
BbfpacTH P: pacTA 205, to grow rocyAapcTBO, government, state
BbICOKHft, high roToB 124, ready, prepared
BbicoKo, high roToBHTb 105: npHroroBHTb P 138, to
BbicTpeji, shot prepare
BbiyHHTb P: yuATb 95, 183, to teach, roTOBbifi, ready, prepared
learn thoroughly: teach, learn rp&>KAaHe 172, citizens
Bbixofl,exit rpaiKAaHAH 172, citizen (m.)
BbixoaAxb (like xoAATb): BbiflTH P rpa>KA&HKa 172 (o), citizen (woman)
(like hatA), to go out, come out rpaMMamKa, grammar
BbiHHctHTb P: HAciHTb 139, to clean, rpaHHiia, border
cleanse thoroughly: clean, cleanse FpeK, Greek
Bbirne, higher rpeuecKHft, Grecian, Greek (adj.)
rpo6, coffin
r rpoMKHfl, loud
rpoMAe, louder
ra3eia, newspaper rpynna, group
rapaw, garage rpn3b, mud
TAe 21, 40, where ryABTb: no- (I), to walk, take a walk
reHHft, genius
repofi, hero
THApocTaHUHn, water power station
A
rjiaea, head, chief Aa, yes
rci&BHbift, chief, main AaBaTb 62: AaTb P 138, to give
rJia3 161, 162, eye AaBHo, long ago
ntfdwe, deeper A Awe 275, even
rjiy66KHfi, deep Aaft, A^ftTe 207, let me, us, etc.
roBOpATb (II): CKa3&Tb P 138, to AaJieKO, far, far away
speak, say, tell AaAbHeflmeM, b, in the future, in the
roA, 150, 241, 266, year course of time, subsequently
rojiosa, head AaTb P 138: AasAxb 62, to give
rojiOA, hunger Adna, country house
rojiOAeH, hungry Aaepb, door
roJiOAHbifl, hungry (adj.) ABHweHHe, movement
rojioc 161, voice ABoe 255, two (twosome)
rojib#, golf ABOp, court (yard)
ropa, mountain AeBOHKa (e), girl
rop^3AO, comparatively , see 218 A§AyuiKa (e) 206, grandfather
ropeTb: cropeTb P 262, to burn: AeflcTBATeAbHO, really, in fact
burn up Aeuadpb (m.), December
ropjio, throat AeJiatb (I): cAeJiaTb P (I), to do,
ropoA 161, city, town make: finish, complete
ropoACKdfl, urban AeJiaTbCH (I): CAejiaTbCfl P (I), to
ropAunfl, hot happen
ropfluo, hot (ly) AeAO, business, matter, action
rocnmaAb (m.), hospital ACAOBofl, business, businesslike
rocnoA& 171, ladies and gentlemen AeHb (fe) (m.) 162, day
rocnoAAH 171, Mr., Sir AeHbrn 194, money
rocnowa, 171, lady, Mrs. AepeeeHCKHfi, rural, country (adj.)
rocTAHaa 216, drawing-room, living AepeBHH (e), village
room, parlor Aepeeo 193, wood (substance)
rocTAmma, hotel Aepwaxb 81: no-, to hold, keep hold of
RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 359
nexn 172, children Hib>KHHa, dozen
H^xcxbo, childhood nÂH 206, uncle
Aeui6B,ne, cheaper
jteuieBbifi, cheap E
HeflxeJibHocxb, activity
JHHB&H, divan, sofa Eepona, Europe
AHBH3H5I, division eBponeficKHfi, European
flnnJioM, diploma ero 116, his, its
AHpfcKTop, director ena, food
HHxfi 172, child ee 116, her, hers
fljiAHHbifl, long , e3HHXb 69, 141, to drive, go, travel
A Jin (gen.) 82, 83, for eJiKa (o), Christmas tree
ecjiH, if
flHeiw, in the daytime
HO (gen.), until, before, up to ecxb 41, there is
nobHB&Tbcfl (I), to strive for, gain, ecxb 40: no-; ebeexb P, to eat: have
achieve a bite; eat up, devour
HodHpaxbcn 262, to reach, get to dxaxb 47: no-, to ride, drive
HofifiTbcn P 273, to strive for (suc¬ euib! eat!
cessfully), gain, achieve eme, still, yet, more
HofipfixbCfl P 262, to reach, get to
HoSpbift, good, kind
)K
HOBdjien 124, pleased, satisfied >KaAb, it’s a pity, too bad
flOBOJiBHbiii, pleased, satisfied >i<ap, fever
HorHfixb P 225, to catch up with >KdpKHft, hot
HoroH^Tb 225, to catch up with >KdpKO, hot, it is hot
flovKHJifrBbift, rainy iKapnoe, roast meat
HOHfHb (rn.), rain inapne, hotter
HOKJI&H, report >KH3Tb 81, 82: nono)Kfl£xb P, to wait
HOKTop 161, doctor (for)
fldJiro, long, for a long time >Ke 275, but, then
HOJiee, longer (of time) JKejidxb (I): no-, to wish, want,
HdJi>KeH 162, must, have to desire
HdJiJiap, dollar >KeJid3Hbltt, iron (adj.)
HoJibiue, longer wejixbifl, yellow
HOM 161, house >KeH&, wife
HoMa, at home wendx (Ha) (m.) 215, married
HOMoft, homeward, home HfeHflxbcn (Ha) 215, to get married
Hopdra, road, way >KdHiH,HHa, woman
Hdporo, expensively, dearly >Kecxb, tin
noporoft, expensive, dear >KHBdfi, live (ly), alive
HOpoHte, more expensive, dearer HiHBOTHbift MHp fauna
HO cbhh&hhh, goodbye ikOhkhH, liquid, fluid, thin
flocT&TQHHO, enough, sufficiently thinner, more diluted
HOHb 215, daughter >KH3Hb, life
HpOBd, firewood lKliTeAb (m.), inhabitant, dweller
Hp6>kkh (e), droshki (carriage) >KHXb 46: no-, to live
>i<ypHfiji, periodical
Hpyr 194, friend
Hpyr HP^ra 241, one another
Hpyrdft, other (one)
3
H^Maib (I): no-, to think
nyTb (I): no-, to blow 3a (acc. or instr.) 89, 97, behind, after
HûiHbift, stifling 3a6on6Tb P (I): SojieTb (I), to fall ill,
AbiM, smoke sick: to be ill, sick
3a6biB§Tb (I), to forget 3flpaBCTByftTe, how are you, how do

3a6biTb (3ad^y, sadyneuib, 3a6£- you do, hello
flyx) P, to forget 3e.xeHbift, green, verdant
3aB0fl, plant, factory 3HMa, winter
3&BTpa, tomorrow 3HMHHft, winter (adj.)
3&BTpaK, breakfast 3HMoft, in winter
3&BTpaKaTb (I): no-, to have break¬ 3HaKOMHTb 149: no-, to acquaint
fast, lunch 3HaK0Mbifi, acquaintance, familiar
3an<m, problem (adj.)
san&T (cojiHua), sunset 3HaMeHHTbift, famous
3aKpHM^rb P 139, 140: KpHiaxb (II), 3HaMfi 194, flag, standard
to cry out, begin crying: to shout, 3HaHHe, knowledge
cry 3HaTb (I): y3H&Tb P, to know, find out
3aKpbisaTb (I), to close 3HaqeHne, meaning, importance
3aKpbiTb P 170, to close 36jioto, gold
3aKycKa (o), hors d’oeuvre 36na, zone
3aMeHHTb P (II), to substitute,
replace H
3aMeH^Tb (I), to substitute, replace
3aMenaTejibHbift, remarkable
h 22, and
3&My>KeM (3a) 215, married
nrpdTb (I): no-, to play
3aHMM&Tb (cn) (I): 3aHHTb (cn) P 183, Hflen, idea
to occupy, study, to be busy HflrA 46, 90: noftiA P, to go on foot
3&hht 124, busy H3 82, 83, 255 (gen.), from, out of
3aH«THe, occupation, pursuit H30&, hut
3aHHToft, busy H35npaTb (I), to select, elect
3aH6Tb (cn) P 183: 3aHHMaTb (cn) (I), H36paTb P (like SpaTb), to select,
to occupy, study, to be busy elect
3anaji, west H3B§CTHblfi, famous
3anaAHbift, western H3B034HK, cabman
3anoMHH&Tb (I), to remember, memo¬ H3MeHHTb (ch) P 295, to alter, change
rize H3MeHflTb (cn) (I), to alter, change
3anoMHHTb P (II), to remember, H3yqaTb (I), to learn, study
memorize H3yqfiTb P 183, to master
3apa6aTbieaTb (I), to earn h ... H 276, both .., and
3apa6oTaTb P (I), to earn Ajih, or
Ajih ... Ajih 276, either ... or
3ap§Hee, beforehand, in advance
hm, to them, by him
3acneiuHTb P (II): cneuifixb (II), to
HMeHne, estate *
hurry, rush
HMeHHO, just
3axeM, after that
hmctb (I) 117, to have
3aT0, on the other hand, but then
Amh, with them, by them
3axoTeib P 139: xotAtb 76, 82, to get HMnepdrop, emperor
the desire: want, wish
Amh 150, 194, name
3Be3fl&, star HH>KeH§p, engineer
3B0HHTB 95: no-, to ring, call (by HH0r.uA, sometimes
phone)
HHocxpaHeu (fe), foreigner
3bohok (fo), bell, (telephone) ring HHOCTpdHHbift, foreign
3ByK, sound
HHTepAcHbift; HHTepAcHo, interesting;
3A^HHe, building it is interesting
3Aecb, here HHTepecoBATb (ca) 238: no-, to in¬
3AopoB 124, healthy, well terest (oneself) in, have interest
3A0pdBbift, healthy, well for
3flopoBbe, health HcK&tb: no- 238, to search, look for
eussian-english vocabulary 361
HCTopHK, historian KOpoTKiffi 124, short

HCTOpHfl, story, history, affair Koxopbift, which (one); (relative
hctohhhk, source pronoun, see 284 f)
hk, their, theirs 116; them Kotjte, coffee
July
h to Jib (m.), Kpafi, country, region
HtOHb (m.), June Kpac&BHua, beautiful woman
KpacABbffi, beautiful
K KpScHbift, red
Kpacoxa, beauty
K (ko) (dat.) 61, 255, to
KpfenKHfi, strong firm
na>Kflbitt, every, each
Kperme, stronger, firmer
Ka3aTbcfl: no- 152, to seem, appear
KpfecJio, armchair
Kan, how
KpecTbBHHH 171, farmer, peasant
KaK 6£jxo, as if
KpHK, shout, cry
KandS, which, what kind, sort of
KpfiKHyTb P (I) 139, 140, to cry out
KaH&Ji, canal
KpH4<iTb 251, to shout, call
KaHitKyjibi, vacations
KpoMe, besides, except (for) (gen.)
KaHOHaAU, cannonade
KpdMe Toro, besides (that)
Kannx&H, captain
Kpyr, circle
Kan^cxa, cabbage KpyrdM, round, round about
KapaHA&ui 162, pencil
KptOK, hook
K&pTa, map; K&pxbi, playing cards
kto 124, who (relative pronoun, see
KaynyKOHoc, rubber tree
284 f)
K&uia, porridge
KyA&, whereto, where
K&inejib (fe) (ni.), cough
Ky3H6u, blacksmith
KBapTHpa, apartment
Kyjibtypa, culture
KHJioMeTp, kilometer
KyjibiypHbifi, cultured, cultural
khh6 34, movie
KynajibHfl (e), bathing place, bath
KJiaHtiTbCJi (I): noKJioHifiiTbCH P 193,
house
to bow, give regards to
Kynaxbcfl (I): BbtKynaxbcH P (I), to
KJiacc, class
bathe; bathe thoroughly
KJiacTb 46: noJioKfixb P 170, to put,
Kyneu (fe), merchant
place
Kynrtxb P 138: noKyn&xb (I), to buy,
KJiMMaT, climate
purchase
KJiy6, club
KycdK (fo), piece
KHnra, book
K^XHfl (o), kitchen
KHniKecTBO, principality
K^rnaxb 40: no-, to eat: have a bite
Koeep (fe), rug, carpet
KorA& 40 when §
u6)Ka, leather, skin
JI
Koft (src Kanoft) JiiBKa (o), shop, bench
KoJiAnecTBO, quantity, number Ji^Mna, lamp
kojixo3, collective farm Jter, lay down
KOMaHAHp, commander JierKHfi, light, easy
KoMHaxa, room jierKO, easy, easily, lightly, it is easy
KOHeu (fe), end Jiente, lighter, easier
KOHeHHo, of course Jieja, (e > b), ice
Komopa, office JieHtaxb 67: no-, to lie, recline
KOHuepT, concert JieK&pcxBO, medicine
KOHUdib (I), to end, finish Jiec 161, forest, woods
KdHMHTb P(II), to end, finish Jieco-cxenb, forest and grassland
KOpaOJtb (m.), ship Jiexaxb 239, to fly
KopaOJiecTpoeHHe, shipbuilding jiexexb 239, to fly
Kop66ua (o), box JiexHHft, summer (ad).)
362 RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABTJLAKY
JieTo, summer Mexpo 34, subway

jieroM, in the summer Mex, fur, pelt
JieqfiTb(cn) 122: no-, to treat, be MexanHK, mechanic
treated MHJiHUHOHep, policeman
Jienb (jinry, Jinweuib, JinryT) P: jio- mAjiocth npocHM, welcome (in)
HcATbcn (II), to lie down MHJibift, dear, nice
jihm6h, lemon mAjib, mile
jihct 193, leaf (of a tree), sheet, mhmo (gen.), past
piece (of paper) MHHa, mine, mortar shell
JiHTepaiypa, literature MHHyc, minus
jiHTepaiypHbift, literary MHHyia, minute
jihuo, face MMp, world, peace
Jio6 (fo), forehead MJiazuue, younger
jiobko, adroitly mMauihA, younger, youngest, junior
JiOflKa (o), boat MHe, to me
jio>KATbcn (II): Jienb (see Jienb) P, MHoro (gen.) 53, 164, much
to lie down MHoroysaiKSeMbift, much respected
jiowKa (e), spoon mhoiS, mh6k>, with me, by me
Jiomaab, horse Mor 90, could, was able
Ji^nnie, better MdjiHbift, fashionable
jnoSHMbift, beloved, favorite Moe 27, 116, 185, my, mine
JHOSAxb 88, 163: no-, to love MomeT 6bixb, perhaps
jno6oB§Tbcfl 193: no-, to admire Mo>khq 162, possible, permitted
jnbflH 172, people mo A 27, 116, 185, my, mine
jwr! lie down! MOJiOfle>Kb, youth, young people
MOJioflofl, young
M
MoJiojiocTb, youth
MaB30Ji6ft, mausoleum MOJiowe, younger
Mara3HH, store mojioko, milk
Mail, May Mop^Jib, morals, ethics
MfiJieHbKHfi, little, small Mope, sea
mSjio (gen.) 53, 164, little MOpo3, frost
M&JIbHHK, boy MocKBa, Moscow
MaMa, mother mockobckhA, Moscow (adj.)
MapT, March moct 150, bridge
Macjio, butter MOMb 55, 90: CMOMb P 138, to be able,
Maipoc, sailor know how
MaTb 215, mother mob 116, my, mine
MamftHa, machine, engine My>K 194, husband
Men, honey My>KHK, peasant
MeflHUHHCKHft, medical (adj.) MyjKBHHa 205, man
MeflJieHHo, slowly My3eft, museum
Meflb, copper M^3biKa, music
M§iKjiy (instr.) 68, between, among M^na, torment, suffering
MeHee 216, less Myg&, flour, meal
M&Hbme 216, less, smaller Mbi 151, we
MeHH, of me, me (acc.) Mb'uio, soap
MepTBbift, dead MbICJIb, thought
MecTO, place, room, space MbiTb (cb) 122: Bb'iMbiTb (cb) P 138, to
Mecnu 150, 162, month wash (oneself): wash thoroughly
MeTajui, metal MBPKHft, Soft
mcto/i, method mbco, meat
H HeMKa (o), German woman
Heo6xonAMO, necessarily
Ha (acc. or prep.) 39, 45, 46, on
HeoOxoflHMbili, necessary, unavoidable
HaSmoflaTeJib (m.), observer
HenocHjibHO, beyond one’s strength
Han, (instr.) 68, above, over
Henp&BMJibHbifi, incorrect
Haflo 162, it is necessary, needed
HenpHHTHO, unpleasant, it is un¬
Ha3an, back, backward (s)
pleasant
HaftTHCb P: HaxoflHTbca 205, to be
HecKoJibKO, some
located, found
HecMoipw Ha 276, in spite of
HaKOHeu, finally
HecoMH^HHO, undoubtedly, certainly
HaKObiB&Tb (I), to cover, set (the
Hecxfi: hqcAxb 239, 240, to carry,
table)
wear
HaKpbiTb (HawpoK), HaKpdeuib, HaKpo-
HecuScxHbift, unhappy
iot) 213, to cover, set (the table)
Hex 22, 52, no, there is no
HaJieBO, to the left
HexepneHHe, impatience
HaM, to us
HeyflodHO, uncomfortable, it is un¬
h4mh, with us, by us
comfortable
Hannc^Tb P: nwc&xb 52, to write
Hefjixb, oil
HanpaBJi^HHe, direction
hh, as prefix+ neg. particle,see 263
Hanp&BO, to the right
HH6£flb, as suffix see 262, 263
HanpacHO, in vain
Hft>Ke, lower
HanpHMep, for example
HH3KHft, low
HanpOTHB, opposite (with gen.), on
HHKorfl&, never
the contrary (adv.) 276
hhkxo 35, 263, nobody
Hapdfl, people, nation
HHKyaa, nowhere
HapdflHbift, popular, national
hh ... hh 276, neither ... nor
Hapflfl# c, side by side, equally im¬
HHuero 35, nothing; it does not mat¬
portant
ter; alright; quite well
Hac, of us, us (acc.)
HfimHft, beggar
HacejieHHe, population
ho, but
nacejifixb P (II), to populate, settle
HoBoexb, news
HaceJifiTb (I), to populate, settle
HdBbift, new
h&cmopk (head), cold
Hor£, foot, leg
(Ha) chhxAxb P (I), to count
ho>k 162, knife
(Ha) CHHTbIBaTb (I), to count
HOMep, number, room (in a hotel)
Ha^HHbift, scientific
hoc, nose
Haxoflfiibcfli: HafixAcb P 205, to be
Hocfi^biHHK, porter
located, found
Hocftxb 239, 240: HecxA P, to carry,
HaUHOH&JibHbifi, national
wear
Han&Jio, beginning (noun)
Houb, night
Han^JibHHK (mx£6a), (staif) com¬
HOHbK), at night
mander
HodSpb (m.), November
Han&Tb (ch) P 131, 205, to begin
HpaBHXbcH: no-, 163, to please, like:
HauHH&xb (ca) (I), to begin
get to like
Haul 185, our, ours
Hy! well!
He 21, 22, not
h^hcho 162, it is necessary, needed
h£6q, sky
Hioxaxb (I): no-, to smell, sniff
HeBQ3M0>KH0, impossible
Heu&BHo, recently
O
HenfcjiH, week
He3ae(«cHMocTb, independence o, 06, 66o (prep.), about, concerning
HeKOTOpbie, some 66a 252, both (m.)
HeJib3^ 162, forbidden 66e 252, both (f.)
Heweu (fe), German o66fl, dinner
oCeflaTb (I): no-, to dine, have opwecip, orchestra

dinner oceHHHfi, autumnal
odecneneH, guaranteed 6ceHb, fall, autumn
oSematb (I): no-, to promise 6ceHMO, in the fall
oOwfla, insult ocMaTpHBaib (I), to inspect,
odmaeMbifi, inhabitable examine, sightsee
ofiflauo, cloud ociwoxpexb P 171, to inspect,
6QaacTb, region, province examine, sightsee
66pa3, image, figure, manner ocofieHHO, especially
o6pa3QBaHHe, education ox (gen.) 82, 83, 255, from
oQpa30BaHHbift, educated oxBex, answer
ofipaxHO, back oxBeTHTb P 149, to answer
oScTaHOBKa (o), furniture, situation oxBenaxb (I) 61, to answer
oSyBb, footwear oxAaaaxb 238, to give away
oSmecTBO, society oxAaxb P 238, to give away
66mnft, general, common oxAeJieHHe, department
odbiKHOBeHHO, usually oxAejiHXb P (II), to separate
o6T>effHH6HHe, unification OTAejibHbift, separate
o6T>JiBJieHHe, announcement oxAejinxb (I), to separate
o6T»ncHeHHe, explanation oxAOXHyxb P 193, to rest
o6T>ncHHTb P 183, to explain oxAbix, rest, relaxation
o6T>BCH»Tb (I), to explain oxAbix^Tb (I), to rest
6boiu,h, vegetables oxeu, (te), father
orjiajibiBaTbcH (1), to look around, OTKpblB&Xb (I): OXKpblXb P 138, to
back open
orJitiHyTbCH P (I), to look around, oxKpbixne, discovery
back oxKpbixbifi, open
orpoMHbift, huge, big oxKpbixb P 138: oxKpbiaaxb (I), to
ofleeaTb (c») 131, to dress, put on open
QfleTb(cfl) P 131, to dress, put on oxKÂa, from where, whence
QflHH, one oxAHHfixbca (I), to differ, stand out
OAHHaKOBbifi, same, identical QXJiHufixbCH P (II), to differ, stand
OAHa>KAbi, once (upon a time) out
oahSko 276, however, yet oxnpaBHXb P 160, to send off
OHfHA&HHe, expectation, waiting oxnpaBJiaxb (I), to send off
o3epo 184, lake oxcxaB&xb 251, to fall behind, lag
OKfiHMHBaTb (I): OKOHHHXb P (II), oxcxfiHb! leave (one) alone! fall
to finish behind!
okh6 (o), window oxcxaxb P 251, to fall (lag) behind
okoao (gen.) 82, 83, beside, about, dxMecxBO, patronymic
next to 0XT>e3A, departure
OKOHHHTb P (II): OKclHHHBaXb (I), to oueefiAHO, evidently
finish oueHb, very
OKpaHHa, outskirts ouepeAb, queue, (one’s) turn
OKT^fipb (m.), October
oh, oHa, oh6 27, 150, he, she, it n
ohh 151, they
on43AbmaTb (I): on03Aaxb P (I), to niAaxb (I): yn&cxb P 251, to fall
be late (down)
6nepa, opera nanex, package
OHHc^HHe, description n&Jieu, (te), finger
ono3Aa?b P (I): on&3AbiBaib (I), to naJiy6a, deck
be late najibxo 34, coat
oiiHTb, again nannpdca, cigarette
Eifipa, pair njnoc, plus

napK, park no (dat.) 255, along, on, according to
napoxog, steamship no-aMepHKSHCKH, American, in
napyc, sail American
riacxa, Easter; n&cxa, Easter cake no-anrjiHftcKH, English, in English
(of curds, eggs, etc.) no6jiaroAapHib P (II), to thank
napHeHT, patient no6pHTbcn P 131, to shave
nee&u, (fe), singer noaap, cook
neeAua, singer (f.) nosepH^Tb P 171: noBop&HHBaxb (I>
neAarorHHecKHft, pedagogical to turn
neft! drink! noBeceJiHTbcn P (II), to be merry
nepebift, first noaoeBaTb P 262, to battle, wage war
nepesectH P 171, to move, transfer, noBOpaMHeaib (I): noeepHtfxb P 171,
translate to turn
nepesog, translation noBopoT, turn
nepeBOAHTb 171, to move, transfer, noroBopnxb P (II), to speak, chat
translate noroga, weather
nepeeoAHHK, translator noryjiHXb P (I), to take a walk
nepeg (instr.) 68, before, in front of nog (ace. or instr.) 89, 97, under
nepegaeaxb 273, to transmit, pass on nogepwaxb P (like gepw&xb), to hold
nepegSxb P 273, to transmit, pass on nogJie (gen.) 255, near, alongside
nepegHHH 216, entrance hall, ante¬ nogHHMaxbca 193, to arise, get up
room, vestibule, lobby nognaxue, raising, lifting
nepec&gKa (o), change (of trains) nognnxbCH P 193, to arise, get up
nepfiog, period nogowgaxb (conjugated like >Kgaxb)
nepo 193, pen, feather 81, 82, to wait (a little)
necHH (e), song nogofixH P: nogxogfixb 251, to ap¬
neTb 105: cneib P, to sing proach, come up to
nexbxa, infantry nogpyra, girl friend
neq&xaxb (!): Hanen&xaxb P (1), to nog^MaTb P (I), to think
nogyxb P (I), to blow
print
nogxogrtxh: nogoftTH P 251, to ap¬
neuiKOM, on foot
proach, come up to
nHKH^K, picnic
nogHHHeHHbift, subordinate
nwp6r, cake, pie
noe3g 161, train
nHCthreJib (m..), writer, author
noe3gKa, trip
nHdhrb 52: Hanncaxb P 131, to write
nHCbMeHHOCTb, literature, written no>najiyiicxa, please, if you please
noweip, conflagration, fire
language
no>Kegaxb P (I), to wish, desire
nncbMb (e), letter
nHTb 60: no-; Bbinnib P, to drink: nowHB^xb (I), to get along, live
drink a little; completely no3aBxpaKaxb P (I), to breakfast,
nji&Baxb 239: no-, to swim, float lunch
no3agii (gen.), behind
nji^Mn 194, flame
nJian, plan no3BogHXb P (II), to permit, allow
nJiaHT&uHH, plantation no3B0JiHXb P (I), to permit, allow
ng&xbe, dress no3BOHAxb P (II), to ring, call (by
nJieMH 194, tribe phone)
njiend 184, shoulder no3gHHH, n63gHo, late
miogopogHbift, fertile no3HaKOMHxb (ch) P 149, to acquaint,
ruioxrtHa, dam present, get acquainted
hjioxo, badly, it is bad noftxH P (like Hgxn), to go (on foot)
njioxdf), bad noK^, while, as long as
ngomagb, square noKa3atb P 138, to show
njibiTb 225, 239, to swim, float noKa3biBaxb (I), to show
nOKJIOHHTbCH P 193; KJiaHHTbCH (I), to nonpbiraxb (I), to jump

bow, greet, give regards to nopa, time, it is time
noKynaib (I): Kyirnxb P 138, to buy, nopa6oxaxb P (I), to work (a little)
purchase nopT, port, harbor
noK^nna (o), purchase no-pj'ccKH, Russian, in Russian
noKûiaTb (I), to have a bite, eat a nopyneHHe, commission
little nocHfleTb P, to sit
noji 150, floor nocjiaxb P 295: nocbiJiaxb (I), to send
nojie, field nocJie (gen.) 53, after, afterward
nojieJKaib P (11), to lie, recline noc.rc63.HHft, last
nojieMfixbcfl P (11), to treat, be nocMOTpetb P 160, to look, glance
treated nocn&xb P 88, to sleep
noJiHxnnecKHft, political nocx&BHTb (like cx&BHXb) P, to place,
noJiHU.Hfl, police put
nojiHOBOflHbifi, deep nocxapaxbca P (I), to strive, try
ndJiHbift, full, complete, stout nocxeJib, bed
rrojioBHHa, half nocxoHHHbifi, continuous, constant
nojio>KeHHe, situation, position, office nocxpOHXb P (II), to build
nojiovKftxb P 170: KJiacxb 46, to put, nocxyn&Tb (I), to act, enter, enroll,
place enlist
noJiOH 124, full nocxynuxb P 183, to act, enter, en¬
noJiOTHo, linen roll, enlist
noJiyH&xb (I), to receive, get nocyaa, dishes
nojiynAxb P 160, to receive, get nocbiJi^Tb (I): nouiarb P 295, to send
nojufcyHxa, half a pound tioxoji6k (to), ceiling
noJiMacS, half an hour rtoxoM, afterward, then
nojnofiHXb P (like JHofiHXb), to get to noxoMy Hxo, because
like, love noxp66oBaxb P, to demand
noJifoSoBaxhcn P 193, to admire no-4>paHuy3CKH, French, in French
noMHHXb (II), to remember noxo>KHfi Ha, resembling, like
noMHOiKeHHoe Ha, multiplied by n64Ba, ground, soil
noMoraxb 88, to help noHeMy, why
noMOHb P (like MOHb), to help noMHtaxb (1), to read (a little)
noHaxjoKbcn! pull yourself together! noHxa, post office, mail
try hard! nonxft, almost
noHeneJibHHK, Monday noH^BCXBOBaxb P, to feel
HOHHM&xb (I): noHftib P 238, to HOST, poet
understand nooxoMy 276, therefore, because of
noHpaBHXbcn P 159, 163, to please, that
like npaa 124, right, correct
noHHXb P 238: noHHM&Tb (I), to un¬ npaBfla, truth; to be sure (con).)
derstand npaBHJibHbift, npaBHJibHO, right, cor¬
nonaaaib 238, to get to, catch rect
nonacxb P, to get to, catch npaaftTejibcxso, government
nonjiSeaXb (I), to swim np&Bbift, right (direction, side)
nonjibixb P 225, to swim, set sail npa3flHHK, holiday, feast
nonpaBHXb (cs) P 171, to get well, npeflMex, subject, object
improve npeflcea&TeJib (m.), president
nonpaBJiaxb (cs) (I), to get well, npejxcx^BHTb P 149, to introduce
improve npeflCTaBjinxb (I), to introduce
nonpewHeiwy, as before, formerly npewHHfi, former
nonpocrtxb P 149, to ask a favor, npe3Hfl,6Hx, president
beg npeKpacHbifi, beautiful, splendid, fine
npeKpaifiibCfl P 252, to stop, end npoe3>K&Xb (I), to drive, ride through

npeKpam&TbCH (I), to stop, end npoexaxb (like exaTb), to drive, ride
npenojiaB&Tb (I), to teach, instruct through
npenoflaTb P 183, to teach, instruct npoH3BoAcxBO, production
npw (prep.) 255, in, in the presence npoH3oftxH P 262, to happen, take
of, at place
npHBe3xA P 251, to bring, convey npQHcxoAHTb 262, to happen, take
npnB03HTb 251, to bring convey place
npHrjiaciiTb P 149, to invite npoflxH P (like hatA) : npoxoAAxb
npurJiaiuaib (I), to invite (like xoAHTb), to go through, pass
npHrJiaiueHHe, invitation npoH3HxejibHbift, piercing
npnrOTdBHTb P 138: roxdBHXb 138, to npocHTb: no- 149, to ask a favor, beg
prepare npocHyxbcn P (I): npocbinAxbcn (I),
npne3fl, arrival to awaken
npne3>K&Tb (I): npnexaxb (like npocxA! npocTHie! excuse me, please!
fexaxb) P, to arrive (by vehicle) ripocTfixb (npomy, npocxAiiib, npo-
npweM, reception ctAt) P: npom^Tb (I), to forgive
npHexaxb P 139: npHe3>K^Tb (I), to npocxtfxbCH P 160: npomîbcn (I), to
arrive (by vehicle) say goodbye
npH3HaB&xb 283, to acknowledge, npocxo, simple, simply
admit npoexoft, simple
npH3H^Xb (like 3Haxb), to acknowl¬ npocxox£, simplicity
edge, admit npocx^vKeHHbifl, afflicted with cold
npHftxft P (like haxh) : npHXOflfixb npocbiniTbcfl (I): npocHyxbcn P (I),
(like xoflHTb), to arrive (on foot) to awaken
npHKa3&Hne, order, command npoijjeccop 161, professor
npHMep, example npoxoAHTb (like xoAAxb): npoftTH P
npHHHM^xb (I), to receive, accept (like haxA), to go, through, pass
npHHBTb P 149, to receive, accept npox6>KHfl, passer-by
npHpojia, nature npopfccc, process
npHpdflHoe dor&TCTBO, raw materials, nponfecxb P; npoMHT^Xb P 175, to read
natural resources (through)
npHCJi&xb P (npHuuiib, npmujieuib, npduiJibift, past, last
npHiuJubi), to send npom,£ft! goodbye!
npHCbiJiîb (I), to send npomarb (I): npocxAxb (see npo-
npimft P (like hatA), to arrive, come cxwxb) P, to forgive
npHXOAfiTb (like xoAAxb), to arrive, npom&xbCH (I): npocxAxbcn P 160, to
come say goodbye
npHMiiHa, cause, reason npbiraxb (I), to leap, jump, dive
npH^xeJib (m.), friend, comrade npbirHyxb P 252, to leap, jump, dive
npH^THbift; npnfiTHO, pleasant; it is npAiwo, straight, straightaway
pleasant nycKaft, nycTb 208, let
npoSHB&Tb (I), to strike (the hour) nycxbiHH, desert
npoCATb (like 6mb) P, to strike nyib (m.), path, route, voyage
(the hour) nyuina (e), cannon, gun
np66Ka (o), stopper, cork nb6ca, drama, play
nfixepo 255, five, fivesome
npoBfcpnxb P 171, to check
nfixHHua, Friday
npoBepAxb (I), to check
nporp^MMa, program
P
npoAaBfeu, (te), salesman, merchant
npOAaBiiiApa, saleslady paSoxa, work
npoAOJiHi^Tb (I), to continue pa66xaib (I): no-, to work
npOAojpKHTb P 183, to continue pa66mift 216, worker, working (adj.)
pSCcTBo, slavery paccKa3axb P 183, to tell, narrate

paBHHHa, plain paccKa3bieaxb (I), to tell, narrate
paBHO, same, equal to pacxfi: BbipacxH P 205, to grow: grow
p&BHbifl, equal up
paBHneTCfl, is equal to pacxHxeJibHbifi MHp, flora
pan, happy pacxoUHXbcfl: pa3oftxAcb P 252, to
p&flHO 34, radio part, go apart, scatter
pSflOCTHbifl, happy, merry pe&JibHOexb, reality
p&flocib, joy, happiness peSeHOK (fo) 172, child
pa3 162, one, once, time pe6axa 172, lads, fellows, youngsters
pa36yjx6ib P: SyflHTb, to awaken, peaKHft; peflKo, rare; rarely
rouse pe3KHfi, sharp
pa3ros6p, conversation, talk pe3yjibxax, result
pa3roBopHbift, conversational, pewa, river
colloquial peJiHrHfl, religion
pa3flaB&Tbcn 193, to resound pecxopaH, restaurant
pa3fliTbca P 193, to resound pe<J)6pMa, reform
pa3flBHraTb (I), to push apart, penb, speech
extend, open peuiHieJibHbift, firm, resolute
pa3flBfiHyTb P 215, to push apart, Pobho, even, exactly
extend, open po^HHa, native country
pa3fleJieHHoe Ha, divided by poflAxbcfl P 238: po>Kflaxbcn (I), to
pa3flejiHTb P (II), to divide be born
pa3flejiHTb (I), to divide poflHoft, native
pa3JiHHHbiil, different PoHiflecTBd, Christmas
pa3HOo6pfi3Hbifl, various, varied, dif¬ poJib, role
ferent poM^H, novel
p&3Hbift, different, various Pocchh, Russia
pa3ofttHCb P: pacxoafixbcn 252, to pox (to) 150, mouth
part, go apart, scatter ponJib (m.), piano
pa30pB&Tbcfl P 262: pa3pbiB&Tbc» (I), pySAxb (py6jiib, pyfinuib, p£6ht): no-,
to burst, explode to chop
pa3pa6aTbiBaxb (I), to work out, pyfijib (m.), ruble
develop pyidi, hand
pa3pa6oTaTb P (I), to work, out, pyccKHft, a Russian, Russian (adj.)
develop pibMKa (o), wine glass
pa3peiuaTb (1), to permit, solve paflOM, alongside, next to
pa3peuiHTb P 149, to permit, solve
pa3pbiBaTbca (I): pa30pB&xbcn P 262, C
to burst, explode
c (co), (insir.) 68, with (gen.) 97,
paftoH AodbWH, region of extraction from off
paftdH oQpaSoxKH, region of process¬ caa 150, garden
ing
caafixbca 125: cecxb (cfiay, cfiaeuib,
p&HHHft, pano, early caayx) P, to sit down
paHbiue, earlier, formerly caM, caMa, caMo, c£mh 206, oneself
pacnnc&HHe, timetable, schedule (myself, yourself, etc.)
pacnpofl^m, sale caMOBap, samovar
pacnpocTpaHenne, dissemination caMOJiex, airplane
pacnpocTpaHftTb P (II), to spread, c&Mbifi 225, the most
disseminate can or, boot
pacnpocTpaHHTb (I), to spread, cSxap, sugar
disseminate c&xapHbift, sugar (adj.)
paccK&3, story, tale, narrative CBe>KHfl, fresh
RUSSTAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 369
cBeKJia, beet CKopbifl, quick

cseuio, light, bright CKprtnKa (o), violin
CBeTJibifi, light (ad}.) CKyqaib (I): no-, to be bored
CBHgaHHe, meeting CKy^Hbifl, boring, dull, tedious
CBOboAHbifi, free CJiaBa, fame
cBofi, CBoe, cboh, cboh 185, one’s own cjiasHHHH, Slav
cbatoh, holy, saint cjiaBHHCKHfl, Slavic
cropeTb P: ropeTb 262, to burn up: cJiagKHfi, sweet
burn cJiagKoe, dessert, sweets
cAaB&Tb 160, to give up, check, rent cJi&me, sweeter
caaBaTbcn (for conjugation .see ga- CJiegyiomHH, following, coming
Baib), to be for rent, to surrender cjihuikom, too, excessively
cgaib P 160, to give up, check, rent cjiobo, word
cgaTbcn (like gaTb) P, to surrender, cji6>KHbifl, complicated
be for rent cjiy>K0a (e), work, job
CABJiaib P 174 (I): AejiaTb (I), to cJiyâfi, occasion
finish, complete cJiymatb (I): no-, to listen to
cflejiaTbcn P (I): gejiaTbcn (I), to CJibiuiaTb (II): ycjibiuiaTb P (II), to
happen, to become hear: to catch the sound of
ce6e, ceGw, codon 206, oneself (my¬ CMeptb, death
self, yourself, etc.) civiecb, mixture
ceeep, north CMeuiHoft, funny, comical
ceeepHbifi, northern cMearbcH 125 (I): no- (I), to laugh
cerogHfi, today CMOTpeTb 139: no-, to look: take a
cettM^c, now, just a minute look
cefiu&c >i<e, immediately cMOMb P 138, 174: mohb 55, 90, to be
cewpeT^piua (}.), secretary able, to know how
cewpetapb (m.), secretary cHapng, shell
ceiwecrp, semester cHaâJia, at first
ceMfl 194, seed CHer, snow
ceMbw, family cHHMaib (I), to take off, rent
ceno, hay cHoiueHHe, dealings, relation
ceHTnfipb (m.), September cHHTb P 171, to take off, rent
cepnue (e), heart co0Hp&Tb (ca) (I), to gather, collect,
cepefipo, silver meet, prepare for
cep66pflHbift, silver (ad}.) co6paHHe, meeting, gathering,
cepbe3Hbifi, serious collection
cecTpd (pi. cecxpbi), sister coopatb (cn) P 215, to gather, col¬
cectb (engy, cAgemb, cfiAyt) P: ca- lect, meet, prepare for
AHTbcn 125, to sit down co6biTHe, event
cnr&pa, cigar coBepmeHHO, completely, entirely,
CHgeTb 131: no-, to sit quite
cHJia, strenght coBeTCKHfi, Soviet (ad}.)
CHJibHbift, strong coBpeiweHHbifi, contemporary
cfiHHft, blue cobccm, completely, entirely, quite
CHCT&Ma, system coAepMHne, content
CKa3^Tb P 138: roBopnTb (II), to tell, co3AaHHe, creation
speak, say cojia&t 162, soldier
cKarepTb, tablecloth coAHue 150, 184, sun
CKdJibKO (gen.) 53, 164, how much, coJib, salt
how many cooSmeHne, communication, message
CKopo, soon, quickly coceA, pi: coceAH, coceAefl, etc.,
cKopoctb, speed neighbor
370 RUSSIAN-ENGLTSH VOCABULARY
cocegka (o), neighbor (f.) cTpaHa, country

coceflHHft, neighboring cTpaHAiia, page
COCIHT^Th P (I), tO COUnt cTpAHHbifl, peculiar, strange
cothh, a hundred CTpax, fear
cnacfifio, thank you CTpenna (o), pointer, hour, minute
cnaTb 88: no-, to sleep hand (of a clock, watch)
cnepB&, at first CTpdrHft, strict
cneTb P: nerb 105, to sing CTpdHTb (II): no- 225, to build
cneunajiAcT, specialist CTpOK&, line
cneuuATb (II): 3acneniHTb P (II), to CTyaeHT (m.), student
hurry, to rush: begin to hurry, CTyjieHTKa (}.), student
rush ciyji 193, chair
criHHa, back cyfidoTa, Saturday
cnoKoftHbifi, calm, quiet (adj.) cyAbfia, fate
cnoKoficTBne, calm, quiet cyMacuiÂumfi, madman, crazy one
cnopHTb (II): no-, to argue, dispute cyMexb P 174: yMeTb (I), to be able,
cnopT, sport know how
cnpaiiiHBaxb (I), to ask cyHA^K, trunk
cnpocftib P 139, to ask cyn, soup
cnyck&Tb (I), to let down, lower c^tkh (o) (/>/.), day and night,
cnycTHTb P 252, to let down, lower 24 hours
cpaweHHe, battle cyuib, landmass, dry land
cpa3y, at once cnena, stage, scene
cpeaa, Wednesday cuacTJiHBbifi, lucky, happy
cpeilH (gen.), amidst, in the midst of cu&cTbe, happiness
cpeacTBO, means CbiH 194, son
cTABHTb (cTaBjno, CT<iBHUJb, ct&bht) : cwp, cheese
no-, to place, put ctecTb P 174: ecTb 40, to eat (up),
CTasb! place! put! devour; eat
cTanaH, glass cfOAa, here, hither
cTaHOBHTbea: CTatb P 193, 195, to be¬ CHAb! sit down!
come, place oneself
cTaHU.ua, station T
dapaTbca (I): no-, to strive, try
crapee, older Tan, so, thus
tAkhcc, also, likewise, too
crapAHHwfi, ancient, old
Taw (we) . .. kak 218, as ... as
dapuie, older, elder
Takofi, such a one
CTapuinfl, elder, eldest, senior
xakcfi, taxi
CTapbift, old
Taw, there
daTb P: CTaHOBHTbCH 193, 195, to be¬
TBofi, TBoe, tboA 116, 185, your, yours
come, place oneself
TBOpMecTBO, creative power, creations
ctchA, wall
xeaxp, theatre
dHxaTb (I), to abate, quiet down, xe6e, to you
subside
ie6A, of you, you (ace.)
CTHXHyib P 262, to abate, quiet down, TeJieBfi30p, television set
subside
reJierpdMMa, telegram
CTOHTb (II), tO COSt Tejied)OH, telephone
ctoji, table TejieÔHficT, telephone operator
CTOJiHUa, capital TeMHo, dark
CTOJiOBaa 216, dining room TeMHbifi, dark
cTOJibKO (gen.), so much, so many xeMnepaiypa, fever, temperature
ctopohA, side TeHHHc, tennis
cToatb 225: no-, to stand xenepb, now
xenjid, warm, it is warm yAHBJieHHe, astonishment, surprise

TenJibifl, warm yAofiHbifi 124, comfortable, convenient
TeppmopHH, territory yAOBOJibcTBHe, pleasure
xecHO, close, confined ye3>b:aTb (I), to depart, leave
xecHOX&, closeness y§xaxb P (like exaTb), to depart,
xexn, aunt leave
TeneHHe, current, stream y>Ke, already
thxhS, THUie, quiet, quieter ^>we, narrower
to ... to, now ... now £>khh, supper
xofioft, T06010, with you, by you ^>KHHaxb (I): no- (I), to have (eat)
TOBapHiu, 162, comrade supper
Torjra, then y3Knfi, narrow
To>Ke, also, too y3HaBaxb (y3Haio, y3Haeuib, y3HaioT),
xoJin£, crowd to find out
TOJiCTbifi, thick yaHaxb P (1): 3Haxb (I), to find out:
TOJime, thicker know
TOJibKO, only yfiTH P: yxoAHTb 238, to leave, go
TOMy' Ha3afl, ago away
toh, tone yKJi&AbiaaTb (I): yjio>KHTb P 160, to
TOHKwfi, thin pack (ones things)
TOHbiue, thinner yjiHua, street
TOproBJin, trade yjio>KHTb P: yKJiaAbiBaTb (1) 160, to
Toproseu, (fe), tradesman pack (one’s things)
TOprdBbift, trade (adj.) yiweH 124, clever
tot, Ta, to 27, 195, that yMep, yMepjia, he, she died
TpaMB&ft, streetcar yiwepexb P 238: yMHp&xb (I), to die
TpedoBaTb 262: no-, to demand yMfeTb (I) 55: cyM§xb P 174 (like
Tpoe 255, threesome yMPrb), to be able, know how
xpocTHHK, cane yMHpaTb (1): yMepexb P 238, to die
xpyfiKa (o), pipe yMHbiH 124, clever
Tpyjx, labor, toil yHHBepcaJibHbifii, general, universal
TpyAHbifi; TpyAHO, difficult; it is dif¬ yHHBepcnxeT, university
ficult yn&cTb P 251: naziaxb (I), to fall
xpflnKa (o), rag ypoeeHb (m,), level, niveau
xyflA there, thither ypow&fl, harvest
xypHCT, tourist ypoK, lesson
xyT, here ycfijiHBaxbCH (I), to increase, grow
Ty<J)Jifl (e), slipper stronger, more intense
Tbi 150, you (thou) ycMJiHTbCH P (II), to increase, grow
xbiJiOBoft, (of the) rear stronger, more intense
TbMa, darkness ycJidBne, condition, agreement
TK)K, bale ycjib'nuaxb P 149: cJib'nuaxb (I), to
T«M(eJio, heavily catch the sound of: hear
TmKejibift, heavy, burdensome ycn6x, success
ycx&Jibift, tired
y ycxpawBaTb (I), to construct, make,
y (gen.) 53, at, near arrange
yfinpaTb (I), to clean, tidy, remove ycxpoHTb P 252, to construct, make,
y6p&Xb P 139, to clean, tidy, remove arrange
yBepeHHbift, firm, confident ycxpoflcxBo, organization
yBtiaexb P: BfiAeTb 138, to catch >hrpo, morning
sight of: see $brpoM, in the morning
yroji (fo) 150, corner yxo 184, ear
372 RUSSIAN-ENOLISH VOCABULARY
yxo^Tb: yftTH P 238, to leave xot£ (6bi) 276, (even) though

yneSHHK, textbook xpHCTHaHCKHft, Christian
yneHHe, studying, teaching xpHCinaHcTBO, Christianity
yqehHK, student Xphctoc, Christ
yneHHua, girl student xyAoft, thin, skinny
yqeHwfi 216, scholar, learned (adj.) xyine, worse
yqrtTeJib (m.) 161, teacher
yq^TeJibHHUa, lady teacher IX
yqrtTb (ch) 95, 183: BbiyMHTbcfl, to
teach, learn: to teach, learn u,apb (m.), Tsar, emperor
thoroughly UBeT 172, color
yiOTHbiR, cozy, comfortable UBeTOK (to) 172, flower
pejibifl, whole, entire
4> UeJib, aim, goal
U.6H&, price
4>&6pHKa, factory ueHTp, center
$aKyjibi6T, faculty ueHTp&JibHbifi, central
family name uepKOBb (to), church
$eBpajib (m.), February
$R3HKa, physics 4
4>hji6co(|>, philosopher
qafi, tea
(l)HJioc6(J)cKHft, philosophical
MaflHHK, teapot
4>6pMa, form, genre
Mac, hour
4>OTorpa(J)HH, photograph
HacTbifi, frequent
4>paHUHH, France
MacTb, part
4>paHu^>KeHKa (o), French woman
qacbi (pi.), watch, clock
4>paHuy3, Frenchman
qauiKa (e), cup
4>paHU^3CKHfl, French (adj.)
q^me, more frequent (ly)
4>poHT, front
Heft, Mbe, Mbfl 185, whose
4>pyKTOBbifl can, orchard
HejiOBeK 172, human being, man,
4>yHT, pound
person
MejioBeMecTBO, humanity
X
ueM 218, than
xapaKTep, character MeM ... TeM ... 218, the . .. the ...
xiimhk chemist MeMoaaH, suitcase
xhmhh, chemistry Mepe3 (ace.) 89, over, across, through
XJieQ, bread qepHbift, black
xjioiiok, cotton MecTb. honor
xofl,fiTb 69, 141, to walk, go, attend MeTB^pr, Thursday
X03hhh, proprietor, master, landlord MCTBepo 255, foursome
X03aflKa, hostess, landlady MeTBepTb, quarter
xo3hRctbo, housekeeping, household, mhcjio (e), number, date
economy MHCTbift, clean, pure
xojioaho, cold HAciHTb 139: Bb'iMHCTHTb P, to clean:
xojioAHbift, cold clean thoroughly
XOpOUIHfl, good MHT^Tb (1): no-, to read
xopouio, good, well, it is well, good MJien, member
XOTeTb 76, 82: 3axoieTb 139, to wish, mto 27, 35, 124, what,that
want: get the desire ht66u, in order to
xoxeTbcfl 152, to feel like, have a m^bctbo feeling
desire M^BCTBOBaTb (cfl) 122: no-, to feel
XOTb 276, though (oneself)
III 3
SKsaMeH, examination
war, step, pace
SKOHdMHKa, economics
w&nxa (o), cap
3JieKTpHMecKnft, electric (al)
wap, ball, globe
9JieKTpocxaHUHH, electrical station
weJi, WJia, wjio, went 3HeprHfl, energy
weJiK, silk anoxa, epoch
wepcTb, wool apa, era
wfccTepo 255, six 3T&>k 162, floor, story
wfipe, broader, wider aTOT, aTa, 3to 27, 194, this
WHpoKHft, broad, wide; wnpoKo (adj.)
10
WKOJia, school
Ktr, south
WJiftna, hat lowHbift, southern
WTa6, headquarters K>Mop, humor
WT^SHbift, staff (adj.) lOMOpHciAHecKHfi, humorous
WTaT, state K)pHfl,H4ecKHft, juridical
wyM, noise wpHCT, jurist, lawyer
wyMHbifl, noisy
n
a 150, I
m 66jioko 184, apple
A3b'iK, tongue, language
w,6n«a (o), sliver j'wopb (in.), anchor
w.eTKa (o), brush AHB^pb (m.), January
1UH, cabbage soup £cHbift, clear
Eng]ish-Russian Vocabulary
A all, Becb, bch, Bee 226, 227
allow, no3BOJi«xb (I), no3BOJmxb (II)
abate, cxnxaxb (I), cxfixHyxb 262
all right, ji&aho, 6jiaronojiynHO
able, to be, MO'tb 55, CMOKb 138;
almost, nonxn
'yMeTb (I), cyMeTb 174; able, was,
along, no (dat.) 225; along with, c,
Mor 90
co (instr.) 68
about, o, 06, 66o (prep.); okojio
alongside, pHAOM, noAJie 255
(gen.) 82, 83
aloud, BCJiyx
above, HaA (instr.) 68
alphabet, a36yKa, aJi(j)aBitx
accept, npi-iHHMaTb, npHHHXb 149
already, y>Ke
according to, no (dat.) 255
alright, xopouio, Himero
accurate, aKKypaxHbift
also, xaKM<e, x6>i<e 218
ache, 6ojiexb (I)
alter, H3MCHHXb(CH) (I), H3MeHHXb(Cfl)
achieve, AofiHBaxbcn, Ao6ftTbCH 273
295
acknowledge, npH3HaBaxb 295, npn-
although, xoxh
3HaTb (I)
always, BcerAa
acquaint (someone), 3HaKOMHXb, no-
America, AMepima
3HaKOMHTb 149
American (person), aMepiiKaHeu
acquaintance, 3HaK0Mbift
(m.), aMepiiKHHKa (f.)
acquainted, 3HaKOMbifi
American, aMepHKaHCKiiii; in Ameri¬
acquainted, to get, 3HaKOMHXbCfl, no-
can, no-aMepHKancKH
3HaKOMHTbCfl 149
amidst, cpean (gen.)
across, lxepe3 (acc.) 89
among, Me>i<Ay (instr.) 68; cpeAi'i
act, nocxynaxh, nocxynAxb 183
(gen.)
action, AeJio
amusing, CMemHofi, CMeurno
activity, fleaxeJibHOCXb
anchor, HKopb (m.)
adjoining, cocenHHft
ancient, cxapuHHbifl
admire, Jiio6oBaxbCii, nojno6oBaxbcn
and, a 22, h, Aa
193
animatedly, okhbjiShho
admit, npn3HaBaxb 295, npH3Haxb (I)
another, one, Apyr Apyra 241
adroit, JidBKHii, jiobko
announcement, o6"bflBJieHHe
advance, in, 3ap&Hee
answer, oxBeT
affair, AeJio, ncxopm
answer, oxBeniixb 61, oTBexuxb 149
afflicted with a cold, npocxyiKenHbiii
anteroom, nepeAHHH 216
afraid of, to be, doaxbCH (II) (gen.)
any (one), KaKoft-Jinbo, KaKoft-mibyAb
after, nocjie (gen.) 53; noxoM, nocjie;
262, 263
3a (acc. t instr.) 89, 97
after all, BnponeM 276 anything, ^x6-Hn6yAb 262, 263
after that, 3axeM apartment, KBapxfipa
appeal, npH3b'rB
afterward, nox6M, nocJie
again, onaxb appear, BbirAHAexb 215; Ka3axbcfl 152,
age, bck noKa3axbca
ago, xoMy Ha3aA appearance, aiia
agreement, ycJiOBHe apple, aSjtoko 184
ahead, BnepeAH (gen.) approach, noAXOAHXb, noAottrii 251
aim, pejib approximately, okojio (gen.) 82, 83
air, B03ayx architecture, apXHxeaxypa
airplane, caMOJiex argue, cnopnxb, nocnopHTb (II)
alive, »cHBoil aria, &pHH
374
ENGLJSII-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY 375
arise, noAHiiMaTbcn, noAHqxbCH 193 battle, cpa>KeHiie; 6oft; BoeBaxb, no-

armchair, KpecJio BoeBaxb 262
army, apMim be, 6bixb 21, 116; SbiBaTb 195
around, KpyroM beautiful, KpaciiBbift, npeKpacHbift
arrange, ycTpanBaTb, ycxpoHTb 252 beauty, xpacoxa
arrival, npne3A beauty (woman), KpacaBHga
arrive, npuxojp'iTb, npuxTH 238; npu- because, noxoMy qxo
e3>i<dTb, npnexaxb 138. because of that, nosxoMy 276
artilleryman, apTHJiJiepncx become, cxaHOBfiXbca 193, cxaxb 195
as ... as, xaK .. . KaK ... 218 bed, nocTeab
as before, nonpeucHeMy beet, CBexaa
Asia, A3hh before, nepeg (instr.) 68; ao (gen.)
Asiatic, aaiiaxcKiifi before, as, nonpe>KHeMy
as if, kuk 6yATO beforehand, 3apaHee
ask (a favor), npocnxb, nonpocwxb beg, npocHTb, nonpocHXb 149
149 beggar, hhiuhK
ask (a question), cnpauumaxb, cnpo- begin, Ham-iHaxb, Hauaxb 131; Hami-
cfixb 139 Haxbcq, naqaxbcq 205
as long as, noxa begin to hurry, 3acnemnxb (II) P
astonishment, yAUBaenne beginning, nauano
as though, kqk 6fn.ro behind, 3a (prep, or acc.) 89, 97; no-
at, y (gen.) 53; npH (prep.) 255 3aAi'i (gen.)
at first, cua’-iajia, cnepsa belief, sepa
at home, goMa bell, 3BOHOK (f0)
at night, ho a bio beloved, Aoporofi, jiioOtiMbift
at once, cpa3y bench jiaBKa (o)
attend, xo/u'ixb 69, 141 besides (s), okojio (gen.) 82, 83
at times, BpeMeHaMH besides (that), KpoMe (xoro)
better, jiymue
at the side of, noAJie (gen.) 255
between, Me>Kgy (instr.) 68
August, aarycT
beyond one’s strength, HenocxuibHO
August, (adj.) aBrycTOBCKHft
big, Oojibmoii; orpoMHbiil, orpoMeH
aunt, xexfl
bigger, SoJibiue 216
author, nucaxeab (m.); aBXop black, uepHbifi
auto, aBTOMoStuib (m.) blacksmith, Ky3Heg
autumn, ocenb blow, Ayxb, noAyxb (I)
autumnal, ocenHiifl blue, CHHi-ift
awaken, SygHXb, pa36ygHTb (to wake boat, JiOAKa (o)
someone) 215; npocbmaxbcn (1), bombardier, 6oM6apAiipoBiUHK
npocnyxbcfl (I) (to awake) bombing plane (bomber), 6oM6apAH-
PQBIJUHK
B book, KHHra
boot, canor
back, cnnHa
border, rpamma
back, Ha3§A; o6paxno
bored, to be, CKyqaib (I), nocKyqaxb
bad (ly), njioxofi, mioxo
(I)
baggage, 6ara>i< boring, cxyMHbiii, CKyqHO
bale, xk)K born, to be, po>KA&xbCfl„ poAHTbcq 238
ball, map both, 66a (m. t n.), 66e (f.) 252
bank, 6aHK both and, h.h 276
bathe, Kyn&xbCfl, noKynaxbcn (I); boulevard, 6yjibB&p
BbiKynaxbCH (I) bow, KJiaHHXbcfl, noKJioHHXbca 193
bathhouse (pool), KynijibHH (e) box, Kopofixa (o)
376 ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
boy, MajibMHK cannonade, KaHona.ua

bread, xjie6 cap, manna (0)
breakfast, 3aBTpaK capital, CTOJiHpa
breakfast, 3a.BTpaKaTb, no3^BTpaKaTi> captain, Karnix&H
0) car, aBTOMoSnjib (m.)
bridge, moct 150 car (railroad), BaroH
brief, kopotkhH 124 cards, playing, KapTbi
brigade, 6pnraaa carpet, kob&p (fe)
bright (ly), CBexjibift, CBeTJio carry, HocnTb, Hecut 239, 240
bring (by vehicle), npnB03HTb, npn- carry in, BHOcfiTb, bhccth 238, 239
Be3TH 251 carry out, BbinoaHHTb, BbinojiHHTb 262
bring in, bhochtb, bhccth 238, 239, cart, B03i'iTb, Be3TH 239
BBOfliiTb, BBecTH 238, 239 catch (get to), nonaaaxb, nonacTb 238
broad (ly), umpoKiifi, unipoKo catch sight of, yBixaeTb 138
broader, rnnpe catch the sound of, ycjibimaxb 142
brother, 6paT 193 catch up, jjoroHsfrb, floraaTb 225
brow, Jio6 (fo) cause, npiiUHHa
brush, meraa (o) ceiling, noxoJioK (fo)
build, crpoiiTb, nocTpouTb (11) center, ueHTp
building, 3jiaHne central, ueHTpaJibHbift
bulwark, Baa century, BeK
burden, 6peMH 194 certainly, hccomhchho
burdensome, Tawejibiii, Tmejio chair, CTyji 193
burn, ropeTb, cropexb 262 change, H3MeHHTb(ch) (I), H3MC-
burst, pa3pbiBarbCft, pasopeaTbcn 262 HHTb(Cfl) 295
business, aeao change (of trains), nepecaaKa (o)
business (like), aejiOBofi channel, KanaJi
busy, 3aHflToft, 33hht 124 character, xap&KTep
busy oneself with, 3aHUMaTbca, 3a- chat, have a, noroBOpfub 134
HHTbca 183 cheap (ly), jxeuiSBbift, geuieBO
but, a 22; ho; we 275 cheaper, aeweBJie
butter, Macao check, citaBaTb, cgaxb (b 6ara>ic) 160;
but then, 3aio nposepHTb, nposepHTb 171
buy, noKynaTb, KymiTb 138 cheese, cwp
by the way (conj.), BnpoueM 276, chemist, xhmhk
Me way npo^HM chemistry, xhmhh
Byzantine, Bii3aHTnficKiifi chief (person), niaB&
Byzantium, BH3aHTi'i« chief, niaBHbift
child, pe6e.HOK (to) 172; ahth 172
C childhood, gexcTBO
children, u6th 172
cabbage, Kanycxa
chop, pyGHTb (py6jiio, py6nrb, pySflr)
cabbage soup, mu
Christ, Xphctoc
cabman, H3B03UHK
Christian, xpHCTHaHCKHfl
cake, nupor
Christianity, xpHCTHaHCTBO
call (by phone), 3B0HHTb, no3B0HHTi>
Christmas, PoMCfleciB6
(II) 95
Christmas tree, ejixa (o)
■call out, KpHâTb, noKpH'iaTb (II): church, uepKOBb (fo)
KpHKHyTb 251 cigar, CHrapa
•calm, cnoKoftHbift; cnoKoftcxBiie cigarette, nanupoca
canal, KaHaji circle, Kpyr
cane, tpocthhk citizen (m.), rpawjiaHHH 172
cannon, nyuiKa (e) citizen (f.), rpaat^HKa (o) 172
ENGLISII-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY 377
citizens, rpa>KAane 172 confined, xecHo

city, ropoA 161; ropOACKoft (adj.) conflagration, no>Kap
class (room), KAacc constant, nocxosHHbifi
clean, q/icxiiTb, BbhiiCTiixb 139; y6n- consume, cbecxb 174
paTb (I), yfipaib 139; mhctwA construct, cxpoirrb, nocxponxb (11);
(adj.) ycxpoHXb 252
cleanse, mhcthtb, Bbmiicxiixb 139 contemporary, coBpeMeHHbifi
clear, acHbifi content, aoboach, AOBOAbHbiii; co-
clever (ly), yMHbitt, yMHO 124 Aep>KaHue
climate, kJiHMOT continue, npoAoaiKaxb, npoAOA>KHXb
clock, nacbi (pi.) 183
close, tccho continuous, nocxoHHHbifi
close, 3aKpbIB3Tb, 3aKpbITb 170 contrary, on the, HanpoxHB 276
closeness, xecHOxa contrive, cyMexb 174
cloud, odjiaKO convenient, yAohHuii, yAodeH, yAoS^
club, KAy6 ho 124
coat, najibxo 34 conversation, fieceAa, pa3roBop
coffee, Kocjje conversational, pa3roBopHbift
coffin, rpo6 converse with, roBopHTb, noroBOpHTb
cold (ly), xojioAHbift, xojioaho (U)
cold (head), hacmopk convey (by vehicle), B03HXb, Be3TH
collect, co6npaxb(ca) (I), co6paTb(ca) 239; npHB03HXb, npHBe3XH 251
215 cook, noBap
collection, codpaHne copper, MeAb
collective farm, kojixo3 cork, ripoSKa (o)
colloquial, pa3roBopHbift corner, yroa (fo) 150
color, UBex 172 correct, npaBHAbHbiii, npaB 124
come with its characteristic prefixes cost, CXOUXb (II)
(bxoahtb, BbixoAHTb etc.). See 245, cotton, XAonoK
246 cough, Kamejib (te) (m.)
comfortable, yAoOHbift, yAodeH; could, Mor, 90
yioTHbift, yroxHo count, HacaxiTbiBaxb, Hacuiixaxb (I);
comical, CMeumoft cauxaib (I)
coming, dynyiuvit, cAeAyiouuifi count (together), cocMiixbioaxb, co-
command, npiiKa3&HHe cmixaxb (I)
commander, KOMaHAnp; (staff), na- country, xpaft, cxpaHa; AepeBeHCKHfi
qaAbHHK country house, Aaâ
commission, nopyaemie court (yard), abop
common, 66in,nft cover, HaKpbiBaTb (I), HaKpbiTb 213
communication, coo6in,eHHe cozy, yioxHbift
complete (full), noAHUft crazy (one), cyMacuieAUiHft
complete, cgeAaxb (1) creation(s), C03AaHne, TBopqecxBo
completely, coBepuieHHO, cobccm creative power, TBOpuecxBO
complicated, caoacho crowd, xojina
comrade, xoBcipmu, 162; npHHTeAb cry, KpHK; KpHuaTb, noKpuuaxb; KpHK-
(m,) Hyib 139, 140, 251
concerning, o, 06, 66o (prep.) cry out, 3aKpimxb 251
concert, KOHqepx cultural, KyjibxypHbift
condition, ycaoBue culture, Kyabxypa
conduct, BOAHTb, Becxfi 239 cultured, KyabxypHbitt
conducted, Be a, Beaa, Beao, bcah cup, HauiKa
confident, yBepeHHbifi current, xeueHne
D dispute, cnopnxb, nocnopuTb (II)

disseminate, pacnpocxpaHHTb (I),
dam, njioTHHa pacnpocxpaHHXb (II)
dark (Iy), TeMHbiH, TeMHO dissemination, pacnpocxpaHeHHe
darkness, ibMa distant, gajieico
dash, 6pocaxbca, SpocHibca 251 district, odjiacxb
date, uhcjio (e) divan, ahb4h
daughter, goub 215 dive, npbiraxb, npMrnyxb 252
day, neHb (fe) (m.) 123, 162 divide, pa3geJMTb (I), pa3gejinxb (II)
day and night, cy-rKii (o) (pi.) divided by, pa3,nejieHHoe iia
daytime, in the, ahcm division, ahbh3hh
dead, MepTBbift do, flejiaxb, cAeJiaxb (I)
dealings, oxnoiueHHe, CHOineHHe doctor, aokxop 161
dear (one), AOporoS, MHJibifl dollar, jioajiap
dearer, AopOJKe, MHJiee door, gBepb
death, CMepxb dozen, Akwcuna
December, AexaSpb (m.) drama, nbeca
deck, nauiy6a drawing-room, rocxnHan 216
deep (ly), rjiy6oKHfi, rJiySoKo, nonHo- dress, naatbe
BOAHblft dress (oneself), get dressed, ojeB&Tb-
deeper, rJiy6>Ke cs (I), ojjexbcff 131
demand, xpedoBaxb, noxpe6oBaTb 262 drink, rmxb 60, nonnxb; drink! neft!
depart, ye3>KaTb (I), yexaib (like drink up, completely, Bbinuxb (like
exaxb) mixb)
department, OTêjieHHe drive, exaxb 47, noexaxb; e3AHXb 69,
departure, orbe3A 141
description, omicaHHe drive with its characteristic prefixes
desert, nycTbiHH (B'bexaxb, BbiexaTb, etc.). See 245,
desire, >KeJiaxb, mmejiaxb (I)
246
desire, to get the, 3axoxexb 139
droshki (carriage), apohckh (e)
desire, to have, xoxeTbca 152
dull, cKyuHbift
dessert, cjiagxoe
develop, pa3pa6axbmaxb (I), pa3pa-
E
6oxaxb (I)
devour, cicyiiiaTb (I), cx>ecxb (like each, Kaacgbift
ecrb) ear, yxo 184
die, yMHpatb, yxiepexb 238 earlier, paHbuie
differ, oxjumaxbca (I), OTJiHUHXbca early, paHHtift, paHO
(II) earn, 3apa6axbiBaTb, 3apa6oxaxb (I)
different, pa3Hbift, pa3JiHHHbift easier, Jierue
difficult, xpyjiHbift, Tpy^Ho east, bocxok
diluted, more, >KHxce Easter, Tlacxa
dine, oSejiaxb, noo6e,naxb (I) Easter cake, nacxa
dining room, cxoJioBaa 216 eastern, BoexouHbifi
dinner, o6eg East Slavic, BOCXOUHOCJiaBHHCKHft
dinner, to have, odegaxb, nooSegaxb easy, JierKHft, JierKO
(I) eat, ecxb 40, cnbecxb 174; Kyuiatb 40,
diploma, amijiom cxyuiaxb (I)
direction, HanpaBJieHHe eat! euib!
director, jpipeKxop economics, SKOHOMHKa
discovery, OTKpbixue economy, xo3bHcxbo
disease, 6oae3Hb educated, o6pa30BaHHbift
dishes, nocy.ua education, o6pa30Banne
ENGLISII-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY 379
either ... or, iijih ... ftjin 276 exactly, pobho, aKKyp&XHO
elder, cxapmntt examination, 3K3aMeH
eldest, CTapumii examine, ocMaxpHBaxb (I), ocMOXpeTb
elect, ii36npaTb (1), ii36paxb (like 171
6paib) example, npHMep; for example na-
electrical, aJieKXpHqecKiift npuMep
electrical station, sJieKXpocxaHLma excellent, npeKpacHbifi
emperor, uapb (m.), iiMnepaxop except for, xpoMe
empire, rocy/uipCTBo excessive, cjihuikom
end, Koneu (t) excuse me, please! npocxft! npocxnxe!
end, KOHMaTb(ch) (1), KOHqnxb(cfl) exit, Bbixoji
(11); npeKpauuiTb(cfl), npeKpaxuxb expectation, OHUiflamie
(ch) 252 expensive (ly), jjoporoii, floporo
energy, ancpniH expensive, more, flopoate
engine, Mamnna explain, oS'bacHHXb, o6x>flCHHXb 183
engineer, HHweHep explanation, o6x>HCHeHne
England, AHraiiH explode, pa3pbiBaxbc«, pa3opoaxbca
English, aHnifiCKnii; no-aurJiHCKH 262
Englishman, aHnniqamiH 171 export, BbiB03i'ixb, BbiBe3xn 238, 239
Englishwoman, aurjuiqaHKa (o) extend, pa3jiBiiraxb, pa3^BHHyxb 215
enlist, nocxynaxb (b apMino), nocxy- eye, r;ia3 161, 162
ririxb 183
enough, jntocxaxoqHo F
enroll, nocxynaxb (na yHiiBepcixrex),
face, jimuo
nocxynnxb 183
enter, BXo/piXb, BOtixi'i (like xoAixrb, factory, 3aBOA, $a6pHKa
faculty, cfraKyjibxex
iijxxA) ; nocxynaxb, nocxynnxb 183
faith, Bepa, pejuirnfl
entire, ueabiii, Becb, bch, see 226, 227
fall (autumn), oceHb; oceHHnft (adj.)
entirely, cobc£m, coBepindnuo
fall, in the, oceHbio
entrance hall, nepe/inafl 216
fall, naflaxb, yn&cxb 251
epoch, anoxa
fall behind, oicxaBaxb, oxcxaxb 251
equal, pauHwfi
fall ill, sick, 3a6ojiexb (I)
equal in importance, Hap«Ay c, co
fame, caaBa
equal, is pauHnexca
familiar, 3HaKOMbift
equal to, paano
family, ceMbfl
era, spa
family name, (JjaMHJiHflt
erect, crponxb, nocxp6iixb (II)
famous, 3HaMeHHXbifl; h3b6cxhuK
especially, oco6eiino
far, far away, aaaeKO (ox t gen.)
estate, iiMenne
farmer, KpecxhHHHH 171
ethics, MopaJib
fashionable, MojiHbift
Europe, Eupona
fate, cyjtbSa
European, eBponeftcKHft
father, oxen (fe)
even, pobho (exactly); fla>Ke 275,
fauna, mchboxhwK Mnp
XOXb
favor, ask a, npocnxb, nonpocnxb 194
evening, Beqep 161; Beqepuiift (adj.)
favorite, JiroSuMbifl
evening, in the, BeqepOM
fear, cxpax
event, coSbixne
even though, xoxa 6bi fear, 6oHXbCH, nogoaxbCfl (II)
everybody, Bee 226, 227 feast, npS3AHHK
every (one), Bee 226, 227 feather, nepo 193
everything, Bee 226, 227 February, (JjeBpaab (m.)
everywhere, Be3,n6, bcjo^Y feel (oneself), qyBCXBOBaxb(cfl), no-
evidently, oqeBftjmo qyBCXBOBaxb(ca) 122
feeling, h^bctbo former, npe>KHiifi; formerly, as, no

feel like, xoxeTbCH 152 npe>KHeMy
fellows, pefiaxa 172 formerly, paHbuie
fertile, xuiOAopoAHbifi found, to be, HaxoAiVrbCfl, HafrrHCb
fever, Kap; xextriepaxypa 205
few, MaJio 164 foursome (four), nexsepo 255
few, a, HecKoJibKO France, <J>paHUHfi
field, none free, CBoOoAHbift
fight, BoeBaTb, noBoesatb 262 French, 4)paHuy3CKiiiB
figure, 66pa3 French, in, no-cJjpaHU^CKH
finally, HaKOHep Frenchman, 4>panuy3
find out, y3HasaTb, y3Haxb (I) French woman, c^paHUjOKeHica (o)
fine, npeKpacHbiit frequent, qacxbift
finger, najieu (fe) frequent (ly), more, name
finish, KOHqaTb (I), KOHAHXb (II); fresh, cbokhS
OKaHnireaTb, oKOHmxxb 183; cênaTb Friday, naxHima
(I) friend, Apyr 194; npimejib (m.)
fire, oroHb; noacap friend (girl), noApyra
firewood, gpoBa from, U3 (gen.) 82, 83; ox (gen.) 82,
firm(ly), KpenKiifl, Kpernco; peum- 83, 255; c, co (gen.) 97
TenbHbiii; yB^peHHbift front, (Jjponx
firmer, Kpenqe front, in (of), snepeAii (gen.); nepeA
first, nepBbift (instr.) 68
first, at, cHaqana; cnepsa frost, MOp03
fivesome (five), nnxepo 255 fulfill, BbinoJiHATb, BbinoAHiiXb 262
flag, 3H3MH 194 full, noAHbifi, noaOH 124
flame, ruiaMfl 194 funny, CMeuiHofi
float, njibiTb 225; rmaBaxb 239 fur, Mex
floor, non 150; sxa>K furniture, oScxanoBKa (o)
flora, pacTHTejibHbift MHp future (one), 6yAymnfi
flour, Myna future, in the, b AaAbHeftmeM
flower, UBetOK (fo) 172
fluid, jkhakiiK G
fly, Aexaxb, Aexexb 239
following, cjienyioijuiiii gaily, Beceao
food, ena gain, AoOiiBiaxbCA, AoOirrbCfl 273
foot, nora garage, rapa>K
foot, on, neuiKOM garden, caA 150
footwear, 66yBb gate, Bopoxa (pi.)
for, ajia (gen.) 82, 83; 3a (acc.) 97; gather, codnpaxb(cH), co6p&xb(cfl)
(in time expressions, 108, 109) 215
forbidden, it is, Hejib3fl 162 gathering, cofipauHe
forehead, jio6 (fo)
gay, BeceAbifi
foreign, HHOCTpaHHbiii
gay, be, Becejinxbcn, noBecejiHXbca
foreigner, HHocxpaHeu;
forest, nee 161 (II)
general, ymiBepcaAbHbift, ofimwft
for example, HanpuMep
forget, 3adbiBaTb (I), 3a6biTb (3a6y- genius, remit!
AY, 3a6ygeiiib, 3a6ynyr) German (masc.), neMeu, (fe)
forgive, npomaxb (I), npocxHXb (npo- German (fem.), HeMxa (o)
my, npOCTHUib, IXpOCTHX) German, in, no-HeMepKH
fork, BHJIKa (o) Germany, TepMaHHA
form, 4>opMa, bha get, noAyqSxb, noAyqftxb 160
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY 381
get along, no)KHBaxb (1), no>KHTb P greet, KJiaHHTbcfl, noKJTOHHXbca 193

(like iKiiTb) ground, n6ima
get the desire, 3axoTeib (like xoxexb) group, rpynna
get the idea, B3AyMaxb (1) grow (become), cxaHOBHXbca, exaxb
get to, ôSnpaTbCfl, flo6paibc« 262; 193, 175; pacxir, Bbipacxn 205
nonagaTb, nonacxb 238 grow stronger, ycHJiHBaxbca (I), ycfi-
get to like, love, nojnoSfixb (like jihd- juixbca (II)
6lIXb) gruel, Kama
get to like, nonpaBUTbca 159, 163 guaranteed, oQecneqen
get up, BCTQBaTb 122, BCTaTb (BCtaHy, guest, rocxb (m.)
BdaHeuib, BcxaHyx); noAHHMaxbca, gun, nymxa (e)
nOAHHTbCH 193 gunner, 6oM6apAiip6BiniiK
get well, nonpaBJiHXbca (I), nonpa-
BUTbCH 171 H
girl, ACBOBKa (e)
girl friend, noApyra half, noaoBHHa
give, AaBaTb 62, AaTb 138 half an hour, nojwaca
give away, oxAaBaxb, oxA&xb 238 half a pound, noJKfeyHxa
give regards (to), KJiaHHXbCH, noiuio- hand, pyxa
HHTbCH 193 hand, minute, hour, cxpejixa (o)
give up, cAaBaib, CAaxb 160 hand, on the other, 3axo
glad, pag happen, 6bisaxb (I), dbixb 195; npo-
glance at, nocMOxpexb (Ha) 160 ncxoAHTb, npomofixn 262; AeJiaTbcu
glass, cxanan (1), CAeaaxbCH (I)
globe, map happiness, cq&cxbe, paAocxb
goal, uejib happy, paAOCXHbiii, pag; cnacrjiiiBbiii
go apart, paaxoAHXbcfl, pa3oftxncb 252 (lucky)
go by a vehicle, &3Anxb, exaxb 69, 141 harbor, nopx
go (on foot), hath 46, 90; noftxn; xo- hard, xpyAHbift, xpygHo
AHXb 69, 141; noxoAHXb harvest, ypo>Kafi
go up, noAHiiMaxbCf?, noAHflXbca 193 hat, mjiana
go with its characteristic prefixes have, nnexb 117; y utm, etc. 54
(BxoAHXb, BbixoAîTb etc.). See 245, have a bite (to eat), noKymaxb P (I)
246 have a desire, xoxexbca 152
God, Bor have an interest (in), HHxepecoBaxb-
gold, 30JIOXO
ch, noiiHxepecoBaxbCH 162
golf, rojibcp have a walk, noryjiHXb
good, AoSpwii; xopomnft, xoporno have dinner, o6eAaxb, noo6eAaxb (I)
goodbye, ao cBHAamia, npomaii, npo- have to (need, necessity), Hy>KHO,
iuiao 162
mattxe
government, npaBi'ixejibcxBO have to (obligation), AOJmcen 162
governmental, rocyAapciBeHHbift hay, ceHO
grammar, rpaMMaxnKa he, oh 27, 150
granddaughter, BHy^xa (e) head, rojiosa
grandfather, AÂyuiKa (e) 206 head (chief person), rAai&
grandmother, 6a6yuiKa (e) head cold, HaciviopK
grandson, BHyK headquarters, uixa6
grave, Monwia, rpo6 head, take into one’s, B3AyMbmaxb,
great, 6oJibmoii; bcjihrhH B3AyMaxb (I)
greater, 66jibuie heal, JieqHXb(cn) 122; BHJiemiXb(cfl)
Grecian, rpeKecKHft (H)
Greek, rpex; rpeuecKiift (adj.) health, 3AOp6sbe
green, 3eJieHbtft healthy, 3Aop6Bbift, 3aopob 124
hear, cjmmaTb, ycjiwuiaTb 142 husband, My>K 194

heart, cepAue (e) hut, H36a
heavy, heavily, xJDKejibiii, xsdkcjio
hello! ajirn! 3ApaBcxByiixe! I
help, noMoraTb 88 (1), noM6nb (like.
I, a 150
MOHb)
ice, Jiea (te)
her(s), ee; her own, CBOit 116
idea, njxtx
here, 3/xecb; xyx; bot (here is)
idea, get the, B3AyMaxb, B3AyMbisaTb
here (hither), cfOfla
(I)
hero, repott
identical, OAHH&KOBbjft
high (ly), BbicoKHfl, bmcoko
if, 6can
higher, Bb'nue
if, as, Kax 6yaxo
his, ero 116; his own, cboK 116, 185
ill, SoJibHOii, 6oJieH 124
historian, HcxopHK
ill, to be, 6oJrexb (I)
history, HcxopHfl
illness, 6oJie3Hb
hither, OOA&
image, 66pa3
hold, jiepjKaib, noAepwaxb 81
immediately, ceikac >ice
holiday, npa3AHHK
impatience, HeTepneiwe
holy, CBflToii
import, npHB03HXb, npnB63TH 251
home (ward), AOMOfi
importance, 3HaneHne
home, at, AOMa
honest, oxKpb'iTbiii important, Ba>KHbiii
honey, m£a impossible, HeB03Mo>KHbift, Henb3a 162
honor, êcxb impression, BneqaxjieHHe
hook, KPIOK improve, nonpaBJiaxb(ca), nonpS-
hors d’oeuvre, 3aKyci<a unxb(ca) 171
horse, JiowaAb in, b (bo) (prep, or acc.) 39, 45, 46,
hospital, 6ojibHHU,a; rocnwraJib (m.) 266, npn (prep.) 255
host, X03HHH incidentally, enponeM 276
hostess, xo3fliiKa incorrect, HenpaBHJibHbifl
hot (ly), ropH’xnft, ropnqo; iicapKHft, increase, ycfcniBaxbcu (I), yci'uiuxbcff
xapKO; hotter, >Kapne (ID
hotel, rocTHHHita independence, He3aBHciiM0cxb
hour, qac in fact, AeftcxBHxejibHO
hour hand (of clock, watch), crpejina infantry, nexoxa
house, aom 161 influence, BJiiiflHiie
household, housekeeping, xo3flftcxBo in front of, nepeA (instr.) 68
how, Kax inhabitable, ofinxaeMbiit
how are you! 3Ap&BCTByftxe! inhabitant, >torrejib (m.)
how do you do! 3ApaBcxByftxe! in order to, qxoSbi
however, BnpoueM, oaheiko 276; ho inspect, ocM^xpiiBaxb (1), ocwoxpexb
how many, much, cKOJibKO 53, 164 171
huge, orpoMHbifl, orpoMCH in spite of, HecMoxpq Ha 276
human being, qejioBeK 172 instruct, npenoAaBaxb, npenoAaxb 183
humanity, uejiOBenecTBO insult, o6«Aa
humor, iomop interest oneself in, to have . .. in,
humorous, lOMopHCxAuecKitft HHxepecoBaxbCH, noiiHxepecoBaxbcfl
hundred (unit), coxhh 238
hunger, roJioA interesting, nHTepecHbift, iiHxepecno
hungry, roJiOAeH, rojiOAHbiii in the midst of, cpcah
hurry, cneuiHTb, 3acneuiHXb (II) in the presence of, npn (prep.) 255
hurt, 6oaetb (11) into, b (bo) (acc.) 39
ENGLTSH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY 383
introduce (acquaint), npeAcxaBjmxb, language, ji3biK

npeACTaBUTb 149 large, SoJTbwoii
introduce (bring in), BBOAHXb, bbcctm, last, nocjieaHHH, npomjibift
BHocnrb, BuecTii 238, 239 late, no3^HHfl
invitation, npuniauieHne late, to be, ona3flbiBaxb, ono3Aaxb (I)
invite, npumamuTb, npmviacHXb 149 laugh, CMeaxbCB, nocMeuTbcn 125
iron, >i(eae3Hbiii laughter, xoxox; CMex
it, oho 27, 150 lawyer, lopiicx
its, ero 116; its own, cboh 116 lead, BOAHXb, Becxn 239
leader, bo>kab (m.)
J leaf (of tree), jihcx 193
January, HHBapb (m.) leap, npbiratb, npbirnyxb 252
job, c.ny>i<6a (e) learn, yqnxbCH, ywb 95, 183; bh-
jolly, Becejibiii, BeceJio yunxb; H3yuaxb, n3yvHXb 183
learned, yueHbifi
joy, paAocxb; yôBojibCTBHe
joyful, secejibiii learning, yueHne
leather, koikb
joyfully, Becejio
July, mb Jib (m.) leave, yxoAHXb, yfixH (on foot) 238;
ye3>i<axb (I), yexaxb (like exaxb)
jump, npbiraxb nonpbiraxb (1);
(by vehicle)
npi/iniyib 252
June, iiKJHb (m.) leave, to take, npomaxbCfl, npoCTHXb-
CH 160
junior, MJiajuuiiii
left, to the, HajieBo
juridical, JopiinimecKnii
leg, Hora
jurist, K)pHCT
lemon, jihmoh
just, HMeHIIO
less, Menee, MeHbuie 216
just a minute, ceMuac
lesson, ypoK
let, Aaft 207; nycxb, nycaaft 208
K
let down, cnycKaxb, cnycxHXb 252
keep, ACp'/Katb 81, no/iep>KaTb letter nvicbMo; 6yKBa (letter of the
kilometer, KiuiOMexp alphabet)
kind, AoSpwii level, ypoBeHb (m.)
kitchen, Kyxiifi (o) library, 6n6jiHOxeKa
knife, ho>k 162 lie, jie>i<axb, noJiewaxb 67
know, 3HaTb (I) lie down, jiOMiftxbca (II), Jienb (jinry,
know, begin to, come to, y3HaBaxi> jiH>i<euib, jiaryx)
(y3Haio, y3Haeuib, y3Haiox), y3Hixb lie down! Ji«r!
(like 3Hatb) life, >KH3Hb
know how, yiwexb 55, cyMexb (I) lifting, noAHHTHe
knowledge, 3Hanne light, CBex; CBexjibifl, CBeTJio
light (easy), jierKHii, JierKo
L lighter, Jierue
like, noxoiKHfi Ha
labor, pa6oxa; Tpy/i
like, HpaBHXbcn, noHpaBHXbcfl 159, 163
ladies and gentlemen, rocnojta 171
lads, pedaxa 172 likewise, xo>i<e, xaiOKe 218
lady, rocno>Ka 171 line, cxpOKa
lag behind, oxcxaBaxb, OTexaxb 251 linen, noaoxHo
lake, o3epo 184 liquid, ikDakhS
lamp, Ji&Mria liquid, more, >KM>Ke
land, (dry), cymb listen (to), cjiymaxb (I), nocjiyuraxb
landlady, X03«ilKa (1)
landlord, X03«hh literary, jiHxepaxypHbift
landmass, cymb literature, Jinxepaxypa, nHCbMeHHOCTb
little, MaêHbKHii; Majibifi, MaJio 53, means, cpegcxeo

164 meat, mhcq
live, >KHxb 46 mechanic, MexaHHK
live (ly), >KHB6fl, >khbo; O/KHB.ieHHwfi medical, MegHUHHCKHft
living room, rocxifflaa 216 medicine, JieKapcXBO; MegnufiHCKHft
lobby, nepeAHHH 216 (adj.)
located, to be, HaxogHXbCfl, Hafh'ficb meet, coOnpaxbCH, coSpaxbCH 215;
205 BCTpeUatb, BCTpeTHTb 138
long, flJIHHHbltt; AOOTHft, AOJirO meet (with), Bcxpeqaxbcfl (c +■ instr.)

long ago, ziaBHO 126, BcrpeTiiTbca 138
longer, Aoaee, gojibme meeting, co6paHne, CBHjtaHne
look, CMorpeTb, nocMOTpeTb 139 member, hjich
look around, back, orJiHAbiBaxbCfl (1), memorize, 3anoMHHaxb, 3anoMHHTb
OrjIHHyTbCH (I) 183
look at with pleasure, juoSoBaTbCfl, merchant, Kyneu (te), npogaBît (fe)
nojiioSoBaTbcfl 193 merry, merrily, Beceabifi, B^cejio;
look for, HCKaTb, noncKaxb 238 paÔCTHblft
look like, BbirjifiAeTb 215 merry, to make, to be, BecejiHXbcfl,
loud, rp6MKHtt, rpoMKO nOBeceJiHTbCJi (II)
louder, rpOMue message, cooSmeHiie
love, JiioOHTb 88, 163 metal, MeiaJUi
low, HH3KHft method, mstoa
lower, HHH<e mighty, Be.niKHtt
lower, cnycKaTb, cnycxfixb 252 mile, mhjih
lucky, cqacTJiHBbift military, BOeHHbift
lunch, 3aBipaKatb, no3aBtpaKaTb (1) milk, mqjioko
mine, Moft, moa, Moe 27, 116, 185
M mine (explosive), Mima
minus, mhhvc
machine, Mamma
minute, MiiHyia
madman, cyMaciuejumift
minute hand (of clock, watch)
mail, noma
cTpenKa
main, rjraBHbitt
mixture, CMecb
make, gejiaxb (I), cgejiaxb (1); Monday, noHegeJM-mK
ycxpaHsaib, ycTponxb 252
money, geHbrii 194
make an effort! noHaTyjKbcn!
month, MecHU. 150, 162
man, neaoBeK 172; MyiKn^Ha 205
morals, Mopaab
manner, 66pa3
more, 6o.ibme, 6oaee 216; eme
many, so, ctojibko (gen.)
morning, yrpo
map, Kapxa
morning, in the,’ yxpOM
March, MapT
mortar shell, mine, MHHa
married, >KeHaT (m.); 3aMv,KeM (f.)
Moscow, MocKBa; mockobckhA (adj.)
215
married, to get, >KeHHTbcn (Ha) (m.); most, the, cawbift 225
BbIXOAHTb, BbiiiTH 38My>K (3a) (f.) mother, waMa; MaTb 215
215 mountain, ropa
master, H3y»iaxb (I), H3yunxb 183 mouth, poT (to) 150
master, X03HHH move, nepeBo/u'ub, nepeBecxu 171
matter, gejio move apart, pa3gBiir^Tb, pa3/tBHHyTb
matter, it does not, HHAero 215
mausoleum, MaB30xteft movement, gBU/KeHiie
May, Mafi movie, kiiho 34
meal (flour), Myna Mr., rocnoai'iH 171
meaning, 3HaueHne Mrs., rocnoM<a 171
much, MHoro 53, 164 northern, ceBepHbifi

much respected, MHoroyBa>i<aeMbift nose, hoc
much, so, ctojisko (gen.) not, He 21, 22
mud, rpH3b nothing, Hiivero 35
multiplied by, noMHO>iceHHoe Ha novel, poMaH
museum, My3eft November, Hondpb (m.)
music, My3biKa now, cefinac; Tenepb
must, flOJDKeH 162 now . . . now, to ... to
my, Moft, MOfi, Moe 27, 116, 185 nowhere, HHKyjja (direction), HHTAe
(position)
N number, koahacctbo (quantity),
thcji6 (e) (date), HOMep
name (Christian, first), hmh 150, 194
name (last, family), <j>aMHJiHH O
narrate, paccKa3biBaTb, paccKa3aib
183 object, npejMeT, Bemb
narrative, paccKa3 observer, Ha6jnoa,aTeJib (m.)
narrow, y3Kiifi occasion, cjiyâft
narrower, yaie occupation, 3aHHTiie
nation, napoA occupied, 3aHftToft
national, HapoAHbift, HapHOHaabHbifi occupy, 3aHHMaTb, 3aHHTb 183
native, pojihoh October, OKTadpb (m.)
native country, poflHHa of course, koh&hho
natural resources, npupo^Hbie doraT- off, c, co (gen.) 97
CTBa office, KOHT6pa, noJio>KeHHe
nature, npupoAa oil, HecjiTb
near, okojio (gen.) 82, 83; noAAe old, CTapbiii; CTapHHHbifi (ancient)
(gen.) 255; y (gen.) 53 older, CTapuie, cTapuinfi, erapee
near, 6jiH3Knft on, no (dat.), Ha (prep, and ace.) 39,
nearer, fijiibice 45, 46
necessary, HeodxoAHMbift, Hy>KHbifi once, pa3 162; oah^hcaw (once upon a
necessary, it is, Hy>KHo; h&ao 162; time)
HeoSXOflHMO one, pa3 (in counting) 162; oahh,
needed, HyTKHO OAHa, oaho
neighbor (m.), coceA one another, Apyr Apyra 241
neighbor (f.), coceAKa (o) oneself, caM, cawa, caMO, caMH 206;
neighboring, coc6ahhB cede, ced#, codofi 206
neither . . . nor, hh . . . hii 276 one’s own, CBOft, cboh, CBoe 116, 185
never, HHKorâ one time pa3 162
nevertheless, Bce-TaKH on foot, neuiKOM
new, hobwH only, TOAbKO
news, HOBOCTb on the contrary, HanpoTHB 276
newspaper, ra3eia on the other hand, 3aTo
next, 6yaymnfi, cjieAyromnft open, oTKpbixbift
next to, pfljtOM, okojio (gen.) open, oTKpbiBaTb, OTKpbiTb 138; pa3-
nice, MHJibift ABiiraTb, pa3ABHHyTb 215
night, HOHb opera, onepa
night, at, HdAbio opposite, HanpoTHB
niveau, ypoBeHb or, HAH
no, HeT 21, 22 orange, aneabCHH
nobody, hhkto 35 orchard, (jipyKTOBbift caA
noise, myM orchestra, opnecTp
noisy, myMHbitt order, npHKa3aHHe
north, c&Bep organization, ycTpoiicTBO
other, ,npyr6ft piece, KycoK (to); (of paper) ahct

our(s), Ham, Hama, Hame 116, 185 193
out of, H3 (gen.) 82, 83 piercing, npoHSHxeAbHbifi
outskirts, OKpanHa pipe, xpySna (o)
over, qfcpe3 (ace.) (across) 89; Haa pity, it is a, Hcaab
(instr.) 68 place, MecTO
overcoat, naabxo 34 place (lay), KAacxb 46, noAonorrb 171
ox, BOJl place (stand upright), cxaBHXb (ct4b-
JTK), C'raBHUIb, CTaBHT), nOCTHBHTb
P
place! ciaBb!
pace, mar place oneself, cxanoBHXbCH, CTaxb 193,
pack, yKJiaAbiBaib (I), yjio>KHXb 160 195
package, nanex place, take, nponcxoAiixb, npoH3oiixH
page, CTpaHHua 262
painfully, it is painful, OoAbHG plain, paBHHHa
pair, napa plain (ly), npocxoft, npocxo
pale, SjieAHbifl plan, nAaH
paper, dyMara plant (factory), 3aBOA
park, napK plantation, njiaHxamm
parlor, rocxCmaa 216 play, nrpaxb (I), nourpaib (I); nbeca
part, qacTb playing cards, Kapxw
part, pacxoAHTbca, pa30HXiicb 252 pleasant, npHAXHbiii, npiiaiHo
passer-by, npoxo>KHft please, no>Kajiyiicxa
pass on, nepeAaBarb, nepeAaxb 273 please, HpaBHTbca, noHpaBiixbcfl 159,
past, npoiiiJibifi 163
past, mhmo (gen.) please, if you, xotb
path, nyrb (m.) pleased, AOBOJibHbiii, aobojich 124
patient, nauneHx pleasure, yAOBOAbcxBiie
patronymic, omecTBO plus, najoc
peace, MHp poet, no§T
peasant, KpecTbSHHH 171; My>KHK
pointer, cxpeaxa (o)
peculiar, cxpaHHbiii police, noAHHHA
pedagogical, neAarorriMecKHii policeman, Miunmnonep
pelt, Mex
political, noAHTHAecKHft
pen, nepo 193
poor (one), SeAHbift
pencil, KapaHaam 162 popular, HapoAHbiil
people, HapoA; jhoah 172 populate, HaceAHTb (I), naceAUTb (II)
perhaps, Mo>i<ex 6bitb population, HacejieHiie
period, nepHOA porridge, Kama
periodical, Htypnaji
port, nopT
permissible, m6hcho 162
porter, HOCHAbmiiK
permissible, not, Hejrb3H 162
position, noJionceHHe
permit, no3BOJiHXb (I); ri03B6AHTb
possibility, B03Mo>KHOcxb
(11); pa3pemaib, pa3peuiHXb 149
permitted, it is, mo>kho 162 possible, it is, mo>kho 162
person, qeAOBeK 172 post office, noma
philosopher, (J)ha6co(J) pound, 4>yHT
philosophical, (^HAOc64)CKHfi power station, rHApocxaHUHH
phone, 3BOHHTb, II03BOHHXb (II) powers (creative), xBOpnecxBO
photograph, (fcororpatiwa prepare, roxoBHXb 105; npuroxoBiixb
physics, (J)H3HKa 138; coSHpaxbca (I), co6paxbCH 215
piano, pOHJib (m.) prepared, roxoBbift, toxob 124
picnic, HHKHHK presence, in the (of), npH (prep.) 255
pie, nupor present, 3HaKOMHXb, no3HaK6MHTb 149
president, npe/i;ce,aaxe.rib (m.), npe3H- read, uuxaxb, noqnxaxb; (through)

jieHT npoBHxaxb, npouecxb 174
prettily, mhjio ready, roxoBbitt, roxoB 124
price, peHa reality, peajibHocxb
principality, KHH>KecxBo really, aeiicxBHxejibHQ
print, neuaxaxb (1), Haneuaxaxb (1) rear (of the), XbijiOBoii
problem, aa/taua reason (cause), npHuAHa
process, npopecc receive, nojiyqaxb, noJiyuHXb 160;
production, npon3BOACXBO npuHHMaxb, npHHHXb 149
professor, npcxbeccop 161 recently, HejiaBHO
program, nporpaMMa reception, npneM
promise, o6eiuaxb (I), noo6eiu.aTb (1) reception room, npneMHaa, rocTHHaa
proprietor, xo3hhh 216
proprietress, xo3aflKa recline, jie>Kaxb 67, nojiexcaxb (II)
province, oSjiacib recognize, y3HaBaxb, y3HaTb 160
pull yourself together! noHaxy>Kbcs! recover, nonpaBaaxbCfl (I), nonpi-
pupil, yueHHK, yueHupa (f.) BIIXbCH 171
purchase, noKynaxb, KynpTb 138 red, xpacHbitt
purchase, noKynna (o) reform, pe$6pMa
pure, HncTbift regards, give to, KJiaHHXbca (I), no-
pursuit (occupation, job), 3aHHTne KJIOHHXbCfl 193
push apart, pa3flBHraxb, pa3jBHHyxb region, Kpaft; o6jiacxb
215 region of extraction, paftoH ô6biqp
put (lay), KJiacxb 46, noJio>KHXb 170 region of processing, pafioH odpa-
put (stand upright), cxaBHXb, (cxaB- 6oxkh
jiio, cxaBHuib, cxaBflT), nocxaBHXb relate, paccKa3bisaxb, paccua3axb 183
put! cxaBb! relation (attitude), oxHomenne, cho-
put on, oaeBaxbca 125, ojiexbcg 131 uieHne
relaxation, oxabix
Q religion, pejiurna, Bepa
relish, 3aKycxa (o)
quantity, KOJiH'iecxBO
remarkable, 3aMeqaxejibHbift
quarter, uexBeprb
remember, noMHnxb (II); 3anoMHH&xb
question, BOnpoc
(I), 3anOMHHXb (II)
queue, ouepejib
remove, y6apaxb (I), y6paib 139
quick (ly), dbicxpbift, CKopbift, Sb'icxpo,
rent, cjaBaxb, caaib 160; chhm&tb
ckopo (soon) (I); CHflXb 171
quiet, cnoKoflcxBHe; CnoKofiHbift,
rent, to be for, c,naBaxbCsi, caaTbcn
XHXH8 160
quiet down, exuxaxb, cxfixpyTb 262 replace, 3aMeHHTb (I), 3aMeHfixb (II)
quieter, xuiiie report, aoKJiaa
quite, coBceM, coBepmeuHo resembling, noxo>KHft (Ha)
quite well, Hpuero resolute (ly), peuiHxejibHbifi, peiim-
xeabHo
R resound, pa3AaBaxbca, pa3fl4xbca 193
respected, much, MHoroyBa>KaeMbifl
radio, pAno 34
rest, oxjpbix
rag, xpanKa (o)
rest, oxgbixaTb, oxflOXHyxb 193
rain, noynjib (m.) restaurant, pecxopaH
rainy, ao>K,n;jiHBbitt result, pe3yjibxaT
raising, noflHHXHe rich, 6oraxbift
rarely, pAko richer, 6oraqe
raw materials, npppoflHbie OoraxcxBa riches, 6oraxcxBO
reach, ô6npaxbca, godpaxhca 262 ride, exaxb, noexaxb 47
ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY
ride away, ye3>i<axb (I), yexaxb (like school, uiKoJia

exaxb) science, nayxa
ride in, BT>e3>Kaxb, bt> exaxb scientific, HaynHbift
ride out, Bbie3>Kaxb, Bbiexaxb scream, Bii3r
ride through, npoe3>Kaxb, rrpoexaxb sea, Mope
ride up to, noA'be3>Kaxb, noA'bexaxb search for, Hcxaxb, noncKaxb 238
rifle, py>Kbe secretary (m.) cenpexapb
right (direction), npaBbift, npaB 124 secretary (f.), cexpexapwa
right, to the, HanpaBO see, BiUeTb, yBi'igexb 138
ring, 3BOHHXB 95, I103B0HHXb seed, ceMfl 194
rise, BCiaBaTb 122, BCTaTb (Bcxany, seem, BbirjiHAexb 215; Ka3axbca, no-
BCTaHemb, BcxaHyx); nogHHMaTbCg, Ka3axbca 152
noAHHTbca 193 seldom, peAKO
river, pexa select, ii36npaxb (1), ii36paxb (like
road, AOpora 6paxb)
roast meat, >KapKoe semester, ceMecxp
role, pojib (m.) send, npncbijiaxb, npucjiaxb; nocbiJiaxb,
room, KOMHata, m£cxo nocjiaxb 296
room in a hotel, HoMep send off, oxnpaBJinxb, oxnpaBiixb 160
round (about), xpyroM senior, cxapmirii
rouse, 6yAHTb, pa36yAHTb 215 separate, oxABJiaxb (1), oxAejinxb (11);
route, nyib (m.) oxAeJibHbift (adj.)
rubber tree, Kay^yKOHQc September, ceHxaSpb (m.)
ruble, pygjib (m.) serious, cepbe3Hbift
rug, KOBep (fe) set sail, njibixb, nonjibixb 225
run, 6eraxb, 6e>Kaxb 239 set the table, HaKpbiBaxb (I), HQKpbixb
rural, AepeBencKutt (naxpoio, HaKpoemb, Haicpoiox)
rush, SpocaxbCH, dpociixbCH 251; cne- settle, HaceaHXb (I), naceauxb (II)
unixb (II), 3acneuiHXb (II) several, HecKOJibKo
Russia, Pocchh shark, aKyjia
Russian, p^ccKHit sharp, pe3Kiifl
Russian (in), no-pyccKH shave, Spnxbca, no6piiXbca 131
she, OHa 27, 150
S
sheet (of paper), jihcx 193
sail, napyc
shell, cnap«A
sail, nJibixb 225, 239
ship, KOpaOJib (m.)
sail, set, nonjib'rxb 225
shipbuilding, KopaSaecxpoeHiie
sailor, Maxpoc
shop, aaBKa (o)
saint, cBHToft
shore, 6&per
sale, pacnpogauca
short, KOpoxKuft 124
saleslady, npOAaBiUHpa
shot, Bb'icxpeji
salesman, npogaBep (fe)
salt, coJib shoulder, nJieqo 184
same, o/uiHaKOBbiil, paBHbift shout, Kpnqaxb, KpfiKHyxb, 3aKpHuaxb
samovar, caMOBap 139, 140, 251
satisfied, AOBOJibHbifi, aobojich 124 shouting, KpHK
Saturday, cy66oxa show, noKa3biBaxb, noKa3axb 138
say, CKa3axb 138, rosopHXb (II) shriek, BH3r
say goodbye, npom&xbcn (I), npo- sick, SoJibHofi, 66jien 124
CXHTbCH 160 sick, to be, dojiexb (1)
scatter, pacxoAHTbca, pa30iixHCb 252 sickness, 6oJie3Hb
scene, cueHa side, cxopoHa
schedule, pacnncaHHe side by side, HapHAy c, co
scholar, yêHbift 216 side dish, 3aKycKa (o)
sight, catch (of), yBHAexb 138 Soviet, coBexcKHft

sight see, ocMaxpiiBaxb (I), oeMoxpexb space, Mecxo
171 speak, roBopHTb, noroBop(ixb 141, 142
silk, meJiK specialist, cneuHajincx
silver, cepe6po; cepedpHHbift speech, pe^b
simple, npocTofl, npocxo speed, CKOpocTb
simplicity, npocxoxa splendid, npeKp&CHbift
sing, nexb, cneib 105 spoon, Jio>KKa (e)
singer, neBeu (te) sport, cnopT
singer (f.), neBi'ma spread, pacnpocxpansxb (I), pacnpo-
Sir, rocnojiHH 171 CXpaHHXb (II)
sister, cecxpa (e) spring, BecHa, BeceHHHft (adj.)
sit, cnjxexb, nocHAeTb 131 spring, in the, BecHoli
sit down, caAHXbca, cecTb 125; cagb! square, iuiomaAb
situation, noJio>KeHHe; oOcTanoBKa (o) staff, uixa6; urraSHbift (adj.)
six, mecxepo 255 staff commander, HauajibHHK mxa6a
skin, KO>Ka stage, cpeHa
skinny, xyôft stand, cxoHTb, nocToaxb 225
sky, ne6o standard, 3H&MH 194
Slav, CJiaBHHHH stand out, oiAtmaTbCfl (I), OTJiHUHXbca
slavery, paOcxBO (H)
Slavic, CJiaBflHCKHfi star, 3Be3ga
sleep, cnaxb, nocnaxb 88 state, rocyAapcxBo, rocyAapcTBeHHbili
slipper, xy<J)jiH (e) (adj.); uiTax
sliver, menna (o) station (railroad), BOK3&A, cxaHipwr
slowly, Me/bneHHo station (waterpower), rHApociaHUua
small, MaaeHbKHfi steamship (steamer), napoxoA
smaller, MeHbuie 216 step, mar
smell, Hibxaxb, noHibxaxb (I) step away, see go away
smoke, abim stifling, jxyiuHbift
snack, 3aKycKa (o) still, eme
snapshot, cfcoTorp&ciwfl stop, npeKpamaib (ch) , npexpaxHTb (cff)
sniff, Hibxaxb, nomoxaxb (I) 252; KOHUaib (CH) (I), KOHAHTb (cfl)
snow, CHer (ID
so, xax stopper, npodKa (o)
soap, MblJIO store, Mara3HH
society, 66m,ecxBO story, picxopHH, paccKa3; (floor)
sofa, AHBan sxaac
soft, MarKHft stout, nojiHbift, noaoH
soil, nouBa straight, npHMO
soldier, cojiaaT 162 straightaway, npHMO
solve, pa3pew&xb, pa3peiimxb 149 strange, cxp&HHbiii
so many, much, cxojibKO (gen.) stream, xeueHne
some, HecKOJibKO, HeKOXopbie street, yanaa
sometimes, HHorAa streetcar, xpaMBaft
something, uxo-to 263 strength, CHJia
son, CbiH 194 strength, beyond (one’s), HenocnJibHO
song, n^CHfl (e) strict, cxporufl
soon, CKopo strike (the hour), npo6HB&Xb (I),
sound, 3ByK npoduib (like 6wxb)
soup, cyn strive, cTapaxbcu, nocxapaTbcu (I)
source, hcxouhhk strive for, jxo6nBaThCfl (I), Ao6HXbc*r
south, lor 273
southern, loiKHbift strong, KpfciiKHft; CHJibHbill
stronger, xpenue tea, naft

student, CTyêHT, yqeHHK teach, yqfixb 95, 183, Bbiymm>; npe-
student, girl, cxyAeHxxa (o); yqeHfiua noâBaxb, npeno/iaxb 183
study, 3aHHM3TbCff (I), 3aHHTbCfl 183; teacher, yqfrreJib (m.) 161
H3yqaTb, H3yqnTb 183; yqeHHe teacher, lady, yuHieJibHHua
subject, npe^MeT teaching, ynernne
subordinate, noflqHHeHHbiii tea pot, nailHHK
subsequently, b AaJibH&SmeM tear, pa3pbiBaxb (ch), pa3opBaxb (ch)
subside, cxnxaxb (I), cxuxHyxb 262 262
Substitute, 3aM6HHTb (I), 33MeHHTb tedious, CKyHHbift
(ID telegram, xeJierpaMMa
subway, Mexpo 34 telephone, xejie<J)6H
success, yen ex telephone operator, Tejie(J)oHHCT
successfully, djiaronojiy^Ho television set, xeJieBH30p
such (a one), xaKofi tell, cKa3arb 138; paccxa3biBaxb, pac-
suddenly, BApyr CKa3axb 183; roBOpwxb (II)
suffering, M^xa temperature, xeMnepaTypa, neap
sufficient, AocxaxoMHo (fever)
sugar, caxap, cdxapHbift (adj.) tennis, xchhhc
suitcase, neMOâH term, ceM^cxp
summer, jiero; jieTHHtt (adj.) territory, xeppHXopnfl
summer home, textbook, ynedHHK
summer, in the, jictom than, qeM 218
sun, coJinue 150, 184 thank, djiaroâpHTb, noSjiarojtapAxb
Sunday, BoexpeceHbe (ID
sunset, 3aKaT (cojmna) thanks to, 6jiaro,rtapH
sup, have supper, y'JKHHaTb, noyiKH- thank you, enaendo
HaTb (I) that, qxo (conj.) 35, 124; (rel. pron.)
supper, y>xnH 284; tox, xa, xo 27, 195
sure, to be, ripaBAa 276 the . . . the, neM . . . xeM 218
surprise, yjtHBJieHHe theater, xeaxp
surrender, cjiaBaxbCH, caaTbca (like their (s), hx 116
Aasaxb, aaTb) then, noxoM, xor.ua, >Ke 275
sweet, cjiaAKHfi there, xaM
sweeter, CJiame therefore, noaxoMy 276
sweets, cjiajixoe there is, ecTb 41
swim, iiJibiTb, nonjibiTb 225; miaBaTb there is no, HeT 52
(I) 239 there (to), xyâ
system, CHcxeMa they, ohh 151
thick, xoJicxbift
T thicker, xoJiiue
thief, Bop
table, ctoji
thin, xoHKHii; xy^6ft; (mainly
tablecloth, cxaiepxb of fluids)
take, 6paTb, B3axb 159
thing, Bemb
take a look, nocMOxpeib 160 think, AyMaxb, nojiyMaTb (I)
take leave, npoinatbCH, npoeximea thinner, TOHbiue; JKifoxe (mainly of
160
fluids)
take off, cHHMaxb (I), CHflXb 171
this (one), §xot, axa, sxo 27, 194
take place, nponcxo^ftTb, npon3oflTn thither, Tyî
262
thou, Xbl
tale, paccKa3
though, xoxb; xoth 6w (if only) 276
talk, 6ece.ua, pa3roBop thought, MbICJIb
taxi, xaxcft threesome, Tpoe 255
throat, ropjio Tuesday, BxopHmc

through, Mepe3 (ace.) 89 tundra, A^co-CTenb
Thursday, uexBfepr turn, noBOpoi; onepeAb (one’s)
thus, THK turn, noBopauHBaxb, noBepHyxb 171
ticket, 6ha6x twosome, ABoe 255
tidy (up), ydupaxb (I), y6p&xb 139
till, ao (gen.)
time, BpeMH 150, 194; nopa; pa3 (one U
time) unavoidable, HeodxOAfiMbift
time, for a long, AOJiro uncle, ahaa 206
time, in the course of, b AaAbHeftuieM uncomfortable, HeyAodHbiit, HeyAO^HO
time, it is, nopa under, noA (instr.) 89, 97
times, at, BpeMCH&MH understand, noHHMaxb, noHaxb 238
time table, pacnncamie undoubtedly, hccomh§hho
tin, >KecTb unhappy, HecuacTHbifi
tired, ycxaAbift unification, oOijeAHHeHHe
to, k, ko (dat.) 61, 255 universal, yHHBepcaAbHbift
today, ceroAHa university, yHHBepcnxex
together, BMecxe unpleasant, HenpiiaTHbift, HenpHHXHO
toil, TpyA until, ao (gen.)
tomorrow, 3aBTpa up (ward), BBepx
tone, toh up to, ao (gen.)
tongue, H3b'iK urban, ropoACKofi
too, cahlukom; (also) xo>Ke; (like¬ usually, odbIKHOBeHHO
wise) TaK>Ke 218
too bad, >i<aAb V
torment, Myna
tourist, xypncx vacations, KaH^KyAbi
toward, k, ko 61, 255 vain, in, HanpacHo
tower, 6auiHH (e) varied, pa3Hoo6pa3Hbift
town, ropoA 161 various, pa3Hbift, pa3Hoo6pa3Hbift
trade, xoproBAH, xoproBbiii (adj.) vegetables, oboijuh
tradesman, npoAaseii (fe), verdant, 3eAeHbift
ToproBeu (fe) very, oueHb
traffic, ABHAcemie vestibule, nepeAHflfl 216
train, noe3A 161 view, OCMHTpHBaTb (I), OCMOTpCTb 171
transfer, nepesoAHTb, nepeBecxft 171 view, bha
translate, nepeBOAHTb, nepeBecxw 171 village, AepeBHH (e); AepeB^HCKHft
translation, nepeBOA violin, CKpuriKa (o)
translator, nepeBOAHHK visit, SbiBaTb, 6biTb 195
transmit, nepeAaBaxb, nepeAaxb 273 vivid, ACHBOft
transport, B03HXb, Be3xft 239 vodka, BOAxa (o)
travel, e3AHXb 69, 141, exaxb 47 voice, roAoc 161
treat, Aeqnxb 122, noAenftib; Bbke- voyage, nyxb (nx.)
UHTb (II)
treated, to be, AeunxbCH 122, noae- W
UHTbCA
tree, AepeBO 193 wage war, BoeBaxb, noBoeBaxb 262
tribe, iia6mh 194 wait (for), JKAaxb 81, 82, noAoxKAaxb
trip, noe3AKa (conjugated like jKAaxb)
trunk, cyHAyK waiting, OACHABHHe
truth, npaBAa wake, 6yAHXb, pa36yAftxb 215
try, cxap&xbCH, nocxapaxbCH (I) wake, npocbinaxbca, npocHyxbca (I)
try hard! noHaxyjRbca! walk, xoAHXb 69, 141, noxoAHXb
Tsar, papb (m.) walk (take a), ryAAXb, noryAATb (I)
walk with its characteristic prefixes winter, in the, 3HMoit

(bxoahtl, Bbixo^HTB. etc,), see 245, wish, jKejiarb, no>KenaTb (I); xoxeTb
246 76, 82
wall, cTena with, c, co (instr.) 68
want, xoTeTb 76, 82; 3axoTeTb 139; within, nepe3 (acc.)
iKejiaTb (I), noMceaaib (I) without, 6es (gen.) 53
war, BoftHa woman, wemniiHa, 6a6a (country
warm (ly), TenjibiS, xenjio woman)
wash, MblTbCH 122, BblMblTbCH 138 woman, beautiful, KpacaBHpa
watch, qacbi (pi.) wood (material), Aepeso 193
water, BOAa woods (forest), jiec 161
waterpower station, rHApocTaHPHfi wool, rnepCTb
wave, bojihA word, cjiobo
way, jopora work, padoia; cJiy>K6a; rpyA
we, Mbi 151 work, padoTaTb, nopafioTSTb (I)
wealthy, 6oraTbift worker, pafiomifi 216
wear, hochtb, iroHoefiTb 239, 240 work out, pa3pa6AibiBaib (I), pa3pa-
weather, noroâ fioiaib (I)
Wednesday, cpeâ world, CBeT; MHp
week, hzjttm worry, SecnoKoftCTso
welcome! mhjiocth npocHM! worse, xy>i<e
Well, 3AOpOBblft, 3/lOpOB 124 write, rmdTb 52, namicaTb 131
well, xopomo writer, rwcaieJib (m.); Abtop
well! ny! written language, micbMeHHocTb
well, to get, nonpaBJiaTbcfl (I), no-
npaBHTbca 171 Y
went, ineji, uiJia, ihjio, ihjih yard, ABOp
west, 3ana;i year, roA 150, 241, 266
western, 3anaanbifi yell, KpiiK
what, mo 35, 124 yellow, JKeATbift
what kind, sort of, KaKoii yes, Aa
when, Korjja 40 yesterday, snepa
whence, oTKyAa yet, eme (still); oahAko (however)
where, rae 21, 40 276; Bce-raKM (nevertheless)
where from, OTicy/ca you, ibi 150 (fam. sing.); bm (Bh)
where (to), Ky.ua pol. and fam. pi.) 151
which, Kanofl; Koiopbik 284 young, MoaoAoft
while, noi<a younger, MJiaAiue; MOJi6«ce
white, dejibift younger, youngest, MAÂUiHii
who, kto 124; KOTopbiii 284 young people, MOJiOAe>ra
whole, peabiii; Becb, bca, Bee 226, 227 youngsters, pedaia 172
whose, êft, Abs, nbe 185 your (s), TBOft, tboA, tboc (fam.
why, noneMy
sing.); saui, Bama, Baure, (pol. and
wide, mwpoKiifi fam. pi.) 116, 185
wider, in Ape
youth, MOJioAQCTb; MOJiOAe>Kb (young
wife, irceHa
people)
wind, Berep (fe)
window, okho (o) Z
wine, bhho
zone, 3ona
wineglass, pioMKa (o)
winter, 3HMa; (adj.) C
INDEX
A “become, begin,” 195

“be occasionally, habitually,” 195
“able, be,” 55; past, 90; perfective, brief or informal action (perfective),
174 134
accusative case, 30; as direct object, “both,” declension of, 252
33 f., 88 f.; after prepositions, see
prepositions; in time expressions, €
108
addition, 254 capitalization, 7
address, form, of, 15 cardinal numerals, 83, 164, 227, 241;
adjectives, comparison of, 216 f., case requirements, 83, 164, 196,
225 f.; declension of: basic type of 228, 254; declension of “one,” 196;
singular endings, 61 f.; in singular: declension of all others, 253 f.;
feminine, 99; all genders, hard, listing of, Appendix II
106, soft, 115; in plural: all genders cases, table of, 30; see also res¬
hard and soft, 172; declension pective names of cases; see also
tables see Appendix II; adjectives declension
used as nouns, 216; short forms of, collective numerals, 255
123 f.; with cardinal numerals, 196, comparison of adjectives and ad¬
254; pronoun-adjectives, see pro¬ verbs: comparative, compound, 216;
nouns; see also “table of adjec¬ simple, 217 f.; superlative, com¬
tives,” 233 f. pound, 225; simple, 225 f.; with
adverbial participles, 274 f. Bcerd, Bcex, 226
adverbs, comparison of, 216 f., 225 f.; concession or generalization, sub¬
in impersonal expressions, 151 f.; junctive, 274; concessive conjunc¬
indefinite, 263; negative, 263 f.; tions, 276
position of, 22 conclusive conjunctions, 276
adversative conjunctions, 276 conditions, real and contrary to fact,
age expressions, 241; see also time 264 f.
alphabet, 1 f. conjugation, first, 34 f.; second, 68 f.;
“answer, ask,” 61 irregular first, 46 f.; past tense
“appear, seem,” 152 (first, second, irregular), 89 f.; see
approximation (“about, ca.”)» 255 also tenses, verb. Appendix II
article, 26 conjunctions, adversative, conces¬
“as_as,” 218 sive, conclusive, distributive, em¬
aspects, 130 f., 139 f. phatic, 275 f.; “and,” 22; “if,” 265;
“that,” 35; “where, whereto,” 41
B
D
“be,” present, 21; past, 90; future,
116 date expressions, day, week, month,
“be able,” 55; past, 90; perfective, 108 f., 186; day, month, year,
174.. 265 f.; see also time expressions
beginning of an action or state (per¬ dative case, after prepositions, see
fective), 139 prepositions; as indirect object, 60,
393
394 INDEX
75; in expressions of age, 241; in generalization or concession, sub¬

impersonal expressions, 152, 162 £.; junctive, 274
with infinitive (“have to”), 208 genitive case, 30; after prepositions,
declension, of adjectives, see adjec¬ see prepositions; denoting posses¬
tives; of NOUNS: regular masc. sion, 54; in comparison, 218; in
sing., 70, plural, 160; regular neuter negative expressions, 52; in parti¬
sing., 70, plural, 161; regular fern. tive expressions, 53, 164; with
sing., ,98, plural, 161; declensional numerals, 83, 164, 196, 228; with
peculiarities: masculines in -OK, -CU, “want,” 82; with “wait for,” 82
123, in -IK, -ui, -in, -1, -U, 149 f., “give,” 62; perfective, 138
162; masc. sing, in -a, -fl, 2051, “go, drive,” 69; past of “go,” 90;
plurals, in -a,-n, 161; plurals, 1931; double imperfective of “go, drive,”
neuters in -we, -He, -me, -me, 141
150, 184, in -MH, 150, plurals, 184,
194, indeclinable, 34; feminines, sin¬ H
gular and plural, 215; plurals of
handwriting, 6 f.
all genders, 1711; see also Appendix
“have,” present, 54; past, 90 f.;
II; see also general vocabulary for
future, 117; negative, 54, 91
“irregular” declension of specific
“have a desire, feel like, wish, want,”
nouns (arabic numerals following
152
noun in general vocabulary refer to
page where its declension is found);
I
of pronouns, see pronouns
demonstrative pronouns, see pronouns
imperative, 107 f., 142, 208; em¬
determinate-indeterminate verbs, see phatic command, 208; irregular
double infinitive verbs forms, 107 f.
distributive conjunctions, 276 imperfective-perfective verbs, see as¬
division, 254 pects
double infinitive verbs, 141, 238 f. impersonal expressions, adjectives
“drive, go,” 69; past of “go,” 90; and adverbs, 151 f.; necessity and
double imperfective, 141 obligation, 162 f.; liking, 163 f.;
seeming, 152
E indeclinable nouns, 34
indefinite pronouns, see pronouns
“eat,” 40; past, 90; perfective, 174 indeterminate-determinate verbs, see
emphatic command, 208 double infinitive verbs
emphatic, comparative, 218; conjunc¬ instantaneous action (perfective), 139
tions, 275; questions, 185 instrumental case, 30; after prepo¬
sitions, see prepositions; as in¬
P strument or agent, 671; as pre¬
dicate, 195; in the passive voice,
“feel like, have a desire to,” 152 299
“for” in time expressions, 108 interrogative adverbs (“when,
formation of the perfective, 140 where”), 40
fractions, 173 interrogative particle “jih,” 21
future tense, 116 f., 132 interrogative pronoun, sec pronouns
Gr L
gender, of nouns, 25; of adjectives, “let me, us, him, them,” 2071
see adjectives; of pronouns, see “learn, study, teach,” 96, 183
pronouns “like, love,” 163 f.
INDEX 395
M 97,108 f.; with instrumental, 68, 97;

with prepositional, 39, 45, 150, 255
mathematical signs, 254 present tense, first conjugation, 34 f.;
multiplication, 254 second conjugation, 68 f.; “be,” 21;
mutation rules of vowel, 31 adverbial participle, 274; adjectival
participle, 285 f.
N progressive form (lack of), 21
prounouns, and pronoun adjectives:
necessity, need, 162 f. “all, everything,” 227; “both,” 252;
negative, expressions, 21 f35; of demonstrative, 26 f.; “such a one,”
“have,” 54, 91; imperative, 142; 185; “this, that one,” 194 f.; em¬
prefix “hh,” 264 phatic, 206; indefinite, 262 f.; inter¬
nominative case, 30; as subject, 26; rogative: “who, what,” 21, 35, 124;
as predicate, 26 “which one,” 185; “whose,” 185 f.;
noun, cases of, see cases; declension personal: declension of, 150 f.;
of, see declension; gender of, see omission of, 76; possessive, 26 f.,
gender; predicate noun, 26, 195; 115: declension of, in the singular,
suffixes, see Appendix I, 306 f. 116, in contrast to the personal
numerals, see cardinals, collectives, pronoun, 151, in the plural, 184 f.;
fractions, ordinals reciprocal (“one another”), 241;
reflexive, 206; relative, 284
O pronunciation, clusters, 14; con¬
sonants, voiced and voiceless, 12;
obligation (“ought, should”), 162 f., effect of stress on vowels, 14;
274 palatalization, 13; vowels, hard
“one another,” declension of, 241 and soft, 11, 12
optative (wish), subjunctive, 274 punctuation, 7
ordinal numerals, 173, 227, 241; list,
purpose, subjunctive, 273 f.
see Appendix II
P Q
participles, active, 285 f.; adverbial, quantity, expressions of, 53, 164
274 f.; adjectival, 286 f,; passive, question forms, 21, 185
297 f.
passive voice, 299 f. R
past tense, 90; with aspects, 132;
past adverbial participle, 275; past reciprocal pronoun, see pronouns
adjectival participle, 286 f. reflexive pronoun, see pronouns
perfective-imperfective, see aspects reflexive verbs, see verb
permission, 162 relative pronoun, see pronouns
personal pronoun, see pronouns
“play,” 96
S
possesion, (to have), 54, 90f., 117
possessive pronoun, see pronouns
predicate noun, 26, 195 “say, speak, tell,” 141 f.
prepositional case, 30, 39 f., 75; after “seem, appear,” 152
prepositions, see prepositions; ir¬ single action (perfective), 139
regular in -y, 150 “speak,” 141 f.
prepositions, list, see Appendix II; in stress, 8; effect on vowels, 14
time expressions, 108 f., 186, 266; “study,” 183
review table, 98; review and sup¬ subjunctive, 264 f., 273 f.
plement list, 255; with genitive, subtraction, 254
53, 82 f., 97, 255; with dative, suffixes, of the noun, see Appendix I,
60 f., 255; with accusative, 45 f., 89, 306 f.; of the pronoun, 262 f.
396 INDEX
superlative, compound, 226; simple, y

225 f.; with Bcero, Bcex, 226
syllabification, 7 verb, aspects, 130 f.; conditional, 264;
conjugation of first, 34 f.; second,
T 68 f.; double infinitive (indetermin¬
ate, determinate), 141, 238 f.; em¬
“teach, learn,” 96, 183 phatic (lack of), 21; imperative,
“tell,” 141 107 f., 142, 208, irregular forms,
tense, present: first conjugation, 34 f.; 107 f.; participles, active, 285 f.;
second conjugation, 68 f.; past, 90, adverbial, 274; adjectival, 286f.; pas¬
132; future, 116; with aspects, 132; sive, 297 f.; passive voice, 299;
see also general vocabulary for “ir¬ progressive (lack of), 21; ques¬
regular” conjugations of specific tion forms, 21; reflexive verbs,
verbs. (Arabic numerals in gen¬ 125 f.; subjunctive, 264 f., 273 f.;
eral vocabulary following the verb tenses, see conjugations, tenses;
refer to the page where its con¬ verbs of motion (listing), 245 f.;
jugation is found.) see also general vocabulary for “ir¬
time expressions, hour, day and regular” conjugations of specific
week, 108; clock, 174; date, 186; verbs. (Arabic numerals in general
definite time-duration, 108; month vocabulary following the verb refer
and year, 265 f.; translation of “at, to the page where its conjugation
for, in, per, on, within,” 108; see is found.)
also age and date expressions vowels, soft and hard, 11; mutation
tense sequence, 265 rules, 31; vowel-stress, 14
“than,” 218
“the . . . the,” 218 W
“there is, are,” 41; “there is, are, no,
not,” 52 “wait,” with genitive, 82
“want, wish,” present tense, 76; with
U genitive, 82
wish, expressed by the subjunctive,
unreal condition, 264 f. 273 f.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Additional Reading Units, 9, 18, 50, Appendix I, 306-312: Russian Poems;

65, 86, 102, 129, 146, 156, 180, 312-316: Text of Russian Songs;
201, 233, 247 316-319: Russian Proverbs and
Vocabulary Building Units, 62: Ad¬ Riddles
jectives and Adverbs juxtaposed; Appendix II, 320-321: Declension of
77: Time Expressions; 91: Expres¬ Nouns; 322-323; Noun Endings;
sions of Place; 109: Masculine and 324: Plural Endings of Russian
Feminine Nouns juxtaposed; 117: Nouns; 325: Declension of Ad¬
Nouns and Adjectives juxtaposed; jectives; 326: Declension of Pos¬
174: Perfective Verbs; 233: Table sessive Pronoun-Adjectives; 327:
of Adjectives; 245: Table of In¬ Numbers; 328-329: Summary of
determinate - Determinate Verbs; Rules of Case Requirements after
275: Table of Conjunctions; 287: Cardinal Numerals; 330: Preposi¬
Table of Active Participles; 299: tions; 331: Prepositions Used with
Table of Passive Participles; 300: More Than One Case; 332-333;
Typical Russian Word-Families Use of Prepositions with Their
INDEX 397
Cases in Time Expressions; 334- ing Past Tense Conjugations; 348-

335: Prepositional Prefixes; 336- 351: Verbs According to Their Per¬
340: The Verb (First and Second fective Aspect Formation; 352-
Regular Conjugation); 341-345: 353: Double Infinitive Verbs and
Verbs Arranged According to Their Compounds; 354: Formation
Their Typical Conjugational Pat¬ of Participles
terns; 346-347: Verbs with Vary¬

01.essentials of Russian Reading Conversation Grammar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

01.essentials of Russian Reading Conversation Grammar

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

01.essentials of Russian Reading Conversation Grammar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ESSENTIALS of

PRENTICE-HALL, INC., Englewood Cliffs, N. J.

PRENTICE HALL, INC.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS BOOK MAY

Catalog Card No.: 58-9831

First printing.June, 1958

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

This text is designed for classroom and individual instruction

I: Common Expressions and Idioms

The Questions (V) are especially designed to develop and test

1 Verb aspects are counted as one vocabulary unit.

indicate to the student some convenient means of attaining this

EIGHTEENTH LESSON . 158

TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON (Cent.)

INTRODUCTION HAW HEPBblH PA3rOBOP .... 18

The Russian alphabet—System of handwriting—Capitalization

The Russian alphabet as we know it now was established

1 This decree was based on a far more radical reform proposed

n. THE SYSTEM OP HANDWRITING

The system of Russian script as set forth in the “Table of

Russian Symbol English Sound Pronunciation

b. It is very important to set off the letters *Ms, Jt/

c. In rapid writing, the up and down strokes of M/. 'tTb,

e. Notice the difference between % and 'IXXAAyCp

In Russian only the first word of a sentence, a proper name

NOT capitalized in Russian are:

a. Words derived from proper names: IlyuiKHH but

b. Words designating nationality: pyccKHft, aiwepHKaueu.

The period, colon, comma, semicolon, question mark, ex¬

a. A comma must separate every subordinate clause from

b. The dash often replaces .quotation marks, especially

•— Oh aoiwa? (on doma?) “Is he at home?”

It is sufficient to remember that:

a. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the

Ka-uia (ka-sha) gruel we-Ha (zhe-na) wife

KOM-Ha-Ta (kom-na-ta) room

c. ft is never separated from the preceding vowel:

There is no simple set of workable rules on the position of

a. Read all Russian words given in the “Table of Russian

b. Read the following words:

6paT (brat) brother noHTa (pochta) mail

i it is advisable that the teacher read and repeat the exercises

KTO (kto) who

oh pa6oTaeT (on rabotayet) he works OH, fUlJimXiem,

ceHHac (seichas) now XXXvtOC,

VIII. ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN

1. Practice of the sounds JX and T

4. Practice of the sounds B and n

5. Practice of the sounds F, K, and X

7. Practice of the sounds H and U

The characteristic features of “unvoicing” and “palatali¬

I. PRINCIPAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION1

A. Russian vowels may be conveniently classified as soft

A soft vowel has the following characteristics:

1 For a fuller treatment see L. Stilman, Russian Alphabet and

B. Russian consonants may be conveniently classified

Voiced Consonants Voiceless Consonants li csonants

6 (as in boy) n (as in speak) ji (as in Zamp)

C. Typical changes in the sound value of consonants